Research completed October 2023

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5005

Executive summary

Introduction

Land use transformation (and related reductions in greenhouse gas emissions) will be necessary to achieve Scotland’s ambitions to reach net zero emissions by 2045 as well as biodiversity and climate change targets. A variety of support systems for land use transformation, such as financial support and advice, are already in place. This study aims to understand how and why land managers engage, or not, with these support systems. This helps inform how policy could be best deployed to accelerate the process of change.

Influences on land manager decision making

We found substantial evidence for land manager behaviour and decision making that influences engagement with support systems. Their decisions are determined by a range of interacting internal and external factors, primarily related to financial, practical and cultural influences, which can be enabling or restricting, such as:

  • personal values and knowledge
  • perceived loss of control
  • social norms/pressures
  • trust in sources of information and advice e.g. land agents
  • administrative burdens/transaction costs
  • financial incentives
  • awareness and understanding
  • clarity of the benefits of change.

Restrictive barriers are compounded by context specific factors that vary across individual businesses, such as tenure, business scale and biophysical constraints.

Findings

Overall, the public sector grant-giving support network is logical to use. Most schemes are accessed through the Rural Payments and Inspections Division (RPID) portal. Other schemes are straightforward with regard to procedures. The RPID portal only requires one set of login credentials to access a wide range of support systems. Support systems under this umbrella are easy to access and do not require additional login credentials.

The administrative burden associated with applying to schemes, i.e. form filling, is a barrier to engagement. Procedural support (i.e. form filling by an adviser) is widely available from both public and private advisory sources but requires additional resource to procure. This is distinct from practical support, such as site-specific implementation advice, which was frequently mentioned by stakeholders as key to facilitating the uptake of environmental management practices and yet less readily available.

Land managers often decide whether to engage with support and advice based on confidence in its source. For example, farmers are more likely to trust advisers or organisations that have a background in practical farming over those from a consulting or academic background.

Land managers in Scotland primarily access public funding support. Some access private finance to supplement their income or achieve specific goals. Those accessing private finance generally do it to avoid the conditionality of public funding support and retain operational control over the management of their land. Combining Agri-Environment Schemes and e.g. the Peatland Code is perceived as overly cumbersome, with interactions between schemes, different application dates and the need to demonstrate additionality proving complex.

The breadth of support sources is confusing for some land managers. Better alignment, or at least signposting between sources, would be helpful. Ideally this needs to be via people as well as (rather than just) an online portal. This will enable land managers to choose the correct support more readily, according to their own circumstances.

Applicants would prefer administrative simplicity and greater flexibility. Therefore, efforts to streamline application and monitoring processes, reduce information burdens, widen application windows and vary contract lengths, are justifiable.

Administrative touch points and contractual constraints are only one influence on land manager behaviour. Improved accessibility and flexibility will not, by themselves, increase overall engagement with land use change. Other measures will also be needed such as attractive payment rates, sufficient technical advice and training, and management flexibility. Further research from workshops with potential support recipients, ideally out of peak summer work season, would help understand how future engagement can be maximised.

Abbreviations table

AECS

Agri-Environment Climate Scheme

ARE

Agriculture and Rural Economy Directorate

BPS

Basic Payment Scheme

ENFOR

Environment and Forestry Directorate

FAS

Farm Advisory Service

FGS

Forestry Grant Scheme

JHI

The James Hutton Institute

MLDT

Modern Limited Duration Tenancy

NFUS

National Farmers’ Union Scotland

NGO

Non-Governmental Organisation

LDT

Limited Duration Tenancy

LFA

Less Favourable Area

LFASS

Less Favourable Area Support Scheme

PCC

Peatland Carbon Code

QMS

Quality Meat Scotland

RPID

Rural Payments and Inspections Division

RSABI

Rural Payments and Services

RSPB

Royal Society for the Protection of Birds

WT

Woodland Trust

SAF

Single Application Form

SAOS

Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society

SCF

Scottish Crofting Federation

SEPA

Scottish Environment Protection Agency

SLE

Scottish Land and Estates

SLDT

Short Limited Duration Tenancy

SOPA

Scottish Organic Producers’ Association

SRUC

Scotland’s Rural and Agricultural College

SUSSS

Scottish Upland Sheep Support Scheme

SSBSS

Scottish Suckler Beef Support Scheme

STFA

Scottish Tennant Farmers’ Association

WCC

Woodland Carbon Code

Introduction

Rural land use in Scotland directly supports the national economy, rural communities, and local businesses. Sustainable land use holds a key role delivering Scotland’s biodiversity goals and response to climate change. Agriculture is the second largest source of greenhouse gas emissions in Scotland, behind the transport sector, with emissions largely coming from livestock and soils.[1] In order to achieve biodiversity recovery and climate mitigation and adaptation, agricultural transformation is required to reduce emissions, and capture carbon in vegetation and soils. A continued, long-term expansion and integration of regenerative agriculture, afforestation and peatland restoration will be necessary and is currently underway as part of the plan to achieve Scotland’s net zero targets.

This research was undertaken to gain a better understanding of the key influences that have a bearing on land manager decision making, including their motivations, what they want to achieve for their operation and their appetite for change.

The aims of the project were to map current support services across different land use sectors to inform our understanding of a land manager’s ability to make decisions and access funding and advice for different land uses. One of the key influences on land manager decision making is their awareness and engagement with support systems. “Support systems”, for the purpose of this report, refers to all sources of support that a land manager in Scotland could access to aid their management of their operation. This includes the following sources:

  • Public funding support (e.g. Agri-Environment Climate Scheme (AECS))
  • Private funding support (e.g. Woodland Carbon Code (WCC))
  • Procedural and practical support from advisors, both public and private (e.g. Farm Advisory Service (FAS))
  • Informal networks (Family, friends, and peers)

We looked at availability and links between existing and relevant land use information systems, support services, and current incentives for land use transformation which are directly related to achieving Net Zero and/or nature restoration.

Through stakeholder interviews and other evidence, we established where, when and how different rural land managers interact with the systems and services; we then collated the evidence for issues and barriers to access them. The results are presented using SWOT and PESTLES analysis, conclusions, and visualisations.

When we defined “land manager” we focussed our research on managers of agricultural land, including moorland, peatland and forestry, whether that be farmers, crofters, large estates or organisations such as NGOs.

Understanding land manager behaviour in relation to their awareness of, and drivers of actions that support (or not) environmental outcomes is complex. Decisions and outcomes in this area are a result of multiple interactions between agronomic, cultural, social and psychological factors, all of which sit within the national, regional and specific site context (Mills et al, 2016). Therefore, understanding land manager engagement with current support systems will prove equally complex.

To further our understanding, we carried out an evidence review of the literature. This informed the design of typical land manger archetypes to facilitate the analysis of how specific sectors in Scotland are engaging and accessing support systems. Please see Table 6 in Appendix B for the longlist of archetypes. The long list was used to gather further data, through stakeholder interviews, from both support providers and receivers, across the spectrum of land manager sectors in Scotland. Twenty-five stakeholder interviews were conducted, with participants ranging from support recipients such as crofters and farmers, to support providers and academics. Views from the agriculture, forestry and peatland sectors were captured. Attitudes relating to land managers’ ability and willingness to engage with support systems as well as what determines the level of engagement with these systems were explored. This included the types of support available, their pros and cons, as well as whether they were felt to be accessible, credible and available.

Reflecting its relative prominence within public expenditure and land-based businesses in rural areas, agriculture dominates much of published literature on land-use support. This evidence was supplemented by feedback from stakeholder interviewees, including individuals representing other sectors. The final step was to map the experience of six chosen, prioritised, archetypes in more detail. These are presented in section 6.2.

Full details of our methodology can be found in Appendix A-D.

This study included:

  • Carrying out a rapid literature review. (methodology in Appendix D)
  • Identifying and mapping the most prominent existing and relevant land use information systems, support services and the current incentives for land use transformation directly related to achieving Net Zero and/or nature restoration. (Appendix A)
  • Developing typologies for land managers who might engage with these systems. (Appendix B)
  • Agreeing a discussion guide (see Appendix C) for semi-structured interviews.
  • Identifying a list of target candidate interviewees who were chosen to represent recipients of support, providers of information and advice, and academic experts. (Appendix C)
  • Analysis of where, when, and how land managers interact with the systems and services.
  • Presentation of evidence for issues and barriers to access these systems and services from the stakeholder interviews.

Introduction to land manager decision making

The literature is consistent in reporting that land manager decision making, regarding the use and management of their land, and therefore support system engagement, is influenced by both internal and external factors which combine to create individual circumstances. (Buamgart-Getz et al. 2012; Mills et al. 2016; Barnes et al. 2021; Conti et al. 2021; Thompson et al. 2021a).

These factors affect a land manager’s willingness and ability to adopt environmental management practices. The importance of this is underlined by the fact that climate is the most important element of agricultural productivity in many instances (Scottish Government, 2012). Therefore, once bio-physical conditions (an external factor in itself) have determined what management measures are suitable for a land manager, the wider range of internal/external factors will influence engagement with specific support systems offering funding, information, advice, and training. Table 1 below displays the different internal and external factors that influence land manager decision making, as identified by Thompson et al. (2021a).

Table 1 – Internal and external factors influencing land manager decision making – (adapted from Thompson et al. (2021a)).

 

Factor

Description

Internal

Risk perception

Extent to which a land manager is open to changing practices.

Values

Extent to which a land manager has a positive view of environmental measures.

Knowledge

Extent to which a land manager understands how to implement environmental measures and how these compare to other potential land uses such as recreation, housing, renewables etc.

Socio demographic, age and location

Specific land manager characteristics, including sociodemographic background, education, age and location.

External

Funding, cost and policy indicators

Access to funding (e.g. subsidies, private investment), cost of changing practices and perception/stability of the policy environment.

Land characteristics

Key characteristics, such as farm size, tenure, type (arable, mixed, dairy etc.), biophysical condition, whether there is currently active land management.

Support system accessibility

Complexity and accessibility of support systems, i.e. how complicated support systems are perceived.

Knowledge availability, sharing, and awareness

Land manager knowledge of alternative practices and preference of farmer on method of engaging with wider network and support systems (verbal, formal etc.)

Cultural

Networks and connectivity, social norms (what is perceived to be right and wrong) and influence of peer group.

The way these factors affect and interplay with land manager willingness – and their ability to adopt environmental practices – are shown in Figure 1 (after Mills et al. (2016)). For example, a land manager with limited resources, reliant on informal networks of support, with a strong anti-change personal attitude is unlikely to engage with environmental practices and support systems. Another land manager with higher access to finance, human and social capital, more formalised support networks and a positive outlook on environmental practices would be more likely to engage.

Figure 1 – Factors influencing land manager engagement, willingness and ability to adopt (from Mills et al. 2016).

These examples are clearly extreme ends of the spectrum. Landowners will all have a unique set of factors that influence their decision making when it comes to adopting environmental practices and engaging with specific support systems. It is for this reason that understanding and predicting land manager environmental behaviour and engagement with support systems is complex.

It is important to note that most of the literature on the subject of land manager engagement/motivations with support systems focuses on farmers. For example, (Sutherland et al. 2011) who state “research into actor influences on land use change (attitudes, motivations and objectives held by individuals and groups) has traditionally focused on single sectors, particularly farming. Neither is the range of landholding entities addressed, as emphasis is typically on private owners.”

Some studies (Ambrose-Oji, 2019; Tyllianakis et al. 2023) have explored wider land manager engagement with support systems in detail, however the focus in the academic literature remains centred on farmers. The reasons behind this focus are not currently clear, but it may be due to the large engagement of the agricultural industry with support systems, particularly financial support.

We have attempted to fill this gap in the literature through targeted stakeholder interviews with individuals representing land managers outside, as well as within, the agricultural industry.

Our evidence review has suggested that engagement with current support systems is primarily influenced by certain personal values and knowledge, perceived loss of control, excessive administrative burdens/transaction costs, a lack of credible financial incentives, a lack of awareness, understanding and clarity of the benefits of certain support schemes and social norms/pressures. These barriers are then further compounded by context specific factors that vary across individual businesses, such as tenure, business scale and biophysical constraints.

Land manager engagement with support systems is discussed in more detail in Section 6

Review of support systems

The next stage of this study attempted to identify the current land use support systems that land managers are engaging with in Scotland. This allowed us to map current support services across sectors in Scotland. Once we established the variety of support systems, we could begin to understand how land managers are interacting and engaging with these systems, whilst identifying key barriers and opportunities that could be used to inform future policy support.

We achieved this by firstly identifying a range of typical land manager archetypes in Scotland, followed by a review of all visible support systems identified through academic and grey literature review.

More detail on the types of support available is given in Appendix A Support in terms of funding is available from Government and the Private sector. Advice and information can be sought from direct Government sources plus third-party sources funded by Government (e.g. the Farm Advisory Service) but also independent third-party provision. Third sector, charities and Non-Governmental Organisations also provide landowners with advice and funding to undertake measures that align with their objectives.

Initial land use support system mapping

The infographic on the following page (Figure 2) displays a high-level mapping overview of the current land use support systems in Scotland and the extent to which land managers are engaging with each. Most land managers engage with government agency support and funding, with agricultural land managers doing this to a greater extent. This is mostly limited to schemes such as BPS and LFASS as these offer large rewards for less administrative actions compared to other schemes, such as AECS. Other land managers are more likely to be engaging with corporate buyers and private sector sources of support, such as emerging natural capital opportunities.

Figure 2 demonstrates clearly that the land manager support network in Scotland is a complex entity, with different land managers drawing from a wide range of support sources. Whilst it has not been possible to quantify the exact support flows between support providers and support receivers, we have provided an indication of the overall network and flow of support in Scottish Agriculture, helping us map current land manager engagement with support systems.

Figure 2 – Land use support system providers in Scotland. Source: Adapted from Sutherland et al. (2023)

Stakeholder views on engagement with support systems

It was recognised from the outset that the results of the evidence review must be calibrated against the lived experience of key stakeholders. We were able to conduct 25 interviews, and had scheduled to supplement this with additional workshops, but it proved very difficult to gain substantive input from planned workshops due to the timing overlap with the peak summer workload alongside harvesting.

We have captured the results of the stakeholder feedback below. This should be read alongside the review of the literature which is presented in section 7. Whilst there are significant similarities between the evidence from the literature review and stakeholder perceptions from the interviews, we recognise that this evidence would be usefully supplemented by a more in-depth form of action research with a wider stakeholder group, in particular potential support recipients, which would help to deliver more substantive results.

Factors influencing land managers’ decisions.

Stakeholder interviewees identified many factors influencing the ability and willingness of land managers to change management practices and/or land use patterns. Although varying in terms of emphasis and specific examples offered, there was a high degree of agreement across stakeholders (and consistency with the literature) regarding the main categories of (interacting) influences, which can be summarized as follows:

Confidence and understanding

Land management involves a range of tasks requiring both practical skills (e.g. handling livestock and machinery) but also organizational (e.g. resource allocation) and strategic (e.g. business planning). Changing land management practices and/or land use patterns requires expanding this skill set. However, not all land managers currently have the necessary skills, leading to many having a low understanding of how to change and low confidence in abilities to change successfully. Conflicting messages about the definitions, relative merits and compatibility of different practices (e.g. afforestation, regenerative agriculture) cause significant confusion, reinforcing an underlying wariness of changing unnecessarily.

Indeed, stakeholders were concerned that basic awareness amongst many land managers of requirements for change under both future agricultural policy, but also private supply-chain pressures, is still very low. Clearer and more consistent messaging from government and industry leaders would help, particularly if it was accompanied by more detail on practical support measures, including funding levels, the provision of information, advice and training, and any implications for future eligibility for land-related tax breaks and other public funding sources.

Resource constraints

Although any given parcel of land can be used for a variety of purposes, its underlying natural capital and biophysical characteristics (e.g. climate, topography, soils) exert a significant influence over its inherent suitability for different uses. Consequently, land managers do not all face the same land use possibilities to deliver particular ecosystem services. The Less Favoured Area (LFA) designation recognizes this in agricultural production terms but variation in suitability to deliver other ecosystem services is also recognized through various environmental designations (and indeed spatial targeting of agri-environment measures).

Farm type provides a convenient, albeit crude, indicator of likely flexibility in agricultural land use, with many hill and upland livestock farms being particularly constrained. The JHI Agricultural Land Capability Map (and equally the forestry suitability map) offers a more refined indication, but greater use of maps to categorise potential to deliver wider, environmental services would be helpful. For example, High Nature Value (HNV) farming.

Beyond biophysical constraints, farm businesses are also constrained by the availability and quality of other resources – in particular, working capital, equipment and labour. Stakeholders stressed that many farm businesses operate on very slim margins and are risk averse, limiting the scope for experimentation and investment in new management practices or forms of land use. Financial support can help to overcome this, as can support scheme contracts’ length and flexibility. However, labour scarcity and the relentless nature of farming often leave little spare time to devote to engaging with the process of change.

Geographical remoteness and/or poor communications connectivity can add further challenges. So can small scale – smaller businesses with fewer resources (especially labour) typically lack both the economies of scale and flexibility available to larger businesses to accommodate/experiment with change. This limits their ability to be creative and do something different. Some larger businesses have recruited in-house expertise and/or they directly commission academic and other consultants, particularly in relation to emerging nature-based solutions and rewilding exercises.

Transaction costs

The transaction costs of seeking information, advice, training, and external funding to implement change can be significant. To make it easy for all applicants, sources of information, advice, training and funding should be easy to locate. Administrative processes for applications, monitoring and reporting should be simple and accessible, including in their choice of language and terminology.

Stakeholders acknowledged that accountability for public expenditure necessarily requires a degree of bureaucratic oversight. However, they expressed concern that the complexity of some funding schemes[2] was a deterrent to some applicants, including those with little spare time and/or an unfamiliarity with administrative processes. This phenomenon was described as ‘form anxiety’. The difficulties of coordinating across multiple sources of information, advice and training were recognized, and it was suggested that clearer signposting and the use of one-stop-shops would be welcome.

Smaller businesses lacking the staff and/or finance to hire specialist advisors may be particularly affected by transaction costs, facing a proportionately greater burden than larger businesses. For example, there is often a fixed cost element to application processes regardless of the level of funding sought and having to seek information directly rather than being able to delegate to staff can have a high opportunity cost.

Tenure

Farm tenure exerts a direct influence over land managers’ ability to undertake change, particularly between different land uses. Specifically, whilst owner-occupiers have the freedom to choose how they manage their land, tenants are constrained by the terms of their lease. The degree of restriction varies across different types (e.g. length) of tenancy, with crofting tenure adding some further complexities, particularly in relation to common grazing.

In most cases, agricultural tenancies restrict the range of land use activities permitted. For example, afforestation and non-agricultural enterprises are typically precluded from leases by default (although may be agreed via negotiation). Moreover, non-agriculturally productive parcels of land (e.g. pre-existing woodland, riparian habitats) are often excluded from the area covered by a lease. Consequently, the ability of many tenants to implement and benefit from land use change is currently constrained.

However, some stakeholders believed that the issues around tenure constraints had become better understood in recent years and were hopeful that the forthcoming Agriculture Bill would address many of them.

Motivations and norms

Beyond the practical constraints suggested above that influence a land manager’s ability to change, willingness to change is also affected by various factors. In particular, by an individual land manager’s attitude towards and motivation for land management and by cultural norms held by family, friends and peer groups.

Land managers need to perceive how change fits with business viability and continuity. Some land managers (e.g. rewilding estates, NGOs) may be motivated to undertake change primarily by seeking environmental improvements. Others may be more motivated by the traditional farming values centred around food production, and they be more fundamentally opposed to activities perceived as incompatible with growing or rearing consumable produce. The latter is particularly relevant to debates around afforestation and (to a lesser extent) peatland restoration.

Many land managers are starting from a mainstream farming perspective, although not all are; other groups are perhaps more open to change such as community groups, foresters and horticultural producers. Stakeholders suggested that variation in willingness to change was likely to be significant across the full population of land managers and would complicate any targeting of encouragement to change.

Stakeholders also noted that willingness to change could ultimately be influenced by financial pressures, whether via public finding or market signals, but that sustainable change would require cultural shifts – winning hearts and minds. This implies a need for clear industry leadership backed-up by the provision of information, advice and training plus (probably) encouragement for generational renewal. Negative perceptions of bureaucracy and of support payments simply flowing to advisers (a ‘consultants charter’) are widespread.

Types and sources of support

Stakeholders identified different types of support for land managers, distinguishing funding from other forms of support.[3]

Funding

Funding was further divided into public and private, although the emphasis was very much upon public funding. Public funding for land management is dominated by agricultural support, notably decoupled area payments plus limited voluntary coupled support. Significant funding is also available for forestry and peatland restoration, plus wider agri-environmental schemes, innovation funds and various capital grant schemes. Public funding is also available to land-based businesses from other sources, such as the Enterprise Networks (see Table 2 for listing).

Stakeholders regarded public funding as essential to achieving management and land use change; in particular to offer financial incentives (or at least reduce disincentives) to make change worthwhile and to encourage any necessary capital investments. However, it was noted that inflation continues to erode the real terms value of public funding, decreasing the leverage that it has over management decisions.

Private funding for changing land management is also available. For example, there are high-profile cases of new and large landowners essentially self-funding and/or harnessing emerging environmental funding mechanisms. The latter include the Woodland Carbon Code and the Peatland Code.

However, the accessibility of such mechanisms to all land managers (e.g. tenants, common grazing, smaller holdings, community owners) is imperfect. Moreover, considerable uncertainty exists over the future value of carbon credits, and the possibility of claims over them by downstream supply-chain partners. Consequently, notwithstanding Scottish Government aspirations to increase private funding, stakeholders expressed some scepticism about the potential of private funding to replace public funding.

Non-funding support

Stakeholders also sub-divided non-funding support, into procedural support to help land managers navigate bureaucratic processes (e.g. advice on how to complete application forms, enrol in training programmes) and support to help with actual activities on-the-ground (e.g. training in new management practices). Both were regarded as necessary, but the degree of procedural support required relates back to concerns about transaction costs.

Procedural support tends to either take the form of information and general advice provided by the source of any funding, or the form of professional assistance to comply with application and reporting processes. For example, public funding is accompanied by online (and sometimes print) public guidance material plus online, phone and (sometimes) face-to-face advice on (e.g.) eligibility criteria, payment rates and evidence requirements. Private sources (e.g. land agents, consultants) often mirror this, but also offer further hands-on assistance to gather necessary data and complete paperwork plus more bespoke advice for individual land managers.

Practical support is similarly available in different forms from a variety of sources. Indeed, stakeholders emphasized the huge variety of forms and sources (see Table 2 for listing). For example, information is available via print and social media from public (e.g. Scottish Government, NatureScot, SEPA, Universities), private (e.g., levy bodies, consultants, input suppliers) and third-sector (e.g. NGOs) providers and advice can be offered one-to-one or one-to-many[4] either online or face-to-face. Moreover, face-to-face may involve a simple meeting or a site visit or demonstration. Vocational training (e.g. via Lantra or colleges) tends to involve face-to-face events, but online training can suit some strategic and planning type skills development. Stakeholders suggested that the breadth of support sources was confusing for some land managers and better alignment or at least signposting between sources would be helpful, although signposting ideally needs to be via people as well as (rather than just) an online portal, for land managers to define the correct source of support for their own individual circumstances.

Importantly, stakeholders also stressed the role of informal sources of information and advice. For example, family and friends plus unrelated business professionals (e.g. accountants, vets). Peer group networks (local but also international) of like-minded people can also be important – indeed some stakeholders identified these as particularly relevant for emerging practices such regenerative agriculture and agro-forestry which some stakeholders regarded as not well-served by more formal support mechanisms. Peer networking can be encouraged through trained facilitators and funding.

Availability, accessibility and relevance

Uptake of information, advice and training requires land managers to trust the source and to see the relevance of what is being offered. This poses a demand-side challenge in persuading land managers of the need for change and relates back to points made above regarding the need for clear, consistent messaging from government and industry leaders to set the tone – particularly in relation to strategic business skills and new technical skills.

However, it also poses supply-side challenges in terms of the availability and accessibility of information, advice and training. Government only has leverage of this through either direct provision itself, or funding of third parties to provide support. Stakeholders noted that availability was already patchy geographically and in terms of specialist topics. Moreover, they were not confident that public funding levels would be sufficient to cover all future requirements – implying a need to prioritise particular topics or groups of land managers, and/or to rely more upon online and one-to-many methods (despite experiential, hands-on learning being viewed as more effective).

Citing diminishing returns and the 80/20 rule[5], some questioned the merits of trying to accommodate all ‘hard to reach’ groups (e.g. smaller producers, new entrants, women, the very young, those with poor mental health). However, the Women in Agriculture initiative was cited as a good example of targeting.

Furthermore, even if future funding was sufficient, stakeholders were not confident that sufficient appropriate advisors would be available in the short-term. Trust depends on perceived credibility and, rightly or wrongly, in many cases this requires advisors to have agricultural backgrounds – yet the types of management and land use changes required extend beyond agriculture. This implies a need to upskill existing advisors but also to recruit advisors from different backgrounds – either to work in teams or (hopefully) to be accepted as credible by land managers.

Stakeholders offered a variety of solutions to this problem, including allowing the Farm Advisory Service (FAS) to evolve in terms of its modes of operation and topic overage but also to sub-contract other independent and/or specialist advisers (including existing land managers) as appropriate. Deployment of RPID staff to offer advice as well as conducting inspections was also suggested, reminiscent of previous policy eras and also, to some extent, emulating more recent practice in forestry and catchment management.

The use of facilitators rather than advisors was supported by some stakeholders, reflecting (possibly) easier recruitment (technical expertise is less essential than people skills) and perceived advantages of facilitated experiential learning rather than expert instruction.

It was also suggested that advisors should be included more formally in policy design and monitoring processes since they are well placed to offer insights into how ideas will be received and implemented on-the-ground. It was noted that total formal advisory capacity includes those working for input (e.g. seed, feed, fertiliser) suppliers as well as those aligned with FAS or working independently.[6]

Table 2 – Cited examples of support

Category

Funding (for investment, working capital and income support)

Info/advice/training (via print & social media, online, telephone, face-to-face, demonstrations, one-to-one, one-to-many etc).

Private, independent

Loans.

Equity partners. Crowdfunding.

Impact bonds.

Carbon markets.

SAC Consulting, ADAS, Land Agents.

Forest Carbon. Scottish Agronomy.

Smaller independent consultancies (e.g., 5 AGM, ScotFWAG).

Vets. Accountants. Contractors.

Ringlink Scotland.

Private, tied

Input suppliers and marts (credit lines).

Downstream buyers (credit lines, grants).

Feed/Fertiliser/Seed/Machinery suppliers.

Banks.

Downstream supply-chain.

Public, national

Ag and forestry support/grants.

Research grants.

Peatland Action grants.

Scottish Government. SEPA.

Forestry & Land Scotland. FAS. Scottish Land Fund.

Public, local

 

RPID Area Offices; RLUPs; National Parks.

Research body

Grants.

SRUC, JHI, Mordun, Universities

EPI-Agri

NGO

Woodland Trust grants.

RSPB, Wildlife Trusts, Soil Association.

Lantra.

Land manager organization, formal

 

QMS. AHDB. SAOS. Confor. RICS.

STFA. NFUS. SLE. SCF. NBA. NSA. DMG.

Monitor Farms.

Land manager organization, informal

 

Peer-to-peer.

Innovative Farmers. Pasture for Life. Nature Friendly Farming Network.

Neighbours/personal network

Business partners.

Neighbours. Business partners.

Family

Friends and family.

Non-farming income.

Inter-generational.

Generic business support

Loans.

Enterprise Networks, Business Gateway. Local Authorities. Banks

Land manager experiences of support systems

As part of this research project, we attempted to identify and map all existing and relevant land use information systems, support services and the current incentives for land use transformation directly related to achieving Net Zero and/or nature restoration. An outline of all the support schemes identified can be found in Appendix A. We then collected additional information on a sub-set of current support systems administered by the Scottish Government, to explore specific touch points for land managers. To frame this exercise, we firstly mapped the main agencies within the Scottish government that are responsible for the relevant land manager support systems (Figure 3).

Figure 3 underlines that multiple agencies are responsible for providing and administrating support to land managers in Scotland. This has the effect of increasing administrative burdens for land managers if systems across agencies are not in sync in terms of data collection and system operation.

Figure 3 – Agencies responsible for land manager support in Scottish Government

Insights from the literature

We can gain significant insight from published grey literature about where, when, and how land managers interact with support systems and services. There are three highly relevant published pieces of work. The first is the RPID customer satisfaction survey (RPID, 2021), where RPID customers gave their views on the application process and how it could be improved. 2147 customers filled in this survey, providing a robust sample size to gather insights from. The second piece of work is the NatureScot Research Report 1254 (NatureScot, 2021), where biodiversity outcomes were evaluated. This included a quick survey of applicants’ views on the application process. The third piece of work is ‘Doing Better Initiative to Reduce Red Tape for Farmers & Rural Land Managers’ (SRUC, 2014) where regulations (or their implementation) that impinge on business decisions were identified and solutions were put forward to address these.

Administrative burdens

The general literature review (reported in Section 7) and Stakeholder views (reported in Section 5) revealed that the administrative burden and ‘form anxiety’ associated with support schemes can significantly affect land manager engagement with support systems.

We can relate this to the RPID survey responses, in particular the question ‘Applications made to other schemes in the last twelve months’. Interestingly, 77% of RPID customers stated that they did not make another application to another non-SAF (Outside BPS, LFASS, AECS, FGS) scheme in the last 12 months.

Groups who had not made another scheme application are compared below:

  • More owners (80%) than tenants (74%) and business partners (70%);
  • More other businesses (84%) and farms (79%) than crofts (73%);
  • More older (84%) than younger (66%) customers; and
  • More customers that completed their SAF with support (81%) than those that completed it on their own (74%).

This would suggest that for the majority of RPID customers, the main support systems they are engaging with fall within the bracket of the SAF administrative process. It appears that many land managers are only engaging with SAF and not applying for schemes outwith this (e.g. AECS, Peatland Action etc.). Although it is difficult to draw conclusions from this question alone, the supporting evidence from this report would suggest that the administrative burdens are a considerable factor in preventing land managers from engaging with other support systems outside their SAF application.

For instance, the RPID survey found that a substantial number of RPID customers felt that application processes were too complicated, or the application forms were too long or complicated. When asked what customers’ main reasons for dissatisfaction with information from RPID, the main two reasons given were:

  • The application process is too complicated (53%)
  • Application forms are too long/complicated (52%)

Furthermore, in the 2013 RPID customer satisfaction survey, the most common reason for dissatisfaction with information from RPID was ‘not enough information being available’ (29%). This suggests that the administrative burden involved with applying for rural funding schemes has become a more significant influence on farmer decisions in the period between 2013-2021.

The challenges of administrative burdens are further reinforced when customers were asked about the ‘aspects of RPID’s performance customers would like to see improved’ where the most popular answer was ‘application forms are easy to complete’ (42%). One respondent was quoted:

“Website and all forms etc. need to be rewritten and simplified. They need to be clear and concise and user friendly. Use words not acronyms. Use far fewer words.”

We find further evidence to support this in SRUC (2014) where a list of recommendations is provided to the Scottish Government on how to reduce red tape burdens placed on farmers and land managers. Recommendation 5 states that an IT system should be developed that reduces the form filling burden for farmers and land managers – reducing administration costs. This recommendation also suggests that a full review of data requests from farmers and land managers is undertaken to ensure that duplication is minimised.

Despite this point being raised in 2014, the findings from the RPID survey suggest that from 2013 to 2021 administrative burdens on land managers applying for government support schemes have increased.

Support required to access funding

There is also substantial evidence that suggests that many land managers in Scotland require support to submit applications to financial support systems. Evidence for this is provided by the RPID survey, where the following three points were cited as the reasons why customers needed some support with their Single Application Form submission:

  • Personal (e.g., first time completing form, learning disability) – 43%
  • Mistakes (e.g., want to avoid mistakes) – 41%
  • Forms (e.g., difficulty accessing forms, take too long to complete) – 34%

This would suggest that many land managers find the current administrative processes involved with submitting applications to support systems a significant barrier to engagement and require support to ensure that they can access these. The response to this question suggests that the current complexity is leading landowners to obtain procedural support to complete their applications.

Of those that are using procedural support to complete applications, SRUC agents are the most common support agents being used (48% of cases). Interestingly, other business (not farmers) used commercial agents to support applications 51% of the time.

Land manager support system mapping

This section presents three infographics (drawn from RPID survey data and our findings from the previous sections of this study) representing the typical land manager pathways to access agricultural support systems in Scotland. Each infographic is broken down into four main sections (from left to right). The first section, motivations, highlights the broad overarching motivations that a land manager is looking to achieve within their business objectives. This includes motivations such as ‘business support’ and ‘woodland establishment’. The following section highlights the agency touchpoints that a land manager will engage with if they decide to follow one or multiple of the previous motivations. This includes both the agency (such as RPID) and the specific scheme that relates to that motivation (such as the Forestry Grant Scheme for Woodland establishment). The third section shows the administrative actions that are associated with engaging with each different support scheme, including information such as what IT system is used (e.g. RPID portal) and if support is generally needed by a third party. The final section details what kind of login credentials are needed for each administrative action and if these are shared or unique for each scheme.

Figure 4 represents all the pathways open to land managers, providing an overview of the support system landscape. Figure 5 highlights the pathways that a typical farming land manager could take. Figure 6 highlights the pathway that a non-farming land manager, such as an estate, could take. The following sub-sections draw out some of the key findings and help understand where, when and how land managers interact with support systems and services.

Figure 4 – land manager support system map

This figure presents an overview of all the motivations, touchpoints and administrative actions that a land manager could undertake if they were to take certain pathways. Key points from this infographic include:

  • It appears that land managers only need to have one login credential to access all support services via RPID (Rural Payments and Inspections Division) in Scotland. This is the RPID portal login, where land managers can access the SAF, AECS application, SSBSS & SUSSS form and FGS application. For those schemes not under the umbrella of the RPID portal (Peatland Action), online submissions are required that do not require login credentials (FAS applications still require RPID Business Reference Number however). This would suggest that login credentials do not pose a significant barrier to land manager engagement with support systems.
  • Regarding touch points, RPID is the agency that land managers are most likely to be engaging with for funding. This is because the most popular support schemes (BPS, LFASS, AECS etc.) are administrated through this agency. Other support schemes that are not administrated by RPID, such as the Forestry Grant Scheme, are still accessed through the RPID portal. FAS and Peatland Action support schemes are accessed outwith the RPID portal, but require relatively simple administrative inputs to complete.
  • Overall, the RPID public sector support system network is administratively logical from a high-level perspective. The majority of schemes are accessed through the RPID portal, and those that are not are procedurally straightforward in terms of required steps. However, the level of detailed information needed by certain schemes makes accessing a wide range of these extremely challenging for some land managers in Scotland (recalling from section 5 that land managers differ widely with respect to skills and confidence to tackle administrative processes and implement management changes). For example, AECS applications are considered very complex due to the level of information that needs to be provided along with the lengthy application form/process. Furthermore, Forestry Grant Scheme applications require a level of detail that is beyond most typical land managers’ (farmers etc.) knowledge, leading to a reliance on external specialists to complete applications.
  • On the whole, this would suggest that the complexities in land manager support systems, including the level of detail needed for specific applications are reducing engagement with systems that could encourage improved environmental management practices. This does not take into account private schemes, such as the Woodland Carbon Code, which would only add to this complexity.
  • All other things being equal, administrative simplicity is preferable to complexity and (for applicants) greater flexibility is preferred. Hence efforts to, for example, streamline application and monitoring processes, reduce information burdens, widen application windows and vary contract lengths, are justifiable. However, accountability for public expenditure requires a degree of bureaucracy to ensure that funds are disbursed and used as intended, and simplicity and flexibility for applicants may impose additional complexity for administrators. Consequently, there are trade-offs, and the scope for improvements in process design alone will typically be limited.
  • This implies that other steps need to be taken to improve accessibility, including the provision of additional procedural information and advice – which necessarily incurs additional public administrative costs, raising familiar questions regarding the appropriate degree of such assistance and whether it should be universal or targeted at specific groups.
  • Moreover, administrative touch-points and contractual constraints are only one influence on land manager behaviour, implying that improved accessibility and flexibility will not by itself increase overall engagement with land use change. Other measures will also be needed. For example, attractive payment rates, sufficient technical advice and training, and support for capital investments.

Figure 5 – farmer decision pathway map

This figure presents an indicative pathway through the support systems that would be taken by a land manager (farmer) who does not have any specific environmental goals (woodland establishment, peatland restoration) but would like to improve the efficiency of their operation and reduce their overall impact on the environment. It is important to stress that this pathway is indicative, and it is not intended to represent all farmers in all locations. In reality, as explained in the literature review in section 7 later, all land managers will have a unique set of motivations, barriers and opportunities regarding land management practices that will affect their engagement with support systems. The findings from this infographic are summarised below:

  • The majority of farming land managers will be engaging with support systems that are accessed through the SAF process (BPS etc.) as these are familiar and provide a high level of financial support for a relatively small administrative and practical input.
  • Land managers of this type could also be engaging with AECS. This provides the land manager with an opportunity to improve the economic performance of their operations, whilst also benefitting the environment. Land managers will often choose options that require the smallest practical/administrative inputs compared to financial returns. Many land managers will require support from a third party to complete their AECS application due to the complexity of information required.
  • Many land managers of this type will rely on FAS and other agents, along with informal networks, to provide procedural support to their applications to support systems. This is because farming land managers are often time-poor due to their focus on practical activities on farm, relying on others to assist with the administrative processes of applying to support schemes.

Figure 6 – Non-farmer decision pathway map

This figure presents an indicative pathway through the support systems that would be taken by a land manager (non-farming) who is looking to diversify the use of their land, improving economic and environmental performance simultaneously. Again, it is important to stress that this pathway is indicative, and it is not intended to represent all non-farming land managers in all locations. In reality, as explained in the literature review, all land managers will have a unique set of motivations, barriers and opportunities regarding land management practices that will affect their engagement with support systems. The findings from this infographic are presented below:

  • Non-farming land managers are much more likely to engage with a wider range of support systems outwith those administered by RPID. This may be due to a mixture of different beliefs, fewer/different constraints on time and resources and more desire to diversify income streams to ensure financial resilience.
  • These land managers still often rely on external specialists to assist with certain elements of the application process, such as external forestry consults when applying for the Forest Grant Scheme.

Figure 4. Land manager support system map

Figure 5 – farmer decision pathway map (N.B. this is indicative and not intended to represent all farmers in all locations.)

Figure 6 – Non-farmer decision pathway map (N.B. this is indicative and not intended to represent all non-farming land managers in all locations.

Land manager attitudes – a review of the literature

Factors affecting engagement with support schemes

The literature review highlighted that internal factors such as attitudes, beliefs and personal values can have a significant impact on engagement with support systems.

Values and knowledge

It was recognised as far back as the 1970’s (Gasson 1973) that farmers do not always make financially rational decisions and that a range of social and intrinsic factors may also be prioritised; risk perception, values and knowledge are particularly influential in business decision making.

Land managers, in particular farmers, generally have a strong sense of self and are often influenced by their intrinsic values. This theme can be explored when looking at land manager attitudes towards planting trees on their land. Historic literature suggests that land managers have a resistance to creating woodland and forests, due to traditional values surrounding the belief that measurable productivity and growth are their traditional core purpose. Burton et al. (2008) explores the importance of the ‘good farmer’ identity, where social status and personal validation is derived by the evidence of delivering a skilled role on landscapes, i.e. livestock farming. Burton (2004) concludes that planting woodland and forest (afforestation), as well as engagement with other non-farming activities, represents both a loss in productive output and a symbolic loss of the opportunity to demonstrate farming skill and knowledge.

Farmers often resist afforestation on this basis, with agriculture and forestry historically being viewed as competitors for land rather than complementary land management practices that could be adopted as a sustainable approach to single proprietary unit diversification (Nicholls, 1969; Hopkins et al. 2017). Therefore, as many farmers perceive themselves to be farmers only, they are unwilling to change their practices due to inherent values that are tied to their current activity. This trend is likely to be seen across most landowners, not just restricted to afforestation, who will possess their own objectives, values and knowledge. For example, Moxey et al. (2021) note that the willingness to participate in peatland restoration schemes is highly variable, and that cultural ties shape attitudes towards restoration activities.

On the other hand, some land managers have intrinsic values that prioritise attempting to balance the need for a productive enterprise and protecting/enhancing the environment. Mills et al., (2017) found that it was common to hear that farmers were attempting to find a balance between production and environmental management, which were not always seen as conflicting needs.

This is reflected by the well documented finding that farmers (and land managers as a whole) are often willing to adopt environmental measures if they are perceived to increase the efficiency of on farm activities and therefore prove cost effective (Feliciano et al. 2014). For example, Farsted et al. (2022) noted that climate mitigation measures are mainly perceived as, treated as, and appreciated for offering farm-beneficial functions other than climate change mitigation by Norwegian farmers. This is also reflected in the Farm Practices Survey (2022) where 44% of farmers thought that reducing emissions would improve farm profitability and that the main motivation for farmers to take action to reduce GHGs on farm was that it was considered good business practice (84%).

Unsurprisingly, those land managers that are personally concerned/motivated to address climate change are more likely to be undertaking environmental management measures on their land. Those who are less engaged are likewise less likely to be undertaking environmental management practices.

Ease of transition, control and risk perception

An important aspect of land manager engagement with support systems is the perceived degree of control afforded by the available schemes and the ease of operational transition.

Academic literature in this area has focused on exploring the barriers that prevent uptake of Agri-Environment Schemes (AES), specifically focusing on schemes that restrict land manager’s ability to control and own the final product that is being delivered. For example, Lampkin et al. (2021) suggest that a top-down prescriptive approach of some AESs has failed to engage farmers in a way that would give them ownership of the delivery of environmental goods. This view is supported by Daxini et al. (2019) who found that the intention to follow a Nutrient Management Plan is primarily driven by perceived behavioural control.

Thompson et al. (2021) further suggest that farmers are more likely to participate in AESs if they retain some control over implementation, which requires flexible terms and regular monitoring. Therefore, it appears an important element of how land managers engage with current support systems involves analysing the degree to which each support system will affect operational control.

Another key internal factor that will influence land manager engagement with support systems is risk perception. Multiple sources suggest that the clarity and certainty of the final objective of any support scheme is important to its uptake and success. Analysis from the James Hutton Institute (Rajagopalan and Kuhfuss, 2017) suggested that the uptake of the Agri-Environment Climate Scheme (AECS) was restricted by the lack of flexibility in options, along with the uncertainty on the environmental outcome due to the influence of external factors outside of the land managers’ control (climate, pests etc.)

Kuhfuss et al. (2018) also suggest the success of AES may vary depending on the clarity of the objectives and perceived challenges in achieving them. For example, afforestation is a relatively easy concept to understand and is generally low risk, however peatland restoration is much more difficult conceptually and is seen as a higher risk option. Indeed, peatland restoration may seem to be of high risk because UK peatlands are at the southern limit in the northern hemisphere and therefore at risk due to anticipated climatic changes.

The tolerance of land manager to the inherent risks that are involved with engaging with support schemes that require alterations in management practices is an important factor in determining uptake.

Socio-demographic, age and education

The traditional view within the literature is that older land managers are less willing to change land management practices and that younger and more educated farmers are more willing to adopt new practices and engage with environmental support schemes. Sutherland et al. 2016; Mills et al. 2016; Brown, 2019)

This is often supported by evidence that younger people have a higher degree of environmental concern, risk tolerance and openness to new practices (Dessart et al. 2019). Therefore, younger land managers may be more able to engage with support systems and understand the requirements and trade-offs involved. Benni et al. (2022) reported that the age and education of farmers was not found to affect time requirements to fill in administrative burdens. This suggests that the transaction costs associated with support systems does not interplay with age and education levels of applicants.

When analysing the factors behind farmers’ adoption of ecological practices, Thompson et al. (2023) found that socio-economic factors were insignificant more often than they were significant. Despite these findings, Tyllianakis and Martin-Ortega (2021) argue that the evidence base suggests that wealthier land managers stand to gain more than less wealthy land managers in enrolling in AESs. The impact of socio-economic and demographic factors on land manager engagement is therefore likely to vary considerably across different sectors and organisational structures.

Engagement and trust of official advice vs. informal networks

Due to the rise of information available (mainly through the expansion of digital services), answers can be found to many real-world and agricultural issues and questions online. Rust et al. (2021) suggest that farmers have previously often relied on in-person advice from traditional ‘experts’, such as agricultural advisors, to inform farm management practices. Sutherland et al. (2013) stress the importance of the perceived credibility of sources of advice. This view is supported by Daxini et al. (2019) who found that trust in technical sources of information (e.g. advisor and discussion group) is found to be a more influential determinant of farmers’ attitude, subjective norm and perceived behavioural control than trust in social information sources (e.g. family and the media).

Nonetheless, Birner et al. (2006) and Sutherland et al. (2022, 2023) highlight the breadth of sources of information, advice and training utilised by land managers, encompassing family and friends, peer groups, accountants, vets, input suppliers, private consultants, NGOs and public sector bodies, accessed in different modes including via print and social media, online, one-to-one meetings, group meetings and events/demonstrations.

This is discussed further by Rust et al. (2021), who suggest that farmers are now changing their information sources due to the rise of online sources of knowledge and advice, foregoing traditional ‘expert’ advice in preference for peer-generated information. They found that farmers regularly use online sources to access soil information and often changed practices based on information from social media. Results from their survey suggested that farmers placed more trust in other farmers and peer networks rather than traditional ‘experts’, particularly those from academic and government institutions, who they believed were not empathetic with the farmers’ needs.

This could be further compounded by many farmers deciding not to engage with advisory services at all. Dunne et al. (2019) found that almost one-third of farmers in Ireland were not using extension services and a further third had contracts with private sector and public sector advisors.

Research from the James Hutton Institute (Hopkins et al. 2020) also found that new entrants to farming are less likely to engage with subsidies and support systems than existing farmers in the sector. In particular, new entrants did not think that the ‘official’ Farm Advisory Service (FAS) and the Scottish Government were helpful when starting their enterprise. This finding is mirrored by Labarthe et al. (2022), who suggest that new entrants to agriculture are often disconnected from knowledge structures, as they often operate businesses that are not typically addressed by advisory services. Other ‘hard to reach’ or less engaged groups can include women farmers and those suffering from poor mental health (Hurley et al. 2022).

Understanding how land managers engage with knowledge networks and their trust of these networks is an important factor in determining their experience of support systems. By improving farmers’ awareness, it is expected that changes in behaviour would be reflected in the adoption of improved management practices. However, Okumah et al. (2021) argue that the limited research in this area so far has shown that the link between awareness and adoption exists. This link is indirect and is mediated and moderated by other factors. Nevertheless, on balance, it seems that hypothetically, with all factors being equal, more awareness is better than less awareness.

Summary

The willingness of land managers to engage with forms of support for changing management practices and land use patterns is influenced by a number of internal factors. These include the compatibility of change with land managers’ self-identify of what it means to be a land manager, particularly a farmer – something that is ingrained and often inter-generational, making it difficult to alter in the short-term. Similarly, inflexible management prescriptions are at odds with cherished decision-making autonomy and change can be perceived as incurring higher than acceptable levels of risk, although attitudes can be softened if prescriptions align with personal or business objectives.

Weak confidence and understanding regarding the purpose and practicalities of change reinforce business-as-usual, with a lack of trust in the credibility and relevance of available sources of information, advice and training further constraining engagement. Such internal factors vary across individual land managers, but there is some evidence that greater openness to change may be associated with (younger) age and (greater) education but also that some groups, including women, new entrants with no prior experience and people suffering from poor mental health, may be further disconnected from support systems.

External factors influencing land manager engagement with support schemes

Alongside the internal factors identified above, there are significant external factors that influence land manager behaviours, including the physical, environmental, business structure, financial, knowledge availability, social norms and time factors on land management.

Funding, costs and policy indicators

As with any business operation, the need to generate revenue to ensure the survival of the business is a high priority for any land manager. The majority of land managers, especially tenants, seek to make a profit from their land. Therefore, financial considerations are paramount to the landowners’ decision-making process, underlining the importance of support schemes and their potential to influence change.

Previous research has indicated that given the unpredictability of agricultural and land-based activities, only when economic conditions were stable could land managers focus on other activities – including environmental considerations (Scottish Government, 2012). Measures that do not guarantee financial benefits – e.g., that may have a negative impact on production or come at a cost to the farmer – are unlikely to be adopted in the absence of other tangible benefits.

In the latest Farm Practices Survey (2022), 32% of farmers who were already taking actions to reduce GHG emissions stated that environmental measures were too expensive to implement. This may explain why Ruto and Garrod (2009) found payment rates to be a key driver and Pineiro et al. (2021) conclude that interventions that lead to short term financial benefits have higher adoption rates than those that concentrate on delivering ecological service provision. This view is supported by Mills et al. (2016) who state that current financial incentives and regulatory approaches have had a degree of success in encouraging environmental practices, but these are ultimately transient drivers that have not led to long-term sustainability.

Within this, policy uncertainty may further hinder the uptake of environmental land management practices. Kuhfuss et al. (2018) describe these uncertainties as:

  • differences in sources in funding (public vs private)
  • eligibility rules
  • financial uncertainty of prices in the carbon markets and
  • potential emerging markets that may provide better results.

This is further compounded by whether a payment by results or an activity model is used. Moxey at al. (2021) reinforce this point by suggesting that peatland restoration work is hindered by the perceived ineligibility for agricultural support payments, tax breaks and concerns over future support arrangement and carbon market fluctuations.

Bio-physical constraints, tenure and structure

Environmental constraints often limit which environmental measures can be implemented on a spatial scale. Location, climate and environmental quality are key determinants of which support schemes are viable for a land manager’s piece of land as they affect what is implementable practically in local conditions in relation to opportunities. An example of this is the large amount of peatland and moorland that provides potential for peat bog restoration management practices: in these locations woodland planting should be discouraged (Lampkin et al. 2021). Paulus et al. (2022) provide further evidence to support this point by suggesting that environmental management practices are more likely to be implemented on sites with unfavourable agricultural conditions.

Two more important factors are the size of the enterprise and the tenure of the land. Regarding tenure, a meta-analysis of 46 studies (Baumgart-Getz et al. 2012) looking at the adoption of best-management practices found secure tenure to be a positive indicator of adoption, and the findings are likely to apply to climate friendly measures as well. This suggests that land managers who either own their land or are on secure tenancies with a good relationship with their landlord are more likely to adopt environmental measures due to the long-term security that their tenure status affords them.

Multiple sources within the literature also suggest that larger enterprises may be more willing and able to engage with support systems, particularly those with environmental outcomes (Mills et al. 2013; Paulus et al. 2022). Smaller enterprises are likely to have fewer opportunities to take elements out of production and fewer resources to apply without impacting their net income.

Ease of access to support

A key determinant of engagement with support systems is the perceived and actual accessibility of these schemes.

If a scheme is considered to be straightforward and easy to apply for, there is likely to be high engagement. The opposite is true of a scheme that is considered complex and time consuming. For example, for land managers the administrative load (transaction costs) and time commitment is often the determining factor on whether to participate or not. A common criticism of AESs is that they often carry high transaction costs, especially in comparison to more traditional support schemes (Kuhfuss et al. 2018).

Lampkin et al. (2021) suggest that schemes have become increasingly complex, partially in response to regulatory, audit and compliance issues. The administrative burden can also vary across enterprise type, with Benni et al. (2022) finding that dairy producers face substantially higher transaction costs than arable producers. Furthermore, once schemes are in place, the ongoing maintenance requirement for many AES (reporting etc.) can prove a further barrier to uptake (MacKay & Prager, 2021).

The Peatland Code can be used to understand some of the accessibility issues found in the Scottish agricultural sector. Moxey et al. (2021) suggest that the administrative burden associated with applying for joint funding via AESs and via the Peatland Code is perceived as overly complex, with interactions between them further increasing this. The study notes that the issue of interacting schemes occurs when having to demonstrate additionality, aligning funding cycles between different sources and coordinating across multiple land managers and investors.

Novo et al. (2021) also found that challenges in understanding the application process and funding mechanism were a barrier mentioned by interviewees in their study regarding the peatland carbon code.

Therefore, the perceived and actual transaction costs associated with support systems are a barrier to uptake. When looking to address this, Westway et al. (2023) caution that simplicity is important to encourage uptake, however oversimplification of schemes can lead to unintended consequences and needs to be balanced against public accountability for expenditure.

Knowledge availability, sharing and awareness

Engagement with support schemes and uptake of specific on farm measures is frequently linked with the knowledge and understanding of the individual land manager (Toma et al. 2018).

A lack of knowledge and understanding has been frequently cited as a key barrier to new management practices. This is further enhanced when new technological and informational processes are needed for alternative practices and if the costs/benefits are not clear or easy to judge. This finding is supported by results from the Farm Practitioner Survey (2022), where the most reported reason for not taking action was being unsure on what to do due to too many conflicting views (44%). These informational barriers are important as 30% responded that a lack of information was another key reason for not taking action.

This sentiment is echoed by two specific examples in Scotland. Firstly, Moxey et al. (2021) found that the awareness of the need for and benefits of peatland restoration is generally not well known amongst land managers, along with the voluntary market of the Peatland Code. Secondly, Lozada & Karley (2022) suggest that more evidence and greater awareness are needed amongst land managers about the financial and social outcomes of agroecological practices to facilitate uptake.

There is also evidence that land managers have a difference in ability to adopt new practices due to a variance in resources. Larger scale land management operations may have more resources and the ability to bring in consultants and agents for any new opportunities and land management practices. This is in comparison to smaller scale land managers who may not be able to approach new opportunities in the same manner due to (e.g.) a lack of time and cash plus higher overhead and transaction costs and less scope to cope with risk.

As an example, it has been suggested that small scale agroecological farmers might disproportionately suffer from a lack of access to incentives, despite delivering to environmental policy targets, or see incentive schemes as contrary to their farming ethos (Lozada & Karley 2022). This involves access to specialist advisors, where more profitable enterprises will be able to access specific advice on a more frequent basis compared to less profitable enterprises.

Social norms

As seen in section 4.2 above, farmers do not always make rational economic decisions and are influenced by societal goals and norms (Mills et al. 2017), the influence of a land manager’s peer group is likely to determine the extent to which they engage with specific support systems and management practices. This is observed in multiple studies (Kuhfuss et al. 2016: Cullen et al. 2020; Cusworth, 2020) where peer behaviour has been deemed to influence land manager uptake of environmental practices to a varying degree through framing of what it means to be a ‘good farmer’.

Howley et al. (2021) suggest that social norms can be harnessed to encourage pro-environmental behaviours in land managers. The researchers found that providing farmers with an opportunity to demonstrate their “green credentials” to their peer group can encourage conservation practices.

Summary

The ability of land managers to engage with changing management practices and land use patterns is influenced by a number of external factors. At a practical level, biophysical characteristics, and the area of land available will determine the suitability of alternative practices and land uses, but also the scope for experimentation and risk management. Equally, tenancy restrictions may impose legal constraints on freedom to change.

As businesses, the financial consequences of making changes matters. Funding needs to cover actual cash costs but also opportunity costs (time, income forgone) and transaction costs. The latter arise from application and reporting processes, both for funding and/or non-funding support, and can be disproportionately burdensome for smaller land managers. Separately, access to support can vary in terms of eligibility but also the availability of information, advice and training. Importantly, internal factors such as social norms and peer group pressure strongly influence land managers’ self-identity. This affects their perception of whether different management practices and land use patterns are compatible with their own values.

Discussion guide

The findings from the literature review suggested that we should focus on three main themes when we were drilling into the details with key stakeholders:

  • identify the main determinants of ability and willingness to change land use and land management practices, to give us a clearer understanding of the key factors that influence land manager decision making, including their motivations, what they want to achieve for their business or organisation, and their appetite to change.
  • focus on the existing support systems that land managers are engaging with and their experiences of doing so. This allowed us to identify and map all existing and relevant land use information systems, support services and the current incentives for land use transformation directly related to achieving Net Zero and/or nature restoration and understand some of the key barriers/opportunities regarding land manager engagement with these systems.
  • explore how land managers are accessing these support systems, which allowed us to explore where, when and how the land managers interact with the systems and services.

The interview methodology and more detail on the interview questions can be found in Appendix C, and the findings are summarised above in section 5.

SWOT & PESTLE analysis

This section provides the details of a SWOT and PESTLE analysis on the current land manager support systems in Scotland and were informed by the literature review and stakeholder engagement exercises.

8.1 SWOT analysis

Strengths

Weaknesses

  • There are a wide range of funding and support schemes, giving land managers choice of which how to engage.
  • Some land manager types are self-sufficient and do not rely on public support systems to achieve their desired goals and outputs, for example large scale rewilding estates.
  • NGO’s and other charitable organisations generally have a more formalised internal system that gives them the capacity to take advantage of support systems and absorb the transaction costs associated with these.
  • Some sources of private funding are already well established and are being accessed by some Scottish land managers, such as the Woodland Carbon Code.
  • The majority of current support schemes are administrated through RPID. This means that land managers only need one set of login credentials to access the administrative processes of all support systems.
  • Many land managers in Scotland lack the technical understanding and/or risk appetite to change management practices without extensive support or tangible demonstrations.
  • Lack of clarity from government and industry leaders regarding priorities and trade-offs creates uncertainties and inhibits change.
  • Many land managers remain uncertain of where to find information, advice and training, but also lack trust in the credibility and relevance of some sources.
  • Most agricultural land managers are used to taking basic payment scheme payments and what is expected in return for this is perceived to be quite minimal from land managers perspectives. Therefore, increasing or changing support thresholds/minimum criteria is likely to encounter resistance.
  • Many support systems, in particular AECS, are considered overly complex by land managers who find them difficult to understand and apply for. This leads to resentment over the administrative burden involved in applying and maintaining AECS agreements.
  • Land managers perceive support rules to be overly restrictive, impacting their ability to have control over outcomes on their farm.
  • Lack of adequately trained advisory agents to provide support to land managers as they look to engage and undertake new environmental land management practices.
  • Many land managers in Scotland are constrained by bio-physical attributes which limit the management measures and activity type that they can undertake on their land.
  • Due to small operating margins along with limited access to skilled labour, machinery and specialist advice – many land managers are risk adverse. They are therefore less likely to engage with support systems that do not adequately cover risks.
  • Many land managers have in built attitudes towards certain land management practices and are therefore unlikely to engage with any support system that challenges their pre-defined beliefs and attitudes. This is particularly evident with forestry, with many farmers viewing tree planting on agricultural land in a negative light.
  • Many land managers will choose to engage with the financial support system that maximises profit for the least amount of input.
  • There has been an increase in the perception that support service application processes are too long/complicated amongst land managers, potentially affecting engagement with support schemes.
  • Land managers often rely on assistance, whether this be public/private/network to fill in support system application forms.

Opportunities

  • Threats
  • Land managers engage with support systems and new management practices when in-person evidence and demonstration of the success of these systems/practices is available.
  • Larger holdings and particular industries (dairy, arable) are more willing to undertake environmental management practice changes and engage with new support systems that facilitate this.
  • Emerging natural capital markets.
  • Increasing the number of skilled advisors and/or facilitators could increase the uptake of environmental management practices and engagement with support schemes.
  • Land managers generally consider GHG mitigations measures to increase farm profitability. This would suggest that many land managers would engage with support systems that improve the GHG performance of their operations.
  • Simplifying or condensing application processes could increase the level of engagement with any upcoming support systems.
  • Land managers are using a wider range of new information sources, such as social media and other digital sources, to access informational support. Harnessing these digital communication methods could allow support to be accessed by a large range of land managers in Scotland using a one-to-many approach.
  • This research has indicated that land managers generally trust others that are in the profession (i.e. other land managers) over formalised advisors. Harnessing this trust and providing more peer-to-peer resource in Scottish agriculture is a potential opportunity to increase impactful support provision.
  • “Hard to reach” groups may not be reachable through support systems. Attempting to do so could cause resourcing issues that could lessen the impact of targeted support and funding.
  • Land managers are severely time restricted and do not have enough time to understand all the latest practices and standards that are expected of them.
  • Smaller holdings may be unable to keep up with increased ‘transaction costs’ if new support schemes are implemented that require an increased administrative burden.
  • Many land managers in Scotland rely on support systems to keep their enterprises profitable. Any changes to how these support systems are accessed could therefore prove unpopular.
  • Climate change is likely to change the environment in which land managers are operating in, meaning that future land use opportunities could be constrained by future climatic conditions.
  • Poor responsibility around emerging natural capital markets.

8.2 PESTLE analysis

Political

  • Continuing uncertainty and impact of Brexit on agricultural markets, including loss of tariff free export market, loss of labour pool and changes to CAP and subsidy schemes.
  • Uncertainty surrounding the funding scheme that will replace CAP and other EU aligned systems in Scotland.
  • Increased political discussions about the validity of taking agricultural land out of productivity for other environmental goals.
  • Political instability has the potential to change input market prices (such as the spike in fertiliser prices due to the war in Ukraine).
  • New Scottish Agriculture and Rural Communities Bill has been published, in addition to forthcoming Land Reform and Natural Environment bills which will bring in new legislation that land managers will need to comply with.
  • Policial commitments to a Just Transition.

Economic

  • Cost-price squeeze on farm-gate margins due to supply-chain pressures make many agricultural land managers heavily dependent on public funding.
  • Uncertainty over future budgetary flexibility to maintain support funding for land-based businesses.
  • Loss of income and uncertainty post-CAP until new funding systems are in place and understood by land managers.
  • Emerging private finance (e.g. woodland carbon code) offers potential new income streams, but it is unregulated and subject to considerable uncertainty.
  • Price volatility linked to political and geopolitical circumstances.

Social

  • Many ingrained beliefs towards land management processes are generational, and it may take a generational refresh for certain attitudes to become redundant.
  • There is uncertainty of transition if older land managers are less likely to engage with support systems than younger land managers.
  • There is an indication that land managers with a higher degree of education and those with higher environmental understanding are more likely to engage with support systems – particularly those with environmental outcomes.
  • There is a risk that ‘hard to reach’ groups, who are often already marginalised, will not benefit from future support systems, meaning they are less likely to engage with new management practices.
  • Land managers with learning difficulties, i.e. dyslexia, will have trouble engaging with more administrative requirements and burdens of future support systems if the requirements are too complex.
  • There is an increasing reliance on social media and other digital platforms to share knowledge and access informational support.
  • There is an increasing social awareness/view that taking productive agricultural land out of productivity to pursue an environmental goal could impact food security in the UK.

Technological

  • Potential for new technological solutions, such as autonomous and alternatively fuelled machinery and methane inhibitors, to lower the carbon emissions resulting from land manager activities in Scotland.
  • The adoption of new lower carbon technology in Scottish Agriculture is likely to require significant financial investment.
  • AI and other technological developments have the potential to reduce the administrative burden on land managers in Scotland if harnessed effectively.
  • Improving internet connectivity in remote areas may increase land manager access to support systems.
  • Simplifying administrative systems online could facilitate land manager access to support systems.

Legal

  • There is a complex regulatory framework surrounding rural land use in Scotland.
  • Land tenure arrangements, notably crofting tenure and farm tenancies, constrain access to both public and private environmental funding sources.
  • Upcoming Agriculture Bill will introduce new legislative changes.

Environmental

  • Twin biodiversity and climate emergencies, as expressed in policy objectives and targets, imply significant and rapid change for Scottish rural land management.
  • Climate change itself will affect land management, requiring adaptation to wildfire, drought and pest/disease risks plus general growing conditions.

Conclusions

Our research has reinforced existing findings in the literature surrounding land manager behaviour and decision making. Reflecting its relative prominence within public expenditure and land-based businesses in rural areas, agriculture dominates much of published literature on land use support and this was supplemented by stakeholder interviews, including with individuals representing other sectors.

The key message is that land manager engagement with support systems is determined by a range of interacting internal and external factors. These relate to financial, practical and cultural influences on both willingness and ability to engage. This is supported by the following conclusions:

  • The administrative systems associated with land use support in Scotland are perceived as logical from a high-level perspective. Most interactions with the system are through the RPID portal, which only requires one set of login credentials to access a wide range of support systems. Those support systems not under this umbrella are easy to access.
  • However, the administrative burden associated with applying to these schemes, i.e. form filling, is the main barrier to engagement. Some land managers have more resources available to absorb this administrative burden, such as large estates, investment owners and rewilding estates. If several schemes are appropriate this burden will increase.
  • Procedural support (i.e. form filling by an advisor on behalf of a land manager) is widely available from both public (FAS, SAC) and private advisory sources. However, this is distinct from practical support, such as site-specific implementation advice, which was frequently mentioned by stakeholders as key to facilitating the uptake of environmental management practices, and yet less readily available, and can depend on location.
  • We found that land managers often decide whether to engage with support and advice based on the credence of its source. For example, farmers are more likely to trust advisers/organisations that have a background in practical farming over those from a consulting/academic background.
  • Another key determinant of engagement with support systems was the level of control associated with outcomes/management practices. Stakeholders mentioned that the perceived prescriptive nature of AECS and forestry related grants would prevent land managers from choosing to access these support services.
  • Land managers in Scotland primarily access public funding support, with some accessing private finance to supplement their income or achieve specific goals. For those accessing private finance, this is generally done to avoid the conditionality of public funding support and retain operational control over the management of their land.
  • A lack of knowledge and understanding has been frequently cited as a key barrier to new management practices. This is further enhanced when new technological and informational processes are needed for alternative practices and if the costs/benefits are not clear or easy to judge.

Going forwards, administrative simplicity is preferable to complexity and (for applicants) greater flexibility is preferred. Therefore, efforts to streamline application and monitoring processes, reduce information burdens, widen application windows and vary contract lengths, are justifiable. However, accountability for public expenditure requires a degree of bureaucracy to ensure that funds are disbursed and used as intended, and simplicity and flexibility for applicants may impose additional complexity for administrators. Consequently, there are trade-offs, and the scope for improvements in process design alone will typically be limited.

As our literature findings highlight, administrative touch points and contractual constraints are only one influence on land manager behaviour. This implies that improved accessibility and flexibility will not by itself increase overall engagement with land use change. Other measures will also be needed such as attractive payment rates, sufficient technical advice, training and management flexibility.

References

Abdul-Salam, Y., Ovando, P., and Roberts, D. (2022) ‘Understanding the economic barriers to the adoption of agroforestry: A Real Options analysis’, Journal of Environmental Management, 302. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jenvman.2021.113955

Ambrose-Oji, B. (2019) Characterising land managers to support woodland creation efforts in Scotland. Available at: wcscotland_review_of_typologies_and_segmentation_march2019.v2_f96crvh.pdf (forestresearch.gov.uk)

Ashton, L. and Bradshaw, B. (2023) ‘Enabling conditions for scaling natural climate solutions in Canada’s agriculture sector’, Nature-Based Solutions, pp.100071.

Barnes, AP; Thompson, B; Toma, L. (2022) ‘Finding the ecological farmer: a farmer typology to understand ecological practices within Europe’, Current Research in Environmental Sustainability, 4, pp. 100125, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.crsust.2022.100125.

Baumgart-Getz, A., Prokopy, L.S. and Floress, K. (2012) ‘Why farmers adopt best management practice in the United States: A meta-analysis of the adoption literature’ ,Journal of Environmental Management, 96(1), pp.17-25.

Benni, N.E., Ritzel., Heitkamper, K., Umstatter, C., Zorn, A. and Mack, G. (2022) ‘The cost of farmers’ administrative burdens due to cross-compliance obligations’, Journal of Environmental Planning and Management, 65 (5), pp. 930-952.

Birner, R., Davis, K., Pender, J., Nkonya, E., Anandajayasekeram, P., Ekboir, J.M., Mbabu, A.N., Spielman, D.J., Horna, D., Benin, S. and Kisamba-Mugerwa, W. (2006) From” best practice” to” best fit”: a framework for designing and analyzing pluralistic agricultural advisory services (No. 4). International Food Policy Research Institute (IFPRI).

Boufous, S., Hudson, D. and Carpio, C. (2023) ‘Farmers’ willingness to adopt sustainable agricultural practices: A meta-analysis’, PLOS Sustainability and Transformation, 2(1), pp.e0000037.

Bowditch, E. A. D., McMorran, R., and Smith, M. A. (2023) ‘Right connection, right insight engaging private estate managers on woodland expansion issues in times of uncertainty’, Land Use Policy, 124. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.landusepol.2022.106437

Braito, M., Leonhardt, H., Penker, M., Schauppenlehner-Kloyber, E., Thaler, G. and Flint, C.G. (2020) ‘The plurality of farmers’ views on soil management calls for a policy mix’, Land Use Policy, 99, pp.104876.

Broadmeadow, S., Nisbet, T., Palmer, R., Webb, L., Short, C., Chivers, C.A., Hammond, J., Lukac, M., Miller, A., Gantlett, R. and Clark, J. (2023) ‘Incorporating technical and farmer knowledge to improve land use and management for natural flood management in lowland catchments’, Land Use Policy, 128, pp.106596.

Brown, C., Kovacs, E.K., Zinngrebe, Y., Albizua, A., Galanaki, A., Grammatikopoulou and Villamayor-Tomas, S. (2019) Understanding farmer uptake of measures that support biodiversity and ecosystem services in the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP): An EKLIPSE Expert Working Group Report. Wallingford: Centre for Ecology & Hydrology.

Brown, I. (2020) ‘Challenges in delivering climate change policy through land use targets for afforestation and peatland restoration’, Environmental Science and Policy, 107, pp. 36–45. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.envsci.2020.02.013

Burton, J.F. (2004) ‘Seeing Through the ‘ Good Farmer’s’ Eyes: Towards Developing an Understanding of the Social Symbolic Value of ‘Productivist’ Behaviour’, Sociologia Ruralis, 44 (2), pp. 195-215.

Burton, J.F., Kuczera, C. and Schwarz, G. (2008) ‘Exploring Farmers’ Cultural Resistance to Voluntary Agri-Environment Schemes’, Sociologia Ruralis, 48, pp. 16-37.

Burton, R.J. and Farstad, M. (2020) ‘Cultural lock‐in and mitigating greenhouse gas emissions: The case of dairy/beef farmers in Norway’, Sociologia Ruralis, 60(1), pp.20-39.

Burton, V., Metzger, M.J., Brown, C. and Moseley, D. (2019) ‘Green Gold to Wild Woodlands; understanding stakeholder visions for woodland expansion in Scotland’, Landscape Ecology, 34, pp. 1693–1713. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10980-018-0674-4

Carmen, E., Waylen, K., Marshall, K. and Ellis, R. (2023) Appraising Key Stakeholders and Institutions Relevant to Catchment-based Nature-based Solutions (NbS) in Scotland. Available at: https://www.hutton.ac.uk/sites/default/files/files/23_03_28_D2-2_M4A_Stakeholder_Inst_analysis.pdf

Conti, C., Zanello, G. and Hall, A. (2021) ‘Why are agri-food systems resistant to new directions of change? A systematic review’, Global Food Security, 31, pp.100576.

Creamer, E. (2015) ‘The double-edged sword of grant funding: a study of community-led climate change initiatives in remote rural Scotland’, Local Environment, 20 (9), pp. 981-999.

Cullen, P., Ryan, M., O’Donoghue, C., Hynes, S., Ó hUallacháin, D. and Sheridan, H. (2020) ‘Impact of farmer self-identity and attitudes on participation in agri-environment schemes’, Land Use Policy, 95, pp. 104660.

Cusworth, G. (2020) ‘Falling short of being the ‘good farmer’: Losses of social and cultural capital incurred through environmental mismanagement, and the long-term impacts agri-environment scheme participation’, Journal of Rural Studies, 75, pp. 164-173.

Daxini, A., Ryan, M., O’Donoghue, C. and Barnes, A.P. (2019) ‘Understanding farmers’ intentions to follow a nutrient management plan using the theory of planned behaviour’, Land Use Policy, 85, pp.428-437.

Dde Boon, A., Sandström, C. and Rose, D.C. (2022) ‘Perceived legitimacy of agricultural transitions and implications for governance. Lessons learned from England’s post-Brexit agricultural transition’, Land Use Policy, 116, pp.106067.

Department for Environment, Food & Rural Affairs. (2022) National Statistics – Farm Practices Survey February 2022. Available at: Farm practices survey February 2022 – greenhouse gas mitigation practices – GOV.UK (www.gov.uk)

Dessart, F.J., Barreiro-Hurlé, J. and Van Bavel, R. (2019) ‘Behavioural factors affecting the adoption of sustainable farming practices: a policy-oriented review’, European Review of Agricultural Economics, 46(3), pp.417-471.

Dunne, A., Markey, A. and Kinsella, J. (2019) ‘Examining the reach of public and private agricultural advisory services and farmers’ perceptions of their quality: the case of county Laois in Ireland’, The Journal of Agricultural Education and Extension, 25(5), pp.401-414.

El Benni, N., Ritzel, C., Heitkämper, K., Umstätter, C., Zorn, A. and Mack, G. (2022) ‘The cost of farmers’ administrative burdens due to cross-compliance obligations’, Journal of Environmental Planning and Management, 65(5), pp.930-952.

Ensor, J. and de Bruin, A. (2022) ‘The role of learning in farmer-led innovation’, Agricultural Systems, 197, pp.103356.

Farstad, M., Melås, A.M. and Klerkx, L. (2022) ‘Climate considerations aside: What really matters for farmers in their implementation of climate mitigation measures’, Journal of Rural Studies, 96, pp.259-269.

Feliciano, D., Hunter, C., Slee, B. and Smith, P. (2014) ‘Climate change mitigation options in the rural land use sector: Stakeholders’ perspectives on barriers, enablers and the role of policy in North East Scotland’, Environmental Science & Policy, 44, pp.26-38.

Garforth, C., Angell, B., Archer, J. and Green, K. (2003) ‘Improving farmers’ access to advice on land management: lessons from case studies in developed countries’, Agricultural Research and Extension Network Paper, 125.

Gasson, R. (1973) ‘Goals and Value of Farmers. Journal of Agricultural Economics’, 24 (3), pp. 521-542.

Glenk, K., Thomson, SG., Burns, J., Liebe, U., and Potts, J. M. (2022) Perceived legitimacy of agricultural support and priorities for a future support scheme in Scotland. SRUC.

Hill, B. and Bradley, D. (2023) ‘Goals and values of farmers revisited: Gasson fifty years on’, Journal of Agricultural Economics, 75, pp. 108-113.

Hill, I. and Mole, K. (2022) State of the Art Review Supporting rural businesses NICRE SOTA Review No 4: July 2022. Available at: (PDF) State of the Art Review Supporting rural businesses (researchgate.net).

Hopkins, J., Sutherland, L-A., Ehlers, M-H., Matthews, K., Barnes, AP., & Toma, L. (2017) ‘Scottish farmers’ intentions to afforest land in the context of farm diversification’, Forest Policy and Economics, 78, pp. 122 – 132. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.forpol.2017.01.014.

Hopkins, J., Sutherland, L.-A., Calo, A., Barlagne, C., Wardell-Johnson, D., Barnes, A., Thomson, S., Mcmillan, J., and Spencer, M. (2020) New entrants: their potential contribution to farming in Scotland by 2023. Available at: Research_Note_New_Entrants_final_RD242_published.pdf (hutton.ac.uk)

Howley, P. and Ocean, N. (2021) ‘Doing more with less: leveraging social norms and status concerns in encouraging conservation farm practices’, Land Economics, 97(2), pp.372-387.

Howley, P. and Ocean, N. (2022) ‘Can nudging only get you so far? Testing for nudge combination effects’, European Review of Agricultural Economics, 49(5), pp.1086-1112.

Hurley, P., Lyon, J., Hall, J., Little, R., Tsouvalis, J., White, V. and Rose, D.C. (2022) ‘Co‐designing the environmental land management scheme in England: the why, who and how of engaging ‘harder to reach’ stakeholders’, People and Nature, 4(3), pp. 744-757.

Ingram, J., Chiswella, H., Mills, J., Debruyne, L., Cooreman, H., Koutsouris, A., Pappa, E. and Marchand, F. (2018) ‘Enabling learning in demonstration farms: A literature review’, International Journal of Agricultural Extension, 6(3), pp.29-42.

Ingram, J., Mills, J., Black, J.E., Chivers, C.A., Aznar-Sánchez, J.A., Elsen, A., Frac, M., López-Felices, B., Mayer-Gruner, P., Skaalsveen, K. and Stolte, J. (2022) ‘Do Agricultural Advisory Services in Europe Have the Capacity to Support the Transition to Healthy Soils?’, Land, 11(5), p.599.

Interreg. (n.d.). What Scottish stakeholders think of the Agri-environment Climate Scheme and how it could be improved. Available at: https://northsearegion.eu/media/15256/scottish-aes-policy-report-what-scottish-key-stakeholders-think-of-the-scottish-agri-environment-scheme-and-how-it-could-be-improved.pdf (Accessed on 12/05/2024).

Irwin, R., Short, I., Mohammadrezaei, M. and Dhubháin, Á.N. (2023) ‘Increasing tree cover on Irish dairy and drystock farms: The main attitudes, influential bodies and barriers that affect agroforestry uptake’, Environmental Science & Policy, 146, pp.76-89.

King, P., Martin-Ortega, J., Armstrong, J., Ferré, M. and Bark, R.H. (2023) ‘Mainstreaming nature-based solutions: What role do Communities of Practice play in delivering a paradigm shift?’, Environmental Science & Policy, 144, pp.53-63

Klerkx, L., De Grip, K. and Leeuwis, C. (2006) ‘Hands off but strings attached: the contradictions of policy-induced demand-driven agricultural extension’, Agriculture and Human Values, 23, pp.189-204.

Klerkx, L. and Proctor, A. (2013) ‘Beyond fragmentation and disconnect: Networks for knowledge exchange in the English land management advisory system’, Land use policy, 30(1), pp.13-24.

Klerkx, L. (2020) ‘Advisory services and transformation, plurality and disruption of agriculture and food systems: towards a new research agenda for agricultural education and extension studies’, Journal of Agricultural Education and Extension, 26(2), pp.131-140.

Knierim, A., Boenning, K., Caggiano, M., Cristóvão, A., Dirimanova, V., Koehnen, T., Labarthe, P. and Prager, K. (2015) ‘The AKIS concept and its relevance in selected EU member states’, Outlook on Agriculture, 44(1), pp.29-36.

Knook, J., Eory, V., Brander, M. and Moran, D. (2020) ‘The evaluation of a participatory extension programme focused on climate friendly farming’, Journal of Rural Studies, 76, pp.40-48.

Kreft, C., Finger, R. and Huber, R. (2023) ‘Action‐versus results‐based policy designs for agricultural climate change mitigation’, Applied Economic Perspectives and Policy. https://doi.org/10.1002/aepp.13376.

Kuhfuss, L., R. Preget, S. Thoyer, N. Hanley, and P. Le Coent. (2016) ‘Nudges, social norms and permanence in agri-environmental schemes’, Land Economics, 92(4), pp. 641–655.

Kuhfuss, L., Rivington, M., and Roberts, M. (2018) The “Payment for Ecosystem Services” approach-relevance to climate change Defining “Payments for Ecosystem Services.”. Available at:The ‘Payment for Ecosystem Services’ approach – relevance to climate change (climatexchange.org.uk).

Lebarthe, P., Sutherland, L.A., Laurent, C., Nguyen, G., Tisenkopfs, T., Triboulet, P., Bechtet, N., Bulten, E., Elzen, B., Madureira, L. and Noble, C. (2022) ‘Who are Advisory Services Leaving Out? A Critical Reflection on ‘Hard to Reach’Farmers’, EuroChoices, 21(1), pp.50-55.

Lampkin, N., Shrestha, S., Sellars, A., Baldock, D., Smith, J., Mullender, S., Keenleyside, C., Pearce, B. and Watson, C. (2021) Preparing the Evidence Base for Post-Brexit agriculture in Scotland – case studies on alternative payments. Available at: Preparing the Evidence Base for Post-Brexit agriculture in Scotland – case studies on alternative payments — SRUC, Scotland’s Rural College.

Lawrence, A., and Dandy, N. (2014) ‘Private landowners’ approaches to planting and managing forests in the UK: What’s the evidence?’, Land Use Policy, 36, pp.351–360. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.landusepol.2013.09.002

Lawrence, A., Deuffic, P., Hujala, T., Nichiforel, L., Feliciano, D., Jodlowski, K., Lind, T., Marchal, D., Talkkari, A., Teder, M. and Vilkriste, L. (2020) ‘Extension, advice and knowledge systems for private forestry: Understanding diversity and change across Europe’, Land Use Policy, 94, pp.104522.

Lawrence, A., Deuffic, P., Hujala, T., Nichiforel, L., Feliciano, D., Jodlowski, K., Lind, T., Marchal, D., Talkkari, A., Teder, M. and Vilkriste, L. (2020) ‘Extension, advice and knowledge systems for private forestry: Understanding diversity and change across Europe’, Land Use Policy, 94, pp.104522.

Leloup, H., Bulten, E., Elzen, B., Prazan, J. and Zarokosta, E. (2022) ‘Socio‐Technical Scenarios as a Tool to Improve Farm Advisory Services’, EuroChoices, 21(1), pp.32-39.

Lozada, L. M., and Karley, A. (2022) The adoption of agroecological principles in Scottish farming and their contribution towards agricultural sustainability and resilience. Available at: SEFARI-FFCC Agroecology in Scotland March 2022.pdf.

MacKay, R. and Prager, K. (2021) ‘The dilemma of upland footpaths–understanding private landowner engagement in the provision of a public good’, Scottish Geographical Journal, 137(1–4), pp.131–157. https://doi.org/10.1080/14702541.2021.1994150

Mahon, M., Farrell, M. and McDonagh, J. (2010) ‘Power, positionality and the view from within: agricultural advisers’ role in implementing participatory extension programmes in the Republic of Ireland’, Sociologia Ruralis, 50(2), pp.104-120.

Mills, J., Gaskell, P., Reed, M., Short, C.J., Ingram, J., Boatman, N.,  Jones, N., Conyers, S., Carey, P., Winter, M., and Lobley, M. (2013) Farmer attitudes and evaluation of outcomes to on-farm environmental management. Report to Defra. Project Report. CCRI, Gloucester.

Mills, J., Gaskell, P., Ingram, J., Dwyer, J., Reed, M. and Short, C. (2016) Engaging farmers in environmental management through a better understanding of behaviour. Agriculture and Human Value. Available at: Engaging farmers in environmental management through a better understanding of behaviour (robyorke.co.uk)

Mills, J., Chiswell, H., Gaskell, P., Courtney, P., Brockett, B., Cusworth, G. and Lobley, M. (2021) ‘Developing farm-level social indicators for agri-environment schemes: a focus on the agents of change’, Sustainability, 13(14), pp.7820.

Moxey, A. P., McCracken, DI., and Thomson, S. (2021) Environmental conditionality on direct payments to land managers. Available at: https://pure.sruc.ac.uk/en/publications/environmental-conditionality-on-direct-payments-to-land-managers

Moxey, A., Smyth, M.A., Taylor, E. and Williams, A.P. (2021) ‘Barriers and opportunities facing the UK Peatland Code: A case-study of blended green finance’, Land Use Policy, 108, pp.105594.

Mustin, K., Newey, S. and Slee, B. (2017) ‘Towards the construction of a typology of management models of shooting opportunities in Scotland’, Scottish Geographical Journal, 133(3-4), pp.214-232.

Nicholls, D.C. (1969) ‘The Use of Land for Forestry within the Proprietary land unit’, Forestry Commission Bulletin No. 39.

Novo, P., Sposato, M., Maynard, C. and Genk, K. (2021) Understanding the experiences of peatland restoration in Scotland. Available at: https://era.ed.ac.uk/handle/1842/37697

Ocean, N. and Howley, P. (2021) ‘Using choice framing to improve the design of agricultural subsidy schemes’, Land Economics, 97(4), pp.933-950.

Okumah, M., Chapman, P.J., Martin-Ortega, J. and Novo, P. (2018) ‘Mitigating agricultural diffuse pollution: Uncovering the evidence base of the awareness–behaviour–water quality pathway’, Water, 11(1), p.29.

Okumah, M., Martin-Ortega, J. and Novo, P. (2018) ‘Effects of awareness on farmers’ compliance with diffuse pollution mitigation measures: A conditional process modelling’, Land Use Policy, 76, pp.36-45.

Okumah, M., Martin-Ortega, J., Chapman, P.J., Lyon, c. and Novo, P. (2019) Behavioural impacts of Northern Ireland’s Funded Soil Sampling and Training Schemes 2017-2019. Available at: http://wp.lancs.ac.uk/rephokus/

Okumah, M., Martin-Ortega, J., Novo, P. and J. Chapman, P. (2020) ‘Revisiting the determinants of pro-environmental behaviour to inform land management policy: A meta-analytic structural equation model application’, Land, 9(5), pp.135.

Okumah, M., Chapman, P.J., Martin-Ortega, J., Novo, P., Ferre, M., Jones, S., Pearson, P. and Froggatt, T. (2021) ‘Do awareness-focussed approaches to mitigating diffuse pollution work? A case study using behavioural and water quality evidence’, Journal of Environmental Management, 287, pp.112242.

Okumah, M., Martin-Ortega, J., Chapman, P.J., Novo, P., Cassidy, R., Lyon, C., Higgins, A. and Doody, D. (2021) ‘The role of experiential learning in the adoption of best land management practices’, Land Use Policy, 105, pp.105397.

Paulus, A., Hagemann, N., Baaken, M.C., Roilo, S., Alarcón-Segura, V., Cord, A.F., Beckmann, M. (2022) ‘Landscape context and farm characteristics are key to farmers’ adoption of agri-environmental schemes’, Land Use Policy, Volume 121, pp.106320. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.landusepol.2022.106320.

Piñeiro, V., Arias, J., Elverdin, P., Ibáñez, A., Morales Opazo, C.,Prager, S. and Torero, M. (2021) Achieving sustainable agricultural practices. From incentives to adoption and outcomes. Washington: International Food Policy Research Institute (IFPRI).

Prager, K. (2022) ‘Implementing policy interventions to support farmer cooperation for environmental benefits’, Land Use Policy, 119, pp.106182.

Quinn, B., McKitterick, L., Tregear, A. and McAdam, R. (2021) ‘Trust in the programme: An exploration of trust dynamics within rural group-based support programmes’, Journal of Rural Studies, 88, pp.326-336.

Rajagopalan, D., and L. Kuhfuss. (2017) Agri-Environmental Concerns and the Potential for Catchment-Scale Cooperation near Five Case-Study Research Farms in Scotland: an overview of the initial scoping exercise. The James Hutton Institute.

Reissig, L., Stoinescu, A. and Mack, G. (2022) ‘Why farmers perceive the use of e-government services as an administrative burden: A conceptual framework on influencing factors’, Journal of Rural Studies, 89, pp.387-396.

Ritzel, C., Mack, G., Portmann, M., Heitkämper, K. and El Benni, N. (2020) ‘Empirical evidence on factors influencing farmers’ administrative burden: A structural equation modelling approach’, Plos one, 15(10), pp.e0241075.

Rust, N.A., Stankovics, P., Jarvis, R.M., Morris-Trainor, Z., de Vries, J.R., Ingram, J., Mills, J., Glikman, J.A., Parkinson, J., Toth, Z. and Hansda, R. (2021) ‘Have farmers had enough of experts?’, Environmental Management, 69, pp.31-44.

Ruto, E. and Garrod, G. (2009) ‘Investigating farmers’ preferences for the design of agri-environment schemes: a choice experiment approach’, Journal of Environmental Planning and Management, 52(5), pp.631-647.

Schaub, S., Ghazoul, J., Huber, R., Zhang, W., Sander, A., Rees, C., Banerjee, S. and Finger, R. (2023) ‘The role of behavioural factors and opportunity costs in farmers’ participation in voluntary agri‐environmental schemes: A systematic review’, Journal of Agricultural Economics, 74(3), pp.617-660.

Schulte, I., Eggers, J., Nielsen, J.Ø. and Fuss, S. (2022) ‘What influences the implementation of natural climate solutions? A systematic map and review of the evidence’, Environmental Research Letters, 17(1), pp.013002.

Scottish Government. (2012). Agriculture and Climate Change: Evidence on Influencing Farmers Behaviours. Available at: Agriculture and Climate Change: Evidence on Influencing Farmer Behaviours – Research Findings – gov.scot (www.gov.scot).

Scottish Government. (2021). Scottish Government Rural Payments and Inspections Division (RPID) Customer Satisfaction Survey 2021 Scottish Government Rural Payments and Inspections Division (RPID) Customer Satisfaction Survey 2021. Available at: Rural Payments and Inspections Division (RPID): customer satisfaction survey 2021 – gov.scot (www.gov.scot).

Slee, B. (2014) WEAG recommendation No 10: Increasing the integration of farming and forestry in Scotland: a summary of recent research. Available at: WEAG recommendation No 10: Increasing the integration of farming and forestry in Scotland: a summary of recent research (climatexchange.org.uk).

Sligo, F.X. and Massey, C. (2007) ‘Risk, trust and knowledge networks in farmers’ learning’, Journal of Rural Studies, 23(2), pp.170-182.

Sutherland, L.A., Mills, J., Ingram, J., Burton, R.J., Dwyer, J. and Blackstock, K. (2013) ‘Considering the source: Commercialisation and trust in agri-environmental information and advisory services in England’, Journal of Environmental Management, 118, pp.96-105

Sutherland, L-A., Toma, L., Barnes, A. P., Matthews, K. B., and Hopkins, J. (2016) ‘Agri-environmental diversification: Linking environmental, forestry and renewable energy engagement on Scottish farms’, Journal of Rural Studies, 47, pp.10–20. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jrurstud.2016.07.011

Sutherland, L-A., Barlagne, C. and Barnes, A.P. (2019) ‘Beyond ‘hobby farming’: towards a typology of non-commercial farming’, Agriculture and Human Values, 36, pp. 475-493.

Sutherland, L.-A., Macleod, K., Koronka, J., Kuhfuss, L., & Blackstock, K. (2021) Attitudes and drivers of behaviours of landowners/land managers towards Land use change associated with Climate Change Plan targets. Available at: PAWSA-Land-Manager-Behaviours-in-relation-to-the-environment-and-climate-change-24-June-2021.pdf (hutton.ac.uk).

Sutherland, L.A. and Labarthe, P. (2022) ‘Introducing ‘microAKIS’: a farmer-centric approach to understanding the contribution of advice to agricultural innovation’, The Journal of Agricultural Education and Extension, 28(5), pp.525-547.

Sutherland, L.A., Madureira, L., Elzen, B., Noble, C., Bechtet, N., Townsend, L., Zarokosta, E. and Triboulet, P. (2022) ‘What Can We Learn from Droppers and Non‐adopters About the Role of Advice in Agricultural Innovation?’, EuroChoices, 21(1), pp.40-49.

Sutherland, L-A., Adamsone-Fiskovica, A., Elzen, B., Koutsouris, A., Laurent, C., Straete, E.P. and Labarthe, P. (2023) ‘Advancing AKIS with assemblage thinking’, Journal of Rural Studies, 97, pp. 57-69.

Thomas, E., Riley, M. and Spees, J. (2020) ‘Knowledge flows: Farmers’ social relations and knowledge sharing practices in ‘Catchment Sensitive Farming’, Land use policy, 90, pp.104254.

Thompson, B., Morrison, R., Stephen, K., Eory, V., Ferreira, J., Vigors, B., Degiovanni, H. B., Barnes, A., and Toma, L. (2021a) Behaviour change and attitudes in the Scottish agricultural sector-a rapid evidence assessment. Available at: Behaviour change and attitudes in the Scottish agricultural sector – a rapid evidence assessment (ed.ac.uk).

Thompson, B., Leduc, G., Manevska‐Tasevska, G., Toma, L. and Hansson, H. (2023) ‘Farmers’ adoption of ecological practices: A systematic literature map’, Journal of Agricultural Economics, 75, pp. 84-107.

Thomson, SG., Moxey, A. P., and Hall, J. (2021b) The Transition to Future (Conditional) Agricultural Support – NFU Scotland’s Approach. Available at: 0521 NFUS Proposals For Future (Conditional) Support.pdf.

Toma, L., Barnes, A. P., Sutherland, L. A., Thomson, S., Burnett, F., and Mathews, K. (2018) ‘Impact of information transfer on farmers’ uptake of innovative crop technologies: a structural equation model applied to survey data’, Journal of Technology Transfer, 43(4), pp. 864-881.

Turner, J.A., Horita, A., Fielke, S., Klerkx, L., Blackett, P., Bewsell, D., Small, B. and Boyce, W.M. (2020) ‘Revealing power dynamics and staging conflicts in agricultural system transitions: case studies of innovation platforms in New Zealand’, Journal of Rural Studies, 76, pp.152-162.

Tyllianakis, E. and Martin-Ortega, J. (2021) ‘Agri-environmental schemes for biodiversity and environmental protection: How we are not yet “hitting the right keys”’, Land Use Policy, 109, pp.105620.

Tyllianakis, E., Martin-Ortega, J., Ziv, G., Chapman, P.J., Holden, J., Cardwell, M. and Fyfe, D. (2023) ‘A window into land managers’ preferences for new forms of agri-environmental schemes: Evidence from a post-Brexit analysis’, Land Use Policy, 129, pp.106627.

Vrain, E. (2015) Factors influencing farmer uptake of water pollution mitigation measures: The role of farm advice (Doctoral dissertation, University of East Anglia). Available at: (PDF) Factors influencing farmer uptake of water pollution mitigation measures: The role of farm advice. (researchgate.net)

Westaway, S., Grange, I., Smith, J. and Smith, L. (2023) ‘Meeting tree planting targets on the UK’s path to net-zero: A review of lessons learnt from 100 years of land use policies’, Land Use Policy, 125, pp.106502.

Wood, B.A., Blair, H.T., Gray, D.I., Kemp, P.D., Kenyon, P.R., Morris, S.T. and Sewell, A.M. (2014) ‘Agricultural science in the wild: A social network analysis of farmer knowledge exchange’, PloS one, 9(8), pp.e105203.

Yang, W. and Knook, J. (2021) ‘Spatial evaluation of the impact of a climate change participatory extension programme on the uptake of soil management practices’, Australian Journal of Agricultural and Resource Economics, 65(3), pp.539-565.

Yang, W. and Wang, L. (2022) ‘Impact of farmer group participation on the adoption of sustainable farming practices—spatial analysis of New Zealand dairy farmers’, Farmer’s Oranizations and Sustainable Development, 94(3), pp. 707-717.

 

Appendices

Appendix A – Support system overview

As part of the desk-based research element of this report, we attempted to discover as many of the existing official support systems available to land managers in Scotland as possible. This included visiting Scottish Government resources, such as the Rural Payments and Services website[7], along with an internet trawl through other resources – such as NatureScot’s summary of the Agri-Environment and Climate Scheme[8]. We used this information to compile Table 5 below, giving a summary of all the available sources of support and an indication, where possible, of how land managers are engaging with this support system.

To help understand how land managers are engaging with support systems, we identified and defined the key support system providers. These are outlined below:

Government – publicly funded support systems. These can come in the form of general funding support schemes (such as BPS) or more targeted schemes with environmental objectives (AECS). Government funding also underpins other forms of support, such as the Farm Advisory Service. Generic, rather than agricultural-specific business funding is also available from local and central government, but is generally regarded as less relevant to land managers.

Private sector – Land managers routinely access private sector funding in the form of overdrafts and loans offered by banks, plus calling upon personal networks (friends and family). Other sources of short-term credit include auction markets and input suppliers. More novel funding sources such as crowdfunding and impact bonds have emerged in recent years, as have voluntary carbon markets e.g. the Woodland Carbon Code and the Peatland Code.

Knowledge networks and advisory services – Land managers draw on a range of informational support when making decisions. This includes direct government sources plus third-party sources funded by government (e.g. the Farm Advisory Service) but also independent third-party provision. The latter includes advisory services tied to input suppliers as well as independent consultants but also, importantly, less formal reliance upon friends and family plus peer-to-peer networks.

Third sector, charities and NGOS – Certain groups with defined goals, such as nature protection and restoration, also provide landowners with advice and funding to undertake measures that align with their objectives. These groups are often landowners themselves.

Table 5: Support scheme overview

Scheme

Primary[9] Type of support

Description

Project providers

Support providers

Land manager experience of support system

Decoupled area payments: Basic Payment Scheme/Greening/LFASS (also National Reserve)

Financial

The Basic Payment Scheme (BPS) acts as a safety net for farmers and crofters by supplementing their main business income. Greening is a top-up to the BPS. The National Reserve helps new and young farmers who do not automatically qualify for BPS entitlements. LFASS (Less Favoured Area Support Scheme) is a separate decoupled area payment, but covers most farm businesses, particularly beef and sheep farms. Payment rates per ha vary according to geography.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi), Community ownership

Government agencies

Many land managers, particularly farmers, rely on basic annual payments to ensure profitability in their enterprises. For example, even with support payments, only 60% of dairy farms were profitable in 2018.[10] Those in the crofting and grazing industry have relied on support on the basis of what businesses ‘have’ or ‘had’ rather than what they ‘do’.[11] LFASS calculation methods have resulted in many businesses with historically managed higher livestock numbers getting overcompensated whilst other units that have since grown are not receiving full support payment levels to reflect their higher production and activity levels.

Voluntary Coupled Support (VCS): Suckler Beef Support Scheme (SBSF)/Scottish Upland Sheep Support Scheme (SUSSS)

Financial

The SBSF and SUSSS are supplementary payments per selected animal, available to suckler beef and sheep farms in selected areas.

Suckler beef and sheep farms

Government agencies

An attempt to target support payments at particularly vulnerable types of farming receiving low decoupled support.

Woodland Carbon Code

Financial

The Woodland Carbon Code (WCC) is the UK’s voluntary carbon standard for woodland creation projects. It provides reassurance about the carbon savings that woodland projects may realistically achieve.

Estate (multi)

Estate (sporting)

Estate (conservation)

Charity organisation

Estate (investment)

Commercial forestry

Community ownership

Corporate buyers

Government agencies

Preliminary results of the analysis of Project Design Documents suggest that carbon is only one consideration amongst other factors. This is demonstrated by differences in planting and management decisions, which affect the type and uses of the woodland created. This is corroborated by interviews with developers and landowners, who expressed a wide range of interests and intentions behind woodland creation.[12]

Peatland Carbon Code

Financial

The Peatland Code is a voluntary certification standard for UK peatland projects wishing to market the climate benefits of restoration. It provides assurances to carbon market buyers that the projects they are investing in are credible and deliverable.

Estate (multi)

Estate (sporting)

Estate (conservation)

Charity organisation

Estate (investment)

Commercial forestry

Community ownership

Corporate buyers

Government agencies

The Peatland Code itself is largely unknown amongst land managers and restoration practitioners. As a comparator, awareness of the Woodland Carbon Code is notably greater, as is its uptake.

Peatland Action

Financial

The main source of public funding for peatland restoration, covering a proportion of upfront capital.

Estate (multi)

Estate (sporting)

Estate (conservation)

Charity organisation

Estate (investment)

Commercial forestry

Community ownership

Government agencies

Proactive raising of awareness by NatureScot and iterative changes to payment rates and terms and conditions have achieved relatively high uptake rates, but the pace needs to quicken further if ambitious restoration targets are to be met.

Agri-Environment Climate Scheme

Financial

The Agri-Environment Climate Scheme (AECS) promotes land management practices which protect and enhance Scotland’s natural heritage, improve water quality, manage flood risk and mitigate and adapt to climate change. About £30-40 million is awarded annually to land managers.

All

Government agencies

Over 3,200 farmers, crofters and land managers have AECS contracts out of the regular 18,000 CAP claimants.

The AECS covers 1,16 million hectares of agricultural land under management contracts representing about 20% of agricultural land.

Comments on the application process include:

“Guidance is awful even for someone who has much experience in this area such as an agent/manager like myself. It is difficult to find all the information on the internet and too bureaucratic. Guidance can change. Before, there was a booklet to guide you through everything, but now it is on the internet and can change with little knowledge of changes that may have happened to various measures/payments etc.”

“It’s a 5-year scheme so there can be problems when planning, as it is difficult to change options and areas during the scheme, which is sometimes important in arable rotations to get the best from the land”.

“Not difficult for an adviser, but it would be a lot of problems for a farmer, on his own, to do”

Forestry Grant Scheme

Financial

The Forestry Grant Scheme supports 1) the creation of new woodland and 2) the sustainable management of existing woodlands. There are eight categories under which support can be applied for; agroforestry, woodland creation, forest infrastructure, woodland improvement grant, sustainable management of forests, tree health, harvesting and processing and forestry co-operation.

Estate (multi)

Estate (sporting)

Estate (conservation)

Charity organisation

Estate (investment)

Commercial forestry

Community ownership

All farming archetypes

Government agencies

Some farmers are put off engaging with this support system due to inherent views that planting trees is not what a typical ‘good farmer’ would do – representing a lack of skill that may reduce their standing amongst peers.

Some farmer archetypes also do not engage with this support system as it is outwith the administrative system that they normally engage with.

The MacKinnon Report[13] attempted to identify the key administrative barriers in current support schemes and propose solutions to remove some of the burden on scheme applicants. This may have led to a streamlined application process to this support scheme.

Sustainable Agriculture Capital Grant Scheme

Financial

The Sustainable Agriculture Capital Grant Scheme (SACGS) provides support to businesses so that they can invest in equipment to reduce harmful ammonia emissions and reduce adverse impacts on water quality resulting from the storage and spreading of livestock slurry and digestate.

Grazing

Mixed farm

Dairy

Pig & Poultry

Arable

Estate (multi)

Government agencies

There is little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system.

Scottish Land Fund

Financial

The Scottish Land Fund is a programme which supports community organisations across Scotland to own land, buildings, and other assets.

Public

Community ownership

Charity

Government agencies

A recent evaluation report of the Scottish Land Fund[14] found that 92% of applicants rated the overall process involved in the fund as either good or very good. The report concluded that the “fund is highly valued and seen as a vital tool for community groups who wish to

transform land and buildings in their local areas.” On this evidence, it would appear that land managers are positively engaging with this support system.

Preparing for Sustainable Farming

Knowledge

This scheme helps farmers and crofters to further their understanding of how farming and food production can be even more economically and environmentally sustainable. Scottish farmers can claim funding for carbon audits, soil sampling and analysis and animal health and welfare interventions.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi),

Government agencies

There is little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system.

Knowledge Transfer and Innovation Fund

Knowledge

The scheme has two aims: 1) to promote skills development and knowledge transfer in the primary agricultural sector and 2) deliver innovation on-the-ground improvements in agricultural competitiveness, resource efficiency, environmental performance and sustainability.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi)

Government agencies

The Farm Advisory Service[15] have published multiple reports summarising the activities undertaken as part of the Knowledge Transfer and Innovation Fund. For example, the project ‘Agroforestry in Action’ highlighted that their agroforestry advice videos have had over 8,000 views at the time of writing in 2021.

Nature Restoration Fund

Financial

The Nature Restoration Fund (NRF) is a competitive fund launched in July 2021, which specifically encourages applicants with projects that restore wildlife and habitats on land and sea and address the twin crises of biodiversity loss and climate change.

Estate (multi)

Estate (sporting)

Estate (conservation)

Charity organisation

Estate (investment)

Community ownership

Government agencies

We found little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system other than a published list of successful projects.

The Water Environment Fund

Financial

The Water Environment Fund is targeted on projects which will derive the greatest benefit to Scotland’s rivers and neighbouring communities.

All

Government agencies

We found little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system.

Advisory Services (FAS)

Knowledge

The Farm Advisory Service (FAS) offers a range of advisory services to Scottish farmers, such as livestock and soil management, water management, specialist advice and integrated land management plans (ILMPs). FAS is part of the Scottish Rural Development Programme (SRDP) which is funded by the Scottish Government, providing information and resources aimed at increasing the profitability and sustainability of farms and crofts.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi)

Government agencies

A recent evaluation of the FAS service concluded that “Overall, there is clear evidence that the FAS One to Many service has delivered a wide-ranging programme which, insofar as we have data, appears to be well-regarded by those who use it.” Highlighted points include those below:

Delivering over 800 events over a range of geographical locations, with consistently high feedback. As many as 15,656 people attended these events between 2016/17 and 2019/20.

Provision of a small farm and crofter subscription service, providing subsidised advice to 2, 188 crofters and 287 small farms in 2019/20.

Providing technical information, including a Farm Management Handbook. Between January 2020 and August 2020, 108,674 technical documents were downloaded.

It would therefore appear that land managers, in particular farmers, in Scotland are engaging heavily with this support service.

Farmer Clusters

Knowledge

Farmer Clusters are groups of farmers and land managers that come together under the guidance of a ‘facilitator’ or advisor to work cohesively in their locality. The approaches can differ, with sources of funding varying across Britain. Currently, only two Farm Clusters are registered in Scotland.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi),

Charity

We found little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system.

Monitor farms/forests

Knowledge

Monitor farms are managed by Quality Meat Scotland and AHDB Cereals and Oilseeds as a form of demonstration farm for new practices and innovative technologies. Improving carbon performance is one of the key themes of this.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi),

Government agencies

A previous report from 2014 highlighted that monitor farms have been successful in practical and effective knowledge exchange and delivered a positive impact on farm practices and performance. More recent evaluation of engagement with this support system is not available.

Carbon positive

Knowledge

Managed by SAOS as a platform for collating farm data on natural capital and carbon footprints

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Arable, Dairy, Pig & Poultry, Soft fruit, Estate (multi),

Private sector

We found little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system.

Croft Woodlands and Crofting MOREwoods

Knowledge

The Woodland Trust’s “Croft Woodlands” advisory team offers crofters, smallholders and common grazing committees free advice on tree planting as well as training, educational resources, assistance with grant applications and funding for tree planting.

Croft, Grazing, Mixed farm, Estate (multi),

Private sector

Charity

Government agencies

From 2015 to 2020, this support scheme supported the planting of over a million trees in the Crofting Counties and helped bring over 1000ha of woodland into sustainable management.

The Facility for Investment ready Nature in Scotland

Finance

Through the Facility for Investment Ready Nature in Scotland (FIRNS), grants of up to £240,000 will be offered to organisations and partnerships to help develop a viable business case and financial model, to attract investment in projects that can restore and improve the natural environment.

All

Government Agencies

We found little evidence on how land managers are engaging with this support system.

Facility for Investment Ready Nature Scotland Grant Scheme

Finance

The FIRNS is a joint initiative between NatureScot, the Esmée Fairbairn Foundation and the National Lottery Heritage Fund Supporting the development of environmental projects in Scotland that:

-align with the Scottish Government’s Interim Principles for Responsible Investment in Natural Capital

-aim to value and monetise ecosystem services derived from the restoration of natural capital assets, in a model that will attract and repay investment or support an investment model that can be scaled up and duplicated elsewhere.

Charity organisation

Community organisation

Local Government

Government Agencies

Seven projects have been selected to be funded by FIRNS.

Private agricultural consultancies

Knowledge

Private consultancies offer a range of management and consultancy services to rural land managers, providing support and guidance. This usually focuses on commercial development of the business and can include advice on estate management, planning, building consultancy, renewables and tax and funding advice.

Estate (multi)

Estate (sporting)

Estate (investment)

Commercial forestry

Community ownership

All farming archetypes

Private sector

We found that all archetypes are engaging with private agricultural consultancies to some extent. Some are using these services to offer procedural support, such as help completing application forms etc. whereas others are using more specialised services, e.g. forestry.

Appendix B – Archetype methodology

Archetype identification

The first priority was to define a baseline list of Scottish land manager archetypes[16] in discussion with the project steering group.

Archetypes are a useful tool when trying to simplify the heterogeneity of land managers in Scotland and provide context to the following sections of analysis. The simplified archetypes were then used to underpin the mapping elements of this study. Firstly, archetypes were used to provide a high-level overview of how different land managers are engaging with support systems in Scotland. Secondly, the archetypes were used to identify potential climate change mitigation project providers in Table 6 below. Thirdly, archetypes were discussed with participants at the stakeholder workshop to explore the extent to which each archetype is interacting with support systems in the manner to which is expected based on stakeholder interviews and our literature review.

The following archetypes have been informed by Mills et al. (2017) (see Figure 1) where three main factors are defined that influence a land manager’s willingness and ability to undertake environmental management.

These are listed below:

  • Willingness to adopt – willingness of land managers to undertake environmental land management practices and the intrinsic factors (e.g., motivations, beliefs, social norms) affecting land managers environmental behaviours.
  • Farmer Engagement – where land managers enter into dialogue, discussion and collective problem framing with those who hold environmental knowledge and expertise.
  • Ability to adopt – farm characteristics (e.g., tenancy, scale, skills and capital constraints), that influence land manager’s decision making in relation to environmental management and their ability to adopt new practices.

Mills et al. (2017) found that land managers tend to exhibit different sub-optimal positions within this conceptual framework. These positions are found below:

  • Willing and engaged only – willingness to undertake environmental management activities on their land, but this has not translated into behaviour because the manager does not have the ability to do so.
  • Able and engaged only – undertaking environmental management and has engaged with advice, but lacks sustained motivation to maximise environmental benefits.
  • Willing and able only – actively undertaking environmental management, but has not engaged with any advice which means that land is not delivering its full environmental potential.
  • Disengaged – not engaged with any environmental management, either because they were not willing, they do not have capacity, or they dislike outside interference or are concerned with loss of control or management flexibility.

Some characteristics are more readily observable than others. For example, farm type, size and tenure status are recorded routinely, levels of financial, human and social capital or personal attitudes less so. Nevertheless, it is possible to construct example archetypes that can be used to explore how different configurations may affect land use decisions.[17] The Table on the following page is an attempt to illustrate a broad range of potential land manager archetypes in Scotland. This has been arranged primarily based on activity, as this is the most observable difference between land manager types. We have provided a hypothesis of the likely size, tenure and engagement along with a brief description of key characteristics and indication of location. Words in bold indicate that this characteristic applies to the archetype.

In further developing these archetypes, we hypothesized additional influences on ability and willingness to change land management/use:

  • Tenure restrictions (particularly short-term leases and crofting tenure, notably common grazing) constrain automatic freedom to change (and reap rewards);
  • Small scale incurs proportionally higher transaction (e.g., application) costs, although transaction costs also deter larger land managers. Small scale also constrains availability of labour/capital/land to make changes.
  • Availability of advisers (particularly for non-traditional topics) perceived as credible and relevant is limited, especially/ in remoter areas.
  • General lack of policy certainty also deters change.
  • Biophysical conditions constrain land use options.
  • Financial circumstances constrain ability to change – but also affect relative importance (leverage) of public funds e.g., market revenues and/or non-land income may matter more, making some land managers less responsive to policy (i.e., opportunity cost vary) even if public funding is generous.
  • All of the previous influences are mediated through cultural identities, social norms and personal motivations – willingness to change will vary within any given category of activity, size, tenure, region, biophysical circumstances and financial circumstances.

Archetype table

Table 6 – Archetypes

Activity

Size

Tenure

Description

Region

Priority*

Crofting

Small

Medium

Large

Crofting Tenant

Crofting Owner

Traditional small-scale sheep and suckler cow producers in highlands and islands LFA area with a small area of arable crops grown for livestock feed on the croft with the livestock grazing on the common grazing (which is shared with multiple crofters in the township). There are around 20,000 crofts in Scotland.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

YES

Grazing (mixed beef and sheep)

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Single or multiple farms managed solely for beef and sheep purposes. Typically, they possess the lowest earnings of any farm types which may limit ability to adopt environmental measures.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Mixed Farm

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Single or multiple farms managed (either all owned or mixture between tenanted and seasonal lets) across Scotland, enterprises vary, from specialist pig, dairy, arable, beef and sheep units to soft fruit and veg growing. Can vary in size/output/profitability.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

YES

Arable

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Single or multiple farms managed solely for arable purposes. Concentrated in the South East/North East and generally make lower profits than other activities such as specialist horticulture and dairy. Around 10% of Scotland’s total agricultural area in 2019 was arable land.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Dairy

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Single or multiple farms managed solely for dairy purposes. Generally the most profitable type of enterprise in Scotland which may increase their ability to adopt environmental practices. Often possess a large environmental impact. In 2021 dairy cows numbered 174,200 in Scotland.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

YES

Intensive pig & poultry

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Single or multiple farms managed solely for pig & poultry purposes. As of 2020 there were 14.4 million poultry and 337 thousand pigs.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Soft fruit

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Single or multiple farms managed solely for soft fruit purposes. In 2020 the estimated total area of soft fruit was 2,200 hectares.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Estate (Multi farm/croft)

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Similar to a farm owner, may employ a factor or a land agent to have day to day responsibility for the land management interests and overseeing the entire estate incl. tenants, will likely have other land based income such as renewables, forestry, holiday/residential lets, sporting etc.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Estate (Sporting)

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Estate that is managed solely for sporting purposes. Willingness to adopt is constrained by the desire to keep sporting estate, e.g. deer and grouse, in its current state. However, environmental management is often a priority for these land managers.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

YES

Estate (Conservation)

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Purchased for environmental ethical reasons, usually removed from agricultural production and returned to nature through rewilding (tree planting, peatland restoration). Pro-environmental goals of land management increase willingness to adopt however unlikely to engage with wider advice.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Charity organisation

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Purchased and managed for environmental reasons, may carryout limited agricultural activity using livestock to graze habitats. Main activity is nature restoration/conservation. Reliance on charitable funding could constrain the ability to adopt.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

YES

Public ownership

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Land owned and managed by public bodies (including Local Authorities). Examples of this could be the MoD, who own 64,900 hectares in Scotland. Normally managed with a primary function in mind, such as training zones.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

 

Estate (Investment)

Small

Medium

Large

Tenant (LDT/SLDT/MLDT)

Tenant (grazing)

Tenant (secure)

Owner

Land managed with investment priorities, either through natural capital (carbon offsetting) or commercial production of timber. Often used to offset internal carbon emissions of large corporations (such as Aviva) and therefore disengaged with wider support systems.

Highlands & Islands

North East

South East

South West

All

YES

*Priority – this column indicates that this archetype was identified as a priority for this research project by the steering group.

Appendix C – Interview methodology

Interview methodology for land use support

A Discussion Guide (see below) for semi-structured interviews was developed and a list of target candidate interviewees was also drawn-up and agreed. Candidate interviewees were chosen to represent recipients of support, providers of information and advice, and academic experts.

Semi-structured interviews were arranged in advance by email and conducted mostly by video conferencing with some conducted by mobile phone. Interviews lasted 25 to 85 minutes and occurred between 17th June and 3rd August 2023. Overall, 25 interviews were conducted with 28 interviewees (plus one by email only). The list of interviewees is shown in the table below.

Written notes were taken during interviews, and subsequently converted into reflective summaries immediately afterwards to capture key insights. The use of formal thematic coding and software analysis was not deployed and, to protect commercial confidentialities, no quotes have been attributed to individual interviewees.

Table 7 – Interviewee’s organisation

Interviewee’s organisation

Principally representing

Confor

Support recipients

Scottish Tenant Farmers Association

Support recipients

Community Land Scotland

Support recipients

NFUS

Support recipients

Rewilding Scotland (email only)

Support recipients

SCF

Support recipients

Milk Suppliers Association

Support recipients

Institute of Auctioneers & Appraisers in Scotland

Support recipients

Scottish Land and Estates

Support recipients

Pasture for Life

Support recipients

RSPB Scotland

Support provider

Lantra

Support provider

Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society

Support provider

South of Scotland Enterprise

Support provider

Independent Forestry Consultant

Support provider

Forest Carbon

Support provider

Peatland Code

Support provider

SAC Consulting

Support provider

ScotFWAG

Support provider

Soil Association

Support provider

Agricultural Industries Confederation

Support provider

Future Ark and FLS non-exec Director

Support provider

University of Leeds

Academic expert

University of Gloucestershire

Academic expert

University of Aberdeen

Academic expert

Royal Agricultural University

Academic expert

James Hutton Institute

Academic expert

As with all efforts to canvass opinion from industry stakeholders, the approach taken was limited by the resources and time available to conduct interviews – further interviews might have produced additional insights. Moreover, it is possible that the profile of interviewees or selective answering of questions by them could bias reported findings. However, there was a high degree of consistency across interviews (and with the literature) in terms of the issues identified, implying that participation was in good faith.

Discussion guide

  • What factors influence land managers’ ability to adopt new management practices and/or land uses?
  • What factors influence land managers’ willingness to adopt new management practices and/or land uses?
  • What types of support are required? What determines engagement with them?
  • What sources of support are available? Any pros and cons for different sources?
  • What mode of (non-funding) support are available? Any pros and cons for different modes?
  • What affects the availability, accessibility and credibility of (non-funding) support?

Appendix D – Literature review methodology

We undertook a focused literature review to identify existing policy and research relating to existing support systems in the agricultural industry in Scotland. In order to conduct a robust, rapid evidence review, key search terms were agreed with the steering group. Search terms were applied to both academic search functions and generic search providers. This ensured a wide range of academic and grey literature was captured. Search terms can be found below in Table 8.

Table 8 – Search terms

Theme 

Search term 

Support systems  

Land manager; support systems, access to funding, grants, loans, barriers to funding, barriers to finance, incentives (Scotland, UK) 

Low-carbon farming; support systems, access to funding, grants, loans, barriers to funding, barriers to finance, incentives (Scotland, UK) 

Financing land support measures (Scotland, UK) 

Land use change support systems (Scotland, UK)  

Green finance and agriculture (Scotland, UK) 

Private finance and agriculture (Scotland, UK) 

Government support of; rural economy, rural environmental objectives, agricultural environmental objectives (Scotland, UK) 

Additional terms for specific support systems: Forestry grant scheme, woodland grants, woodland carbon code, peatland code, conservation funding, peatland advisory services, Peatland Action, Nature restoration fund  (Scotland, UK) 

Land manager decision making and motivations  

Path dependence in Scottish Agriculture.  

Land manager; decision making, motivations, motivations in seeking change, land use change, access to knowledge, access to skills, knowledge sharing, advice, training, information gathering, barriers to change, sunk costs and stranded assets (Scotland, UK) 

Agricultural; decision making, motivations, motivations in seeking change, land use change, access to knowledge, access to skills, knowledge sharing, advice, training, information gathering, barriers to change, sunk costs and stranded assets. (Scotland, UK) 

Land manager; diversification activities. (Scotland, UK) 

Agricultural; diversification activities. (Scotland, UK)  

Land manager; experience of support systems, engagement with support systems, experience of funding, experience with subsidies, experience of applications, experience with support systems. (Scotland, UK)  

Agricultural; experience of support systems, engagement with support systems, experience of funding, experience with subsidies, experience of applications, experience with support systems. (Scotland, UK)  

Key  

Words in bold are the truncated search term, with the phrases following added onto the stem to broaden the use of the stem word.  Where (Scotland, UK) is indicated, these terms will be added to the end of each search term in that group. 

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by LUC on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.


  1. Scottish Greenhouse Gas Statistics 2021. Accessed 15/02/2024



  2. The level of detail offered by stakeholders regarding specific public funding schemes varied, but most suggested that agri-environmental type schemes were more complex to enrol in.



  3. Although in practice there may be some overlap since funding may be made available to facilitate interaction with other forms of support. For example, grants to attend training sessions.



  4. i.e. one advisor to one land manager or one advisor to many land managers



  5. The Pareto principle (also known as the 80/20 rule) states that roughly 80% of outcomes come from 20% of input effort.



  6. For example, the AIC estimates that its members deploy c.125 staff in Scotland under Feed Adviser Register (FAR) system, which compares with c.140 FBBASS accredited advisers.



  7. https://www.ruralpayments.org/



  8. https://www.nature.scot/doc/scotlands-agri-environment-and-climate-scheme-summary



  9. Financial support is normally accompanied by at least the provision of information but sometimes also more interactive advice.



  10. https://www.webarchive.org.uk/wayback/archive/20220804182342/https://www.gov.scot/publications/dairy-sector-climate-change-group-report-2/documents/



  11. https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/independent-report/2021/06/blueprint-sustainable-integrated-farming-crofting-activity-hills-uplands-scotland/documents/hill-upland-crofting-group/hill-upland-crofting-group/govscot%3Adocument/hill-upland-crofting-group.pdf



  12. https://www.hutton.ac.uk/sites/default/files/files/WCC%20Poster%20Website.pdf



  13. https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/corporate-report/2016/12/mackinnon-report/documents/analysis-current-arrangements-consideration-approval-forestry-planting-proposals-pdf/analysis-current-arrangements-consideration-approval-forestry-planting-proposals-pdf/govscot%3Adocument/Analysis%2Bof%2Bcurrent%2Barrangements%2Bfor%2Bthe%2Bconsideration%2Band%2Bapproval%2Bof%2Bforestry%2Bplanting%2Bproposals.pdf



  14. https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/research-and-analysis/2021/03/scottish-land-fund-evaluation/documents/scottish-land-fund-evaluation/scottish-land-fund-evaluation/govscot%3Adocument/scottish-land-fund-evaluation.pdf



  15. https://www.fas.scot/publication-type/ktif-reports/



  16. a very typical example of a certain person or thing.



  17. e.g.: Mustin, K., Newey, S. and Slee, B., 2017. Towards the construction of a typology of management models of shooting opportunities in Scotland. Scottish Geographical Journal, 133(3-4), pp.214-232.; Sutherland, L-A., Barlagne, C. and Barnes, A.P. 2019 Beyond ‘hobby farming’: towards a typology of non-commercial farming; Barnes, AP; Thompson, B; Toma, L. 2022 Finding the ecological farmer: a farmer typology to understand ecological practices within Europe.


Completed in September 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5006

Executive summary

Purpose

Collaborative landscape management is the enhancement of ecosystems via combined efforts of multiple farmers and land managers across a landscape. It has potential to help meet Scottish Government targets associated with addressing biodiversity loss and climate change.

This research, commissioned by Scottish Government, investigated a variety of models and experiences of collaboration to explore how support for collaborative landscape management in Scotland could be provided. This can help inform how such support may be incorporated in the Agricultural Reform Programme and other relevant policy areas.

Key findings

Overall, stakeholders were keen to see that we build on what exists already, rather than reinventing the wheel.

Relevant examples of collaboration in Scotland:

The English farmer cluster model is also considered successful in bringing farmers together and initiating and planning for collaborative activities. This is beginning to be replicated in Scotland, for instance in Strathmore, Moray, Lunan Burn and West Loch Ness, mainly supported by the Game and Wildlife Conservation Trust.

International examples:

Success factors, required support and opportunities

Informed by the main success factors in these examples, as well as their own knowledge and experience, stakeholders identified the following support needs:

  • Facilitation to bring groups together and enable planning, preparation for and implementation of collaborative landscape management approaches. This includes long-term funding and training for facilitators. This could be provided through a mechanism akin to the Countryside Stewardship Facilitation Fund delivered in England by DEFRA, or expanding the Farm Advisory Service.
  • Long-term funding dedicated to incentivising and supporting implementation of collaborative activities. This could include investing in existing collaborative structures, such as farmer clusters, Regional Land Use Partnerships, Landscape Enterprise Networks and Deer Management Groups. Greater accessibility and flexibility of funding are needed to encourage engagement in collaborative landscape management.
  • Encouraging private sector investment to incentivise engagement in collaborative landscape management and enable greater flexibility for context-specific, bespoke projects. This could be encouraged by increasing the scale of FIRNS and completing development of NatureScot’s Landscape Scale Natural Capital Tool. The Scottish Government could also actively broker direct connections between farmers and private-sector organisations.
  • Training, conferences and knowledge sharing to foster a culture of collaboration.
  • Monitoring, evaluation and communication about the benefits of collaborative landscape management approaches. For example, through building on data such as NatureScot’s Ecological Surveys and Natural Capital Tool, as well as community science approaches.
  • Coordinated support for collaboration, both across government policies and between government and other stakeholders. Collaboration may be incentivised by increasing support points in the Agri-Environment Climate Scheme and Nature Restoration Fund.

Gaps and opportunities for future research and innovation

We have found tensions between stakeholders’ preferences for greater incentives and the importance of regulation, as well as between simplicity and flexibility of support mechanisms. Private sector involvement may incentivise flexible collaboration. However, approaches that ensure private-sector-led nature restoration initiatives remain responsible and accountable, whilst making favourable returns on investment, need to be explored.

 

Glossary / Abbreviations table

Collaborative landscape management

Enhancement of ecosystems via the combined efforts of multiple farmers and land managers across a landscape (Westerink et al., 2017).

AECS

Agri-environment climate scheme

Biodiversity

The variability among living organisms from all sources including terrestrial, marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are a part (Intergovernmental Science-Policy Platform on Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services).

CSFF

Countryside Stewardship Facilitation Fund

DMGs

Deer Management Groups

ECAF

Environmental Cooperation Action Fund

Facilitation

Activities provided by an individual or organisation to run meetings, foster relationships, discussions, planning and learning. May also include coordination of administrative tasks for groups of collaborators (Leach and Sabatier, 2003).

FAS

Farm Advisory Service

FIRNS

Facility for Investment Ready Nature in Scotland

GWCT

Game and Wildlife Conservation Trust

LENS

Landscape Enterprise Networks

LEAF

Linking Environment and Farming

Natural capital

Defined by NatureScot as: A term for the habitats and ecosystems that provide social, environmental and economic benefits to humans.

NGOs

Non-governmental organisations

NRF

Nature Restoration Fund

RLUPs

Regional Land Use Partnerships

RSPB

Royal Society for the Protection of Birds

SAOS

Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society

SAC

The Scottish Agriculture Consultants

Acknowledgements

The authors would like to thank all the stakeholders who participated in this study, Antonia Boyce for review and project management support, and Alhassan Ibrahim for review.

Introduction

Context

It is widely acknowledged that transformative change is needed to address biodiversity loss and climate change at pace and at scale. The Scottish Government has therefore set ambitious targets to meet ‘Net Zero’ by 2045 and proposed nature restoration targets for the same period, for inclusion in a Natural Environment Bill. Meeting these targets will require collaboration across the boundaries of individual farms and land holdings, to match land management to the scale of habitats, catchments, and landscapes.

Defining collaborative landscape management

Various definitions of collaborative landscape management exist. For the purpose of this report, we use the definition: enhancement of ecosystems via the combined efforts of multiple farmers and land managers across a landscape (Westerink et al., 2017). Academic literature indicates such approaches can enable positive outcomes for nature and climate change (Kuhfuss et al., 2019), increasing information flows and learning (Prager and Creaney, 2017), as well as reducing the likelihood of conflicting or duplicate efforts by neighbours (Westerink et al., 2017). In so doing, they may offer better value for public money.

However, it cannot be assumed that farmers and land managers are able and willing to collaborate across a landscape. Collaboration requires time and effort. Support mechanisms such as agri-environment schemes have historically been directed at the level of individual farms, rather than at the landscape scale. Scottish Government are therefore keen to understand more about how to create a supportive policy environment for collaborative land management practices.

Existing research on collaboration between farmers indicates that it often depends on long-term relationships and knowledge-sharing, supported by facilitators (Kuhfuss et al., 2019). Where farmer groups already exist, their facilitators are known to be a key influence on farmers’ learning (Prager and Creaney, 2017). The importance of facilitators is also true for other types of landscape-scale collaborations (Waylen et al., 2023). This is especially relevant as other types of landscape-scale partnerships also exist in Scotland, such as Rural Land Use Partnerships (RLUPs), Deer Management Groups (DMGs), and voluntary catchment management partnerships. Ongoing research on collaborative management interventions (JHI-D4-1[1]), in the Scottish Government’s Strategic Research Programme also emphasises the importance of peer-to-peer learning and building on social capital.

There are therefore a variety of models and experiences of collaboration, from which lessons may be drawn. To enable collaborative landscape management for conservation and climate change outcomes, it is therefore important to identify what existing networks and institutions can be built on and how. This will help to establish what approach(es) for supporting collaborative landscape management will be most worthwhile, and feasible, to include in the future agricultural support framework and other policy developments. To assist in understanding how collaborative landscape management can best be supported, the Scottish Government commissioned this CXC study, in which we built on key concepts and insights from the academic literature and explored this issue with key expert stakeholders in Scotland.

Aim

This study engaged with agricultural and conservation stakeholders (including farmers, land managers, conservationists, and academic experts), in Scotland. We explored their expert opinions regarding how collaborative landscape management can be supported to deliver positive outcomes for climate and nature in Scotland. Specifically, we addressed the following research questions:

  1. What examples of effective support for collaborative landscape scale activities may be identified and what lessons may be learned from them?
  2. What should support measures look like, to enable farmers and land-managers to engage in collaborative landscape management? What are their relative advantages and disadvantages? How might they enrich and elaborate on existing approaches?
  3. What are the barriers and opportunities for uptake of collaborative landscape management?
  4. What benefits can collaborative approaches achieve, and how may they be monitored and evaluated?

The research involved stakeholder engagement through an online survey and in-person workshop, both conducted in June 2024. The methodology is explained in Appendix A.

Stakeholders’ experiences of collaborative landscape management

Stakeholders were keen to emphasise the importance of building on what exists already, rather than ‘reinventing the wheel’. This section therefore identifies existing examples of collaborative landscape management and draws lessons from them in terms of what is working well and what is challenging.

Examples of success

Stakeholders identified a range of examples of collaborative landscape approaches that they perceived as successful, within Scotland, across the UK, and internationally. Existing examples in Scotland included the following:

  • The Facility for Investment Ready Nature in Scotland (FIRNS), delivered by NatureScot in collaboration with the Scottish Government. FIRNS is currently supporting 29 projects to improve their readiness to attract private sector investment. FIRNS is also stimulating flows of information and relationship-building via its ‘Community of Practice’ forum.
  • The Deer Management Groups are helping to pool information about landscape-scale biodiversity and are encouraging collaboration by bringing people together to work on a common issue (deer management). Groups are entirely different in composition but all work at landscape scale. Initially, this was primarily to manage a single resource (deer), but over the last ten years there has been a shift towards landscape planning in the public interest, including peatland restoration, woodlands and communities. These collaborative mechanisms have been well established but are currently facing a lack of funding for continuation of this work.
  • The Tweed Forum are carrying out a great amount of work around river management through building trust among different stakeholders, to engage them in landscape-scale nature restoration. They have successfully improved water quality at the catchment scale, via a collaborative approach.
  • The Working for Waders initiative in Strathspey is an example of an environmental NGO funded landscape scale project. It involves a range of different stakeholders, including farmers and the Royal Society for the Protection of Birds (RSPB), to protect and restore habitat for waders in Scotland.
  • The ‘Findhorn Watershed Initiative’ have achieved success in winning Just Transition funding to support building partnerships among different stakeholders for collaborative landscape management approaches. This funding allows for not just the restoration work but also building social capital and socio-economic aspects.
  • The Dee Invasive Non-Native Species Project (DINNs) has a lot of farmers working collaboratively and has good examples of large-scale projects that have achieved funding with relative ease. They were described as ‘doing what they say on the tin’ within their work, one example being bringing people together to collaborate on the removal of Himalayan Balsam (an invasive plant species) in their landscape.
  • The Cairngorms Nature Index (CNI), built on an example from The Norwegian Institute for Nature Research (NINA), collects data around health of habitats, species and ecosystems and attempts to put it into a standardised format that people can draw on. This has potential to inform clusters in the areas, however this link is not currently there.

The main example from England, which stakeholders spoke highly of, was farmer clusters:

A wide range of international examples of collaborative landscape management were cited. The full list is included in Appendix B. Some key examples included:

  • Landscape Enterprise Networks are helping to build networks of farmers and land managers in multiple countries.
  • The FASB initiative in Brazil is supporting local-level nature restoration initiatives by creating collaborative working groups, facilitating peer-to-peer learning, and supporting existing local-level initiatives.
  • The Cevennes National Park in France is achieving strong engagement from landowners, by working hand-in-hand with them.
  • The EU Interreg Partridge project was considered successful in ensuring consistency for managing species across landscapes.
  • The Netherlands is generally considered to have a strong culture of collaboration among farmers. Indeed, collaboration is compulsory for some types of agricultural support.

What is working well?

We draw the following lessons from the above examples of success, regarding what is working well in supporting collaborative landscape management.

Facilitation

The examples of success emphasise the importance of providing a forum for groups of farmers, land managers and other stakeholders to come together in the first place, share ideas, plan and build trusting relationships. One survey respondent emphasised the importance of leadership and building trust: “…a note about how important it is to have trusted people in the area you’re working in, well respected. Leadership and trust is important.” Farmer clusters have been particularly successful in England for encouraging local collaboration between landowners. The perceived success of these English farmer clusters was largely attributed to the fact they can benefit from the CSFF, which supports the time and resources needed for facilitators to arrange meetings, create opportunities for information sharing and conduct administrative tasks. This can help bring farmers and land managers together, in the first place, to agree objectives and plan for long-term and evolving goals/projects to maintain engagement within the group.

Bespoke projects

Bringing groups of farmers and land managers together around a specific, common issue can be particularly effective, as this helps provide a clear reason and motivation for why collaborative landscape management is needed. If different farmers and land managers are able to relate with each other around challenges that they are facing, this can encourage strong relationships between them. The Tweed Forum was raised, by both conservation organisations and farmers, as an example of positive work being carried out around river management. It has focused on bringing local land managers and farmers together to tackle issues such as water quality and run-off. Their approach centres on strong leadership and trust building. Similarly, the Riverwoods project was mentioned as a successful network working towards creation of riverbank woodlands and healthy river systems across Scotland. The Deer Management Groups described themselves as a particular example of a bespoke arrangement, in that they bring people together to work on the specific issue of deer management. “… we represent 50 deer management groups which cover something like 3 million hectares of the uplands, the groups are entirely different in composition but all of them working at landscape scale, initially to manage a resource, which was deer”. Other examples that focused on management of a particular issue included management of beavers, management of habitats for partridge in the EU Interreg project, and removal of Himalayan Balsam in the Dee catchment. A farmer representative used these examples to argue that one-size-fits-all approaches are not always appropriate. He thus emphasised the importance of tailoring collaborative landscape management to specific contexts.

Forums for sharing and learning

Forums for sharing knowledge and experience were considered factors for success in several of the examples above. Such forums can help communicate the benefits of collaborative landscape management, as well as enable learning that could help others to achieve these benefits elsewhere. The FIRNS ‘Community of Practice’ was considered a useful forum by many stakeholders. This focuses on ensuring farmers, land managers and other stakeholders are informed and able to engage in, and see benefits from, environmental markets and private investment in natural capital. For instance, a representative from Bioregioning Tayside suggested that the “community of practice model has been very effective across Scotland and a smaller ‘sister’ fund to FIRNS would be helpful”. A Leven LENS representative stressed that whilst the term ‘communities of practice’ has become a slight buzzword, communities of practice are really important for building channels of communication. Examples of other successful forums included ‘study tours’ (in which farmers visit others in another location to share knowledge and learning), the CSFF conference in England, and the Farm Advisory Service (FAS), which helps farmers to stay informed of new initiatives as they come onstream.

Integrated support

Involving various stakeholder groups in supporting collaborative landscape management was also a factor in the success of the examples above. This includes involving stakeholders beyond just government and the agriculture sector. For instance, LENS are bringing private and public-sector organisations together to broker negotiations, and eventually transactions for organising the buying and selling of nature-based solutions. The Working with Waders project is achieving success in Strathspey, through funding from non-governmental organisations (NGOs) and collaboration between NGOs and farmers. Projects like this show that NGOs are willing to collaborate on and fund projects, and that involving a wide range of stakeholders can generally increase capacity for collaborative landscape management in Scotland.

What is challenging?

The catalogue of successful examples of collaborative landscape management signifies that there is a breadth of positive collaboration taking place, which may be learned from and built upon. However, stakeholders also highlighted significant challenges faced for promoting collaborative landscape management approaches, which are explained as follows.

Inadequate facilitation and limited culture of collaboration

Stakeholders perceived poor facilitation and poor communication as preventative to collaboration. For long-term collaboration to work, stakeholders considered the choice of facilitator and engagement methods as key, suggesting consultations cannot be the only engagement method moving forwards. Collaborative projects benefit from a trustworthy, engaging, non-biased and pragmatic facilitator, who regularly stays in touch with participants and is willing to adapt their facilitation method based on the group’s needs. In the workshop, stakeholders perceived that support for facilitation is currently limited, which limits the availability of skilled facilitators to effectively support collaborations.

Stakeholders acknowledged that there is not generally a culture of collaboration between different farmers and land managers, or between the different government and non-governmental sectors involved in supporting collaborative landscape management, due to a historical culture of competition. The current competitive culture results in situations where new approaches, data and technologies are being copyrighted for individual financial gain, rather than shared and used collaboratively with other farmers and landowners for common benefit. Stakeholders in the survey, suggested this can result in hesitancy to engage and trust in new processes, as well as lose out on the benefits of collaboration between different sectors and organisations. For example, the projects listed in Section 5.1 show that NGOs are willing to work with farmers to fund and support collaborative projects. However, they do not currently benefit from agricultural support, which could widen their impact.

Unsuitable funding mechanisms

Our findings revealed a perception, among stakeholders, that current agricultural support is not suitable for supporting collaborative landscape management. Stakeholders consider existing agricultural support, particularly Agri-Environment Climate Scheme (AECS) and Nature Restoration Fund payments, as complicated, restrictive and competitive. This was considered a challenge for engaging in any kind of positive management for biodiversity and the climate, including collaborative approaches. According to stakeholders, the process of acquiring funding has a tendency to be extremely complex and time consuming, with ineffective mechanisms for distributing or releasing funds in a timely manner. Stakeholders also indicated that there is a lack of legal and legislative knowledge amongst farmers and landowners, and this is limiting their ability to apply for funding. Applications for funding, therefore, require a huge amount of effort and monetary investment. Indeed, the costs of initiating collaborations and preparing applications for grants and incentives, were considered significant challenges for engaging in collaborative landscape management. For example, a representative from the Deer Management Groups cited the financial burden of simply preparing an application as a major disincentive for farmers to engage in collaborative landscape management.

Stakeholders considered the competitive nature of funding to exacerbate this, as there are significant costs involved in starting-up and applying for funding, but limited chance of success. Farmer representatives, in particular, agreed that when funding is competitive many farmers simply will not bother applying, as the high cost of applications, combined with the high risk of failure, simply makes it not worthwhile. Multiple stakeholders agreed this structure puts smaller farmers and land managers at a disadvantage and favours large landowners, who have sufficient time and resources for making applications and absorbing fines that could occur through mistakes.

Stakeholders also perceived that, with the exception of getting extra points for collaborative projects in AECS, there is currently a lack of funding designed specifically to support collaboration. Stakeholders expressed concerns that existing grant funding is short term in nature (e.g. for AECS is only a 5-year agreement), which does not lend itself to building collaborations or implementing long term changes at a landscape scale. Additionally, AECS funding is points-based, meaning farmers are in competition with each other to meet the points threshold. This was considered a disincentive to engaging in collaboration.

Existing mechanisms for supporting collaboration were also considered too restrictive, in terms of the types of landscape management options that could be funded. Stakeholders emphasised that a one-size-fits-all approach will never work, and policy support for collaborative landscape management must take this into account. A farmer representative highlighted the geographic differences across landscapes and catchments. He emphasised that even the top of a hill and the bottom of the hill can be very different, and different landowners will have different needs. This is true not just of the physical landscape but also in farming techniques, revenue, or funding streams. As one survey response stated: “Single outcome objectives can limit participation and success”.

Siloed and top-down governance

Stakeholders raised further challenges, related to the approach taken by government, that they thought were hindering support for collaborative landscape management. In the workshop, although farmer representatives stated that the Government has been very imaginative, and that successes should not be forgotten, they also highlighted shortcomings in the Government’s approach. Stakeholders expressed a sentiment that the Government have not listened to them enough, despite continually providing feedback. They perceived this top-down approach from government as perpetuating power imbalances that favour some views about land use and management, over others, and do not offer any real help for farmers.

There was also a feeling that current policy exists in a siloed system in which agriculture, forestry and biodiversity policy do not interact. This can result in complexity and contested interests between different siloes and thus reduce political will and ability to act in support of collaborative landscape management. Some stakeholders, such as a representative from Scottish Environment LINK in the workshop, thought that existing initiatives were “very messy at the government level”. He argued that there are too many different targets and proposed initiatives, which, at the level of implementation at the landscape scale: “no one knows how it is supposed to fit together”. Some agricultural stakeholders also suggested that policies such as the Wildlife Bill and the Land Reform Agenda actually discourage collaboration, because they encourage fragmentation of land ownership.

Limited evidence for the benefits of collaborative landscape management

Stakeholders highlighted that there is limited awareness of successful examples of collaborative landscape management projects and their impacts. They considered this a barrier to promoting favourable attitudes and motivations for collaborative landscape management approaches. It is not always possible to imagine something you have never seen, and positive examples are needed for farmers and land managers to understand the potential benefits of collaborative landscape management. For example, a representative from Bioregioning Tayside felt that a lack of awareness around existing solutions has led to a lack of comprehension around how land could be managed to help deal with extreme weather events. Some stakeholders also highlighted successful landscape collaboration projects along the River Spey and the River Dee, but stressed that their impacts are limited by a lack of communication and knowledge-sharing amongst one another.

Stakeholders’ needs and aspirations for collaborative landscape management

Stakeholders were forthcoming in suggesting the types of support that they thought would enable and enhance collaborative landscape management. This section discusses the types of support that were suggested, as well as potential opportunities that could be taken.

What types of support are needed?

Stakeholders suggested a range of support mechanisms that they thought would help to deliver positive outcomes for climate and nature in Scotland

Support for facilitation of collaboration

Stakeholders considered facilitation as essential for organising collaborative landscape management approaches. This was considered important by stakeholders from across the range of perspectives represented in both the workshop and the survey. When asked how important facilitation of collaboration was for collaborative landscape management, 17 of 20 survey respondents agreed it was essential, with the remaining 3 suggesting it was somewhat important, as shown in Figure 1.

Facilitators can help, practically, to bring farmers and land managers together, from across a landscape, and help them to form groups that engage in collaborative activities together. In the survey responses, farmers, in particular, emphasised the importance of facilitators engaging with individuals, not just in a group setting, providing opportunities for social interaction, and establishing the conditions under which groups of farmers would be willing to collaborate. Others emphasised the importance of facilitators for building trust and long-term relationships, and who listen to and understand local needs and aspirations. For instance, a representative of a conservation NGO, stated: “To enable the group to come together and get underway, there needs to be a person who is good at bringing the group together and keeping them together.”

Facilitators were considered useful for helping groups of farmers and land managers set clear goals and expectations, incorporating different individual goals and expectations. This was emphasised by another representative of a conservation NGO in the survey: “There needs to be clear objectives and purpose established from the start, so everyone is clear as to why they are collaborating and what outcomes are expected. There should be a clear project plan with clear timelines”. In the workshop, it was suggested that encouraging facilitators to develop formally constituted agreements with groups they work with, can help encourage those groups to take risks associated with collaboration.

Stakeholders also thought that facilitators can help build the capacity of groups to ‘get things done’. This includes helping farmers and land managers to collect data for assessing biodiversity on their land, and then preparing maps and models of collaborative projects and their intended effects. It also includes supporting applications for funding to support collaborative landscape management projects, by conveying information and guidance about funding schemes, and then ensuring applications are prepared correctly, and in a professional format (which one existing farmer cluster facilitator stressed as highly important when groups are first starting up).

Stakeholders recognised that effective facilitation requires skilled individuals and appropriate investment in their training, time and resources. Facilitators need a wide-ranging set of skills, including: project management, mapping, monitoring and evaluation, diplomacy to manage competing interests, awareness of funding schemes, experience of funding applications, a combined understanding of both agricultural economics and biodiversity, and an ability to draw information from across relevant sectors. Stakeholders therefore stressed that facilitators themselves need to be supported, through training, and funding to pay for their time, skills and training.

In the survey, we asked stakeholders how long they thought support for facilitation of collaborative landscape management projects should last. As shown in Figure 2, the highest proportion of respondents thought support for facilitation should last 2-5 years (n=7), and the second highest proportion thought support should last 5-10 years (n=5). This emphasises the value of long-term support for facilitation.

Funding to incentivise and implement collaborative activities

Perhaps unsurprisingly stakeholders, across the board, considered financial incentives and funding for implementation as imperative for supporting farmers and land managers to engage in collaborative landscape management activities. As noted in Section 5.3, stakeholders considered existing agricultural support schemes, such as Agri-Environment Climate Schemes (AECS) and Nature Restoration Fund (NRF) as currently unsuited for supporting collaboration. There was therefore a strong push for ‘holistic’ funding for landscape-scale collaboration that would cover support for the full range of different aspects involved in collaborative landscape management. This included:

  • Start-up funding to help form groups in the first place.
  • Capital funding to help groups acquire resources, such as machinery, and other materials needed to implement a collaborative project.
  • Revenue funding for ongoing land management.
  • Funding for tasks such as mapping and surveying biodiversity.
  • Funding for administrative tasks such as writing and formatting applications.
  • Funding for monitoring, evaluation and knowledge sharing.
  • Funding for communications and publicity.

Farmers, especially, stressed financial incentives as the single most important support measure for encouraging collaborative landscape management. However, they suggested that it is essential for funding to align with farmers’ interests, rather than simply being lucrative. In the workshop, one cluster farmer stated, strongly: “the motivation to do the best for the environment is there, but the support is not coming. The government need to up their game and provide incentives. Farmers will go along, as long as they are paid, but we need help to do that”.

All stakeholders did recognise, however, that such holistic funding for collaborative landscape management would be expensive, and thus thought it would be challenging for public sector funding alone to provide this. In both the survey and the workshop, stakeholders showed interest in private sector investment as an alternative, or additional, source of funding for supporting collaborative landscape management. One advantage of this, that stakeholders identified, is that many businesses already have environmental targets and are ready and willing to invest in efforts to improve biodiversity and climate change outcomes. This may be for financial benefits (through nature finance), or to improve their reputation. Representatives from the Deer Management Groups and LENS explained that they are already working successfully with investment from private businesses, whilst several stakeholders cited FIRNS as an initiative that could help to build opportunities for private sector investment. One stakeholder, from Bioregioning Tayside, suggested that the government could encourage access to private sector funding by facilitating direct connections between groups of farmers and corporations with an interest in investing in them (such as large supermarkets). Another stakeholder, from a land agency cautioned about over-reliance on the private sector, noting that private sector investment is profit-driven and can make nature a marketable commodity.

The survey asked respondents to rank the importance of support for implementation of a collaborative landscape management project, shown in Figure 3. The highest proportion thought support should last 5-10 years (n=7) and the second highest proportion thought it should last for 2-5 years (n=6). This indicates the importance of medium-to-long-term support for collaborative landscape management projects to be successful.

Education and advocacy

Whilst there was universal agreement on the importance of financial incentives, in the workshop, several stakeholders noted the importance of creating longer-term changes in attitudes and behaviour. Some stakeholders suggested that farmers, land managers, and others whose businesses depend on land and agriculture, need to understand the potential benefits of collaborative approaches to nature restoration for their business models. For example, crop production benefits from the presence of pollinating insects, so there is an inherent benefit to crop farmers managing land to protect those insects at the landscape scale. One stakeholder even questioned whether farmers and land managers should receive payment in instances where biodiversity is good for their businesses. However, there was some disagreement with this, especially from farmers, who argued that they already have the knowledge and motivation for nature restoration, they just need the funding.

Increasing flows of knowledge, information and learning about the benefits of biodiversity emerged as an important incentive, in addition to funding. This was considered a potential opportunity to encourage longer-term changes in attitudes and motivations that would promote management of land for positive nature restoration and climate change outcomes. Such changes could reduce dependence on financial incentives for collaborative landscape management. This emphasises the importance of increasing the visibility of successful collaborative projects, including through communication between projects and increasing opportunities for advocacy and information sharing.

Collaborative culture

In the workshop, several stakeholders suggested ways in which a collaborative culture may be encouraged in Scotland. A farmer representative pointed to the French agricultural support system as a positive example of a collaboration being encouraged. There was also some discussion around the idea that collaboration could be made compulsory to ensure it happens. A farmer representative asserted that this could be necessary, because in cases where voluntary schemes for collaboration have ended, collaborative action has stopped, or even been reversed. Such a compulsory approach is taken in the Netherlands, where there is a long history of group/cluster development, apparently with some success. However, for a compulsory approach to be successful in Scotland, stakeholders thought there would be a need for major group development across farmers and land managers. The idea of a compulsory approach was also criticised by a land agent, who thought it would be politically undesirable to implement and enforce. A representative from Scottish Land and Estates suggested a culture of collaboration could be created through a compromise of points-based awards for collaboration within Tier 2 agricultural support payments and then making collaboration compulsory in Tier 3 support. This was contested by a conservation NGO, as points for collaboration already exist in AECS and the NRF. Nonetheless, these points systems could be increased in scale, to incentivise collaborative activities.

Simplicity and flexibility.

As explained in Section 5.3, there was a strong sentiment, across all of the participating stakeholders, that current support measures, such as AECS, are too complicated to effectively support collaborative landscape management. There is therefore huge demand for simplified application processes. As shown in Figure 4, 17 survey respondents considered the accessibility of application processes to be essential, whilst the remaining 3 considered it somewhat important.

Stakeholders also wanted to see greater flexibility, in terms of the types of landscape management options for biodiversity restoration that farmers can access support for. Stakeholders highlighted a need for different types of collaboration in different landscapes for different purposes, and a need for bespoke funding, information and facilitation to be tailored to different contexts. For example, one representative from Bioregioning Tayside called for measures that “allow for agency and different interpretations, depending on context.” Similarly, one member of a farmer cluster suggested a need for different measures, and different governance structures, for collaboration in different regions, citing an example from France, in which different regions are supported in different ways. Another cluster farmer contended that flexibility is needed within specific landscapes, not just across different regions, and suggested that support measures could be tailored to specific habitats. Specific options that stakeholders wanted to see funding for included: planting trees, using grasslands to sequester carbon, mixed livestock and forest farming, reducing fertiliser use, and adoption of hydrogen as a fuel.

There were also calls for flexibility in terms of allowing for the fact that mistakes might be made during the implementation of collaborative landscape management approaches. Farmers were keen not to be punished too harshly for this and thought greater lenience would help reduce the risk of them engaging in collaborative landscape management. This was considered especially important for encouraging smaller farmers and land managers to engage in nature restoration. Stakeholders from Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society (SAOS) and Bioregioning Tayside thought the government needed to ‘let go’ of its risk aversion and accept that not all projects will work.

These calls for simplicity and flexibility must, obviously, be measured against a need for regulation and accountability, to ensure that collaborative landscape management is done effectively and makes best use of public funds. This was acknowledged by stakeholders, to some extent, though there was a strong push to favour flexibility and incentives over regulation. There is also a potential tension between demands for flexibility and demands for simplicity. The greater the variety of options that are offered, the greater the complexity of support required.

Integrated approach

Stakeholders indicated a need for clear and joined-up support and advice from Scottish Government. In the survey, 16 out of 20 survey respondents felt that navigating complex and contested interests and priorities was essential, the remaining 4 felt it was somewhat important, as shown in Figure 5, below.

Taking an integrated approach to designing and implementing support, as well as governance of collaborative landscape management was considered a solution that could help navigate this complexity and contestation, as well as balance flexibility with accountability and simplicity. Stakeholders strongly suggested that for policies to successfully support collaborative landscape management, they must be joined-up and ensure they complement each other. To aid this, stakeholders wanted to see greater integration of different sectors, policies and government departments, as well as regular and meaningful engagement with stakeholders, to listen to their needs. For example, non-governmental organisations, such as the RPSB, LENs, Bioregioning Tayside and the Deer Management Groups, who are already doing collaborative work with farmers and land managers at a landscape scale, stated they would benefit from increased collaboration with the government and agricultural sector. Such a collaborative approach was perceived, by stakeholders, as advantageous, because working across sectors could help to improve simplicity and efficiency of support for collaborative land management, as well as build on existing efforts to increase the scale of collaborative landscape management. However, there could be a danger that involvement of other sectors could diminish support for agriculture. Some stakeholders were therefore careful to ensure that agricultural funding stays ringfenced.

Monitoring, evaluation and knowledge-sharing

Stakeholders also emphasised the importance of support for monitoring and evaluation of collaborative landscape management approaches. In particular, they thought this should involve support for understanding and mapping the biodiversity that exists in a landscape, and then assessing the impacts of collaborative projects on this biodiversity, over time. Stakeholders suggested a range of approaches for understanding the success or efficacy of collaborative landscape management projects. This included more informal opportunities for learning and sharing knowledge, as well as more structured approaches to formal monitoring and evaluation. In terms of learning and sharing knowledge, ‘study tours’ (where groups of farmers visit farmers in another location to learn from each other), and forums such as conferences and the FIRNS ‘community of practice’, were considered important for encouraging reflection and learning about collaborative landscape management. Stakeholders suggested several potential benefits of such opportunities for learning and sharing knowledge. In the workshop, one land agent thought they could help farmers and land managers understand what work is needed to manage landscapes for nature restoration in their local areas, and understanding how collaborations may be set up. A cluster farmer thought they could be used for sharing how business and funding decisions and agreements are made.

In terms of more formal, or structured, monitoring and evaluation, the importance of setting ‘baselines’ and maps of the biodiversity that exists in a landscape, at the start of a project, were considered essential by a range of stakeholders in both the survey and the workshop. For instance, a survey respondent from a conservation NGO stated that monitoring and evaluation should be conducted: “on a project scale by establishing the baseline and then how the project has moved beyond this”. In other words, farmers and land managers should establish what biodiversity exists in a landscape at the outset of a project, and then assess the success of the project according to whether and by how much biodiversity improves during the implementation of the project. This was reflected by similar suggestions across the survey and the workshop, with stakeholders indicating a need for farmers to be assisted in producing such baselines and associated maps. However, a GWCT representative in the workshop contended that such baselines of biodiversity need to be conducted at the level of individual farms, before they can be done at the landscape scale.

As is often the case when discussing approaches for monitoring and evaluation, there was tension between assessing standardised indicators of biodiversity and exploring more contextual, qualitative experiences. In the survey, several respondents, across different perspectives, called for monitoring and evaluation in relation to general standards of biodiversity, such as standardised ‘measurement, recording and verification’ frameworks. In contrast, other survey respondents emphasised the importance of context-specific monitoring and evaluation that takes specific, landscape-scale objectives into account and includes qualitative data regarding people’s relationships with the landscape and the biodiversity within it. One farmer specifically objected to ‘simplified biodiversity metrics.’ A respondent from a conservation NGO suggested that monitoring and evaluation should include recreational and cultural elements, as well as those related to biodiversity and climate outcomes. This was reflected by the strong sentiment in the workshop around the importance of flexibility and context-specific approaches. Striking a balance between standardised and context-specific approaches to monitoring and evaluation therefore remains a challenge.

Opportunities for supporting collaboration

Further to the needs for support, outlined above, stakeholders suggested several opportunities for improving support for collaborative landscape management. Again, stakeholders were keen to emphasise the importance of building on existing efforts, rather than ‘reinventing the wheel’.

Existing structures for enabling collaboration

Stakeholders suggested several existing initiatives that could be invested in to help consolidate and encourage uptake of collaborative landscape management approaches. Farmer clusters, which were considered a successful example of collaborative landscape management approaches, are beginning to be developed in Scotland. Thus far, these have largely been supported by the Game and Wildlife Conservation Trust, and exist in Strathmore, Moray, Lunan Burn, and West Loch Ness. Efforts are also underway to develop LENs in Leven and elsewhere. Stakeholders also suggested that the Regional Land Use Partnerships and Deer Management Groups already have structures in place for encouraging collaboration, and these could be built upon. Several stakeholders suggested that investment in these existing structures for networking and collaboration should be increased, particularly the Regional Land Use Partnerships (RLUPs) and FIRNS Community of Practice. Funds such as the Just Transition Fund may also be used to support building partnerships, as in the given example of the Findhorn Watershed Initiative.

Funding and training for facilitators

For supporting facilitation, specifically, stakeholders advocated for the English Countryside Stewardship Facilitation Fund’ (CSFF) to be adopted in Scotland. Some also highlighted that some support for facilitation was included in the Environmental Cooperation Action Fund (ECAF), although this closed in 2017, without having issued any funding. Some stakeholders suggested something similar could be incorporated into Scottish Government’s Tier 1 and Tier 2 agricultural support mechanisms. In terms of providing training to create a cadre of skilled facilitators, the Farm Advisory Service (FAS) were considered well-placed to contribute to this. Their services already include communicating and explaining new support schemes as they come online. It was suggested this could be expanded to provide opportunities for learning and training for facilitators, as well as delivering proactive facilitation of collaborative projects.

Incentives and funding for implementation

Stakeholders were keen for funding and financial incentives to support collaborative landscape management approaches. In terms of financial incentives for farmers to engage in collaborative activities, stakeholders considered the current incorporation of points for collaborative projects within Agri-environment Climate Scheme (AECS) payments as a positive, and suggested that the availability of points for collaboration should be expanded. Similarly, several stakeholders suggested including a collaborative element in the Nature Restoration Fund. Incentivising collaborative landscape management within the Basic Payment Scheme was also considered an opportunity.

Private sector investment

Many stakeholders, particularly those representing agri-environment NGOs, acknowledged that providing holistic financial support for collaborative landscape management would be expensive. It may not be possible for such support to be entirely provided by the public sector. Stakeholders were therefore keen to see greater private sector investment to support incentivisation and implementation of collaborative landscape management activities. Conservation NGOs highlighted that current ‘rewilding’ initiatives are already funded mostly through private business, including foreign investors. Exploring similar opportunities to support collaborative landscape management could therefore offer a solution to increasing financial incentives for this.

Various stakeholders highlighted opportunities to incentivise private companies to support collaborative landscape management. Some thought food companies could partner with or invest in collaborative groups of farmers, particularly local businesses operating within the same landscape. This was also thought to result in shorter supply chains, which could further complement biodiversity and climate goals. Others thought larger businesses (such as large supermarkets or chain restaurants) could be encouraged to build reputational capital in Scotland at a large scale, by investing in biodiversity and climate outcomes. Stakeholders highlighted that most businesses now have environmental targets and have an interest in contributing to positive outcomes for nature and climate. However, they still need a push from Government to take the initiative. Some stakeholders thought the role of Scottish Government could be to facilitate direct connections between farmer groups and private sector funders, whilst others suggested mandating companies to conduct ‘nature impact disclosures’ could push them to invest in nature restoration.

Existing initiatives that encourage private sector investment in natural capital were also considered useful for stimulating private sector investment. In particular, stakeholders spoke positively about the Facility for Investment Ready Nature in Scotland (FIRNS), and saw increasing the investment and scale of this as an opportunity for supporting collaborative landscape management. A ‘Landscape Scale Natural Capital Tool’, is also being developed by NatureScot, to assess and value natural capital assets across a landscape. There was a strong appetite, particularly among those representing farmer clusters, for further development of this, in partnership with private companies who have nature restoration goals. Some agricultural stakeholders also highlighted the opportunity for new forms of land tenancy, in which natural capital gets integrated into the value of a farm. They thought this could incentivise groups of farmers to collaborate, to increase the value of natural capital across a landscape.

Advocacy and education

Increasing advocacy, education and information flows was considered a useful approach for highlighting the benefits of collaborative landscape management for nature and climate, as well as businesses that depend on the land for productivity. Several stakeholders suggested that building on the existing approach taken by the FAS could be an opportunity to promote this. The FAS already help to communicate and explain information about new initiatives, as they come onstream. Stakeholders therefore considered them well-placed to facilitate communication and sharing of information about successful examples of collaborative landscape management projects, as well as improving understanding of the benefits of managing landscapes for positive nature and climate outcomes. Other suggested opportunities to increase knowledge and information flows about collaborative landscape management included: advocacy campaigns and training, conferences, ‘study tours’, and ‘place-based apprenticeships’ to increase awareness of environmental challenges for young farmers.

Some agricultural representatives also proposed that the farming media, and events, such as the Royal Highland Show, could do more to communicate the benefits of collaborative landscape management and provide recognition of successful collaborations. Printed, online or, podcast media, particularly those that farmers are actively listening to, represent an opportunity to highlight the need for collaborative landscape management. The wider group was in agreement and a representative from Scottish Land and Estates suggested their ‘Helping it Happen’ awards could incorporate a collaboration category to reward and promote collaborative approaches.

Creating a culture of collaboration

The opportunities presented above emphasise the importance and potential benefits of building on existing initiatives. Stakeholders were keen for a culture of collaboration to be created, in which all stakeholders are involved. Several stakeholders commended this engagement, as a useful step in taking stock of existing collaborations and involving stakeholders in planning support for collaborative landscape management. They were therefore keen for further such engagements. Some stakeholders, such as LENs and the Strathmore Farmer Cluster thought that accreditation of collaborative groups as ‘trusted operators’ would help consolidate their positions and encourage further collaboration. Stakeholders thought that greater integration across policies, as well as across sectors would help encourage collaboration. However, stakeholders acknowledged this is complex and agreed that agricultural support must remain ringfenced.

Monitoring and evaluation

Stakeholders also suggested several existing initiatives that could be built on to assist monitoring and evaluation of collaborative landscape management approaches. Farmer cluster groups were again highlighted as examples of best practice, in this case for developing standards and creating opportunities for data collection. For example, the Strathmore Cluster are currently using hand-held mapping systems for mapping key species. Deer Management Groups were also raised as an existing structure that could help to lead, pool and disseminate data. Similarly, Bioregioning Tayside are using ‘community science’, to involve local communities in monitoring biodiversity in their local area. Stakeholders thought such approaches could be useful for monitoring the effects of collaborative landscape management on biodiversity.

Increasing ‘open access’ to data, mapping and modelling also has the potential to help land managers and communities understand why change is needed. The Landscape Scale Natural Capital Tool, being developed by NatureScot was considered a useful initiative to support access to data. This is taking a holistic approach to recording different elements of a landscape, and their condition, such as soil types, or water quality. This tool could prove useful for understanding and mapping what is needed for positive outcomes for nature and climate, and could be used by collaborative groups to plan and set goals. Open access to such data could also allow groups to feel some ownership over it. However, stakeholders did raise the question of how and by whom data collection and mapping should be paid for. Some emphasised the fact that this too needs to be funded and facilitated.

Other useful data sources that stakeholders suggested, included ecological surveys and apps being rolled out by NatureScot, as part of the Agricultural Reform Programme, and the Linking Environment And Farming (LEAF) Sustainable Farming Review or data platforms like Omnia (a digital information tool for supporting farm management). One participant indicated that mobile apps for recording biodiversity, are being developed for biodiversity credit schemes. Several stakeholders also indicated that bringing in independent reviewers, such as universities and expert ecologists, could help to support monitoring and evaluation.

Conclusions

In this section, we draw conclusions in relation to what is currently working well, what is needed and what opportunities may be built upon for supporting collaborative landscape management. We also highlight some gaps and opportunities for further research and innovation. The conclusions are based on the input from stakeholders in this study. They are particularly relevant to the Scottish Government’s Agricultural Reform Programme but may also be relevant to other groups with resources and capacity to support collaborative landscape management.

What is working well?

It is important to build on existing initiatives and avoid reinventing the wheel. Successful collaborations in Scotland provide examples for how to bring people together and build relationships across landscapes and could thus be supported to build on their existing work. Stakeholders also consider that the English farmer cluster model works well. This is beginning to be replicated in Scotland. The main factors supporting these examples’ success were support for facilitation, bespoke projects that bring people together to work on an issue of common interest, forums for sharing knowledge and experience, and an integrated approach to supporting collaboration.

What support is needed?

Although the examples of success are encouraging, stakeholders thought that collaborative landscape management is currently hindered by limited support for facilitation, scarcity of suitable incentives and funding for implementation, poorly integrated approaches to support, and limited evidence of successful collaborations. Overall, Scotland was considered to lack a collaborative culture among farmers and land managers.

Facilitators are required to bring groups together and enable planning, preparing for and implementation of collaborative landscape management approaches. Support for facilitators is therefore required in the form of training, to develop their skillsets, as well as funding to pay for their time and skills.

Stakeholders also require incentives and long-term funding for development and implementation of collaborative landscape management activities. Encouraging private sector investment could act as an incentive, as well as supplementing public sector funding for implementation of collaborative activities. Balancing accessibility and flexibility of funding, with quality control and regulation, is a challenge, but stakeholders strongly thought that greater accessibility and flexibility are needed to encourage engagement in collaborative landscape management. Support for bespoke projects, perhaps utilising private sector funding, or tailored support for different landscapes and regions could help resolve this.

Education and advocacy are considered necessary to change attitudes and highlight the benefits of collaborative landscape management. This would be aided by support for monitoring and evaluation that demonstrates the effects of collaborative approaches. A culture of collaboration may also be fostered through an integrated approach to supporting collaborative landscape management. Stakeholders are keen for integrated policies within government, as well as involvement of actors beyond those directly involved in government and the agriculture sector.

What opportunities exist?

Existing examples of collaborative structures, such as farmer clusters, Regional Land Use Partnerships, Landscape Enterprise Networks and Deer Management Groups may be used as foundations for future collaborative landscape management approaches. Investing in them could thus help to consolidate and enhance uptake of collaborative landscape management approaches.

Funding for facilitation may be supported by adapting the English Countryside Stewardship Facilitation Fund for Scotland. The approach of the Farm Advisory Service could be elaborated to include training a cadre of skilled facilitators for collaboration.

Incentives for collaboration may be built into the Agri-Environment Climate Scheme and the Nature Restoration Fund, through increasing the points available for collaborative approaches in these schemes. Opportunities exist to increase private sector investment in collaborative landscape management, including increasing the scale of the Facility for Investment Ready Natural Capital in Scotland (FIRNS), and completing development of NatureScot’s Landscape Scale Natural Capital Tool. The Scottish Government could also play a useful role by actively facilitating connections between farmers and private-sector organisations, such as local businesses and larger scale supermarkets and chain restaurants.

Building on existing initiatives and networks could also help foster a culture of collaboration. This could include increasing opportunities for training, conferences and knowledge sharing, as well as communicating the benefits of collaborative landscape management approaches. There is growing access to data, including NatureScot’s Ecological Surveys and their developing Landscape Scale Natural Capital Tool, as well as other sources and types of knowledge, including participatory approaches like Bioregioning Tayside’s community science. These could help improve understanding of the effects of collaborative approaches, whilst promotion of collaborative landscape management approaches via the Farm Advisory Service, farming media and agricultural events could help raise awareness.

Gaps and opportunities for future research and innovation

The results of this project identified several tensions. Stakeholders appeared to prefer encouragement for collaboration via increasing incentives, but there was acknowledgement of the importance of regulation. They also requested both simplicity and flexibility to support context-specific, bespoke projects, but simplicity and flexibility are not always easily enabled together.

Private sector investment may help to increase incentives and provide some of this flexibility, but it will require caution to ensure standards continue to be met. Exploring and testing mechanisms for involving the private sector in a way that ensures responsible and accountable nature restoration, whilst making favourable returns on investment is an important opportunity for research and innovation.

Stakeholders also highlighted the importance of integration across government policies and between government and other stakeholders. However, questions about how such forms of integration may be achieved and who should be responsible for coordinating them, remain unresolved. Further research and innovation on the topic of integration is therefore important.

Although this study identified and engaged with a range of stakeholders and initiatives, the timescale for this project required tight targeting. Further engagement and a more in-depth appraisal would be beneficial. In particular, the 2024 UK General Election hindered engagement with UK Government stakeholders involved in collaborative landscape management approaches. Further engagement with the Farm Advisory Service could also be useful. It may also be enlightening to conduct a more in-depth appraisal of international examples of support for collaborative landscape management.

References

HODGE, I. 2024. The potential for local environmental governance: A case study of Natural Cambridgeshire. Journal for Nature Conservation, 79, 126631.

KUHFUSS, L., BEGG, G., FLANIGAN, S., HAWES, C. & PIRAS, S. 2019. Should agri-environmental schemes aim at coordinat-ing farmers’ pro-environmental practices? A review of the literature.

LEACH, W. & SABATIER, P. 2003. Facilitators, coordinators, and outcomes. Promise and Performance Of Environmental Conflict Resolution. RFF Press.

PRAGER, K. 2015. Agri-environmental collaboratives as bridging organisations in landscape management. Journal of Environmental Management, 161, 375-384.

PRAGER, K. 2022. Implementing policy interventions to support farmer cooperation for environmental benefits. Land Use Policy, 119, 106182.

PRAGER, K. & CREANEY, R. 2017. Achieving on-farm practice change through facilitated group learning: Evaluating the effectiveness of monitor farms and discussion groups. Journal of Rural Studies, 56, 1-11.

RILEY, M., SANGSTER, H., SMITH, H., CHIVERRELL, R. & BOYLE, J. 2018. Will farmers work together for conservation? The potential limits of farmers’ cooperation in agri-environment measures. Land Use Policy, 70, 635-646.

RUNHAAR, H. & POLMAN, N. 2018. Partnering for nature conservation: NGO-farmer collaboration for meadow bird protection in the Netherlands. Land Use Policy, 73, 11-19.

WAYLEN, K. A., BLACKSTOCK, K. L., MARSHALL, K. & JUAREZ-BOURKE, A. 2023. Navigating or adding to complexity? Exploring the role of catchment partnerships in collaborative governance. Sustainability Science, 18, 2533-2548.

WESTERINK, J., JONGENEEL, R., POLMAN, N., PRAGER, K., FRANKS, J., DUPRAZ, P. & METTEPENNINGEN, E. 2017. Collaborative governance arrangements to deliver spatially coordinated agri-environmental management. Land Use Policy, 69, 176-192.

Appendices

Appendix A. Methodology

We began by identifying a conceptual framework of factors likely to enable collaborative landscape management. We then invited people with knowledge and interest in agriculture, land management and conservation in Scotland to share their perspectives in a stakeholder engagement in June 2024. This involved two activities: 1) a consultation, via an online survey; and 2) a stakeholder workshop, held in person, in Perth on 25th June 2024. Each of these invited a range of stakeholders to respond to discussion questions, structured around a conceptual framework based on existing research about factors that support collaborative landscape management. Each engagement approach engaged 20 stakeholders. The survey was anonymous, so it is difficult to say precisely how many stakeholders contributed overall, but based on the organisations represented in each activity, we estimate around 30 stakeholders contributed overall. This yielded expert insights regarding lessons learned from experience of existing support for collaboration, as well as aspirations, needs, and interests of those involved in promoting and delivering collaborative landscape management. Below we first describe the conceptual framework, and then summarise the two stakeholder engagement activities, and how the resulting data were analysed.

Conceptual framework

A growing number of studies exist that identify and suggest factors that can contribute to supporting collaborative landscape management. These elements are brought together by Westerink et al. (2017), into a framework which suggests that to support collaborative landscape management, it is important to consider the following characteristics:

  • Coordinating the collective effort of landholders across a landscape, and ensuring their efforts complement each other.
  • Promoting the involvement of both governmental and non-governmental actors in processes of decision making around landscape management
  • Enabling monitoring and learning from the effects of landscape management approaches

A range of specific factors have been suggested by various authors to help in enabling these characteristics (Hodge, 2024, Prager, 2015, Prager, 2022, Riley et al., 2018, Runhaar and Polman, 2018) These include:

  • Building on existing relationships and collaborative activities.
  • Skilled facilitation.
  • Ensuring sufficient time, funding and resources are available, especially for facilitation.
  • Setting clear and realistic expectations.
  • Balancing top-down governance and bottom-up initiative.
  • Navigating complex and contested interests and priorities.
  • Learning, monitoring and knowledge exchange.
  • User-friendly procedures for accessing incentives.

In this research, we used the above characteristics and specific factors to structure the questions for response in the consultation and discussion in the workshop, whilst remaining open-minded to responses emerging from beyond this framework.

Online consultation survey

The survey, administered online via Qualtrics, consisted of a mixture of open-ended and multiple-choice questions, which were structured around the factors that the conceptual framework identifies as important to consider for supporting collaborative landscape management. The open-ended questions asked stakeholders for their views on: supportive factors for collaborative landscape management; barriers to collaboration; the ideal roles of government and non-government actors; and understanding the impacts of collaborative activities. The multiple-choice questions asked stakeholders to rate how important they thought various factors would be in supporting collaborative landscape management, as well as how long they thought support should last for. The full list of questions is available in Appendix B.

In-person workshop

The workshop, held in-person at the Perth Subud Centre on 25th June 2024, brought together a group of 20 stakeholders to deliberate what was needed to support collaborative landscape management in a Scottish context. To provide a backdrop for the workshop discussions, the workshop began with a brief presentation by an academic expert on lessons for thinking about collaborative landscape management from elsewhere, followed by presentation of initial results from the online survey. Stakeholders were then asked to discuss the following set of four questions, based on the conceptual framework, in small groups, and list their responses:

  • What is currently working well in terms of support for collaborative landscape management (drawing on examples from within Scotland and elsewhere)?
  • What barriers exist for collaborative landscape management (drawing on examples from within Scotland and elsewhere)?
  • In general, what types of support are needed to enable collaborative landscape management?
  • How can learning and knowledge exchange about collaborative landscape management be supported?

The small group activity was followed by a full group session, in which stakeholders were asked to consider and discuss the question of how support for collaborative landscape management in Scotland could be done better, and then finally to note down suggested next steps. The full programme for the workshop is available in Appendix C

Recruitment of stakeholders

To recruit stakeholders for both the survey and workshop, we capitalised, initially, on contacts held by the research team with farmer clusters and non-governmental organisations working on biodiversity restoration and climate outcomes. We then expanded the selection through these networks, as well as via recommendations from Scottish Government partners. All of the stakeholders were invited to participate in both the survey and the workshop, though not all were able to participate in both. This resulted in a group of stakeholders who represented a range of different perspectives, including: farmers, farmer cluster facilitators, land agents, landowners, academic experts, and non-governmental organisations working in agriculture, land management and conservation. We also invited organisations involved in administering the Farm Advisory Service, but did not receive a response. Overall, 20 stakeholders participated in the survey and 20 (not all the same people) attended the workshop. These are listed in Table 1, below.

Sector represented

Organisations

Farmer clusters

West Loch Ness Farm Cluster; Lunan Burn Wildlife Cluster; Strathmore Wildlife Cluster; Buchan Farm Cluster; Moray Farm Cluster

Agri-environment NGOs

Bioregioning Tayside; Linking Environment and Farming; South of Scotland Enterprise; ScotFWAG; Scottish Agricultural Organisation Society; Scottish Environment LINK; Leven Landscape Enterprise Networks

Conservation NGOs

SEDA Land; GWCT; RSPB Scotland; Forth Rivers Trust; Deer Management Groups

Landowners/estates

Crown Estate Scotland; Scottish Land and Estates

Land agents

Sylvestris

Academic institutions

The James Hutton Institute; University of Aberdeen

Environmental agencies

NatureScot

Other

Individual Consultant

Table 1 – Sectors and organisations represented in the study.

Overall, this stakeholder engagement included representation from a range of stakeholders involved in agriculture, conservation and land management. Existing farmer clusters, in particular, were well-represented, as were agri-environment and conservation NGOs. However, the tight targeting for this project meant that it was not possible for all possible stakeholders to be included. Perspectives from providers of farmer advisories could have been better represented, as could land agencies and the private sector. A UK Government General Election also hampered efforts to include perspectives from UK Government agencies involved in collaborative landscape management. The focus of the study on agriculture also meant that perspectives associated with other land uses, such as forestry and recreation, were not represented. The findings therefore strongly reflect farming and conservation perspectives and, whilst this is relevant to the agricultural reform programme, further studies may be enriched through inclusion of a wider range of perspectives.

Analysis

By design, both the survey and the workshop produced mainly qualitative data, regarding stakeholders’ views on what was needed to support collaborative landscape management. The data was collated by the research team into sets of summary notes, which we read through, carefully, and identified themes across the stakeholders’ responses. For rigour, we compared themes from the survey against those from the workshop, and from both activities against the proposed supportive factors for collaborative landscape management, identified in the conceptual framework. We also compared the themes across different groups of stakeholders, to explore if there was agreement/disagreement or difference between different sectors.

Limitations

We are confident that this methodology enabled us to invite and explore expert insights across a range of agricultural and conservation perspectives, including from actors already involved in collaborative landscape management activities. The combination of an asynchronous online survey with an in-person workshop helped ensure that the study benefited from both anonymous input from individuals, in their own time, and without their responses being influenced by others, as well as in-depth knowledge exchange and deliberation in the workshop. Nonetheless, as with any workshop, it is possible that the discussions, and thus the data, were influenced by the most vocal participants and the general biases of those present, whilst the survey had limited opportunities to yield in-depth responses. We have therefore made efforts to present the results in a balanced way and highlighted areas of disagreement and uncertainty. Both activities were limited by the amount of time available for the study, and a richer picture may have been painted with more time for in-depth inquiry.

Appendix B. Examples of landscape scale collaboration from outside of Scotland that were suggested by survey respondents

Name

Location

Link

EU Interreg PARTRIDGE project

North Western Europe

PARTRIDGE, Interreg VB North Sea Region Programme

Fiji 4 Returns Framework

Fiji

4-Returns-for-Landscape-Restoration-June-2021-UN-Decade-on-Ecosystem-Restoration.pdf (commonland.com)

Landscape Enterprise Networks

Established in England, Italy, Poland and Hungary, and being developed in Scotland

Home – Landscape Enterprise Networks

Norway Nature Index

Norway (and being trialled in Cairngorms)

The Norwegian Nature Index (nina.no)

Heart of Borneo Initiative

Indonesia, Malaysia, Brunei

Heart of Borneo (HoB) | WWF (panda.org)

North East Cotswold farmer cluster

England

Home | The North East Cotswold Farmer Cluster | England (cotswoldfarmers.org)

Selborne Landscape Partnership

England

Home Page (selbornelandscapepartnership.org.uk)

The Australian National Landcare Programme

Australia

https://www.dcceew.gov.au/environment/land/landcare

Home – Landcare Australia Landcare Australia

The Sustainable Farming Incentive

UK

Sustainable Farming Incentive – Farming for the future

The Cevennes National Park

France

Cévennes National Park | Cévennes Tourism (cevennes-tourisme.fr)

FASB Initiative

Brazil

https://inovaland.earth/2024/05/31/landscape-restoration-beyond-numbers-fasb-changing-lives-in-brazil/

FASB (inovaland.earth)

Dutch Farmer Collectives

Netherlands

English | BoerenNatuur

 

Appendix C. Online consultation survey questions

Online Consultation: How can landscape scale collaboration be supported to help deliver nature restoration, climate change mitigation and adaptation?

Introduction – *Watch short, recorded presentation* – embed in Qualtrics.

Thank you for taking the time to contribute your insights to this study on how landscape scale collaboration can be supported to deliver nature restoration, and climate change mitigation and adaptation.

This short survey will ask you to respond to a series of questions regarding the factors you think are important for supporting landscape scale collaboration. The questions build on the framework outlined in the presentation, in particular:

  • how you think collaborative landscape management should be facilitated,
  • how you think government and non-governmental actors should support collaborative landscape management,
  • what would help support learning in collaborative landscape management,
  • and what conditions and resources are needed for all of this.

The survey consists of a mixture of open-ended questions and sliding scales and should take around 10-15 minutes to complete. You will be asked to name the organisation you represent, but this will not be linked with your responses in the findings or outputs from this study, to ensure you are not identifiable (please refer to the information sheet and consent form for further details).

1) Do you consent to take part in this survey? (You do not have to answer all questions and you may withdraw at any point).

Yes/No (Conditional question – Yes needed to advance).

3) For which organisation do you work?:

Free Text

4) What measures (e.g. administrative, funding, logistical, etc) are required to support land managers to undertake collaborative landscape-scale management to benefit biodiversity and climate mitigation?

Free text

5) What should be the role of a) governmental and b) non-governmental actors in decision-making around collaborative landscape management?

a) governmental actors

Free text

b) non-governmental actors

Free text

6) How can the impact of collaborative landscape-scale activities be monitored and evaluated?

Free text

7) To what extent do you agree that the following are important factors in enabling landscape-scale collaboration to benefit nature restoration and mitigate climate change?:

Building on existing relationships and collaborative activities between landholders.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Facilitation of collaboration (e.g. having an advisor who helps convene, plan for and enable collaborative activities).

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Availability of sufficient time, funding and resources for the planning and implementation of collaborative activities.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Developing clear and realistic plans for collaborative activities.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Balancing top-down governance and bottom-up initiatives.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Navigating complex and competing interests.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Support for monitoring and evaluating the effects of collaborative landscape-scale activities.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

Ensuring application processes for accessing incentives are accessible and user-friendly.

Essential

Somewhat important

Neutral

Not important

Unnecessary

Not sure

8) Are there any other factors you think are important for supporting landscape-scale collaboration? If so, please elaborate.

Free text

9) Are there any factors that tend to constrain or hinder landscape collaboration? If so, please elaborate.

Free text

10) For how long do you think support for facilitation of collaborative landscape activities should last (from the point at which any particular collaboration commences)?

Less than 1 year

1-2 years

2-5 years

5-10 years

Longer than 10 years

Indefinitely

11) For how long do you think support for implementation of collaborative landscape activities should last (from the point at which implementation of a particular activity commences)?

Less than 1 year

1-2 years

2-5 years

5-10 years

Longer than 10 years

Indefinitely

12) Are there any lessons from your experiences or knowledge of collaborative landscape management you would like to share?

Free text

13) Are you aware of any examples of landscape scale collaboration in other countries that could be useful for Scotland to learn from? If so, please mention them here.

Free text

14) Any additional comments.

Free text

*End survey.*

Appendix D. Workshop activities

Landscape-scale collaboration to benefit biodiversity and climate change outcomes – stakeholder engagement – Stakeholder workshop 25/06/2024 Subud Centre, Perth

Aim: To explore stakeholder perspectives and encourage dialogue regarding what is needed to encourage landscape-scale collaboration in the Scottish context.

Welcome and introductions (11:00 – 11:15)

  • A brief welcome from the project team.
  • Housekeeping stuff – include mention that we will be audio recording and taking notes.
  • Expectation that we want to hear from everyone, and everyone’s views are welcome and ought to be respected, including where there are disagreements.
  • Run through the agenda.
  • An overview from Scottish Government, explaining why we are all here today and Scottish Government’s interest in exploring the possibilities around developing some form of future Landscape Scale Collaboration mechanism within an agri-environment context.
  • Brief introductions – name, organisation/sector representing, plus icebreaker question (e.g. favourite vegetable).

Session 1 – Setting the scene (11:15 – 11:50)

Aim: to set the scene with regards to understanding of ‘collaborative landscape management’ for agricultural land and holdings.

To do that, we will hear short talks from:

i) Expert on landscape collaboration approaches, about current understanding in research on landscape-scale collaboration;

ii) initial results from the online consultation survey.

Each presentation will be around 10 minutes, plus 15 minutes for questions at the end of the session.

Session 2 – Share ideas about what is needed to support landscape-scale collaboration in Scotland (11:50 – 13:00)

Aim: to facilitate discussion regarding what participants think is needed to support landscape-scale collaboration in a Scottish context.

This will involve a ‘Carousel’-style activity, whereby stakeholder participants will be split into small groups, rotating around four ‘stations’, each featuring a different discussion question. Proposed questions are:

  • What is currently working well in terms of support for collaborative landscape management (drawing on examples from within Scotland and elsewhere)?
  • What barriers exist for collaborative landscape management (drawing on examples from within Scotland and elsewhere)?
  • In general, what types of support are needed to enable collaborative landscape management?
  • How can learning and knowledge exchange about collaborative landscape management be supported?

Participants will be asked to write their group’s responses on pieces of flipchart paper at each station. These will be stuck up around the room for participants to read during the lunch break.

45 minutes – 10-minute explanation – then diminishing amounts of time at subsequent stations (15 mins – 10 mins – 5 mins – 3 mins) 15-minute buffer for overrunning.

Lunch 13:00 – 13:45: Good food & networking.

Session 3 – Plenary discussion (13:45 – 15:00).

Aim: clarify what is needed to support landscape-scale collaboration in Scotland.

This will start with a summary of points brought up during Session 2. Participants will have had time to look at all of the responses that have come up on the flipcharts for the carousel activity. Lead facilitator (SP) will give a brief summary of these as well.

We will then do a ‘think-pair-share’ activity, whereby each participant writes down their thoughts on a sticky note, then compares with the person next to them, and then we ask participants to share with the room. This will be framed around the question:

  • how could support for collaborative landscape management in Scotland be done better?

Facilitation note: Encourage participants to be specific about what needs to change, and who can do what, and even, optionally, when.

Then, finally, we will move into more of an open, plenary discussion around opportunities, actions and potential next steps for supporting collaborative landscape management in Scotland.

Facilitation note: Make sure to check and acknowledge differences and disagreements, if not already aired – explore why they might be coming up.

75 minutes – 10-minute review of previous session – 5-minute explanation of next task – 10 minutes for ‘think-pair-share’ question (5 min ‘think’, 5 min ‘pair’) – 50 minutes for general discussion. Then 15 minutes for closing comments.

Finish by around 15:15 – buffer of 15 minutes for closing and leaving.

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by The James Hutton Institute on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.


  1. This refers to the RESAS Strategic Research Programme ‘People and Nature’ project (JHI-D4-1), which aims to examine the indirect drivers of biodiversity loss – social values and behaviours. https://sefari.scot/research/projects/people-and-nature


Research completed August 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4836

Executive summary

Aims

This report presents indicators for monitoring the four domestic outcomes of the third Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3). These outcomes are summarised as:

  • Nature Connects
  • Communities
  • Public Services and Infrastructure
  • Economy, Business and Industry

It establishes a baseline prior to the implementation of SNAP3 for monitoring and determining progress at the end of the Plan’s five-year period.

The report addresses the challenges of developing indicators for a national adaptation plan by adopting an approach that balances robustness and practicality, considering available resources and data. We have developed a set of indicators for each outcome, assessing their relevance and feasibility for monitoring, through desk-based review and stakeholder engagement. The assessment has been grounded in the practical reality of what data is available rather than theoretically ideal indicators.

Findings

The indicators proposed for each of SNAP3’s outcomes are listed below. For each indicator, there was sufficient data available to allow for a pre-SNAP3 baseline to be established and then reported against after a five-year period.

  • Nature Connects – outcome indicators
  • Habitat Connectivity Index​ 
  • Proportion of surface water bodies classified in high and good condition
  • Proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition
  • Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion
  • Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas 
  • Proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space

These six indicators cover elements of ecological connectivity, ecosystem health, and nature-based solutions (NbS) for climate adaptation. A marine ecosystem indicator could not be included due to insufficient data availability.

  • Communities – outcome indicators
  • Level of community awareness around climate change
  • Level of community climate action
  • Progress of actions in local flood risk management plans
  • Level of community wellbeing

The four indicators cover elements of community resilience, wellbeing, and climate action. It was particularly challenging to capture the complexity of health and equity in relation to climate adaptation with only a few high-level indicators. The onus was placed on monitoring levels of community action in creating resilient, healthy, and equitable places.

  • Public Services and Infrastructure – outcome indicators
  • Level of collaboration across public services
  • Level of adaptation actions across public services

The two indicators monitor collaboration and adaptation action among public bodies. While these indicators provide high-level insights into public sector collaboration and adaptation efforts, they do not measure the effectiveness or inclusiveness of these actions, which would require numerous sector-specific indicators that would be onerous to monitor.

  • Economy, Business and Industry – outcome indicators
  • Proportion of businesses monitoring climate-related risks
  • Proportion of businesses taking action to adapt to the effects of climate change
  • Number of green jobs
  • Uptake of grants for agriculture storage reservoirs and off-season storage lagoons​

The five indicators cover elements of business preparedness, adaptation actions, and economic opportunities related to climate change. These indicators provide an overview of Scotland’s economic adaptation to climate change. However, they do not cover investment in climate adaptation initiatives or economic resilience to climate-related hazards, as there were insufficient available data.

Recommendations

Key recommendations for the outcome indicators following this project include:

  • Consistent application of indicators. The indicator set for SNAP3 should be finalised as soon as possible and consistently applied to enable meaningful and coherent monitoring over the Plan’s five-year period. Any changes made to individual indicators or the data that underpin them may compromise the ability to track progress consistently relative to the baseline.
  • Maintain continuity, quality and availability of data required by each indicator. It is vital to maintain the allocation of resources to the collection, maintenance and accessibility of datasets used by the indicators across all relevant Scottish Government departments.
  • Maintain flexibility regarding potential for additional indicators. New indicators may be added in the immediate term if relevant data becomes available, as may be anticipated regarding, for example an ecosystem functions indicator for Nature Connects or a green finance indicator for Economy, Business, and Industry. While the suite of indicators addresses the needs for monitoring the outcomes of SNAP3, it may be viewed as a foundation to build upon regarding monitoring of SNAP4.
  • Establish a working group to sustain the functioning of the indicators. The working group could comprise key stakeholders and data providers who could meet annually to review the functioning of the indicators and address any issues regarding their deployment, e.g., continuity and availability of data and its quality.

The findings of this report may also be of interest to anyone interested in monitoring and evaluation of climate adaptation planning more generally.

Glossary / Abbreviations table

BICS

Business Insights and Conditions Survey

CCAH

Community Climate Action Hubs

LPP

Local Place Plans

MEL

Monitoring, Evaluation and Learning

NAP

National Adaptation Plan

NbS

Nature-based solutions

ONS

Office of National Statistics

SEPA

Scottish Environment Protection Agency

SHeS

Scottish Health Survey

SHS

Scottish Household Survey

SNAP3

3rd Scottish National Adaptation Plan

SSN

Sustainable Scotland Network

WEMWBS

Warwick-Edinburgh Mental Wellbeing Scale

Introduction

Aims of this report

The third Scottish National Adaptation Plan (SNAP3)[1] will be published in Autumn 2024 and Scottish Ministers have agreed that there is a need to improve monitoring of its outputs and outcomes, as compared with the way previous adaptation plans in Scotland have been monitored. The central aim for monitoring, evaluation and learning (MEL) of SNAP3 is to ensure that the indicators are as robust and relevant as possible for monitoring its specific outcomes, while remaining practical and accessible to implement in terms of resources and data available. We have sought to strike this balance between robustness and feasibility in the outcome indicators presented in this report.

The structure of SNAP3 is based around five long term outcomes and 23 objectives that set out adaptation priorities for the Scottish Government between 2024-2029. These five outcomes are (with abbreviations used hereinafter in brackets):

  1. “Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts, and seas” (Nature Connects)
  2. “Communities are creating climate-resilient, healthy, and equitable places” (Communities)
  3. “Public services are collaborating in effective and inclusive adaptation action” (Public Services and Infrastructure)
  4. “Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition” (Economy, Business and Industry)
  5. “Scotland’s international role supports climate justice and enhanced global action on climate adaptation”​ (International Action)

The indicators developed here address the first four outcomes, which are focused on Scotland’s resilience at the national level. Through a process of desk-based research and engagement with the Scottish Government’s departments and relevant organisations, we have developed a suite of indicators to monitor progress of these outcomes. Each indicator was assessed using criteria to determine its inclusion. The criteria addressed the indicator’s conceptual relevance and practical implications, including availability of baseline data. Our development of indicators for the four outcomes of SNAP3 took place concurrently with work undertaken by the Scottish Government to develop a suite of indicators for the 23 objectives that sit beneath the outcomes.

This report takes the following structure: first, Section 1.2 provides a brief overview of MEL in national adaptation contexts. Section 2 outlines the process undertaken to develop the outcome indicators. Section 3 provides information for each indicator and is structured by each outcome. Baseline data is presented in the Section 4. Section 5 concludes with a discussion and recommendations for next steps. Annexes provide further details on methodology and technical information.

Context

A key takeaway from the COP28 in December 2023 was the importance of monitoring, evaluation, and learning (MEL) to understand and report on the effectiveness of the design and implementation of national adaptation planning processes (Beauchamp & Józefiak, 2023). Due to the iterative nature of climate adaptation, MEL is essential to periodically understand the effectiveness of adaptation plans effectiveness and improve their design accordingly (GEF, 2016). Furthermore, national MEL systems are of importance for fulfilling national reporting commitments, such as the Enhanced Transparency Framework under the Paris Agreement (UNDP, 2022).

Developing indicators of climate adaptation is challenging, conceptually and practically, due to the complex, multi-sectoral and context-specific nature of climate impacts that need to be addressed (UNFCC, 2022). Challenges include: the length of time it can take to implement adaptation actions due to their scope and scale; the length of time for adaptation actions to mature and deliver measurable outcomes; and the need for monitoring to be sustained, which poses practical issues regarding maintenance of a consistent methodology using comparable data and associated long-term funding and policy cycles.

No standard metrics exist to capture adaptation nor an off-the-shelf indicator framework to apply to a country’s context (New et al., 2022). Nevertheless, there are numerous efforts to structure MEL of climate adaptation in the form of checklists and toolkits. Examples include: the BASE Evaluation Criteria for Climate Adaptation, which offers a checklist for evaluation focused on outcomes and processes; and the ‘Toolkit for MEL for National Adaptation Plan (NAP) Processes’ for developing countries (Beauchamp et al., 2024).

The Global Goal on Adaptation (GGA) framework adopted at COP28 (known as the UAE Framework for Global Climate Resilience) represents a concerted effort at a global level to establish universal targets to guide countries’ adaptation pathways. However, identifying a set of indicators to monitor progress remains a fundamental challenge (Gabbatiss & Lempriere, M, 2024). This is exemplified by the wide-ranging list of potential indicators found in the recent UAE – Belém work programme that synthesises countries’ submissions to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) (UNFCCC, 2024).

In Scotland, the approach to climate adaptation M&E monitoring and evaluation has been robustly developed through the previous Scottish Climate Change Adaptation Programmes (SCCAPs). The Climate Change Committee (CCC) has provided significant recommendations on enhancing the M&E framework within Scotland. A key recommendation from the CCC has been to establish clear, measurable outcomes and associated indicators that can effectively capture the progress and impact of adaptation initiatives (CCC, 2022). Recognising the benefits of this approach, the Scottish Government has adopted an outcomes-focused approach for its Adaptation Plan. The importance of aligning national adaptation indicators with local contexts, ensuring that the indicators are relevant and actionable for Scotland’s unique environmental, social, and economic conditions has been highlighted in previous ClimateXChange research (Moss, A., 2019). he work presented in this project builds upon this background of previous MEL work.

Developing the suite of indicators

To develop the suite of indicators for monitoring the four outcomes of SNAP3, we followed a five-step approach, as illustrated in Figure 1 and described below.

The first step was a desk-based, data-mapping process. This involved reviewing draft SNAP3, the previous adaptation national plans, the published relevant Scottish policies and some international guidelines on MEL to identify possible indicators. The second step involved developing criteria to rank the indicators and facilitate their selection. At the third and fourth steps, this first longlist of indicators was presented and discussed with several stakeholders, during both one-to-one interviews and four workshops organised on each of the four SNAP3 outcome areas. This dynamic process enabled us to refine and amend the longlist of indicators, clearly identify gaps and limitations, and provide some recommendations. The final step of the process was the presentation of the indicator framework containing 12 outcome indicators.

Figure 1: The five-step approach to develop the suite of indicators

Figure 2:: visualisation of the indicator development process

Desk-based research

The first stage of developing indicators involved data mapping through review of:

  • Sectoral policies listed in the draft SNAP3 and their implementation plans, where published, to search for relevant existing indicators and associated datasets (See Annex 1).
  • Relevant existing indicators and associated datasets used by previous Scottish adaptation plans (CCC, 2023; Moss, A., 2019,) and unpublished meeting notes from a stakeholder workshop led by CXC in May 2023 entitled ‘Monitoring and evaluation of Scotland’s Climate Change Adaptation Programme 2024-2029’.
  • A selection of international guidelines and frameworks on national climate change adaptation monitoring and evaluation (EPA, 2017; FAO, 2017; Mäkinen et al., 2018; OECD, 2015; UNFCCC, 2023; UNFCCC, 2024) to learn from others’ approaches to the identification of outcome indicators and to identify if they used any adaptation outcome indicators that might be modified for use regarding SNAP3.

The four outcomes cover a wide range of different elements. Therefore, we used an approach based around theory of change (ToC) to identify those core elements that the indicators for each outcome should cover. This approach complemented the ToC work undertaken by Scottish Government as part of the draft SNAP3. We identified core elements through interpretation and analysis of each outcome section in the draft SNAP3. The core elements identified were:

  • Nature Connects: Ecological connectivity (terrestrial, marine, and coastal); ecosystem health (terrestrial, marine, and coastal); and connection to nature.
  • Communities: Community action; community resilience; health and equity.
  • Public Services: Public sector collaboration; public sector adaptation action; effectiveness of public sector action; and inclusiveness of public sector action.
  • Economy, Business, and Industry: Business preparedness and action; and economic adaptation.

This approach provided a broad structure and scope for the development of a longlist of potential indicators. The latter emerged from this desk-based research (See Annex 2). The longlist was refined by applying the indicator criteria (see Section 2.2 below) and amended based on the inputs gathered during the stakeholder engagement.

Indicator criteria

The indicator criteria (see Table 1) built upon established indicator criteria, such as SMART (Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant and Time-Bound) (Biden, 2022) and RACER (Relevant, Accepted, Credible, Easy and Robust) (Peter & Peter, 2009), while refining elements to the specific context (e.g. adaptation relevance). Indicator ranking “low” for any criterion were excluded.

Table 1: Criteria for selecting outcome indicator for SNAP3

CriterionDescriptionLowModerateHigh

Adaptation relevance

The indicator should relate to key elements of climate adaptation, including vulnerability, risk, exposure, and adaptive capacity.

Minimal to no relevance to key climate adaptation elements.

Some relevance to key climate adaptation elements.

Clear relevance to key climate adaptation elements.

Representativeness

The indicator represents a core element of the outcome area within the adaptation plan that it fits under.

Indicator only represents a small element of the outcome area.

Indicator somewhat represents the key characteristics of the outcome area.

Indicator represents well the key characteristics of the outcome area.

Understanding

The indicator should be easily understandable by a wide range of stakeholders, including non-experts, to ensure effective communication.

Technical expertise required to fully understand indicator.

Some technical expertise required but broadly understandable to non-expert audiences.

Indicator is clearly understandable to a wide audience.

Data availability

Data for the indicator is readily available and accessible for use by wide range of stakeholders

No data available or heavily restricted access to necessary data.

Data exists but requires resources and expertise to fully access.

Data fully and freely available.

Sensitivity

The indicator is sensitive enough to detect changes over five-year period.

Changes in indicator not detectable over the required time-period.

Indicator data is somewhat sensitive enough to detect changes over the required time-period.

Indicator data is sensitive enough to detect changes over the required time-period.

Baseline

It should be possible to set clear, quantifiable baseline for the indicator to track progress.

Data not available to establish a baseline.

Baseline data is possible but requires resources to obtain.

Baseline data is easily accessible.

Practicality

Indicator should be cost-effective to use and have low resource requirements for data collection and analysis.

Prohibitively expensive and/or impractical to use indicator data.

Some expenses and resources required to use indicator data.

Cost-effective and low-resource to use indicator data.

Stakeholder engagement

With support from the Scottish Government’s steering group, and drawing upon our desk-based research, we identified relevant stakeholders that could help validate and refine indicators within each outcome area. Stakeholders were considered from various backgrounds relevant to outcome areas, who could offer insights into data availability and gaps, as well as practicality of indicators.

We conducted one-to-one interviews with experts who could offer insights into data availability and gaps to discuss specific areas of the SNAP3 and four stakeholder workshops were organised; one for each outcome area[2]. We also gathered 66 participants over four workshops, from more than 25 different organisations, detailed in Annex 3. They were invited based on their expertise in fields relevant to each outcome area discussed and their knowledge of climate adaptation. The participants received the longlist of indicators before the workshop and were asked: (a) whether the indicators proposed covered well the targeted outcome area and (b) if there were any aspects missing.

The overall aim of stakeholder engagement was to engage with relevant teams across the Scottish Government on existing monitoring work to date, review existing available datasets, and amend the longlist of quantitative indicators developed by Ricardo. Experts confirmed, advised against, or suggested indicators that would best reflect the outcome areas. The workshops helped identify limitations of the selected indicators, as well as highlighting suggested outcomes that should not be included (for example, due to lack of data availability).

Outcome indicators

This section presents the proposed outcome indicators for SNAP3. Figure 2 visually presents the proposed outcome indicators, with each indicator categorised under the relevant outcome area. An overview is provided for each outcome before detailing each indicator. This information includes the indicator title, description, data holder, unit and rationale for inclusion. Detailed information for how the indicator criteria was applied to each indicator is provided in Annex 4.

Figure 2: Proposed outcome indicators for SNAP3

Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts, and seas

Overview

The outcome Nature Connects places emphasis on nature’s role in climate adaptation. It emphasises connectivity across landscapes, settlements, coasts, and seas to bolster ecosystem resilience. Key actions include developing nature networks in every local authority area, managing invasive species, and enhancing natural carbon stores like peatlands and forests. Taking a holistic approach aims to improve Scotland’s climate resilience while delivering co-benefits for biodiversity, flood mitigation and human wellbeing. Figure 3 illustrates the SNAP3’s pathway from objectives to outcome and impact for the Nature Connects outcome.[3]

Considerations for indicator selection

Following the desk-based review and stakeholder engagement, several considerations emerged regarding indicator selection for the Nature Connects outcome:

  • The importance of acknowledging that connectivity indicators do not necessarily reflect habitat quality or overall ecosystem resilience. Hence, ideally, there would be a focus on ecosystem functions and processes. However, while indicators focused on ecosystem functions are currently under development by Nature Scot, they will not be operational in time for use in monitoring SNAP3.
  • Despite the high-level nature of indicators, there is a need to reflect Scotland’s diverse environment. Freshwater environments were highlighted as both a useful proxy for the extent of ecological connectivity and with a comprehensive and accessible dataset.
  • Urban green infrastructure is an important aspect of this outcome and the indicators should capture the extent of accessibility to nature and green spaces.
  • Species indicators are not sufficiently sensitive to show a significant trend over SNAP3’s five years. Changes in species abundance and distribution due to climate change are often gradual. Species’ adaptation, whether through genetic changes, changes in behaviour, or moves to new areas, often require longer than five years to be observable. Over a shorter period, it can be difficult to distinguish between short-term fluctuations and longer-term changes driven by climate change. While five-year studies can provide valuable snapshots and early indicators, longer timeframes are typically needed to confidently assess significant trends in species abundance and distribution related to climate adaptation. Therefore, indicators like “terrestrial species’ abundance” developed by Nature Scot were deemed inappropriate for inclusion.
  • As outlined in SNAP3, marine ecosystems will make a vital contribution to Scotland’s adaptation to climate change. However, there is very limited data available to measure marine habitat connectivity. Furthermore, there is difficulty capturing adaptation of the marine environment in a single, general indicator. For example, NatureScot’s marine species’ abundance indicator focuses upon the average abundance of 14 species of breeding seabird. Such an indicator was not considered to be suitably representative of marine ecosystems and, therefore, not selected.
  • Not all the natural habitat types are captured in this framework. Specific indicators were considered but not selected. For example, the baseline for the Woodland Ecological Condition indicator was too old and the indicator would not cover the 2024-2029 period.

Nature Connects – proposed indicators

When setting out to develop a list of indicators for the Nature Connects outcome, it was important to cover ecological connectivity between habitats across land and sea, ecosystem health, and the implementation of NbS for climate adaptation. To a large extent, the six indicators chosen for this outcome efficiently achieve this coverage by using established indicators and available data held for various Scottish Government agencies.

The proposed indicators are:

  • Habitat Connectivity Index
  • Proportion of surface water bodies classified in high and good condition
  • Proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition
  • Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion
  • Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas
  • Proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space.

Immediately below we present the baseline information foreach of the six indicators proposed to monitor the Nature Connects outcome. For each indicator, we provide the baseline value, a description of the baseline, the recent trend and desired trend for each indicator to provide context. More information on baseline data is available in Annex 5. This is followed by a further detailed summary of each indicator and the rationale for their inclusion.

Nature Connects – baseline

Habitat Connectivity Index 

  • Description: In 2020, the total Equivalent Connected Area (Probability of Connectivity) (ECA (PC) value for Scotland was 35,570 ha for semi-grassland (2.9%), 5,655 ha for woodland (1.4%) and 214,277 ha for heathland (8.3%).
  • Recent trends: None.
  • Desired trend: Increase
  • Baseline
    • Semi-grassland: 2.9%
    • Woodland: 1.4%
    • Healthland: 8.3%

Proportion of surface water bodies classified in good and better condition

  • Description: In 2022, 445 (13.7%) surface water bodies were in better condition and 1664 (51.2%) surface water bodies were in good condition.
  • Recent trends: This percentage has remained broadly stable in recent years, rising slightly from 61.8% in 2014.
  • Baseline: 64.9%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition

  • Description: In March 2024, the proportion of natural features in favourable condition on protected sites was 75.6%.
  • Recent trends: The trend between 2023 and 2024 is relatively stable, slightly decreasing by 0.9%.  However, the proportion of features in favourable condition has decreased by 4.8 percentage points since 2016 when it peaked at 80.4%.
  • Baseline: 75.6%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion

  • Description: In 2021, 46% of the soft coast is affected by coastal erosion. The average rate of erosion is 0.43 m/year.
  • Recent trends: In 2017, 38% of the soft coast was affected by coastal erosion, representing an 8% increase in eight years. Note, the proportion of shorelines experiencing coastal erosion, and the rate of erosion, increases under all climate change emissions scenarios.
  • Baseline: 46%
  • Desired trend: Decrease

Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas 

  • Description: The total area of urban greenspace in Scotland as defined by Ordnance Survey is 3,167 km².
  • Recent trends: April 2024 represents the only OS MasterMap Greenspace data currently available from the Ordnance Survey.
  • Baseline: 3,166km2
  • Desired trend: Increase

Proportion of adults who live within a 5-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space

  • Description: In 2022, 70% of adults reported living within a 5-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space.
  • Recent trends: This percentage has remained broadly stable since 2013, where it was 68%. There has been a slight, steady increase from 2017 from 65% to 70%. 
  • Baseline: 70%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Nature Connects – indicator summaries

ECOSYSTEM HEALTH AND CONNECTIVITY

Habitat Connectivity Index 

Indicator​ 

Habitat Connectivity Index​ 

Description​ 

This habitat connectivity indicator measures ‘functional connectivity’. This refers to how well species can move from one habitat patch to another. This indicator shows the functional connectivity of three habitats (Woodland; Heathland; Grassland;).​ 

Data holder​ 

Nature Scot​ 

Unit​ 

% of total habitat area per catchment ​ 

​The Habitat Connectivity Index was selected to represent the functional health of natural ecosystems in Scotland. Habitat networks enable species to follow their shifting climate envelope and move to new habitats, ensuring their survival and the continuity of ecosystem services. Connectivity is crucial for promoting the survival, migration, and adaptation potential of species populations in response to climate change. By assessing functional connectivity, this indicator provides valuable insights into ecosystem resilience, highlighting areas where habitat fragmentation might increase the risk and exposure of species to climate-related impacts. Enhancing habitat connectivity directly supports the adaptive capacity of species by facilitating movement and gene flow, thereby reducing vulnerability, and supporting biodiversity conservation (Haddad et al., 2015). It reflects the interconnectedness of ecosystems and underscores the importance of maintaining and improving habitat connectivity to mitigate climate risks and enhance the adaptive capacity of natural systems (Krosby et. al., 2010).

Proportion of surface water bodies classified in good or better condition

Indicator

Proportion of surface water bodies classified in high or good condition

Description

This indicator shows the proportion of surface water body with an overall status classified either “good” or “high”. SEPA monitors the environment to assess the condition of water quality, water resources, physical condition, fish migration and the impact of invasive non-native species. If any single aspect of a water body is classified as below good, that water body’s overall condition is reported as below good.

Data holder

Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA)

Unit

We chose ‘proportion of surface water bodies classified in high or good condition’ as a proxy for climate change adaptation because it reflects the health and quality of water ecosystems. Healthy water bodies are more resilient to climate change impacts such as altered precipitation patterns, increased temperatures, and pollution. By maintaining high and good conditions, these water bodies can better support biodiversity and delivery of ecosystem services that fulfil human needs, particularly regarding climate adaptation (Palmer et al., 2009).

Proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition

Indicator​ 

Proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition

Description​ 

This indicator shows the efforts to improve the condition of natural features in protected sites as they will ensure terrestrial habitats are in good ecological health in Scotland. This indicator relates to the quality of natural habitats.

Data holder​ 

Nature Scot​ 

Unit​ 

%

We chose ‘proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition’ as a proxy to reflect the health and resilience of Scottish ecosystems. Healthy and well-managed protected sites are better able to withstand and adapt to the impacts of climate change, such as shifting species distributions and extreme weather events (Watson et al., 2014). This indicator shows how effectively Scotland is preserving biodiversity and ecosystem services, which are crucial for climate resilience. It is important to look at the proportion of sites in favourable condition by habitat type. Indeed, habitats such as native woodland, which are vulnerable to overgrazing and invasive non-native species, have a lower percentage (56.8%) of sites in favourable condition than the other types of habitats (average of 73.4%).

Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion

Indicator​ 

Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion

Description​ 

This indicator shows the proportion of shorelines experiencing coastal erosion in Scotland.

Data holder​ 

Ordnance Survey

Unit​ 

%

Scotland’s coastline is estimated to be 18,743 km in length along the high-water line. This indicator was chosen as coastal erosion affects society’s assets such as infrastructure and cultural heritage, and contributes to more frequent coastal flooding. Coastal erosion is exacerbated by climate change. Implementing adaptation strategies to protect Scotland’s coasts is crucial to protect the biodiversity of coastal ecosystems. It also ensures the safety and resilience of coastal communities against climate impacts, as well as the resilience of regional and national infrastructure (McGranahan et al., 2007).

URBAN GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas 

Indicator​ 

Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas 

Description​ 

This indicator shows the accessible and non-accessible greenspaces (woodland open semi-natural areas, inland water, beach or foreshore, manmade surface, multi-surface) in urban areas in Scotland.

Data holder​ 

Ordnance Survey

Unit​ 

%

This indicator is chosen as a proxy for integration of nature into urban settlements. Green infrastructures within towns and cities are NbS designed to reduce the urban heat island effect, improve resilience to flooding and provide an opportunity for people to enjoy and benefit from nature. Compared to technology-based solutions to climate challenges, NbS like green-blue land cover in urban areas are often more cost-effective and longer lasting. They also have multiple co-benefits, such as reducing net emissions, providing habitats for biodiversity, enhancing human health and well-being (Demuzere et al., 2014; Gill et al., 2007).

Proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space

Indicator​ 

Proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space.

Description​ 

This indicator measures the proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space. 

Data holder​ 

Scottish Household Survey

Unit​ 

%

This indicator is chosen as a proxy to reflect the extent communities have access to natural spaces. Easy access to green and blue spaces enhances community resilience in the face of climate stressors by promoting well-being (e.g. air quality improvement, mental and physical health, etc.) (Maas et al., 2006). Access to green and blue spaces helps mitigate the urban heat island effect, providing cooler areas that can reduce heat-related health risks during extreme weather events. Lastly, green and blue spaces contribute to biodiversity and water management, supporting ecosystems that buffer against climate impacts such as flooding (Demuzere et al., 2014).

 

Communities are creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places

Overview

This outcome focuses on empowering communities to create climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places. It adopts a place-based approach, acknowledging that climate impacts vary by local context. Key initiatives include establishing Climate Action Hubs, developing collaborative planning partnerships and providing capacity-building support. This community-centred approach seeks to ensure adaptation efforts are inclusive, address local needs and build societal resilience to climate impacts. Figure 4 presents the SNAP3’s pathway from objectives to outcome and impact for the Communities outcome.[4]

Considerations for indicator selection

Following the desk-based review and stakeholder engagement, several considerations emerged regarding indicator selection for the Communities outcome:

  • Data on exposure to climate-related hazards provides information on the places where efforts need to be intensified to limit inequalities, for example, if hazard data is coupled with data on deprivation or social vulnerability (Sayers, PB., et al., 2021). We explored one indicator related to the exposure of vulnerable populations to climate-related hazards. This indicator sought to understand inequality in how communities are impacted by climate hazards. There are limitations to such an indicator focusing on exposure to flood, heat, drought, or wildfire, as it does not consider the resilience of the population exposed. While exposure is unlikely to change in the short to medium term, measures to reduce the vulnerability of those most exposed to risks will be key to increasing their resilience. It is, therefore, important data but less suitable as an indicator measuring increased community resilience for the purposes of this work. The overall conclusion was that the indicators for the Communities outcome should focus more on actions being taken by communities that are indicative of resilience.
  • Flooding and the action taken to adapt to this hazard was a focus for consideration due to its significance as a climate-related hazard for Scotland. Example indicators include the ‘proportion of flood resilience action undertaken’ or ‘uptake of property flood protection measures in deprived areas’, or ‘responses to surveys on adaptation action’. Indicators around property flood protection measures and insurance were considered. However, although schemes such as “Build back better” exist, there were insufficient national data available to include this indicator.
  • A combination of two indicators, ‘progress of actions in local flood risk management plans’ and ‘percentage of the population declaring that they understand what actions they should take to help tackle climate change’ were selected as proxies to capture community action in climate adaptation.
  • Collaboration at community level was often mentioned as essential when it comes to adaptation to ensure the salience, credibility and legitimacy of actions and common understanding, ownership, and a desire to implement. The level of community climate collaboration is captured through monitoring the Community Climate Action Hubs (CCAH) and Local Place Plans.
  • Health is embedded in all the areas of SNAP3. This makes it difficult to have a general indicator linking health to climate-related hazards and issues, such as heatwaves, cold, flooding, vector-borne diseases, and food systems. This could only be captured by a fuller set of indicators focusing on health and well-being. A dataset measuring climate morbidity in Scotland could be relevant as a future outcome indicator for SNAP4 should suitable data become available. For this indicator set, a focus on wellbeing is taken using national data on the Warwick-Edinburgh Mental Wellbeing Scale (WEMWBS).

Communities – proposed indicators

When setting out to develop a list of indicators for the Communities outcome, we aimed to cover aspects of community resilience, health, and equity. Of the four indicators selected for this outcome, three indicators reflected the community resilience aspect (level of community awareness; level of community climate action; and progress of actions in local flood risk management plans). There was a particular challenge in capturing the complexity of health and equity in relation to climate adaptation with only a few high-level indicators in this framework. Instead of health, a focus on community wellbeing was taken with the use of national data on the Warwick-Edinburgh Mental Wellbeing Scale (WEMWBS). With elements of health and equity not explicitly covered, we have instead put onus on using established indicators and available data to monitor levels of community action in creating resilient, healthy, and equitable places. Monitoring this level of community action, be it in increased community awareness, the growth of Community Climate Action Hubs (CCAH) and Local Place Plans (LPP) or in specific community actions around flood management, provides important insight on how communities are adapting to climate change.

The proposed indicators are:

  • Level of community awareness around climate change
  • Level of community climate action
  • Progress of actions in local flood risk management plans
  • Level of community wellbeing.

Below we present the baseline information for each of the four indicators proposed to monitor the Communities outcome. For each indicator, we provide the baseline value, a description of the baseline, the recent trend and desired trend for each indicator to provide context. More information on baseline data is available in Annex 5. This is followed by a further detailed summary of each indicator and the rationale for their inclusion.

Communities – baseline

Proportion of adults viewing climate change as an immediate and urgent problem

  • Description: In 2022, 74% of adults viewing climate change as an immediate and urgent problem.
  • Recent trends: The Scottish population concerned about climate change representing an immediate and urgent problem has risen every year since 2013, where 46% held this view. In 2017, 61% held this view.
  • Baseline: 74%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Proportion of the population declaring that they understand what actions they should take to help tackle climate change

  • Description: In 2022, 80% of adults agreed that they understood what actions they should take to help tackle climate change.
  • Recent trends: In 2018, 74% of adults stated they understood what actions they should take to help tackle climate change.
  • Baseline: 80%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Number of Community Climate Action Hubs

  • Description: In 2024, 20 hubs across Scotland support community-led climate action, covering 81% of the Scottish council areas.
  • Recent trends: The first two hubs launched in September 2021 and the network has now expanded, consisting of the 20 hubs.
  • Baseline: 81%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Number of Local Place Plans

  • Description: In 2024, no local place plans have been adopted.
  • Recent trends: Many councils have recently invited communities to prepare Local Place Plans so that they can play a proactive role in defining the future of their places.
  • Baseline: 0
  • Desired trend: Increase

Progress of actions in local flood risk management plans

  • Description: In 2019, 90% of the actions to avoid an increase in flood risk were complete. By 2021, 100% of the actions were expected to be complete. In 2019, 84% of the actions to reduce flood risk were complete. By 2021, 96% of the actions were expected to be complete.
  • Recent trends: progress was assessed for cycle 1 (2015-2021).
  • Baseline: 90% (completed actions to avoid an increase in flood risk), 84% (completed actions to reduce flood risk)
  • Desired trend: Increase

Level of community wellbeing

  • Description: In 2022, the mean WEMWBS score for all adults was 47.0
  • Recent trends: The mean WEMWBS score for all adults remained stable between 2008 and 2019, between 49.4 and 50.0. Since 2019, it has decreased to 48.6 in 2021 and now 47.0 in 2022.
  • Baseline: 47.0
  • Desired trend: Increase

Communities – indicator summaries

Community awareness around climate change

Indicator

Level of community awareness around climate change

Description

This indicator is measured by the following:

  • Percentage of the population declaring that they understand what actions they should take to help tackle climate change.
  • Percentage of adults viewing climate change as an immediate and urgent problem.

Data set holder

Scottish Household Survey

Unit

​This indicator is chosen as it combines the knowledge of what is required to tackle climate change with the perception of urgency in addressing climate change. This combination is a critical aspect of community resilience. A well-informed community that recognises the urgency of climate action is more likely to engage in adaptive behaviours (Marshall et al., 2013; Shi et al., 2016). This indicator provides insights into the adaptive capacity of communities and their readiness to implement adaptation measures.

Community action on climate change

Indicator

Level of community climate action

Description

This indicator covers the number of Community Climate Action Hubs (CCAH) and Local Place Plans in Scotland.

Community Climate Action Hubs are centers that support local initiatives focused on climate resilience, providing resources, education, and networking opportunities to empower communities in addressing climate challenges. This indicator will look at the percentage across all Scotland’s regions that have at least one CCAH.

Local Place Plans are community-led plans that detail the aspirations and priorities of residents for the development and improvement of their areas, ensuring that local voices are integrated into the broader planning process.

Data set holder

Scottish Government

Unit

CCAH – % / LPP – Number

This indicator was selected as the number of Community Climate Action Hubs in Scotland indicates strong community resilience. This is done through fostering local engagement, resource distribution, capacity building, innovation, network-building, and policy advocacy for climate adaptation (Agrawal, 2008). Local Place Plans act as a good proxy for community-led collaboration and action. The data is available and how the hubs and plans relate to action is understandable to wider audiences.

Community flood resilience

Indicator

Progress of actions in local flood risk management plans

Description

This indicator measures the progress of actions to reduce or avoid flooding set in the Flood Management Plans.

Data set holder

The 14 lead local authorities in charge of local Flood Risk Management Plans

Unit

% of actions completed

This indicator focuses on actions of local authorities to build community flood resilience. It emphasises the importance of communities playing an active role in reducing the impact of climate change effects, in this case increased flooding (McEwen et al., 2014). This aspect is a key part of communities creating climate-resilient, healthy, and equitable places. These flood risk management plans are part of Scotland’s route map for reducing the effects of flooding on communities. This is key to Scotland’s health, wellbeing and economic success, with an estimated 284,000 homes, businesses and services identified as at risk of flooding.

Community wellbeing

Indicator

Level of community wellbeing

Description

This indicator measures adults (aged 16+) average score on the Warwick-Edinburgh Mental Wellbeing Scale (WEMWBS). The WEMWBS scale comprises 14 positively worded statements designed to assess positive affect, satisfying interpersonal relationships and positive functioning.

Data set holder

Scottish Health Survey

Unit

Mean score on WEMWBS scale

This indicator captures the extent of wellbeing within communities. Evidence shows that experience of the effects of climate change, for example a flooding event, and the capacity to adapt or react to it has a direct impact on mental health (Berry et al., 2018; Palinkas & Wong, 2020). Therefore, it is representative of communities and their health in relation to adaptation.

Public services are collaborating in effective and inclusive adaptation action

Overview

This outcome addresses the need for public services to collaborate effectively on adaptation. It aims to enhance governance, culture, skills and resources within public services to enable effective adaptation. Key actions include strengthening the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network, modernising water industry adaptation and embedding adaptation across transport networks. This approach seeks to ensure continued delivery of essential services and infrastructure resilience amidst climate change. Figure 5 presents the SNAP3’s pathway from objectives to outcome and impact for Public Services.[5]

Considerations for indicator selection

Following the desk-based review and stakeholder engagement, several considerations emerged regarding indicator selection for the Public Services outcome:

  • We determined that focusing on specific sectoral indicators related to the adaptation of critical infrastructure would result in numerous indicators. This would go against a core aim of our work to develop a concise and clear set of indicators. As discussed, the Scottish Government’s work developing indicators at an objective level has taken place alongside development of the outcome indicators presented in this report. Specific sectoral indicators have been determined at the objective level rather than being included in the high-level outcome indicators developed through this work.
  • We explored the possibility of an indicator around participation levels at a recently established infrastructure adaptation forum. However, the objectives and the ambitions of this forum are still at an early stage and it was not possible to determine a baseline, so it was not included here.
  • Collaboration is an important aspect of this outcome. The extent of collaboration of public service bodies is captured through the Sustainable Scotland Network annual report. The quality of collaboration is equally as important to capture. However, there is currently insufficient data available to incorporate this element within the outcome indicators.

Public services – proposed indicators

When setting out to develop a list of indicators for the Public Services outcome, we aimed to cover the extent of collaboration between public services, as well as the extent of effective and inclusive adaptation. These indicators use data available to capture high-level insights on the extent of public sector collaboration and adaptation actions that public bodies are taking. These indicators do not cover the extent to which these actions are effective or inclusive. Ultimately, this can only be captured at a sector-specific level, as no generalised metric for effectiveness or inclusiveness of public services and infrastructure exists. It was not possible to go to the level of sector-specific indicators for public services and infrastructure as this would result in numerous indicators.

The proposed indicators are:

  • Level of collaboration across public services
  • Level of adaptation actions across public services.

Below we present the baseline information for each of the two indicators proposed to monitor the Public Services outcome. For each indicator, we provide the baseline value, a description of the baseline, the recent trend and desired trend for each indicator to provide context. More information on baseline data is available in Annex 5. The is followed by a further detailed summary of each indicator and the rationale for their inclusion.

Public services – baseline

This section presents baseline information. For each indicator, we provide the baseline value, a description of the baseline, the desired trend for each indicator and recent trends for each baseline to provide context.

Number of public bodies members in the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network 

  • Description: In 2024, the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network counted 50 members.
  • Recent trends: the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network was launched in 2019 with 40 major organisations. 10 additional 10 organisations joined the Network in October 2023.
  • Baseline: 50
  • Desired trend: Increase

Number of public bodies citing the Work in partnership & collaborations as a priority for the year ahead in relation to climate change adaptation 

  • Description: In 2022-2023, 53.2% of the 188 listed public bodies (100 public bodies) submitting an annual compliance report cite “Work in Partnerships & Collaborations” in their top five priorities for the year ahead in relation to climate change adaptation.
  • Recent trends: In 2021/22, 36.2% of public bodies declared that they prioritized “Work in Partnerships & Collaborations”.
  • Baseline: 53.2%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Level of risk assessment across the public sector 

  • Description: 70.2% of the public bodies submitting an annual compliance report have completed some form of risk assessment during or prior to the 2022/23 reporting period.  43.6% of bodies have carried out a limited risk assessment. 20.7% of bodies have carried out a comprehensive risk assessment. 5.8% have completed an advanced risk assessment,  involving stakeholders and considering a range of climate or socioeconomic scenarios.
  • Recent trends: In 2021/22 reporting, 66.0% of public bodies submitted some form of adaptation risk assessment​.
  • Baseline:
    • Limited risk assessment: 43.6%
    • Comprehensive risk assessment: 20.7%
    • Advanced risk assessment: 5.8%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Level of adaptation action taken across the public sector

  • Description: 71.8% of all listed public bodies submitting an annual compliance report have taken adaptation action during or prior to the 2022/23 reporting period. 44% of bodies have taken some action, 21% of all bodies are taking good action. 6% of bodies are taking advanced action.
  • Recent trends: In 2021/22 reporting, 67.0% of public bodies reported taking some form of action on adaptation.
  • Baseline:
    • Some actions taken: 44%
    • Good action taken: 21%
    • Advanced action taken: 6%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Public Services – indicator summaries

Level of collaboration across public services

Indicator

Level of collaboration across public services

Description

This indicator is a combination of:

  • the number of public bodies participating in the Public Climate Adaptation Network run by Adaptation Scotland

and

  • The proportion of the 188 public bodies citing the “work in partnership & collaborations” as a priority for the year ahead in relation to climate change adaptation. This information is reported according to Section 44 of the Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009. The Sustainable Scotland Network manages the annual reporting process and analyses the returns on behalf of the Scottish Government.

Data set holder

Adaptation Scotland and Sustainable Scotland Network on behalf of Scottish Government

Unit

Number of public bodies / %

This indicator is selected as a proxy to demonstrate the level of collaborative effort between different public bodies on shared outcomes and priorities. Collaboration is vital to tackling the complex challenges involved in strengthening climate resilience. Effective collaboration can enhance adaptive capacity, reduce vulnerability, and ensure a cohesive response to climate change (Runhaar et al., 2018).

Level of adaptation actions across public services

Indicator

Level of adaptation actions across public services

Description

This indicator is measured by the following:

  • The level of risk assessment across the public sector
  • The level of adaptation action taken across the public sector

This indicator is a combination of two pieces of information reported by 188 public bodies according to Section 44 of the Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009. The level of risk assessment (none, limited, comprehensive, advanced) and of adaptation action (none, some, good, advanced) taken across the public sector are assessed. The Sustainable Scotland Network manages the annual reporting process and analyses the returns on behalf of the Scottish Government.

Data set holder

Sustainable Scotland Network on behalf of the Scottish Government

Unit

%

This indicator captures the level of climate adaptation actions undertaken by public bodies. The public sector must assess and address climate risks through adaptation planning and action to ensure the quality of its services to the population in a changing climate (Runhaar et al., 2018). By monitoring the level of risk assessment and adaptation actions, this indicator provides insights into the preparedness and resilience of public services.

Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition.

Overview

This outcome focuses on adapting the economy and industries to realise opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition. It aims to support businesses in understanding and responding to climate risks, whilst fostering innovation in adaptation solutions. Key actions include increasing business awareness of climate risks, supporting adaptation in sectors like farming and forestry, and promoting Scotland as an innovation hub for adaptation solutions. This approach seeks to ensure Scotland’s economy remains competitive and resilient whilst capitalising on emerging opportunities. Figure 6 presents SNAP3’s pathway from objectives to outcome and impact for Economy, Business and Industry.[6]

Considerations for indicator selection

Following the desk-based review and stakeholder engagement, several considerations emerged regarding indicator selection for the Economy, Business and Industry outcome:

  • Investments in climate resilience, with a specific taxonomy for adaptation-related investment, was considered a potential indicator. Such a taxonomy would prove a useful indicator for how the economy is adapting to climate change. However, while initiatives are emerging, this has not been fully implemented at national level yet. It is something to consider for inclusion in the next SNAP.
  • The direct economic loss associated with climate-related hazards, such as flooding was considered. Some stakeholders felt that many businesses could be reluctant to invest in resilient infrastructure because its benefits are not easily quantified. Capturing direct loss associated with climate-related hazards helps industries understand the value of investments in adaptation. Nevertheless, no viable dataset currently exists for such an indicator in the Scottish context.
  • An indicator on green jobs is included in the indicator set. However, it does not capture the development of adaptation skills needed by existing Scottish businesses to address the challenges of climate change. Training employees to increase adaptation knowledge and skills specific to the needs of individuals or businesses is an important aspect that is not captured as no viable dataset currently exists.
  • Sustainable practice in the agriculture sector is the focus of one indicator, given it accounts for 69% of Scotland’s total land use. Another area of the economy initially considered was the forestry sector. An indicator “percentage of certified woodland area in Scotland” was considered. However, considering that certification mostly applies to woodlands used for timber production and not woodlands more generally, the coverage of this indicator was considered too limited.
  • The proportion of agricultural land categorised as High Nature Value (HNV) Farming has initially been chosen as a proxy of adaptation to climate change in agriculture in Scotland. High Nature Value (HNV) Farming is an indicator used to identify agricultural systems that support high levels of biodiversity through low-intensity, traditional farming practices. HNV farms are more likely to be resilient to climate variability and extreme weather events. However, this indicator was not selected because the latest baseline is from 2013 and has not been updated since then. Should new data become available this indicator could be reviewed in the future.
  • Capturing innovation in Scotland’s economy was considered as an important aspect of this outcome. However, given the broad scope, complexity and subjectivity around what constitutes innovation, it is a difficult aspect to capture in a single quantitative indicator and is, therefore, not included.

Economy, Business and Industry – proposed indicators

It is important that the indicators cover the preparedness and adaptation of businesses and industries and the extent into which they take advantage of economic opportunities linked to climate change. The five indicators selected cover business preparedness and action using data periodically recorded by the Business Insights and Conditions Survey. The use of Office of National Statistics (ONS) data on green jobs provides an indicator for the transition towards a climate-smart economy and workforce skills development for the green economy. Another indicator focused specifically on adaptation action in the agricultural sector, which is a significant part of the Scottish economy. Taken together, this set of indicators uses available data to provide a broad indication of whether Scotland’s economy is adapting to climate change. Nevertheless, there are some key aspects that are not covered. These include levels of investment in climate adaptation initiatives and economic resilience (e.g., economic loss related to climate-related hazards) as well as the level of innovation from businesses in responding to climate risks.

The proposed indicators are:

  • Proportion of businesses monitoring climate-related risks
  • Proportion of businesses taking action to adapt to the effects of climate change
  • Number of green jobs
  • Uptake of grants for agriculture storage reservoirs and off-season storage lagoons​.

Below we present the baseline information for each of the five indicators proposed to monitor the Economy, Business and Industry outcome. For each indicator, we provide the baseline value, a description of the baseline, the recent trend and desired trend for each indicator to provide context. More information on baseline data is available in Annex 5. This is followed by a further detailed summary of each indicator and the rationale for their inclusion.

Economy, Business and Industry – baseline

Proportion of businesses monitoring climate related risks

  • Description: In 2023, 15.6% of Scotland businesses have assessed risks for supply chain disruption and distribution, 6.2% for increased flooding and 4.4% for temperature increase.
  • Recent trends: August 2023 was the first time the question related to businesses monitoring climate related risks was asked.
  • Baseline:
    • Supply chain disruption: 15.6%
    • Increased flooding: 6.2%
    • Temperature increase 4.4%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Proportion of businesses taking action to adapt to the effects of climate change  

  • Description: In 2023, 26.5% of Scotland businesses have taken action to adapt supply chain disruption and distribution, 11.5% to adapt to increased flooding and 4.4% to adapt to temperature increase.
  • Recent trends: August 2023 was the first time the question related to businesses taking adaptation action was asked.
  • Baseline:
    • Supply chain disruption: 25.6%
    • Increased flooding: 11.5%
    • Temperature increase 5.7%
  • Desired trend: Increase

Number of green jobs 

  • Description: In 2022, Scotland employment in green jobs in 2022 was estimated at 46,200 full-time equivalents (FTEs).
  • Recent trends: This number has increased yearly since 2015 (32,800 FTE), except between 2021 and 2022.
  • Baseline: 46,200
  • Desired trend: Increase

Uptake of grants for agriculture irrigation lagoons 

  • Description: In 2024, 5 AECS applications for irrigation lagoons were successful. 14 applications were submitted.
  • Recent trends:  the number of applications submitted and successful are usually between 0 and 2 per year.
  • Baseline: 5
  • Desired trend: Increase

Economy, Business and Industry – indicator summaries

Business awareness of climate adaptation

Indicator

Proportion of businesses monitoring climate related risks

Description

This indicator is a survey question from the Business Insights and Conditions Survey.

Data holder

Office for National Statistics

Unit

 %

This indicator captures the level of knowledge and awareness of climate-related risks by businesses. Ensuring businesses across Scotland are aware of the risks that climate change may pose to their operations, premises, staff, and supply chains is a crucial component of a climate resilient economy (Linnenluecke et al., 2013; Surminski, 2013).

Business preparedness in climate adaptation

Indicator

Proportion of businesses taking action to adapt to the effects of climate change

Description

This indicator is a survey question from the Business Insights and Conditions Survey.

Data holder

Office for National Statistics

Unit

 %

This indicator captures businesses’ capacity to respond to the risks posed by climate change. Ensuring businesses across Scotland have a plan to face the risks climate change may pose to their operations, premises, staff and supply chains will be crucial to building a more climate resilient economy (Linnenluecke et al., 2013; Surminski, 2013).

Green jobs in the Scottish economy

Indicator

Total Scotland employment in green jobs

Description

This indicator looks at green jobs, as defined as “employment in an activity that contributes to protecting or restoring the environment, including those that mitigate or adapt to climate change”; they can be estimated using industry, occupation, and firm approaches. This indicator follows an industry-based approach which includes all jobs in a green industry or sector and provides our headline estimate of employment in green jobs.

Data holder

Office for National Statistics

Unit

Number

This indicator monitors the adaptation opportunity in Scotland’s Just Transition as it directly tracks employment in environmentally sustainable sectors. This indicator reflects the economic growth and industry shift towards sustainable practices, essential for climate adaptation and effective Just Transition (Martinez-Fernandez et al., 2010).

Agriculture water-use efficiency

Indicator

Uptake of grants for agriculture irrigation lagoons

Description

This indicator follows the number of applied and approved agricultural projects (AECS) to improve water-use efficiency by collecting and storing water in an irrigation lagoon.

Data set holder

Scottish Government

Unit

 Number of applications and approved grants

This indicator represents proxy of adaptation by the agricultural sector. Improving water storage efficiency through irrigation lagoons is a strategic adaptation measure that addresses several challenges posed by climate change: it helps mitigate the variability of rainfall patterns and allow farmers to store water during periods of excess rainfall to ensure a steady water supply for crops. It will also contribute to reduce the stress on Scotland’s water resources and reduce flood risk at times by capturing and storing excess rainfall runoff (Schmitt et. al., 2022).

 

Discussion

Conclusions

Climate adaptation is complex and multifaceted, spanning across sectors and scales. Therefore, MEL of climate adaptation will always be challenging. Nevertheless, monitoring the extent to which an adaptation plan’s outcomes are achieved is essential to understand the effectiveness of its associated activities and policies. Ultimately, efforts to monitor adaptation plans, such as SNAP3, must navigate this complexity, seeking a balance of indicators that is relevant, robust, and practical to implement. We have sought to achieve this balance by taking a systematic approach to the selection of indicators through desk-based review and extensive engagement with stakeholder groups across Scottish governmental departments and associated organisations. The assessment has been grounded in the practical reality of what data is available rather than theoretically ideal indicators.

In relation to the relevance and robustness of indicators, we have developed outcome indicators that efficiently capture most of the core elements of four of SNAP3’s outcomes.

For the Nature Connects outcome, the indicators proposed cover ecological connectivity, ecological health, and urban-nature connection. Taken together, these indicators will provide useful insights on progress in securing the resilience of Scotland’s natural ecosystems to climate change. Lack of an indicator specifically for marine ecosystems, due to inadequate available data, is a key, is a key limitation.

For the Communities outcome, capturing health and equity in high-level, generalised indicators was challenging due to the complexity of these issues. Therefore, the proposed indicators focus on monitoring community action of relevance to climate adaptation.

For the Public Services outcome, the proposed indicators focus upon collaboration and adaptation actions at a high-level. It was impractical to address the effectiveness of actions, as the number of different sectors associated with this outcome would result in numerous indicators.

For the Economy, Business, and Industry outcome, the indicators proposed cover areas of business preparedness and action, the extent of the transition to green economy, and the extent to which an important sector of the economy (agriculture) is undertaking climate adaptation. While acknowledging that the level of investment in climate adaptation initiatives and economic losses resulting from climate-related hazards is not addressed, these indicators will still provide useful insights about the delivery of this outcome.

Regarding practical implementation, the proposed indicators redeploy established indicators that, crucially, are based on accessible data. Most are publicly reported, although some require correspondence with the relevant Scottish Government data holder. The proposed indicators allow for a baseline to be established at the start of SNAP3 and then reported against after a five-year period. There is variation on the extent of historic data available across the indicators; there; there is more extensive data on previous trends for some than others. Importantly, we believe the relevance of proposed indicators is clear and they are straightforward to apply. As such, they can be used at the end of the five-year period by those who have not been closely involved in their development.

The stakeholder engagement process was critical in the development of the outcome indicators. A wide range of relevant stakeholders across Scotland engaged in one-to-one calls, workshops or written feedback to provide insights both conceptually on what indicators might capture SNAP3 outcomes and practically on what data are available. This engagement provided sector- and topic-specific knowledge, as well as offering validation of the final proposed set of indicators. Several themes emerged from this process of engagement. First, there was an inherent tension between what is ideal and what is possible. Discussions sometimes veered more towards enthusiasm about theoretically ideal indicators that monitor outcomes rather than being grounded in the practical reality of what data is available. While this certainly did not negate the importance of discussing ideal indicators, it was important to ensure, insofar as possible, that an onus on what is practically possible influenced the discussion.

Second, often data limitations lay at the heart of challenges regarding identification of suitable indicators. The limitations took different forms: no data existed (e.g., economic loss from climate-related hazards); it was insufficiently captured (e.g., marine species’ abundance); or it was not easy to access or publicly available (e.g., data on Build Back Better grants). It is not uncommon for data limitations to be a significant obstacle to developing indicators for climate adaptation (Vallejo, 2017).

Third, the SNAP3 outcomes are structured in a clearly defined way, which was beneficial for developing the set of proposed indicators, these outcomes overlap in ways that should be acknowledged. One example relates to the Communities outcome and the Public Services outcome, as collaboration is of significance for both community resilience and for effective public services. Hence, community actors and public service actors cannot be clearly distinguished from each other. Another example is the emphasis of Nature Connects outcome on access to green space and associated health benefits that overlaps with the community health and wellbeing aspects of the Communities outcome. Such overlaps are not inherently problematic but did point to the need for the net to be cast as wide as possible when considering stakeholder engagement for when identifying indicators.

Recommendations

Several recommendations and next steps emerge from this work. It is important to finalise the outcome indicators for SNAP3 as soon as possible, as applying these indicators consistently will be crucial to enable meaningful comparisons against the baseline. Any changes made to individual indicators or the data that underpin them may compromise the ability to track progress consistently relative to the baseline. Furthermore, it is important to maintain continuity, quality and availability of data required by each indicator. It is vital to maintain the allocation of resources to the collection, maintenance and accessibility of datasets used by the indicators across all relevant Scottish Government departments.

Whilst the indicators represent a complete and operational indicator set, there should be a flexibility regarding potential for additional indicators. New indicators may be added in the immediate term if relevant data becomes available. For example, an ecosystem functions indicator for Nature Connects or a green finance investment indicator for Economy, Business, and Industry are anticipated in the near future. While the suite of indicators addresses the needs for monitoring the outcomes of SNAP3, it may be viewed as a foundation to build upon regarding monitoring of SNAP4.

Lastly, we recommend establishing a working group to sustain the functioning of the indicators. The working group could comprise key stakeholders and data providers who could meet annually to review the functioning of the indicators and address any issues regarding their deployment, e.g., continuity and availability of data and its quality. Furthermore, this working group would build on the strong interest evident across a wide range of stakeholders to engage in the topic of climate adaption MEL.

References

Agrawal, A. (2008). The role of local institutions in adaptation to climate change. In Social Dimensions of Climate Change: Equity and Vulnerability in a Warming World (pp. 173-198). World Bank.

Beauchamp, E. & Józefiak, I., 2023. Breaking the Glass Ceiling at COP 28: Four key elements to ensure a successful global goal on adaptation. International Institute for Sustainable Development. Available at: https://www.iisd.org/publications/report/global-goal-on-adaptation-monitoring-evaluation-learning-framework-cop-28 [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Beauchamp, E., Leiter, T., Pringle, P., Brooks, N., Masud, S., and Guerdat, P., 2024. Toolkit for Monitoring, Evaluation, and Learning for National Adaptation Plan Processes. NAP Global Network. Available at: https://www.adaptation-undp.org/sites/default/files/resources/internal_brief_transparency-mrv-me-april202249_adjusted_doc_revised.pdf [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Berry, H. L., Waite, T. D., Dear, K. B., Capon, A. G., & Murray, V. (2018). The case for systems thinking about climate change and mental health. Nature Climate Change, 8(4), 282-290.

Biden, A., 2022. 5 Smart Indicators in Monitoring and Evaluation. tools4dev. Available at: https://tools4dev.org/blog/smart-indicators-in-monitoring-and-evaluation/ [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Climate Change Committee (CCC), 2022, Is Scotland Ready? 2022 Report to Scottish Parliament. Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/asc-writes-to-scottish-government-about-outcomes-based-approach-for-the-sccap/

Climate Change Committee, 32023. Adapting to climate change – Progress in Scotland. Climate Change Committee. Available at: https://www.theccc.org.uk/publication/adapting-to-climate-change-progress-in-scotland/ [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Demuzere, M., Orru, K., Heidrich, O., Olazabal, E., Geneletti, D., Orru, H., Bhave, A.G., Mittal, N., Feliu, E. & Faehnle, M. (2014) Mitigating and adapting to climate change: multi-functional and multi-scale assessment of green urban infrastructure, Journal of Environmental Management, 146, pp. 107–115.

Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO), 2017. Tracking adaptation in agricultural sectors. FAO. Available at: https://www.fao.org/policy-support/tools-and-publications/resources-details/en/c/1193260/ [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Global Environmental Facility (GEF), 2016. Monitoring and Evaluation of Climate Change Adaptation. Global Environment Facility. Available at: https://www.thegef.org/sites/default/files/council-meeting-documents/EN_GEF.STAP_.C.51.Inf_.03_M%26E_of_CCA.pdf [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Gabbatiss, J. & Lempriere, M., 2024. Bonn climate talks: Key outcomes from the June 2024 UN climate conference. Carbon Brief. Available at: https://www.carbonbrief.org/bonn-climate-talks-key-outcomes-from-the-june-2024-un-climate-conference/ [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Gill, S. E., Handley, J. F., Ennos, A. R., & Pauleit, S. (2007). Adapting cities for climate change: the role of the green infrastructure. Built Environment, 33(1), 115-133.

Haddad, N.M., Brudvig, L.A., Clobert, J., Davies, K.F., Gonzalez, A., Holt, R.D., Lovejoy, T.E., Sexton, J.O., Austin, M.P., Collins, C.D., Cook, W.M., Damschen, E.I., Ewers, R.M., Foster, B.L., Jenkins, C.N., King, A.J., Laurance, W.F., Levey, D.J., Margules, C.R., Melbourne, B.A., Nicholls, A.O., Orrock, J.L., Song, D.X. & Townshend, J.R. (2015) Habitat fragmentation and its lasting impact on Earth’s ecosystems, Science Advances, 1(2), e1500052

Krosby, M., Tewksbury, J., Haddad, N. M., & Hoekstra, J. (2010). Ecological connectivity for a changing climate. Conservation Biology, 24(6), 1686-1689.

Linnenluecke, M.K., Griffiths, A. & Winn, M.I. (2013) Firm and industry adaptation to climate change: a review of climate adaptation studies in the business and management field, Wiley Interdisciplinary Reviews: Climate Change, 4(5), pp. 397–416.

Maas, J., Verheij, R.A., Groenewegen, P.P., de Vries, S. & Spreeuwenberg, P. (2006) Green space, urbanity, and health: how strong is the relation?, Journal of Epidemiology & Community Health, vol. 60, no. 7, pp. 587–592.

Mäkinen, K., Prutsch, A., Karali, E., Leitner, M., Völler, S., Lyytimäki, J., Pringle, P., and Vanneuville, W., 2018. Indicators for adaptation to climate change at national level – Lessons from emerging practice in Europe. European Topic Centre on Climate Change impacts, Vulnerability and Adaptation (ETC/CCA) Technical paper 2018/3. DOI: 10.25424/CMCC/CLIMATE_CHANGE_ADAPTATION_INDICATORS_2018.

Marshall, N. A., Park, S. E., Howden, S. M., Dowd, A. B., & Jakku, E. S. (2013). Climate change awareness is associated with enhanced adaptive capacity. Agricultural Systems, 117, 30-34.

Martinez-Fernandez, C., Hinojosa, C. & Miranda, G. (2010) Green jobs and skills: The local labour market implications of addressing climate change, OECD Local Economic and Employment Development (LEED) Working Papers, 2010/02, OECD Publishing, Paris.

McEwen, L., Jones, O. & Robertson, I. (2014), ‘A glorious time?’ Some reflections on flooding in the Somerset Levels, The Geographical Journal, 180(4), pp. 326-337.

McGranahan, G., Balk, D., & Anderson, B. (2007). The rising tide: assessing the risks of climate change and human settlements in low elevation coastal zones. Environment and Urbanization, 19(1), 17-37.

Moss, A., 2019. A monitoring and evaluation framework for the second SCCAP. ClimateXChange. Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/publications/a-monitoring-and-evaluation-framework-for-the-second-sccap/ [Accessed 16 July 2024].

New, M., Reckien, D., Viner, D., Adler, C., Cheong, S.-M., Conde, C., Constable, A., Coughlan de Perez, E., Lammel, A., Mechler, R., Orlove, B., and Solecki, W., 2022. Decision-Making Options for Managing Risk. In: Pörtner, H.-O., Roberts, D.C., Tignor, M., Poloczanska, E.S., Mintenbeck, K., Alegría, A., Craig, M., Langsdorf, S., Löschke, S., Möller, V., Okem, A., and Rama, B. (eds.) Climate Change 2022: Impacts, Adaptation and Vulnerability. Contribution of Working Group II to the Sixth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK and New York, NY, USA, pp. 2539–2654, doi:10.1017/9781009325844.026.

Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), 2015. National Climate Change Adaptation: Emerging Practices in Monitoring and Evaluation. OECD Publishing, Paris. Available at: http://dx.doi.org/10.1787/9789264229679-en [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Peter, S., & Peter, F., 2009. Evaluation of Indicators for EU Policy Objectives. Ecologic Institute. Available at: https://www.ecologic.eu/sites/default/files/publication/2016/1901-research_note-d2-1-evaluation-of_indicators-for-eu-policy-objectives-2009.pdf [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Palinkas, L. A., & Wong, M. (2020). Global climate change and mental health. Current Opinion in Psychology, 32, 12-16

Palmer, M. A., Lettenmaier, D. P., Poff, N. L., Postel, S. L., Richter, B., & Warner, R. (2009). Climate change and river ecosystems: protection and adaptation options. Environmental Management, 44(6), 1053-1068.

Runhaar, H., Wilk, B., Persson, Å., Uittenbroek, C., & Wamsler, C. (2018). Mainstreaming climate adaptation: taking stock about ‘what works’ from empirical research worldwide. Regional Environmental Change, 18, 1201-1210.

Sayers, PB., Lindley. S, Carr, S and Figueroa-Alfaro, R. W, 2021. The impacts of climate change on population groups in Scotland. Research undertaken by Sayers and Partners in association with the University of Manchester for ClimateXChange.

Schmitt, R.J. P., Rosa, L., Daily, G. (2022), ‘Global expansion of sustainable irrigation limited by water storage’, Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 119 (47), https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2214291119.

Shi, J., Visschers, V.H.M., Siegrist, M. & Arvai, J. (2016) Knowledge as a driver of public perceptions about climate change reassessed, Nature Climate Change, 6, pp. 759–762.

Surminski, S. (2013) Private-sector adaptation to climate risk, Nature Climate Change, 3(11), pp. 943–945.

United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), 2022. Transparency, MRV, and M&E. United Nations Development Programme. Available at: https://www.adaptation-undp.org/sites/default/files/resources/internal_brief_transparency-mrv-me-april202249_adjusted_doc_revised.pdf [Accessed 16 July 2024].

United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), 2024. Synthesis of submissions on the UAE – Belém work programme on indicators, Advance Unedited Version. UNFCCC. Available at: https://unfccc.int/documents/638384 [Accessed 16 July 2024].

United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), 2023. Draft technical paper on monitoring and evaluation of adaptation at the national and subnational level (AC22). UNFCCC. Available at: https://unfccc.int/sites/default/files/resource/ac22_7c_monitoring_evaluation.pdf [Accessed 16 July 2024].

United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 2017, . Development of a Climate Resilience Screening Index (CRSI): An Assessment of Resilience to Acute Meteorological Events and Selected Natural Hazards. EPA. Available at: https://cfpub.epa.gov/si/si_public_record_report.cfm?dirEntryId=335758 [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Vallejo, L. (2015). Insights from national adaptation monitoring and evaluation systems. In Mullan, M., Kingsmill, N., Agrawala, S. & Kramer, A.M. (eds) National Adaptation Planning: Lessons from OECD Countries. Springer, Cham. Available at: https://www.oecd.org/en/publications/2017/06/insights-from-national-adaptation-monitoring-and-evaluation-systems_d2e677fe.html [Accessed 16 July 2024].

Watson, J. E. M., Dudley, N., Segan, D. B., & Hockings, M. (2014). The performance and potential of protected areas. Nature, 515, 67-73.

Annexes

Annex 1 – Policies reviewed

The following policies were reviewed for sectorial indicators that could be relevant for the SNAP3 outcome indicators.

Scottish policies listed in the draft SNAP3 for the outcome area “Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts and seas”:

Scottish policies listed in the draft SNAP3 for the outcome area “Communities creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places”:

Scottish policies listed in the draft SNAP3 for the outcome area “Public services are collaborating in effective, inclusive adaptation action”:

Scottish policies listed in the draft SNAP3 for the outcome area “Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition”:

Annex 2 – Initial longlist of indicators

The initial longlist of indicators is listed below. This longlist was shared with stakeholders and revised through engagement as described in section 2.

Initial longlist of indicators for the outcome area “Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts and seas”:

  • Woodland connectivity indicator by catchment
  • Heathland connectivity indicator by catchment
  • Grassland connectivity indicator by catchment
  • Fen/marsh/swamp connectivity indicator by catchment
  • Seabird species’ abundance
  • Terrestrial species abundance
  • Terrestrial species’ occupancy
  • Proportion of adults who live within a 5-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space
  • Number of visits to forests and woodlands
  • Population within a ten-minute walk
  • Provision per person of green space
  • Reduced negative health effects (respiratory distress and heat stroke)

Initial longlist of indicators for the outcome area “Communities creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places”:

  • Percentage of the population declaring that they understand what actions they should take to help tackle climate change
  • Proportion of adults viewing climate change as an immediate and urgent problem
  • Percentage of vulnerable population (low multiple deprivation index areas, elderly) impacted by climate risks
  • Percentage of built-up area exposed to flooding risk
  • Percentage of the population living in flood risk areas
  • Percentage of population living in high heat hazard risk areas
  • Speed and reach of early warning systems
  • Local government and communities have clear response plans and procedures
  • Number of local communities and civil society included in planning and with recognized role in EWS
  • Percentage of community members who are aware of emergency procedures
  • Percentage of the population with access to Floodline

Initial longlist of indicators for the outcome area “Public services are collaborating in effective, inclusive adaptation action”:

  • Number of public bodies members in the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network
  • Number of public bodies citing the Work in partnership & collaborations as a priority s for the year ahead in relation to climate change adaptation
  • Number of Community climate action hubs
  • Affordability of energy: Price of electricity in Scotland
  • Quality of the public services in rural communities
  • Quality of the public services in the 20% most deprived areas
  • Level of adaptation action taken across the public sector
  • Level of risk assessment across the public sector
  • Number and length of power outrages
  • Percentage of roads considered for maintenance treatment
  • Number of new major infrastructure projects located in areas at risk
  • Level of satisfaction of island residents on mainland ferry services
  • Number of Water Quality Incidents reported to DWQR
  • Number and length of spills from sewer overflows events

Initial longlist of indicators for the outcome area “Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition”:

  • Number of businesses monitoring climate related risks (flooding, temperature increase, supply chain disruptions)
  • Number of businesses located in potential vulnerable areas
  • Number of businesses taking action to adapt to the effects of climate change
  • Gross Value Added (GVA) for rural local authorities
  • Number of Farmers receiving training about climate change and adaptation from the Farm Advisory Service
  • Number of Farmers entering the Forestry Grant Scheme
  • Total area of forests and woodlands
  • Sustainability of Fish Stocks indicator
  • Amount of green finance and investment mobilised for adaptation (via an established UK Green Taxonomy adaptation category)
  • Number of green jobs (as defined by the ONS)

Annex 3 – Workshop participation

The following organisations participated in the workshops.

Organisations represented in the workshop “Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts and seas”:

  • Centre of Expertise for Waters
  • Edinburgh Council
  • Forestry and Land
  • Glasgow City Council
  • Highlands and Islands Airports
  • James Hutton Institute
  • Marine Directorate of Scottish Government
  • National Centre for Resilience
  • Nature Scot
  • Public Health Scotland
  • SEPA
  • Scottish Government
  • Scottish Water
  • Sniffer

Organisations represented in the workshop “Communities creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places”:

  • FloodRe
  • Glasgow City Council
  • National Centre for Resilience
  • National Resilience Scotland
  • Nature Scot
  • Public Health Scotland
  • Scottish Dynamic Coast
  • Scottish Flood Forum
  • Scottish Government
  • Scottish Land Commission
  • Scottish Waters
  • Sniffer
  • Strathclyde University

Organisations represented in the workshop “Public services are collaborating in effective, inclusive adaptation action”:

  • Climate Change Committee
  • Glasgow City Council
  • MET Office
  • Nature Scot
  • Network Rail
  • Public Health Scotland
  • SEPA
  • Scottish Flood Forum
  • Scottish Government
  • Scottish Water
  • Sniffer
  • Transport Scotland
  • University of Strathclyde

Organisations represented in the workshop “Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition”:

  • Climate Change Committee
  • Forestry and Land Scotland
  • Glasgow City Council
  • Marine Directorate of Scottish Government
  • Scottish Government
  • SEPA
  • Scottish Water
  • Sniffer

Annex 4 – Indicator criteria

OUTCOME: Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts, and seas

ECOSYSTEM HEALTH AND CONNECTIVITY

Habitat Connectivity Index 

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

Adaptation Relevance

Green

This indicator addresses habitat connectivity and quality, which are important aspect for assessing the vulnerability of ecosystems to climate change. By evaluating how well species can move and adapt to changing conditions, the indicator provides valuable insights into the adaptive capacity of habitats.

Representativeness

Amber

The indicator covers four key types of habitats: Woodland, Heathland, Grassland, and Fen/Marsh/Swamp – habitats that are representative of the broader landscape and crucial for maintaining ecological functions and services. However, the indicator does not cover freshwater, marine and coastal environments, and therefore has some limitations in its representativeness of indicating ecological health and connectivity.

Data Availability

Amber

Data is collected by NatureScot. Data for CSGN area is publicly available on NatureScot’s website. However, data for the whole Scotland is provided directly by NatureScot and is not published online.

Sensitivity

Amber

Updating this indicator every five years is considered a sensible frequency to observe meaningful changes in habitat connectivity.

There may be a lag in reporting years, with data being published on average 2 years after. The up-to-date data may therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding

Green

This indicator on habitat connectivity can be widely understood by a broad range of stakeholders in relation to improved ecological health and associated resilience.

Baseline

Green

The indicator was last updated in 2022 for semi-natural grassland, heathland, and semi-natural woodland. Baseline maps are available on the Nature Scot website, providing a reference point for measuring changes over time. These baselines are crucial for assessing the progress and effectiveness of adaptation measures.

The metric uses to calculate the habitat connectivity it is the Equivalent Connected Area (Probability of Connectivity), the ECA (PC).

Practicality

Green

The data is publicly available and detailed by catchment area, making it practical for use in planning and decision-making processes. This accessibility ensures that stakeholders can utilize the information to enhance habitat connectivity and support climate adaptation strategies. The practical application of this data supports localized adaptation efforts and helps to mitigate the impacts of climate change on biodiversity and ecosystem services.

Proportion of surface water bodies classified in good or better condition

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

This indicator is relevant for climate adaptation as it addresses the quality and health of water ecosystems, which are critical for reducing vulnerability and enhancing adaptive capacity. By tracking the proportion of water bodies in good or high condition, this indicator provides insights into the resilience of water ecosystems and their capacity to adapt to changing climatic conditions.

Representativeness​ 

 Amber

The indicator is broadly effective for monitoring ecological health as it encompasses key aspects of ecosystem quality. Although it has limitations due to its primary focus on surface water bodies, it can be used as a useful proxy for the status of broader ecological and biodiversity conditions.

Data availability

Green

Full GIS data for this indicator is available on the SEPA website, ensuring that data is current and reliable. The data is updated every year by SEPA.

Sensitivity​ 

Green

Changes in water quality and ecosystem health can be noted over a five-year timescale interventions.

Understanding​ 

Green

This indicator on water quality can be widely understood by a broad range of stakeholders in relation to improved ecological health and associated resilience.

Baseline​ 

Green

The indicator is publicly available on SEPA’s website has an established baseline from 2007 to 2022.

Practicality​ 

Green

Statistical and mapping data for this indicator is already being collected and publicly accessible, making it practical to monitor as an indicator.

Proportion of Scotland’s protected sites in favourable condition

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

Protected sites play a role in improving the adaptive capacity of vulnerable species by providing safe havens with the functional network that species can migrate from or too. This indicator is relevant for climate adaptation as it directly relates to the resilience of ecosystems and their ability to adapt to changing environmental conditions.

Representativeness​ 

 Amber

While the indicator is a useful proxy for ecological health and connectivity, its limitation should be noted. The indicator does not include offshore marine sites and features in Scotland beyond 12 nautical miles, and primarily focuses on protected sites and not all natural sites, which may limit its representativeness of the broader ecological health and connectivity.

Data availability

 Green

The Site Condition Monitoring (SCM) program is a rolling monitoring effort that aims to assess the condition of a sample of designated natural features each year. Detailed data per type of habitat is publicly available on the Nature Scot website, ensuring that data is current and reliable.

Sensitivity​ 

 Amber

The indicator has shown longer-term changes, though it may not reflect notable changes within shorter periods, such as from 2023 to 2024. While a five-year timescale may be too short to observe long-term trends, the indicator is suitable to detect significant changes over longer periods.

Understanding​ 

Green

This indicator on condition of protected sites can be widely understood by a broad range of stakeholders in relation to improved ecological health and associated resilience.

Baseline​ 

Green

The indicator has an established baseline from 2005 to 2024, with historical data available for comparison.

Practicality​ 

Green

Statistical and mapping data for this indicator is already being collected and publicly accessible, making it practical to monitor as an indicator.

Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

Green

 Monitoring the extent of coastal erosion is relevant to climate adaptation as it reflects the efficacy of implemented adaptation measures in enhancing coastal resilience.

Representativeness​ 

Green

 This indicator represents the coastal component of the Nature Connects outcome of the SNAP3.

Data availability

 Amber

Data is publicly available, however, it is not specifically stated how long the programme hosting the data is running for.

Sensitivity​ 

Green

Changes in this indicator are sufficient sensitive to the time-period of SNAP3.

Understanding​ 

Green

The connection between the extent of coastal erosion as a proxy for coastal adaptation to climate change is generally recognised.

Baseline​ 

Green

Baseline data available from 2017 and 2021.

Practicality 

Green

 The indicator is publicly available on the Center of Expertise for Waters (CREW) website. It has been developed under the Dynamic Coast project.

URBAN GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

Extent of green-blue land cover in urban areas 

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

Green-blue land cover in urban areas reflects the extent of natural spaces in cities that provide crucial ecosystem services. It is relevant for climate adaptation as it captures how well cities are prepared to adapt to the challenges posed by climate change, making urban environments more sustainable and liveable.

Representativeness​ 

Amber

This indicator offers a good coverage of Scotland, with urban areas defined as those with a population more than 500. It covers public and private greenspaces, including woodland, open semi-natural, inland water, beach or foreshore, and manmade surface. It also distinguishes the different functions of greenspaces, such as public park or garden, school grounds, private garden, allotments, playing fields, etc. However, it does not cover the tree canopy over hard surfacing or green roofs, which are also relevant in terms of adaptation.

Data availability

Amber

This dataset “OS MasterMap Greenspace Layer” is updated every 6 months by Ordnance Survey, but requires a licence to access it.

Sensitivity​ 

Green

Land use modification in urban areas can be noted over a five-year timescale.

Understanding​ 

Green

This indicator on green-blue land cover in urban areas can be widely understood by a broad range of stakeholders in relation to the extent of natural spaces in cities associated with resilience.

Baseline​ 

Green

This dataset “OS MasterMap Greenspace Layer” can be purchased on the Ordnance Survey website

Practicality​ 

 Amber

Data is available in ESRI Shapefile, GML 3.2.1, GeoPackage and Vector Tiles format. The GIS map has to be purchased and analysed to be transformed to actual percentage.

Proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Amber

The indicator captures the distance to the nearest public or open space, but does not reflect the level of accessibility, the perception of safety people have toward the green and blue spaces nor the frequency of access.

Representativeness​ 

Green

The figures for this indicator come from the Scottish Household Survey (SHS). It covers the whole Scottish territory and includes people resident in Scotland aged 16 and over.

The SHS sample has been designed to allow annual publication of results at Scotland level and for local authorities. To meet these requirements, the target sample size for Scotland was 10,450 household interviews with a minimum local authority target of 250.

Data availability

Green

The data is published annually in the Scottish Household Survey Annual Report.

Sensitivity​ 

 Amber

Changes in the proportion of adults who live within a five-minute walk of their local green or blue space can be noted over a five-year timescale.

There is a lag in reporting years up to a maximum of one year (e.g. 2024 fieldwork ending in January 2025 with publication of results later in 2025) The up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​ 

Green

This indicator can be widely understood by a broad range of stakeholders.

Baseline​ 

Green

The figures for this indicator come from the Scottish Household Survey (SHS) which is a National Statistics product produced by the Scottish Government. This indicator is also part of the National Performance Framework.

Practicality​ 

Green

Statistical data for this indicator is already being collected and publicly accessible, making it practical to monitor as an indicator.

OUTCOME: Communities are creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places.

Community awareness around climate change

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

Adaptation relevance​

 Amber

This indicator is relevant for climate adaptation as it improves community adaptive capacity through knowledge enhancement. By understanding what actions are necessary to tackle climate change and recognizing the urgency of these actions, communities can better prepare for and respond to climate impacts. This knowledge reduces vulnerability and increases resilience.

However, the question asked does not specifically address the impacts of climate change, the criteria is therefore orange.

Representativeness​

Green

The survey provides useful snapshot on the awareness and knowledge of communities around climate change.

The SHS sample has been designed to allow annual publication of results at Scotland level and for local authorities. To meet these requirements, the target sample size for Scotland was 10,450 household interviews with a minimum local authority target of 250.

Data availability

Green

The Scottish Household Survey climate awareness and action questions are asked biennially on odd years. The results are publicly available.

Sensitivity​

 Amber

This indicator is sensitive to changes for the purposes of SNAP3 monitoring, as observed the marked changes that occurred in public perception and knowledge between 2019-2022.

There is a lag in reporting years up to a maximum of one year (e.g. 2024 fieldwork ending in January 2025 with publication of results later in 2025)The up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​

Green

There is a clear connection on how understanding climate actions and the urgency of these actions relate to progress in climate adaptation.

Baseline​

Green

The baseline data for this indicator is available since 2019, providing a reference point for measuring changes in community awareness and perception over time.

Practicality​

Amber

The Scottish Household Survey has been collecting data since 1999, making it a practical, cost-effective, and well-established method for gathering information.

Community action on climate change

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

Adaptation relevance​

 Green

Community climate action hubs will improve knowledge of communities and enhances the preparedness of communities.

Representativeness​

 Amber

This indicator does not capture the quality of action and may therefore not be fully representative of the effectiveness of climate actions. While it shows the presence of CCAHs and LPPs, it does not measure the depth or impact of the actions taken through these hubs/plans.

Data availability

 Green

Data is held by the Scottish Government, and is publicly accessible on the Scottish Government website: Community climate action hubs: contact details – gov.scot (www.gov.scot) .

Sensitivity​

 Amber

This indicator is sensitive to changes for the purposes of SNAP3 monitoring, as observed by marked changes that between 2019-2022.

Understanding​

 Green

It is easy to see the connection between the existence and maintenance of CCAHs and LLPs as metrics for climate action, although it might not be clear what specific actions arise from these.

Baseline​

Amber

20 CCAHs as of June 2024 (81% of the council areas covered).

Practicality​

Amber

Information on LPPs is not located in one centralised place, so requires time and resource to obtain.

Community flood resilience

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

Adaptation relevance​

Green

This indicator is relevant to climate adaptation progress as it indicates the implementation effectiveness of strategies to mitigate flood risks and enhance community resilience.

Representativeness​

Green

Flooding is considered a significant climate hazard, as outlined in the SNAP3, therefore an indicator that captures action for this is representative of climate-resilient communities.

Data availability

Green

Updated data on progress will be publicly available in 2025 and 2028. Data will be published by the 14 lead local authorities in charge of local Flood Risk Management Plans, and information will be centralised by SEPA.

Sensitivity​

Green

Changes in this indicator are sufficiently sensitive to the time-period of SNAP3 monitoring.

However, reports are not published annually so the up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​

Green

The extent that actions are taking place to manage the impacts of flooding are clear to understand for a wide audience.

Baseline​

 Amber

Actions to reduce or avoid flood are collated by the 14 lead local authorities in charge of Local Flood management Plans in their Flood Management Plan assessment report. The latest report was published in 2021, and the next one is expected in December 2025.

Practicality​

 Green

Data is easy to obtain and easy to use to understand progress.

Community wellbeing

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

Amber

Not directly related to climate change adaptation, but the experience of the effects of climate change, for example a flooding event, and the capacity to adapt or react to it has a direct impact on mental health. This indicator highlights the intersection between mental wellbeing and climate resilience, showing how adaptive capacity influences community health.

Representativeness​ 

Amber

Wellbeing metrics are useful indicators of community health, however, health and its impacts from climate change are wide-ranging in scope. Therefore, there is ultimately limitations that must be acknowledged with this indicator when representing overall community health.

Data availability

 Green

Data is publicly available from Scottish Government.

Sensitivity​ 

Amber

Whilst minor changes have been observed since 2006, this does not necessarily point to a lack of sensitivity in relation to the information this indicator provides.

There is a lag in reporting years, with data being published on average one year later. The up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​ 

Amber

Whilst the concept of mental wellbeing and its importance as a metric of community resilience is easy to understand, how this indicator relates to climate adaptation is not clear.

Baseline​ 

Green

The baseline data from 2022 shows a mean score of 47.0 on the WEMWBS scale.

Practicality​ 

Green

Data has been monitored since 2006, the established data collection processes ensure that this indicator can be consistently and reliably monitored.

OUTCOME: Public services are collaborating in effective and inclusive adaptation action

Level of collaboration across public services

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

Collaboration is vital component of climate adaptation planning. Effective collaboration can enhance adaptive capacity, reduce vulnerability, and ensure a cohesive, equitable response to climate change.

Representativeness​ 

 Amber

While this indicator shows the level of participation and collaboration, it does not capture the quality or depth of progress in terms of collaboration. It measures quantity rather than the effectiveness of the collaborative actions being taken.

Data availability

 Green

Data on the participation of public bodies in the Public Climate Adaptation Network is publicly available from Adaptation Scotland and the Sustainable Scotland Network.

Sensitivity​ 

 Amber

While the indicator data is sensitive enough for the purposes of SNAP3 monitoring, the number of public bodies participating to the Public Climate Adaptation Network is not expected to rise significantly because Adaptation Scotland’s strategy is to integrate few members at a time to insure their good and lasting integration into the network.

For the Public bodies climate change duties reporting, there is a lag in reporting years, with data being published on average 1 year after. The up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​ 

Green

This indicator is widely understood with the importance of collaboration in climate adaptation is broadly recognised and easily communicated.

Baseline​ 

Green

The baseline data is from 2024 for the Public Climate Adaptation Network and from 2022/23 for the SSN report.

Practicality​ 

Green

Data is easy to obtain and utilise to monitor progress over the SNAP3 monitoring period.

Level of adaptation actions across public services

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

Green

This indicator is highly relevant to adaptation, providing information on levels of risk assessments undertaken by public sector and the extent that adaptation action is taking place.

Representativeness​ 

Green

The indicator is representative insights on the extent public services are engaging in adaptation action. However, it only captures the level of risk assessment and action of public bodies subject to mandatory reporting.

Data availability

Green

Data is collected annually, providing a regular update on the level of adaptation action across public services. Data is publicly available.

Sensitivity​ 

Amber

Changes in collaboration will likely be observed over a five-year time period.

There is a lag in reporting years, with data being published on average 1 year after. The up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​ 

Amber

This indicator requires some understanding of SSN’s analytical framework (and subjective nature of assessment) but the concept of risk assessment is widely understood.

Baseline​ 

Green

The baseline for this indicator is established from data collected in 22022-3.

Practicality​ 

Green

Data is easy to obtain and utilise to monitor progress over the SNAP3 monitoring period.

OUTCOME: Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition.

Business awareness of climate adaptation

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

Business action in relation to adaptation can make them more resilient and prepared for climate hazards, thereby reducing vulnerability.

Representativeness​ 

 Amber

This indicator represents well the business adaptation component of the Economy, Business and Industry outcome area. It should be noted that it represents businesses with 10 or more employees.

Data availability

 Green

Data is publicly available and reported on annually.

Sensitivity​ 

 Amber

Notable changes in the number of business monitoring climate risks is observable in the five-year period.

This question was asked in August 2023. There exists potential for it to be asked soon after the end of the plan and therefore no lag in reporting.

Understanding​ 

Green

There is a clear connection between the extent in which businesses are monitoring climate risks and how this relates to adapting economy, business and industry.

Baseline​ 

Green

Baseline data available from August 2023.

Practicality​ 

Green

Data is being captured by BICS already, and practical to use.

Business preparedness in climate adaptation

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

Business action in relation to adaptation can make them more resilient and prepared for climate hazards, thereby reducing vulnerability.

 

Representativeness​ 

 Amber

This indicator represents well the business adaptation component of the Economy, Business and Industry outcome area. It should be noted that it represents businesses with 10 or more employees.

 

Data availability

 Green

Data is publicly available and reported on annually.

 

Sensitivity​ 

 Amber

Notable changes in the number of business monitoring climate risks is observable in the five-year period.

This question was asked in August 2023. There exists potential for it to be asked soon after the end of the plan and therefore no lag in reporting.

 

Understanding​ 

Green

There is a clear connection between the extent in which businesses are monitoring climate risks and how this relates to adapting economy, business and industry.

 

Baseline​ 

Green

Baseline data available from August 2023.

 

Practicality​ 

 Green

Data is being captured by BICS already, and practical to use.

 

Green jobs in the Scottish economy

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

Amber

The green jobs definition signifies its relevance to adaptation. However, important to realise limitations around green jobs, for example – adaptation considered as thinking embedded into all businesses, and not just new jobs created.

Representativeness​ 

Amber

In its focus on employment/skills in relation to climate adaptation, this indicator represents well the business adaptation component of the Economy, Business and Industry outcome area.

Data availability

 Green

Data is publicly available and captured annually. It should be noted that this data is currently categorised as ‘official statistics in development’. This means the data is potentially subject to revision. However, as stated by the Office of National Statistics, this data, even when in development, is considered sufficient quality to be used.[7]

Sensitivity​ 

Amber

Changes in this indicator are sufficiently sensitive to the time-period of SNAP3 monitoring.

There is a lag in reporting years, with data being published on average 2 years after (e.g. 2022 data was published in March 2024). The up-to-date data will therefore not be available immediately at the end of the Plan.

Understanding​ 

Amber

The connection between a ‘green job’ and its relevance to climate adaptation is potentially unclear, therefore terminology and definitions used must be clearly stated.

Baseline​ 

Green

Baseline data available between 2015-2022.

Practicality​ 

Green

Statistical data for this indicator is already being collected and publicly accessible, making it practical to monitor as an indicator.

SUSTAINABLE PRACTICE IN THE AGRICULTURE SECTOR

Agriculture water-use efficiency

Criterion

Rating

Assessment

 Adaptation relevance​ 

 Green

Improve water use efficiency in agriculture increases the resilience of farms against several effects of climate change.

Representativeness​ 

Amber

The east of Scotland is more concerned by drought risk than the west of the country.

Moreover, irrigation lagoons are large-scale projects, but other ways to increase water-use efficiency can also be implemented on farms and will not be captured by this indicator.

Data availability

Amber

Data is captured annually by Scottish governmentGovernment but is not publicly available.

Sensitivity​ 

Green

Changes in this indicator are sufficiently sensitive to the time-period of SNAP3 monitoring.

Understanding​ 

Green

There is a clear connection between water use efficiency and adaptation in the agricultural sector.

Baseline​ 

Green

Data has been collated annually since 2015.

Practicality​ 

 Amber

This information is not publicly available.

Annex 5 – Baseline information for each indicator

Indicator

Year

Baseline

Data source

Nature Connects Nature connects across our lands, settlements, coasts, and seas

Habitat Connectivity Index​ 

2020

Equivalent Connected Area (Probability of Connectivity) (ECA (PC)) values from 2020 are available for Scotland for semi-grassland, woodlands and heathland. The data used was the 2020 EUNIS Level 2 landcover map produced by Space Intelligence.

To get an overall ECA (PC) value from the local authorities data, each value needs to be squared, the totals summed and then the square root taken.

The total Equivalent Connected Area (Probability of Connectivity) (ECA (PC) value for Scotland was 35,570 ha for semi-grassland (2.9%), 5,655 ha for woodland (1.4%) and 214,277 ha for heathland (8.3%).

The overall national percentage figure is always going to be lower for each habitat than the individual local authority figures.  This is because in a larger area you have more individual habitat patches which results in a lower connectivity measurement.

For CSGN data visualisation: Habitat Connectivity Indicator – CSGN (arcgis.com)

The data for whole Scotland was provided directly by NatureScot.

Proportion of surface water bodies classified in good or better condition

2022

445 (13.7%) surface water bodies in high condition, 1664 surface water bodies in good condition (51.2%) on a total of 3 249 surface water bodies monitored.

Water Classification Hub (sepa.org.uk)

Proportion of Scotland’s Protected Sites in Favourable Condition

2024

65.1% of natural features in favourable condition ‘Site condition monitoring assessment). If we include the sites where monitoring has detected signs of recovery, but favourable condition has not been reached (6.1%) and the sites with positive management is in place that is expected to improve the condition of the site (4.4%), the overall number reaches 75.6%.

For woodlands (the least favourable habitat type), the proportion of sites in favourable condition is 56.8%.

The Proportion of Scotland’s Protected Sites in Favourable Condition 2024 | NatureScot

Proportion of soft shorelines affected by coastal erosion

2021

46% of the soft coast is affected by coastal erosion. The average rate of erosion is 0.43 m/year.

CREW_DC2_SYNOPSIS_FINAL+link.pdf

Extent of green-blue landcover in urban areas

2024

As of April 2024, the total area of urban greenspace in Scotland, as defined by Ordnance Survey, is 3,166 km².

Ordnance Survey website

Proportion of adults who live within a 5-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space

2022

70% of adults reported living within a 5-minute walk of their nearest green or blue space.

Supporting documents – Scottish Household Survey 2022: Key Findings – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

Communities creating climate-resilient, healthy and equitable places

Proportion of adults viewing climate change as an immediate and urgent problem

2022

74% of adults viewing climate change as an immediate and urgent problem.

“Adult” refers to those aged 16 and over.

7. Environment – Scottish Household Survey 2022: Key Findings – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)7. Environment – Scottish Household Survey 2022: Key Findings – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

Proportion of the population declaring that they understand what actions they should take to help tackle climate change

2022

80% of adults agreed that they understood what actions they should take to help tackle climate change.

“Adult” refers to those aged 16 and over.

7. Environment – Scottish Household Survey 2022: Key Findings – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)7. Environment – Scottish Household Survey 2022: Key Findings – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

Number of Community Climate Action Hubs

2024

There are currently 20 hubs across Scotland supporting community-led climate action.

It covers 81% of the Scottish council areas (26 council areas covered by the 20 hubs).

Community climate action hubs: contact details – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)Community climate action hubs: contact details – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

Number of Local Place Plans

2024

No local place plans have been adopted yet.

Many councils have recently invited communities to prepare Local Place Plans so that they can play a proactive role in defining the future of their places.

This information has not been centralised and published in one place by the Scottish government.

Progress of actions in local flood risk management plans

2019/21

90% of the actions set out in the strategies to avoid an increase in flood risk are green. 10% of the actions are amber. By 2021, 100% of the actions are expected to be complete.

84% of the actions described in the strategies to reduce flood risk are green, 12% of the actions are amber and 4% are red. With 96% of the actions completed or underway by 2021, the actions developed to meet the reduce objectives will mostly be achieved.

Flood Risk Management Plans | SEPA

Mental wellbeing score (WEMWBS)

2022

In 2022, the mean WEMWBS score for all adults was 47.0.

Scottish Health Survey 2022 Main Report Volume 1 (www.gov.scot)

Public services are collaborating in effective, inclusive adaptation

Number of public bodies members in the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network

2024

50 organisations are currently members of the Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network.

Adaptation Scotland :: Public Sector Climate Adaptation Network

Number of public bodies citing the Work in partnership & collaborations as a priority s for the year ahead in relation to climate change adaptation

2022/23 

53.2% of the 188 listed public bodies (100 public bodies) submitting an annual compliance report cite “Work in Partnerships & Collaborations” in their top 5 priorities for the year ahead in relation to climate change adaptation. 

Public Bodies Climate Change Reporting – Analysis Report 2022/23 (sustainablescotlandnetwork.org) 

Level of risk assessment across the public sector 

2022/23 

70.2% of all listed public bodies submitting an annual compliance report have completed some form of risk assessment during or prior to the 2022/23 reporting period. 

43.6% of bodies have carried out a limited assessment which does not provide an in-depth risk assessment addressing a range of climate hazards or risks.

20.7% of bodies have carried out a comprehensive risk assessment. 

5.8% have completed an advanced risk assessment involving stakeholders and considering a range of climate or socioeconomic scenarios. 

Public Bodies Climate Change Reporting – Analysis Report 2022/23 (sustainablescotlandnetwork.org) 

Level of adaptation action taken across the public sector

2022/23 

71.8% of all listed public bodies submitting an annual compliance report have taken adaptation action during or prior to the 2022/23 reporting period. 

44% of bodies have taken some action where a range of actions or policies exist but it is unclear how the actions are contributing to addressing specific climate risks or hazards.

21% of all bodies are taking good action, meaning the bodies are taking action to reduce specific risks and/or taking significant sector-specific adaptation actions. 

6% of bodies are taking advanced action where a comprehensive set of actions are in place to address specific climate risks and plans are in place to measure progress against the management of these risks. 

Public Bodies Climate Change Reporting – Analysis Report 2022/23 (sustainablescotlandnetwork.org)  

Economies and industries are adapting and realising opportunities in Scotland’s Just Transition

Proportion of businesses monitoring climate related risks (flooding, temperature increase, supply chain disruptions)

2023

15.6% of Scotland businesses have assessed risks for supply chain disruption and distribution.

6.2% of Scotland businesses have assessed risks for increased flooding.

4.4% of Scotland businesses have assessed risks for temperature increase.

60.6% of Scotland businesses have not assessed any risks related to climate change.

The scope of “businesses” taken into account by this survey are businesses which have not permanently stopped trading, with 10+ employees and with a presence in Scotland (n=1,061).

Climate Change – BICS weighted Scotland estimates: data to wave 88 – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

Proportion of businesses taking action to adapt to the effects of climate change

2023

26.5% of Scotland businesses declare they have already taken action to adapt to supply chain disruption and distribution.

11.5% of Scotland businesses declare they have already taken action to adapt to increased flooding.

5.7% of Scotland businesses declare they have already taken action to adapt to temperature increase.

21.2% of Scotland businesses have not assessed any risks related to climate change.

18.1% of businesses reported that they do not expect to be impacted by these climate change effects.

The scope of “businesses” taken into account by this survey are businesses which have not permanently stopped trading, with 10+ employees and with a presence in Scotland (n=521).

Climate Change – BICS weighted Scotland estimates: data to wave 88 – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)

Number of green jobs

2022

Using the industry approach, Scotland employment in green jobs in 2022 was estimated at 46,200 full-time equivalents (FTEs).

Experimental estimates of green jobs, UK: 2015 to 2022 – Office for National Statistics (ons.gov.uk)

Uptake of grants for agriculture storage reservoirs/ off season storage lagoons​

2024

5 AECS applications for irrigation lagoons were successful in 2024. 14 applications were submitted.

Scottish government – unpublished data

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by Ricardo on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

ClimateXChange
Edinburgh Climate Change Institute
High School Yards
Edinburgh EH1 1LZ

+44 (0) 131 651 4783

info@climatexchange.org.uk

www.climatexchange.org.uk

If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.


  1. https://www.gov.scot/isbn/9781836017264



  2. Meeting notes from the four workshops are provided as supplementary materials to this report.



  3. Note: the objectives used here are taken from the draft SNAP3. The wording in the final SNAP3 differs slightly.



  4. Note: the objectives used here are taken from the draft SNAP3. The wording in the final SNAP differs slightly.



  5. Note: the objectives used here are taken from the draft SNAP3. The wording in the final SNAP differs slightly.



  6. Note: the objectives used here are taken from the draft SNAP3. The wording in the final SNAP differs slightly.



  7. See Office of National Statistics – https://www.ons.gov.uk/economy/environmentalaccounts/bulletins/experimentalestimatesofgreenjobsuk/2024#measuring-the-data


Research completed in February 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4864

Executive summary

Only around 11% of occupied homes in Scotland have renewable or low-emission heating systems, with the majority still relying on high-emission sources like gas and oil. To meet Scotland’s net zero greenhouse gas emissions target by 2045, over 2 million homes will need to transition to clean heating systems.

Heat pumps and electric resistive heating are the main clean heating options available today and they are likely to work well in most homes. This project investigates the feasibility of clean heating, especially heat pumps, in challenging home types in Scotland, in terms of practicality and cost effectiveness.

We reviewed academic research, industry literature and case studies, and conducted a combination of surveys and semi-structured interviews with industry experts. We identified the advantages, disadvantages, contradictory evidence and research gaps surrounding the application of clean heating technology in Scotland.

We reviewed previous studies and identified the following challenging dwelling types: older properties from before 1919, rural properties, small properties, and flats and tenements.

Findings

Overall, while there are challenges to implementing heat pumps across different property types, innovative solutions and careful planning can facilitate their adoption and contribute to decarbonising heating systems in Scotland. We found:

  • Older properties: Buildings constructed before 1919, often characterised by solid walls and potentially holding protected status, may pose challenges for both insulation upgrades and heat pump installations due to planning constraints and preservation concerns. Whilst it is common to prioritise improving energy efficiency prior to the installation of heat pumps, recent studies have concluded that heat pumps can operate effectively when installed into dwellings that have not undergone energy efficiency upgrades. It is also important to note that while increasing energy efficiency stands as a crucial objective, the structural integrity and overall condition of the building need consideration. It is important to ensure a building is in good condition before installing new heating systems, in particular, repairing structural issues, water ingress and damage. Consequently, any new heating technologies will be more effective and contribute to the building’s overall energy performance.
  • Rural properties: Rural areas can present unique challenges due to grid capacity limitations and vulnerability to power cuts. However, heat pump adoption rates are already highest in off-grid regions due to cost savings compared to existing off gas network fuel sources. Evidence shows that heat pumps can operate well in cold climates, with studies evidencing effective performance compared to gas boilers, even at extremely low temperatures. No significant barriers to heat pump adoption have been identified. Heat pumps with additional corrosion protection are available for coastal areas. However, a lack of local contractors, increased servicing costs and higher costs for energy efficiency improvements pose challenges in remote areas, particularly the Scottish islands.
  • Small properties: Space constraints, such as limited room for hot water storage and radiator upgrades, present challenges for heat pump installations. No evidence of a quantitative threshold to define ‘small’ was identified. Innovative solutions like compact heat batteries or external hot water storage may offer alternatives.
  • Flats and tenements: In addition to the challenges presented above, flats and tenements face difficulties due to constraints on external locations for air source fans, as well as coordinating changes with neighbours and building owners, due to differing tenancy arrangements. Case studies highlight the importance of careful planning and resident input in determining suitable locations. These are similar to the challenges to basic repairs and maintenance of blocks of flats and tenements and to fabric improvements, such as insulation. Fifth generation heat networks, with individual indoor heat pumps supplied by communal ground sources may provide a potential solution.

Recommendations

  • Establish evidence for the suitability of air-to-air heating and, if found to be appropriate, provide policy support for certification and installation in homes where it is more cost effective than water-based space heating.
  • Policymakers should monitor developments in thermoelectric heat pumps, which may provide radical space savings.
  • Explore whether there is a role for hybrid heat pumps in certain circumstances, for hot water only.

Glossary

Air-to-air (A2A)

Air to air. A type of heat pump that sources heat from external air and distributes it internally by recirculating air through heat exchangers

Air-to-water (A2W)

Air to water. A type of heat pump that sources heat from external air and distributes it internally using water in pipes and radiators or underfloor heating

ASHP

Air source heat pump

Clean heating

Defined by the Scottish Government as a system capable of providing heat without producing any greenhouse gas emissions at point of use (Scottish Government, 2023a)

EPC

Energy Performance Certificate

Flats and tenements

Any building that contains multiple dwellings. This includes, four-in-a-blocks, low rise blocks, high rise blocks and tenements.

GSHP

Ground source heat pump

PV

Solar photovoltaic panels

Working fluid

The fluid that is compressed and expanded in heat pumps to transfer heat. Also called the refrigerant.

ZDEH

Zero direct emissions heating (Also called ‘clean heating’ for short, throughout this document)

Introduction

Of the 2.5 million occupied homes in Scotland, only around 11% currently have renewable or very low emission heating systems with the majority still reliant on high-emission energy sources like gas and oil (Scottish Government, 2021b). To meet net zero greenhouse gas emissions targets, over 2 million homes will have to transition to clean heating by 2045 (Scottish Government, 2021a). Clean heating systems have been defined within the consultation on a Heat in Buildings Bill by the Scottish government as:

“Systems – such as heat pumps and heat networks – that don’t produce any greenhouse gas emissions at the point of use” (Scottish Government, 2023b). Bioenergy is not included in this definition due to emissions at the point of use so were not included in this work.

As described, several technologies already exist, each at different stages of adoption. Electric heating was commonplace in homes throughout the 1960s and beyond, resulting in significant improvements over time to make them more efficient and streamline their design. Alternative technologies, such as heat pumps, which also first became commercially available in the 1960’s, are less mainstream in Scotland, but are expected to play a significant role in the decarbonisation of heat in Scotland. The Climate Change Committee has described them as a ‘low regrets’ option (CCC, 2020) and they feature prominently in Scotland’s Heat in Buildings Strategy (Scottish Government, 2021a).

While electricity provided from the grid is currently a mix of renewable and non-renewable energy, it is expected that as renewable power generation such as wind and solar power increases, the emissions associated with electricity will continue to reduce, rendering it an extremely low carbon energy option. To capitalise on this, it will be required that heat in homes provided by gas, oil, and other high emitting energy sources be phased out and replaced by electricity.

The Scottish Government’s Hydrogen Action Plan States “We do not consider that hydrogen will play a central role in the overall decarbonisation of domestic heat and therefore cannot afford to delay action to decarbonise homes this decade through other available technologies. The potential for hydrogen to play a role in heating buildings depends upon strategic decisions by the UK Government that will be made over the coming years and the Scottish Government will continue to urge the UK Government to accelerate decision-making on the role of hydrogen in the gas grid”.

Consequently, this report predominantly focusses on heating systems which utilise electricity as an energy source, specifically heat pumps and their applications. However, it should be recognised that heat networks and each of the clean heating technologies described may play a crucial role in addressing challenging dwelling types.

In this report, we investigate the feasibility, in terms of practical application and cost-effectiveness, of applying clean heating technologies in challenging dwelling types.

Additionally, we explore alternative clean heating options, considering their potential application to the archetypes and examine scenarios where hybrid fossil fuel heating systems may offer a transitional solution, particularly in contexts where the full adoption of renewable technologies poses challenges.

This research focussed on the following building types that we have considered upon review of previous studies as reflecting broadly those that are considered as difficult to decarbonise with clean heating:

  • Older properties, especially those built before 1919
  • Rural properties
  • Small properties
  • Flats and tenements of different forms

This project does not consider clean heating challenges that are relevant to all building types, such as skills shortages and capital costs. However, we acknowledge additional challenges such as temporary disruption to households who may need to decant. Particularly when households are without hot water while install work is on-going. This is more acute in winter when losing heating and hot water for a period of time is most impactful to households. This may be perceived as a barrier to adoption, however no evidence was found to corroborate this within this research. Presented below are the results of the evidence review. The research identifies gaps in the available evidence which may inform future research priorities. We also identify where there are best case examples relevant to Scotland.

The evidence reviewed was a combination of grey literature, published research, academic papers, case studies and industry expert feedback through interviews and a survey. For in-situ evidence of how heat pumps are likely to perform in Scotland, we reviewed both large-scale heat pump field trials and small-scale monitoring studies. Whilst, the scope of the research was for both domestic and non-domestic buildings, the majority of identified evidence relates to domestic settings.

Method

A Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) is a systematic and streamlined approach to reviewing existing literature and evidence on a specific topic within a limited timeframe. This method is often employed when there is a need for quick insights and when a traditional comprehensive systematic review may take too long. The full method for the REA can be found in Appendix 10.1.

Using the keyword searches in relevant databases, 147 sources were identified. The results were screened according to the protocol. Each of the screened sources which were analysed further can be found in the references section of this work. The purpose of the deeper dive was to investigate what evidence was available that heat pumps are a practical, technically feasible and cost-effective clean heating option for hard-to-treat archetypes in Scotland. To enhance the literature review, surveys and interviews were carried out with industry professionals. These interactions aimed to determine whether the research gaps identified in existing literature were mirrored in industry and to explore any opportunities or strategies that the industry has developed to address the identified challenges. The survey and interview questions can be found in Appendices 10.2 and 10.3, respectively.

We received 16 survey responses from:

  • Six retrofit advisory/consultancies
  • Four registered social landlords
  • Five architects/Designers
  • One utility company

We conducted 10 structured interviews with:

  • Three installers
  • Four registered social landlords
  • Two architects/designers
  • One research institute

Clean heating technologies

This section outlines the main technologies for heating free of emissions at the point of use. Various clean heating technologies are available, adaptable to specific building and occupant needs. Each technology presents unique opportunities and applications, catering to diverse requirements.

Direct electric

Direct electric, or electric resistive heating generates heat by passing electricity through a resistive element, in the same way a kettle works. Examples of direct electric heating are storage heaters, panel heaters, electric boilers, infrared heating, and electric underfloor heating. Direct electric heating is 100% efficient, delivering one unit of energy as heat for every unit of electricity consumed.

Direct electric heating has a low capital cost.

A significant barrier in the uptake of electric heating is the unit cost, which remains expensive when compared with gas (Nesta, 2023a, 2023b). To overcome this, there is the opportunity for UK Government to review the distribution of taxes by reducing the tax on electricity and increasing the tax on high emitting energy sources (Ahmad, 2023; Rosenow, 2022; Sevindik, 2023). This may encourage the uptake of heat pumps and also aid in the renewable energy transition.

Heat pumps

Heat pumps operate by transferring heat from one medium to another. Heat pumps are used in fridges, freezers and air conditioning, as well as in heating systems. Air-source heat pumps use the outside air, while ground-source heat pumps will use water preheated by the ground as the source medium. As the source medium passes through a heat exchanger inside the unit, it causes a refrigerant enclosed in a loop to evaporate into a gas. This gas is compressed, raising its temperature. It then passes through a second heat exchanger, transferring its heat to the inside air, or to water that circulates to radiators, underfloor heating, and to heat up water tanks and so on. The refrigerant, now in a liquid state, then passes through an expansion valve, reducing its pressure and temperature, completing the cycle.

Domestic heat pumps may source heat renewably from the air, ground or water sources such as rivers, lochs, and the sea. They may also use waste heat from industrial sources such as data centres and factories.

The most common form of domestic heat pump in Scotland sources heat from the outdoor air and delivers it through water-filled radiators. Heat is delivered to living spaces through conventional wall-mounted radiators or underfloor heating. This is commonly referred to as an air-source heat pump (ASHP), or air-to-water heat pump (A2W).

‘Air to air’ (A2A) heat pumps are common in commercial applications such as shops and are also installed in domestic settings. Heat is delivered to living spaces by blowing recirculated air over a heat exchanger. During warmer seasons, A2A heat pumps can also be used for cooling, extracting heat from indoor air and releasing it outside. This operates independently of piping and radiators, and one unit will generally service a single room/space.

Ground source heat pumps collect heat from boreholes up to 200 metres deep or from shallow coil collectors buried over large areas. They can achieve higher operating efficiencies because ground temperatures, which sit consistently between 5°C and 10°C, are warmer than air temperatures in the depths of winter. However, these operating efficiencies can be negated by the higher capital costs, especially in buildings with lower heat demands. The primary influence on heat pump efficiency is the difference in temperature between the source (the outside air temperature for ASHP’s), and that of the flow to the indoor emitters. The narrower the gap, the higher the efficiency. In other words, with radiators operating at lower temperatures, e.g., 45°C instead of 65°C, energy use and operating costs will be noticeably lower. Average in situ efficiencies of around 270-300% are reported (HeatpumpMonitor.org, n.d.)

To maintain comfortable room temperatures with this cost-efficient operation, new higher-output radiators and larger pipework may be required. Replacing pipework, if required, is likely to be particularly disruptive. Upgrades to radiators may also be required for condensing boilers to operate in energy efficiency condensing mode. Condensing boilers were mandated in 2005 as a carbon abatement strategy, but Building Standards were never adapted to enforce the changes to the radiators and controls required to achieve the energy efficiency savings. Consequently, boilers often operate significantly below manufacturers efficiency claims. Instead, the upgrades to radiators required for improved efficiency are now being enforced with the transition to heat pumps through the MCS Certification standard for publicly funded installations.

Heat networks

Heat networks distribute heat, and sometimes cooling, from a central origin to multiple properties. Several clean heat network technology options are currently available, for example, communal networks, which serve a single building, and district heating which covers a wider area. Fourth generation heat networks distribute heat in insulated pipes using water at around 65°C (Lund et al., 2021). Fifth generation district heating and cooling (5GDHC) distributes very low temperature heat, between 10°C and 20°C, from sources including boreholes, mine water and industrial waste heat. Individual heat pumps in each property transfer the heat to the home at high temperature or, in summer, transfer heat from the home to the network for cooling.

This variety of options means that individual building owners, as well as local authorities, may drive heat network adoption. This report will include consideration of communal, fifth generation networks as a clean heat option for some property types.

Heat networks are central to the Scottish Government’s Heat in Buildings Strategy with a capacity target of 2.6TWh of output by 2027 and 6TWh by 2030 (Scottish Government, 2021b). Currently heat networks supply 1.18TWh of heat in Scotland to 30,000 homes and 3,000 non-domestic properties (Scottish Government, 2022a). To operate effectively, be economically sustainable, and offer cost-effective solutions, heat networks must be strategically situated. This involves locating them in areas with ample heat demand and density to ensure optimal functionality.

Challenges for clean heating

The following section outlines the findings of this work in determining the suitability of clean heating technologies for challenging dwelling types. The primary findings are generated via the literature review, which are corroborated by the relevant findings in the semi-structured interviews, as highlighted. As discussed in Section 5, there are several low or zero carbon heating technologies available. The purpose of this work is to identify strategies that are both cost effective and practical to apply in the identified challenging dwelling types. Where heat pumps are not determined suitable, alternative technologies have been outlined.

Older properties

In the context of this report, older properties denote traditionally constructed buildings erected prior to 1919 (HES, n.d.). These structures are typically characterised by solid wall construction and may also be designated as protected buildings. This section applies to both houses and tenements.

Heritage and planning

Almost all properties built in Scotland before 1919 have solid walls and often have attractive facades in natural materials, principally sandstone and granite. Pre-1919 properties make up 19% of the Scottish housing stock (Scottish Government, 2023c). Regarding insulation improvements, older properties are often described as ‘hard to treat’ (HES, 2016), because readily available and cost-effective treatments such as cavity wall insulation are not suitable. Furthermore, heritage and planning constraints may prevent some measures such as external wall insulation or increase the cost of others, such as heritage-compliant double glazing.

Obstacles to implementing heat pump technology in older buildings have been identified in building regulations and planning consents, as in the example of a retrofit of a Glasgow tenement block, which was neither listed nor in a conservation area (K. Gibb et al., 2023). This four-story sandstone block, comprising eight small flats and built in 1895, is representative of a large proportion of tenements across Scotland. However, there are important qualifications about the transferability of findings from this project. This was an empty property wholly under the control of a social landlord aiming to fill a retrofitted empty property with social tenants. Planning officers raised concerns with designers on several fronts, such as the installation of external wall insulation, PV panels on the roof, and attaching air source heat pumps to the rear wall. Consequently, new gas boilers were installed in the top floor flats.

The challenges with planning consent outlined above were echoed in the industry survey and interviews. Interviews with installers and housing professionals identified challenges around gaining approval from local authorities and planning officers to proposed changes to increase energy efficiency and green technologies in existing homes, as well as a lack of consistency between different regions which make it difficult to develop repeatable solutions.

Fabric efficiency

Some sources asserted that building fabric efficiency is important for heat pumps to work effectively. However, the rationale for this assertion was often not explained, such as in Carroll et al. (2020). The innovation charity Nesta also made this assertion 2021 (Nesta, 2021), but reversed it 2024 stating:

“It is often claimed that homes need to be well insulated to have a heat pump, but this is largely untrue” (Nesta, 2024).

A WWF report focussed on decarbonisation pathways for Scotland’s housing stock stated that “it is technically possible to install heat pumps in solid wall properties without insulating the solid walls”. However, without insulation upgrades, the heating system upgrade can be more expensive due to the need for larger radiators, pipework and heat pump (Leveque, 2023).

Different household needs in the context of fuel poverty refer to the unique challenges fuel-poor households face in heating their homes due to financial constraints and inefficient systems. These challenges necessitate tailored solutions, like specialised heat pump installations, to ensure energy is used effectively and affordably. Addressing these needs is crucial for reducing overall heat demand, aligning with energy efficiency and sustainability efforts (London Economics, 2023; NEA, 2023a). Where literature describes inefficiencies in heat pump installations without solid wall insulation, this is sometimes referring to the total cost of ownership rather than the pure energy efficiency of the heat pump. For example, the WWF technical report on Scottish housing stock pathways considered capital costs of insulation and heating upgrades (excluding public subsidies), as well as the operating cost over 15 years. It found that the total cost of ownership of a heat pump in a solid walled detached house would be 8% lower over 15 years if solid wall insulation was included in the investment (Palmer and Terry, 2023a).

Total heat required to be delivered from the heating system can increase with heat pumps operating with radiators at lower temperatures, as compared with gas boilers. This is due to the reduced responsiveness of low temperature heating, resulting in the need to maintain temperatures within a narrower range. Essentially a right sized heating system heats up a building more slowly than an oversized boiler. For these reasons, households almost always need to change their heating schedule in order to achieve the same comfort as before (Terry and Galvin, 2023). Modelling found that this is especially important in homes with high thermal mass, such as brick internal walls or solid external walls without insulation on the interior face. Such homes may require up to 20% more heat be delivered from a heat pump, compared with turning off a gas boiler during periods of non-occupancy, such as in households that commute to work. The authors propose that an estimate of increased heating demand would be a useful measure of heat pump readiness, and that the parameters required to assess this should be provided on energy performance certificates.

The long-established ‘fabric first’ approach to energy upgrades prioritises reducing heating demand with insulation and draught proofing before installing clean heating. While the enhancement of energy efficiency stands as a crucial objective, the structural integrity and overall condition of the building necessitate simultaneous consideration. The advantage of this sequence, as opposed to the reverse order, has been to avoid some pipework and radiator upgrades and to reduce the size and cost of the required clean heat sources. However, there is an increasing recognition that, given fabric insulation levels do not influence operational energy efficiency, and depending on individual household needs, decarbonisation may be prioritised ahead of demand reduction to meet emissions targets (Nesta, 2024).

In much of the housing stock potentially no invasive demand reduction is required to meet emissions targets. Instead, the focus should be on electricity pricing and workforce education to enable good installation standards (Eyre et al., 2023). The UK Government’s Review of Electricity Market Arrangements (BEIS, 2022) is considering changes that would significantly reduce the cost of operating heat pumps, such as decoupling electricity pricing from volatile wholesale gas prices.

Rural properties

Within this work, rural refers to properties located off the gas grid which rely on alternative heat sources such as oil boilers to heat their homes.

Many off gas grid properties use electric resistive heating, which is a clean heating technology, but which partially accounts for higher rates of fuel poverty in rural areas (Scottish Government, 2023c) due to the higher unit cost of electricity compared to gas which leads to higher running costs. Therefore, more energy efficient heat pumps are a potential solution for fuel poverty in off gas grid areas.

Rural dwellings face a unique set of challenges compared to those found in urban settings.

Electricity network

The electricity network is vulnerable to extreme weather. In 2021, 40,000 households were left without power for three days in northern England and north east Scotland following Storm Arwen (OFGEM, 2023). This review did not find evidence establishing whether electric heating is more vulnerable in off gas grid area than on-gas areas. It should be noted that all types of heating – other than solid fuel burners require an electrical supply including gas, oil and biomass boilers.

Grid capacity is expected to be a potential constraint to the electrification of heat in all areas. The grid constraint is alleviated, and infrastructure investments can be postponed, if demand is reduced with insulation and if heat pump efficiency is improved, for example through the use of ground source heat (DELTA, 2018). Off gas grid housing often has the advantage of being built at low density, providing greater opportunity for the use of ground source heat pumps. However, ground source heat pump has a higher capital investment, and consideration should be given to share ground source networks also known as fifth generation heat networks.

Another strategy for reducing or postponing the need for network infrastructure investments is demand levelling. Time of use tariffs, the Demand Flexibility Service and the falling cost of domestic batteries provide incentives for consumer behaviour changes and automated smart demand response systems which can shift some electrical loads out of peak demand periods. Off gas grid areas have the same opportunity to benefit from these incentives as on gas areas.

Cold climates

Concerns have been raised about heat pump efficiency in cold climates (Simons, 2023). Field studies, however, demonstrate that with proper design, heat pumps maintain efficiency even at temperatures as low as -10°C, and can still be effective in conditions down to -30°C. (D. Gibb et al., 2023). It is crucial to understand that the effectiveness of heat pumps is not determined by the type of building or its insulation level. Efficiency is consistent across different environments and for buildings requiring more heat, due to size or less insulation, a larger heat pump can be employed to meet the demand effectively. This adaptability ensures heat pumps can provide efficient heating solutions in a wide range of settings and climates. This finding is applicable to all areas of Scotland but can be particularly relevant to rural areas which can face more severe winters and lower temperatures.

Evidence of adoption

Although challenges are present for rural homes, nevertheless the highest rates of heat pump installation are found in off gas grid areas (Nesta, 2023c). Analysis of the MCS installation database showed the UK’s highest adoption rates are in the Highlands & Islands, rural Wales and Cornwall. This is likely because significant operating cost savings are achieved with heat pumps, compared with oil and direct electric heating due to the high efficiencies of heat pumps (see Section 5.2).

Islands and Coastal areas

Research into clean heating for new housing in island communities found no consumer barriers or region-specific capital barriers to heat pump adoption (ClimateXChange, 2022). Additional anti-corrosion treatments are included in coastal locations. However, a lack of local specialist contractors was considered a constraint on installation rates and increased servicing costs were incurred due to mainland contractor travel costs.

Small properties

This section considers barriers to heat pump adoption related to indoor space, including both houses and flats. There is no formal definition of ‘small properties’ and categorisation differs in the literature so we have used a broad definition to include properties that are identified as having space limitations since this is what limits the uptake of heating technologies that require more space than existing systems.

Hot water storage

In Scotland, 80% of dwellings currently have boilers and most of these are combi type, producing hot water on demand. Homes with combi boilers do not have space committed to hot water storage. Unlike a combination (‘combi’) gas or oil boiler, heat pumps and direct electric systems generally do not supply instant hot water. Therefore, it is necessary to have a system in place for storing energy to meet the occupant’s hot water demand. The system usually takes the form of a hot water cylinder, the volume of which is driven by the size of the property and number of occupants. This calls for an evaluation of alternative hot water storage systems and a general evaluation of consumer barriers in terms hot water storage.

There is also the opportunity to think more broadly in terms of energy storage and review the viability of communal hot water storage externally.

Finding space for a hot water cylinder is one of the most significant consumer barriers in all homes and is particularly acute in small properties (Nesta, 2021; Palmer and Terry, 2023a; Scottish Government, 2022b).

In an analysis of the Scottish Building stock, homes with less than 18m2 of floor area per habitable room were assumed to be unsuitable for individual heat pump adoption due to the requirement for a hot water cylinder (Element Energy, 2020). This threshold, which equates to 90 m2 for a dwelling with 3 bedrooms and two reception rooms, was not explained. Since the average floor area of Scottish homes is 97m2 (Scottish Government, 2023c) this threshold, if significant, takes in a large proportion of the housing stock.

One technical solution for small properties is compact phase change material heat batteries, such as those produced by Sunamp. These contain a material which is melted when heated by a heat pump, solar thermal panels or internal resistive element. It heats water instantly when a tap is opened, eventually solidifying as it cools. Heat batteries can be up to four times smaller than equivalent hot water cylinders.

Another solution is to locate hot water storage outside. This strategy was trialled in seven small houses by National Energy Action (NEA, 2023b). In this system a compact heat battery is located outside in an insulated enclosure adjacent to the heat pump.

Electrical batteries in conjunction with instant hot water taps and electrical showers may be a feasible solution where hot water demand is relatively low. Lithium-ion batteries can have roughly double the energy density of water storage, so could be effective in space-constrained cases (Energy Saving Trust, 2017). The cost of lithium-ion batteries has reduced dramatically in recent years (BloombergNEF, 2023) new battery technologies such as flow batteries are now emerging in domestic applications (PV magazine, 2023).

An interim solution, highlighted in interviews with housing officers, is to enable decarbonisation of space heating would be to allow the retention of combis for hot water production only. Thus, a heat pump would cover 100% of the space heating requirement. Over time, households may find space for hot water storage, potentially incentivised by the high unit cost of hot water or further technical solutions may emerge.

Radiators

In most UK homes, radiators are currently undersized to meet industry convention comfort standards with efficient gas boiler operation (BEIS, 2021). Consequently, either boilers must heat radiators to higher temperatures or rooms are cold.

In order to meet comfort standards and achieve high operating efficiencies with heat pumps, heating water temperature is typically needs to be lower with a heat pump than with gas or oil boilers. This means larger radiators and changes to pipework are often part of a heat pump installation (BEIS, 2021; Nesta, 2021; Zhuang et al., 2023).

In some cases, dependent upon ease of access, replacing undersized radiators could be fairly trivial, (Leveque, 2023), however in some, space constraints such as the wish to preserve space for bookshelves, may present a consumer barrier (Nesta, 2021; Wade, 2020).

Designing the heating system to operate at a higher temperature can mitigate the need for radiator upgrades. The capital savings may balance out operational cost increases over the life of the system (Palmer and Terry, 2023). Nonetheless, with the availability of modern heat pumps, designers can specify operating temperatures similar to the outgoing heating system which could mitigate the need for radiator upgrades.

Cost effectiveness

In small properties with low heat demands the capital costs of an air-to-water heat pump may not be economic. Alternative technologies can be considered.

Air-to-air heat (A2A) pumps have significantly lower capital costs than air-to-water and may be an attractive solution where there is no existing water-based system (Lowes, 2023). They therefore provide an option for addressing fuel poverty in homes with existing direct electric systems.

A further benefit of A2A heat pumps is that they can also provide cooling from the same capital investment in homes that are at risk of overheating in summer (Khosravi et al., 2023). Air to air systems account for a large part of Europe’s lead over the UK in heat pump installation rates, although much of this is for heating in Southern Europe (Nesta, 2023d).

Infrared is proposed by manufacturers as a clean heat solution with low capital cost. Its use in industrial settings such as warehouses with high ceilings is well established (Anwar Jahid et al., 2022; Cao et al., 2023; Kylili et al., 2014). However, there is lack of evidence on energy efficiency benefits over simple resistive heating (Brown et al., 2016) with studies focussing on high ceilings (Roth et al., 2007). Other studies have identified discomfort concerns due to asymmetric temperatures (Corsten, 2021). By reducing the overall heat demand of a building and targeting only certain areas, while you may use less energy, overall, the building will be colder than if you maintained a constant air temperature. As a result, damp and mould could become more prevalent. In general, only things which are hit by the IR radiation will get hot although some heat will be emitted by the things which get hot and heat up the surroundings (Lowes Richard, 2022).

Where heat pumps remain impractical for small properties storage heaters are the most cost-effective option available today. In modelling of total cost of ownership, storage heaters are the optimal clean heating solution in some situations (Palmer and Terry, 2023a).

Flats and tenements

Flats and tenements are defined here as any building that contains multiple dwellings. This includes, four-in-a-blocks, low rise blocks, high rise blocks and tenements.

In the 2011 Census, it was found that 36% of the Scottish population lived in flats, making up the highest percentage among dwelling types (NRS, 2011). Around a third of tenement flats were built prior to 1919, another third between 1919-1982, and the final third after 1982. Many tenement flats are in a state of critical disrepair, particularly those built before 1919 (Built Environment Forum Scotland, 2019). The Scottish Parliamentary Working Group on Tenement Maintenance has been meeting since March 2018 with the purpose of establishing solutions to aid, assist and compel owners of tenement properties to maintain their buildings. Recommendations include establishing periodic inspections and maintenance sinking funds. This is important for energy efficiency and clean heating to be implemented in flats. (Scotland, n.d.)

Location of heat pump

Typically, air-source heat pumps are installed externally, such as in garden areas, driveways, or other outdoor spaces around the building. Unlike houses, flats and tenements often lack private gardens. Literature cited the lack of external space as a challenge when looking to install heat pumps (Nesta, 2021; Scottish Government, 2022b; Southside Housing Association, 2020).

The Scottish Government undertook a case study on the Dunbeg Phase 3 project in Oban which installed air source heat pumps into 74 flats (Scottish Government, 2022b). A primary finding highlighted the importance of considering a suitable external location for heat pumps specifically, relating to shared gardens. This challenge has not been expanded upon in the Dunbeg case study as it is likely a planning constraint similar to that experienced during the retrofit of a tenement block in Glasgow (K. Gibb et al., 2023). In this case, the aspiration was to utilise heat pumps that were attached to the external wall. However, planning officers determined that heat pumps could only be installed if they were located in the back communal garden on the ground and were fenced off. Consequently, gas boilers were installed in the top two floors.

Southside Housing Association trialled the installation of air source heat pumps to a selection of flats (Southside Housing Association, 2020). The installation work was informed by surveys and feedback from the residents. At the outset, the drying area within each floor of the flats was selected as the location for the heat pump. However, further consultation with residents determined that the preference was for the heat pumps to be installed on the individual flat balconies. This strategy presented some challenges in the beginning, such as difficulty pumping condensate water back to the main drain and heat loss through the external pipework. As a pilot project, the lessons learned should be applied to future projects, having successfully demonstrated alternative locations for flats with limited external space.

Air source heat pumps offer a versatile heating solution for multi-storey buildings. Ground-mounted units are ideal for efficiently heating ground-level and first-floor flats, using tailored circulation systems to distribute heat effectively. For higher floors, split system configurations are beneficial, allowing refrigerant lines to run vertically with greater ease and efficiency than insulated water lines, though this setup requires additional indoor equipment. Additionally, in buildings where rooftop access is available, heat pumps can be strategically installed on roofs or in loft spaces, providing effective heating coverage from the base to the top of the building.

Another option for flats is the adoption of either shared external heat pump units, such as at Hillpark in Glasgow (Star Renewable Energy, n.d.). Such systems have been demonstrated as being more cost effective than individual units whilst also consuming less space (Palmer and Terry, 2023). Agreement between different owners and tenants can be difficult to attain, especially where there are multiple owners and tenure types.

Options exist that enable an air source heat pump to be located fully within the building. Exhaust air heat pumps form part of the ventilation system and draw heat from exhausted stale air. Further heat is drawn directly from outside. They are most readily suited to energy efficient buildings (Energy Saving Trust, n.d.).

Individual room air to air heat pumps could provide further low capital, easy installation options. These systems are gaining popularity in some settings with existing ducted air systems, for example in flats in the United States (Gradient) and in UK hotel rooms (Powrmatic).

Clean hot water heating could be provided independently on the hot water system by using hot water heat pumps which either using excess internal heat or ventilation exhaust air or outdoor heat to generate hot water.

Shared ground source heat networks, also known as fifth generation heat networks, provide a clean heating solution that does not need equipment to be located above ground outdoors. Ground temperature heat drawn from boreholes is shared across homes through a network. Individual water to water heat pumps inside each property supply heat to space and to hot water storage.

In common with the challenges of addressing communal maintenance, the main remaining barrier to heat pump adoption in flats is the challenge of gaining agreement to, and coordinating works, between all owners of the building. These are similar to the challenges to basic repairs and maintenance blocks of flats and to fabric improvements such as insulation. An expert Short Life Working Group presented recommendations for addressing these barriers in 2023 (Scottish Government, 2023a). These centred on whole building approaches and further amendments to the Tenements Act.

Future Developments

This review has found that with careful consideration, clean heating technologies are available to suit challenging dwelling types, though there are factors to consider including running cost, space constraints and need for communal agreement. There remains the opportunity to address barriers and support delivery through further technical and policy development as well as sharing best practice by gathering more evidence from pilots on key aspects such as managing costs, disruption levels and post occupancy evaluations.

Application of existing technologies

This review has reported on a variety of technologies in different forms of application. It shows that there is no panacea, or one-size-fits-all solution for clean heating. Further consideration is required to support the finding that appropriate technologies are available for challenging dwelling types. These recommendations are provided as a cumulation of findings from the literature review, industry interviews and the report authors experience.

As described in section 6, air-to-air heat pumps may provide a cost-effective means of providing low-cost clean heat in small dwellings. However, there is only weak evidence for the energy efficiency of such systems. For related reasons, there is no certification standard to support publicly funded air-to-air installations. Policy makers should consider commissioning field or laboratory studies to clarify the effectiveness of air-to-air heat pumps.

The role of cascade heat pump systems such as exhaust air heat pump and hot water heat pumps should be considered further. These systems use both outdoor air and internal air to provide heating and hot water at different temperature levels. Further research is required to determine appropriate applications and the required skills and policy support.

There is also the opportunity to think more broadly in terms of energy storage and review the viability of communal hot water storage externally, this would be particularly well suited to flats and tenements or small homes in rural areas which may have limited internal area.

Fifth generation heat networks

Besides wide-area fourth generation heat networks, which operate at around 65°C, this report has covered other heat network configurations including communal air source heat pumps for flats. However, the potential for shared ambient loop networks, also known as fifth generation heating and cooling networks, to serve Scottish challenging dwelling types is not well reported in the independent literature. Further research in this area is merited.

Improving installed heat pump performance

As described in the context of older buildings in section 6, with some households and buildings it may be appropriate to decarbonise without any new insulation measures. However, while it’s possible to install any heating system at any time, it’s advised to first enhance the building’s fabric. Rather, it is more important to focus on design and installation standards to maximise in situ efficiency (Eyre et al, 2023).

Workforce education should be directed towards better system design. This concerns the right-sizing of heat pumps, radiators and pipework. This enables heat pumps to operate in their high efficiency ‘sweet spot’ for more of the heating season. This can often reduce capital costs and avoid unnecessary radiator and pipework upgrades.

Furthermore, a better understanding is needed about whether demand reduction and energy-saving measures can enable or speed up the deployment of technologies such as heat pumps, for example, by reducing the size and cost of equipment required, smoothing out peaks in electrical demand, and reducing operating costs.

Emerging technology

Domestic heat pumps use the vapour compression cycle. An alternative heat pump technology, the Peltier Effect is used in thermoelectric heat pumps. In these devices voltage applied to a semiconductor device creates a temperature difference between the two sides of the device, supporting thermal energy collection from renewable sources (Tritt, 2002). Thermoelectric heat pumps, known for their application in industries and portable devices like camping fridges, offer unique benefits for challenging building environments, especially smaller spaces such as flats or compact homes. Their key advantages include a lack of working fluid, eliminating concerns over global warming potential, absence of moving parts which ensures durability and minimal maintenance, and a compact size that allows for flexible installation options. Unlike traditional systems, thermoelectric units do not necessarily require external components, making them an ideal choice for locations where external installations are impractical. This makes thermoelectric heat pumps a versatile and eco-friendly option for urban living spaces where space constraints and building regulations might limit the use of conventional heating systems.

Developments in industry indicate that thermoelectric heat pumps may be suited to heating dwellings. TE Conversion, based in Glasgow, discussed with the author how they expect to test prototypes operationally in domestic settings in 2024.

Emerging technology once recognised as a ‘mature’ technology, service and maintenance costs are not anticipated to be any higher than for fossil fuel (or biomass) equipment as the intervention period should be longer. Annual service costs whether for gas boilers or heat pumps are likely to be comparable.

Conclusions

We conducted a review of existing literature and evidence to assess the feasibility of heat pumps as a clean heating option for building types considered difficult to decarbonise. We found that with careful consideration and effective design, clean heating technology can be applied to all types of challenging dwellings.

However, a key caveat of this report is the need to evaluate the cost-effectiveness of implementing clean heating technology in varied circumstances. Without a comprehensive cost analysis of comparable solutions, it is difficult to determine their economic viability. Therefore, future research should prioritise conducting whole-life cycle cost analyses of different heat pump applications and scenarios, ideally based on industry data wherever available.

The appendices include four key literature pieces that may complement the findings of this report, offering a comprehensive understanding of the challenges and opportunities associated with challenging dwelling types and clean heating technologies.

Recommendations

Based on the findings of the report, the authors recommend the Scottish Government explore the following:

  • Conduct in-depth case studies, evaluations and surveys on the application of clean heating technology in challenging dwelling types to extract valuable socio-technical lessons learned and develop repeatable solutions.
  • Future studies that facilitate consistent appraisal and comparison in heat pump evaluations.
  • Investigate zero carbon back-up options for areas with vulnerable above ground distribution networks.
  • Consider the recommendations of the Working Group on Tenements – mandatory owners associations, periodic inspections and maintenance sinking funds. This is important for energy efficiency and clean heating to be implemented in flats.
  • Investigate alternatives to hot water storage in flats and small properties and a general evaluation of consumer barriers in terms of hot water storage systems. For example, Community Energy Storage systems.
  • Establishing evidence for the energy efficiency of air-to-air heating and, if found to be appropriate, providing policy support for certification and installation in homes where it is more cost effective than water-based space heating.

In addition, the research team identified several financial and regulatory barriers for Scottish Government to consider:

  • Monitoring developments in thermoelectric heat pumps, which may provide radical space savings.
  • MCS certification for air-to-air heat pumps or support for communal ambient loops with individual water-to-water heat pumps for flats.
  • Hybrid heat pumps where fossil fuels are used only for hot water.
  • Resolving inconsistency in planning guidance for heritage buildings and conservation areas.

 

References

Ahmad, S., 2023. Motivations and Barriers Associated with Adopting Domestic Heat Pumps in the UK.

Anwar Jahid, M., Wang, J., Zhang, E., Duan, Q., Feng, Y., 2022. Energy savings potential of reversible photothermal windows with near infrared-selective plasmonic nanofilms. Energy Convers Manag 263, 115705.

BEIS, 2021. Domestic heat distribution systems: Evidence gathering.

BEIS, 2022. UK launches biggest electricity market reform in a generation [WWW Document]. URL https://www.gov.uk/government/news/uk-launches-biggest-electricity-market-reform-in-a-generation (accessed 2.16.24).

BloombergNEF, 2023. Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Prices Hit Record Low of $139/kWh.

Brown, K.J., Farrelly, R., O’Shaughnessy, S.M., Robinson, A.J., 2016. Energy efficiency of electrical infrared heating elements. Appl Energy 162, 581–588.

Built Environment Forum Scotland, 2019. Facts & Figures [WWW Document]. URL https://www.befs.org.uk/scotlands-historic-environment/facts-figures/ (accessed 3.27.24).

Cao, X., Li, N., Li, Y., Che, L., Yu, B., Liu, H., 2023. A review of photovoltaic/thermal (PV/T) technology applied in building environment control. Energy and Built Environment.

Carroll, P., Chesser, M., Lyons, P., 2020. Air Source Heat Pumps field studies: A systematic literature review. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews.

CCC, 2020. Reducing emissions in Scotland Progress Report to Parliament.

ClimateXchange, 2022. Zero emissions heating in new buildings across Scottish Islands.

Corsten, A., 2021. A comparative performance assessment of infrared heating panels and conventional heating solutions in Dutch residential buildings.

DELTA, 2018. Technical feasibility of electric heating in rural off-gas grid dwellings.

Element Energy, 2020. Technical feasibility of Low Carbon Heating in Domestic Buildings.

Energy Saving Trust, 2017. A guide to energy storage.

Energy saving trust, n.d. Exhaust air heat pumps [WWW Document].

Eyre, N., Fawcett, T., Topouzi, M., Killip, G., Oreszczyn, T., Jenkinson, K., Rosenow, J., 2023. Fabric first: is it still the right approach? Buildings and Cities 4, 965–972.

Gibb, D., Rosenow, J., Lowes, R., Hewitt, N., 2023. Coming in from the cold: Heat pump efficiency at low temperatures. Joule 7.

Gibb, K., Sharpe, T., Morgan, C., Higney, A., Moreno-Rangel, A., Serin, B., White, J., Hoolachan, A., 2023. Niddrie Road, Glasgow: Tenement Retrofit Evaluation.

HeatpumpMonitor.org, n.d. HeatpumpMonitor.org. An open source initiative to share and compare heat pump performance data. [WWW Document]. URL https://heatpumpmonitor.org/ (accessed 2.8.24).

HES, 2016. Climate change adaptation for traditional buildings.

HES, n.d. Traditional buildings [Online] Available at: https://www.historicenvironment.scot/advice-and-support/your-property/owning-a-traditional-property/traditional-buildings/

Khosravi, F., Lowes, R., Ugalde-Loo, C.E., 2023. Cooling is hotting up in the UK. Energy Policy 174, 113456.

Kylili, A., Fokaides, P.A., Christou, P., Kalogirou, S.A., 2014. Infrared thermography (IRT) applications for building diagnostics: A review. Appl Energy 134, 531–549.

Leveque, F., 2023. Affordable warmth. Next steps for clean heat in Scotland.

London Economics, 2023. Understanding the challenges faced by fuel poor households.

Lowes, R., 2023. Blowing hot and cold: Reflecting the potential value of air-to-air heat pumps in UK energy policy.

Lowes, R., 2022. Infrared heating: don’t get excited.

Lund, H., Østergaard, P.A., Nielsen, T.B., Werner, S., Thorsen, J.E., Gudmundsson, O., Arabkoohsar, A., Mathiesen, B.V., 2021. Perspectives on fourth and fifth generation district heating. Energy 227.

NEA, 2023a. Making heat pumps work for fuel-poor households [WWW Document].

NEA, 2023b. Making heat cheaper, smarter and greener.

Nesta, 2021. How to Heat Scotland’s Homes.

Nesta, 2023a. The electricity-to-gas price ratio explained – how a ‘green ratio’ would make bills cheaper and greener [WWW Document]. URL https://www.nesta.org.uk/blog/the-electricity-to-gas-price-ratio-explained-how-a-green-ratio-would-make-bills-cheaper-and-greener/ (accessed 2.16.24).

Nesta, 2023b. How the UK compares to the rest of Europe on heat pump uptake [WWW Document]. URL https://www.nesta.org.uk/report/how-the-uk-compares-to-the-rest-of-europe-on-heat-pump-uptake/electricity-gas-and-other-fuel-prices-across-europe/#:~:text=Between%202011%20and%202021%2C%20in,times%20more%20expensive%20than%20gas. (accessed 2.16.24).

Nesta, 2023c. Do heat pumps work in rural areas? [WWW Document]. URL https://www.nesta.org.uk/blog/do-heat-pumps-work-in-rural-areas/#:~:text=The%20truth%20is%20that%20rural,to%20invest%20in%20heat%20pumps. (accessed 2.7.24).

Nesta, 2023d. How the UK compares to the rest of Europe on heat pump uptake.

Nesta, 2024. Insulation impact: how much do UK houses really need.

NRS, 2011. Scotland’s Census 2011.

Palmer, J., Terry, N., 2023a. Faster deployment of heat pumps in Scotland: Settling the figures.

Palmer, J., Terry, N., 2023b. Faster deployment of heat pumps in Scotland: Settling the figures.

PV magazine, 2023. German manufacturer unveils 10kWh residential redox flow battery.

Rosenow, J., 2022. Analysis: Running costs of heat pumps versus gas boilers.

Roth, K., Dieckmann, J., Brodrick, J., 2007. Emerging technologies: Infrared radiant heaters 49, 72–73.

Scottish Government, 2021a. Heat in buildings strategy: Achieving net zero emissions in Scotland’s buildings.

Scottish Government, 2021b. Heat in buildings strategy: Achieving net zero emissions in Scotland’s buildings.

Scottish Government, 2022a. Heat Networks Delivery Plan.

Scottish Government, 2022b. Case Study: Zero Direct Emissions Heat in New Build Affordable Homes.

Scottish Government, 2023a. Tenements Short Life Working Group – energy efficiency and zero emissions heating: final report.

Scottish Government, 2023b. Delivering Net Zero for Scotland’s Buildings. Changing the way we heat our homes and buildings. A Consultation on proposals for a Heat in Buildings Bill.

Scottish Government, 2023c. Scottish House Condition Survey: 2021 Key Findings.

Sevindik, S., 2023. Modelling Scenarios for Low Carbon Heating Technologies in the Domestic Sector Towards a Circular Economy.

Simons, P., 2023. Cold hard facts about the efficiency of heat pumps. The Times.

Southside Housing Association, 2020. 30 Invergyle: Drive Phase 1 – Performance study & review.

Star Renewable Energy, n.d. UK’s largest residential air -source heat pump halves the cost of energy for flats in hillpark.

Terry, N., Galvin, R., 2023. How do heat demand and energy consumption change when households transition from gas boilers to heat pumps in the UK. Energy Build 292.

Tritt, T.M., 2002. Thermoelectric Materials: Principles, Structure, Properties, and Applications. Encyclopedia of Materials: Science and Technology 1–11.

Wade, F., 2020. Routinised heating system installation: the immutability of home heating. Energy Effic 13, 971–989.

Zhuang, C., Choudhary, R., Mavrogianni, A., 2023. Uncertainty-based optimal energy retrofit methodology for building heat electrification with enhanced energy flexibility and climate adaptability. Appl Energy 341.

 

 

Appendix

Methodology

A Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) is a methodology which enables a researcher(s) to undertake a systematic review of existing literature related to a specific research question and provides a method to search and critically appraise relevant literature. To further complement this, a deeper analysis of the gaps identified in the literature review was undertaken through a combination of surveys and semi-structured interviews with industry experts.

A rapid evidence assessment is split up into seven key stages:

  1. Protocol development
  2. Evidence search
  3. Search screening
  4. Evidence extraction
  5. Critical assessment of evidence
  6. Synthesis of results
  7. Communication of findings

Each of these stages and their methods have been discussed in more detail below.

Protocol development

The purpose of the protocol development is to develop a search strategy and formally detail the methodology. Developing a protocol distinguishes Rapid Evidence Assessments (REA’s) reviews with less structure. This ensures that the evidence review (ER) process is rigorous and transparent. It also facilitates communication among the User, Steering Group, and Review Team, laying out how the review will be carried out. The Review Team bears the responsibility for developing the review protocol, active input and approval from the User and Steering Group are essential components of the review process.

Background

Approximately 20% of Scotland’s total greenhouse gas emissions originate from homes and workplaces. In pursuit of climate objectives, the Scottish Government has established targets, aiming to transition over one million homes to clean heating systems by 2030, with the broader goal of achieving clean heating for all homes by 2045. Over one third of Scotland’s housing stock comprises tenement properties, characterised by factors such as accessibility issues, space limitations, ownership complexities, and structural challenges, which can pose difficulties in installing clean heating technology. Although several clean heat technologies exist, heat pumps are expected to play a significant role in the decarbonisation of heat in Scotland. The purpose of this work is to assess whether heat pumps represent a practical, technically viable, and cost-effective clean heating option for various dwelling types, including flats, tenements, and other hard-to-treat archetypes. 

Primary question

What evidence is there that heat pumps are a practical, technically feasible and cost-effective clean heating option for Scottish flats, tenements, and other hard-to-treat archetypes?

Population: Flats, tenements, and other hard-to-treat buildings in climates like Scotland’s.

Impact: Clean heating technologies

Comparator: Existing fossil fuel heating system

Outcome: Practical, technically feasible, cost effective

Secondary question

What evidence is there that dwelling types may be suited to other ZDEH technology such as direct electric heating.  Which dwellings are suited to non-ZDEH hybrid heating systems? 

Scope of the work

Boundaries

Geography 

Scotland (and other countries with similar economies and policy drivers i.e., wider UK and Europe where applicable)

Date

Since 2010 

We agreed that research carried out within the last 5 years would be the most relevant in terms of technology adoption and the regulatory/ policy framework with what is in place presently. We viewed research carried out in the last 5-10 years to be less relevant but may still be applicable and therefore has been included in this work. Research older than 10 years is anticipated to be the least relevant, using older technologies than available now, and adhering to different standards and policies that are currently in place. 

Outcome

Immediate cost/ benefit to occupants and building owner in terms of technical feasibility, practicality, user acceptance, capital cost and operating cost. 

Keyword search

Population 

dwellings; homes; houses; hard to treat; flats; apartments; traditional; solid wall; heritage; small 

Intervention 

low carbon heat; heat pump; zero carbon heat; renewable heat 

Comparator 

(we are comparing vs business as usual) 

Outcome 

economics; costs; comfort; consumer; skills; supply chain 

Other

case study; evaluation 

Search locations 

Peer-reviewed literature 

Engineering, policy, and social science databases 

Grey literature 

Engineering, policy, and social science databases for conference proceedings and non-peer reviewed academic publications

Search engines

Unpublished data 

Members of Heat Source; professional contacts of review team; contacts of Steering Team. 

Secondary review 

Semi structured interviews with industry experts to further complement the findings of the literature review.

Evidence search

The search strategy outlined above was utilised to carry out the evidence search. Boolean Operators, including words like AND, OR, NOT, or AND NOT allow the combination or exclusion of keywords, leading to more precise and productive results. This streamlined approach is designed to save time and effort by eliminating irrelevant hits that would otherwise need to be reviewed before being discarded.

Google searches are restricted to searching 32 words at a time; therefore 3 keyword searches were undertaken. As such the core searches performed across the three key databases can be seen in the table below. These were duplicated in each of the chosen search engines, Google, Google Scholar and Edinburgh Napier University academic library.

The keyword searches are outlined below:

Table 1: keyword search

Boolean operator

 

AND

Either (OR)

dwellings

hard to treat

low carbon heat

economics

case study

homes

flats

heat pump

costs

evaluation

houses

apartments

zero carbon heat

comfort

 

 

traditional 

renewable heat

consumer

 

 

solid wall

zero emissions heat

skills

 

 

small

 

supply chain

 

 

traditional

 

 

 

 

Search 1

 

Search 2

 

Search 3

Search results were then exported to an excel file. Duplicate results between the three searches were removed.

Search screening

Search result screening ensures that only the most relevant results are taken forward to the evidence extraction phase. Inclusion and exclusion criteria, in this case RAG analysis, was utilised was then used to carry out this initial screening.

Table 2: boundary conditions

Category 

Thresholds  

Score

Year  

2018 onwards 

Green

2013-2018 

Amber

Pre 2013 

Red

Source    

Peer Reviewed publication OR Book  

Green

Independent Research (not peer reviewed) OR Government Policy 

Amber

Industry grey literature 

Red

Location 

Scotland or UK 

Green

Europe 

Amber

Rest of World 

Red

Restrictions 

Relevant to all 3 

Green

Relevant to 2 

Amber

Relevant to 0 or 1  

Red

Evidence extraction

  1. Key observation/particular area of interest
  2. Evidence overview
  3. Key data

Once the initial search screening had been completed, we analysed the searches for further information to determine their alignment with clean heating in Scotland for challenging dwelling types. The following information was extracted or each piece of evidence:

Critical assessment

The critical assessment is the part of the REA which is used to determine the robustness and relevancy of the information that has been extracted in the preceding stages.

Assessing relevancy

The initial step in the critical assessment involves assessing the relevancy of evidence in connection to clean heating in hard-to-treat archetypes. The following has been considered:

  • The appropriateness of the method employed in the evidence to clean heating in Scotland for hard-to-treat property types.
  • The relevance of the evidence to hard-to-treat archetypes in Scotland.
  • The relevance of the intervention under scrutiny.
  • The relevance of the measured outcome.

Synthesis of results

This stage involves the systematic analysis and integration of findings from the gathered evidence to draw conclusions or make recommendations. This stage typically follows the data extraction phase and precedes the final reporting or dissemination of findings.

Communication of findings

The final step in the REA communicates the findings in a report and provides appropriate recommendations and conclusions.

Industry survey questions

The survey was conducted through Survey Monkey specifically targeting the HeatSource network, a collaborative low carbon heat knowledge hub, hosted by BE-ST on behalf of Scottish Enterprise. The survey was distributed to 311 people with a return rate of 16. The return of 5% although low provided some insights. The low return in part could be due to the timing, the survey was distributed in December.

Survey questions

  1. Provide your view on the suitability of electric heating for challenging property types based on your experience. If unsuitable, please provide the reasons why. As far as possible provide values or data to support your views.
  2. For which challenging property types have you considered, assessed, designed or installed clean heating systems? Select all which apply.
    • Multi-storey flats
    • Tenements (any age)
    • Old/heritage properties pre-1919
    • Four in a block
    • Off gas grid properties
    • Small properties of less than 80m2
    • None of the above (please specify other)
  3. What experience do you have or have considered in retrofitting any of the following technologies?
    • Instant electric heating systems, for example, electric boilers, CPSU, infrared, panel heaters
    • Off peak direct electric, for example storage heaters
    • Air source heat pumps
    • Ground source heat pumps
    • Other (please specify)
    • None of the above
  4. Thinking about the heating projects you have been involved in, what was your desired outcome/ motivation for action? You can define this further in the space provided.
    • Achieve a reduction in operating costs
    • Achieve parity operating cost
    • Reduction in fuel poverty
    • Achieve reduction in carbon emissions
    • Improving occupant thermal comfort
    • Achieve a reduction in cost savings for periodic replacement
    • Where possible provide supporting figures/data. (for example, reduce carbon emissions associated with a property by x%, increase thermal comfort for tenants) Define your desired outcome, ideally with numbers. Please specify below.
  5. Thinking about projects you have been involved in where clean heating systems were considered, did they go ahead?
    • Yes
    • No
  6. Did you achieve your desired outcomes? Where possible, provide figures or data citing actual versus target for outcomes.
    • Yes – why?
    • No – why?
  7. If you have abandoned attempts to install a clean heating system, why was this?
    • Capital cost
    • Expected operating cost
    • Installation barriers
    • Occupant/user barriers – e.g., concerns with heat pump controls
    • Lack of supply chain
    • Lack of occupier engagement/support
    • Lack of funding
    • Other
    • Please use the space below to elaborate on the reasons and context for the decision to not proceed with a planned installation.
  8. If you are an installer, what is important to successful outcomes in clean heating installations in challenging property types?
  9. In your opinion, what additional evidence is needed to increase confidence in deploying clean heating in challenging property types?
  10. In your opinion what are the key barriers to increasing deployment of clean heating in challenging property types?

Semi-structured interviews

Interviewees were identified by the project report authors as key industry experts with experience of clean heating technology. In total ten interviews were conducted with installers, architects, and housing professionals. The interviews were an addition to the literature review process to help draw out key findings in areas such as barriers to adoption and potential solutions to deliver clean heating technology at scale.

Sample questions altered slightly dependent on background and job role.

1. What is your experience of retrofitting zero direct emissions heating systems?

2. What barriers do you perceive with difficult to treat archetypes?

3. What did your previous research reveal to you about ZDEH systems?

4. What is your opinion on alternative solutions (using a table of options)

5. Why do you think retrofitting ZDEH systems in difficult to treat homes is not being done at scale?

6. What are the key things you need to see to enable difficult to treat properties being retrofitted?

Case examples

Using our sources protocol and deeper dive the four sources below were identified as most insightful in terms of the research question. Although it must be stressed all four still have gaps in findings.

Title of source

Faster deployment of heat pumps in Scotland: Settling the figures

Year

Type of research

Country/Climate zone

Contains hard to treat and clean heat research evidence

Author/ For

2023

Modelling

Scotland

Yes

Cambridge Architectural Research/ WWF

Note

The study emphasises integrating heat pumps with energy efficiency measures to reduce emissions in Scottish homes, focusing on the cost, energy efficiency needs, and impact on energy bills and fuel poverty. It leverages the ScotCODE model for dynamic, cost-effective strategies in low-carbon heating deployment.

Key observations/Implications

Evidence of technically feasibility (or not)
“The study found that it is technically possible to fit larger heat pumps to these homes without external wall insulation, but overall costs are higher”
“Flats are less likely than houses to see a benefit from heat pumps because they use proportionately more energy for hot water”
“It is technically possible to fit heat pumps in almost all flats and tenements, with ASHP selected in most cases, and air to air units selected where internal and external space for ASHP equipment is limited (also in some flats with electric storage heaters)”
Evidence of cost-effectiveness (or not)
“The modelling and optimisation revealed that homes require a good standard of energy efficiency to ensure efficient and cost-effective heat pump operation”
“Around 80% of all homes would require at least one upgrade to reach the cost-optimal level of energy efficiency”
“Although in many cases running costs are lower with heat pumps, high capital costs lead to higher whole-life costs. This gap is what Government financial support needs to close in order to make converting to heat pumps more attractive to households”
“This modelling indicates that the most effective way to reduce carbon emissions from Scottish housing is to prioritise dwellings using oil-fired heating, and older homes with solid walls first, then gas-heated homes and bungalows, and finally newer dwellings built since 1982 and flats, where the potential savings are lower”
“the cost and carbon savings from switching to heat pumps are greatest for homes that currently have oil-fired heating”
Evidence of other ZDEH tech
“Shared external units serving multiple flats may work out more cost-effective than separate systems serving individual flats, both for installation and maintenance.

Title of source

Affordable warmth next steps for clean heat in Scotland

Year

Type of research

Country/Climate zone

Contains hard to treat and clean heat research evidence

Author/ For

2023

Mixed

Scotland

Yes

Fabrice Leveque/
WWF Scotland

Note

It shows that energy efficiency, electric heat pumps and heat networks can help cut energy bills and lower carbon emissions. With energy prices likely to remain elevated, these solutions are our best strategy to minimise fuel poverty and tackle climate change
at the same time.

Key observations/Implications

Evidence of technically feasibility (or not)
“It is possible to install individual heat pumps in flats, but there are extra challenges to doing so that shared systems like heat networks and communal systems (potentially receiving heat from large heat pumps) could overcome”
“a recent field trial for UK Government found internal space to be a limiting factor in only 2% of over a thousand UK homes

Evidence of cost-effectiveness (or not)
“All the typical houses in the study starting with oil and electric storage heating, and just over half of those on gas, make savings”
“electric heat pumps, combined with some insulation improvements, are the cheapest way for most Scottish homes to achieve the crucial cuts in climate emissions that we must achieve by 2030”
“Air source heat pumps (ASHP) are the least-cost solution for homes starting with gas and oil boilers, with Air to Air heat pumps the best solution for homes with electric storage heaters”
“Some houses on gas see modest increases… This is because they have high hot water demand and are relatively more modern and energy efficient and before upgrades already had the lowest energy bills. These factors also prevent the flats from making savings against gas”
“heat pump running costs could be further lowered by: … time of use tariff…, solar energy…, more energy efficiency and radiator upgrades…, innovation”

Evidence of other ZDEH tech
“Potential challenges to installing heat pumps in homes were explored… cost-effective alternatives such as air to air heat pumps… and internal wall insulation were found”
“there is a risk that space for these may be limited in some smaller homes. The modelling found that in these cases, Air to Air heat pumps and instant hot water heaters provide a cost effective and space-saving alternative. Although not part of this study, heat batteries also provide a smaller alternative to traditional hot water tanks”

Evidence of non-ZDEH tech
“hydrogen heating in Scotland. It found that if available at all, deployment at scale is unlikely to be possible until the mid2030s. It is also likely to be much more expensive to run than natural gas heating”

Title of source

How to Heat Scotland’s Homes An analysis of the suitability of properties types in Scotland for ground and air source heat pumps.

Year

Type of research

Country/Climate zone

Contains hard to treat and clean heat research evidence

Author/ For

2021

Mixed

Scotland

Yes

Energy Systems Catapult/Nesta Scotland

Note

Narrative summary of barriers. Quantitative assessment of Scottish housing stock. Some view on flats for heat pumps ‘difficult’. ” It was found that installing a heat pump into a pre-1914 flat without retrofit measures would leave the house below acceptable comfort levels for more than 22% of the time during the coldest periods of the year.

Key observations/Implications

Evidence of technically feasibility (or not)
“25% of homes surveyed for a heat pump were deemed unsuitable by the surveyor or homeowner because of the lack of a suitable external location, because the routing of services was problematic, or because of significant disruption”
“Typically, heat pumps provide a lower temperature than fossil fuel boilers, therefore achieving an equivalent heating experience is affected by the energy efficiency of the property, as well as the detailed design and installation of the system itself.”
“Space inside the flat for a hot water tank may also be a challenge”
“Consideration should also be given to the cumulative noise effect of multiple heat pumps across multiple dwellings.”
Evidence of cost-effectiveness (or not)
“Installing a heat pump can be 4x the cost of replacing a gas boiler plus potential additional costs for distribution system upgrades, hot water storage and/or fabric retrofit”
“it is known that heat pumps generally result in lower running costs for off-gas households and can be competitive with on-gas where a heat pump system is properly sized”
“Heat pumps have a higher capital cost than incumbent heating technologies, without clearly delivering a better experience for the household”
“In off-gas grid dwellings, where heating oil, LPG, direct electric or solid fuels are being replaced, heat pumps can offer a competitive alternative when considering running costs, particularly when the heat pump system is well sized and maintains a good coefficient of performance”
Evidence of other ZDEH tech
“Opportunities for pre-1914 flats could include a communal heating system which would reduce the amount of ancillary equipment required within each flat and share the costs associated with installation and maintenance”

Title of source

Niddrie Road, Glasgow: Tenement Retrofit Evaluation

Year

Type of research

Country/Climate zone

Contains hard to treat and clean heat research evidence

Author/ For

2023

Case Study

Scotland

Yes

UK Collaborative Centre for Housing Evidence/ Scotland Funding Council

Note

Evaluating the deep ‘green’ retrofit of a traditional, pre-1919, sandstone tenement in Niddrie Road, Glasgow. A partnership consisting of Southside Housing Association, Glasgow City Council, John Gilbert Architects and CCG Construction to deliver an Enerphit level retrofit. The report contains an evaluation and its wider lessons for retrofitting tenements and older building stock.

Key observations/Implications

Evidence of technically feasibility (or not)

“ASHPs were constructed into the ground and first floor with gas boilers in the upper two floors. s. This was a direct result of the planning decisions – the hot water piping could only reach the first two floors from the back yard with sufficient heat distribution retained to meet the manufacturing warranty”

Planning guidance initially ruled out external wall insulation (EWI) at the rear and partial gable end of the block. It also later argued that residential air source heat pumps could not be used if attached to the rear of the building at windows. It also ruled out photo-voltaic panels on the roof, and it did not approve proposed wider gutters.

Tenement planning policy is critical to aligning the fabric first needs of the retrofit (air -tight insulation combining external wall insulation and internal wall insulation as well as mechanical ventilation with heat recovery and other specific components) alongside renewables to deliver low energy. Niddrie road is a standard sandstone tenement. Even so, planning permission for the retrofit was complex and challenging

Evidence of cost-effectiveness (or not)

“The decision to commit to an EnerPHit approach was made possible because the association had control of a complete (and empty) tenement block or close. On the other hand, this means that the approach and the standard are not suitable for most situations where ownership patterns are more fragmented.”

“Like many other older tenements, 107 Niddrie Road had been poorly maintained and suffered from a wide range of long-term problems such as failing finishes and decayed floor structure which significantly impacted on time and costs”

Evidence of other ZDEH tech

When the space heating demand is reduced by as much as it is at Niddrie Road, then the biggest component of most peoples’ fuel bills are hot water costs. Wastewater heat recovery systems can reduce costs (and carbon emissions) of hot water can be reduced by around 40%

© Published by BE-ST, 2024 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

info@climatexchange.org.uk

+44(0)131 651 4783

@climatexchange_

www.climatexchange.org.uk

May 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4854

Executive summary

Project aims

The Scottish Government’s Heat in Buildings (HiB) Strategy commits all Scottish homes to be net zero by 2045. However, in line with the commitment to a Just Transition, the Government recognises that personal circumstances may, in some cases, make it more challenging for people to meet the requirements of the proposed Heat in Buildings Standard. Personal circumstances include vulnerability criteria related to the occupiers of the dwelling, such as disability, age, or low-income.

This study reviewed how regulations, both in the UK and internationally, have accounted for personal circumstances. Provision made for vulnerable groups for these circumstances included exemptions, extensions or abeyances, support mechanisms such as financial support, amendments or alterations to the standard.

This research will support the Scottish Government’s development of the proposed standard, through considering personal circumstances in domestic buildings, specifically focusing on owner occupied homes and the private rented sector.

We also investigated the impact of including personal circumstances in the regulation. The review has covered relevant low-carbon heating, domestic energy efficiency, housing and transport regulations. Flexibility is often provided within operational regimes without it being explicitly specified within the legislation, and this flexibility was not captured by this study. We also highlight new emerging policy areas to support consideration of how similar regulations could work in Scotland.

Summary of key findings

The study identified 18 international examples of personal circumstances being included in regulations. Six stakeholders from consumer organisations, professional housing sector, government departments and policy groups were interviewed to provide insight on regulations identified through the study. Our key findings are:

  • There is limited evidence of including personal circumstances in regulations.
  • The most common personal circumstances identified relate to those with a low income. Several regulations across Europe and Canada offer additional financial support for low-income households to undertake energy efficiency renovations or to upgrade to clean heating systems.
  • Similar examples from the Netherlands, Switzerland and the USA exempt properties from upgrading to a clean heating system if the cost of doing so is prohibitive or if the lifetime savings were too low.
  • Germany allows exemptions for clean heating regulation for owner-occupiers over 80 years of age, if they live in a building of up to six flats.
  • Most stakeholders were aware of funding or support for low-income households, but several noted they had not considered including other personal circumstances within regulations.
  • A proposal in Flanders aims to introduce a decision tree for personal circumstances, which includes significant life events to excuse residents for not meeting the standard. If implemented, this could allow application for a time extension to meet energy efficiency and clean heat standards in properties based on specific personal circumstances such as divorce or death in the family.
  • Stakeholders were concerned that including personal circumstances in the proposed HiB Standard would risk people losing out on the benefits of the energy transition such as reducing energy costs, greater energy efficiency and warmer homes.
  • There were concerns regarding a lack of clarity on how including personal circumstances would work in practice and the potential for an additional administrative burden on both residents and those administering schemes.
  • Further examples of personal circumstances within regulation include Low Emission Zones across the UK, which provide exemptions for vehicles owned by those with a disability. However, drawing direct parallels to energy efficiency and clean heating regulations is challenging due to the specifics of how the regulation works.

Recommendations and value to a policy audience

Should the Scottish Government decide to implement new regulations that include personal circumstances, the key recommendations are:

  • More thorough consideration of the potential benefits and risks associated with including personal circumstances – The benefits have largely been assumed but they require further investigation. The impact of including personal circumstances requires further consideration to understand which groups are most likely to benefit. Additionally, the needs of different vulnerable groups require greater clarity to ensure that the introduction of any flexibilities best meet these needs. This includes owner-occupiers, tenants in the private rented sector and communities connecting to heat networks to determine the likely positive impact. The risks of losing out on the benefits of the transition should also be considered.
  • Consider additional support and flexibility – In addition to providing financial support to cover the cost of the measure, consider providing further support or alternative accommodation for low-income households during disruptive works.
  • Ongoing monitoring of policy and regulation developments in similar countries, particularly in Flanders.

 

Glossary

Clean heat

A heating system with zero direct emissions, e.g. an air-source heat pump

EE

Energy efficiency

EPC

Energy Performance Certificate

HiB

Heat in Buildings

HiB Standard/the standard

A proposal for a Heat in Buildings Standard comprising a minimum energy efficiency standard and a prohibition on polluting heating systems recently consulted on by the Scottish Government.

Personal Circumstances

Multiple, different vulnerability criteria such as those with disabilities, elderly, low-income, etc; related to the occupiers of the dwelling

Introduction

This report provides findings from review of a wide range of international regulations that include provision for personal circumstances. Some personal circumstances are legally protected characteristics such as age, disability and pregnancy. However, the definition of personal circumstances is broad and can include wide ranging factors such as income level, health conditions (including disabilities), ownership status of property, location (which can affect outside temperatures), household composition and different cultural practices. These characteristics could affect the ability of different groups to comply with regulations.

The aim of the review is to inform the Scottish Government’s decision-making on future regulations regarding decarbonising residential buildings in Scotland and what types of provisions could be made to take into account personal circumstances. The review covers a variety of regulations that make provision for personal circumstances within different countries and regions that are considered to have relevance for the Scottish Government.

Policy context

The Heat in Buildings (HiB) Strategy commits all of Scotland’s buildings, including residential, to net zero by 2045 (Scottish Government, 2021). A proposal for the HiB Standard (“the standard” for the purposes of this report), comprising a minimum energy efficiency standard and a prohibition on polluting heating systems, was recently consulted on by the Scottish Government (Scottish Government, 2023).

The consultation proposed a prohibition on polluting heating systems from 2045, thereby requiring all homes to switch to a clean heating system. A clean heating system is defined as one with zero direct emissions at the point of use. The Scottish Government’s consultation proposed that private landlords must meet the minimum energy efficiency standard by 2028 and owner occupiers by 2033. Owner occupiers that install a clean heating system will not be mandated to improve their energy efficiency, however it is preferable, for the reasons outlined below.

The benefits of improving the EE performance of homes, particularly regarding the insulation levels and the resulting improved thermal performance are well established. Residents are likely to experience improved comfort and lower bills. EE schemes have a long history in Scotland and the UK, with significant numbers of properties now having good levels of insulation. However, some properties are still behind, with over 37% of private sector homes in Scotland having minimal levels of loft insulation and 47% no form of wall insulation (Scottish Government, 2024).

Clean heating is essential to meet decarbonisation targets and for homes with an improved thermal performance (through meeting EE standards) the expectation is that residents will not experience higher bills following a change to their heating system. The consultation on a HiB Bill also proposed two early action triggers for upgrading a heating system ahead of 2045; these are after the purchase of a property (with a grace period of 2 to 5 years), and when a heat network becomes available (Scottish Government, 2023).

The Scottish Government recognises that there are numerous reasons why properties remain poorly insulated, including technical, cost, practical and personal circumstances. EE retrofit measures and clean heating system installations are sometimes associated with disruption in the home which can be a major barrier for residents. For example, a heat pump installation will typically take 2-4 days to complete (LCP Delta, 2022) and can be disruptive to residents. The associated disruption is the main barrier to upgrading to a heat pump (LCP Delta, Energy Systems Catapult, Oxford Computer Consultants, 2022). This disruption could potentially have a greater impact on those in vulnerable situations.

There is recognition that personal circumstances could make it more challenging for some people to meet the proposed standard due to real or perceived barriers. Personal circumstances are relevant for both energy efficiency (EE) and clean heating requirements.

To ensure fairness, the Scottish Government has proposed (in its consultation on a Heat in Buildings Bill) that the Bill (Scottish Government, 2023) will:

  • Ahead of 2045, exempt those who can’t, or perhaps should not have to, meet the HiB Standard.
  • Provide extra time for those who need it to meet the standard or require that people comply with a modified version of the standard which considers their building’s characteristics or unique circumstances.
  • Make it simple for people to appeal where they believe the requirements are incorrect or unfair.

The new bill has been central to a consultation process which closed in March 2024 (Scottish Government, 2023)

Research aims and scope

This project sought to identify examples of regulation which incorporated personal circumstances from a broad range of international regulations, including energy efficiency and low carbon, housing and transport policies. Regulations were reviewed to determine how suitable alterations, extensions or exemptions have been included to accommodate personal circumstances in different types of regulation. This includes what measures have been used or proposed to provide support (such as financial, deadline extensions) to assist with full or partial compliance with the regulations. This will inform Scottish Government decision-making around future proposals, including if and how to incorporate personal circumstances into new retrofit policy.

Overview of methodology

The key focus of this project was to identify regulatory examples, both within the UK and internationally, that include personal circumstances as a basis for extensions, abeyances or exemptions. We anticipated the number of examples specific to heat and energy efficiency regulations would be low. Our approach therefore drew from a broad base that included other sectors. This approach ensured we cast a wide net to identify a diverse range of types of personal circumstances and different ways these have been accounted for in regulations. To ensure all relevant examples were identified, our approach included a comprehensive evidence search and multi-method approach:

  • A desk-based study: We reviewed data from internal reports and databases, including a previous international review for ClimateXChange on heat and energy efficiency policy (LCP Delta, 2023). Additionally, we searched publicly available policy databases and conducted tailored internet searches to identify academic, policy and other research sources.
  • Consulted with in-house expert colleagues: this supported our research and ensured we focused our searches in areas that were likely to provide value.
  • An online call for evidence: This was posted to LinkedIn via our company page which has over 10,000 followers to encourage stakeholders to share relevant regulatory examples.
  • Interviews with external stakeholders: We completed interviews with six external stakeholders to discuss how regulatory examples had been implemented and the impact of including personal circumstances. Stakeholders were from a broad range of sectors and countries including the UK, Europe and Canada. These are summarised in the table below.

Table 1: Interviewees by sector and country

Interviewee no.

Interviewee sector

Country

1

Independent consumer organisation

Belgium

2

Professional housing sector body

UK

3

Government department (energy/decarbonisation)

Canada

4

Policy NGO

UK

5

Policy network organisation

Belgium

6

Policy and PA consultancy

Italy

In our research, personal circumstances refer to a variety of individual or household factors that may affect the ability to comply with or benefit from such regulations. Depending on the personal circumstance, they can be transient by their nature or permanent. Specifically, we considered the following aspects of personal circumstances:

  • Income level: Financial status is crucial as it affects an individual’s or family’s ability to invest in energy-efficient technologies or renovations. Lower-income households may require subsidies or financial incentives to afford necessary upgrades. Low-income households may also struggle to deal with disruptive works in the house, particularly if they need to find alternative housing during the work.
  • Health conditions and disability: Health issues, especially those related to respiratory problems or illnesses exacerbated by cold or damp conditions, can make certain regulations more urgent or necessary for specific individuals. They can also make it particularly difficult to deal with disruptive works in the house.
  • Property type: The type of property one lives in (e.g., detached house, flat, listed building, etc) can influence the feasibility of certain energy-efficient solutions or decarbonisation methods. A separate piece of research investigated building characteristics that may require exemptions is ongoing at the time of writing.
  • Ownership status: Whether a person owns or rents their home significantly impacts an individual’s ability to make substantial changes to their property, such as upgrading heating systems. Renters often lack the ability to implement these improvements, as landlords retain the final decision-making power. Landlords might impose modifications that do not align with tenants’ preferences or fail to consider their personal circumstances adequately. Additionally, tenants may face the risk of eviction if they push for changes that landlords find inconvenient. Thus, protecting the interests of tenants becomes crucial, ensuring that energy efficiency improvements and clean heat installations do not result in undue cost or disruption for them.
  • Location: Geographic location affects climate-related needs; for example, homes in colder regions might prioritise heating efficiency more than homes in milder climates. The reliability of the heating system is also crucial in colder regions. Additionally, rural or urban settings can influence access to certain technologies or energy sources and logistics.
  • Household composition: The size of the household and the presence of vulnerable individuals (such as children, elderly, or disabled members) can affect energy needs.
  • Cultural practices: Cultural or lifestyle factors might affect energy consumption patterns and openness to certain technologies or changes.

The project team built an Excel database to log all relevant regulations identified through the project and to include key information for each one. The database was a valuable resource when completing the analysis of findings for the project. Relevant criteria collected for each regulation included the enforcing authority to determine the eligibility and type of personal circumstance within the regulation, as well as the method of support available – such as extension, financial support, etc, and redress options (if relevant). The full list of database criteria is available in the appendix.

Research limitations

We acknowledge that the number of regulatory examples that include personal circumstances we have identified is limited. The researchers have endeavoured to identify regulatory examples to the extent that is possible. However, we acknowledge the limitation of finding all relevant regulations given the breadth of the project and the fast-developing nature of the heat and energy efficiency policy space.

We have not conducted full research into the reasons why governments have not included personal circumstances within regulations but suggest the following potential reasons for limited examples:

  • Not considered viable: Inclusion of personal circumstances may have been considered, but the government determined that doing so was not feasible. This could either be due to the potential to limit effectiveness of the regulation or challenges associated with how including personal circumstance would work in practice. There may be an assumption that appropriate flexibility will be offered within the overall regime, without it being explicit in the overarching legislation.
  • Low priority: Countries may have considered including personal circumstances at some stage during regulation design but deemed this a low priority resulting in no further action.
  • Oversight: Countries may have neglected to consider the significance of personal circumstances within key regulation and the potential benefit of including them.

As the research focused on identifying regulations, the research on the type of personal circumstances that affect people’s ability to meet a regulation is limited. Additionally, we have not researched in detail how government intervention could best help different people meet the regulations as this is beyond the scope.

A further limitation of the research is the focus on regulation. There is a possibility that some countries are open to considering exemptions or extensions in practice on a case-by-case basis. This would require residents to reach out to the enforcing authority or body to request some flexibility on the regulation that considers their personal situation. The interview data suggests this possibility, but this was not investigated in detail in this report. It is also possible that Government funding is provided to people in vulnerable circumstances that is not linked directly with regulation; this was also not covered within the scope of the research.

Key findings: Personal circumstances in energy efficiency and clean heat regulations

We undertook a comprehensive review of heat, energy efficiency and other home decarbonisation-related regulations to identify the most relevant examples of regulations including flexibility in enforcement for personal circumstances. Through desk-based research, we identified 18 existing regulations relevant to this study that consider personal circumstances.

We conducted six interviews for this project. Most interviewees were not aware of examples of regulations that include provision for personal circumstances and responses to the idea ranged from neutral to negative. One interviewee who works for a professional housing sector body confirmed that within the housing sector, regulation usually involves meeting a minimum standard with funding available for those who cannot do this themselves. There are no exemptions from electrical and gas safety standards, so the interviewee questioned why decarbonisation measures should be treated any differently as the regulation is in part intended to benefit the resident. Discussions regarding personal circumstances within regulations focused on low-income residents struggling to meet standards due to lack of finance; most interviewees were familiar with such regulation. Most interviewees agreed the solution to this would be provision of additional funding and confirmed that they were only aware of such examples. This tallied with our findings from the desk-based research.

To facilitate the analysis, we have grouped our findings into two categories based on the personal circumstance considered. Our first category considers income levels and highlights eight policies providing additional support to lower-income households, using different methods. Our second category considers the high cost of the work mandated by the policy / regulation and highlights three examples of policies supporting owner-occupiers with the costs incurred for energy efficiency improvements or replacing their heating system with the mandated clean and renewable technology. A third section focuses on other exemptions and considerations, in which we highlight three other policies. In our analysis, we have merged two policies (implemented in France) together as they effectively work together and left out other policies identified which related to legal requirements and were thus out of scope. At the end of this section, we provide a detailed summary and analysis of the six interviews we conducted for this project. Interviewees came from different sectors to ensure a wide range of views.

Income level

Overview

Out of the 18 regulations identified which considered personal circumstances, nine considered income level. More particularly, the regulations had a specific provision for low-income households. These regulations, covered in more detail below, focus on the renovation of existing residential buildings to increase their energy efficiency, and on the replacement of inefficient or high-carbon heating systems for hot water and space heating. These regulations were identified in Europe for the most part (France (3), Italy, the Netherlands, the UK and Poland) as well as in Canada. They include minimum standards setting out how renovation should be conducted and which appliances to install, as well as other regulations encouraging the uptake of energy efficiency measures.

In our research, we identified two distinct phases—initial and advanced— in the evolution of regulatory approaches aimed at promoting energy efficiency and reducing environmental impact. The initial phase is characterised by non-binding, voluntary measures designed to encourage the adoption of clean heat technologies. This phase relies heavily on incentives such as grants, subsidies, or tax rebates to motivate owner-occupiers to implement energy-efficient solutions without the pressure of legal mandates. Most of the regulations highlighted in this section are part of governments’ first step in driving the transformation of buildings on the way to decarbonisation and net zero objectives. In contrast, the advanced phase introduces legally binding regulations that include minimum standards setting out how renovation should be conducted and which appliances to install, as well as other regulations encouraging the uptake of energy efficiency measures. The Scottish Government is specifically interested in the regulations falling in the advanced phase, as funding (initial phase) has already been implemented in Scotland. Two of the regulations highlighted fit into this advanced phase as they include minimum standards, which could show a potential path for the evolution of existing or future clean heat measures. Minimum standards create a legal requirement for specific appliances or energy efficiency measures to be installed, which is then enforced by local planning authorities. The City of Vancouver’s Zoning and Development by-law (City of Vancouver, 2022) mandated the installation of zero emissions heating systems in all new low-rise residential buildings in 2022 and will extend this mandate to all new and replacement heating system installations in 2025. The second example is Poland’s Clean Air 2.0 (Ministry of Climate and Environment, 2022) in which Polish regions have implemented emissions standards for heating appliances in all new and existing single-family homes.

Policymakers across these six countries recognise the urgency in renovating their housing stock and turning them into clean, efficient and comfortable homes. However, they are also aware of the cost implications of these updates and retrofits. As a result, they have developed support schemes and policies to incentivise and help all households to undertake these works, with specific, additional support for low-income households. The definition of a low-income household depends on local economic conditions and is country specific. However, the support provided to low-income households has commonalities across the regulations identified:

  • Grants and subsidies: the regulation offers a free contribution to owner-occupiers who undertake an energy efficiency renovation in their home. The contribution usually only covers a share of the total cost of the renovation and is capped up to a certain amount. As an example, the French PrimeRénov’ (Republique Francaise, 2024) is an incentive to help owner-occupiers replace their heating system; in addition to other incentives, it can cover up to 90% of eligible expenses for very modest households, 75% for low-income households, 60% for intermediary households and 40% for high-income households. Eligible expenses include a large-scale renovation of a home leading to an improvement of at least two EPC labels, a specific renovation of the heating system or insulation, or the renovation of a multiple occupancy building.
  • Low-interest loans: the regulation offers access to a low-interest loan for owner-occupiers to undertake the renovation and / or retrofit. Depending on countries, the loan can cover part or the total of the renovation work. The Dutch Energy Saving Loan provides a 0% rate on the total cost of the renovation for owner-occupiers with an aggregate income below €60,000. (Nationaal Warmtefonds, 2024).

In our review, we did not identify examples of regulations providing exemptions or abeyances related to income levels. Similarly, redress options weren’t mentioned on the websites reviewed.

Analysis of effectiveness and success

All nine regulations accounting for income level as a personal circumstance proved effective in incentivising owner-occupiers to install energy efficiency measures. Across the countries identified, at least thousands of households had applied for the support schemes. These schemes are available to most households but provide additional support for low-income households. In France, the PrimeRénov’ has received over 1.7 million applications, distributed over €1.7 billion in grants between 2020 and 2023 (Carole-Anne Cornet, 2024). In the Netherlands, over €1.2 billion were provided as part of the Energy Savings Loans, resulting in the renovation of over 90,000 homes across the country (Nationaal Warmtefonds, 2024). One notable measure is the Italian Superbonus which was the only measure providing support up to 110% of the cost of the renovation for owner-occupiers. Whilst the initial objective of the regulation – incentivising owner-occupiers to undertake energy efficiency renovations – has been achieved, the policy had been much more popular than expected, as the take-up of incentives had hit €219 billion by the end of 2023, as opposed to the budgeted €35 billion (Balmer & Fonte, 2024).

Understanding the effectiveness of providing additional support when considering income level as a personal circumstance is more challenging, as governments don’t report such detailed information. Table 2 provides detailed uptake and spending information for all measures identified, when information was available.

Table 2: Income level-related measures and impact

Country

Name

Support available

Impact and awareness

France

CEE

Additional financial support up to €15,500 for low-income households for replacing their heating system with low-carbon options.

In 2020, 1.3 million applications were approved for support. (Ministere de la Transition Ecologique, 2024)

France

Ma PrimeRenov’

  • Additional €1,500 for very modest income households with total subsidies capped at 90% of eligible expenses.
  • Additional €750 for modest income households with total subsidies capped at 60% of eligible expenses.

All subsidies apply to energy efficiency and heating improvements and are claimed directly by the contractor / installer. At time of paying, the amount of the subsidy is taken off the bill by the contractor.

Between 2020 and beginning of 2023, 1.7 million applicants with over 1 million renovation work undertaken, with €1.7B distributed. (Carole-Anne Cornet, 2024).

France

Heating Boost

  • €4,000 for modest households and €2,500 for all other households replacing their heating system with a more efficient one.
  • €700 for modest households to connect to a heat network and €450 for others.

Between 2019 and 2022, 1.12 million heating systems were replaced thanks to the subsidies and 2.1 million insulation work completed, with grants totaling €4.8B. (Ministere de la Transition Ecologique, 2024)

Italy

Superbonus

Subsidies and tax deduction covering between 60-110% of the expenses incurred, increasing based on the number of people in the household. These incentives can be applied to thermal insultation work, the replacement of a heating system or structural improvements.

By August 2023, 425,350 energy efficiency projects had applied for the tax deduction through the Superbonus scheme. (Statista, 2023)

England

Sustainable Warmth

Maximum of £10,000 grant for low-income households installing a heat pump or hybrid heating system.

Under Sustainable Warmth (LAD Phase 3 and HUG Phase 1), almost 5,200 households have been upgraded up to December 2022. (Department for Energy Security and Net Zero, 2023)

Netherlands

Warmth Funds

Interest rate of 0% on the Energy Savings Loan provided for owner-occupiers with aggregate income below €60,000.

By December 2023, the Dutch Heat Fund had granted over €1.2B in Energy Savings Loans, resulting in the financing of more than 208,000 energy-saving measures for over 90,000 homes. (Nationaal Warmtefonds, 2024)

British Columbia, Canada

Zoning and Development By-law

Additional support for low-income households mentioned but not implemented yet. Includes exemptions from building code and planning requirements following energy efficiency work.

No data published

Poland

Clean Air 2.0

Most households can get a grant up to €5,000 when replacing their heating system to a low-emissions system. Low-income households can claim up to €7,000.

By early 2022, over 384,000 applications had been submitted, totaling PLN 6.45B of co-financing (GBP 1.2B). (Ministry of Climate and Environment, 2022)

High cost of work in the home

Overview

Out of the 18 regulations identified which considered personal circumstances, three specifically considered the high cost of work in the home, as a combination of property type and location personal circumstances. These regulations mandate the ban of fossil-fuelled heating systems and their replacement by clean or hybrid heating systems. These regulations were identified in the Netherlands, Switzerland and the United States of America (USA). For this exemption, these regulations consider the cost of replacing a fossil-fuelled heating system with a clean / hybrid one and the lifetime cost of running the clean / hybrid heating system. In the cases where the combined estimated installation and running costs of the clean / hybrid heating system are higher, owner-occupiers are exempt from the ban. The regulations in place do not mention a duration for this exemption. Denver City Council has implemented such a regulation banning the installation of natural gas furnaces and water heaters in new commercial and multi-occupancy buildings as part of its new building codes (Weiser, 2023). Additionally, they have earmarked $30 million in incentives to help building owners and homeowners install heat pumps instead.

Analysis of effectiveness and success

There is no published information available online on the effectiveness and / or success of these regulations. These regulations are rather recent, published in 2021 in Switzerland, 2023 in the USA and 2024 in the Netherlands. The Dutch regulation, which mandates a hybrid heat pump as the standard for residential heating, will be implemented from 2026. (Dutch Ministry of the Interior and Kingdom Relations, 2023)

Table 3: Measures considering high cost of work in the home

Country

Name

Exemption

Impact and awareness

Netherlands

Hybrid heat pump standard

Homes where installing a hybrid heating system would require too costly adjustments to the home affecting the payback period are exempt from the standard. (Dutch Ministry of the Interior and Kingdom Relations, 2023)

No data published

Switzerland

Energy Act

Climate-neutral heating system is mandatory only if it is technically possible and if the costs over the entire lifetime are no more than 5% higher than a new oil or gas heating system.

No data published

USA

Building Code

None mentioned but ban on natural gas furnaces is to be implemented in 2027.

No data published

 

Other exemptions: alternative clean heating considerations, location, age of residents and household composition

Overview

Our research uncovered two examples of regulations where an exemption was granted if an alternative clean heating system was already being implemented. This approach effectively ties compliance obligations to geographic location, making them dependent on local infrastructure rather than individual choice. As a result, whether a homeowner needs to adhere to these mandates becomes a matter of personal circumstance dictated by their residence’s location, which is typically a fixed factor unless the homeowner decides to move. This geographic-based exemption recognises the contributions of existing local initiatives and reduces redundancy in regulatory compliance.

These examples are both in the Netherlands, where gas-fired heating appliances were banned from all newbuild construction in 2018 and all replacement heating systems will need to meet a specific level of efficiency as per the standard for heating appliances implemented from 2026. The standard for heating appliances is a de facto ban on gas-fired heating appliances with the only alternative being hybrid systems and heat pumps. The Dutch Government grants exemptions to the construction of a new build development when green gas is used in the local and existing gas infrastructure, and if there is no alternative heating system available. From 2026, the Dutch Government plans to grant exemptions to the heating appliance efficiency standard only when homes are connected, or plan to be connected in the near future, to another alternative to natural gas, such as a heat network, to avoid duplication of costs.

Our research also uncovered a unique example of a regulation in Germany mandating all new heating system installations to be at least 65% renewable, effectively mandating hybrid systems or heat pumps. In addition to subsidies and wide-ranging transition periods applying to the whole population, this regulation includes an exemption for owner-occupiers aged 80 or older occupying a building of up to six properties, for new installations or replacement. There is no published explanation of the reasoning behind this exemption, however we understand it is meant to avoid any unnecessary stress and disruption on elderly people.

Analysis of effectiveness and success

The Dutch efficiency standard will be implemented from 2026 and thus can’t be assessed yet. However, we believe that the Dutch public is aware of this regulation as it attracted significant attention in the press and general media when it was voted on. Similarly, whilst the German building act is one of the most advanced clean heating legislations in Europe, there isn’t enough time to measure its impact since it was implemented in January 2024. The Dutch Gas Act has been implemented since 2018 and is estimated to support 1.5 million existing homes to change their heat source by 2030 (Cole, 2021).

Table 4: Other exemptions

Country

Name

Exemption

Impact and awareness

Netherlands

Gaswet (Gas Act)

Alternatives – includes exemptions when there is no alternative available, or when green gas is used in existing gas infrastructure.

No data published.

Netherlands

Standard for heating appliances from 2026 (De facto ban of gas boilers)

Alternatives – includes exemptions when homes are connected to another alternative to natural gas in the short term (heat network).

No data published.

Germany

Gebaudesenergie-gesetz (Building Energy Act)

Age – includes exemptions for owner-occupiers over 80 years of age who occupy a building with up to six flats. This exemption also applies to the replacement of storey heating systems for flat owners over 80 years.

No data published.

 

Interview findings

The following sections provide an overview of the responses and comments from interviewees. Where similar responses have been made, information has been grouped together thematically where appropriate.

Country specific examples

Flanders are looking to introduce a decision tree of personal circumstances

One interviewee shared a proposed policy change that relates to the Energieprestatie legislation in Flanders (Propriétés Im mobilières (PIM), 2022). This regulation mandates that for all property sales from 2023 onwards, properties with an EPC of E or F must be renovated to a level D or better within five years of purchase. Failure to do so will result in a fine. However, the Flemish energy minister recently announced that people struggling to comply due to personal circumstances would not necessarily face a fine. The proposed solution is a decision tree that could include personal circumstances such as divorces, a death in the family or financial difficulties to determine whether it is reasonable that an owner occupier has not met the standard (Baert, 2024). The decision tree announcement has not yet been followed up by an official change to the regulation. Therefore, currently the requirement to meet the regulatory requirement applies to everyone.

The interviewee was asked to comment on potential parameters for the decision tree; they stressed that all comments are highly speculative. It is likely that the decision tree will be for an extension rather than exemption to the standard, such as allowing the owner occupier an additional five years. The government recognises the importance of homes all meeting the standard so it is unlikely that many people will be granted an extension. It is not yet clear how the Flemish government will define valid personal circumstances but losing a job is unlikely to qualify as there is funding available for those on low incomes. However, a terminal illness diagnosis or the death of a partner could potentially be considered valid.

British Columbia is not actively looking to include personal circumstances but do include other exemptions

British Columbia has some significant differences in terms of policy and housing heating systems. Exemptions only apply in cases where the physical house cannot accommodate the change, such as lack of floor space. The interviewee also stated that in emergency situations, such as a heating system breakdown, the government will not insist that the homeowner upgrades the system. In Vancouver, there is a regulation that mandates upgrades to low-carbon hot water heating systems. This regulation was described as ‘soft’ with minimal levels of enforcement for the first five years; the regulation comes into effect from 2024 (City of Vancouver, 2024). The expectation is that this will be tightened and more stringently enforced in the future, but the current focus is on early adopters. The interviewee recognised the potential benefit of including personal circumstances, particularly to allow extensions in emergency situations or for right to repair. However, there was also a concern that this would increase the administrative burden.

Additional findings from the interviews

Challenges getting people to make changes in their homes

Several interviewees commented on the challenge in getting both owner occupiers and landlords to make changes to their properties. One interviewee commented that smoke alarms are now obligatory in all properties in Scotland, but compliance has been challenging despite this being affordable and less invasive than some decarbonisation measures. There was an acknowledgement that some people will struggle to meet the standard and that this was valid, for example for elderly or disabled people, as associated disruption would be harder for these groups. Likely reasons for lack of engagement relate to a lack of trust and in some cases, insufficient funding or access to finance. It is vital that these barriers are addressed as a priority where possible, before introducing regulation that allows exemptions or extensions.

Concerns raised regarding including personal circumstances in regulation

Including personal circumstances could risk some residents being ‘left behind’ and missing out on the benefits of the energy transition due to decarbonisation measures not being completed. This could be due to a lack of financial support (or lack of awareness that this is available), lack of understanding of the benefits (such as a warmer home) or due to some stakeholders, such as landlords, using personal circumstances as a loophole to avoid undertaking work. This point was raised in several interviews. Several stakeholders stated that the priority should be engaging and supporting people to meet the decarbonisation standards as it will benefit them overall. In circumstances where the cost of doing the work is prohibitive more funding should be made available. One interviewee commented that if a person on a low income cannot stay in their home during the retrofit work, then the funding should also cover the cost of them temporarily staying somewhere else.

Personal circumstances may be a valid reason for not meeting the standard, but regulation is not necessarily the right tool

Several interviewees noted that vulnerable people, particularly elderly and disabled people, are often already known to social services and there is potential to rely on their assessment of someone’s personal circumstances as they are on the front line. In some countries, people are sometimes exempted from meeting energy efficiency regulation informally. In cases where someone has a terminal illness then a decision can be made on the ground not to enforce. The focus should be on making delivery work in practice and not just meeting the regulation. One interviewee commented that personal circumstances do not always fall under precise criteria, for example having no social support from friends or family may make someone more vulnerable but regulation will usually not include such criteria. Some retrofit programmes have not sufficiently considered how to work with socially diverse groups, which creates issues for delivery. Addressing this problem would support better delivery of regulations on the ground and lead to better overall outcomes, instead of focusing on top-down regulation.

Unclear how including personal circumstances would work in practice

There is a risk that including personal circumstances in regulations will be overly bureaucratic. There would need to be clarity on how people apply for exemption or extension and how personal circumstances are monitored to determine if they are still relevant. Personal circumstances can change quickly, so the regulations need to be able to respond dynamically in a way that is not restrictive. There is still a risk that things will become confusing and difficult to manage. There are already challenges with the current data levels on standards within the domestic sector that need to be improved to ensure an accurate picture on compliance. Improving the quality of the data would be necessary to manage any exemptions or extensions under personal circumstances. Additionally, there needs to be clarity on how to handle situations such as mixed tenancy blocks of flats where there may be different personal circumstances in each dwelling.

If personal circumstances are to be included in regulation this should be minimal

Three interviews highlighted that if personal circumstances were to be included, it should be cautiously. One stated that there could be a place for extensions but highlighted that there are still concerns related to managing this in practice. Another interviewee stated that any exemptions should be kept to a minimum as there was concern that this could be deliberately used to stop change. There is a risk that those with personal circumstances are assumed to be unable to act, which is not necessarily correct. Most people will be able to act and those that cannot, due to financial issues should be provided with support. Several interviewees stated that this should include appropriate levels of finance, including through banks and mortgages so people can make the necessary improvements to meet the standard.

Key findings: Personal circumstances in other decarbonisation regulations

In an effort to identify as many examples as possible of decarbonisation regulations including flexibility for personal circumstances, we widened the scope of our research to transport and housing-related decarbonisation regulations. A few cities across the UK have implemented is at the forefront of decarbonising individual transport in measures to reduce the number of polluting cars in city centres. The regulation sets a standard for vehicle emissions, and drivers need to pay a fee if their vehicle doesn’t meet the standard. London’s Ultra Low Emission Zone (ULEZ) has been extended in 2023 to cover all of London’s boroughs. (Transport for London, 2023) It provides exemptions for vehicles for disabled people, because they might not be able to use alternative transportation options. ULEZ regulation also provides for a fee reimbursement for National Health Service (NHS) patients driving to a point of care. The second example is a similar and more recent regulation in Edinburgh, which offers a few more exemptions for specific types of vehicles, including vehicles for people with disabilities as well as historic vehicles, showman’s vehicles, emergency and military vehicles. (Edinburgh Council, 2024)

Whilst these regulations provide examples of decarbonisation regulations including blanket exemptions, it is challenging to draw specific learnings for heating and energy efficiency decarbonisation, particularly as the exemptions included are tied to vehicle types.

Table 5: Personal circumstances in other decarbonisation regulation

Country

Name

Exemptions

Edinburgh, Scotland

Low Emission Zone

The following vehicles / drivers are exempt:

– vehicles for people with disabilities, including Blue Badge holders.

– historic vehicles

– showman’s vehicles

– emergency vehicles

– military vehicles

London, England

Ultra Low Emission Zone

The following vehicles / drivers are exempt:

– vehicles for disabled people.

– NHS patient reimbursement.

 

Conclusions

Key findings for regulation development

Income level

Most of the regulations identified in our research focused on addressing the impact of the energy transition on low-income households. Policymakers seem to be aware of the high costs of the transition and provide financial support under different forms, including grants, subsidies or low interest loans and tax deduction. The financial support is usually tied to specific energy efficiency objectives in the home, or the installation of a specific heating technology. Low-income households can get access to more funding to cover the incurred costs, up to 110% in Italy.

No financial support is provided to deal with the disruption resulting from the replacement of the heating system. The interviews identified this as an important gap in policy, as vulnerable people, particularly those with ongoing health conditions will likely need additional support, during work that is particularly disruptive.

High cost of work in the home

A few of the regulations identified in our research provided exemptions to owner-occupiers where the cost of installing a clean heating system was significantly higher than the cost of installing a fossil-fuelled heating system. Whilst these regulations consider the installation cost as well as the lifetime cost of the appliance, it remains challenging to assess the lifetime cost of a new appliance and without careful implementation and enforcement, there is a risk that this type of regulation could be exploited to justify the continued use of fossil-fuelled heating systems.

Other exemptions: alternative clean heating and age

A few of the regulations identified in our research provided exemptions from clean heat standards where homes had access to alternative clean heating technologies (e.g. heat networks) or when green gas is used in the gas network. Our research also found an example which exempted owner-occupiers over 80 years of age from replacing their heating system with a system that is at least 65% renewable, to avoid significant disruption.

Stakeholder opinions on the inclusion of personal circumstances

The interviewees primarily consisted of those who had never considered including personal circumstances within regulations or who were sceptical about how this would be beneficial. There were also questions raised regarding how effective this would be in helping vulnerable groups while balancing the needs of the energy transition. This included a lack of clarity regarding who the introduction of personal circumstances was intended to support and additional concerns regarding the process becoming overly bureaucratic. One interviewee noted that the potential disruption associated with installing decarbonisation upgrades could potentially be alleviated by providing temporary accommodation for vulnerable residents during the works.

Overall conclusion

Our overall research concluded that there are limited examples of regulations that include exemptions, extensions or abeyances based on personal circumstances. Our recommendation to the Scottish Government is that blanket exemptions are not suitable for this policy area as it risks excluding some members of society from the benefits of the energy transition. We found a limited number of regulatory examples that consider personal circumstances. This could be a suitable amendment to the regulation provided there is clarity on how exemptions would be managed over time and that does not become overly bureaucratic for residents.

We recommend that the Scottish Government continues to monitor the situation in Flanders, as new policy announcements may provide greater clarity on the proposed decision tree. We also recommend further consideration is given to the suggestion by one interviewee, to provide alternative accommodation for those on a low-income during upgrade works to their homes, which can be highly disruptive.

Priorities for further research activity

We have found that the Scottish Government appears to be considering the impact of upgrading residential home on vulnerable groups more than other countries. This is an important consideration to ensure the energy transition is fair and does not negatively affect vulnerable groups. However, should the Scottish Government seek to include personal circumstances within energy efficiency and clean heat regulations we recommend further research. This includes investigating more precisely which vulnerable groups are most likely to benefit from an exemption, extension or abeyance through stakeholder engagement. Additionally, greater clarity is required regarding what the needs of different vulnerable groups are to determine how the inclusion of personal circumstances within regulations would potentially benefit them. Finally, there is a need to identify the potential risks and possible negative unintended consequences associated with including personal circumstances before any policy amendments are made.

The introduction of personal circumstances has the potential to provide different levels of benefit for different groups that may struggle to meet the HiB Standard. There was significant discussion during the project, with interviewees, the Scottish Government and the project delivery team regarding who is most likely to benefit from the inclusion of personal circumstances in regulation. However, this was not the key focus of the research, so any conclusions regarding who is most likely to benefit is highly speculative. We have outlined our assumptions below, but these would require further research to be conclusive.

The three groups that could benefit from the inclusion of personal circumstances relate to the proposed trigger points for action from Scottish Government. These are outlined below:

  • New owner-occupied properties: One of the proposed trigger points to meet the standard is the point of sale of a property. The benefit of including personal circumstances is likely to be low for this group, as they have already encountered disruption when moving. The current proposal is to allow a grace period of 2-5 years for this trigger point; therefore, additional disruption associated with meeting the standard would likely be well tolerated. One interviewee commented that when some vulnerable people, particularly older people, move to a new property, they often move to sheltered or social housing rather than into a privately owned home. This would reduce the benefit of including personal circumstances as such housing is covered by separate legislation.
  • Tenants in the private rented sector: Another proposal is for landlords to meet the standard, regardless of the circumstances of their tenants. The potential benefit of including personal circumstances of tenants could be high, as vulnerable people in this group have less agency than those in owner-occupied properties. However, there is also a risk that by including personal circumstances, landlords may see this as a loophole to avoid making improvements on their property that would benefit their tenants. The uncertainty regarding the levels of disruption and potential unintended consequences for tenants would benefit from further research.
  • Opportunity to connect to a heat network: A final proposed trigger point is a new district heat network. Residents would not be obligated to connect but would be expected to adopt an alternative clean heating solution instead if they do not. The benefit of including personal circumstances for this group could also be high, as any community or neighbourhood that connects to a heat network is likely to be composed of a range of residents, including vulnerable people.

 

References

Baert, D. (2024, February 16). Those who are unable to comply with their obligation to renovate do not necessarily have to fear fines. Retrieved from VRT News: https://www.vrt.be/vrtnws/nl/2024/02/16/wie-renovatieplicht-niet-kan-nakomen-hoeft-niet-noodzakelijk-ee/

Balmer, C., & Fonte, G. (2024, April 9). Explainer: Why Italy’s Superbonus blew a hole in state accounts. Reuters, p. Published online. Retrieved from https://www.reuters.com/world/europe/why-italys-superbonus-blew-hole-state-accounts-2024-04-09/

Carole-Anne Cornet. (2024, Mars 22). MaPrimeRenov’: montants, conditions 2024, travaux … Tout savoir. Retrieved from MoneyVox: https://www.moneyvox.fr/immobilier/maprimerenov.php

City of Vancouver. (2022, January). Zoning amendments to support the Climate Emergency Response. Retrieved from City of Vancouver: https://vancouver.ca/green-vancouver/zoning-amendments-to-support-climate-emergency.aspx

City of Vancouver. (2024, April). Domestic hot water: improving the efficiency hot water heaters at home. Retrieved from https://syc.vancouver.ca/projects/hot-water-at-home/improving-hot-water-heaters-efficiency-at-home-english.pdf

Cole, L. (2021, October 27). How the Netherlands is turning its back on natural gas. Retrieved from BBC: https://www.bbc.com/future/article/20211025-netherlands-the-end-of-europes-largest-gas-field

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero. (2023, March 30). Household Energy Efficiency, Statistical Realease, Great Britian, Data to December 2022. Retrieved from GOV.UK: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/64230bbd3d885d000cdadd20/HEE_Stats_Detailed_Release_-_Mar_23.pdf

Dutch Ministry of the Interior and Kingdom Relations. (2023, May 01). Heat pump the norm from 2026: good for the climate and energy bills. Retrieved from Government of the Netherlands: https://www.rijksoverheid.nl/onderwerpen/energie-thuis/nieuws/2023/05/01/warmtepomp-de-norm-vanaf-2026-goed-voor-klimaat-en-de-energierekening

Dutch Ministry of the Interior and Kingdom Relations. (2023). Heat pump to heat many homes and other buildings from 2026. Retrieved from Government of the Netherlands: https://www.rijksoverheid.nl/onderwerpen/energie-thuis/warmtepomp

Edinburgh Council. (2024). Low Emission Zones (LEZ) exemptions. Retrieved from The City of Edinburgh Council: https://www.edinburgh.gov.uk/low-emission-zone/lez-exemptions#:~:text=Low%20Emission%20Zones%20%28LEZ%29%20exemptions%201%20Blue%20Badge,4%20Emergency%20vehicles%20…%205%20Military%20vehicles%20

Energy Systems Catapult (ESC). (2024, May). Electrification of Heat – Home Surveys and Install Report. Retrieved from https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/electrification-of-heat-home-surveys-and-install-report/

LCP Delta. (2023, June). International heat and energy efficiency policy review. Retrieved from https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/projects/international-heat-and-energy-efficiency-policy-review/

Lips, M., & Frei, E. (2021, December 6). Zurich voters approve new rules for effective climate protection in building sector. Retrieved from International Law Office: https://pestalozzilaw.com/media/publications/documents/ILO_Switzerland_Environment_Climate_Change_December_2021.PDF#:~:text=climate-neutral%20heating%20system%20is%20mandatory%20only%20if%20it,than%20a%20new%20oil%20or%20gas%20heating%20system.

Ministere de la Transition Ecologique. (2024, April 10). 5 EME PERIODE DES CEE, 2022-2025: Rapport annuel. Retrieved from Dispositif des Certificats d’économies d’énergie: https://www.ecologie.gouv.fr/dispositif-des-certificats-deconomies-denergie

Ministry of Climate and Environment. (2022, January 24). New part of the „Clean Air” programme – support of up to PLN 69 thousand. Retrieved from GOV.PL: https://www.gov.pl/web/climate/new-part-of-the-clean-air-programme–support-of-up-to-pln-69-thousand

Nationaal Warmtefonds. (2024). About the National Heat Fund. Retrieved from Nationaal Warmtefonds: https://www.warmtefonds.nl/over-ons

Nationaal Warmtefonds. (2024). Warmtefonds. Retrieved April 22, 2024, from https://www.warmtefonds.nl/

Propriétés Im mobilières (PIM). (2022, October). “Energieprestatie” (EPB): Flanders imposes work on buyers from 1 January 2023. Retrieved from https://www.pim.be/energieprestatie-epb-la-flandre-impose-des-travaux-aux-acheteurs-a-compter-du-1er-janvier-2023/

Republique Francaise. (2024). France Rénov’ : le bon réflexe pour rénover son logement. Retrieved April 22, 2024, from France Rénov’: https://france-renov.gouv.fr/

Scottish Government. (2021, October). Heat in Buildings Strategy – achieving net zero emissions in Scotland’s buildings. Retrieved from https://www.gov.scot/publications/heat-buildings-strategy-achieving-net-zero-emissions-scotlands-buildings/

Scottish Government. (2023, November). Delivering Net Zero for Scotland’s Buildings – Changing the way we heat our homes and buildings. A consultation on progress for a Heat in Buildings Bill. Retrieved from https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/consultation-paper/2023/11/delivering-net-zero-scotlands-buildings-consultation-proposals-heat-buildings-bill/documents/delivering-net-zero-scotlands-buildings-consultation-proposals-hea

Scottish Government. (2024, February). Scottish House Condition Survey: 2022 Key Findings. Retrieved from https://www.gov.scot/publications/scottish-house-condition-survey-2022-key-findings/pages/2-energy-efficiency/

Statista. (2023, October). Cumulative number of energy efficiency projects applying for the superbonus in Italy from August 2021 to August 2023. Retrieved from Statista: https://www.statista.com/statistics/1417675/number-of-superbonus-energy-efficiency-projects-in-italy/#:~:text=By%20August%202023%2C%20the%20cumulative%20number%20of%20energy,superbonus%20program%20since%20its%20creation%20in%20July%202020.

Transport for London. (2023). Discounts and exemptions. Retrieved from Transport for London – Ultra Low Emission Zone: https://tfl.gov.uk/modes/driving/ultra-low-emission-zone/discounts-and-exemptions

Weiser, S. (2023, February 27). Denver imposes natural gas ban on heating, cooling equipment in commercial buildings, multi-family housing. Retrieved from The Denver Gazette: https://denvergazette.com/news/business/denver-imposes-natural-gas-ban-on-heating-cooling-equipment-in-commercial-buildings-multi-family-housing/article_e8a5352c-b6f1-11ed-b6f5-2bbe6c6ff924.html

Appendix

The full list of criteria collected for each regulation and included in database:

  • Country / Region where the policy is in force
  • Type of regulation such as a national strategy, subsidy, standard, tax, etc
  • Level of governance: municipal, regional or national
  • Implementing body within relevant country
  • Topic area: energy efficiency, clean heat or both of these or transport
  • Name of regulation/policy
  • Date first introduced
  • Regulation objective
  • Regulation description
  • Personal circumstances provision in the regulation
  • Support available – Financial
  • Support available – abeyances or exemptions
  • Redress options available
  • Criteria used for assessment
  • Link to the regulation
  • Link to relevant case study (if available)

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by LCP Delta on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

February 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4856

Executive summary

The 2023/2024 consultation on the Heat in Buildings (HiB) Bill proposed standards covering heating and energy efficiency that all existing buildings will be required to meet. This report explores the data sources that could be used in future to develop a digital compliance monitoring system for those standards. The standards require:

  1. In all buildings, including non-domestic premises: non-polluting heating from 2045.
  2. In owner occupied homes: a minimum energy efficiency standard by the end of 2033.
  3. In privately rented homes: a minimum energy efficiency standard by the end of 2028.
  4. Those purchasing a property to comply with the prohibition on polluting heating within a specified amount of time following completion of the sale.
  5. Providing local authorities and the Scottish Ministers with powers to require buildings within a Heat Network Zone to end their use of polluting heating systems by a certain date and with a minimum notice period.

Compliance with the standards can be met through:

  1. The presence of a clean heating system, including connection to a heat network.
  2. Meeting the energy efficiency standard through either installing a list of measures or meeting a fabric energy efficiency rating of 120kWh/m2/year or less.

Compliance with the standard creates a need to check on the progress of Scotland’s buildings. This may require a dedicated system. Through desk-based investigation and stakeholder interviews, we identified public and private repositories of information regarding buildings, which could be used to carry out compliance monitoring for domestic and non-domestic properties.

Findings

We found no digital dataset (or database comprising various datasets) that combines data relevant to the HiB Standard that is highly accurate and with full coverage of all buildings in Scotland. For instance, only 55% of Scottish domestic dwellings have an assessed EPC created following a domestic energy assessment, as opposed to a prediction based on similar nearby properties. As a result, no existing dataset could readily be used for compliance monitoring.

Ultimately, reliable digital compliance monitoring can only be achieved with a high degree of accuracy of the data being inserted and coverage across the whole built environment in Scotland. Our findings include observations around the role of data governance, property identification, professionals and professional indemnity insurance, data consistency, archetype approaches, and data sharing.

Conclusions

We suggest that an optimal digital solution in terms of coverage and accuracy could be achieved in the near term by combining data from different sources and enriching it with new data. We identify below which datasets are relevant to various aspects of the Standard. This review is on the basis that current update points for EPCs remain the same and that the process is able to adapt and update sufficiently quickly to the new clean heating systems coming onto the market.

Aspect of compliance

Data source

Gap analysis

Heat network zone presence

  • Scotland Heat Map
  • Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES) Heat Network Zones would need to be uploaded to the map by local authorities or the Scottish Government.

Clean heating system

  • EPCs and underlying EPC data
  • There is a delay of weeks/months between system installation and databases being updated.
  • EPC data in Home Analytics & Non Domestic Analytics is predicted rather than observed for 45% of domestic properties.
  • EPC data is uneven in accuracy.

Various energy efficiency measures applied to building fabric or services controls

  • EPC data
  • PAS2035 data warehouse
  • Single survey
  • Digital building logbook/ passports
  • 5-yearly tenement inspections
  • As above regarding EPC data.
  • PAS2035 is seldom used in Scotland, so the dataset has low coverage.
  • Single Survey data is held privately.
  • Digital building logbooks/passport data is held privately.
  • 5-yearly tenement inspections are not yet mandated by legislation, and it is unclear if they will be digital first.

Fabric based heating demand of 120kWh/m2/year or less

  • EPCs
  • EPC data
  • As above regarding EPC data.
  • Uncertain future of the EPC methodology.

Table 1 Existing datasets that could be used to measure compliance

Considering the above, the following options may be considered by the Scottish Government for the establishment of a compliance and monitoring tool. Each option has advantages and drawbacks as well as a set of actions required to enable successful implementation.

Option 1: Use existing data sources in their current locations

  • Option 1a: Homeowner reporting into existing locations – 3 to 6 months to develop
  1. Homeowners are required to self-report into these locations and upload evidence. Government looks individually at these data sources.
  2. The responsibility to demonstrate compliance rests with the homeowner, who must generate, gather and upload the relevant information to the data sources to demonstrate compliance to the government.
  • Option 1b: Professional reporting into existing locations (status quo)
    • Government looks individually at these data sources, which can only be updated by professionals.
    • The responsibility to demonstrate compliance rests with the homeowner, who must pay for generating, gathering and uploading the relevant information to the data sources to demonstrate compliance to the government.

Option 2: Professional reporting from linked databases – 3 to 6 months to develop

  1. Data sources listed above remain in their current locations.
  2. Government looks at a single portal, which in turn looks at existing sources that can only be updated by professionals.
  3. The responsibility to assess compliance rests with the government and the responsibility to demonstrate compliance rests with homeowners or their professional consultants. The government creates a means of collating the data on a per-property basis via a new portal.

Option 3: Professional reporting into a new central database – 12 to 18 months to develop

  1. Data is moved from existing data sources to a new government-managed platform.
  2. Government manages a combined dataset that can only be updated by professionals.
  3. The responsibility to assess compliance rests with the government, and the responsibility to demonstrate compliance rests with homeowners or their professional consultants. The government creates a means of collating the data on a per property basis on this new platform.

Opportunities

We highlight an opportunity for Scotland to develop a comprehensive central database looking at many aspects related to buildings and property, including building materials, fabric condition, and energy use. While this is out of scope of this project, such a database could bring many benefits, such as increased building safety, simpler conveyancing, smoother statutory consent processes, fewer vacant homes, improved building condition, and more resilient property value. The EU and various member states are legislating on the introduction of property logbooks (also called “green building passports”) to constitute such datasets from the ground up, starting at property level. The list of database tools provided by the private sector in our study is testament to the market’s confidence in their potential to positively impact comfort, affordability, and the environment through the provision of digital logbooks.

Glossary of terms and abbreviations

DEA

Domestic Energy Assessors

EPC

Energy Performance Certificate

EPC Data

The information gathered by a Domestic energy Assessor during a survey which is entered into RdSAP to produce an EPC.

EST

Energy Savings Trust

HiBS

Heat in Building Strategy October 2021.

HiB Bill

Proposals for a Bill by the Scottish Government – the consultation has now closed.

HA

Home Analytics. A database relating only to domestic properties founded on EPC Data and augmented using assumptions and algorithms. Core or foundational to several other databases reviewed.

LHEES

Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategy

MCS

The Microgeneration Certification Scheme Service (MSC) creates and maintains standards that allow for the certification of products, installers and their installations where those products produce electricity and heat from renewable sources.

MPRN

Meter Point Reference Number. This is the number that is used to identify the gas service at each property, meaning there is a unique MPRN for every single gas service in every building.

PAS2035

A UK Government standard for domestic retrofit. It sets out the management and coordination of the process, rather than the technical standards required.

PII

Professional Indemnity Insurance

Professional

A consultant with recognised training, qualifications, PII, and code of ethics giving them an obligation to protect the public.

QA

Quality Assurance. The maintenance of a desired level of quality in a service or product, especially by means of attention to every stage of the process of delivery or production.

RdSAP

Reduced Data Standard Assessment Procedure. Software which models the energy efficiency of domestic premises. A simplified version of SAP.

RICS

Royal Institute of Chartered Surveyors.

RLBA

The Residential Logbook Association (RLBA) is the DLUCH supported trade association and self-regulatory body for companies providing digital logbooks for the residential property market.

SG

Scottish Government

SAP

Standard Assessment Procedure. A software tool for modelling the energy performance of buildings.

UPRN

Unique Property Reference Number.

 

Background and context

Introduction

Following the Scottish Government’s Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019, new strategies and policies have been published to provide a framework for reducing the emissions from our homes and buildings. One such key document is the ‘Heat in Buildings Strategy’, which aims to support the decarbonisation and retrofitting of existing buildings. Further to the Strategy, a consultation ran between November 2023 and March 2024 with proposals for a Heat in Buildings (HiB) Bill, designed to provide new regulations for the improvement of energy efficiency and transition to clean heating systems in homes and buildings in Scotland. At local authority level, Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES) and Delivery Plans have been published to identify opportunities and target funding for decarbonised heat at local council level.

The Scottish Government wishes to explore a digital system to monitor compliance of existing buildings with the upcoming Heat in Buildings Standard to be established by the proposed Bill. This paper reviews existing digital data sources that the Scottish Government could draw on in developing a future monitoring regime.

Data in property and construction

The real estate industry started to adopt digital technology, such as spreadsheets and accounting software, throughout the 1980s as personal computing became more common (Reed, 2021). At the same time, it became possible to model building performance using computers, leading the Building Research Establishment (BRE) to develop the Standard Assessment Procedure for the Energy Rating of Dwellings (SAP), based on the BRE Domestic Energy Model (BREDEM) and published by BRE and the Department of the Environment in 1992. It has now been adopted by the UK Government and Scottish Government as the official methodology for calculating the energy performance of dwellings (Scottish Government, 2023).

This approach was drawn into international environmental legislation through the European Union’s Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD), first enacted in 2002, and updated in 2010, 2012, 2018 and 2024. This Directive called for standard assessment procedures to analyse the energy performance of buildings, standard data inputs and outputs, and a means of communicating the findings of this process to the public through what became Energy Performance Certificates (EPCs). EPCs use building energy models to communicate modelled energy efficiency in buildings, from bands A (highest energy efficiency) to band G (lowest energy efficiency). Given the varying definitions of ‘energy efficiency’, these bands have changed over the years.

Heat in Buildings (HiB) Strategy (2021)

The HiB Strategy, published by the Scottish Government in October 2021 “provides an update to the 2018 Energy Efficient Scotland Route Map and the 2015 Heat Policy Statement, and brings together [Scottish Government’s] ambitions on energy efficiency and heat decarbonisation into a single framework.” It calls for all owner-occupied homes to reach EPC C by 2033 and all private rented homes by 2028, although it acknowledges that the more difficult homes in mixed tenure or mixed ownership blocks, and non-domestic premises, may take until 2045 to achieve it. Public Buildings should have zero emission heating sources as soon as possible, with a backstop of 2038.

The Strategy further acknowledges challenges around these targets, suggesting that “where it is not technically feasible or cost-effective to achieve the equivalent to EPC C rating, (…) a minimum level of fabric energy performance through improvement to walls, roof, floor and windows, as recommended in the EPC, would apply.”

Heat in Buildings Bill consultation

In December 2023 the Scottish Government published a consultation (Scottish Government, 2023) on the proposed Heat in Buildings Bill.

The consultation included the following proposals:

  1. Prohibit the use of polluting heating systems after 2045 across all buildings.
  2. Require those purchasing a home or business premises to end their use of polluting heating systems within a fixed period following completion of the sale.
  3. Require homeowners to make sure that their homes meet a reasonable minimum energy efficiency standard by 2033 only where no clean heating system has been installed.
  4. Require private landlords to meet this minimum energy efficiency standard by 2028 regardless of whether a clean heating system has been installed.
  5. Require property owners to connect to a Heat Network when it comes available, or change to another form of clean-heating of their choice

We consider the elements below, present in the consultation, to be of particular relevance to the data requirements for a compliance system.

Section 2 states:

“We propose to set a minimum energy efficiency standard that can be met by installing a straightforward list of measures. This list of measures would be developed to prioritise those that could have the most impact for homes with the lowest amount of cost and disruption. Any homeowner who had installed these measures – or as many of them as are feasible for the type of home they live in – would be considered to have reached a good level of energy efficiency and meet the new standard.

We think this list could be:

  • loft insulation
  • cavity wall insulation
  • draught-proofing
  • heating controls
  • 80 mm hot water cylinder insulation
  • suspended floor insulation”

“Alongside this straightforward list of measures, we propose an alternative option of meeting the standard based on the result of an EPC assessment. We have recently consulted on the addition of a new fabric efficiency metric to EPCs, which could be used to show that a property meets a good level of energy efficiency.”

“Owner occupied homes that have ended their use of polluting heating by 2033 will not be required to meet the minimum energy efficiency standard.”

“Private rented properties would still be required to meet the minimum energy efficiency standard, however, even if a clean heating system had already been installed.”

“We are not proposing to set a minimum energy efficiency standard for non-domestic buildings.”

“While we are also not proposing to apply this Heat in Buildings Standard to the social rented sector, the sector will still be on the same pathway.”

Section 4 states:

“We are proposing that any buildings within a Heat Network Zone will not need to meet the Heat in Buildings Standard following a property purchase.”

Section 5 states:

“This consultation has described five points in time at which we may be asked to meet the Heat in Buildings Standard:

  1. at the end of a grace period which follows the completion of a property purchase;
  2. following notice from a local authority to a building owner in a Heat Network Zone that they are required to end their use of polluting heating;
  3. at the end of 2028, private landlords will need to have met the minimum energy efficiency standard;
  4. at the end of 2033, owner occupiers will need to have met the minimum energy efficiency standard; and
  5. at the end of 2045, all building owners will need to have ended their use of polluting heating.”

A definition of HiB Standard compliance

We used a definition of HiB Standard compliance against which to compare existing digital datasets, databases, and tools.

  1. Presence of a clean heating system i.e., a heating system which does not emit CO2 at point of use.
    1. This includes connection to a Heat Network.
    2. Being in a heat network zone means that the property does not need to meet the Heat in Buildings Standard following a property purchase.
  2. Installing a list of measures (alterations to the building) or meeting a fabric-based heating demand of 120kWh/m2/year or less (as modelled by approved software).

The opportunity for Scotland

Scotland’s differentiated legislative, regulatory and policy regime affords it the opportunity to determine its own approach with regards to energy and heat in buildings, though with certain limitations around control over the gas grid or product standards. Furthermore, the Scottish building stock is different to the wider U.K. stock, calling for a specific approach. More people live in flats (National Records of Scotland, 2023), (Office for National Statistics, 2023), construction is of a lower quality generally (BRE Trust, 2020), it has a larger social housing sector (Serin, et al., 2018), and the climate is more challenging. Furthermore, traditional tenements, post-war non-traditional construction, and the greater prevalence of timber kit construction in the late 20th century (PBC Today, 2022) are all unique features of the Scottish building stock.

The gap between the current state of Scottish housing and the expectations set by the HiB Bill will stimulate economic activity. This positions retrofit as a key area of potential growth in the labour market.

 

Mapping the current situation

Buildings

The HiB Strategy (Scottish Government, 2021) and Scottish House Condition Survey (Scottish Government) contain statistics about the built environment and the people and communities living in them.

  1. The total domestic building stock in Scotland comprises around 2.7m homes.
  2. Following their introduction in 2009, as of 2023 around 1.5 million domestic EPCs currently exist (55% of the building stock).
  3. Following their introduction in 2009, as of 2023 around 49,000 non-domestic EPCs currently exist (25% of the building stock).
  4. In 2022-2023 there were 101,055 residential property sales in Scotland (Registers of Scotland, 2023), leading to as many updates to the EPC register.

Building data holders

We drew up a list of organisations known to be maintaining databases associated with the built environment. Other organisations were added upon suggestion by interviewees.

All organisations were contacted via email with a letter of introduction from the Scottish Government about the research study. A series of standard questions were posed, which are listed in Appendix A.

The array of different datasets and tools for buildings and energy data included within this study can be categorised as follows:

  1. Public databases – owned, funded or managed on behalf of the government.
  2. Public data analysis tools – owned, funded or managed on behalf of the government.
  3. Private datasets and analysis tools – owned and funded by third parties.

A summary of all databases contacted as part of this study is provided in Annex A. The following tables summarise the findings. Where “-” is used, there was no comment given in the interview relating to this category.

Public databases only

Organisation

Name/Title

Geography

Coverage

HiB compliance data (EPC data and/or presence of measures)

Contains data about energy?

Data ownership

Registers of Scotland

Sasine Register

Scotland

Domestic

NO

NO

Registers of Scotland

Energy Saving Trust

EPC Register

Scotland

Domestic

Non-domestic

YES

YES

Scot Govt

National Records of Scotland

Valuation Database

Scotland

Domestic

NO

NO

National Records of Scotland

Scottish Government

Scottish House Condition Survey

Scotland

Domestic

YES

YES

Scot Govt

Registers of Scotland

Scotlis

Scotland

Domestic

Non-domestic

NO

NO

Registers of Scotland

BE-ST

Scottish Construction Industry Data Dashboard

Scotland

Industry

NO

NO

Public

Scottish Government

Improvement Service

Scotland

Domestic

Non-domestic

YES

YES

Scot Govt; Local Authorities

Table 2 Summary of information in public databases

Detailed commentary on each is in Appendix B.

Public databases with data analysis tool

Organisation

Name/Title

Geography

Coverage

HiB compliance data (EPC data and/or measures)

Contains data about energy?

Data ownership

Scottish Government

Scotland Heat Map

Scotland

Domestic

Non-domestic

YES

YES

Scot Govt

Scottish Energy Officers Network

Public Sector Benchmarking

Scotland

Public Buildings

NO

YES

Scot Govt

Energy Savings Trust

Home Analytics

Scotland

Domestic

YES

YES

Scot Govt

Energy Savings Trust

Non-Domestic Analytics

Scotland

Non-domestic

YES

YES

Scot Govt

IRT Surveys

DREam

U.K.

Domestic

YES

YES

Local Authorities

National Grid ESO

National Grid ESO

U.K.

All

NO

YES

National Grid

DESNZ

National Household Model

U.K.

Domestic

NO

YES

UK Govt

Table 3 Summary of information in public databases with data analysis tools

Detailed commentary on each is in Appendix C.

 

Private database or data analysis tool

Organisation

Name/Title

Geography

Coverage

HiB compliance data (EPC data and/or measures)

Contains data about energy?

Data ownership

Kuppa

Kuppa

U.K.

Domestic

YES

Zoopla

Zoopla

U.K.

Domestic

YES

RoomAgree Ltd

Shedyt

England

Domestic

YES

Developer

The National Deeds Depository

The Property Logbook Company

U.K.

Domestic

NO

YES

Homeowner

Shepherds

Single Survey

Scotland

Domestic

YES

NO

Surveyor

PropEco

PropEco

U.K.

Domestic

YES

YES

Mixed

Chimni

Chimni

U.K.

Domestic

YES

YES

Homeowner

Kamma Data

Kamma Data

U.K.

Domestic

YES

Mixed

Novoville

Shared Works

U.K.

Domestic

YES

YES

Mixed

Kestrix

Kestrix

U.K.

Domestic

NO

YES

Developer

Trustmark

PAS2035 Data Warehouse

U.K.

Domestic

YES

YES

Trustmark

Parity Projects

Portfolio / Pathway

U.K.

Domestic

YES

YES

Developer

Table 4 Summary of private databases or data analysis tools

Detailed commentary on each is in Appendix D.

Information required for HiB monitoring

The compliance criteria noted in section 3.5 are cross-referenced below with the datasets and tools reviewed in Table 5.

We haven’t distinguished between data which is assumed, predicted, observed, or modelled. See Section 5 below for commentary on this distinction. The databases are primarily split into two categories:

  1. Those which contain EPC data (beyond the EPC band).
  2. This includes data about all elements of the building.
  3. EPC data is the basis of “Home Analytics”
  4. Home Analytics is itself the basis of several other databases (see Appendices B, C and D for details)
  5. Those that don’t contain EPC data beyond the EPC band.

The only public data set with data of a higher quality on the individual building elements than the EPC data is the Scottish House Condition Survey (SHCS). The SHCS data is based on a small sample set of the housing stock and then extrapolated over the whole stock to generate the associated report. This level of quality and accuracy is also present in “Single Survey” data, which is present for a much larger percentage of the stock, though this is held privately at present.

One of the few databases which provide centralised and accessible information about Heat Network Zones is the Scotland Heat Map, providing that Local Authority LHEES data has been uploaded to it.

Organisation

Name/title

EPC band

EPC data

Heat network

zone

Roof insulation

Floor insulation

Windows

Air leakage

Controls

Hot water generation

Clean heating system

Registers of Scotland

Sasine Register

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Energy Saving Trust

EPC Register

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

National Records of Scotland

Valuation Database

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Scottish Government

Scottish House Condition Survey

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

Registers of Scotland

Scotlis

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Scottish Government

Improvement Service

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Scottish Energy Officers Network

Public Sector Benchmarking

NO

?

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Energy Savings Trust

Home Analytics

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Energy Savings Trust

Non-Domestic Analytics

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

IRT Surveys

DREam

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

National Grid ESO

National Grid ESO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Scottish Government

Scotland Heat Map

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

DESNZ

National Household Model

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Trustmark

PAS2035 Data Warehouse

YES

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Table 5 Databases cross-referenced with HiB compliance criteria

Data sharing and transferability

Data is held by various organisations in a mix of structured and unstructured databases. Some of them are publicly or privately accessible via APIs. Some of them require the export of data in usual formats (CSV or XLS). Some of them do not have any built-in connections, but this could be created on demand. More problematic is the lack of a common framework for what the data means, different ownership of data, the lack of data sharing agreements, and the rights that individuals and organisations have to make it available to others.

While SAP (upon which the EPCs are based) provides a useful definition and structure for each element it looks at, enabling comparisons across buildings, this is not an exhaustive way of looking at and analysing buildings. These gaps, and the lack of a common standard, are quickly filled by other assessment methods created by trade bodies or organisations for their own purposes, which results in a fragmented, hardly interoperable, and ultimately unactionable data universe. For instance, while SAP determines floor area in a certain way, Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (RICS) determines it differently. While RICS or RIAS leave it up to Chartered Professionals to prioritise fabric interventions, SAP provides a proscriptive way. While PAS2035 provides a specific list of possible interventions, these are not used across the board in all retrofit assessment software available.

In short, there is no commonly agreed way of fully describing the characteristics, condition, and work required of all buildings. Work is underway in the private sector to address some of these gaps and differences. For instance, we are aware that a study group within the National Retrofit Hub is working on creating a data scheme suitable for domestic properties. Such a scheme could then be adopted by Residential Logbook Association (RLBA) members to standardise the way in which data is recorded and presented in their platforms. This work could further be integrated into the emerging Property Data Trust Framework being developed by the Open Property Data Association in order to standardise access to various data points. As a whole, this work could provide a standard for the description of buildings, increase interoperability of platforms and databases, and pave the way for faster rollout of retrofit measures. There is also currently a small project being funded by BE-ST to investigate the opportunity of a national buildings ‘domestic’ database.

Before data can truly be transferable, however, other issues need to be considered as part of this work. These include data ownership and data sharing consent mechanisms. For instance, some of the data which a homeowner could make use of in order to plan retrofit, such as Home Analytics, belongs to the Scottish Government, is held by the Energy Saving Trust and can only be accessed by request from local authorities or registered social landlords, but not homeowners. This creates a barrier to access information which ultimately relates to the property in the ownership of the person trying to access it. Similarly, Trustmark logs information covering all past government-funded interventions, but this information isn’t readily accessible to the homeowners. Access to this would allow homeowners to have precise and up to date information of their property’s heat and energy installations, and the potential for further work. For consumer access to such information to be possible, such as through the medium of a property logbook (also called “green building passport”), a trusted means of verifying the identity of the person requesting the data needs to be agreed upon by all parties.

Particular attention should be paid to the data ownership and sharing provisions of data held by third-parties on behalf of the government. The study team recognises the commercial incentives that organisations holding data on behalf of the government have to restrict, and in some cases charge for, access to data which is in public (government) ownership. A review of the government’s data sharing agreements with third-party organisations holding data on its behalf could be conducted to ensure that:

  1. publicly-owned data can be made available to appropriate persons and organisations (such as the householder or their consultants);
  2. publicly-owned data is not privatised;
  3. only modelled data derived from third party organisations’ own investment and Intellectual Property can be commercialised.

Summary of existing energy & building data landscape

Our review showed that there is no single existing source of data which could readily be used as a compliance and monitoring tool for the Scottish Government for the aspects of building construction and performance set out in the HiB Bill consultation. The existing data landscape described above is patchy in its coverage, with even the most comprehensive data set (Domestic EPCs) covering just over 50% of the stock to which it applies[1]. Some databases, such as EPCs, have the potential to contribute an important proportion of the data required. However, they suffer from issues which preclude their wholesale adoption for the purpose of compliance and monitoring.

Furthermore, while the structure of EPC data is consistent, there are variations in the structure, unit of measurement and phraseology of the other data points gathered, held, and processed in other databases which could all be complimentary if this issue were resolved.

Two of the databases listed above – the Scotland Heat Map and the National Grid – bring together complementary datasets to provide a more holistic picture of the decarbonisation potential of building heat sources, but it is hard to use them for HiB compliance as they present data for groups of buildings, rather than individual buildings.

In conclusion, any solution for the monitoring and tracking of the HiB compliance will have to draw on several datasets and be enriched with additional data to close gaps where modelled/assumed data is currently relied upon.

Observations

The following section contains our more detailed observations of the datasets outlined in summary above in more detail with commentary arranged by topic.

Indexing

Accessing information about a given property across multiple databases would require searching indexed data according to a single unique identifier for the property.

There are several ways in which properties in the UK have been identified. These include Property Title numbers, Unique Property Reference Numbers (UPRN), Meter Point Reference Numbers (MPRN), and Postal Addresses. Unfortunately, these aren’t immediately usable: Property Titles can relate to more than one dwelling, UPRNs aren’t present for every building in the UK, MPRNs can relate to multiple properties at once, and Postal Addresses have multiple formats. A breakdown of the strengths and drawbacks of various identifiers is in Appendix E.

Heat network zones

The HiB Bill consultation refers to the Local Heat and Energy Efficiency Strategies (LHEES) published by each Local Authority. Each LHEES identifies potential Heat Network Zones, areas where a heat network appears to be viable. LHEES are to be updated every 5 years. The second round of LHEES will take into account designated heat network zones. Some LHEES data on Heat Network Zones is being uploaded to the Scottish Heat Map. The Scottish Government will update the Heat Map data and Local Authorities will report any inaccuracies/ ad hoc updates, making use of the Heat Map’s GIS framework to make them interactive and usable.

Given the high priority the HiB Bill consultation gives Heat Network Zones, knowing whether a property is in a Zone or not is a key piece of information for compliance monitoring. Having all LHEES potential heat network zone data and designated Heat Network Zone data digitised and accessible would provide a key plank of the SG monitoring and compliance framework. Potential zone data isn’t vital for compliance – but could help to communicate where zones might soon be.

EPCs, RdSAP, Home Analytics

Domestic buildings must have an Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) created on construction, sale, or lease (or marketing thereof). An EPC must be created through an approved modelling methodology called SAP, or RdSAP in its simplified version. The certificate must be lodged on a public register, which in Scotland is administered on behalf of the Scottish Government by the Energy Saving Trust (EST).

The base data that is collected and used for creating EPCs (EPC data) is collated and owned by the Scottish Government. This data is then enriched with socio-economic and spatial indicators, such as Local Authority Ward, topographical information, Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation, and other indicators to create a data set called “Home Analytics” (HA). Predictive modelling is then used to:

  • Close the gaps: of the 2.7m homes in Scotland, only around 1.5m of them have EPCs. To get a Scotland-wide picture, HA predicts EPCs using the EPCs of nearby properties.
  • Identify decarbonisation opportunities. By looking at several other simple datasets (e.g., orientation, typology, nearby land) it can suggest measures which might be viable for each property (such as the installation of a wind turbine, or solar panels).

Where data has been assumed, or predicted based on an algorithm, confidence ratings applied to show that these data points were not produced via observation by an energy assessor. 100% confidence is given to original information, and lower ratings for derivative or modelled information. Home Analytics is available to public sector organisations and their subcontractors for specific projects.

Due in part to difficulties in accessing the Home Analytics dataset, many of the organisations we spoke to have constructed their own database based on the public EPC register, augmented by combining with various other data sources to generate more informed conclusions about either the country-wide picture, or smaller zones of stock.

Non-domestic analytics

Non-domestic buildings also must have an EPC on construction, sale or lease, or marketing thereof. SBEM or an approved Dynamic Simulation Model (DSM) can be used to produce the EPCs. In the same way as domestic EPCs, the input and output data is owned by the Scottish Government and is managed by EST. Our research did not extend into the non-domestic analytics database. However, from discussion with interviewees the study team were informed that the non-domestic analytics database contains less observed data, and more modelling than HA (due to bigger variance in non-domestic buildings).

Public Buildings Standards

Having spoken to several key managers within the public building portfolios sector, we found that the energy performance data held by the public sector about their buildings is variable and incomplete.

Scottish Futures Trust (an executive non-departmental public body of the Scottish Government, established to improve public infrastructure investment) are now onto the second revision of their Net Zero Public Buildings Standard, which “helps public bodies define objectives for their new or retrofit construction project in pursuit of a credible path to net zero operational energy”.

As noted above, HiB notes the target for public buildings is to have clean heating systems first and foremost, with achieving a broader level of energy efficiency a further implicit means of improving the efficiency of said heating system. Given this, the target for this stock may be purely to decarbonise heating systems.

PAS2035 and Trustmark

PAS2035 is the UK Government specification for the retrofit of domestic buildings. It establishes a complete process, creates new roles and responsibilities, and brings in checks and balances which aim to avoid the pitfalls of previous Government-funded home energy efficiency investments. It is currently mandated where the “ECO” funding stream is used for projects, and some public sector bodies in England and Wales mandate it for works funded by other streams. From the study team’s experience, standard PAS2035 practice relies heavily on EPCs as the tool to determine the energy efficiency of buildings before and after any work.

Trustmark is the organisation tasked with applying quality assurance (QA) to the PAS2035 process. A key element of this quality assurance is that installation data should be uploaded to a Trustmark-managed ‘data warehouse’ at the end of a PAS2035-compliant project. This data comprises the wider QA documentation generated, such as “before and after” EPCs, photographs, reports, drawings, and specifications.

The Scottish Government, and the wider construction industry in Scotland, have been debating the role of PAS2035 in retrofit activity for several years. As of the date of this study, there appears to be a mixed response to increasing use of the PAS2035 standard for retrofit work, in part due to the higher cost implications. This may be discounting the benefits of record-keeping and post-installation data lodging aspects which PAS2035 brings.

Trustmark notes that the data is considered publicly owned, and consequently private commercial organisations cannot easily access it, despite ongoing explorations into how to expose more of it. They also note that the vast majority of what is held relates to properties in England, given the small number of PAS2035 projects carried out in Scotland. Trustmark reported that only around 600,000 properties (2% of UK 27 million existing homes) have data lodged in the ‘data warehouse’.

Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS)

The MCS is a quality assurance scheme for small renewable energy, heat pump and Photovoltaic (PV) cell installations. It was created to improve the quality of work carried out by having a defined list of approved installers, and a methodology to track such installations. It was implemented by the UK Government from 2011 onwards. MCS requires registration of installers, standard methods of generating specifications and quotes, and guarantees for equipment installed and after-sales care. The documentation of each system installed is lodged with MCS and held centrally.

Lead vs lag

Many databases comprise data for buildings which can be described as “historic” or “stale” (i.e., not recent). We refer to them as ‘lag’ data. Others use this historic data as inputs into models which suggest what measures individual buildings, groups of buildings, whole estates, or the national stock could benefit from. This second type of data is considered ‘lead’ data.

For the purposes of tracking compliance, the lag data sources are more useful because though they might be stale, they are not predicted, which implies a lower confidence. But this raises the question of the point at which the lag data gets updated. These data update points are described as “update points” below.

Property Logbooks / Building Passports

Two of the organisations we spoke to provide property logbooks (sometimes referred to as “building passports”). These software applications are emerging digital tools which provide a comprehensive digital record of the building’s past. Some of them comment on fabric condition, occupancy patterns, and provide a ‘roadmap’ for work to be undertaken to the building into the future. The advent of these digitised data repositories and improvement plans is something the focus of this paper (accessing and synthesising building databases) could leverage.

Two-way connections between building logbooks produced by private companies and nationwide databases, such as Home Analytics and Scotland’s Heat Map, could create a joined up, dynamic and holistic data environment about buildings, and have positive impacts extending beyond the current aims of the Heat in Buildings Bill.

The provision of property logbooks is now mandatory in France for newbuilds and retrofitted properties (Today’s Conveyancer, 2023). A European research project (DemoBLog) is contributing to the evidence that a holistic and digital approach to building data can accelerate reduced environmental impact of buildings (European Commission, 2023).

A Scottish equivalent is the recommendations of the Scottish Parliamentary Working Group on Tenement Maintenance and their proposal for five-yearly inspection reports. These documents would include Building Passport-level information on the mutual parts of tenements and be mandated by statute. To be useful in the context of HiB compliance, they would have to then be digitised and accessible.

Modelled vs measured

Measured or observed data comprises data captured in-situ and reported directly without processing. However, we found that very few properties have had an in-situ performance measurement, and that sample sizes would be too small to extrapolate to the whole stock, or even to archetypes. While this data can be relied upon to measure compliance, this data is incomplete (more measurements should be made) or stale/lag (which can be addressed by update points described below).

Where it hasn’t been possible to measure data in situ, chiefly due to the cost of surveying, tools have sought to model (or predict) data based on a variety of criteria, such as similar typologies nearby and assumed occupant behaviours. As noted above, this is a core component of Home Analytics, but it is also used in some of the private sector databases.

This distinction becomes complex as EPCs use observed data as an input, and then use software to model energy usage and fabric based heating demand, making them a hybrid of both.

Compliance monitoring relying on modelled/predicted data may lead to disputed findings where the approved modelling is shown to conflict with real-world observed measurements. For instance, should an RdSAP-based EPC state that fabric based heat demand is over 120kw/sqm/year, but measured heat demand proves to be lower, would the property be deemed to be in compliance? This is an important matter for an upcoming Bill to make clear, with consequences for a digital compliance monitoring system.

Update points

As noted above, EPCs are required by regulations:

  • When a domestic or non-domestic building is built, sold, or leased (when advertised for such).
  • As a condition of receiving funding, such as grants for energy improvement works (Home Energy Scotland, Business Energy Scotland, or Local Energy Scotland), or ECO (which requires PAS2035).

These update points allow for the refresh of data, which, over a period of months trickles all the way through to various datasets, including Home Analytics, and others. Having more update points, such as at any intervention listed in the Standard, would help measure compliance using existing datasets.

Several key triggers are noted in the HiB Bill consultation, including one focussing on the property’s purchase. The chances of the HIB trigger points, and the trigger points for updating the other databases, aligning in a reasonable time frame should be considered. For instance, if an EPC is updated on purchase to show that the building is not on a clean heating system, and then one is installed without an obligation to have a new EPC created, and then the Scottish Government checks for compliance, the record would show that the building does not comply.

Confidence and risk

Variation in data quality and the widespread use of modelling to produce apparently complete datasets has led to lack of trust from practitioners, who like to rely on their own measurements prior to providing retrofit advice. This has been a primary driver behind the UK and Scottish Government’s recent work to ‘improve’ or ‘enhance’ areas such as the process and content of EPCs (Scottish Government, 2023). Concern over data quality is not unique to the construction and property sectors. A challenge for the Scottish Government is how any existing data source can be used to check for compliance if the data is of potential uncertain provenance and fidelity.

The traditional construction and property sectors used a structure of insurances, professional qualifications, and codes of ethics to provide a quality assurance system for work with buildings. Where advice and design is concerned, this system relies on professional indemnity insurance backed up with chartered professionals such as architects, surveyors and engineers. These structures are notably absent from the energy efficiency and retrofit sector, which contributes to a lower level of trust in the sector by the public.

There is some quality assurance built into some of the datasets the study team reviewed. For example, Trustmark, via the Scheme Providers, carries out sampling of EPCs to check for compliance against the standard process for producing EPCs. Some private operators align and utilise British Standards quality assurance or data management certifications.

Energy focus

A significant number of the datasets reviewed are focused on energy (kWh/sq.m/year), rather than building fabric, or connection to a heat network zone. The reasons for this are varied, though perhaps linked to the prevalence of EPC bands as a primary focus in recent years. EPC data includes building fabric information, which can be used for HiB Standard monitoring and compliance, though this is not present where just the EPC band itself is used in a given database. From this we observe that the EPC data is more useful for monitoring and compliance than just the EPC band itself.

The future of EPCs

An obvious challenge to basing a compliance scheme on EPC data modelling is the ongoing initiatives in the public sector that could result in changes to the methodology and outputs of the EPC over the next few years. The Scottish Government refer to their ambition to improve the EPC in the HiB Bill consultation and recently consulted on a range of options. In parallel, the UK Government is looking to replace SAP with the Home Energy Model (HEM).

Self-certification

In researching compliance against the Heat in Buildings Standard we considered the potential approaches involving either self-declaration (relying solely on the building owner/occupant), or the role of existing compliance and check mechanisms.

Below we have outlined examples of self-certification compliance approaches:

The census: it is mandatory for everyone to complete the census. There are fines for not doing so, or for giving false information. There is not, as far as we’re aware, a process for checking the validity of information given by respondents to the census. However, there is no gain or loss to the person completing the census for the information they provide, and so there is no particular pressure to report any given way.

Building Standards: Building Standards (the control over building regulation consent in Scotland) requires drawings to be submitted showing how the proposed works meet the building regulations. A Building Warrant is issued, enabling the works to be built legally by the local authority when they deem the proposals meet the Building Regulations. At the end of the works, the client or their representative issues a Completion Certificate, self-certifying that the works meet the drawings consented as part of the warrant. The Local Authority does spot-checks on the works to confirm that this is the case, and, if satisfied, will issue an Acceptance of Completion Certificate.

SER: the Structural Engineers Register is a limited company appointed by the Scottish Government’s Building Standards Division to administer a scheme for Certification of Design (Building Structures). This is one of only two areas where self-certification is allowed. The scheme requires structural engineering firms and individual engineers to maintain registration with SER though qualifications and audits of their work. This allows them to sign off the structural design of buildings and avoid review by the local authority. The oversight of the scheme is stringent and the structural calculation assessments are checked by a separate engineer. For Section 6 of the Building Regulations (Energy), there is an online submission procedure administered by RIAS.

EPCs: Domestic Energy Assessors (DEAs) undergo a 3-day training course, submit photo evidence of their inspections, and are checked on a percentage of their assessments. They carry Professional Indemnity Insurance (PII), they have a code of practice administered through Trustmark, and are required to carry out Continual Professional Development (CPD). Their obligation is to run the RdSAP process correctly, but they are not responsible for the result of the EPC, or for the recommendations given by the EPC (which are generated by algorithm).

MOTs: In the case of motor vehicles, cars must have an MOT annually and hold a certificate stating they meet the checklist of performance indicators. Qualified test centres check this, for which there is a nominal charge. Any factors not in compliance are notified to the vehicle owner/user. Using a car which has failed to pass a MOT certificate means it is illegal to drive the vehicle.

Competent person: A “competent person” is required to carry out processes mandated by organisations like RICS, and this level of qualification is set out in the relevant professional standard. BS7913 sets best practices for work with historic buildings and establishes the role of a “competent person” and what qualifies a person as such. In both cases, funders or clients of work to which this competence relates require this standard to be met to enable them to fund the work.

Self-reporting

Self-reporting may be suitable for reporting compliance with the clean heating system mandate, with checks being carried out at purchase (such as the Building Warrant used for new build, or for existing buildings where the assessment is included within the pre-sale survey of the building). If a statement has been made that a clean heating source is present, but this is found not to be the case on sale by the Home Report Surveyor, then the sale value is likely to be affected and may fall foul of the Sale of Goods Act (1979).

Self-reporting is however more complex for the energy efficiency standard, as the definition of something seemingly simple, such as the loft-roll being compliant, varies from standard to standard. Questions arise, such as whether it is evenly installed, pushed into corners, whether there is a vapour control layer under it, whether it is dressed around the cold-water storage tank, etc. A further challenge is that not everyone is able to access the loft, or sufficiently computer-literate to use the digital systems. It is our recommendation that some form of survey by an assessor with some level of training and consumer protection could undertake this work.

The energy efficiency metric (kW/m2) is more complex still, as it requires training in how to use a dedicated piece of software, and how to reliably enter data to get consistent results. Again, we propose that a competent assessor is best placed to carry out this work

Finally, homeowners must seek advice on what alterations to make to a property to make it compliant. At present, the RdSAP EPC is very clear that the recommendations are suggestions, and not “advice” to be followed without further checks. This distinction frequently escapes the public, which could lead to widespread failure of retrofit to deliver reliable improvement. However, this is where an ‘archetypes approach’ for retrofit guidance could assist homeowners and property managers.

An advantage is that self-reporting can lead to wide societal engagement, and more education and agency over the task at hand.

The challenge with self-reporting is to incentivise individuals to do it and to make the process easy to comply with. The quality of self-reporting will vary. Like the census process, the questions being asked and the possible answers need to be precisely determined (such as using multiple choice answers). There is a risk of false reporting to gain advantage unless there is some policing/checking if the answers given will lead to any gain or loss.

Consultant reporting

The challenge with consultant reporting is that there are significant differences behind the designation of ‘consultant’, with training ranging from 3 days to 7 years. Some consultants have legally protected status, codes of ethics and some have a code of practice. Some carry PII, some don’t. PII only insures the advice given for a certain area of competence. For instance, a structural engineer’s PII will not pay out if the advice was given on non-structural matters. Both the PII and the confirmed area of competence are therefore important. Without PII and a defined area of competence, there is no consumer protection for the advice given by the consultant.

There are differentiations between different specialisms. We suggest it would be useful to conduct further research assessing how HiB Standard compliance could be conducted by different disciplines and roles, their areas of competence required, and requirements for PII.

Reporting should show confidence rating linked to the qualifications/ability/consumer protection of the person making the statement. Red/Amber/Green ratings are used by some, others (Home Analytics for example) used percentages.

Options to consider

This study suggests three main options that may be considered by the Scottish Government for the establishment of a digital compliance and monitoring tool.

Option 1: Use existing data sources in their current locations

Data sources remain in their current locations, with two options:

  1. Option 1a. Homeowners are required to self-report into these locations and upload evidence.
  2. Option 1b. Professional reporting into existing locations (status quo).

For both options, the responsibility to demonstrate compliance rests with the homeowner with either self-reporting or professionals reporting.

Advantages

  1. Requires little investment from the government.

Drawbacks

  1. Would likely be difficult for homeowners due to the complexities of the Standard and the need to look for information in various places.
  2. It may be long-winded for owners who are not familiar with digital technology.
  3. Reduced consistency if homeowner reporting, rather than a professional with PII.

Requirements

  1. Create “how-to” guides to help homeowners understand where they can gather the information.
  2. Ensure that the appropriate data sharing mechanisms and identity verification mechanisms are in place so that information can be queried from data holders by homeowners.
  3. Ensure that non-digital means of accessing the information are available.
  4. Identify opportunities for market to engage; district heating providers to broker connections between public/commercial anchor load buildings and homes in heat zones, clean heat system providers provide support apps/websites, surveyors promote building assessment services.

Option 2: Professional reporting from linked databases

Data remains in its current locations. Government looks at a single portal, which in turn looks at existing sources. The responsibility to assess compliance could rest with the government or homeowners, but the government must first create a means of collating the relevant information on a per property basis.

Advantages

  1. Saves homeowners’ time.
  2. Gives the government a more comprehensive picture of any property in the country.
  3. Makes property data more actionable and consistent in reporting
  4. Public facing online data input platforms already exist, with confidence ratings, allowing self-monitoring at the front end. Back-end data logging to be linked by unique identifier.
  5. Consumer protection and consistency of data due to presence of PII.

Drawbacks

  1. Requires more technical investment from the government
  2. Medium risk to privacy infringements

Requirements

  1. Create or generalise the use a unique identifier per property
  2. Create more data update points
  3. Create or use an existing data nomenclature and phraseology
  4. Review and update existing data sharing agreements with relevant data holders
  5. Create APIs to enable data transfer
  6. Create a public facing ‘check if your building is compliant’ government portal such as Check vehicle tax

Option 3: Professional reporting into a new central database

Data is moved from existing data sources to a new government-managed platform. The responsibility to assess compliance could rest with the government or the homeowners, but the government must first gather all relevant information on all properties in a new data holding structure.

Advantages

  • Saves homeowners’ time
  • Gives the government a complete picture of every property in the country
  • Makes property data more actionable and enhances consistency of reporting.
  • Provides country-level insights on all property and energy needs
  • Enables more modelling and place-based answers to decarbonisation needs.
  • Consumer protection and consistency of data due to presence of PII

Drawbacks

  1. Requires significant government investment
  2. Could be construed as government overreach
  3. Existing data custodians could offer pushback
  4. Might slow down innovation if human resources are not devoted to exploiting data
  5. Higher risk to privacy infringements.

Requirements

  1. Create or generalise the use of an unique identifier per property
  2. Create a public facing ‘check if your building is compliant’ government portal such as Check vehicle tax
  3. Create more data update points
  4. Create or use an existing data nomenclature and phraseology
  5. Create technical infrastructure required to hold data
  6. Terminate existing data sharing agreements with relevant data holders and organise data handover
  7. Either create APIs to enable data transfer between existing data custodians and the government, or change the data lodging mechanisms to feed in directly into the government data lake
  8. Create a frontend dashboard to query information from all databases at once
  9. Identify opportunities to exploit data strategically.

Further Key Considerations

The following points should be considered alongside the options set out above.

Data governance

The industry suffers from a lack of commonly agreed standards and procedures which would allow data to flow between organisations and databases. While there exists virtually no technical difficulty in moving data across platforms, the legal basis for this, the format of the data, and the necessary safeguards in terms of data ownership, are absent.

This lack of such a data governance framework is a significant hurdle to the emergence of the retrofit industry, and ultimately, the decarbonisation agenda. To fill the gap, private sector actors have been forming associations and trade bodies, to formulate answers to these issues, such as the Open Property Data Association or Residential Logbooks Association. Our view based on our research and experience is that for real progress to be made, governments will need to take ownership of the data governance issue and standardisation of process and reporting structure, participate in industry work, and eventually endorse the outcomes of this work, as was done when the UK Government endorsed the SAP methodology for assessing buildings.

In general, providing that the ownership of a given property can be proven (such as through the Property Data Trust Framework), publicly-owned information about a property should be available free of charge to that property’s owner, and their consultants.

Identifying and indexing

There is currently no comprehensive way to identify every structure considered a separate building in Scotland. Several possibilities exist. UPRN would be a good way forward for domestic properties compliance, but less so for non-domestic buildings. A separate piece of work is required to find a way to identify and index all buildings to which the Standard and associated monitoring and compliance checking will apply.

Archetype approaches

An exercise to analyse how archetype approaches and interventions could support a compliance methodology may be useful, considering the high number of house and apartment types within an archetype construction (e.g., tenements, timber frame, no fines). Studies and reports have cited archetypes approaches [ (ZEST Taskforce, 2021), (Smith, 2021), (Bros-Williamson & Smith, 2024)] to retrofit, and archetype-specific list of measures to be applied to demonstrate compliance aligned to a specific EPC band.

Common Scheme Standardisation / nomenclature

A significant piece of work would be required to ensure that, once a building identifier has been produced, the data attached to this identifier is labelled according to a nomenclature shared across the industry. The work required would involve:

  1. Determining a common format in which input data pertinent to retrofit objectives can be collected to enable interoperability, transfer and actionability regardless of provenance and destination.
  2. Determining a common format for output data reflecting the resulting programme of works.
  3. Encouraging any relevant organisation to adopt the standard, starting with property logbook providers.
  4. Working with governments to publicise the scheme and insert it within the Property Data Trust Framework.

Data access and data sharing

Building data is the fundamental building block on which national retrofit efforts are planned and delivered. Without easy access to publicly-owned information about their property, homeowners may delay their investigations and home improvements. Without free access to publicly-owned information about their property, homeowners could be made to finance organisations that have no ownership of this data. The study team believes that a strict distinction should be made between publicly-owned and privately-owned data, and that the former be made readily available to appropriate persons.

Beyond operational energy

The primary emphasis of the HiB Bill consultation centres on promoting clean heating systems, such as heat networks or individual building systems powered by clean electricity, and on fabric improvements. The focus on building fabric does not include comment on the condition of the building, which is a factor of fabric performance. Factoring condition into the HiB Standard, on top of monitoring and compliance, could provide an opportunity to address the condition of the nation’s building stock as part of the retrofit agenda. We suggest that broadening the approach to compliance and monitoring to encompass building condition could offer an opportunity for synergistic improvement to fabric and energy and underpin a future legacy of a pan-Scotland built environment approach.

Appendices

Question List/Appendix A

Data Field

Description of question

Organisation

name of the organisation interviewed.

Name

the name of the database or initiative.

Status

the status of the conversation with the organisation, whether they have been contacted, interviewed,

Organisation ownership

public or private, or a mix.

Geography

Geography covered by the data

Description

Description of the database

Energy coverage

whether the database includes energy data.

Content

a brief description of the content of the database.

Data ownership

who owns the data in the database.

Access control

who controls access to the database.

Coverage

what facets of the building the database covers.

Gaps

what gaps are acknowledged to be present in the data, from the perspective of its use as a HiBs compliance tool.

Connections

how the data can be exported/imported.

Use

the use of the data.

Users

the organisations, individuals or sectors who currently use the data.

Cost

the charging model, if any, for accessing the data.

Contact name

the name of the person responsible for the data.

Contact details

Contact details for the person responsible for the data.

Link

for any online interface or website for the database.

Table 6 Areas of discussion with database owners

Detailed commentary to section 4.3/Appendix B

Sasine Register. Not spoken to. Information in the study is from publicly available data on what the register does.

EPC Register. The EPC register is a database of all EPCs created for domestic and non-domestic buildings in Scotland. It is managed by the Energy Savings Trust.

Valuation Database. Not spoken to. Information in the study is from publicly available data on what the Database does.

Scottish House Condition Survey. This is a subset of the Scottish Household Survey who survey 10,000 households a year, asking a huge range of demographic questions (age, disabilities, activities, etc.). They then re-survey 3,000 dwellings with a physical inspector (assessor, architect), who do a full physical survey, recording everything about the house in terms of energy efficiency (fuel, central heating, insulation, age and efficiency of boiler) and things like disrepair. The selection of buildings is intentionally representative of the wider housing stock.

Scotlis. The land register can be used to find property prices, view boundaries on a map, check if land or property is on the land register, and identify who owns the property. Not spoken to. Information in the study is from publicly available data on what the register does.

PAS2035 Data Warehouse. Trustmark hosts retrofit lodgement data (PAS2035) for buildings that have been retrofitted under government funded retrofit schemes. This includes information about the retrofit work done. Each home is lodged individually. Trustmark’s key role is quality assurance, so they test a sample of these installations using a risk-based approach for desktop and on-site audit using the information uploaded to the data warehouse.

Detailed commentary to section 4.4/Appendix C

Scotland Heat Map. It is a GIS tool, a collection of datasets, that primarily Local Authorities use to check for demand for heat, to help introduce policies to reduce CO2 from heat production. Are areas suitable for heat networks. It is one of the core datasets in LHEES. At the moment some Local Authority LHEES are being uploaded to it. It’s about bringing data together in a spatial way. The main metric is heat demand metrics generated from a range of sources. Based on UPRN, they have a strong relationship with the Ordnance Survey. Uses a layered approach, footprint on an OS map, and applying energy benchmarks. Different sources of subjective reliability. Indicative tool bringing together data generated for other purposes, have to make some gross assumptions based on not much information. It answers the question: does this area look promising for heat networks?

Improvement Service. This is a data sharing portal. It helps Local Authorities make data useable, standardised, and actionable. Their first big project was to put some order to the property address dataset.

Public Sector Benchmarking. They have performed energy benchmarking analysis for Scottish Public Sector assets. It shows data for a “typical” building of that type to compare against “best practice”. Public sector building managers can then compare their building to that. The point of this document was always to do comparisons. Highland Council have taken this data and analysed the whole estate and made the data public but that is yet to happen elsewhere.

Home Analytics. It’s an address level database with information on all properties in Scotland ranging from building characteristics to heating systems based on the RdSAP input and output data from domestic EPCs. It contains more or less half of all buildings as survey data and uses algorithms to create assumed EPCs for those which don’t exist. It is indexed by UPRN (which is produced by Ordnance Survey). Installations which require a new EPC due to funding rules will lead to this data ending up in Home Analytics, which is uploaded/updated every 6 months.

Non-Domestic Analytics. The EST team who run this were not spoken to, so the data in our report is based on publicly available information about non-domestic analytics. Like Home Analytics but for non-domestic buildings. It contains everything Home Analytics does, except there is less modelling behind it. Fewer non-domestic properties have an EPC, so there are more unknowns. Big exception is access.

DREam. Home analytics data augmented with IR survey results and asset management data provided by a private company IRT. The dataset remains the property of the Local Authority or RSL commissioning the study.

National Grid ESO. This tool cross-compares other datasets to provide long term energy forecasting for domestic and non-domestic demands, and potential opportunities as the nation decarbonises.

National Household Model. Not interviewed.

Detailed commentary to section 4.5/Appendix D

Kuppa. A modelling tool for options appraisal: “Kuppa gives you a holistic view of a home’s energy performance, now, and how it could be in the future.”

Zoopla. Not interviewed.

National Buildings Database. Emergency services and safety data, edging into climate resilience currently under development by Edinburgh University and others.

Shedyt. Shedyt is a digital homeowner manual which exists to simplify property management for occupiers in collaboration with a marketplace of real estate experts, starting with residential property developers. It’s a tech company first and foremost, offering a marketplace. They match property developers to the people who sell to them. When a newbuild goes up, everything is specced up: the aim is to not throw this away. Long term ambition being to help the occupier down the line. Up to now, the data wasn’t captured for the benefit of the homeowner, but only themselves & legislation. The idea is to offer one place to manage your home idea.

The Property Logbook Company. Their business came from the legal side of use cases. In 2003 the land registry went from analogue to electronic titles. All the analogue documents become irrelevant when things went digital. Going digital has actually slowed down conveyancing. PLC suggested making “the big warehouse” digital to overcome that – for the lawyer, it provided the certainty that a document existed. It’s a digital interpretation of a very analogue process. PLC built B2B business which the consumer accessed whenever they bought and sold properties. The homeowner has access to the system. When they put new windows in, for example, they can upload the document to evidence this

Single Survey. The single survey is a condition survey presented in a legislatively mandated format, standardised for all homes transacted in Scotland. The data gathering and report production is by proprietary software created by the individual providers. Quest (owned by Landmark) have a database. OneSurvey, in Scotland, is controlled by Allied Surveyors. MovMachine in Edinburgh (ESPC) is used as CRM. SurvPoint is used by Shepherds is also used as CRM and Project Management platform. Quest is £12/use. The data is owned by the surveying firm. Information gathered is given to Rightmove, Zoopla etc. this information could’ve been collated centrally, but RICS didn’t proceed with the idea. The richer data is in the Surveyor’s notes, but that’s difficult to access. It could be possible to strip out the condition codes from the online databases. Postal address is key identifier.

PropEco. Futureproofing home with advanced data and analytics

Chimni. A property logbook company. Secure digital record of all transactions (conveyancing), maintenance, DIY and certifications (such as connectivity with EPC register), Trustmark supporting retrofit. They provide an additional group of APIs which allows a homeowner to access the info that sits in the Trustmark Data Warehouse. Their aim is building API certifications with as many places as possible.

Kamma Data. Originally a geospatial map company. The first thing they do is attach UPRN to addresses. Their end product is data. They note that property data is poor quality, with no proper framework and thus inconsistent. They’ve built a machine learning module which helps match properties together and build a profile for property. They have a retrofit automation tool which takes pricing data and data from the national grid to make recommendations, making it an optimisation engine.

Novoville Shared Works. A property logbook/building passport looking at people, property and its constituent elements. Structured around RICS, RIBA and GFI frameworks for data and cross-compatible with RdSAP data structures, Shared Works can connect to thermal modelling engines such as Scene to provide retrofit optioneering to build a plan which is then audited by a construction professional such as an architect or surveyor. The Shared Works Building Passport can be looked at alongside other to form buying communities and so create community groups and cost efficiencies.

Kestrix. Similar to IRT’s DREam but coming at it from different direction. Kestrix’s premise is scalability of IR to the building energy efficiency market, and once scaled to work towards accuracy. The lack of accurate actionable data is the challenge they’re trying to solve. Their tool captures vision and thermal imagery to build 3D models. Their goal is to get to U Values from IR. They aim to create a more accurate than EPC building physics model to leverage and make retrofit recommendations for portfolio. The imagery is aerial, oblique shot from drones, thermal imagery shot at night, private mode right now, project based. They outsource the drone work. They are a software company.

Property Identifier Commentary/Appendix E

UPRNs

Of all the above, the Unique Property Reference Numbers (UPRNs) appear as the best way of identifying private residential buildings. This is because they are already used in many of the datasets reviewed, they are unique, and supported by the Ordnance Survey.

For those working with non-domestic buildings where different buildings may all reside on one campus, UPRNs were deemed insufficient by some of the interviewees since several buildings will share one UPRN yet may be very different.

Property Title Numbers

When HM Land Registry register a property, they give it a unique reference called a title number and prepare both a register and, in most cases, a title plan. Like the UPRN, this is connected to the legal property, and so would be the same for individual structures all on the same legal title and therefore present shortcomings when dealing with some non-domestic buildings.

MPRN

MPRNs act as unique identifiers for the gas meter in each building. However, with the ongoing decarbonisation of homes and considering the 16% of the Scottish housing stock not connected to the gas grid, the use of MPRNs related to gas would not provide adequate coverage and might over time become a redundant identifier.

MPAN

A meter point access number (MPAN) is used for electric meters in buildings. As with MPRNs, these identifiers are not suitable, as some buildings have several meters, and some meters serve more than one building.

VOA

In December 2023 the Dept for Net Zero and Energy Security established a research project to develop a National Buildings Database (commencing with non-domestic buildings). One of the potential identifier codes for each building that may be used is the Valuation Office Agency (VOA) registration for each building. The Property Details dataset was introduced in the 1970s and was originally known as the Dwelling House Coding guide. Its original purpose was to provide a simple system for understanding the main features and attributes of a property. VOA datasets do not contain information about individuals or households. The information VOA collects and holds about domestic properties supports statutory functions for valuation and maintenance of Council Tax lists under the Local Government Finance Act 1992. It’s the statutory requirement of VOA to maintain accurate valuation lists for Council Tax. However, VOA only collects data needed to place an accurate band on the property.

As council tax is operated separately in Scotland and given the separate laws and regulations for Scotland’s property, it may be useful to determine if there is a Scottish equivalent identifying code which could be utilised as part of the monitoring and tracking of HiBs.

Outside of Britain

Unique Building Identifier (UBID) is an initiative by the US Department of Energy (DOE) to establish a system for generating and maintaining unique ID’s for all buildings across the planet. The UBID algorithm generates a unique ID based on the geo-spatial location and form of a building footprint. A unique building ID will provide a universal indexing mechanism for the collection, linking and aggregation of building-centric data from disparate sources (see: GitHub – Open city model data for the United States).

References

BRE Trust, 2020. The Housing Stock of the United Kingdom. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/delivering-net-zero-scotlands-buildings-consultation-proposals-heat-buildings-bill/pages/1/

Bros-Williamson, J. & Smith, S., 2024. Applying a retrofit and low-carbon technology archetype approach to buildings in Scotland, Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh.

European Commission, 2023. Demo-BLog – Development and Demonstration of Digital Building Logbooks. [Online]
Available at: https://build-up.ec.europa.eu/en/resources-and-tools/links/demo-blog-development-and-demonstration-digital-building-logbooks

National Records of Scotland, 2023. Housing. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/delivering-net-zero-scotlands-buildings-consultation-proposals-heat-buildings-bill/pages/1/

Office for National Statistics, 2023. Housing, England and Wales: Census 2021. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/delivering-net-zero-scotlands-buildings-consultation-proposals-heat-buildings-bill/pages/1/

PBC Today, 2022. Timber frame homes UK market to rise by £70m. [Online]
Available at: https://www.pbctoday.co.uk/news/mmc-news/timber-frame-homes- uk/107522/#:~:text=In%20Scotland%20timber%20frame%20homes,%2C%20rising%20by%20almost%2060%25

Reed, R., 2021. Property Development. Abingdon: Routledge.

Registers of Scotland, 2023. Property market report 2022-23. [Online]
Available at: https://www.ros.gov.uk/data-and-statistics/property-market-report-2022-23#:~:text=In%202022%2D23%3A,when%20compared%20with%202021%2D22

Scottish Government, 2021. Heat in Buildings Strategy – achieving net zero emissions in Scotland’s buildings. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/heat-buildings-strategy-achieving-net-zero-emissions-scotlands-buildings/

Scottish Government, 2023. Building standards approved energy assessment software: guidance. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/building-standards-approved-energy-assessment-software-guidance/

Scottish Government, 2023. Delivering net zero for Scotland’s buildings – Heat in Buildings Bill consultation. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/delivering-net-zero-scotlands-buildings-consultation-proposals-heat-buildings-bill/pages/1/

Scottish Government, 2023. Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) reform: consultation. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/energy-performance-certificate-epc-reform-consultation/pages/2/

Scottish Government, nd. Scottish House Condition Survey: Collection. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/collections/scottish-house-condition-survey/

Serin, B., Kintrea, K. & Gibb, K., 2018. Social housing in Scotland. [Online]
Available at: https://housingevidence.ac.uk/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/R2018_SHPWG_Scotland.pdf

Smith, S., 2021. Developing Net Zero Technical Solutions for Scotland’s Future Mass Retrofit Housing Programme, Edinburgh: Scottish Government.

Today’s Conveyancer, 2023. Property logbooks made compulsory in France. [Online]
Available at: https://todaysconveyancer.co.uk/property-logbooks-made-compulsory-france/

ZEST Taskforce, 2021. Achieving net zero in social housing: The Zero Emissions Social Housing Taskforce Report. [Online]
Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/independent-report/2021/08/achieving-net-zero-social-housing-zero-emissions-social-housing-taskforce-report/documents/zero-emissions-social-housing-taskforce-report/zero-emissions-social

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by EALA Impacts CIC, Novoville and University of Edinburgh on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

  1. https://epbd-ca.eu/wp-content/uploads/2021/07/Implementation-of-the-EPBD-in-the-United-Kingdom-%E2%80%93-Scotland-%E2%80%93-2020.pdf

Research completed in August 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4792

Executive Summary

Background

The UK Climate Change Committee states that adjustments to dietary patterns are necessary to meet greenhouse gas (GHG) reduction targets for Scotland. Food-based dietary guidelines (FBDGs) have a policy role to play in supporting such adjustments.

Drawing on international evidence including three case studies, this report presents findings on whether and how greenhouse gas emission criteria could be included in Scottish FBDGs.

Main findings

  • Out of 33 jurisdictions reviewed, only seven have FBDGs with extensive climate focus. However, this number is increasing over time.
  • Emissions-focused FBGDs advise reducing meat, in particular ruminant meat; moderating dairy; increasing vegetables, fruits and plant proteins; sourcing sustainably; avoiding highly processed foods and reducing food waste.
  • FBDGs for Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden offer good examples of how dietary linkages between human and planetary health can be explained with clear recommendations for food consumers.
  • Development of climate-focused FBDGs suits a ‘science first’ approach, involving cross-disciplinary expert panels and reviews. Stakeholder inputs are restricted to the final steps of messaging and implementation.
  • Policy implementation for climate-friendly diets requires coordinated effort and strategic packages of measures, to tackle the food system holistically.
  • In Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden, policy coordination has been lacking. Measures to date are largely limited to information campaigns and voluntary actions in public catering.
  • More recently, Flanders and the Netherlands have launched more integrative food strategies. They are starting to combine policy measures across the food chain to encourage more sustainable diets.

Implications for Scotland:

  • Adopting climate-focused FBDGs would require time and effort, but would be a generally low-regret action, aligning with dietary goals and the net zero agenda.
  • Some micronutrient deficiency risks are possible for certain population groups, depending on which foods are substituted. Other potential risks include displacement of GHG emissions from import/export activities.
  • To address such issues, a coordinated cross-departmental policy approach would be needed, deploying a mix of supply-side and demand-side measures.
  • In particular, households at risk of micronutrient deficiencies due to constrained access to healthy foods would need targeted support, including improvements to their food environments.

Glossary / Abbreviations table

BMI

Body Mass Index: a weight to height ratio used to indicate whether an individual is underweight, normal weight, overweight or obese.

CAP

Common Agricultural Policy: the overarching framework for supporting agricultural production across the EU.

CCC

Climate Change Committee: the statutory advisory body to the UK government and Devolved Administrations in relation to climate mitigation and adaptation.

Demand-side

Used to describe policy measures seeking to influence the demand for (in this case) different foods. For example, raising or lowering consumer prices through taxation or subsidies.

Eatwell Guide

A policy tool used to define government recommendations on eating healthily and achieving a balanced diet within the UK.

Eco-labelled

Voluntary certification of products to indicate their environmental impact.

FBDG

Food Based Dietary Guidelines offer advice on foods, food groups and dietary patterns to provide the required nutrients to the general public to promote overall health and prevent chronic diseases. Some now also include environmental considerations.

Food Environment

The physical, economic, political and socio-cultural contexts in which people engage with the food system to make their decisions about acquiring, preparing and consuming food. Can significantly affect consumers’ access to different foods.

GHG

Greenhouse Gases: gases in the atmosphere that contribute to climate change. Notably carbon dioxide and methane.

HFSS

Food and drink high in fat, sugar or salt.

Micronutrient decencies

A lack of certain dietary elements required in low concentrations. For example, various vitamins and minerals.

NNR

Nordic Nutritional Requirements: these constitute the scientific basis for national dietary guidelines and nutrient recommendations across the Nordic and Baltic countries.

Nutrient dense

Nutrient-dense foods contain relatively high levels of vitamins, minerals, complex carbohydrates, lean protein, and healthy fats for a given weight of food.

Protein Strategy

A stated EU-wide and domestic approach to encourage greater production and consumption of plant proteins.

Science first

The approach adopted in some countries for developing FBDG, basing recommendations on scientific evidence first before only later considering stakeholder views on implementation.

Scottish Dietary Goals

The Scottish Dietary Goals describe the diet that will improve the health of people in Scotland by reducing the number of people who are overweight and obese, and the number of people getting diet related diseases.

Supply-side

Used to describe policy measures seeking to influence the supply of (in this case) different foods. For example, production subsidies or regulatory controls.

UPF

Ultra Processed Foods. Food items at the extreme end of the NOVA food classification system, characterised by a very high degree of processing and often including artificial ingredients.

Introduction

Background

The food system is a significant emitter of greenhouse gases (GHGs), accounting for up to 30% of emissions globally and at least 20% within Scotland.[1] As other sectors of the economy (e.g. energy) decarbonise, food’s share of total emissions will increase over time. Mitigation of this can be (and is being) attempted through changes to the production methods of the foods that currently comprise our diets (e.g. via improved plant and animal health and reductions in chemical inputs).

Yet meeting GHG emission targets will also require changes to diets themselves, towards those featuring greater proportions of climate-friendly foods. Dietary shifts for climate reasons must also, of course, promote human health, a dual imperative that is captured in concepts such as the Planetary Health Diet.[2]

Scottish Government commitments to a sustainable, healthy food system and associated emission reductions are expressed in the Programme for Government 2023/24 and underpinned by, for example, the Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act 2022, the Climate Change (Scotland) Act 2009 (and subsequent amendments) and Climate Change Plan Updates.[3] In the Scottish Dietary Goals, the aim to reduce red and red processed meat intake to no more than 70g/day, due to the links with colorectal cancer, is also broadly consistent with the UK Climate Change Committee’s recommendation of a 20% reduction in meat by 2030 to reduce emissions.[4]

The current UK Food Based Dietary Guidance (FBDG) is the Eatwell Guide[5]. Studies indicate that a diet following the Eatwell Guide generates lower emissions than the current UK diet[6]. However, diets based on many FBDGs globally, including the Eatwell Guide, exceed emissions targets for 1.5 degrees global warming[7]. Hence this report was commissioned to gather international evidence on more climate-focused FBDGs, and explore how they may potentially apply in Scotland.

The specific project objectives were to:

(i) explore dietary guidelines and recommendations in other jurisdictions;

(ii) explore the extent to which these have a climate focus;

(iii) identify what policies, strategies and actions have been taken to encourage progress to the guidelines;

(iv) discuss what could potentially apply in Scotland, drawing on Scottish data and evidence, and

(v) explore impacts on different groups in Scotland, e.g. gender, age, social class, vulnerable groups.

The findings are relevant to the UK Climate Change Committee’s statement that meeting Scottish emission reduction targets will require changes to dietary patterns. The findings are also relevant to future revisions of the Scottish Dietary Goals.

Project Methods

The project was undertaken in five steps, from October 2023 to March 2024. The steps are shown in Figure 1.1 and described below.

Step 1: Guided by the Steering Group, and with reference to published studies, we selected the FBDGs of 33 international jurisdictions for inclusion in the study. The set comprised mainly European and anglophone jurisdictions.

Step 2: Using FAO resources and online documentation, we accessed the FBDGs in all 33 jurisdictions, and reviewed each one for reference to climate. We allocated each FBDG to one of three categories, according to the extent of climate focus: from ‘red’ (little to no reference to climate) to ‘green’ (extensive climate focus).

Step 3: Following discussion with the Steering Group, we selected three example ‘green’ FBDGs to examine in more detail. These were Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden. In each case, we identified the main advice and how it is linked to climate. We also studied the development process for the FBDGs. Lastly, we reviewed key policies, strategies and actions taken to implement the FBDGs. The main data sources were online materials and grey literature. These were supported by semi-structured interviews with officials involved in the development of the guidance in each jurisdiction (see Appendix A).

Step 4: We compared the insights from the 3 jurisdictions with the current situation in Scotland, drawing from official data sources and recent studies. We then reflected on what could potentially apply in Scotland, in terms of more climate-focused FBDGs and supporting policies. These reflections drew from published studies and official statistics, and were also informed by semi-structured interviews with a range of Scottish stakeholder groups. Guided by the Steering Group, these groups were: ASSIST FM; the British Dietetics Association; Food and Drink Federation Scotland; National Farmers Union Scotland; Nesta; Soil Association Scotland.

Step 5: We explored the impacts of more climate-focused FBDGs on different sub-groups in Scotland. The key data sources were official dietary statistics and recent studies of potential impacts of climate focused diets in Scotland.

International review of FBDGs

Review of FBDGs in other jurisdictions, with reference to climate criteria

Appendix B provides a tabulated summary of information for all 33 FBDGs included in the review, on a country by country basis. Appendix C summarises the intakes for key food groups (all meat, red/processed meat, dairy, fruit and vegetables) as stated in the FBDGs for 22 of the 33 jurisdictions.

Of the 33 FBDGs studied, we found the majority (19) contained no or extremely limited reference to climate impact. Six contained moderate reference, while seven contained extensive reference (Table 2.1). It is worth noting that although the majority of countries have yet to explicitly include reference to climate in their FBDGs, or are still at the development phase, the number is increasing over time. For example, all the entries in the Extensive column have emerged in the past decade.

No reference, or very limited reference

Moderate reference

Extensive reference

Australia

Austria

Brazil

Canada

Croatia

Cyprus

Greece

Hungary

Iceland

Ireland

Latvia

Malta

New Zealand

Norway

Portugal

Romania

Slovenia

Switzerland

UK

USA

Belgium (national)

Chile

Estonia

France

Italy

Poland

Denmark

Finland

Belgium (Flanders)

Germany

Netherlands

Spain

Sweden

Table 2.1: extent of reference to climate impacts in FBDG of other jurisdictions (n=33)

Jurisdictions in the red column: these have FBDGs which make no reference to climate impact, or only very limited reference, in either background or consumer-facing documents. ‘Limited reference’ denotes guidance which mentions sustainability, but only in an isolated way, and without any explanation or context. For example, the FBDGs of Austria and the UK (Eatwell Guide) both recommend choosing ‘sustainably sourced’ fish, by looking for MSC or similar labelling. However, this is the only reference to sustainability in the documents (i.e. no other food group has a similar recommendation), and there is no explanatory connection to the underlying sustainability issue with fishing.

Jurisdictions in the amber column: these FBDGs – in either consumer-facing or background documents – make more reference to climate than those in the red column. However, those references appear either in a circumscribed way, disconnected from the main guidance, or are individually brief or superficial within the body of the main guidance. An example of ‘circumscribed reference’ is the national guidance for Belgium. In the background document, there is a short stand-alone chapter dedicated to sustainability and climate, which explains the relevance to dietary issues. However, the contents are not connected to other chapters, and sustainability is not referred to in the consumer-facing guidance. An example of ‘superficial reference’ is the guidance for France. There are three individual references to climate and the environment in the consumer-facing guidance, however each one is very brief, without explanation of the underlying issues.

Jurisdictions in the green column: these FBDGs – in either the consumer-facing and/or background documents – make extensive reference to climate impact. The most advanced of these have climate impact as an integral component of the guidance, rather than an added feature, or set of ideas in development. Features that the ‘green’ FBDGs have in common include (i) introductory sections which make a clear connection between human health and planetary health, (ii) frequent references to climate impact throughout sections and applied to different food groups, (iii) effort (some more than others) to explain the reasons behind the climate-related guidance, and how consumers may navigate complexities and trade-offs between health and climate impacts.

Content of FBDGs with extensive climate focus

Overview of content

The jurisdictions found to have the most extensive reference to climate impact in their FBDGs were Denmark, Flanders, the Netherlands, Sweden and Finland. Germany and Spain are also included in this group, although their coverage is less extensive and integrated than the others[8].

These FBDGs make a clear link between human health and planetary health, by pointing out that what we eat affects not only our own well-being but also the environment. In terms of over-arching consumption advice, these FBDGs recommend:

  • eating less meat and animal products;
  • eating more plants, plant proteins and wholegrains;
  • choosing nutrient dense foods over nutrient poor;
  • drinking tap water;
  • not overeating;
  • avoiding waste.

The following sections describe what these climate-focused FBDGs advise, by food group. Advice from the Eatwell Guide is also referenced, for comparison.

Advice relating to meat

All seven FBDGs advise reducing meat consumption, due to the high GHG emissions from meat production, in particular ruminant meat. Table 2.2 shows the maximum recommended intake levels for meat in the seven FBDGs, and the Eatwell Guide. Germany specifies the lowest maximum weekly intake for all meat (240g), while Finland and the Netherlands specify the highest (500g). The Eatwell Guide does not specify a maximum level for all meat. The Netherlands specifies the lowest maximum intake for red/processed meat (300g) while Sweden specifies the highest (500g). The Eatwell Guide specifies the second highest maximum intake for red/processed meat at 490g.

All Meat

(max g/wk)

Red/Processed

(max g/wk)

Denmark

350

ns

Finland

500

ns

Flanders

ns

330

Germany

300

60

Netherlands

500

300

Spain

375

ns

Sweden

ns

500

Eatwell Guide

ns

490

Table 2.2: Recommended intakes for meat, in jurisdictions with climate-focused FBDGs

ns: not specified. Germany: ‘all meat’ includes beef. Red/processed is processed only.

Examples of qualitative advice on meat in these FBDGs:

  • When choosing meat, select more sustainably produced options, e.g. organic or agroecological, following a ‘’less but better” approach (The Netherlands, Sweden).
  • Diets based on small amounts of meat can support the positive effects of grazing livestock on landscape and biodiversity (The Netherlands, Sweden)
  • Meat-free days per week are specifically recommended by Denmark, Finland (1) Flanders (up to 4), Netherlands (up to 6), Spain (up to 7) and Sweden (up to 3).

The Eatwell Guide advises eating less red and processed meat. It gives no advice on production systems, nor on meat-free days.

Advice relating to dairy

The seven climate-focused FBDGs advise moderation in dairy product consumption, due to the GHG emissions associated with dairy farming. Table 2.3 shows the recommended daily intake levels for selected dairy products in these FBDGs. For milk/yoghurt, Denmark and Germany recommend c.250ml, while most others recommend a range extending to 500ml at the upper boundary. For hard cheese, the lowest recommended intake is 20g (Denmark) and the highest maximum is 60g (Spain). Four out of the six FBDGs do not specify a set intake level for cheese, although Germany offers guidance on how to allocate a total dairy amount between different product types. The Eatwell Guide does not specify intake levels for any dairy products.

Milk, yoghurt

(ml/d)

Hard Cheese

(g/d)

Denmark

250

20

Finland

ns

ns

Flanders

250-500

ns

Germany

250

ns

Netherlands

300-450

40

Spain

250-500

40-60

Sweden

200-300

ns

Eatwell Guide

ns

ns

Table 2.3: Recommended intakes for dairy products, in jurisdictions with climate-focused FBDGs

Examples of qualitative advice for dairy consumption in these FBDGs:

  • Take enough dairy to avoid chronic diseases and get enough nutrients, but not more than that, because dairy products come from cows, which have a high environmental impact (The Netherlands).
  • Eating moderate amounts of dairy can support the positive effects of grazing livestock on landscape and biodiversity (Sweden).
  • Where possible, choose eco-labels like organic for the more sustainably produced options (Sweden).
  • Eat fewer processed dairy products, to get the nutritional benefits without the added climate burden from extra processing stages (Finland).

The Eatwell Guide advises eating ‘some’ milk and dairy food (or dairy alternatives). It gives no advice on production systems or levels of processing.

Advice relating to vegetables, fruit and plant proteins

All seven FBDGs give very clear recommendations to eat more vegetables, fruits and plant proteins for climate reasons. Table 2.4 shows the specified daily intake levels for these foods. For vegetables and fruit, recommended intakes range from 450g (Netherlands) to 690g (Spain). By comparison, the Eatwell Guide recommends the lowest minimum intake: at least 400g. In terms of legumes, only Denmark, Germany and Spain specify minimum intakes, from 100g (Denmark) to 200g (Spain) per week. For nuts, all jurisdictions except Sweden recommend intakes, from 15g to 30g per day. The Eatwell Guide does not recommend intake levels for legumes or nuts.

Examples of qualitative advice for vegetables, fruits and plant proteins in these FBDGs:

  • Eat vegetables and fruit in season, for lower carbon footprint (Flanders, Sweden).
  • Choose field grown rather than glasshouse grown (Flanders, Sweden), although glasshouses powered with renewable energy can have similar footprints (Finland).
  • Locally grown is not necessarily lower carbon (Flanders).
  • Choose ecolabelled and organic to reduce climate impact (Sweden).
  • Legumes are nitrogen-fixing, which saves use of nitrogen fertilizer (Finland).

The Eatwell Guide does not advise on production methods or seasonality in this group.

Vegetables and Fruit

(min g/d)

Legumes

(min g/wk)

Nuts

(g/d)

Denmark

600

100

30

Finland

500

ns

30

Flanders

550

ns

15-25

Germany

550

125

30

Netherlands

450

ns

25

Spain

690

200

20-30

Sweden

500

ns

ns

Eatwell Guide

400

ns

ns

Table 2.4: Recommended intakes for vegetables, fruit and plant proteins, in climate-focused FBDGs

Advice relating to cereals, grains, fats and oils

All climate-focused FBDGs highlight that, in general, grains and cereals have relatively low carbon footprints. Recommended intakes range from 75g (Denmark) to 90g (Sweden) wholegrain foods per day. Rice is identified as a grain with a higher carbon footprint (Denmark, Sweden, Finland), hence, advice is to swap rice for other grains or potatoes.

In terms of fats and oils, plant-based oils are recommended over butter and spreads due to their lower carbon impact (Denmark, Finland, Sweden). Within plant oils, rapeseed oil is presented as a particularly sustainable option, with a low carbon footprint (Sweden).

The Eatwell Guide does not advise about types of grains or fats from a climate perspective. This means that rice is recommended equally alongside pasta and potatoes. It recommends oils from plant sources, such as rapeseed and olive oil, as these are unsaturated fats. The outcome is that the same oils are recommended by Eatwell and the climate-focused FBDGs.

Advice relating to high fat, salt and sugar (HFSS) foods [9]

The seven FBDGs, advise to consume as few foods as possible from this category. This benefits the environment because (i) many foods in this category are ultra-processed (UPF), containing ingredients/processes which are carbon intensive, and (ii) they are nutrient poor. As all food production has an environmental impact, it is best to consume foods that are nutrient dense, to make the environmental impact ‘count’. All the FBDGs recommend tap water as the lowest carbon impact beverage, and that bottled drinks, including bottled water, should be avoided for the sake of the planet.

For HFSS foods, the Eatwell Guide’s recommendations are to avoid or eat in small amounts. The outcome is therefore the same as climate-focused FBDGs. For beverages, unlike the climate-focused FBDGs, the Eatwell Guide does not distinguish between bottled and tap water, and includes milk and diet/sugar-free drinks as recommended drinks.

Advice relating to sustainability

All climate-focused FBDGs contain the strong common messages of (i) only eat as much as you need and (ii) avoid food waste. The latter is advised as important for the planet because every food item wasted has an environmental impact that could have been avoided. The Eatwell Guide advises to eat only as much food as you need. It does not include any advice about food waste.

Summary of similarities and differences between climate-focused FBDGs and the Eatwell Guide

Advice within climate-focused FBDGs which is in common with the Eatwell Guide:

  • Limit intake of red and processed meat (although 5 out of 6 FBDGs set maximum intakes lower than the Eatwell Guide)
  • Eat plenty of vegetables and fruit (although all 6 FBDGs recommend minimum intake levels higher than the Eatwell Guide)
  • Choose vegetable oils, e.g. rapeseed or olive oil, over animal fats
  • HFSS foods are non-essential to diet so only eat in small amounts
  • Only eat as much as you need

Advice within climate-focused FBDGs, which is different from the Eatwell Guide:

  • Eat less meat and animal products, while increasing intake of plants and plant proteins (includes advocating meat-free days)
  • Moderate dairy intake
  • Choose seasonal, field grown vegetables and fruits
  • Choose foods from more sustainable production methods, e.g. organic
  • Choose potatoes, pasta or other grains over rice
  • Favour unprocessed or lightly processed foods, and avoid UPFs
  • The only recommended drinks are tap water, tea and coffee
  • Avoid food waste

Sub-national variation

Of the seven FBDGs reviewed in this section, several come from jurisdictions with a degree of sub-national devolution, with regional powers able to adopt different approaches to certain policy areas. However, although guidance may be presented with regional badging, most often we found the substantive content of FBDGs is the same in different parts of a given country. The Flanders region of Belgium was the only clear example of sub-national variation in FBDGs found by this study. Yet policies to encourage uptake of nationally uniform FBDG do vary regionally in some jurisdictions. For example, across Dutch and Swedish municipalities and Australian States and Canadian Provinces.[10]

Case study: Flanders

This chapter provides an overview of the FBDGs in Flanders, how they were developed, and policy implementations to date. Appendix E provides more details.

FBDGs in Flanders: the Flanders Food Triangle

In Flanders, the FBDGs are captured in a 24-page consumer-facing document “Eating According to the Food Triangle: Good for Yourself and the Planet” (2021). It was developed by the Flemish Institute of Healthy Living (“Gezond Leven”), in cooperation with the Department of the Environment of the Flemish Government. The context of the guidance emphasises that the environmental impact of our food is currently greater than what our planet can bear, so dietary change is needed.

In terms of content, the Food Triangle (Figure 3.1) is offered as the basis for a healthy and environmentally responsible diet. It advises eating more vegetables, fruits, wholegrains and plant proteins, while eating less meat, butter and cheese. Discretionary foods (high in fat, salt and sugar) are separated from the triangle as non-essential to the diet, to be eaten ‘as little as possible’. This category includes processed meat. The guidance also recommends up to three or four days per week of meat-free meals. It provides links to support materials developed by Gezond Leven, including recipes for vegetarian meals and a seasonal buying guide for fruit and vegetables.

How the FBDGs were developed

A ‘science first’ approach was taken to develop the guidance. First, Gezond Leven and the Department of the Environment commissioned a review of scientific literature on the health and environmental impacts of dietary choices. Next, they convened a cross-disciplinary academic expert panel to help analyse the evidence and determine the core content of the final guidance. After this, public-facing messaging was designed and tested amongst citizens, with the support of experts in behaviour and communication. Only after the guidance was finalized were stakeholders consulted. Importantly, these consultations related only to the coordination and implementation of the guidance: they did not influence or change its substance.

Policies, strategies and actions related to the FBDGs

Various policy documents in Flanders have content aligned with the goals of the FBDGs, although they do not refer specifically to the guidance. For example, the ‘Strategic Plan: Flanders Lives Healthier in 2025’ and the ‘The Flemish Climate Policy Plan’ both refer to the need for changes to food consumption habits in the jurisdiction, for reasons of health and climate impact.

Recent strategies have also been launched with the aim to encourage more holistic, systems-based action on food than has been achieved historically. (In the past, policies for food have reflected departmental silos in government.) For example, the 2022 Flemish Food Strategy (“Go4Food”[11]) sets out 11 ‘Food Deal’ themes, around which cross-cutting actions are encouraged to coalesce. Funding is intended for these, albeit not specified in the document.

Another cross-cutting example is the ‘Flemish Protein Strategy 2021-2030’. This aims to increase the ratio of plant protein consumption vs animal protein consumption in Flanders to 60:40. Using CAP funding for domestic plant protein production as a catalyst, the strategy supports collaborations between food supply chain actors, research institutes and NGOs.

In practice, the Protein Strategy has led to increased domestic production of plant protein crops, research/innovation in processing, and promotion of plant proteins by food retailers. Overall, it represents an effort to fund coherent cross-sectoral work on sustainable food, by leveraging EU funding and private sector investment. CAP funding has similarly been used to encourage greater organic food production, albeit to a lesser degree than plant protein production.

Actions specifically to promote climate-friendly diets have been more limited in scope and scale. They have been largely focused on public communications campaigns and work with public catering (Table 3.1).

Policy type

What activities?

Public information campaigns

Gezond Leven has produced various materials and resources for use by public and professionals, including videos, recipe cards, seasonal buying guides, etc. It has also entered into partnership with food retailers to promote increased consumption of plant proteins.

Labelling

No introduction of new product labelling for climate impact.

Regulation

No introduction of new demand-side regulations for climate impact of food. On supply side, targets have been set for levels of sustainable soya used in animal feeds.

Taxes and Subsidies

The Belgian Government introduced a sugar tax in 2015. However no demand side taxes or subsidies on foods have been implemented for climate reasons. On the supply side, funding is available for plant protein production under the Protein Strategy.

Public Procurement and Catering

Gezond Leven works with frontline staff in public catering, supporting them to change menus and practices for health and sustainability. All activity is voluntary, there are no mandatory changes.

Table 3.1: Policies applied in Flanders to encourage take-up of climate-friendly FBDGs

Evaluations of effects of FBDGs and/or policies

The Flanders Government conducts a National Food Survey on a 10-year cycle, with the next round due in 2024. This will be the first opportunity to gauge any changes in public dietary habits from the latest FBDGs. In the meantime, a recent small-scale survey on protein consumption showed trends in the desired direction (increases in plant consumption, decreases in meat consumption), but only to a very small extent. More formal evaluations of policy effectiveness are needed.

Case study: The Netherlands

This chapter provides an overview of the FBDGs in the Netherlands, how they were developed, and policy implementations to date. Appendix F provides more details.

FBDGs in the Netherlands: The Wheel of Five and Seven Steps to Sustainability

In the Netherlands, climate-focused dietary guidance is captured in the “Eating more sustainably: fact sheet” (2022), which accompanies the main “Wheel of Five” dietary model. The factsheet is a 10-page document targeted at professionals/policymakers. It sets out the case for environmentally sustainable diets, and explains how the Dutch diet should change to be in line with science-based planetary health recommendations.

The factsheet states that shifting from the current diet to the Wheel of Five is good for health and climate, but it also gives more specific advice about the most sustainable options to choose (Figure 4.1). The 7 ways are: (i) eat less meat (opt more often for pulses, nuts or eggs); (ii) waste as little as possible (buy and cook what you need); (iii) eat recommended amounts (moderate your snacks and sweets); (iv) drink mostly tap water; (v) eat enough dairy and cheese (but within bounds); (vi) buy seasonally (and check product origins); (vii) choose premium sustainability labels.

How FBDGs were developed

Two agencies led the development of the Dutch FBDGs. These were the National Institute for Public Health and the Environment (NIPHE), a research centre which collects and analyses scientific evidence and conducts data modelling, and the Netherlands Nutrition Centre (NNC), a body which translates the science into practical FBDGs for consumers and health professionals. Both are independent bodies, funded solely by the Ministries of Health and Agriculture.

In 2015, the NIPHE reviewed the scientific evidence on health and climate impacts of diets, with input from academic subject experts. NIPHE used this intelligence to model dietary guidelines as close as possible to the existing Dutch diet, while meeting parameters of health, climate impact, feasibility and impact on different target groups.

The NNC used the modelled solutions to draft the public facing dietary guidance, including the graphics. A transparent consultation process followed with experts, to check for any errors/omissions in the science, and also with health professionals, to advise on practical implementation.

The food industry was specifically not involved in the consultation. Only after the final guidance was completed were meetings held with industry representatives. This approach was taken to maintain both the real and perceived independence of the NIPHE and NNC. In total, the development process took several years.

Policies, strategies and actions related to the FBDGs

Policies relevant to food in the Netherlands appear to reflect the traditional priorities of host ministries, with relatively little integration of health and climate goals. For example, the 2018 ‘National Prevention Agreement: Towards a Healthier Netherlands’ makes no reference to climate or sustainability, while the 2019 ‘Climate Agreement’ contains only one brief reference to the need for change in food consumption habits. The 2015 ‘National Food Policy’ includes goals to increase consumption of fruits and vegetables, but these are justified for health not climate reasons.

However, the Dutch National Protein Strategy is more integrative. As in Flanders, CAP funding has been used to encourage plant protein production at farm level. This is being combined with further funding under economy-wide ‘green growth’ schemes, from both public and private sources, to encourage market growth along the supply chain.

Actions specifically to encourage take-up of the FBDGs are led by the NNC. They are centred on public communication tools and work with public caterers. In addition, one Dutch municipality (Haarlem city) is imposing a ban on outdoor advertising of meat. Table 4.1 provides more details.

Policy type

What activities?

Public information campaigns

The NNC has launched two apps, to help consumers make healthier, more sustainable food choices. One of these, “Mijn Eetmeter”, allows users to record their eating habits and get tailored advice to improve their diet. This app has >2 million downloads and good ratings on GooglePlay and Apple Store.

Labelling

No new labelling regime introduced, instead the NNC advises consumers on a set of the most reliable existing labels/certification schemes for making sustainable product choices.

Regulation

At municipal level, the city of Haarlem will implement a ban on outdoor advertising of meat products in 2024. Climate impact is part of the motivation for the ban. There are no similar restrictions at national level.

Taxes and Subsidies

There are no demand-side taxes or subsidies on foods for climate reasons (a sugar tax was introduced in 2023). In 2018 the Dutch Government stated an intention to remove VAT from fruit and vegetables. However, this was not implemented due to concerns about feasibility and effectiveness. On the supply side, funding is available for plant protein production and processing under the Protein Strategy.

Public Procurement and Catering

The NNC works with public caterers to support and encourage them to develop more sustainable menus and practices. However, there are no mandatory measures imposed for climate impact.

Table 4.1: Policies applied in the Netherlands to encourage take-up of climate-friendly FBDGs

Evaluations of effects of the FBDGs and/or policies

The NNC undertakes consumer research and also administers the Dutch National Food Survey. Their data indicate that awareness of the Wheel of Five dietary model in the Dutch population is 71%, and trend analysis from the Dutch National Food Survey indicates small increases in fruit and vegetable consumption, and small decreases in meat consumption between 2007 and 2021. The changes are small, but in the right direction. However, policy effectiveness has not been evaluated formally.

Case Study: Sweden

This chapter provides an overview of the FBDGs in Sweden, how they were developed, and policy implementations to date. Appendix G provides more details.

FBDGs in Sweden: “Eat greener, not too much, and be active”

In Sweden, the FBDGs are captured in the 28-page consumer-facing document “Find your way to eat greener, not too much, and be active” (2015). It was developed by the Swedish National Food Agency (SNFA), in cooperation with the Swedish Public Health Agency, Board of Agriculture and Environmental Protection Agency. In terms of context, the guidance makes the argument for a holistic approach to eating, and for considering the environmental impact of food choices.

Advice is structured around 3 sections: 1. things to eat/do more of; 2. things to switch; and 3. things to eat less of (Figure 5.1). For each named food group (vegetables and fruits; seafood; wholegrains; healthy fats; low fat dairy products; red and processed meat; salt; sugar), there is a dedicated page which explains the advice in more detail, including the link to environmental impacts. These pages also offer specific ingredient and recipe suggestions to help make the change.

How FBDGs were developed

The Swedish National Food Agency is an independent, government-funded body, which administers public diet and health activities. It is one of 25 government agencies with special responsibility for achieving the government’s environmental objectives.

The FBDGs development process was science led, although stakeholder input happened earlier in the process than in Flanders and the Netherlands. From 2008-13, the Swedish Food Agency commissioned a series of reports on the environmental impacts of different foods, alongside evidence on the health effects of diet gathered from Nordic Nutrition Recommendations (NNR)[12]. The joint evidence was reviewed, with experts from the Swedish Public Health Agency, Board of Agriculture and Environmental Protection Agency. The review was supported by a stakeholder panel.

In 2014, a public consultation took place, including participants from industry, consumer and patient organisations, and public health professionals. Then the guidance was drafted and tested with consumers. The guidance was published in 2016/17. The whole process from initial discussions to publication took almost 10 years.

Since the development of this guidance, the latest revision of the Nordic Nutrition Recommendations (NNR), in 2023, has been published. It includes explicit reference to climate impact. It therefore provides a very high standard, scientifically informed evidence base on climate-friendly diets.

Policies, strategies and actions related to the FBDGs

In Sweden, the policy landscape for sustainable diets appears fragmented. For example, the 2016 “National Food Strategy for Sweden”, and subsequent 2019 “Action Plan”, focus almost exclusively on agricultural production. Meanwhile, the 2016 “Strategy for Sustainable Consumption” contains only a brief reference to food. The 2018 “Climate Framework Policy”, which sets out the Swedish Government’s net zero targets for the whole economy, also makes no reference to food consumption or dietary change.

In 2021, the Swedish Government tasked the Swedish Food Agency and Public Health Agency to propose areas of action needed for a more sustainable food system in Sweden, and indicators to measure progress[13]. The work was based on consultations with authorities, industry and civil society. The report, published 2024, emphasizes the need for joined-up policies to tackle health and climate problems. However, given recent shifts in politics in Sweden and hardening resistance from industry stakeholders to food system change, it may be challenging for officials to take forward many of the recommended Actions in the report.

Actions specifically to encourage take-up of the FBDGs are led by the Swedish Food Agency. To date, they have focused on public communications activities and work with public caterers, in particular schools. Table 5.1 provides more details.

Policy Type

What Activities?

Public information campaigns

The Swedish Food Agency provides online information and manages a citizen panel to discuss healthy and sustainable eating. The Consumer Agency promotes food waste reduction within a circular economy.

Labelling

No new product labelling introduced for climate-friendly food. Consumers are encouraged to refer to ‘Keyhole’ symbol (Swedish labelling scheme for healthy foods) and organic labels.

Regulation

No regulatory changes applied.

Taxes and Subsidies

No direct taxes or subsidies on the demand side to encourage shift to climate friendly diets. On supply side, there has been direct government investment in organic farming, to increase domestic land area under organic production.

Public Procurement and Catering

Post-launch of FBDGs, the Swedish Food Agency undertook engagement work in school catering, this included encouragement of vegetarian days (voluntary). In 2020, “A New Recipe for School Meals” was launched, a collaboration between the National Food Agency and Vinnova, the Government research and innovation agency. The latter funded 4 municipalities to trial different projects, including measurement of waste and selling leftover meals[14].

Table 5.1: Policies applied in Sweden to encourage take-up of climate-friendly FBDGs

Evaluations of effects of the FBDGs and/or policies

No formal evaluations have been conducted of the effect of the FBDGs on dietary habits. However, consumption trend data show that meat consumption peaked in 2016 and has subsequently declined whilst the proportion of Swedish meat within total meat consumed has increased. This suggests there has been some response to the “eat less but better” messaging, with ‘better’ meaning ‘Swedish’.

Implications for the potential development and implementation of climate-friendly FBDGs in Scotland

Having assessed climate-friendly FBGDs in other jurisdictions, and explored their development and policy implementation in Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden, this chapter considers the possible implications for Scotland. Throughout this chapter, the FBDGs of Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden are used as climate-focused comparators.

Dietary profile of Scotland compared with jurisdictions having climate-focused FBDGs

Studies show repeatedly that the diet of the average Scottish adult is unhealthy. It comprises higher than recommended intakes of calories, fat, sugar and salt, and lower intakes of fibre and fruit and vegetables[15]. These are associated with a range of chronic health problems, including diabetes, cardiovascular disease (CVD), hypertension and certain cancers.

In addition, average diets for some groups of Scottish consumers are deficient in micronutrients such as selenium and iodine. These deficiencies are also associated with a range of health problems, including fatigue, mental impairments and weakened immune systems. However, intake rates of red and processed meats are within the Scottish Dietary Goals maximum recommended for almost three quarters of the population[16].

Belgium

(2014)

Netherlands (2021)

Sweden

(2010/11)

Scotland

(2021)

Fruit

115

134

128

134

Vegetables

155

174

176

131

Meat

104

92

110

80

Dairy

202

329

245

230

18 <= BMI <25

49%

50%

49%

32% (42%)*

25 <= BMI <30

35%

35%

35%

36% (35%)*

BMI >= 30

14%

13%

14%

31% (20%)*

Population

6.8m

18.0m

10.6m

5.4m

Table 6.1: Estimated adults’ mean consumption (g/day) of selected food types, and percentage of adults categorised as overweight or obese, in selected comparator jurisdictions[17]

* Scottish-specific BMI figures with UK figures in brackets from same Eurostat source as other countries. Comparisons are indicative given differences in survey methods, definitions and timings. See also Appendices B and C.

Table 6.1 above shows intakes for different food groups in Scotland, compared with Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden. Notwithstanding caveats regarding precise comparability, the figures suggest that Scottish fruit consumption is relatively high compared to the other jurisdictions, while meat and vegetable intakes are relatively low. Dairy consumption appears similar to Sweden but lower than the Netherlands. Body Mass Index (BMI) scores, as indicators of broader diet-related health, are also similar for the proportion of the population overweight, but Scotland (and the UK) have markedly higher obesity rates.

Potential impacts on the Scottish population from take-up of climate-focused FBDGs

Potential Revisions to Eatwell Guide

Potential Risk to Population Health

Meat


  • Clearer advice to reduce intake of all meat, in particular red meat

  • New maximum intake level for all meat

  • Lower maximum intake level for red/processed meat

Low, depending on substitution scenario

Dairy


  • New advice to moderate dairy intake

Deficiency risks for iron and iodine, depending on substitution scenario

Vegetables, fruits and plant proteins


  • Higher minimum intake levels for vegetables and fruit

  • New intake levels for plant proteins

  • Strengthened advice on choosing processed plant protein foods

  • Strengthened advice on choosing vegetarian and vegan diets

Low

Cereals and grains


  • New advice to favour potatoes, pasta and other grains over rice

Low

HFSS foods


  • Strengthened advice to favour less processed foods and avoid UPFs

Low

Beverages


  • New advice to favour tap water

Low

Other


  • New advice to choose foods from sustainable production sources, including organic, agroecological, seasonal, fieldgrown

  • New advice to avoid food waste

Low

Table 6.2. Examples of likely revisions needed to Eatwell Guide to align with more climate-focused FBDGs, and potential risks to Scottish population

The key features of climate-focused FBDGs were discussed in Chapter 2, summarizing similarities and differences between climate-focused guidance and the Eatwell Guide. Table 6.2 lists possible revisions for guidance in Scotland, to align with more climate-focused FBDGs. It also indicates the potential risks of negative impacts on the Scottish population, should the revised guidance be taken up. The potential risks for meat, dairy and sustainable sourcing advice are further discussed below. Potential risks for population sub-groups are discussed in section 6.3.

Potential impacts of revised meat intake advice

For greater climate focus, revisions to the Eatwell guidance would likely specify a lower maximum intake for red/processed meat, a new maximum intake for all meat, and strengthened messaging on reducing meat generally in the diet.

Comrie et al (2024) modelled the effects on micronutrient intake and of chronic disease risks from a 20% reduction in meat intake in Scotland, i.e. to levels consistent with the recommendations of UK Climate Change Committee (CCC).

They found that a 16% reduction could be achieved by encouraging the 28% highest red/processed meat eaters to limit their intake, of those meats alone, to the current Eatwell/SDGs maximum of 70g per day. To achieve the CCC’s 20% reduction target, the average intake of red/processed meat would need to reduce to 60g per day. This would impact the highest 32% of current red/processed meat consumers.

If meat intakes are substituted with alternative protein sources, e.g. fish, dairy or eggs, both scenarios above represent low risk options in terms of nutritional impacts. They would also bring health benefits associated with lowering red and red processed meat intakes. However, if meat intakes are substituted with refined grains or HFSS foods, then there are risks of diets becoming less rather than more healthy[18]. Therefore, revised dietary guidance needs to include advice about healthy and accessible substitutions for meat. Other policies need to make those substitutions affordable and accessible.

Non-GHG related environmental impacts are also possible from reduction in meat intakes, depending on which foods people switch to. Increases in demand for fish could exacerbate marine pollution/ecosystem problems. Also, switching from red ruminant meat (beef, lamb) to non-ruminant meat may lead to increases in intensive pig and poultry systems. Whilst these systems are more carbon efficient, they can increase air and water pollution problems[19]. To address these risks, a holistic perspective on environmental impact is needed during the scientific evidence gathering phase of the FBDG revisions. Other policies need to address environmental impacts of fish, pig and poultry systems.

Potential impacts of revised dairy intake advice

For greater climate focus, revisions to dietary guidance would likely set new advice to moderate dairy intake[20].

Comrie et al (2024) modelled the nutritional and chronic disease impacts of reducing dairy intake across the population by 20%, alongside meat reduction. They find that unless substituting with eggs, there are deficiency risks in the general population for iron and iodine. They highlight that as dairy is consumed in greater quantities across the population than meat, there is more reliance on it for micronutrients. Dairy is also a source of protection against Type 2 diabetes. Therefore, some nutritional and disease risks are possible, at the population level, from moderation of dairy intake.

In principle, nutritional and disease risks could be addressed with plant-based substitutes. However, these could require considerable changes to current dietary habits for many, and substitutes may have cost and accessibility issues. These have implications for the structure of the food environment. New advice on such changes would be needed, as the current guidance gives limited explanation. The new advice would need to address the composition of processed plant-based meat and dairy substitutes, in terms of fat, salt and sugar, and potentially , the use of fortification to supply key micronutrients. As is the case with existing meat and dairy products, at present, there is high variability between products and brands in the market, in terms of composition.

Potential impacts of advice on sustainable sourcing

For greater climate focus, revisions to the Eatwell guidance would likely introduce new advice on sustainable sourcing, for example choosing organic or agroecological products. These products are typically more expensive than conventional alternatives. In periods of generally squeezed incomes and high food price inflation, this advice may be unobtainable for many. Careful messaging would be needed within the guidance to address risks of frustration/alienation. At the same time, policy measures are needed to make sustainably sourced food more affordable and accessible[21].

Potential impacts on sub-groups of Scottish population from take-up of climate-focused FBDGs

With reference the likely changes to Eatwell guidance presented in Table 6.2, potential impacts are as follows:

Advice to reduce meat intake and moderate dairy intake

The modelling work conducted by Comrie et al (2024), on the impacts of reducing meat and dairy intakes across the population by 20%, also considered sub-groups. Depending on the substitution scenario, the authors found risks of some micronutrient deficiencies. These included selenium and zinc intakes for women and calcium intakes for young adults. Revised guidance on meat and dairy intakes would therefore need to include careful messaging and tailored advice for sub-groups, such as these, who may be at greater risk of micronutrient deficiencies. These problems may be exacerbated for women and young adults in lower income groups, who may find it more difficult to afford or access suitable meat alternatives, such as fish, eggs or plant proteins. Ability and capacity to cook meals using alternatives may also disproportionately affect these groups.

Advice to increase vegetable, fruit and plant protein intakes

Some population sub-groups may find it more difficult than others to access the range of vegetables, fruits and plant proteins recommended by revised guidance. As a result, they could face nutritional and disease risks, disproportionate to the wider population. These sub-groups could include lower-income consumers, who may struggle to afford more expensive items and/or cook the recommended foods. They could also include people in rural areas, or in urban food deserts/swamps, who face more limited ranges of foods and food retail options.

Advice to choose sustainably sourced foods

Citizens in lower income groups may be disproportionately unable to follow this advice. This could be particularly alienating. Careful messaging would be needed within the guidance. Programmes and initiatives are also needed to make sustainably sourced food more accessible and affordable.

Advice to favour potatoes, pasta and other grains over rice

This advice could disproportionately impact sub-groups whose diets rely more heavily on rice than the wider population. Tailored messaging would be needed, as well as advice on how to make the most climate-friendly choices for rice.

Advice to avoid UPFs and avoid food waste

Reducing consumption of processed and ultra-processed foods (UPFs) requires access to alternatives and a capacity for more labour and/or energy intensive food preparation. Hence consumers with restricted access due to income and/or food environment constraints and/or lacking the necessary time or facilities for food preparation (e.g. kitchen equipment) will be less likely to be able to avoid processed and UPFs. For similar reasons, consumers with limited or no access to appliances such as fridges and freezers may find it more difficult to follow advice to avoid food waste.

Policies, strategies and actions to implement climate-focused diets

Policy coordination for climate-focused diets

Policies to encourage take-up of climate-focused diets should make sustainable choices the easiest choices for consumers. This means tackling the food environment in a holistic way, using strategic packages of policy measures and instruments[22]. This requires collaboration and co-ownership between multiple government departments[23].

The case studies of Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden reveal problems with coordination and coherent policy implementation on climate-friendly diets, to date. Siloed thinking has been evident, reinforced by resource allocations tied to narrow departmental remits rather than cross-cutting goals.

More recent food strategies aim to encourage more holistic, systems-based action on food and diets (e.g. the Flemish Food Strategy). However, implementation is at an early stage, and formal evaluations of their effectiveness have yet to be conducted.

Policy measures and actions for climate-focused diets.

Table 7.1 gives examples of specific policy measures for climate-focused diets that may feature in holistic packages. It also shows whether any of these measures have been applied in Flanders, the Netherlands or Sweden.

On both the demand and supply sides of the food system there are fiscal and regulatory measures. Also on the demand side are public information provision, labelling and public catering. The supply side also includes influencing voluntary industry action. In Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden, public information campaigns and public catering dominate on the demand side, while fiscal measures and influencing industry dominate on the supply side. The pros and cons of these measures are discussed below, with implications for Scotland.

Policy Measure

Examples

At least one example applied in Flanders, Netherlands, Sweden?

Demand Side

Public information provision

Climate-friendly dietary guidance and information via websites, brochures, social media, digital technologies, face-to-face.

Yes (F, N, S).

Labelling

Certifications for organic/agroecological production; carbon labels.

No new climate labels developed.

Fiscal Measures

‘Cash first’ programmes for lower income groups; taxes on higher carbon foods; VAT reductions on lower carbon foods.

No food taxes or subsidies for climate reasons.

Regulation

Advertising restrictions on higher carbon foods; food waste restrictions.

One city-level ban on outdoor advertising of meat (N).

Public catering provision

Climate-friendly public food procurement standards; lower carbon menu design; carbon literacy training for catering staff.

Yes, voluntary actions for climate (F, N, S)

Supply Side

Influencing industry actions

Voluntary industry actions to reformulate products, give shelf space to plant proteins

Yes (F, N)

Regulation

Climate-friendly domestic food production standards; climate-friendly standards for imported foods; mandatory carbon measurement and reporting.

Yes (F, N, S)

Fiscal measures

Subsidies for climate-friendly farming; funding for climate-friendly research and innovation.

Yes (F, N, S)

Table 7.1. Examples of specific policy measures for climate-focused diets that may feature in holistic packages and adopted by at least one case-study jurisdiction

Public information provision

This is a popular measure to encourage climate-friendly consumption. All three case study jurisdictions have applied it. Public information campaigns are relatively quick and inexpensive to implement, and the range of options now includes digital tools that offer interactivity (e.g. the Mijn Eetmeter diet tracking app in the Netherlands[24]).

However, there is little evidence that information alone can shift dietary habits. Population heterogeneity is significant, and people engage with or avoid information for multiple reasons[25]. Nevertheless, public information has a role to play in packages of policy measures. It may help to address low awareness of diet and sustainability issues in the population. Also, public information can signal the government’s priorities and direction of travel to citizens, industry and public bodies. This can be a way to show leadership to stakeholders[26].

Implications for Scotland:

Develop public information campaigns or messaging for climate-friendly diets as part of strategic policy packages, rather than stand-alone actions. Consider the multiple audiences for information on climate-friendly diets, and explore the potential for campaigns to signal clearly the policy agenda to a range of stakeholders.

Labelling

In theory, labelling schemes for climate-friendly foods can have an ‘industry pull’ effect. As producers change their practices in order to get certified, this brings widespread improvements[27]. However, evidence for the capacity of labels to change consumer behaviour is mixed at best[28]. Consumers already face multiple labelling schemes which compete for their attention. Also, environmental impact labels for food products are beset with technical challenges. For example, standardised, reliable metrics for carbon scores are lacking. In addition, labels which only show carbon values are ignoring other important environmental impacts.

For these reasons, climate-friendly labelling is uncommon[29]. None of the case study jurisdictions have sought to develop climate labels. Instead, they recommend existing certification schemes that are already familiar to consumers, as ways to identify more sustainable options. These include organic labels.

Implications for Scotland:

The development of any new carbon-specific labelling is unlikely to be worthwhile. Following the examples of the Netherlands and Sweden, it would be more feasible to focus on existing certification schemes (e.g. organic, meat quality assurance schemes), and explore ways to strengthen their climate relevance.

Fiscal measures and regulation (demand side)

Demand side regulation has been used actively in the food sector for public health reasons. Examples include restrictions on advertising unhealthy foods to children, and on the use of trans fats in food manufacturing. Fiscal measures (e.g. subsidies, taxes) have also been implemented for health reasons, for example, the Soft Drinks Industry Levy. Both types of measure are associated with stronger behaviour change outcomes than information or labelling. They are also associated with driving positive changes in industry practices, including reformulation of products[30].

However, these measures are less commonly applied explicitly in relation to climate-friendly diets, as they can have unintended consequences and evidence on effectiveness is mixed[31]. A risk of taxing high carbon foods like meat, for example, is that some consumers switch to foods of lower nutritional value, such as HFSS foods. As lower income households are already more likely to purchase such foods, such taxes risk exacerbating health inequalities. Furthermore, taxes on domestic high carbon foods may lead to carbon ‘leakage’ through import/export substitution effects, with no net reduction in global climate impact.

Implications for Scotland:

Taxes on foods for climate reasons may lead, unintentionally, to regressive outcomes. To address risks of exacerbating health inequalities, taxes should be partnered with policies to make healthier substitutes affordable and accessible to lower income groups. To address risks of GHG leakages, domestic carbon taxes should be partnered with appropriate trade policies.

Importantly however, not all tax/subsidy powers reside with the Scottish Government. Even those that do are subject to UK-wide agreement under the Internal Market Act 2020 and/or the Subsidy Control Act 2022.[32] Hence not all fiscal policy options are necessarily feasible within Scotland.

Public catering provision

Public catering is frequently presented as a policy area with the potential for direct behaviour change towards more climate-friendly diets[33]. There are two main ways this can happen. First, procurement standards and criteria can be revised to be more climate-focused. Criteria can relate to food and non-food purchases, facilities and equipment. Second, catering service practices can be revised to reduce climate impact. This can include, for example, recipe and menu design, and food waste reduction.

Flanders, the Netherlands and Sweden have all taken climate-related public catering actions, including introduction of meat-free days in school menus. To date, these actions have largely been voluntary for their sectors.

Implications for Scotland:
In the Scottish public sector, food procurement and catering provision are governed by separate standards. Often, they are also managed by different teams and processes, which presents challenges to coherent decision-making on climate impact.

To make public food procurement more climate friendly, a higher minimum weighting could be applied to climate criteria in contract awards. Suppliers could be asked to provide more carbon information, or be part of certification schemes. However, such demands may disproportionately impact small suppliers or first-time bidders. This would conflict with wider goals to encourage greater diversity in public procurement. Measures to reduce this risk may include supporting suppliers to meet more exacting climate requirements. Procurement officers could also be offered additional sustainability training.

Catering provision standards vary according to sector. In schools, statutory standards for food are based on nutritional not climate goals[34]. These standards could be revisited to explore ways to make them more climate-friendly. This would increase their consistency with local authority obligations to measure and reduce the carbon footprints of their services[35]. Extension of the Food For Life programme to all local authorities (currently voluntary) could also be a route to more climate focus.

In practice, school catering managers are increasingly taking voluntary climate actions, e.g. food waste reduction and meat-free days. Measures are needed to better support these actions, e.g. by strengthening public information on sustainable diets, and offering training and support for climate-friendly catering to service teams.

Influencing voluntary industry actions

Governments have well-established engagement with industry to encourage voluntary actions for public health reasons. Actions are now being encouraged to promote more climate-friendly food choices, for example, by reformulating products or changing microenvironments in-store to shape choice architecture[36]. Such approaches can be attractive to government since they avoid the time and effort needed to design and implement formal regulatory controls or taxes. However, industry actors may withdraw if market circumstances alter or industry leadership changes. Hence, voluntary agreements need to be monitored. They are often encouraged through the threat of imposing non-voluntary arrangements (e.g. regulation, fiscal measures) if engagement levels drop[37].

Both Flanders and the Netherlands are currently encouraging voluntary industry agreements related to sustainable diets. Under their Protein Strategies, they are encouraging domestic processors and retailers to increase activity in plant proteins. They have done this by presenting direct investments in domestic plant protein, derived from CAP Green Deal funding, as a market growth opportunity (see below). This is an example of more holistic policymaking, with coherence across supply and demand side measures.

Implications for Scotland:

Persuading industry partners to voluntarily adjust their practices requires either a perceived threat of future regulatory controls/fiscal distinctives from non-adjustment, or perceived benefits from doing so. Achieving either requires repeated engagement with industry stakeholders to establish mutual understanding of objectives, constraints and feasible options. Scottish industry stakeholders are already routinely involved in agricultural and food policy discussions, but voluntary actions by different stakeholders often progress at different rates. This can lead to poorly coordinated outcomes.[38]

Regulation and fiscal measures (supply side)

Various regulatory controls are applied to agricultural production across the EU, and some of these relate explicitly to mitigating GHG emissions. For example, farmers’ support funding requires adherence to Good Agricultural and Environmental Condition (GAEC) criteria. EU-level efforts also seek to regulate food imports on the basis of their GHG emissions. However, the link between all regulatory measures and domestic dietary guidance is often implicit at best.

Similarly, fiscal support for domestic agricultural production is also deployed under the EU-wide CAP. Much of this takes the form of decoupled payments not tied explicitly to the production of any particular (or indeed any) food product. However, some support is targeted explicitly at specific sectors, such as organic production and plant protein production. For the latter, further public funding from other sources has been deployed for R&D activities and to leverage private funding along the supply chain. This has been the case in Flanders and Netherlands’ Protein Strategies.

Implications for Scotland:

Agricultural production is already subject to various regulatory controls. Revision to agricultural funding support is likely to introduce new requirements related to GHG emissions. This will include obligations to monitor and report emissions[39]. Such improvements to the climate impact of Scottish agricultural production can be connected to advice within FBDGs, to choose more sustainably sourced foods.

Regulatory controls on imported food items fall outwith Scottish Government devolved powers.

Supply-side fiscal measures are already deployed within Scotland, most notably with respect to holders of agricultural land but also through investment and training grants for other parts of the supply-chain and funding for a range of research institutions. The majority of funding through such measures is not currently linked strongly to climate-related dietary change. However, as in some other countries, there may be scope to do so. This will require greater cross-departmental working and reprioritization of current budgets. Such issues feature in current parliamentary scrutiny of the Agricultural and Rural Communities Bill, including in relation to Good Food Nation ambitions.[40]

The scope for deploying new tax measures is more limited given constraints on devolved powers.

Conclusions

Listed by project objectives, the key findings are summarised here.

Dietary guidelines and recommendations in other jurisdictions

Out of 33 jurisdictions studied, only seven have FBDGs with extensive climate focus.

The main differences between health-focused and climate-focused guidance are that the latter recommends greater meat reduction, in particular ruminant meat, moderating dairy intake, choosing sustainably sourced foods, avoiding highly processed foods and avoiding food waste.

In three jurisdictions with climate-focused FBDGs (Flanders, the Netherlands, Sweden), the guidance was developed via a ‘science first’ approach, using expert panels and reviews. Stakeholder inputs were restricted to the final steps of messaging and implementation, to preserve the independence of the guidance.

Policies, strategies and actions taken to encourage progress to the guidelines

Policy implementation for climate-focused guidance requires coordination across government departments and budgets, and strategic packages of policy measures. These are needed to tackle food environments holistically, to make climate-friendly choices affordable and accessible.

Policy implementation of FBDGs in the three jurisdictions has lacked coordination, and measures have been largely limited to public information campaigns and encouragement of voluntary actions in public catering (e.g. menu adjustments).

Potential applications in Scotland and impacts on different groups

Adoption of climate-focused FBDGs would be a generally low-regret action, consistent with the direction of travel for policies relating to climate and health.

Some micronutrient deficiency risks are possible for certain population groups, depending on which foods are substituted. These include women, young adults, and lower income households. Other risks include import/export carbon leakage.

To address such issues, a coordinated cross-departmental policy approach would be needed, deploying a mix of supply-side and demand-side measures.

References and other supporting literature

Abrahamse, W., 2020. How to effectively encourage sustainable food choices: a mini-review of available evidence. Frontiers in psychology, 11, p.589674.

Aguirre-Sánchez, L., Teschner, R., Lalchandani, N.K., El Maohub, Y. and Suggs, L.S., 2023. Climate change mitigation potential in dietary guidelines: A global review. Sustainable Production and Consumption.

Ahrens, W., Brenner, H., Flechtner-Mors, M., Harrington, J.M., Hebestreit, A., Kamphuis, C.B., Kelly, L., Laxy, M., Luszczynska, A., Mazzocchi, M. and Murrin, C., 2022. Dietary behaviour and physical activity policies in Europe: learnings from the Policy Evaluation Network (PEN). European journal of public health, 32(Supplement_4), pp.iv114-iv125.

Ammann, J., Arbenz, A., Mack, G., Nemecek, T. and El Benni, N., 2023. A review on policy instruments for sustainable food consumption. Sustainable Production and Consumption.

Andretta, I., Hickmann, F.M., Remus, A., Franceschi, C.H., Mariani, A.B., Orso, C., Kipper, M., Létourneau-Montminy, M.P. and Pomar, C., 2021. Environmental impacts of pig and poultry production: insights from a systematic review. Frontiers in Veterinary Science, 8, p.750733.

Angelsen, A., Starke, A.D. and Trattner, C., 2023. Healthiness and environmental impact of dinner recipes vary widely across developed countries. Nature Food, pp.1-9.

Astbury, C.C., Aguirre, E., Cullerton, K., Monsivais, P. and Penney, T.L., 2021. How supportive is the global food supply of food-based dietary guidelines? A descriptive time series analysis of food supply alignment from 1961 to 2013. SSM-Population Health, 15, p.100866.

Bailey, R. and Harper, D.R., 2015. Reviewing interventions for healthy and sustainable diets. Chatham House, The Royal Institute of International Affairs.

Barton, K.L., Wrieden, W.L., Sherriff, A., Armstrong, J. and Anderson, A.S., 2015. Trends in socio-economic inequalities in the Scottish diet: 2001–2009. Public health nutrition, 18(16), pp.2970-2980.

Barton, K.L., Masson, L.F. and Wrieden, W.L., 2018. Estimation of food and nutrient intakes from food purchase data in Scotland, 2001-2015: report to Food Standards Scotland.

Barton, K.L., Ronald, C. and Savage, A., 2022. Estimation of food and nutrient intakes from food purchase data in Scotland between 2001 and 2018. Report to Food Standards Scotland

BDA 2020. Eating patterns for health and environmental sustainability: A Reference Guide for Dietitians. British Association of Dietitians.

Bechthold, A., Boeing, H., Tetens, I., Schwingshackl, L. and Nöthlings, U., 2018. Perspective: food-based dietary guidelines in Europe—scientific concepts, current status, and perspectives. Advances in nutrition9(5), pp.544-560.

Benton, T.G. and Bailey, R., 2019. The paradox of productivity: agricultural productivity promotes food system inefficiency. Global Sustainability, 2, p.e6.

Bergman, K., Lövestam, E., Nowicka, P. and Eli, K., 2020. ‘A holistic approach’: incorporating sustainability into biopedagogies of healthy eating in Sweden’s dietary guidelines. Sociology of Health & Illness42(8), pp.1785-1800.

Binns, C.W., Lee, M.K., Maycock, B., Torheim, L.E., Nanishi, K. and Duong, D.T.T., 2021. Climate change, food supply, and dietary guidelines. Annual review of public health42, pp.233-255.

Blomhoff, R., Anderson, R., Arnesen, A. et al. 2023. Nordic Nutrition recommendations 2023. Copenhagen: Nordic Council of Ministers.

Brennan, M., 2023. Food Systems Transformation in Scotland—The Journey to, Vision of, and Challenges Facing the New Good Food Nation (Scotland) Act. Sustainability, 15(19), p.14579.

Brink, E., van Rossum, C., Postma-Smeets, A., Stafleu, A., Wolvers, D., van Dooren, C., Toxopeus, I., Buurma-Rethans, E., Geurts, M. and Ocké, M., 2019. Development of healthy and sustainable food-based dietary guidelines for the Netherlands. Public health nutrition, 22(13), pp.2419-2435.

Burke, D.T., Hynds, P. and Priyadarshini, A., 2023. Quantifying farm-to-fork greenhouse gas emissions for five dietary patterns across Europe and North America: A pooled analysis from 2009 to 2020. Resources, Environment and Sustainability, p.100108.

Caleffi, S., Hawkes, C. and Walton, S., 2023. 45 actions to orient food systems towards environmental sustainability: co-benefits and trade-offs. London, UK: Centre for Food Policy

Cámara, M., Giner, R.M., González-Fandos, E., López-García, E., Mañes, J., Portillo, M.P., Rafecas, M., Domínguez, L. and Martínez, J.A., 2021. Food-based dietary guidelines around the world: A comparative analysis to update AESAN scientific committee dietary recommendations. Nutrients13(9), p.3131.

Cara, K.C., Goldman, D.M., Kollman, B.K., Amato, S.S., Tull, M.D. and Karlsen, M.C., 2023. Commonalities among dietary recommendations from 2010-2021 clinical practice guidelines: A meta-epidemiological study from the American College of Lifestyle Medicine. Advances in Nutrition.

Cobiac, L.J. and Scarborough, P., 2019. Modelling the health co-benefits of sustainable diets in the UK, France, Finland, Italy and Sweden. European journal of clinical nutrition, 73(4), pp.624-633.

Comerford, K.B., Miller, G.D., Boileau, A.C., Masiello Schuette, S.N., Giddens, J.C. and Brown, K.A., 2021. Global review of dairy recommendations in food-based dietary guidelines. Frontiers in nutrition, 8, p.671999.

Comrie, F., Jaacks, l., Kennedy, J., Mcdonald, A., McNeill, G., Runions, R., Stewart, C., Vonderschmidt, A. (2024). Approaches to modelling impact of reduction in meat and dairy intakes on micronutrient intakes and disease risk. CXC, University of Edinburgh, Food Standards Scotland.

Crippa et al., 2021. Food systems are responsible for a third of global anthropogenic GHG emissions. Nature Food, 2(3), pp.198-209.

Cullum, A., 2024. Developing food-based dietary recommendations in the UK. Proceedings of the Nutrition Society, 83(1), pp.55-61.

Darmon N, Drewnowski A. Contribution of food prices and diet cost to socioeconomic disparities in diet quality and health: a systematic review and analysis. Nutr Rev. 2015;73:643–660.

Dawkins, E., André, K., Leander, E., Axelsson, K. and Gerger Swartling, Å., 2023. Policy for sustainable consumptionan assessment of Swedish municipalities. Frontiers in Sustainability, 4, p.1265733.

Djojosoeparto, S.K., Kamphuis, C.B., Vandevijvere, S., Murrin, C., Stanley, I., Romaniuk, P., Harrington, J.M., Poelman, M.P. and PEN Consortium, 2022. Strength of EU-level food environment policies and priority recommendations to create healthy food environments. European Journal of Public Health, 32(3), pp.504-511.

Djojosoeparto, S.K., Kamphuis, C., Vandevijvere, S. and Poelman, M.P., 2022. How can national government policies improve food environments in the Netherlands? International Journal of Public Health, 67, p.1604115.

Drewnowski, A., 2020. Impact of nutrition interventions and dietary nutrient density on productivity in the workplace. Nutrition reviews, 78(3), pp.215-224.

EC. 2023. Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Knowledge Gateway. European Commission https://knowledge4policy.ec.europa.eu/health-promotion-knowledge-gateway/food-based-dietary-guidelines-europe-source-documents-food_en

EC. 2023. Food-Based Dietary Guidelines in Europe. European Commission. https://knowledge4policy.ec.europa.eu/health-promotion-knowledge-gateway/topic/food-based-dietary-guidelines-europe_en

Eluwa, T.F., Eluwa, G.I., Iorwa, A., Daini, B.O., Abdullahi, K., Balogun, M., Yaya, S., Ahinkorah, B.O. and Lawal, A., 2023. Impact of unconditional cash transfers on household livelihood outcomes in Nigeria. Journal of Social Policy, pp.1-16.

FAO 2023 Food-based dietary guidelines. https://www.fao.org/nutrition/education/food-based-dietary-guidelines/regions/countries/en/

Fischer, C.G. and Garnett, T., 2016. Plates, pyramids, and planets: developments in national healthy and sustainable dietary guidelines: a state of play assessment. Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations.

Food Standards Scotland 2020. The Scottish Diet – It needs to change, 2020 update. Food Standards Scotland.

Galli, A., Antonelli, M., Wambersie, L., Bach-Faig, A., Bartolini, F., Caro, D., Iha, K., Lin, D., Mancini, M.S., Sonnino, R. and Vanham, D., 2023. EU-27 ecological footprint was primarily driven by food consumption and exceeded regional biocapacity from 2004 to 2014. Nature Food, 4(9), pp.810-822.

Garnett, T., Mathewson, S., Angelides, P. and Borthwick, F., 2015. Policies and actions to shift eating patterns: what works. Foresight, 515(7528), pp.518-522.

Gladding, T.L., Rolph, C.A., Gwyther, C.L., Kinnersley, R., Walsh, K. and Tyrrel, S., 2020. Concentration and composition of bioaerosol emissions from intensive farms: pig and poultry livestock. Journal of environmental management, 272, p.111052.

Godin, L. and Sahakian, M., 2018. Cutting through conflicting prescriptions: How guidelines inform “healthy and sustainable” diets in Switzerland. Appetite, 130, pp.123-133.

Gržinić, G., Piotrowicz-Cieślak, A., Klimkowicz-Pawlas, A., Górny, R.L., Ławniczek-Wałczyk, A., Piechowicz, L., Olkowska, E., Potrykus, M., Tankiewicz, M., Krupka, M. and Siebielec, G., 2023. Intensive poultry farming: A review of the impact on the environment and human health. Science of the Total Environment, 858, p.160014

Hansen, K.L., Golubovic, S., Eriksen, C.U., Jørgensen, T. and Toft, U., 2022. Effectiveness of food environment policies in improving population diets: a review of systematic reviews. European Journal of Clinical Nutrition, 76(5), pp.637-646.

Harrington, J., Kenny, T. and O’Mahony, L. 2023. Building ‘sustainability’ into national healthy eating guidelines. Review of international practice and practical implications for policy. Safefood report.

Henchion, M., Moloney, A.P., Hyland, J., Zimmermann, J. and McCarthy, S., 2021. Trends for meat, milk and egg consumption for the next decades and the role played by livestock systems in the global production of proteins. Animal, 15, p.100287.

Hendrie, G.A., Lyle, G., Mauch, C.E., Haddad, J. and Golley, R.K., 2021. Understanding the variation within a dietary guideline index score to identify the priority food group targets for improving diet quality across population subgroups. International journal of environmental research and public health, 18(2), p.378.

Herforth, A., Arimond, M., Álvarez-Sánchez, C., Coates, J., Christianson, K. and Muehlhoff, E., 2019. A global review of food-based dietary guidelines. Advances in Nutrition, 10(4), pp.590-605.

Hoek, A.C., Malekpour, S., Raven, R., Court, E. and Byrne, E., 2021. Towards environmentally sustainable food systems: decision-making factors in sustainable food production and consumption. Sustainable Production and Consumption, 26, pp.610-626.

Jaacks, L., Frank, S., Vonderschmidt, A., Stewart, C., Runions, R., Kennedy, J., McNeill, G., Alexander, P. (2024). Understanding the climate impact of food consumed in Scotland. CXC report.

James-Martin, G., Baird, D.L., Hendrie, G.A., Bogard, J., Anastasiou, K., Brooker, P.G., Wiggins, B., Williams, G., Herrero, M., Lawrence, M. and Lee, A.J., 2022. Environmental sustainability in national food-based dietary guidelines: a global review. The Lancet Planetary Health6(12), pp.e977-e986.

Jennings, R., Henderson, A.D., Phelps, A., Janda, K.M. and van den Berg, A.E., 2023. Five US Dietary Patterns and Their Relationship to Land Use, Water Use, and Greenhouse Gas Emissions: Implications for Future Food Security. Nutrients, 15(1), p.215.

Kirwan, L.B., Walton, J., Flynn, A., Nugent, A.P., Kearney, J., Holden, N.M. and McNulty, B.A., 2023. Assessment of the Environmental Impact of Food Consumption in Ireland—Informing a Transition to Sustainable Diets. Nutrients, 15(4), p.981.

Kovacs, B., Miller, L., Heller, M.C. and Rose, D., 2021. The carbon footprint of dietary guidelines around the world: a seven country modeling study. Nutrition journal, 20, pp.1-10.

Kwasny, T., Dobernig, K. and Riefler, P., 2022. Towards reduced meat consumption: A systematic literature review of intervention effectiveness, 2001–2019. Appetite, 168, p.105739.

Laine, J.E., Huybrechts, I., Gunter, M.J., Ferrari, P., Weiderpass, E., Tsilidis, K., Aune, D., Schulze, M.B., Bergmann, M., Temme, E.H. and Boer, J.M., 2021. Co-benefits from sustainable dietary shifts for population and environmental health: an assessment from a large European cohort study. The Lancet Planetary Health, 5(11), pp.e786-e796.

Lassen, A.D., Christensen, L.M. and Trolle, E., 2020. Development of a Danish adapted healthy plant-based diet based on the EAT-Lancet reference diet. Nutrients, 12(3), p.738.

Leme, A.C.B., Hou, S., Fisberg, R.M., Fisberg, M. and Haines, J., 2021. Adherence to food-based dietary guidelines: a systemic review of high-income and low-and middle-income countries. Nutrients, 13(3), p.1038.

Lindström, H., Lundberg, S. and Marklund, P.O., 2020. How Green Public Procurement can drive conversion of farmland: An empirical analysis of an organic food policy. Ecological Economics, 172, p.106622.

Lobos, M.F., L’Abbé, M., Ng, S.H., Phulkerd, S., Ramirez‐Zea, M. and Rebello, S.A., 2019. An 11‐country study to benchmark the implementation of recommended nutrition policies by national governments using the Healthy Food Environment Policy Index, 2015‐2018. Obesity Reviews, 20, pp.57-66.

Macura, B., Ran, Y., Persson, U.M., Abu Hatab, A., Jonell, M., Lindahl, T. and Röös, E., 2022. What evidence exists on the effects of public policy interventions for achieving environmentally sustainable food consumption? A systematic map protocol. Environmental Evidence, 11(1), pp.1-9.

Martini, D., Tucci, M., Bradfield, J., Di Giorgio, A., Marino, M., Del Bo’, C., Porrini, M. and Riso, P., 2021. Principles of sustainable healthy diets in worldwide dietary guidelines: efforts so far and future perspectives. Nutrients13(6), p.1827.

Matthews, A., Candel, J., Mûelenaere, N.D. and Scheelbeek, P., 2023. The political economy of food system transformation in the European Union. In Resnick, D. and Swinnen, J., 2023. Political Economy of Food System Transformation. The Political Economy of Food System Transformation, Routledge.

Mazac, R., Renwick, K., Seed, B. and Black, J.L., 2021. An approach for integrating and analyzing sustainability in food-based dietary guidelines. Frontiers in sustainable food systems, 5, p.544072.

Milner, J., Green, R., Dangour, A.D., Haines, A., Chalabi, Z., Spadaro, J., Markandya, A. and Wilkinson, P., 2015. Health effects of adopting low greenhouse gas emission diets in the UK. BMJ open, 5(4), p.e007364.

OECD. 2021. Making Better Policies for Food Systems. OECD.

Pineda, E., Poelman, M.P., Aaspõllu, A., Bica, M., Bouzas, C., Carrano, E., De Miguel-Etayo, P., Djojosoeparto, S., Blenkuš, M.G., Graca, P. and Geffert, K., 2022. Policy implementation and priorities to create healthy food environments using the Healthy Food Environment Policy Index (Food-EPI): A pooled level analysis across eleven European countries. The Lancet Regional Health–Europe, 23.

Purnell, J.Q., Gernes, R., Stein, R., Sherraden, M.S. and Knoblock-Hahn, A., 2014. A systematic review of financial incentives for dietary behavior change. Journal of the Academy of Nutrition and Dietetics, 114(7), pp.1023-1035.

Reay, D. et al. 2020. From farm to fork: growing a Scottish food system that doesn’t cost the planet. Frontiers in Sustainable Food Systems, 4, p.72.

Reisch, L.A., Sunstein, C.R., Andor, M.A., Doebbe, F.C., Meier, J. and Haddaway, N.R., 2021. Mitigating climate change via food consumption and food waste: A systematic map of behavioral interventions. Journal of Cleaner Production, 279, p.123717.

Reisch, L.A., 2021. Shaping healthy and sustainable food systems with behavioural food policy. European Review of Agricultural Economics, 48(4), pp.665-693.

Romaniuk, P., Kaczmarek, K., Brukało, K., Grochowska-Niedworok, E., Łobczowska, K., Banik, A., Luszczynska, A., Poelman, M., Harrington, J.M., Vandevijvere, S. and Pen Consortium, 2022. The healthy food environment policy index in Poland: implementation gaps and actions for improvement. Foods, 11(11), p.1648.

Röös, E., Bajželj, B., Smith, P., Patel, M., Little, D. and Garnett, T., 2017. Greedy or needy? Land use and climate impacts of food in 2050 under different livestock futures. Global Environmental Change, 47, pp.1-12.

Röös, E., Larsson, J., Sahlin, K., Jonell, M., Lindahl, T., André, E., Säll, NS., Harring, N. and Persson, M. 2021. Policy Options for Sustainable Food Consumption – Review and Recommendations for Sweden. Mistra Sustainable Consumption report 1:10.

Rossi, L., Ferrari, M. and Ghiselli, A., 2023. The Alignment of Recommendations of Dietary Guidelines with Sustainability Aspects: Lessons Learned from Italy’s Example and Proposals for Future Development. Nutrients, 15(3), p.542.

Scheelbeek, P., Green, R., Papier, K., Knuppel, A., Alae-Carew, C., Balkwill, A., Key, T.J., Beral, V. and Dangour, A.D., 2020. Health impacts and environmental footprints of diets that meet the Eatwell Guide recommendations: analyses of multiple UK studies. BMJ open, 10(8), p.e037554

Schwingshackl, L., Watzl, B. and Meerpohl, J.J., 2020. The healthiness and sustainability of food based dietary guidelines. bmj370.

Scott, C., Sutherland, J. and Taylor, A., 2018. Affordability of the UK’s Eatwell Guide. The Food Foundation, p.17.

Sinclair, M., Combet, E., Davis, T. and Papies, E.K., 2023. Sustainability in food-based dietary guidelines: a review of recommendations around meat and dairy consumption and their visual representation. University of Glasgow preprint.

Some, S., Roy, J., Chatterjee, J.S. and Butt, M.H., 2022. Low demand mitigation options for achieving Sustainable Development Goals: Role of reduced food waste and sustainable dietary choice. Journal of Cleaner Production, 369, p.133432.

Speck, M., Wagner, L., Buchborn, F., Steinmeier, F., Friedrich, S. and Langen, N., 2022. How public catering accelerates sustainability: a German case study. Sustainability Science, 17(6), pp.2287-2299.

Springmann, M., Spajic, L., Clark, M.A., Poore, J., Herforth, A., Webb, P., Rayner, M. and Scarborough, P., 2020. The healthiness and sustainability of national and global food based dietary guidelines: modelling study. bmj370.

Stewart, C., McNeill, G., Runions, R., Comrie, F., McDonald, A. and Jaacks, P.L.M., 2023. Meat and milk product consumption in Scottish adults: Insights from a national survey. Available at SSRN 4628199.

Stoll-Kleemann, S. and Schmidt, U.J., 2017. Reducing meat consumption in developed and transition countries to counter climate change and biodiversity loss: a review of influence factors. Regional Environmental Change, 17, pp.1261-1277.

Strid, A., Hallström, E., Hjorth, T., Johansson, I., Lindahl, B., Sonesson, U., Winkvist, A. and Huseinovic, E., 2019. Climate impact from diet in relation to background and sociodemographic characteristics in the Västerbotten Intervention Programme. Public health nutrition, 22(17), pp.3288-3297

Tetens, I., Birt, C.A., Brink, E., Bodenbach, S., Bugel, S., De Henauw, S., Grønlund, T., Julia, C., Konde, Å.B., Kromhout, D. and Lehmann, U., 2020. Food-based dietary guidelines–development of a conceptual framework for future Food-Based Dietary Guidelines in Europe: report of a Federation of European Nutrition Societies Task-Force Workshop in Copenhagen, 12–13 March 2018. British Journal of Nutrition124(12), pp.1338-1344.

The Carnon Trust. 2016. The eatwell guide: A more sustainable diet.

Tucci, M., Martini, D., Marino, M., Del Bo’, C., Vinelli, V., Biscotti, P., Parisi, C., De Amicis, R., Battezzati, A., Bertoli, S. and Porrini, M., 2022. The Environmental Impact of an Italian-Mediterranean Dietary Pattern Based on the EAT-Lancet Reference Diet (EAT-IT). Foods, 11(21), p.3352.

van Dooren, C., Marinussen, M., Blonk, H., Aiking, H. and Vellinga, P., 2014. Exploring dietary guidelines based on ecological and nutritional values: a comparison of six dietary patterns. Food Policy44, pp.36-46.

von Philipsborn, P., Geffert, K., Klinger, C., Hebestreit, A., Stratil, J., Rehfuess, E.A. and PEN Consortium, 2022. Nutrition policies in Germany: a systematic assessment with the Food Environment Policy Index. Public Health Nutrition, 25(6), pp.1691-1700.

Vermeir, I., Weijters, B., De Houwer, J., Geuens, M., Slabbinck, H., Spruyt, A., Van Kerckhove, A., Van Lippevelde, W., De Steur, H. and Verbeke, W., 2020. Environmentally sustainable food consumption: A review and research agenda from a goal-directed perspective. Frontiers in psychology, 11, p.520238.

Whybrow, S., Hollis, J.L. and Macdiarmid, J.I., 2018. Social deprivation is associated with poorer adherence to healthy eating dietary goals: analysis of household food purchases. Journal of Public Health, 40(1), pp.e8-e15.

Wijesinha-Bettoni, R., Khosravi, A., Ramos, A.I., Sherman, J., Hernandez-Garbanzo, Y., Molina, V., Vargas, M. and Hachem, F., 2021. A snapshot of food-based dietary guidelines implementation in selected countries. Global Food Security29, p.100533.

Wood, A., Moberg, E., Curi-Quinto, K., Van Rysselberge, P. and Röös, E., 2023. From “good for people” to “good for people and planet”–Placing health and environment on equal footing when developing food-based dietary guidelines. Food Policy, 117, p.102444.

Wrieden, W., Halligan, J., Goffe, L., Barton, K. and Leinonen, I., 2019. Sustainable diets in the UK—developing a systematic framework to assess the environmental impact, cost and nutritional quality of household food purchases. Sustainability, 11(18), p.4974.

Yin, J., Hua, J., Zhang, X., Tuyishimire, A. and Yang, D., 2023. Healthy Eating for All? The Challenge of Adhering to Dietary Guidelines for Low-Income Groups in China. Nutrients, 15(12), p.2704.

Yoong, S.L., Turon, H., Wong, C.K., Bayles, L., Finch, M., Barnes, C., Doherty, E. and Wolfenden, L., 2023. An audit of the dissemination strategies and plan included in international food-based dietary guidelines. Public health nutrition, 26(11), pp.2586-2594.

Appendices

Appendix A: Interviewees and discussion guide

Flanders:

Senior professional from Flanders Institute of Healthy Living (Gezonden Leven)

Senior professional from Flanders Department of the Environment and Spatial Planning

Netherlands:

Senior professional from the Netherlands Nutrition Centre (Voedingscentrum)

Sweden:

Senior academic from the Swedish University of Agricultural Sciences

Scotland:

Representative from NESTA

Representative from NFUS

Representative from the British Dietetic Association

Senior academic, University of Edinburgh

Representative from the Soil Association

Two representatives from ASSIST FM

Representative from the Food and Drink Federation Scotland

Other:

Team of academics from the London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine (undertaking similar research on behalf of Defra)

Discussion Guide

Aims of Interview

The Scottish Government currently provides dietary guidance via the EatWell Guide, which promotes better health and nutritional outcomes. Scottish Government is exploring how to align the guidance with its climate objectives, to encourage diets that are both healthy and climate-friendly. The purpose of these discussions is to gather views on what climate-friendly dietary guidelines could look like in Scotland, what actions would be most effective to encourage their uptake, and what barriers, problems or unintended consequences Scottish Government should be aware of, from your perspective as a representative of [name of stakeholder group].

1.Explain privacy notice and confirm consent to undertake the interview [2 mins]

2. Opener [5 mins]

  • From the perspective of your organisation/profession, what does a climate-friendly diet mean to you?
  • What key features, or guidelines, would you expect in a climate-friendly diet?
  • If interviewees are familiar with the EatWell Guide, could also ask how climate-friendly they think it currently is, and what they would change/revise, to make it more climate-friendly.

3. Discussion of climate friendly dietary guidance, using prompt material [10 or 15 mins, depending on interviewee’s expertise]

In advance, we will share the attached montage of dietary guidelines assembled from climate-focused FBDGs, i.e. Flanders, Netherlands, Sweden:

On the slide are examples of climate-friendly dietary guidance, from other countries. Please tell me:

  • What is your impression of these dietary guidelines?
  • To what extent could they apply in Scotland?
  • In particular, what is your view about the advice to:
  • Reduce meat consumption, especially red meat (including specifying maximum intake per week)?
  • Moderate dairy consumption?
  • From your perspective, what difference does the addition of climate-focused guidance make to nutritional outcomes? Does it create any tensions? Will consumers be more or less receptive?
  • What problems or unintended consequences might come from guidance such as this in Scotland?
  • Which groups may particularly benefit, and which groups may be negatively impacted?
  • (If time – If ScotGov decided to develop climate-friendly dietary guidelines, what would your advice be about which stakeholders should be involved in the development process?
  • Who should lead the process?

4. Discussion of how to encourage take-up of dietary guidance, using prompt material [10 or 15 mins, depending on interviewee’s expertise]

In advance, we will share the attached montage of policy instruments from other jurisdictions, designed to encourage climate-friendly diets.

On the slide are examples of policy actions in other countries to encourage take-up of climate-friendly diets. Please tell me:

  • What is your impression of these policy actions?
  • To what extent could they apply in Scotland?
  • In particular, what is your view of:
  • Carbon labelling of food
  • Subsidising fruit and vegetables to targeted groups
  • Changing public catering standards to encourage more meat-free menus
  • Acting on the food environment

5. Wrap up

  • Do you have any questions you would like to ask?
  • Confirm how information will be used
  • Thank participant and end interview

Appendix B: FBDG information for selected countries

Dietary Guideline information for selected countries, citing official documentation and showing degree to which guidance is linked to environmental impact. Recommendations included where linked explicitly to environment/climate[41]

All weblinks accessed during December 2023.

Austria

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Austrian Agency for Health and Food Safety

Austrian Food Pyramid (2010)* https://www.fao.org/3/as659o/as659o.pdf also The Austrian Food Pyramid – AGES

12 (pdf)

Only ref to environment is sustainable fish. Recommends low meat consumption, and seasonal, regional and organic food, but not for environmental reasons. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

None found[42]

None found

N/A

N/A

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer.

Consume sustainably sourced fish.

“In the spirit of sustainability”

“In the spirit of sustainability, when buying fish, look for certifications from MSC, ASC or organic”

“At least 300g fish per week”

* New Austrian Food Pyramids (plural) are due to be published in the autumn of 2024, https://www.sozialministerium.at/Themen/Gesundheit/Ern%C3%A4hrung/%C3%96sterreichische-Ern%C3%A4hrungsempfehlungen-NEU.html

Australia

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

National Health and Medical Research Council

Eat for Health. Australian Dietary Guidelines Summary (2013)

https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-09/n55a_australian_dietary_guidelines_summary_131014_1.pdf

2 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment.

No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

National Health and Medical Research Council

Eat for Health. Australian Dietary Guidelines (2013)

https://www.eatforhealth.gov.au/sites/default/files/2022-09/n55_australian_dietary_guidelines.pdf

226 (pdf)

Briefly mentions climate and emissions, although cited examples do not relate to primary production. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which Document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

NB. National level guidelines apply everywhere but supporting policy measures vary across sub-national jurisdictions across Australia.

Belgium (country-wide)

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Superior Health Council

FPS Public Health, Walloon Agency for Quality Life (AVIQ) for the French version, Gezond Leven and Vlaanderen is zorg for the Flemish version.

FBDG: Eat and gain life-years? Doable! (2019)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_GcH7x7unQY

The Food Tree (2019)

https://www.karott.be/karott-epi-alimentaire/ and https://www.foodinaction.com/nl/voedingstak-pijlers-beter-eten/ (in Dutch and French, machine translated to English via Google Translate and DeepL)

2.14 minutes (video)

6 (pdf)

Dietary recommendations are not linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Background

Superior Health Council

Dietary Guidelines for the Belgian Adult Population (2019) https://www.health.belgium.be/sites/default/files/uploads/fields/‌‌​fpshealth_theme_file/20191011_shc-9284_fbdg_vweb.pdf

91 (pdf)

Sustainability issues are noted and endorsed as relevant, but not in an integrated way. Dietary recommendations are not linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

NB. Guidance expected to be updated after 2023 see https://www.health.belgium.be/en/advisory-report-9284-fbdg-2019

Belgium (Flanders)

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Departement Omgeving (Department of Environment)

Eating According to the Food Triangle: Good for Yourself and the Planet (2021)

Food-triangle-EN.pdf (gezondleven.be)

24 (pdf)

Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Background

Vlaams Instituut Gezond Leven (Flemish Institute for Healthy Living)

Rationale for a substantive food and health vision (2017); Food & Environmentally Responsible Consumption (2021)

Achtergronddocument-Voeding-en-gezondheid.pdf (gezondleven.be) (in Dutch, machine translated to English via Google Translate and DeepL)

Background-food-and-environment-EN.pdf (gezondleven.be) and www.gezondleven.be/voedingsdriehoek .

30 (pdf)

133 (pdf)

Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer.

NB. Guidelines for Flanders are distinct from those issued by Wallonia, and indeed to those issued by the Superior Health Council for all adult Belgians.

Eat more plant-based food than animal-based food. Eat seasonal fruit and veg. Drink mostly tap water. Moderate fish consumption. Opt for less processed plant-based meat and dairy substitutes.

“Plant-based generally has lower environmental impact. Legumes very low impact compared to meat. Not only are seasonal fruits and veg at their best, but their environmental impact is also more limited. Did you know that buying local is not always better for the environment? They can have a higher environment impact if they are grown in heated greenhouses.”

“Given that no packaging and transport is required, tap water has a lower environment impact. Fish can have a significant environmental impact.”

“Make a week menu and plan one veggie day to begin with. Increase number of veggie days step by step. Website and app for tasty and healthy recipes

and a decision-tree to help choice. Better to opt for less processed variants like tofu, tempeh and seitan and use the Nutri-Score to make better choices. For dairy substitutes, soy drinks enriched with calcium and vitamins has nutritional value comparable to milk. Drinks based on nuts, oats or rice have lower protein content.”

“Start with one meat-free day per week and build from there. Eat handful of unsalted nuts every day.” “If opt for meat, have one meat meal per day and have a small portion… size of your palm.”

“It is recommended to eat (oily) fish once or twice per week.”

Brazil

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

Food Guide for the Brazilian population (2018)

https://www.gov.br/saude/pt-br/assuntos/saude-brasil/publicacoes-para-promocao-a-saude/guiadebolso2018.pdf/@@download/file (in Portuguese, machine translated by Google Translate and DeepL).

49 (pdf)

Environmental sustainability is mentioned briefly, but no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Background

Ministry of Health

University of São Paulo

Dietary Guidelines for the Brazilian Population (2015)

https://bvsms.saude.gov.br/bvs/publicacoes/dietary_guidelines_brazilian_population.pdf

Food and health: the scientific basis of the food guide for the Brazilian population (2019)

https://www.livrosabertos.sibi.usp.br/portaldelivrosUSP/catalog/view/339/298/1248

152 (pdf)

133 (pdf)

Environmental sustainability is acknowledged as important but no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Canada

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Health Canada

Canada’s Food Guide (2019)

https://food-guide.canada.ca/sites/default/files/artifact-pdf/HEPs-Guide-nw-en.pdf

see also https://food-guide.canada.ca/en/

2 (pdf)

Does recommend choosing protein that comes from plants more often and notes lower environmental impact, but no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Health Canada

Canada’s Dietary Guidelines for Health professionals and Policy makers (2018/19) https://food-guide.canada.ca/sites/default/files/artifact-pdf/CDG-EN-2018.pdf

see also https://www.canada.ca/en/health-canada/services/food-nutrition/healthy-eating-strategy.html

62 (pdf)

Background document briefly notes emissions from food waste. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

NB. National level guidelines apply everywhere but supporting policy measures vary across sub-national jurisdictions across Canada.

Chile

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

Food Guides for Chile (2022)

https://www.minsal.cl/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/Guias-alimentarias-version-corregida-MINSAL.pdf

(in Spanish, machine translated into English by Google Translate, DeepL unable to do so)

12 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment beyond reducing food packaging and waste. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Ministry of Health

Dietary Guidelines for Chile (2022)

https://www.minsal.cl/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/guias_alimentarias_2022_2ed.pdf

(in Spanish, machine translated into English by Google Translate and DeepL)

Updating Of Food-Based Dietary Guidelines Food-Based Dietary Guidelines (Fbg) For The Chilean Population”. Conceptual Development Framework Reports 1 & 2 (2022)

https://www.minsal.cl/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/02.11.2022-PRODUCTO-1.pdf

https://www.minsal.cl/wp-content/uploads/2022/12/02.112022-PRODUCTO-2.pdf

(in Spanish, machine translated into English by Google Translate and DeepL)

108 (pdf)

686 (pdf)

236 (pdf)

Sustainable, environment and climate are mentioned frequently, but no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Croatia

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Croatian Institute for Public Health

Healthy living. Do you also eat healthy? (2018) https://www.hzjz.hr/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/Hrana-LETAK.pdf (in Croatian, machine translated into English by Google Translate and DeepL)

2 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Croatian Institute for Public Health

Recommendations for the spring and summer nutrition (2018)

https://zivjetizdravo.eu/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/Brosura-PROLJECE_LJETO-.pdf and

Recommendations for the autumn and winter nutrition, 2018

https://zivjetizdravo.eu/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/Brosura-JESEN_ZIMA-LowRes.pdf (in Croatian, machine translated into English by Google Translate and DeepL)

2 x 28 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Cyprus

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

National Nutrition and Exercise Guidelines leaflet (2011)

(in Greek, machine translated into English by Google Translate, DeepL unable to do so)

Layout 1 (moh.gov.cy)

2 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Ministry of Health

National Nutrition and Exercise Guidelines (2011)

Layout 1 (moh.gov.cy) (in Greek, machine translated into English by Google Translate, DeepL unable to do so)

16 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

NB. National level guidelines apply everywhere but supporting policy measures vary across sub-national jurisdictions across Canada.

Denmark

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Food, Agriculture and Fisheries

The Official Dietary Guidelines – Good for Health and Climate (2021)

https://foedevarestyrelsen.dk/publikationer/2021/de-officielle-kostraad-godt-for-sundhed-og-klima-pjece (in Danish, machine translated into English by Google Translate and DeepL). Website also includes other materials.

23 (pdf)

Frequent mention of climate/ environment. Recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

National Food Institute

Department of Risk Assessment and

Nutrition

Nordic Nutrition Recommendations 2023 Integrating Environmental Aspects (2023)

https://pub.norden.org/nord2023-003/

Advice on sustainable healthy eating. Professional basis for a supplement to

the Official Dietary Guidelines (2020)

https://www.food.dtu.dk/english/-/media/institutter/foedevareinstituttet/publikationer/pub-2020/rapport-raad-om-baeredygtig-kost.pdf (in Danish, machine translated into English by Google Translate and DeepL).

c.20 (web)

116 (pdf)

Explicit reference to Planetary Boundaries, SDGs, environment, climate change and EAT-Lancet etc. Recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer

“Eat more fruit and veg.” “Limit the use of butter”. “Eat less meat.”

Fruit and veg “…are among the foods with the lowest carbon footprint.” “A high intake of dairy products contributes to increased climate impact. “Cutting down on meat is also good for the climate. This applies to all types of mea, especially beef and lamb…. Poultry, pork and eggs have a significantly lower impact on the climate than beef and lamb.”

“Introduce meat-free days and use less meat in your meals. “Replace meat with vegetables, legumes or wholegrains.” “Choose vegetable oils and low-fat dairy products.” “Eat foods with wholegrains.”

“Around 350g or meat per week is sufficient.”

“Around 250ml milk product per day, 20g cheese per day”

“30g nuts per day, 1-2 tablespoons seeds per day”

“75g wholegrains per day”

“600g per day fruit and veg” plus “100g per day legumes”

Estonia

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

National Institute for Health Development

The Food Pyramid(2017)

tai_toidupuramiid_plakat_est_420x594mm_bleed_5mm_FIX (in Estonian, machine translated to English via Google Translate)

1 (pdf)

No mention of environment or climate No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

National Institute for Health Development

Estonian Diet and Exercise Recommendations (2017)

https://intra.tai.ee/images/prints/documents/149019033869_eesti%20toitumis-%20ja%20liikumissoovitused.pdf (in Estonian, machine translated to English via Google Translate)

338 (pdf)

Section on sustainable consumption and notes climate and environmental impacts. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Finland

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Finnish Food Authority

Nutrition and Food Recommendations (2020)

https://www.ruokavirasto.fi/en/foodstuffs/healthy-diet/

c.30 (web)

Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Background

State Nutrition Advisory Board

Health from food. Finnish Nutrition Recommendations 2014 (2018)

https://www.ruokavirasto.fi/globalassets/teemat/terveytta-edistava-ruokavalio/kuluttaja-ja-ammattilaismateriaali/julkaisut/ravitsemussuositukset_2014_fi_web_versio_5.pdf (in Finnish, machine translated to English via Google Translate)

59 (pdf)

Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment and climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer.

“More fruit and berries, vegetables, leguminous plants, whole and nuts and seeds.”

“Less red meat and meat products”

“We should favour domestic plants of the crop season, i.e. local and seasonal food.”

“A higher proportion of vegetables, root plants, potatoes, berries and fruit as well as cereal products in the diet reduces the load on the climate and eutrophication.”

“The more colourful your food is, the better! Eat some of your vegetables uncooked. Oil-based dressings add juiciness and flavour to salads and grated vegetables. Eating berries and fruit whole is better than juicing them.”

“…it is advisable to select poultry meat rather than red meat.”

“Eat at least five handfuls of vegetables, berries and fruit a day.”

“No more than 500 g of red meat and meat products a week (cooked weight).”

France

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Santé publique France

50 Tips to Eat Better and Move More (2017) https://www.mangerbouger.fr/content/show/1501/file/Brochure_50_petites_astuces.pdf

(in French, machine translated using Google Translate and DeepL)

32 (pdf)

Document makes limited reference to the env, and only for meat and bottled water consumption. Other guidance, such as eating more veg, consuming organic, is made without linking to env outcomes. Eating to benefit the env is presented as choosing local and seasonal products.

Background

ANSES French Agency for Food, Environmental, and Occupational Health & Safety

Santé publique France

Updating of the PNNS guidelines: revision of the food-based dietary guidelines ANSES opinion Collective expert report (2016)

https://www.anses.fr/en/system/files/NUT2012SA0103Ra-1EN.pdf

Recommendations Concerning Diet, Physical Activity and Sedentary Behaviour for Adults (2019, Updated 2023)

https://www.santepubliquefrance.fr/content/download/515446/3807453?version=1

282 (pdf)

Document gives explanation of the process by which the revised guidelines were arrived at, and justification/evidence for the decisions. It does not refer to the environment – it is entirely health-based.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer.

“Good eating also means taking into account the environment by showing preference for foods from local producers and foods in season.” “Eat less meat, eat more pulses.”

“Of all foods, it’s meat which has the biggest climate impact. Pulses are the heroes of sustainable agriculture, as they naturally enrich the soil without need for fertilisers, and use little water.”

Various meal suggestions for including more pulses. No actual direction on swapping meat with pulses

“Maximum of 500g per week of meat, of which maximum 150g processed meat. Eat minimum 2 portions of pulses per week.”

Germany

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

German Society for Nutrition (DGE)

DGE Nutrition Circle (2024) https://www.dge.de/gesunde-ernaehrung/gut-essen-und-trinken/dge-ernaehrungskreis/ but also Eat and drink well – the DGE recommendations (2024) Eat and drink well – the DGE recommendations | DGE and FAQ (2024) https://www.dge.de/gesunde-ernaehrung/faq/lebensmittelbezogene-ernaehrungsempfehlungen-dge/#c6508

1+ (web)

1+ (web)

1+ (web)

Explicit reference to environment impacts, albeit not explained in great detail

Background

German Environment Agency

German Federal Ministry for Food and Agriculture

German Society for Nutrition (DGE)

Towards healthy and sustainable diets in Germany An analysis of the environmental effects and policy implications of dietary change in Germany (2023) https://www.umweltbundesamt.de/sites/default/files/medien/11740/publikationen/2023-05-10_texte_67-2023_towards_healthy_1.pdf

Key Issues Paper: Towards the Federal Government’s Food Strategy (2022)

https://www.bmel.de/SharedDocs/Downloads/DE/_Ernaehrung/ernaehrungsstrategie-eckpunktepapier.html (in German, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

Scientific basis of food-related dietary recommendations for Germany (2024) https://www.ernaehrungs-umschau.de/fileadmin/Ernaehrungs-Umschau/pdfs/pdf_2024/03_24/EU03_2024_M158_M166_Online.pdf (machine translated via DeepL)

11 (pdf)

10 (pdf)

9 (pdf)

Environmental impacts of dietary choices acknowledged explicitly.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer

Take advantage of the variety of foods and eat a varied diet. Choose predominantly plant-based foods.

Predominantly plant-based diet have less impact on the environment and the climate. In the production of plant-based foods, the consumption of resources and the emission of harmful greenhouse gases is lower than in the production of animal-based foods

Incorporate vegetables and fruits into every meal, either raw or gently prepared, so that many nutrients are preserved. The more colorful, the better. For meat and sausage, choose the low-fat variants.

At least 550g of fruit and vegetables daily. No more than 500g of milk and dairy products daily. A weekly amount of meat and sausage of no more than 300g.

Greece

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

National Nutrition Guide for Greek Adults (2014)

http://www.diatrofikoiodigoi.gr/files/PDF/ADULTS.pdf (in Greek, machine translated to English via Google Translate)

Also http://www.diatrofikoiodigoi.gr/?page=summary-adults (English summary)

132 (pdf)

16 (web)

Pollution from food transport is mentioned. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Ministry of Health

National Nutrition Guide for Greek Adults – Scientific Documentation (2014)

http://www.diatrofikoiodigoi.gr/files/PDF/ADULTS_PRO.pdf

250 (pdf)

Briefly notes climate and environmental impacts of animal production and benefits of plant based Mediterranean diet, but no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Hungary

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

National Association of Hungarian Dietitians (endorsed by Food Science Scientific Committee of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences)

OKOSTÁNYÉR® – SmartPlate, new Hungarian Dietary Recommendations (2016, renewed in 2021)

http://mdosz.hu/uj-taplalkozasi-ajanlasok-okos-tanyer/ (Hungarian, machine translated into English using Google Translate and DeepL) and https://www.okostanyer.hu/wp-content/uploads/2021/11/2021_OKOSTANYER_ANGOL_felnott_A4.pdf (in English). Other web resources (2018 – 2021) at https://www.okostanyer.hu/ (some in English)

1+ (web)

3 (pdf)

Renewed version mentions more plant-based foods and restricting meat. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

None found

None found

N/A

N/A

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Iceland

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Directorate of Health

Dietary Recommendations for Adults and Children from the Age of Two (2017)

https://island.is/en/nutrition-recommendations/radleggingar_spurningar_svor see also Radleggingar_mataraedi_vef_utgafa_2021.pdf (ctfassets.net) and diskamodel- skola (ctfassets.net) (both in Icelandic, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

28 (pdf)

Based on Nordic Nutrition Recommendations from 2013. No mention of environment or climate. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Directorate of Health

Basis for dietary recommendations (2016)

Grundvollur_radlegginga_um_mataraedi_og_radlagdir_dagskammtar.pdf (ctfassets.net) (in Icelandic, machine translated to English using Google Translate)

25 (pdf)

Based on Nordic Nutrition Recommendations from 2013. Passing reference to environment and climate. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Ireland

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Health Service Executive

The Healthy Food Pyramid (2016)

https://www.hse.ie/eng/about/who/healthwellbeing/our-priority-programmes/heal/food-pyramid-images/food-pyramid-simple-version.pdf and Healthy Food for Life. The Food Pyramid guide to every day food choices for adults,

teenagers and children aged five and over (2016)

https://assets.gov.ie/7649/3049964a47cb405fa20ea8d96bf50c91.pdf

1 (pdf)

7 (pdf)

No mention of environment or climate No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Health Service Executive

Healthy Food for Life Food Pyramid Questions and Answer (2016)

https://www.hse.ie/eng/about/who/healthwellbeing/our-priority-programmes/heal/food-pyramid-images/foodforlifefoodpyramidqas2016.pdf

Healthy Food for Life Revised healthy eating guidelines and Food Pyramid rationale (2016) https://www.hse.ie/eng/about/who/healthwellbeing/our-priority-programmes/heal/food-pyramid-images/foodforlifefoodpyramidrationale2016.pdf

4 (pdf)

8 (pdf)

No mention of environment or climate No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Italy

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

CREA Food and Nutrition Research Center

Guidelines for Healthy Eating (2019) https://sapermangiare.mobi/483/linee-guida.html (in Italian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL), with links through to sections of Background document (oddly ignoring meat)

Sustainable Diets

https://sapermangiare.mobi/N3567/diete-sostenibili.html (in Italian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

13 (web + vidoes))

1 (web)

Sustainable consumption discussed, but dietary recommendations are not linked explicitly to environment or climate, and env criteria are secondary to health and cultural criteria

Background

CREA Food and Nutrition Research Center

Healthy Eating Guidelines Revision 2018 (2019) https://www.crea.gov.it/en/web/alimenti-e-nutrizione/-/linee-guida-per-una-sana-alimentazione-2018 (in Italian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

231 (pdf)

Section on sustainable consumption and notes climate and environmental impacts, but dietary recommendations are not linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Latvia

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

Eat healthily using the plate principle (2020)

https://esparveselibu.lv/sites/default/files/2020-09/Skivja-princips-infografika.pdf (in Latvian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

1 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Ministry of Health

Dietary Guidelines for Adults (2020)

https://esparveselibu.lv/sites/default/files/inline-files/VM_Uztura_ieteik_pieaug.pdf

(in Latvian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

13 (pdf)

Guidelines influenced by the WHO recommendations and Nordic Nutrition. No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Malta

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry for Health

Dietary guidelines for Maltese adults. Healthy eating the Mediterranean way! (2015)

https://hpdp.gov.mt/sites/default/files/2023-07/healthy_eating_the_mediterranean_way_en.pdf

Dietary Guidelines for Maltese Children the Mediterranean Way! (2018)

https://mariocaruana.com.mt/wp-content/uploads/2018/09/Dietary-Guidelines-for-Maltese-Children_2018.pdf

16 (pdf)

16 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

N/A

None found (but strategy is published as https://health.gov.mt/wp-content/uploads/2023/04/Food_and_Nutrition_Policy_and_Action_Plan_for_Malta_2015-2020_EN.pdf)

N/A

FAO cites “Dietary guidelines for Maltese adults: information for professionals” but links are broken

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Netherlands

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Netherlands Nutrition Centre

Netherlands Nutrition Centre

The Wheel of five (2020) https://www.voedingscentrum.nl/Assets/Uploads/voedingscentrum/Documents/Service/English/Wheel-of-five.pdf

How do you eat healthy and sustainably? Sustainable eating in 7 steps (2020)

https://www.voedingscentrum.nl/nl/duurzaam-eten/duurzaam-eten-in-7-stappen.aspx

https://www.voedingscentrum.nl/nl/gezond-eten-met-de-schijf-van-vijf/hoe-eet-je-gezond-en-duurzaam.aspx (in Dutch, machine translated to English using Google Translate, DeepL unable to do so)

5 (pdf)

1 (web)

1 (web)

Mentions sustainability but no meaningful link to recommendations

Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Netherlands Nutrition Centre

Eating More Sustainably: Fact Sheet for professionals (2022)

https://www.voedingscentrum.nl/Assets/Uploads/voedingscentrum/​Documents/FS%20Duurzaam%20eten%20-%20Engels%202022.pdf

8 (pdf)

Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Background

”..eat less meat, and what meat you do eat, make it more sustainably produced meat” “within each food category, eat the most sustainably produced or lowest envtl impact option” “eat enough dairy and cheese, but within boundaries”. “navigate trade-offs between sustainability impacts of animal production systems”

“The current Dutch diet is not sustainable.” “The food we eat has a major impact on the environment” “Generally speaking, the greatest environmental benefit can be achieved by: eating less meat and more sources of plant-based proteins, such as pulses and nuts; wasting less food; only eating what you need”. “…meat is responsible for easily the largest proportion of GHG emissions”

“A diet based on the Wheel of Five can be food for your health as well as beneficial in terms of sustainability.”

“Opt more often for pulses, nuts or eggs”. “Select certified products from the list approved by Milieu Centraal”

“Consume fewer products that are not on the Wheel of Five”

“Buy and cook what you need”, “eat recommended amounts”

“…sometimes compromises are necessary…

“If you eat 400g of meat a week rather than the recommended maximum of 500g, this would result in a reduction in GHG emissions of 9% for men and 10% for women”. Also “If you stop eating meat and replace it with pulses, nuts and eggs, this would result in a reduction in GHG emissions of 35% for men and 37% for women”

New Zealand

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

Eating and Activity Guidelines for New Zealand Adults: Summary of Guidelines Statements and Key Related Information (2021)

https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/documents/publications/eating-and-activity-statements-for-new-zealand-adults-summary-of-guidelines-statements-and-key-related-information-jan_21.pdf

6 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Ministry of Health

Eating and Activity Guidelines for New Zealand Adults (2020) https://www.health.govt.nz/system/files/documents/publications/eating-activity-guidelines-new-zealand-adults-updated-2020-oct22.pdf

164 (pdf)

Mentions environmental impacts and emissions but no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Norway

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Norwegian Directorate of Health

Norwegian Dietary Guidelines (c.2014)

https://www.helsedirektoratet.no/brosjyrer/helsedirektoratets-kostrad-brosjyre-og-plakat/Helsedirektoratets%20kostr%C3%A5d%20-%20engelsk.pdf/_/attachment/inline/80f68126-68af-4cec-b2aa-d04069d02471:dcb8efdbe6b6129470ec4969f6639be21a8afd82/Helsedirektoratets%20kostr%C3%A5d%20-%20engelsk.pdf

28 (pdf)

No mention of climate or environment. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

National Council for Nutrition, Directorate of Health

Dietary advice to promote public health and prevent chronic illnesses: methodology and scientific knowledge base (2011). Not found online, only in printed form https://www.fagbokforlaget.no/Kostr%C3%A5d-for-%C3%A5-fremme-folkehelsen-og-forebygge-kroniske-sykdommer/I9788245022995

353 (physical)

N/A

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

NB New Nordic Nutrition Recommendations (2023) https://www.norden.org/en/publication/nordic-nutrition-recommendations-2023 explicitly address sustainability issues and may indicate likely revision to expected update of dietary guidelines

Poland

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

National Institute of Public Health

Eating and Activity Guidelines for New Zealand Adults: Summary of Guidelines Statements and Key Related Information (2021)

Talerz i zalecenia 3 strony www (pzh.gov.pl) (in Polish, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

3 (pdf)

Environment mentioned only once, in relation to recommendation for meat and meat products

Background

None found

N/A

N/A

N/A

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer

Substitute meat with plant-based protein products, i.e. pulses (beans,

chickpeas, soybeans, peas, lentils, broad beans) and nuts, as well as fish and eggs.

For health and the environment

Step 1 – Enter one day a week without meat.

Step 2 – Swap processed meats and red meat for poultry, fish, pulses and eggs.

Step 3 – Substitute meat with plant-based protein products, i.e. pulses (beans, chickpeas, soybeans, peas, lentils, broad beans) and nuts, as well as fish and eggs.

Do not eat more than 500 grams of red meat and processed meat (cold cuts, sausages) per week. Swap processed meats and red meat for poultry, fish, pulses and eggs.

Portugal

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Portuguese Health Directorate;

Portuguese Consumer’s Directorate

The New Food Wheel. Guide to daily food choices. (2016)

https://alimentacaosaudavel.dgs.pt/theme/alimentacao-saudavel-e-dieta-mediterranica/?topico=roda-dos-alimentos&formato=documento#a-ax433o.pdf

(in Portugese, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

The Mediterranean Food Wheel. Culture, tradition and Balance.(2020)

https://alimentacaosaudavel.dgs.pt/roda-dos-alimentos/ (in Portugese, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

5 (pdf)

1 (web)

Two sets of guidelines exist in parallel. Environment and climate are not mentioned in either. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

University of Porto

The Portuguese mediterranean diet wheel: development considerations (2022)

https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/34530943/

7 (pdf)

Environment mentioned in passing. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Romania

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Ministry of Health

The Food Pyramid (2006)

https://www.ms.ro/documente/5%20recomandari%20nutritionale_8319_6030.pdf

(in Romanian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

1 (pdf)

Environment and climate are not mentioned. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Romanian Nutrition Society

Guide to Healthy Eating (2006)

https://www.spitalsmeeni.ro/docs/ghiduri/ghid_alimentatie_populatie.pdf and https://www.fao.org/3/as693ro/as693ro.pdf (in Romanian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

48 (Word)

173 (pdf)

Environment and climate are not mentioned. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Spain

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Spanish Agency for Food Safety and Nutrition

Sustainable Dietary and Physical Activity Recommendations (2022)

https://www.aesan.gob.es/AECOSAN/docs/documentos/nutricion/RECOMENDACIONES_DIETETICAS_EN.pdf

19 (pdf)

Recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Background

Spanish Agency for Food Safety and Nutrition

Report of the Scientific Committee of the Spanish Agency for Food Safety and Nutrition (AESAN) on sustainable dietary and physical activity recommendations for the Spanish population (2022) https://www.aesan.gob.es/AECOSAN/docs/documentos/seguridad_alimentaria/​evaluacion_riesgos/informes_cc_ingles/RRDD_SOSTENIBLES_INGLES.pdf

55 (pd)

Explicit reference to Planetary Boundaries, SDGs, environment, climate change and EAT-Lancet etc. Recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer

“Consume a minimum of 5 [fruit and veg] servings per day…3-6[cereals] servings a day….. a maximum of 3 [dairy]servings a day”. “0 to a maximum of 3 servings of meat per week” “At least 3 [fish] servings per week” “Consume a maximum of 4

medium-sized eggs a week” “Consume at least 4 [legume] servings a week”

“The environmental impact of cereals…vegetables and fruits is low…legumes have little environmental impact.” “The environmental impact of meat is greater than that of other types of food” “…high environmental impact of dairy products…”

Prefer buying fresh seasonal, local, and minimally processed products. Choose products from farms where animal husbandry meets the highest standards

of animal welfare and eat all parts of the animal (including fatty cuts and offals), to avoid waste. Prioritising the consumption of white meat of poultry and rabbit

Fruit & veg: 120g – 200g per portion

Cereals: 40g -80g per portion

Legumes: 50g – 60g per portion

Fish: 120g – 150g per portion

Eggs: 53g – 63g per portion

Dairy: <250g per portion

Meat: 100g – 125g per portion

Slovenia

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

National Institute for Public Health

12 Steps Towards Health Eating. Dietary recommendation (2018)

https://nijz.si/wp-content/uploads/2022/07/12_korakov_plakat_0.pdf (in Slovenian, machine translated to English using Google Translate and DeepL)

1 (pdf)

Meat free days and plant-based food mentioned. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

None found

None found

N/A

N/A. However, a Strategic Council for Health & Nutrition was appointed in 2023 and endorses a shift to the Eat Lancet approach – implying it is not currently deployed https://www.gov.si/zbirke/delovna-telesa/strateski-svet-za-prehrano/

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Sweden

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Swedish Food Agency

The Swedish Dietary Guidelines. Find your way to eat greener, not too much and be active (2015)

https://www.livsmedelsverket.se/globalassets/publikationsdatabas/andra-sprak/kostraden/kostrad-eng.pdf

28 (pdf)

Frequent mention of climate/ environment. Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Swedish Food Agency

The Swedish Dietary Guidelines – risk benefit and management report (2015)

https://www.fao.org/3/az907e/az907e.pdf

79 (pdf)

Frequent mention of climate/ environment. Dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

Consumer

“eat more.. fruit and veg…seafood, healthy fats… low fat dairy”

“., switch to wholegrain, eat less meat”. “Choose more sustainably produced foods”

“what you eat isn’t just important to your own personal well-being: it’s important to the envt as well… one quarter of the climate impact of Swedish households comes from the food we eat – or throw away. That’s why we’ve devised this advice on how you can eat sustainably – to the benefit of both your health and the envt. So that you don’t have to choose.”

“Ecolabels such as ‘organic’ help you choose foods produced with the envt in mind.”

“Focus more on vegetarian foods and eggs, and sometimes fish or poultry. Or eat meat a little more often, but in small quantities.” “If you cut back on meat, you’ll have enough money for meat produced sustainably, with attention paid to the welfare of the animals. Choose ecolabelled meats such as free range, organic or certified eco-friendly.”

Fruit & veg: 500g per day (does not include potatoes)

Fish: 2-3 times p/w (with caveats for oily fish from polluted waters

Wholegrain 70g per day women, 90g per day men

Red meat and processed meat; 500g per week

Dairy: 2-3 decilitres of milk or fermented milk per day, to ensure you get enough calcium

Switzerland

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Swiss Society for Nutrition

The Swiss Food Pyramid (2016)

https://www.sge-ssn.ch/media/sge_pyramid_E_basic_20161.pdf

5 (pdf)

Environment and sustainable diets mentioned. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

Federal Department of Home Affairs.

See also Federal Office of Food Safety and Veterinary Affairs;

Federal Commission for Nutrition

Eating Well and Staying Healthy Swiss Nutrition Policy 2017–2024 (2017)

https://www.blv.admin.ch/dam/blv/en/dokumente/lebensmittel-und-ernaehrung/ernaehrung/schweizer-ernaehrungsstrategie-2017-2024.PDF.download.PDF/Ernaehrungsstrategie_Brosch_EN.PDF also Nutrition Strategy Action Plan (2017) https://www.plandactionnutrition.ch/

NB Reappraisal of the scientific evidence linking consumption of foods from specific food groups to NCDs (2020) https://www.blv.admin.ch/blv/en/home/das-blv/organisation/kommissionen/eek/pyramide-neubewertung-lebensmittelkonsum-ncd.html

N/A

No mention of environment or climate. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

UK (England, Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales)

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

Public Health England in association with the Welsh Government, Food Standards Scotland and the Food Standards Agency in Northern Ireland

The Eat Well Guide (2016) https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/​5a75564fed915d6faf2b2375/Eatwell_guide_colour.pdf (mirrored identically on official websites in Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales)

The Eatwell Guide. Helping you eat a healthy, balanced diet (2019)

https://www.food.gov.uk/sites/default/files/media/document/eatwell-guide-master-digital%20Final.pdf (mirrored almost identically on official websites in Northern Ireland, Scotland and Wales)

1 (pdf)

12 (pdf)

No mention of environment or climate, sustainable mentioned briefly. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

As above

As above

From Plate to Guide: What, why and how for the eatwell model (2016) https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/​5a7f73f7e5274a2e8ab4c461/eatwell_model_guide_report.pdf

The Eatwell Guide: a More Sustainable Diet. Methodology and Results Summary (2016)

https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/downloads/ ​The_Eatwell_Guide_a_more_sustainable_diet.pdf

37 (pdf)

12 (pdf)

Lack of a sustainability criteria acknowledged (and no dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate) but points to ex post estimation by Carbon Trust of positive environmental gains relative to current average diet

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

USA

Document type

Publishing organisation

Document name (publication date) and weblink source

Document length (pages)

Comments

Consumer

United States Department of Agriculture

MyPlate (2020)

https://myplate-prod.azureedge.us/sites/default/files/2021-01/DGA_2020-2025_StartSimple_withMyPlate_English_color.pdf but see also broader web resources

https://www.myplate.gov/

4 (pdf)

c.30+ (web)

No mention of environment or climate. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Background

United States Department of Agriculture

Dietary Guidelines for Americans 2020 – 2025 (2020)

https://www.dietaryguidelines.gov/sites/default/files/2021-03/Dietary_Guidelines_for_Americans-2020-2025.pdf

164 (pdf)

No mention of environment or climate. No dietary recommendations are linked explicitly to environment or climate.

Degree to which document links guidance to environmental impact: Extensive and frequent Partial Occasional or none

Which document?

What Advice?

Why Do This?

How Do This?

Quantification?

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

NB. Federal MyPlate guidance appears to apply across all individual States. Some (e.g. California) have State-badged material that is otherwise identical to Federal guidance. However, Alaska and Hawaii (plus Pacific Island dependencies) appear to also refer to the Secretariat of the Pacific Community and The Pacific Food Guide. The latter was sponsored by the United States Department of Agriculture to account for regional differences in culture and dietary challenges, but makes no mention of environmental or climate impacts of dietary choices: http://manoa.hawaii.edu/ctahr/pacificfoodguide/index.php/about-the-guide/. In response to academic criticism of the Federal guidance, Harvard University publishes the ‘Healthy Eating Plate’ as an alternative to MyPlate, https://www.health.harvard.edu/staying-healthy/healthy-eating-plate

Appendix C: Recommended intakes for key food groups, in FBDGs for 22 jurisdictions

All meat (g/wk)

Red/processed

Meat (g/wk)

Dairy (ml/day)

Fruit and vegetables (g/d)

Austria

399-450g

600

650

Australia

455

625

675

Belgium Flanders

500

250-500

550

Denmark

350

>250

600

Finland

500

-500

France

500

Germany

300

60

250

550

Greece

450

150

500

690

Hungary

350-500

500

600

Iceland

500

500

500

Italy

300

100

375

800

Latvia

500

500

Malta

480

180

500

400

Netherlands

500

300

300-450

450

New Zealand

500

Norway

500

500

Poland

500

400

Portugal

595

500

820

Spain

375

500

690

Sweden

500

200-500

500

Switzerland

450-600

600

Source: derived from references listed in Appendix B

Appendix D: Summary dietary patterns, recommended intakes and population characteristics for Flanders, Netherlands, Sweden and Scotland

Belgium

(2014)

Netherlands (2021)

Sweden

(2010/11)

Scotland

(2021)

Fruit

115

134

128

134

Vegetables

155

174

176

131

Meat

104

92

110

80

Dairy

202

329

245

230

18 <= BMI <25

49%

50%

49%

32% (42%)*

25 <= BMI <30

35%

35%

35%

36% (35%)*

BMI >= 30

14%

13%

14%

31% (20%)*

Population

6.8m

18.0m

10.6m

5.4m

* Scottish-specific BMI figures with UK figures in brackets from same Eurostat source as other countries. Comparisons are indicative given differences in survey methods, definitions and vintage.

Dietary statistics sources:

Belgium.

Scientific Institute for Public health 2016 Food Consumption Survey 2014-2015 https://www.sciensano.be/en/biblio/enquete-de-consommation-alimentaire-2014-2015-resume-des-resultats

Healthy Belgium 2020 Nutritional habits https://www.healthybelgium.be/en/health-status/determinants-of-health/nutritional-habits

STATBEL 2023. Structure of the Population.

https://statbel.fgov.be/en/themes/population/structure-population

Statistics Flanders 2023. Gross domestic product per capita

https://www.vlaanderen.be/en/statistics-flanders/macro-economy/gross-domestic-product-per-capita

For a Healthy Belgium 2020. Weight status.

https://www.healthybelgium.be/en/health-status/determinants-of-health/weight-status#references

Netherlands.

National Institute for Public Health and the Environment: Ministry of Health, Welfare and Sport. 2022. The diet of the Dutch Results of the Dutch National Food Consumption Survey 2019-2021 on food consumption and evaluation with dietary guidelines. https://www.rivm.nl/bibliotheek/rapporten/2022-0190.pdf

National Institute for Public Health and the Environment: Ministry of Health, Welfare and Sport. 2023. Dutch National Food Consumption Survey 2019-2021: Consumption https://statline.rivm.nl/#/RIVM/nl/dataset/50110NED/table?ts=1706353152036

Statistics Netherlands 2023. Regional key figures; National Accounts https://www.cbs.nl/en-gb/figures/detail/84432ENG

Statistics Netherlands 2023. Population Counter https://www.cbs.nl/en-gb/visualisations/dashboard-population/population-counter

Sweden

Swedish National Food Agency 2012 National food – adults 2010-11. Food and nutrient intakes among adults in Swedenhttps://snd.gu.se/en/catalogue/dataset/ext0093-1

Swedish Board of Agriculture. 2023. Food consumption and nutrient content. Data up to and including 2019 https://jordbruksverket.se/om-jordbruksverket/jordbruksverkets-officiella-statistik/jordbruksverkets-statistikrapporter/statistik/2020-12-09-livsmedelskonsumtion-och-naringsinnehall.–uppgifter-till-och-med-2019

Official statistics of Sweden 2023. Population statistics https://www.scb.se/en/finding-statistics/statistics-by-subject-area/population/population-composition/population-statistics/

Statistics Sweden 2023. Sweden’s GDP per capita ranks seventh in Europe

https://www.scb.se/en/finding-statistics/statistics-by-subject-area/prices-and-consumption/purchasing-power-parities/purchasing-power-parities-ppps/pong/statistical-news/purchasing-power-parities-20102012

Scotland

Barton, K. and Ronald, C. 2023. Estimation of Food and Nutrient Intakes from Food Purchase Data in Scotland 2001-2018 https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/downloads/FSS_-_Monitoring_Dietary_Intakes_-_Living_Costs_and_Food_Survey_-_LCFS_-_2001_to_2018_-_Report_for_Publication_-_FINAL_-_PDF_Version_for_Publication_on_Website_-_01_February_2022.pdf

Stewart, C., McNeill, G., Runions, R., Comrie, F., McDonald, A. and Jaacks, P.L.M., 2023. Meat and milk product consumption in Scottish adults: Insights from a national survey. Available at SSRN 4628199. https://deliverypdf.ssrn.com/delivery.php?ID=857005071031031000088070115122121000008032020031003054085010011001034115108111087086083066097092081020103030015004125120065026076016072087060115025026001021037011068002087078095090086003011000052053046070037015000090031072029087122085104109065002075126019112074019089127120092112074085122005&EXT=pdf&INDEX=TRUE

Scotland’s Census 2023. Scotland’s Census 2022 – Rounded population estimates.

https://www.scotlandscensus.gov.uk/2022-results/scotland-s-census-2022-rounded-population-estimates

Obesity statistic sources:

Eurostat Body mass index (BMI) by sex, age and country of citizenship https://ec.europa.eu/eurostat/databrowser/view/hlth_ehis_bm1c/default/table?lang=en&category=hlth.hlth_det.hlth_bmi

NCD-RISC NATIONAL ADULT BODY-MASS INDEX https://www.ncdrisc.org/data-downloads-adiposity.html

Scottish Government 2022. Scottish Health Survey 2021 https://www.gov.scot/collections/scottish-health-survey/#2022

Appendix E: Dietary guidance development and selected food policies and strategies in Flanders

Governance of the Flanders region

Flanders is a region of Belgium. At 483 km2, it comprises less than half the land mass of Belgium, but with more than 6 million inhabitants it represents 57% of the population. Authority for many aspects of health and environmental policy are devolved to regional governments in Belgium, including Flanders, whilst fiscal policy, defence, etc are governed centrally.

FBDGs in Flanders: the Flanders Food Triangle

In Flanders, the FBDGs are captured in a 24-page consumer-facing document “Eating According to the Food Triangle: Good for Yourself and the Planet” (2021). It was developed by the Flemish Institute of Healthy Living (“Gezond Leven”), in cooperation with the Department of the Environment of the Flemish Government. The stated aims of the document are to draw from the latest science and expert advice, in order to provide concrete, achievable consumer recommendations for diets that can improve human health and that of the planet.

The context of the guidance emphasises that the environmental impact of our food is currently greater than what our planet can bear, so dietary change is needed. A graph (Figure 13.1) ranks foods according to their environmental impact, such that citizens are advised to eat more of the foods at the top (legumes, tofu, wheat and rye, potatoes, root vegetables and nuts), and less of the foods at the bottom (lamb, beef, pork, cheese and milk). It also emphasises that consumer choices and habits are strongly influenced by the food environment. Consequently, it argues a multi-stakeholder effort is needed to make healthy, climate-friendly diet choices the most obvious and appealing options for consumers.

In terms of content, the Food Triangle is offered as the basis for a healthy and environmentally responsible diet. It is underpinned by 3 principles: (i) eat proportionately more plant-based food than animal-based food (due to the former generally having lower environmental impact than the latter); (ii) eat and drink as few nutrient poor foods as possible (because every food production step adds an environmental burden, hence our foods need to ‘count’ more); (iii) avoid food waste and moderate your consumption (because every food item that is wasted is an environmental impact that could have been avoided).

The guidance offers specific advice for each of the food groups in the Triangle, which includes quantified amounts for each category, with continued reference/justification to environmental impact. Discretionary foods (foods high in fat, salt and sugar) are separated from the triangle as non-essential to the diet, and this category also includes processed meat.

The Flanders FBDGs emphasises gradual change, not radical shifts: “balance is key: take care of yourself and the planet, but don’t forget to enjoy yourself.” It also recommends up to three or four days per week of meat-free meals. Links are offered to relevant support materials, developed by Gezond Leven, such as recipes for vegetarian meals and a seasonal buying guide for fruit and vegetables.

The guidance offers detailed and nuanced advice about the environmental impacts of different types of production system, and of transportation. For example, it cautions against assumptions that locally sourced food is automatically lower carbon. The guidance also advises on processed meat substitutes, for example, by recommending substitutes like tofu and tempeh, which are less processed than alternatives. It also gives specific advice about nutritional contents to look for in milk and dairy substitutes.

How the FBDGs were developed

Gezond Leven was the lead partner developing the guidance. It is an independent agency working under contract to the Flanders Government, responsible for public health promotion. The other key partner was the Department of the Environment and Spatial Development. The steps of the development process are depicted in Figure 13.2, and can be summarised as follows. The process began with a commissioned review of the scientific literature on the health and environmental impacts of dietary choices. Next, a cross-disciplinary expert panel of academics was convened, to help analyse the evidence and determine the core content of the final guidance, including the visual model. This step also involved development of the underpinning reasoning for the guidance, based on a strong scientific foundation. After this, public-facing messaging was designed and tested amongst citizens. Only after the guidance was finalized were stakeholders consulted on matters related to coordination and implementation of the guidance. Stakeholders did not influence or change the substance of the guidance.

The primacy of science in the development process, and the exclusion of stakeholders from the core development, was a deliberate decision by Gezond Leven. It was based on its first experience of designing climate-focused guidance in 2017, where stakeholders were included in the development process, and less time was spent establishing the scientific underpinning. Gezond Leven received criticisms from stakeholders and the media that the ensuing guidance was biased and lacking in scientific evidence. This led to the ‘science first’ approach for the 2021 guidance.

A co-benefit of developing a solid science base for the current guidance has been the creation of a background document, which explains clearly the reasoning for the integration of climate aspects. This helps Gezond Leven, and the Department of the Environment, to keep the momentum in policy actions which might otherwise be delayed or distracted, with regressive ‘why are we doing this?’ questions.

Policies, strategies and actions related to the FBDGs

The Flemish FBDGs, ‘Eating according to the food triangle: good for yourself and the planet’[43] do not exist in isolation but sit alongside several other food and/or climate-related government strategies and policies.

For example, the ‘Strategic Plan: Fleming Lives Healthier in 2025’ was published in 2018. This acknowledges multiple influences upon human health but makes explicit reference to nutrition and food and the importance of enabling healthy choices, plus monitoring dietary patterns. Similarly, the ‘The Flemish Climate Policy Plan’ commits to reducing agricultural emissions and acknowledges the role of diets and local production patterns in achieving this but notes the challenge of doing so against a backdrop of rising agricultural emissions.[44] Reducing food waste is also addressed in the ‘Action Plan Circular Food Loss and Biomass (Residual) Flows 2021-2025’.[45]

More particularly, the 2019-2024 Flemish Coalition Agreement included a commitment to create a strong food policy. This led to the Department of Agriculture and Fisheries publishing ‘Go4Food: A Flanders Food Strategy for Tomorrow’ in 2020 (subsequently updated).[46]

The Food Strategy explicitly recognises the importance of a healthy and environmentally responsible diet but highlights the need for an inclusive system-wide approach considering the interests of different groups of food consumers and producers. Moreover, the Strategy is acknowledged to exist alongside international (e.g. EU), national (i.e. Belgian) and municipal (e.g. city authorities) food strategies.

As shown in Figure 13.3 above, Go4Food presents four strategic pillars linked to 19 strategic objectives. The objectives include explicit reference to healthy and sustainable diets (SO1, SO2) and environmental sustainability (SO6 and SO7), plus more specific topics such as a circular economy (SO5), minimising food waste (SO8) and more sustainable protein production and consumption (SO9). In turn, these are linked to 11 ‘Food Deal’ ambitions, around which cross-cutting actions are encouraged to coalesce, supported by funding (albeit not yet specified).

The Strategy does not itself describe detailed policy measures but does list various possible policy. For example, public communications, education and training, research and development, voluntary agreements with private supply-chains, and financial incentives and regulatory controls.

A number of ‘food projects’ and ‘food deals’ with stakeholders have been initiated under the Strategy. However, no specific ring-fenced funding is attached to the Strategy, with budget allocations needing to be sought on an individual basis across multiple Departmental boundaries (and/or leverage private sector funding) and apparently encountering some political and administrative resistance (pers. comm).

One area in receipt of funding is protein production, reflecting the relative importance attached to the ‘Flemish Protein Strategy 2021-2030’ published in 2021.[47] The Protein Strategy represents an evolution from similar, earlier strategies to increase the volume and range of domestically produced protein (to reduce reliance on imports, particularly where imports are deemed to be produced unsustainably).

In particular, there is an emphasis on growing additional plant protein for animal feed but also for domestic human consumption, with explicit recognition that this links to dietary change (novel protein sources such as insects and lab-grown cultures are also included). No specific targets are stated for reducing animal protein consumption, but health and climate advantages are noted.

A possible reason for specific funding being made available for the Protein Strategy may be that it aligns with EU-level ambitions to increase self-sufficiency in plant proteins. Such ambitions have recently been reinforced by the European parliament but were already stated to some degree in the EU’s Green Deal and the Farm-to-Fork Strategy, and have been translated into explicit funding commitments in the Flanders CAP Strategic Plan.[48] Consequently, ring-fenced EU funding is available for increased on-farm production of plant proteins (e.g. in the form of specific public payments per hectare of crop grown). This has perhaps also made it easier to secure additional (if more modest) funding for product development and processing facilities (pers. comm.).

Ring-fenced funding under the Flanders CAP Strategic Plan is also available to increase the area of organic agriculture, and to increase the area of fruit and vegetables (not just protein crops) grown. Moreover, additional capital grant assistance is available for Producer Organizations (e.g. coops) wishing to invest in infrastructure or equipment for fruit and vegetable production. Such measures may increase the availability of locally produced food. Again, such measures align with EU-level ambitions, but it is notable that Flanders’ use of them is higher than in other Member States (including elsewhere in Belgium).[49]

Appendix F: Dietary guidance development and selected food policies and strategies in the Netherlands

Background to the Wheel of Five and Seven Steps to Sustainability

In the Netherlands, climate-focused dietary guidance is captured in the “Eating more sustainably: fact sheet” (2022), which accompanies the “Wheel of Five” main dietary guidance, both produced by the Netherlands Nutrition Centre (NNC). The former is a 10-page document targeted at professionals/policymakers. The stated aims are to set out the case for environmentally sustainable diets, and how the Dutch diet should change to be in line with science-based planetary health recommendations.

In terms of context/framing, the document begins by conveying the environmental impacts of food production and consumption, and the urgent need for change. It states that the current Dutch diet is not sustainable (“the environmental footprint of the average Dutch diet is almost twice as large as the available area on the planet, per person, for food production”, p2) because the Dutch population (i) consumes too much animal products (ii) wastes huge amounts of food (iii) consumes more energy than is recommended.

The document then refers explicitly to the Dutch “Wheel of Five” model (Figure 15.1), which depicts the proportions in which different food groups are recommended to feature in the diet (vegetables and fruit; spreading and cooking fats; dairy, nuts, fish, legumes, meat and eggs; bread, grain/cereal products and potatoes; drinks). In the model, discretionary foods (high in fat, salt and sugar) are classed as ‘outside’ the model and non-essential to diet. The document states that shifting from the current diet to the Wheel of Five is good for health and climate.

Finally, the document gives specific advice within food groups, about the most sustainable options to choose, and sums these up in ‘7 steps to a more sustainable diet’. These are: eat less meat (opt more often for pulses, nuts or eggs); waste as little as possible (buy and cook what you need); eat recommended amounts (moderate your snacks and sweets); drink mostly tap water; eat enough dairy and cheese (but within bounds); buy seasonally (and check product origins); choose premium sustainability labels.

Overall, there are three eye-catching features of the Dutch FBDGs. First, the dairy intake recommendations are to “eat sufficient dairy to avoid chronic diseases but not more than that”. Second, there is detailed and nuanced advice about meat. The guidance recommends clearly that eating less meat and dairy reduces the impact on the environment, however it explains that eating a small amount of meat (around once per week), requires less agricultural land than a totally meat-free diet. This is because animals can convert some inedible plants into edible proteins. Thus, the guidance advises that animal products have their place in a sustainable diet, but intake levels need to be less than current consumption. Finally, the guidance places emphasis on making diets more sustainable by choosing better options within food categories, by way of eco-labels, and in particular, from a defined set of ‘reliable’ eco-labels. This set has been compiled by the Dutch government to help address consumer confusion over labels, so they can choose with confidence.

Background to the FBDG development process

Two agencies led the development of the Dutch FBDGs. These were the National Institute for Public Health and the Environment (NIPHE), a research centre which collects and analyses scientific evidence and conducts data modelling, and the Netherlands Nutrition Centre (NNC), a body which translates the science into practical FBDGs for consumers and health professionals. Both are independent bodies, funded solely by the Ministries of Health and Agriculture. In 2015, the NIPHE reviewed the scientific evidence on health and climate impacts of diets, with input from academic subject experts. NIPHE used this intelligence to model dietary guidelines as close as possible to the existing Dutch diet, while meeting parameters of health, climate impact, feasibility and applicability to different target groups. Figure 15.2 shows the model constraints. For health reasons, minimum intake levels of vegetables, fruit, wholegrains, fish, legumes, nuts and dairy were specified. For climate reasons, maximum intake levels of fish, red meat, total meat, eggs and dairy products were specified. Maximum intake levels of red meat and eggs were specified also for health reasons.

The NNC used the modelled solutions to draft the public facing dietary guidance, including the graphics. A transparent consultation process followed with experts, to check for any errors/omissions in the science, and also health professionals, to advise on practical implementation.

The food industry was specifically not involved in the consultation. Only after the final guidance was completed were meetings held with industry representatives. This approach was taken to maintain both the real and perceived independence of the NIPHE and NNC. In total, the development process took several years.

At the time of writing, the Dutch Health Council are currently updating their nutritional guidance, and advances in climate science/data mean there is the opportunity for NNC to add more environmental indicators into their modelling (e.g. land and water use, pollution, and biodiversity), for the next revision. Another ambition is to set a clearer sustainability target for the FBDGs, for example, to achieve a certain percentage reduction of GHGs in the Dutch diet.

Policies, strategies and actions related to the FBDGs

Policies relevant to food in the Netherlands appear to reflect the traditional priorities of host ministries, with relatively little integration of health and climate goals. For example, the 2018 ‘National Prevention Agreement: Towards a Healthier Netherlands’ presents ambitions for healthier lifestyles by 2040 but without reference to sustainability. Similarly, the 2015 ‘National Health Policy’[50] includes goals to increase consumption of fruits and vegetables, but these are justified for health not climate reasons. Meanwhile, the 2019 ‘Climate Agreement’, which sets economy-wide emission reduction targets of 49% by 2030, contains only one brief reference to the need for change in food consumption habits (5 lines in a 247 page document).

In relation to agriculture, significant public funding has been allocated to support progress towards agricultural emission targets. This includes continuing production support measures under the CAP for organic farming, fruit and vegetable production, and protein production.[51] For example, direct support to increase the area of particular crops grown, consistent with EU-level ambitions to expand organic agriculture and reduce dependency upon imported protein crops and fruit and vegetables.[52] Dutch deployment of fruit and vegetable aid under the CAP is relatively high compared to most other Member States, although less than in Flanders.[53]

The Dutch National Protein Strategy represents a more integrative policy approach. As in Flanders, CAP funding has been used to encourage plant protein production at farm level. This is being combined with further funding made available under the National Green Fund. It also includes leverage of private sector investment, on the basis of potential market opportunities for plant (and more novel) forms of protein. The Strategy also links to broader ambitions under the earlier ‘Strategic Biomass Vision for the Netherlands towards 2030’.[54] Both Strategies acknowledge the health and climate motivations for reducing overall protein consumption by 10% to 15% whilst also decreasing the proportion of animal-based protein.

Example responses to encouragement for private funding to support the protein shift include bids for research and development, product innovations, and conversion of a meat processing plant to handle plant proteins.[55]

Actions specifically to encourage take-up of the FBDGs are led by the NNC, and it has deployed a range of communication tools, including extensive use of social media and also diet tracker apps. Other policy measures include voluntary private sector agreements to reformulate processed products[56] and reductions in advertising aimed at children. Certain municipalities have moved to ban advertising of fast food, and Haarlem is introducing a ban in outdoor advertising of meat.

In addition, reducing VAT on fruit and vegetables from the current rate of 9% to 0% has been proposed. This has, however, been delayed repeatedly because of political difficulties. A recent independent report commissioned by the government cautioned that implementation would be difficult. It also suggested that increased fruit and vegetable consumption would not be guaranteed.[57]

Appendix G: Dietary guidance development and selected food policies and strategies in Sweden

Background to “Find your way to eat greener, not too much and be active”

In Sweden, the FBDGs are captured in the 28-page consumer-facing document “Find your way to eat greener, not too much, and be active” (2015). It was developed by the Swedish Food Agency, in cooperation with the Swedish Public Health Agency, Board of Agriculture and Environmental Protection Agency. The Swedish Food Agency is an independent, government-funded body, which administers public diet and health activities, and is also charged with responsibility to achieve Swedish Government environmental targets.

The document explains that because what we eat has an impact on the environment as well as health, we need to eat more sustainably. In terms of context, it explains that one quarter of climate impact from Swedish households comes from food eaten or thrown away. Eating more sustainably means economising on Earth’s resources, to ensure there’s enough good food to eat in future. It refers to a wide range of environmental issues, including water quality, pesticide use and antibiotics in farm animals as well as climate change.

The guidance itself does not incorporate any plate or pyramid model. Instead, it structures advice around 3 sections: 1. things to eat/do more of; 2. things to switch; and 3. things to eat less of. For each of these actions, there is a dedicated page which explains the advice in more detail, including the link to environmental impact, offering specific ingredient and recipe suggestions to help make the change. There is strong emphasis on “making the changes work for you”. Figure 16.1 shows the page of guidance for red and processed meat. This includes practical advice for reducing consumption of these products, foods to swap with, dish and recipe suggestions, and advice on how to buy the most sustainable red meat.

There are three points of particular interest in the Swedish guidance. First, as Fischer and Garnett (2016) note, the guidelines are nuanced and detailed about which types of foods to choose within a category, and why those are best for the environment. For example, the guidance advises high fibre vegetables over greenhouse salad crops, due to lower GHGs in production, and better transportation. It also recommends other grains and potatoes over rice, within the cereals group, because of the high carbon impact of rice production.

Second, the advice takes a nuanced approach to the environmental impacts of animal production systems, noting that livestock can contribute to landscape and biodiversity. This leads to a mantra of a ‘less but better’ approach to meat consumption, with ‘better’ meaning organic, eco-labelled and Swedish: “If you cut back on meat, you’ll have enough money for meat produced sustainably, with attention paid to the welfare of the animals. Choose eco-labelled meats such as free range, organic or certified eco-friendly.” There is no further discussion of this advice in relation to lower income households, for example.

Background to the FBDGs development process

The origins of the current FBDGs date back to 2007/08, when the Swedish Government was motivated to act on international evidence on climate change, including from the IPCC, which recognised that food is part of the climate problem. From 2008-13, the Swedish Food Agency commissioned analysis of the environmental impacts of different foods, alongside evidence on the health effects of diet gathered from Nordic Nutrition Recommendations (NNR)[58]. The joint evidence was reviewed, in collaboration with experts from the Swedish Public Health Agency, Board of Agriculture and Environmental Protection Agency. The review was supported by a stakeholder panel.

Discussions during the review process were reportedly constructive, helped by the fact that the process was data-driven (e.g. no one could dispute that Swedes ate too much meat with the relevant statistics in front of them). Emphasis was also placed on finding points of agreement between the parties. For example, that although meat consumption should decrease, consumption of Swedish meat need not decrease, as Sweden is a net importer of meat. This led to the “less but better” messaging, which was supported by multiple stakeholders.

In 2014, a public consultation took place, including participants from industry, consumer and patient organisations, and public health professionals. From this process, the guidance was drafted and tested with consumers. The guidance was published in 2016/17, hence the whole process from initial discussions to publication took almost 10 years.

It is worth noting that since the development of this guidance, the latest revision of the Nordic Nutrition Recommendations (NNR), in 2023, has been published. The NNR is a forum and programme funded by the Nordic countries, including Sweden, to gather robust evidence on diet and nutrition. The latest revision includes explicit reference to climate impact. It therefore provides a very high standard, scientifically informed evidence base on climate-friendly diets.

Policies, strategies and actions related to the FBDGs

In Sweden, the policy landscape for sustainable diets appears fragmented. For example, the 2016 “A National Food Strategy for Sweden”, and subsequent “Action Plan” published in 2019, focus almost exclusively on supply-side measures, notably funding for farmers and technological innovation. This relies heavily upon pre-existing (ring-fenced) funding under the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP). The Strategy is justified in terms of increasing production for domestic and export markets and to increase self-sufficiency and rural employment. However, these measures are not connected to actions to stimulate domestic capacity or growth on the demand side.

In addition, the 2016 ‘Strategy for Sustainable Consumption’ contains only a brief reference to food (a short paragraph, which refers to a Government desire for country of origin labelling of meat in restaurants and canteens). Meanwhile, the 2018 “Climate Framework Policy”, which sets out the Swedish Government’s net zero targets for the whole economy, also makes no reference to food consumption or dietary change.

The gap between supply and demand side policy actions for healthy and sustainable food is also apparent in relation to organic food. The Government aims for 30% of Swedish agricultural output to be certified organic by 2030. It also aims for an increase in consumption of organic food, for 60% of public food to be certified organic by 2030. However, while direct funding has been allocated to support production, much less has been targeted at achieving the demand side ambitions.

In 2021, the Swedish Government tasked the Swedish Food Agency and Public Health Agency to propose areas of action needed for a more sustainable food system in Sweden, and indicators to measure progress[59]. The work was based on consultations with authorities, industry and civil society. The report, published 2024, emphasizes the need for joined-up policies to tackle health and climate problems: for example, Action area 3 concerns “cooperation between public and commercial actors to promote a sustainable and healthy food environment”. However, given recent shifts in politics in Sweden and hardening resistance from industry stakeholders to food system change, it may be challenging for officials to take forward many of the recommended Actions in the report.

The National Food Strategy does not provide details of specific policy measures but does list types of measures. For example, the provision of information to consumers and the role of public sector catering. However, the main focus is on support to food supply-chains to increase productivity and reduce food waste. Efforts to improve productivity include support for research and innovation, but also deployment of funding under the CAP Strategic Plan. This includes coupled support for livestock production but also funding for organic production plus a limited amount for fruit and vegetable production.[60]

A follow-up Action Plan to the National Food Strategy published in 2019[61] does list more specific policy measures and projects, accompanied by budget allocations, but again focuses almost completely on production rather than consumption. The Action Plan also sets targets for 30% of Swedish agricultural and 60% of public food consumption to be certified organic by 2030.

The general absence of specific targets and policy measures in relation to sustainable food consumption has also attracted commentary from Swedish academics.[62] Similarly, several published studies suggest that dietary change, particularly away from meat to more plant-based diets, has health as well as climate benefits.[63] However, whilst meat consumption has reduced slightly in recent years, it is acknowledged that changing consumer behaviour to achieve further reductions is challenging.[64]

Published academic studies have also commented on the general absence of specific policy measures. For example, over-reliance on public information, public sector catering and increased domestic production rather than direct regulatory controls and/or fiscal measures.[65]

It is possible that the anticipated refresh of the National Food Strategy scheduled for 2024 will address some or all of the identified policy weaknesses. However, the Board of Agriculture and its Minister are still actively promoting production-based policy approaches (pers. comm.)

© The University of Edinburgh
Prepared by Pareto Consulting on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

  1. e.g. see Reay (2020), Crippa et al., (2021), Agriculture and climate change – Agriculture and the environment – gov.scot (www.gov.scot).


  2. e.g. see Planetary Health | UNFCCC and The Lancet Planetary Health Home Page


  3. equality-opportunity-community-programme-government.pdf (www.gov.scot), Good Food Nation – Food and drink – gov.scot (www.gov.scot), Climate change – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)


  4. See Comrie et al, 2024, Scottish Emission Targets & Progress in reducing emissions in Scotland – 2022 Report to Parliament – Climate Change Committee (theccc.org.uk) and 2. Response to CCC Recommendations – Climate Change Committee’s (CCC) annual progress report 2022 recommendations: SG response – gov.scot (www.gov.scot)


  5. The Eatwell Guide | Food Standards Scotland


  6. The eatwell guide: A more sustainable diet | The Carbon Trust (2016); Scheelbeek et al., 2020.


  7. Springmann et al (2020) The healthiness and sustainability of national and global food based dietary guidelines: modelling study | The BMJ


  8. German guidance was updated in spring 2024, shortly before publication of this report. The consumer-facing documents now contain less reference to climate than before. However, background documents do retain a climate focus, and the guidance itself is based on optimization modelling for health, GHG emissions and land use. Hence, we have retained the German FBDGs in the ‘green’ category.


  9. For example, confectionery, sweet biscuits, savoury snacks, cakes, pastries, puddings and sugar containing soft drinks. See https://www.foodstandards.gov.scot/publications-and-research/publications/briefing-on-discretionary-foods


  10. see Australia | Food Policy Index and FoodEPI_AB_Report_WEB-FINAL.pdf (utoronto.ca), Dawkins et al (2023)


  11. Voedseltop Synthese (vlaanderen.be)


  12. The NNR is a forum and programme funded by the Nordic countries, including Sweden, to gather the latest scientific evidence on diet and nutrition. The aim is to provide a robust evidence base that national governments in the Nordics can use to inform their dietary guidance.


  13. Government Offices Sweden 2021. Sweden’s pathway for sustainable food systems.


  14. School meals will speed up the transition to a sustainable food system | Vinnova


  15. E.g. Barton et al, 2015; Barton et al, 2022; Food Standards Scotland, 2020; Comrie et al, 2024.


  16. Comrie et al, 2024.


  17. See also Appendix D.


  18. Matthews et al, 2023.


  19. e.g. Gladding et al., 2020; Andretta et al., 2021; Gržinić et al., 2023.


  20. This would be to recognise the target of the Climate Change Committee. However, how that target would apply to Scottish dietary guidance is unclear, as no intake range for dairy is currently recommended.


  21. E.g. Strid et al., 2019; Hendrie et al., 2021; Leme et al., 2021; Yin et al., 2023.


  22. Matthews et al, 2023.


  23. Garnett et al., 2015.


  24. https://mijn.voedingscentrum.nl/nl/eetmeter/


  25. Roos et al, 2021; Matthews et al, 2023.


  26. Bailey and Ross Harper, 2015.


  27. Roos et al, 2021.


  28. Roos et al, 2021; Burgaz et al, 2023.


  29. Matthews et al, 2023.


  30. Scarborough et al 2020 cited by Burgaz et al 2023


  31. e.g. Purnell et al., 2014; Vermeir et al., 2020; Eluwa et al., 2023


  32. See United Kingdom Internal Market Act 2020 (legislation.gov.uk) and Subsidy Control Act 2022 (legislation.gov.uk)


  33. Roos et al, 2021


  34. Healthy Eating in Schools: guidance 2020 (www.gov.scot)


  35. Sustainable Scotland Network – Public Bodies Climate Change Reporting 2021/22: Analysis Report


  36. Burgaz et al, 2023; Bailey and Ross Harper, 2015


  37. Matthews et al 2023.


  38. For example, processors and retailers are progressing faster on adding climate-related criteria to their quality labels than sector-wide Quality Assurance or PGI schemes. The resulting fragmentation may not help consumers to make informed choices about climate-friendly options.


  39. https://www.ruralpayments.org/topics/agricultural-reform-programme/arp-route-map/ and https://www.gov.scot/publications/climate-change-action-policy-package/


  40. e.g. see https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LrmbyMaxZhk and https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KJ-2NjQC1ag


  41. Tables adapted from style deployed in supplementary material presented by James-Martin et al. (2022). Where recourse has been made to machine translation via Google Translate and DeepL, the accuracy of terminology and titles in English may be imperfect.


  42. However, the FAO suggests Ministry of Health, the Austrian Agency for Health and Food Safety, the National Nutrition Commission and the Austrian Nutrition Society; Ministry for Labour, Social Affairs, Health and Consumer Protection


  43. Food-triangle-EN.pdf (gezondleven.be)


  44. https://publicaties.vlaanderen.be/view-file/13458, be_final_necp_parta_en_0.pdf (europa.eu) and be_final_necp_partb_en_0.pdf (europa.eu)


  45. 210706 English version VR 2021 0204 DOC. Actieplan voedselverlies en biomassa 2021-2025 EN (oneplanetnetwork.org)


  46. Go4Food, A Flanders food strategy for tomorrow. Synthesis | Vlaanderen.be


  47. Vlaamse Eiwitstrategie 2021-2030 (oneplanetnetwork.org)


  48. EU protein strategy (europa.eu), REPORT European protein strategy | A9-0281/2023 | European Parliament (europa.eu), The Commission approves the CAP Strategic Plans of Belgium – European Commission (europa.eu), 16925dca-08d0-4592-8c87-202d12ec8bcd_en (europa.eu)


  49. 7b3a0485-c335-4e1b-a53a-9fe3733ca48f_en (europa.eu) (Fig 30), Organic action plan – European Commission (europa.eu), Fruit and vegetables – European Commission (europa.eu). Organic and fruit & vegetable support has been and remains available in Scotland under the CAP, albeit with more modest funding.


  50. https://extranet.who.int/nutrition/gina/sites/default/filesstore/NLD%202015%20National%20Health%20Policy%20Note.pdf


  51. Including for organic production and fruit and vegetable production Microsoft Word – 20220209_Nederlands NSP GLB – versie 1.0 (overheid.nl)


  52. Organic action plan – European Commission (europa.eu), Fruit and vegetables – European Commission (europa.eu) , EU protein strategy (europa.eu), REPORT European protein strategy | A9-0281/2023 | European Parliament (europa.eu)


  53. 7b3a0485-c335-4e1b-a53a-9fe3733ca48f_en (europa.eu) (Fig 30)


  54. 92465_visie_biomassa_engels_def.pdf (europa.eu)


  55. Five major players launch masterplan for protein transition as economic engine in The Netherlands – WUR, The ‘master plan’ to double legume consumption in the Netherlands by 2030 (foodnavigator.com) , Test resolution 4K magazine design (investinholland.com) , ‘ME-AT the alternative’ launches first locally grown protein chain – Vion Food Group


  56. https://www.rivm.nl/publicaties/nieuwe-criteria-voor-productverbetering


  57. https://www.seo.nl/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2023-32-btw-nultarief-eindrapport.pdf https://www.seo.nl/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2023-32-btw-nultarief-eindrapport.pdf


  58. The NNR is a forum and programme funded by the Nordic countries, including Sweden, to gather the latest scientific evidence on diet and nutrition. The aim is to provide a robust evidence base that national governments in the Nordics can use to inform their dietary guidance.


  59. Government Office Sweden 2021. Sweden’s pathway for sustainable food systems.


  60. 7b3a0485-c335-4e1b-a53a-9fe3733ca48f_en (europa.eu)


  61. The Government’s action plan part 2: A food strategy for Sweden – more jobs and sustainable growth throughout the country – Regeringen.se


  62. e.g. sei-wp-climate-food-transport-gong-2205a.pdf


  63. e.g. Less meat, more legumes: prospects and challenges in the transition toward sustainable diets in Sweden | Renewable Agriculture and Food Systems | Cambridge Core , Sustainability benefits of transitioning from current diets to plant-based alternatives or whole-food diets in Sweden | Nature Communications and Food Dishes for Sustainable Development: A Swedish Food Retail Perspective – PMC (nih.gov)


  64. e.g. Identifying barriers to decreasing meat consumption and increasing acceptance of meat substitutes among Swedish consumers – ScienceDirect, Livsmedelskonsumtion av animalier. Preliminära uppgifter 2020 – Jordbruksverket.se


  65. Dawkins et al. (2023) and 2023. Policy for sustainable consumptionan assessment of Swedish municipalities. Frontiers in Sustainability, 4, p.1265733. and Policy-Options-for-Sustainable-Food-Consumption-2021-Mistra-Sustainable-Consumption-report-1.pdf (sustainableconsumption.se)


July 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4622

Executive summary

Scotland’s net zero 2045 ambition and updated Climate Change Plan require the rapid development of carbon capture and storage (CCS) and carbon dioxide removal (CDR). Current pathways to meeting statutory targets are dependent on large industrial clusters, funded by the UK Government.

Alternative pathways for the rapid decarbonisation of smaller, distributed biogenic sources of carbon dioxide (CO2) may be available, noting that these would be of an order of magnitude less than the industrial clusters, with the advantage of high-value CDR credits. This requires permits for storage sites within Scottish inshore waters which extend to 12 nautical miles from the coast, and policy coordination across capture, transport and storage.

This study explored the potential total CO2 storage capacity in Scottish inshore areas and the availability of onshore emissions originating from biomass, known as bio-CO2. The study also investigated if the distribution of potential sources and storage availability would make it possible to expedite Scotland’s CCS and CDR potential.

The capture of bio-CO2 is already a commercial success in Scotland, with an ambition to scale without subsidy to 1 million tonnes per year by 2030, which requires storage. Norway, Denmark and Iceland are selling CO2 storage at a premium, reflecting a supply-and-demand imbalance in regional storage availability.

Aims

This study aimed to assess the potential for developing CCS within 12 nautical miles of the Scottish shoreline – an area within Scottish Ministers’ competence. We explored the feasibility to deploy high-value capture and low-cost CO2 storage in Scotland and what the commercially viable total capacity for nearshore storage is likely to be. The outcomes also address the availability of bio-CO2, domestic CCS value chains, fit-for-purpose storage site licensing and high-value CDR certificates.

We propose that Scotland can make rapid progress by refocusing on domestic bio-CO2. These emissions are already being captured in Scotland at low cost and with simple technology.

We identified prospects within the 12 nm territorial waters. Developing secure storage of high value bio-CO2 within the Scottish jurisdiction can produce several financial benefits, including premium lease payments to Crown Estate Scotland, development of local skills and growth of new businesses. This has the potential to increase Scottish GDP by tens to hundreds of millions of pounds per year, as well as paying staff and corporate taxes.

Developing Scottish storage sites for CO2 provides elements of control over licensing and the pace of approval for carbon capture and storage. Developing secure storage of high value bio-CO2 within the Scottish jurisdiction can produce CO2 removals, equivalent to direct air capture but at much lower financial cost.

We reviewed the potential for the rapid licensing of inshore storage using a streamlined version of UK licensing. Four geographic areas of interest are ranked by maturity of evaluation. We examine when injection could start if all regulations were in place across the different authorities.

Findings

We addressed five elements of CCS: licensing, storage, sources, timeframes and cost. We found that it is theoretically possible to adopt a streamlined licensing framework; inshore storage is available for rapid appraisal, albeit at a very limited capacity compared to offshore; bio-CO2 sources are abundant across nine sectors with explosive growth potential driven by the global CDR market; timeframes can be measured in years with the potential to deliver operational injection of bio-CO2 before 2030; costs are competitive with UK clusters and export markets.

Licensing

  • CO2 storage involves multiple activities under different licensing regimes.
  • New regulations for CO2 storage are not required.
  • Minor amendments to existing statutory instruments may be required.
  • The amendments may be fast if based on existing UK regulations and the CCS Directive.
  • A Crown Estate Scotland (CES) lease is also required.
  • Consents may also be required from the Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA) and the Scottish Government’s Marine Directorate.

Storage

  • Four areas have well data and seismic coverage.
  • Only the Lybster oil field is a candidate for immediate development.
  • The total expected nearshore capacity is 2 Mt without further extensive surveying.
  • The Forth Basin is a low Technology Readiness Level research opportunity.

Sources

  • We mapped 98 of the largest bio-CO2 sources in Scotland.
  • Source emissions range from 2 to 360 kilotonnes per annum.
  • Separation of CO2 from distilleries and biogas upgrading are low cost.
  • Combustion sources are higher cost and are the largest sources and sectors.
  • The source distribution across five clusters favours road transport to local storage.

Timeframes

  • North Sea Transition Authority appraisal licences average five years and three months.
  • Appraisal are followed by storage permits and 2 years of further site development.
  • The fastest storage permits are issued in as little as three years.
  • The fastest development of a site to first injection is around a year.
  • Lybster permitting could be fast but requires further exploration of legal frameworks.
  • Rapid progression is dependent on pre-existing data to confirm site suitability.

Costs

  • Capture costs for separation sources are low, at £60 per tonne.
  • Capture costs for combustion sources are higher, at £120 per tonne.
  • Truck transport costs £20 per tonne per 100 miles, or £0.12/tonne/km.
  • Storage costs for Lybster are £70 per tonne.
  • The full chain CCS cost is £150 per tonne for separation within 100 miles of Lybster.
  • Storage costs for sites further offshore are at least two to three times higher.

Revenue

  • CDR credits on the European voluntary market are worth £297 per tonne.
  • Taxing storage would be subject to further work by the Scottish Government.
  • As a simple example, a 10% tax could yield between £7 and £30 per tonne per annum.
  • Lybster tax revenue would be £30 million for a 2 Mt capacity and £15 per tonne tax.
  • Further revenue is available if bio-CO2 is transported to Acorn via the Feeder 10 pipeline.
  • Combined revenue for Lybster and Feeder 10 could total £250-500 million by 2045.

Next steps

In order to progress the potential benefits of CCS and CDR in Scotland, we recommend the following actions.

  • The Scottish Government could conduct further work to fully understand the law around consenting and regulating storage and consider pursuing a streamlined regulatory framework for storage that builds on the structure established by the NSTA while emulating the accelerated approach taken by Denmark and Norway. This is relevant to Scottish policy, legislators, SEPA, and the Marine Directorate.
  • The Scottish Government could consider supporting an appraisal of Lybster with the involvement of a compliant operator. This would require 3D seismic interpretation to build a static model and undertake reservoir simulation. This could be completed within one year with the intention of transitioning to a front-end engineering design study and development decision within three years. This requires a competent person’s report on the site, model outcomes, and risk analysis.
  • The Forth Basin saturated water injection proposal could be considered as a potential research pilot to mature the concept and location from its current low TRL. This is relevant to the Scottish universities’ research community and British Geological Survey.
  • Maturing the Fraserburgh and Solway Firth areas could proceed when market signals support the necessary investment in data acquisition and offshore development.
  • The Scottish Government could seek mechanisms and policies to maximise the domestic benefits of full chain CCS, rather than exporting captured bio-CO2 to storage providers in other countries. The high concentration of bio-CO2 sources in the central belt raises the possibility of a gathering station for Feeder 10 access to Acorn.

Onshore bio-CO2 sources located close to inshore CO2 storage prospects.

(Sources: SCCS, BGS, SNZR, NNFCC, NSTA)

 

List of abbreviations

AD

Anaerobic Digester

AOI

Area of Interest

BEIS

Department for Business, Energy, and Industrial Strategy

BSA

Boston Square Analysis

Bio-CO2

CO2 from decomposition, digestion, or combustion of biomass

CCS

Carbon Capture and Storage

CDR

Carbon Dioxide Removal

CES

Crown Estate Scotland

DECC

Department of Energy and Climate Change

DESNZ

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero

DF

Distillery Fermentation

EfW

Energy from Waste

FEED

Front End Engineering Design

MD

Marine Directorate

Mtpa

Million tonnes per annum, equal to 50 litres per second of CO2

NSTA

North Sea Transition Authority

OGA

Oil & Gas Authority, the legal entity for the NSTA

P90-P50-P10

Pessimistic-Expected-Optimistic range

SEPA

Scottish Environmental Protection Agency

Glossary

Aquifer

An aquifer is an underground layer of water-bearing rock, consisting of porous and permeable materials such as sandstone and chalk.

Biomethane

Biomethane is methane gas, CH4, that has been produced from the anaerobic digestion of organic matter such as manure, sewage, and organic waste.

Biomethane Upgrader

A biomethane upgrader is a piece of equipment that transforms biogas to biomethane by filtering out impurities such as other gases that are also generated during anaerobic digestion.

Caprock

A relatively impermeable rock, commonly shale, anhydrite, or salt, that forms a barrier or seal above and around reservoir rock so that fluids cannot migrate out of the reservoir.

Inshore

Inshore is a marine area adjacent to the coast of a state or jurisdiction. The inshore area for Scotland is synonymous with the territorial waters that extend 12 nm beyond the coastline.

Regional Aquifer

A regional aquifer is a water-bearing reservoir that extends laterally for 10s to 100s of km, reflecting a thick regional distribution of the reservoir rock such as a sandstone or chalk.

Seismic

Seismic in this context refers to the geophysical surveying technique of imaging the geologic structure of the subsurface by using vibrational waves and sonic reflections.

Syncline

A trough of stratified rock in which the beds dip toward each other from either side to form a u-shaped or v-shaped structure along a geometric axis.

Introduction

The following report consists of five sections that cover CO2 storage licencing, inshore storage opportunities, available sources of bio-CO2, storage development timeframes, and a cost-revenue analysis of onshore capture, transport, and inshore storage. The report closes with six questions and answers that aim to synthesise the outcomes and propose ways forward.

Licensing

The Energy Act 2008 first enabled CO2 storage in the UK. The Carbon Dioxide Regulations 2010 adopted many requirements of the EU CCS Directive 2009 on the geological storage of carbon dioxide and came into force October 2010 – Appendix A. The regulations were extended in 2011 to address the termination of licences. The CCS Directive was transposed into UK law in 2012 by the adoption of secondary legislation under the authority of the Energy Act 2008.

CCS Directive

An EU regulatory framework for CCS was first proposed by the European Commission in 2007 (EC, 2007). The CCS Directive 2009 provides the framework for CO2 storage with only brief mentions of capture and transport. The CCS Directive is supported by a series of six guidance documents. The guidance covers: the storage complex, characterisation, risk management, stream composition, monitoring and corrective measures, criteria for the transfer of liability to the competent authority, and financial security and financial mechanisms. The Directorate-General for Climate Action (DG CLIMA) commissioned DNV in 2022 to revise the guidance documents to reflect the current understanding of CCS and remove ambiguities identified during the development of early CCS projects. The outcomes can be expected in Q3 2024.

Licensing in the UK

DESNZ currently leads UK government energy policy, preceded by BEIS (2016-2023) and DECC (2008-2016). UK energy policy is framed by HM Treasury budgeting and long-term planning. The Energy Act 2008 makes provision for gas storage, enabling the licensing of CO2 storage appraisals and CO2 storage permitting – Figure 1.

Figure 1. Current UK licensing framework for CO2 storage in Scotland for offshore areas such as Acorn.

UK licensing development

There are currently 27 UK appraisal licences open – see detail in Appendix B and Figure 2.

Figure 2. The location of offshore CO2 storage appraisal licences currently active in UK waters.

Licence CS001 and 1CS003-CS027). CS002 was reissued as CS003 in 2023.

Over a decade of policy engagement and early licensing experience has led to the current structure of appraisal licensing, storage permitting, and licence termination. The appraisal licence and storage permit terms both consist of three phases each:

  • Appraisal licence phases: 1. Appraise 2. Assess 3. Define
  • Storage permit phases: 4. Execute 5. Operate 6. Monitor

The seventh and final phase is a further monitoring period that occurs after the transfer of the site liability from the operator to the regulator with the termination of the storage permit. The seven phases are described in more detail below:

1. Appraise: This initial phase consists of an early risk assessment to establish storage feasibility and identify gaps which are then addressed by site characterisation. The characterisation of the trap structure may require 3D seismic acquisition over the site or reprocessing of an existing survey, and appraisal drilling.

2. Assess: This phase is a thorough evaluation of the site characterisation outcomes, and the operator’s proposed storage plan or need for further appraisal.

3. Define: This phase is a detailed proposal for site development commonly referred to as front end engineering and design (FEED). The design specification and required engineering informs a final investment decision and, if positive, an application for a storage permit.

4. Execute: On issuance of a storage permit, the operator executes the design plan. This entails the construction and commissioning of the engineering works necessary for CO2 injection into the target reservoir and for site conformance monitoring during the operational phase.

5. Operate: This phase commences with the first injection of CO2 and conformance to the operational plan. Any deviation from the planned operational conditions such as pressure excursions, flow impedance, or indications of out-of-zone migration are investigated and addressed to the satisfaction of the regulator, or otherwise promoted to a change in the operational plan up to and including a suspension of operations and early closure of the site.

6. Monitor: This phase commences with the end of injection and closure of the site and is a continuation of any preceding operational monitoring adapted to the specific requirements of conformance monitoring for the post-operational phase.

7. Verify: This phase commences with the end of the storage permit and transfer of site liability to the regulator. It consists of a sustained monitoring plan that verifies the long-term conformance of the site to expected outcomes.

The seven phases outline the structure of the current UK licensing regime – Table 1. In practice, each phase entails many elements that need to be negotiated between the operator and regulator. The negotiations are based on the specific requirements of a storage site and the evidence base of increasingly detailed assessments, characterisation, development proposals, and adaptation to conditions during the execution and operational phases.

Illustrating this, 17 of the 28 appraisal licences include between two and five additional requirements that apply during the initial appraisal phase to support characterisation – Table 2. These range from acquiring 3D seismic and drilling an appraisal well, to undertaking CO2 transport and topside installation studies, core sampling, and fault geomechanical analysis.

Table 1. Main stages of license progression

Main stages

TLA

Maturity

Early Risk Assessment

ERA

Feasibility

Characterise

CH

Appraisal

Assess

AS

Pre-front-end engineering

Define

DF

Front-end engineering design

Permit Application

PA

FIP, firm intention to proceed

Construct & Commission

CX

FID, final investment decision

Operational

OP

OI, on injection

Post-Closure

PC

Post-Closure monitoring

Post-Transfer

PT

Post-Transfer monitoring

 

Table 2. Additional licensing requirements.UK licensing structure

Additional Requirement

Description of Requirement

Seismic RP

3D Survey reprocessing

Seismic AQ

3D Survey acquisition

Well

Appraisal drilling

Injectivity

Appraisal flow

Wells VSP

Vertical seismic profile

Firm TR

Transport study

Firm TS

Topside installation study

Firm Geomech

Geomechanical study

Firm Cap

Caprock seal study

Firm Seal

Fault seal study

Firm Core

Core analysis study

Licensing in Scotland

Inshore developers in Scotland must first secure the appropriate rights to appraise and develop storage from the Crown Estate Scotland (CES). A CES agreement is required for a site appraisal. A CES lease is required for storage in accordance with the Energy Act 2008. The CES approach to managing storage assets is set out in the CCS Asset Profile (CES, 2022).

Onshore consent is covered by Scots law and is a matter for the local planning authority. Offshore consent for CO2 storage in territorial waters is also covered by Scots law, and requires coordination between the Scottish Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA), the Marine Directorate (MD) and the NSTA. The shared jurisdiction is discussed below.

Scots law

The territorial sea adjacent to Scotland is subject to both UK and Scots law. In terms of international law, the UK as the coastal state, enjoys sovereignty in the territorial sea which includes the seabed and subsurface. How the UK decides to exercise that sovereignty is a matter for the UK and this becomes complex in the context of devolution – Appendix C.

Licensing and regulation

Oil and gas fields under the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland are vested in the Crown. Although Scottish Ministers did receive licensing powers for oil and gas in the post-referendum settlement in the context of the Scotland Act 2016, this was explicitly only in relation to the onshore area, defined as lying within the baselines of the territorial sea – section 47. Licensing in relation to all offshore oil and gas, within the territorial sea and under the continental shelf, is a matter for the NSTA. This would be relevant to the closure of the oil production licence for Lybster in preparation for CO2 storage.

Scottish Ministers are established as the licensing for CO2 storage in the territorial sea by section 18 of the Energy Act 2008. The Storage of Carbon Dioxide Regulations 2010 went on to define a licence as granted by the authority, namely the NSTA – Regulation 1.3. However, the Storage of Carbon Dioxide Regulations 2011, a Scottish Statutory Instrument (SSI), transferred the powers to grant storage licences to Scottish Ministers, along with the associated powers to oversee the development, operation, monitoring, and closure of storage sites in Scottish territorial waters. This greatly simplifies the regulatory framework and requirements for licensing storage in Scottish waters.

Two points are worth noting. Firstly, the SSI precedes the 2012 transposition of the CCS Directive, and withdrawal of the UK from the EU in 2020. Very minor amendments to SSI 2011/24 may be required to reflect this. For example, the reporting authority named in the SSI is the European Commission.

Secondly, while the necessary powers sit with Scottish Ministers to oversee storage licensing, the competent authorities, and associated resources and procedures are not developed. Purchasing the services of the NSTA as regulator is an option that requires exploring. The long experience of the NSTA is an important supporting consideration. One option may be an agreement between an existing Scottish authority such as the Marine Directorate and the NSTA to deal with carbon licensing in territorial waters.

There is a precedent, the Memorandum of Understanding between the HSE and OPRED to form the Offshore Safety Directive Regulator, now OMAR, when that directive required a competent authority to deal with health, safety, and environmental risks under one roof (HSE, 2024). While that involved two regulators at UK level, there ought to be no objection to a similar arrangement between a UK and a Scottish regulator given the commonality of purpose and the desirability of a seamless approach.

Liability and ownership

Hydrocarbons in strata, even if residual and uneconomic, are vested in the Crown unless the Crown specifically transferred ownership, which it would be unlikely to do. Regarding liability for operational oil fields, the principal party is the licensee. In most cases, however, liability is joint and several with co-venturers under a joint operating agreement.

For decommissioning, it is a matter of anyone who holds a section 29 notice under the Petroleum Act 1998. Again, this will usually be co-venturers, but the list is lengthened to minimise the risk to the state if duty holders become insolvent. Things get more complicated in relation to any remaining infrastructure under an agreed derogation. Firstly, there is no specific legislation or regulation on this matter; rather it is dealt with in the context of guidance notes issued from time to time by OPRED. Leaving aside the apparent confusion in the guidance over ownership and section 29 notice holders – see Appendix C7. More fundamentally, there is an argument that the use of a Crown lease in relation to CCS constitutes an exercise of property rights. This raises the possibility that pre-existing infrastructure is a fixture in both jurisdictions. It follows that this belongs to the owner of the land or seabed to which it is attached. This has never been tested but is certainly arguable.

By contrast, this is a much easier proposition to establish within the territorial sea where the Crown Estate has habitually claimed property rights and the courts have readily confirmed them. Whatever is stated in the guidance notes and essentially accepted by duty holders in relation to decommissioning, property law may say something different.

Pore space

For Lybster, whereas the hydrocarbons in the field are vested in the Crown and those rights are exercised by the NSTA, the pore space is the property of the Crown. Property rights would be exercisable by the CES. For the Forth Basin, the pore space would also be owned by the Crown and the property rights would be exercisable by CES. Note that this property law analysis also implies that CO2 injected into depleted reservoirs beneath the territorial sea would be owned by the Crown on the basis of the principle of annexation. This has been more fully explored in the context of enhanced oil recovery (Patterson & Paisley, 2016).

Shared jurisdiction

The exploration and production licensing for Lybster at the time would have been a matter for the Secretary of State. Even now, as the reservoir lies within the territorial sea, the oil licensing would be a matter for NSTA. However, the CO2 storage licensing is a matter for Scottish Ministers. The siting and operation of the drilling rig onshore would then and now be a matter for the local planning authority. Thus, both UK law and Scots law are engaged as appropriate.

The Beatrice field presents a most interesting problem. The residual hydrocarbons in the field remain vested in the Crown. The pore space within 12 nm is owned by the Crown. The ownership of pore space beyond 12 nm is not clear, but from a practical perspective only the Crown has sovereign rights to act. The licensing authority within 12 nm is Scottish Ministers, and, beyond the 12 nm, NSTA. This may be resolved by some form of arrangement modelled on those for hydrocarbon reservoirs that cross boundaries.

Summary

CO2 storage involves multiple activities under different licensing regimes. These need to be explored further by the Scottish Government to fully understand what will be necessary to put in to law for CO2 storage within Scottish waters. New regulations will be required; it may well be, however, that insofar as existing regulations could be relied upon, the process of modifying SSI 2011/24 and drafting consents could be fast. This would really be a question for those with a better insight into the technical detail and political due process.

Inshore storage

Scotland’s territorial waters cover an area of 55,480 km2 with the potential for inshore storage. This includes a great deal of seismic data – Figure 3. While the 2D seismic coverage is extensive, only three areas have 3D seismic: Lybster, Fraserburgh, and the Solway Firth. 3D seismic is the most effective data for accurately characterising subsurface structures (Dee, et al., 2005). In its absence, 2D data may identify structures of interest in cross-section. The Forth Basin area is covered by a 2D survey – Appendix C. The availability of data allows the prospective areas to be ranked by maturity – Table 3. The exploration ranking of Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth is explained in the description of the areas of interest that follows below.

Areas of Interest

Figure 3 presents areas of interest for inshore CO2 storage.

Figure 3. Areas of interest for inshore CO2 storage. Four areas are identified with seismic coverage and exploration well data – see Annex E for an inventory. Lybster has the best data coverage (contingent), followed by Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth (prospective), and the Forth Basin (exploration).

Table 3. Inshore areas of interest ranked by maturity and potential to progress rapidly.

Areas of Interest

Area Name

Seismic & Wells

Maturity

AOI 1

Lybster

RE07 3D seismic + 5 wells + model

Contingent

AOI 2

Fraserburgh

PGS18 3D seismic + 3 wells

Prospective

AOI 3

Solway Firth

ES94 3D seismic + 2 wells

Prospective

AOI 4

Forth Basin

CN87 2D seismic + 1 well

Exploration

Lybster Area

The Lybster oil field is ranked as contingent on the maturity pyramid where the maturity progresses from an exploration resource (large base) to a commercial reserve of sites (small top) via contingent prospects – Figure 3. The area of interest encompasses 306 km2 that include the field and exploration structures, Knockinnon and Braemore.

Two more oil fields, Beatrice and Jacky, are located at the 12 nm limit. Lybster is notable for three reasons: its proximity to the coast; a substantial amount of data and analysis; and an existing production well. These significantly reduce the potential cost and timeline to developing a storage site. The field needs to be screened for capacity and suitability to qualify the field for appraisal licensing. The initial capacity estimate and assessment of suitability are documented in Section 4.2, supported by Appendix D.

Knockinnon and Braemore are relatively immature with respect to storage analysis but noteworthy for potentially providing step-out capacity to Lybster. Beatrice has not been assessed for this report as the field is beyond a presumed technical limit for onshore development via extended reach wells. 12 nautical miles is equivalent to 22 km; the 2022 record for an extended reach well is 15 km. A reasonable economic limit of 10 km has been set for assuming offshore development. Beatrice, the largest field in the area, straddles the 12 nm boundary. Jacky is a small satellite field in territorial waters to the north of Beatrice.

Fraserburgh & Solway Firth

Both areas have 3D seismic survey coverage and exploration wells. The location of the 3 wells and seismic for Fraserburgh, approximately 16-20 km from shore, would require an offshore installation (pipeline, injection well, and monitoring equipment). Any prospects within the area would need to be identified from the existing seismic and well data and screened for suitable reservoir injectivity and caprock seal properties prior to appraisal licensing.

The Solway Firth area has two exploration wells and a 3D seismic survey in the southern half of the 12 nm territorial waters. One of the wells is within the seismic survey area. The location of the seismic and well 13 km from shore would require an offshore installation (pipeline, injection well, and monitoring equipment). As with Fraserburgh, prospects within the area would need to be identified from the existing seismic and well data and screened for suitable reservoir injectivity and caprock seal properties prior to appraisal licensing. As such, both areas are ranked as prospective on the maturity pyramid.

Forth Basin

The Forth Basin is close to a diverse cluster of bio-CO2 sources located in the Central Belt. The Forth was screened for prospective storage sites as part of the CASSEM project (SCCS, 2012). Trap structures were identified but rejected due to a lack of well data and poor control on the 2D seismic interpretation for caprock thickness and reservoir volume (Monaghan et al., 2012). The Forth also contains a large basin, the Leven syncline. The syncline may be suitable for an alternative strategy of CO2-brine surface mixing and injection of the CO2-rich mixture which is denser than the syncline’s porewaters (Eke et al., 2011). This approach to storage is examined in section 2.3. The low TRL of dissolved CO2 injection and need to mature the concept for the Forth Basin rank this area as exploration.

Lybster prospect

Lybster was drilled in 1996 just 3 km off the Caithness coast – Figure 4. Lybster is 3 km from the coast, with a vertical offshore discovery well, 11/24-1 (1996), onshore extended reach appraisal well, 11/24-3 (2008), 3D seismic coverage, and a reservoir model.

Figure 4. The Lybster prospect location, associated reservoir model, seismic section and well data.

The model (Figure 4, bottom right) is constructed from 3D seismic data (Figure 4, bottom left) and well data (Figure 4, top left). The field has two high quality reservoir units, the lower ‘A’ and ‘B’ sands, separated by a baffle, the mid-shale, and capped by the Uppat Shale seal. The field is divided into two halves by a fault that strikes NE-SW. Several small faults occur between the regional Great Glen Fault (GGF) and Helmsdale Fault (HF).

The discovery well for Lybster was plugged and abandoned. The field was then drilled from the shore in 2008 via a 3 km extended reach well; the only offshore UK field to be produced this way. Most North Sea fields are much further offshore. This makes Lybster an accessible and low-cost storage prospect that requires no expensive infrastructure. If suitable, the suspended production well could be repurposed for CO2 injection.

Lybster is a four-way closure, or small 6 km2 dome, that has trapped oil and gas beneath a mudstone caprock for tens of millions of years. This is a good indication of suitability for storing CO2. The structural volume or space available for storage is calculated from known properties of the field such as reservoir area, thickness, porosity, and fluid properties such as CO2 density at reservoir conditions. The expected capacity is 2 Mt, (low-high range: 0.3-9 Mt).

An appraisal licence requires an early risk assessment (ERA) to formally establish the expected capacity and technical suitability of a suite of attributes ranging from seal and reservoir quality to fault geomechanics, lateral migration risk, legacy wells, and more. The ERA is a gap analysis that identifies further data requirements and potential issues to address in the ‘Assess and Define’ phases of an appraisal term for a storage licence. A first-look analysis follows below.

Storage analysis

At least two attributes of the Lybster field require further analysis as part of an early risk assessment. Firstly, the production history deviated from expectations – Figure 5. Increasing gas and water cuts within a matter of months and declining oil production resulted in a well workover and then suspension. A dynamic reservoir model is needed to explain these outcomes and fully understand the flow and containment of fluids within the structure.

Figure 5. Production history in barrels of oil, water, equivalent gas, and produced reservoir volume.

Secondly, the field is located between two large faults, the Helmsdale Fault and Great Glen Fault, and has several smaller faults within the field boundary that segment the reservoir. These require a detailed geomechanical study to de-risk the prospect – Appendix F.

Capacity: The expected capacity of Lybster, based on the structural volume, is 2.1 Mt of CO2. – Table 4. This reasonable mid-range value assumes just half the field area, 3 km2, and an average reservoir thickness of 15 meters. A storage area of 3 km2 assumes the main fault for the field is sealing and CO2 storage is restricted to half the mapped field area. The full field area, 6.11 km2 (NSTA estimate), effectively doubles the capacity for mid-range values.

Combining the full-field area with high-range values for the other five variables quadruples the capacity. The full field area and high-range values for all variables furnishes an optimistic maximum capacity of 9.4 Mt. The low estimate, a pessimistic 0.35 Mt, uses low range values and halves the expected area again. The highly conservative minimum estimate of 100 kt is based on the produced volumes of oil, gas, and water.

Qualifying adjectives for capacity are as follows: ‘minimum’ is the lowest value calculated, a highly conservative production volume estimate. The structural volume estimates are defined as ‘low, ‘mid’, and ‘high’, based on reasonable range estimates for six variables; the dominant variable is the storage area. Note that while the outcomes resemble the common P90-P50-P10 approach, the data is too sparse to support a statistical analysis. This simply reflects the field’s short production history. The two methods are summarised in Appendix H.

Table 4. Structural volume variable range and applied values for capacity estimates

Variable

Range

Low, 0.35 Mt

Mid, 2.1 Mt

High, 9.4 Mt

Storage area

1.5 – 6 km2

1.5

3

6

Net thickness

5 – 25 m

9

15

21

Porosity

8 – 22%

0.11

0.15

0.19

Net to Gross

56-80%

0.6

0.68

0.76

CO2 Density

700-750 kg/m3

710

725

740

Saturation

50 – 75%

0.55

0.625

0.70

Discussion

The Lybster field area has been intensively studied – Appendix H. While this report relies on Keenan’s detailed analysis of reservoir attributes such as porosity (Keenan, 2023), it corrects for the field area which was underestimated by an order of magnitude. The 2 Mt outcome is reasonable when compared to traps with a similar area such as Sleipner, Norway.

The alternative analysis, presented by Watt (Watt et al., in preparation), assumes a replacement volume for produced fluids. While this is a common approach to the capacity assessment of mature depleted fields such as Viking and Hamilton (Track-1 and Track-2 storage sites), the outcome is highly conservative for Lybster, a field with an unusually short production history. We favour the structural volume as a more reasonable indication.

The suite of suitability attributes also supports Lybster as a strong candidate for a licenced storage appraisal – Figure 6. This will apply the rigour necessary to mature the attribute scores from speculative to verified or identify gaps for further analysis. Our recommendation is that an appraisal licence include studies on fault integrity, geomechanics, and reservoir simulation.

Figure 6. Boston Square analysis of attribute suitability for Lybster. A Boston Square is a simple scheme for scoring expert judgement from 1 to 3 devised by the Boston Consulting Group.

Forth Basin

The Forth Basin contains the Leven syncline, a geological structure in the Forth Estuary mapped on 2D seismic – Figures 7 and 8. Most proposals for CO2 storage assume injection of liquid CO2. This requires a geological seal above the reservoir to trap its buoyant rise. However, it is also possible to inject dissolved CO2 with large volumes of water, where the CO2-saturated water is denser than the porewater and sinks rather than rises. Research at the BGS and the University of Edinburgh shows that suitable geology to retain sinking dense CO2 may exist beneath the inshore waters of the Forth Estuary (Smith et al, 2011).

CO2-brine surface mixing

The CO2-brine dissolution approach was extensively modelled by Eke et al. (2011) and became a commercial reality in 2014 with the industrial-scale injection of 7 ktpa of CO2 from the Hellisheiði power plant, Iceland. While the physical limit for CO2 dissolution is 50 kg/m3, optimal chemical and physical parameters are controlled in the surface process facility. For Iceland, the outcome is 20 kg of dissolved CO2 per cubic meter of injected brine. This increases the volume of injected fluid by about 35x compared to a pure CO2 injection project like Sleipner. Reservoir pressure increases are minimised by extracting brine from the reservoir for mixing and return. This has worked for Iceland, with injection recently increasing from 7 ktpa to 12 ktpa. Future plans will scale to 40 ktpa before 2030. However, the geological setting, densely fractured young volcanic rocks, is quite different from the Leven Syncline.

Figure 7. Forth Basin, location of 2D seismic data grid, interpreted line and exploration well 25/26-1.

Figure 8. 2D seismic line CAS87-116, revealing the stratigraphy and structure of the Leven Syncline.

Suitability

The high volumes of brine injection associated with dissolved CO2 storage require a simple combination of a large regional aquifer with good reservoir quality and low structural complexity. The aquifer needs to provide a sufficient volume to help minimise pressure increases. Reservoir quality also minimises pressure increases. This implies above average porosity and permeability and thick continuous beds of high net-to-gross sandstones. Low structural complexity implies a simple geometry with a small number of faults that are transmissive, i.e. open to the lateral flow of brine, allowing the dissipation of injected fluids. These attributes are not clearly established for the Leven syncline – Figure 9.

A detailed analysis of the area (Monaghan et al. 2012) noted the poor data quality, lack of reservoir data, and structural complexity. These attributes are reflected in the low TRL status of the Forth Basin prospect.

Figure 9. Forth Basin area regional geology, indicating the stratigraphic and structural complexity.

Sources of bio-CO2

Our analysis of over a hundred sources of bio-CO2 in Scotland produced a database of 98 sites with emissions that range from 3 to 360 ktpa – Figure 10. Four small distilleries, 1.6-2.8 ktpa, are included as these have already been selected for bio-CO2 capture. The total resource is 3.7 Mtpa. Almost all the sources, 91 sites, are grouped into five regional clusters – Figure 11.

Categories and Sectors

We have categorised the sources based on capture method: combustion, 89%, and separation, 11%. Separation at distilleries and anaerobic digesters is low-cost and high purity relative to post-combustion flue gas capture. The two categories are then split by process into nine sectors.

Biomass

Biomass, the largest sector at 46%, produces CO2 from the combustion of plant and animal waste. Biomass is often configured as combined heat and power (CHP). The 18 facilities in the database produce an average of 95 ktpa and total 1.7 Mtpa. The six largest sites, 150-360 ktpa, include Markinch, Steven’s Croft, and Morayhill. This accounts for 900 ktpa of bio-CO2 emissions. The smallest site, Gleneagles, emits 7 ktpa. Locations tend to be semi-rural.

Energy from Waste

Energy from Waste (EfW), the second largest sector, 29%, produces electricity and heat from the incineration of municipal waste, often in a CHP configuration. Roughly half of the emissions are bio-CO2 (Tolvik, 2024). The 13 sites emit a total of 1.1 Mtpa, average 84 ktpa. The five largest are amongst the top ten sources, total 0.6 Mtpa, average 126 ktpa. The largest, South Clyde Energy Centre, 158 ktpa, is planned for 2025. The smallest site, Binn, 38 ktpa, opens in 2026.

Anaerobic Digestion

Anaerobic digestion (AD) covers a range of dry and wet waste applications that produce raw biogas. AD tends to be small, with 39 sites in the database accounting for 0.5 Mtpa of bio-CO2, average 13 ktpa. The largest site, 44 ktpa, is the Girvan distillery. The smallest site, Crofthead farm, 3 ktpa. We identify five sectors where biogas is combusted on site:

  • AD Landfill is the fourth largest sector overall after biomass, EfW, and distillery fermentation, with 18 facilities producing a total of 0.18 Mtpa, average 10 ktpa.
  • AD Industrial is the second largest AD sector with 7 facilities producing 0.17 Mtpa, average 25 ktpa. Sites include distilleries, breweries, and pharma manufacturing.
  • AD City Waste is the third largest AD sector with 6 facilities producing 0.08 Mtpa in total, average 14 ktpa. Sites process municipal wet streams such as food waste.
  • AD Farming is the fifth largest AD sector with 6 facilities producing 0.04 Mtpa in total, average 7 ktpa. Sites process wet streams such as crop waste and silage.
  • AD Sewage is the smallest bio-CO2 sector, with just 2 facilities in the database producing 0.02 Mtpa in total: Seafield, 16 ktpa, and Nigg, 8 ktpa.

Distillery Fermentation

Whisky distilleries produce CO2 during the mash fermentation stage. The CO2 can be easily separated using a simple wash process where pressurised water acts as a solvent. This generates a pure CO2 stream. Distillery fermentation (DF), 10%, is the third largest sector after biomass and EfW, with 20 sites producing 0.35 Mtpa in total, average 18 ktpa.

The three largest distilleries account for 0.2 Mtpa, average 66 ktpa; the remaining 17 sites account for 0.16 Mtpa, average 9 ktpa. The database includes four small distilleries: Tomatin, Speyburn, Tullibardine, and Balmenach, 1.6-2.8 ktpa. These are shortlisted along with Invergordon and North British for commercial bio-CO2 capture and storage (CCSL, 2024). Many of the 20 sites are located around Speyside as part of the Inverness cluster.

AD upgrading

AD biogas can be upgraded to biomethane by separating out the CO2 using a membrane filter. The biomethane is frequently sold directly into the natural gas grid. As with distilleries, this also generates a low-cost and high-purity stream of bio-CO2. AD upgrading is the seventh largest sector overall, 2%, with eight sites producing 0.07 Mtpa in total, average 8 ktpa. Sites include farms and industrial facilities located in semi-rural areas across the country.

Table 5. Bio-CO2 sources by sector. Note: the lowest cost sectors are highlighted in grey.

Sector, Bio-CO2

Category

Sites

Average

Range, ktpa

Total

3.7 Mtpa

Biomass

Combustion

18

95 ktpa

7-360

1.70 Mtpa

45.8%

Energy from Waste

Combustion

13

84 ktpa

38-158

1.10 Mtpa

29.4%

Distillery Wash

Separation

20

18 ktpa

2-75

0.35 Mtpa

9.52%

AD Landfill

Combustion

18

10 ktpa

4-32

0.18 Mtpa

4.93%

AD Industrial

Combustion

7

25 ktpa

6-44

0.17 Mtpa

4.67%

AD City Waste

Combustion

6

14 ktpa

6-24

0.08 Mtpa

2.20%

AD Upgrading

Separation

8

8 ktpa

4-17

0.07 Mtpa

1.76%

AD Farming

Combustion

6

7 ktpa

3-12

0.04 Mtpa

1.08%

AD Sewage

Combustion

2

12 ktpa

8-16

0.02 Mtpa

0.65%

Figure 10. Bio-CO2 sectors. Distillery (orange) and AD Upgrading (green) are categorised as separation, yielding a low-cost CO2 source relative to post-combustion capture. Values in square brackets [18] represent the number of sources; area of circles represent the size of the source (ktpa).

Figure 11. Onshore sources of bio-CO2 across Scotland. 91 of the 98 sites are located in five clusters.

Many low-cost distillery sources are located in the Inverness cluster, relatively close to the Lybster site. The five clusters are analysed by road distance from the nearest storage prospect in section 3.2. Also, note the overlap of the Forth and Clyde clusters at the terminus of the Feeder 10 pipeline. This highlights an interesting possible alternative to inshore storage, i.e. access to the Acorn offshore storage hub. This is discussed further in the summary.

Regional Clusters

We have grouped the sources into five clusters. The boundaries are marked by either a 100 km or 50 km diameter circle. Note, the sources east of Elgin are closer to Fraserburgh but included as part of the Inverness cluster given the primacy of Lybster as a storage candidate.

Inverness

The Inverness cluster, the third largest overall, falls within the Lybster catchment area. The cluster has 21 sites, producing 0.55 Mt of bio-CO2, and boasts a concentration of low-cost separation sources: 12 distilleries, 92 ktpa, and two AD upgraders, 18 ktpa. The average road distance to storage is high at 186 km. However, just over half of the cluster, 0.31 Mtpa, is within 150 km of Lybster: 5 distilleries, 43 ktpa, including the region’s largest distillery, Invergordon, 24 ktpa, which has been shortlisted for commercial CO2 capture; and 2 biomass plants: Morayhill, 323 ktpa, and Balcas, 28 ktpa, which is close to the Invergordon distillery. The remaining low-cost sources, 67 ktpa, are 200 to 240 km from Lybster by road.

Aberdeen

The Aberdeen cluster sits within the Fraserburgh catchment area, with six facilities producing 116 ktpa. The majority comes from five combustion facilities; the remainder from a small AD upgrading facility: Savock Farm, 4 ktpa. The largest source is the NESS EfW plant at 67 ktpa. The cluster has the third shortest average road distance to storage at 56 km.

Dumfries

The Dumfries cluster has five facilities producing 300 ktpa, mostly from the Steven’s Croft biomass plant, 0.28 Mtpa. The area includes two low-cost AD upgrading facilities producing a combined 18 ktpa. One of these, Crofthead, is already commercially capturing 13 ktpa, and has a separate CHP source, 3 ktpa, currently not captured. All the sites are within 70 km by road of the Solway Firth storage prospect. The cluster average at 48 km is the shortest overall.

Forth & Clyde

The Forth and Clyde clusters are closest to the Forth Basin storage prospect. These are the two largest clusters in our database, with a combined 59 sites producing 2.5 Mtpa. The area accounts for 69% of all combustion and 45% of all separation sources in the database; and includes some of the largest facilities including the Markinch and Caledonian biomass plants, 360 and 144 ktpa, and Cameronbridge distillery, 75 ktpa. Just over 0.84 Mtpa is within 50 km of the Forth Basin storage location, including Cameronbridge, 9 km, and Markinch, 10 km.

The North British distillery, 49 ktpa and 49 km by road from the storage location, is already commercially capturing CO2 for export to storage in Denmark. Low-cost separation sources account for 190 ktpa of bio-CO2 at an average road distance of 80 km from the storage location. It is worth noting the Feeder 10 terminus is located in the overlap of the two cluster boundary circles. Also of interest, are the significant local combustion clusters at Irvine, 290 ktpa, and Dunbar, 208 ktpa, which are 107 km and 109 km by road from the storage location.

Outliers

Seven outliers account for just 3% of all combustion, and 24% of all separation sources. The latter value reflects a concentration of low-costs sources in Ayrshire. This includes two facilities at the Girvan distillery: fermentation, 75 ktpa, and AD upgrading, 17 ktpa; and the neighbouring Ailsa Bay distillery, 7 ktpa. Combustion sources include Charlesfield AD, Borders, 18 ktpa, the Acharn biomass plant, Perthshire, 31 ktpa, and the Pulteney distillery, Wick, a small biomass plant, 19 ktpa. The latter is the closest source to Lybster.

Table 6. Bio-CO2 sources by cluster. Note: the sources outside clusters are highlighted in grey

Combustion

Bio-CO2

Storage

N

Average

Road

Range, ktpa

3.3 Mtpa

Inverness

441 ktpa

Lybster

7

63 ktpa

197 km

5-242

13%

Aberdeen

112 ktpa

Fraserburgh

5

22 ktpa

57 km

4-67

3%

Forth

1,362 ktpa

Forth Basin

25

51 ktpa

46 km

4-360

41%

Clyde

987 ktpa

Forth Basin

26

41 ktpa

99 km

5-158

32%

Dumfries

288 ktpa

Solway Firth

3

96 ktpa

50 km

3-279

9%

Outliers

112 ktpa

Various

4

28 ktpa

86 km

18-44

3%

Separation

Bio-CO2

Storage

N

Average

Road

Range, ktpa

0.4 Mtpa

Inverness

109 ktpa

Lybster

14

8 ktpa

181 km

2-24

26 %

Aberdeen

4 ktpa

Fraserburgh

1

4 ktpa

49 km

4

1%

Forth

151 ktpa

Forth Basin

6

25 ktpa

68 km

2-75

36%

Clyde

39 ktpa

Forth Basin

2

19 ktpa

114 km

12-27

9%

Dumfries

18 ktpa

Solway Firth

2

9 ktpa

46 km

5-13

4%

Outliers

99 ktpa

Various

3

33 ktpa

84 km

7-75

24%

Development timeframes

CCS is being rapidly deployed to meet demanding net zero targets. By our analysis, there are 32 projects across Europe with realistic timelines to storage by 2030 – Figure 12. Development timeframes have become crucial to delivering these targets, as policy makers seek to balance haste with due diligence. The exponential growth in demand for CDR credits is also exacerbating a supply imbalance for CO2 storage that early movers, notably Denmark (Stenlille), Iceland (Coda), and Norway (Northern Lights) are seeking to capitalise on. We observe that timeframes in these countries are the fastest in Europe at around five years.

Figure 12. The outlook for European Storage, 2030. Seven countries have megatonne projects planned, with 64% of capacity in the North Sea. Countries in grey have no storage planned for 2030.

UK timelines

The NSTA, as the UK’s competent authority and carbon storage regulator, is instrumental in setting UK licensing timelines. The first UK carbon storage licensing round was held in 2022. The NSTA announced 21 accepted appraisal licences in September 2023, building on the experience of the previous seven licences. Each licence is tailored to the prospective storage site with a deadline for a storage permit application and specific requirements relating to the necessary maturation of the project for a permit application – Appendix D.

The first storage permits are expected no later than Q4 2024 for Endurance CS001 (East Coast Cluster) and Hamilton CS004 (HyNet North West). Assuming a two-year construction and commissioning period, first injection is expected no later than 2028 with minor delays possibly increasing that to 2030. It is worth noting that 21 of the appraisals are required to submit storage permit applications between 2026 and 2028, which may cause a significant bottleneck similar to Class VI well permitting delays at the Federal level in the USA – Appendix I.

Analysis of the 27 active licences indicates that the average appraisal time from early risk assessment to storage permit application is five years and three months. Examples of exceptionally short and long appraisals are the Scottish Cluster’s Acorn East licence (Storegga, two years) and the East Coast Cluster’s Bunter 42 expansion (BP, eight years). The former is supported by a decade of prior site characterisation. The latter is an exploration target that requires 3D seismic acquisition and an appraisal well. Allowing for construction and commissioning, storage projects expect to be operational, i.e. ‘on injection’, within eight years on average of an appraisal licence application.

EEA timeframes

Analysis for EEA projects is largely dependent on public statements of ambition. The outcomes are faster than the UK. The nine Norwegian projects average six years from initial application to expected operation. Denmark is relatively fast by comparison, averaging four years for its six projects. The two large Dutch projects, Porthos (2019) and Aramis (2021), expect to be operational within seven years. Pycasso, the French project launched in 2021, has the longest development period at ten years. The remaining projects for Bulgaria, Greece, Iceland, and Italy expect to be operational within five years of their start dates which range from 2021 to 2023. If the UK timings are indicative, ambitious EEA deadlines of less than six years for a third of the projects are likely optimistic and at risk of delays of one to five years. This may result a storage capacity substantially less than the EU target of 50 Mtpa.

Implications for inshore storage

Many storage projects are on timelines of around a decade characterised by three phases: a pre-licensing identification and application phase of approximately three years; an appraisal licensing phase that averages five years; a storage permit construction and commissioning phase of around two years. This is likely to hold true for Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth, the two less mature areas of interest identified in Chapter 2. Lybster is an exception, with several factors indicating a fast-track approach that could support a storage permit application within three years. This option is examined in the final chapter of this report.

Cost-revenue analysis

The following cost-revenue analysis for the capture, transport, and storage of bio-CO2 establishes to a good first approximation the potential value of developing onshore and inshore CCS in Scotland. The full chain cost is compared to available revenue from the recent emergence of a high-demand and low-supply voluntary CDR market.

Note that indicative costs for capture, transport, and storage are based on publicly available sources where possible. In the absence of published data, companies operating in Scotland, the UK, and Europe have been approached to provide a commercial estimate.

Capture

Capture is divided into two categories: combustion and separation. Combustion accounts for seven of the studied nine sectors and 89% of the bio-CO2, 3.3 Mtpa. This category costs more than separation as the capture is a post-combustion process on a low-purity and dilute flue gas stream, whereas separation from distilleries and biomethane upgraders is on a high-purity and concentrated CO2 stream that simply requires dehydration and compression.

The combustion sources in this study range from eight large biomass and EfW facilities, 130-360 ktpa, to twenty-five small AD sites, 3-12 ktpa. Post-combustion capture is sensitive to economies of scale, with many studies noting a wide range of capture costs that reflect the stream purity and size of the facility. For example, there is an average 43% increase in cost for an order of magnitude decrease in capture rate from megatonne to sub-megatonne projects (GCCSI, 2021).

The available literature focuses on large CCS applications, broadly defined as facilities emitting at least 100 ktpa (IEAGHG, 2024). A degree of generalisation is therefore necessary given that 89 of the 98 sources in this study emit less than 100 ktpa, with half the sources emitting less than 15 ktpa.

Where possible, we estimate a range for costs and assume the high cost given the predominance of small sources in our data.

Biomass is the largest sector in this study with sources averaging 95 ktpa. We estimate a low cost of £87 per tonne based on the levelised cost analysis of Lehtveer & Emanuelsson (2021) – Appendix J. We estimate a high cost of £128 per tonne based on analysis of emitters smaller than 100 ktpa by Beiron et al. (2022). We favour the high cost as representative – Table 5.

Energy from Waste is the second largest sector with average emissions of 84 ktpa. Two estimates were found with broadly similar costs: £81 and £109 per tonne (MVV, 2024; IEAGHG, 2024). We favour a high cost as the average plant capacity is small at under 200 ktpa of waste.

Anaerobic Digestion covers five sectors in the combustion category with low average emissions of 13 ktpa. We found no data on capture costs for AD combustion. We assume a low-cost of £128 per tonne from the biomass analysis, given the much smaller size of AD sources. In the absence of data, we conservatively assume a high cost of £136 per tonne based on a mean EfW cost, £95, multiplied by the order-of-magnitude scalar for combustion, 143%.

Separation produces highly concentrated streams of pure bio-CO2 (EBA, 2022). Distillery fermentation, average 18 ktpa, and AD upgrading, 8 ktpa, are the two sectors that use cryogenic distillation and membrane separation to capture the CO2. Global analyses provide a low-cost estimate of £30 (IEA 2021; NETL, 2023). In our opinion this reflects economies of scale for large bioethanol plants in the USA. A high-cost price of £60 per tonne is based on a commercial sales estimate for small emitters (E Nimmons, pers. comm., May 2024)[1].

Table 7. Estimated capture costs by sector, including % concentration of CO2 in emissions stream.

Sector, Bio-CO2

Category

N

Average

Cost Range

High Cost

Stream

Biomass Plant

Combustion

18

95 ktpa

£87 – £128

£128

8-20%

Energy from Waste

Combustion

13

84 ktpa

£81 – £109

£109

6-12%

AD Combustion

Combustion

39

13 ktpa

£128 – £136

£136

10-20%

Distillery

Separation

20

18 ktpa

£30 – £60

£60

98%

AD Upgrading

Separation

8

8 ktpa

£30 – £60

£60

98%

Transport

Truck transport is the simplest option, as rail transport of geographically dispersed sources would require onloading and offloading at rail heads with truck transport at both ends. A rail route north from Inverness, and clusters further south and east, terminates at Wick. No cost analysis of rail has been undertaken for this study.

Truck transport of CO2 is by a cryogenic T75 ISO tank as a liquid at -35°C and 22 bar. Each truck carries 20 tonnes. Assuming an injection rate of 100 ktpa and batch delivery over 6 days a week throughout the year, 16 truck loads per day are required. There is scarce literature on truck costs for Europe. However, a commercial estimate of £20 per tonne for a 100-mile round trip seems reasonable (E. Nimmons, pers. comm. May 2024) and is applied here – Appendix J. This is equivalent to £0.124 per tonne per km, which is similar to a recent cost estimate of £0.126 by Ricardo (2023) and $0.111 for the USA (Stolaroff et al., 2021). We presume that the slightly lower dollar estimate reflects lower fuel costs in America.

The average road distance to Lybster for the Inverness cluster is 191 km, with 87 ktpa available within 150 km. This includes 40 ktpa of low-cost CO2 from four distilleries; the remaining 47 ktpa are from two biomass sources, Balcas and Pulteney. The Inverness cluster has enough low-cost CO2 to supply 109 ktpa at an average road distance of 188 km, equivalent to £24/tonne.

With the exception of Savock Farm at Ellon, 4 ktpa and 300 km, the remaining low-cost sources are more than 360 km away. It follows that road transport costs for 100 ktpa over 10 years are £20-50 million with an opportunity to source all of the bio-CO2 from the Inverness cluster and low-cost sources at £24 million. It is worth mentioning that a hydrogen fleet would reduce life cycle emissions and road wear, being lighter than an electric vehicle equivalent (Low, 2024).

Storage

Three storage cost scenarios are considered. The most detailed is Lybster, outlined below. The second scenario is a first approximation for Fraserburgh and the Solway Firth. This is similar to Lybster but less mature and more challenging with respect to appraisal wells, seismic data, and location. The third scenario is a consideration of potential costs for the Forth Basin proposal, the least mature of the storage options.

Lybster

The cost analysis for Lybster assumes 100 ktpa of CO2 over a decade which would account for half of the expected capacity estimate of 2 million tonnes – section 2.2.1. This would potentially mature the understanding of the site towards a further decade of injection.

Buffer: The site will require tanks for the temporary storage of CO2 prior to injection. We assume four tanks with sufficient capacity for an injection rate of 100 ktpa, equivalent to an injection rate of 12 tonnes/hr. This allows for 10 days of well maintenance per year. While the production and injection of CO2 is continuous, transport occurs in discrete runs and is a batch process. Redundant capacity is required on-site to provide operational flexibility. Assuming 16 trucks a day and 125% capacity based on LNG shipping experience, 4 x 100 m3 onsite tanks would buffer flow to the wellhead. For comparison, the twelve Northern Lights tanks at Øygarden are 6 times the size to accommodate one shipload, 7,500 m3. The capital investment for the Lybster storage tanks and site works is assumed to be around £1 million.

Compression: The site will require a compressor to take the liquid CO2 to the required pipeline pressure of 150 bar for the well system and injection at reservoir conditions. We estimate this to require 120 kWh per tonne after Psarras et al. (2020) at an operational cost of £30 per tonne with no capital investment, assuming rental of the equipment from a service company. The operational cost over 10 years at 100 ktpa is estimated at £30 million.

Injection: The site also requires an injection well. The discovery well, 11/24-1, is unsuitable. The well is designated AB3 (NSTA, 2023), i.e. permanently abandoned and seabed cleared, with no infrastructure in place. Additionally, three cement barriers isolate the well. The re-purposing of 11/24-1 would be technically challenging and very expensive.

The production well, 11/24-3y, is currently suspended with the onshore surface infrastructure in place. The current drilling pad can be re-used and the well re-purposed. 11/24-3y is an extended reach well that has been designed to encounter a 173 m succession of the target reservoir sandstones compared to the 25 m of the vertical exploration well, 11/24-1. This favours good injectivity. It is estimated that the conversion cost of an onshore well to CO2 injection is approximately £1-2 million (IEAGHG, 2022). This is an order of magnitude cheaper than an offshore injection well at £10-15 million based on NSTA estimates of recent North Sea drilling costs at £5-10 thousand per meter (NSTA, 2023). We conservatively assume a combined conversion and maintenance cost for the well of £3 million.

Appraisal: The storage site requires an expert reinterpretation of the existing 3D seismic cube, including depth conversion and static model construction (three months) and dynamic simulation of the reservoir (nine months). This would match the known fluid production history and forward model the reservoir response to CO2 injection and storage (9 months). We estimate the cost of this appraisal study to be about £0.5 million. A related geomechanical study of similar duration and rigour is also estimated to cost £0.5 million. The budget for a two-year appraisal that includes both the modelling and geomechanical studies, a well repurposing study, and standard elements of the NSTA appraise-assess-define framework for appraisal licensing is estimated to cost approximately £3 million.

The cost estimates sum to a sub-total is £37 million. Assuming operational costs for the site of £250,000 per annum, the capital investment and operational costs sum to £40 million. Not addressed here are monitoring and verification, as these are highly dependent on the technologies chosen. The design of the monitoring programme is an important element of the appraisal licence. However, if we conservatively assume a monitoring cost of £20 million over the lifetime of storage and add £10 million for conformance and decommissioning, this indicates a storage cost of £70/tonne based on 100 ktpa over 10 years.

Fraserburgh and Solway Firth

These two prospective sites require an offshore installation and operation. Assuming suitable targets are discovered at 1,000-2,000 m depth, the well drilling cost would be £10-15 million. A compressor would need to be either located offshore on a small operational platform, or at the landfall end of a 16 km pipeline. While there is scant literature on short pipeline costs, we conservatively assume a cost of £50 per tonne based on the analysis of Johnsson et al. (2017). The 10 year 100 ktpa cost is £50 million. The cost of an offshore operational platform is tentatively estimated at £10 million. Note that no cost estimate was found for this element.

Appraisal costs reflect the need to reinterpret the existing seismic over the area at £2 million, plus the possibility of needing 100 km2 of new 3D seismic for exploration and appraisal at £5 million. Further appraisal requirements will likely increase the appraisal budget to at least £10 million. From the Lybster cost breakdown, we can add on the cost of temporary storage, £1 million, compression, £30 million, maintenance for the well, £3 million, and monitoring of the site, £20 million. It follows that the total cost for Fraserburgh and Solway Firth would be, to a very rough approximation, around £140/tonne, i.e. double the estimate for Lybster.

Forth Basin

No cost analysis is undertaken for the Forth Basin, as our recommendation is for this prospect to proceed as an experimental pilot study with a nominal injection rate of 10 ktpa. The site would require an injection well with the wellhead located onshore to reduce costs. However, the research budget would need to cover the cost of the well, and handling of the onshore dissolution of CO2 into brine extracted from the well. Any research proposal is likely to be costed at more than £10 million for the well alone. The brine extraction, mixing facility, and re-injection are likely to more than double the well cost. However, no data was found on the latter elements. As such, an accurate costing is beyond the scope of this study.

CDR market

The European Union and UK have yet to regulate a CO2 removal requirement. However, the voluntary market for carbon dioxide removal (CDR) is rapidly emerging, with rumours of Microsoft, Shopify, and Stripe buying credits valued at USD1,000 per tonne from Iceland’s Carbfix and Climeworks projects in 2021. Climeworks is offering public CDR subscriptions at USD1,500 per tonne (WP, 2024). These are based on direct air capture (DAC) and CO2 mineralisation in the young and reactive basalts of Hellisheiði, 20 km to the east of Reykjavik.

A different price signal for permanent storage has recently emerged in Europe. In 2023, the European Commission approved the Danish NECCS fund (DKK 2.6 billion, €350 million) for the permanent geological storage of CO2 from direct air capture and biogenic sources; the projects must be operational by 2026. In April 2024, Denmark awarded NECCS funding to three bio-CO2 companies to remove 1.1 Mt of CO2 between 2026 and 2032 – Table 8[2].

Table 8. Awarded NECCS funding for CDR and CCS in Denmark, April 2024.

Company, Country

NECCS

Storage

Contract

DKK / tonne

GBP/tonne

BioCirc biogas, DK

2026-2032

Stenlille

130.7 ktpa

968.5

£110

Bioman biogas, DK

2026-2032

Stenlille

25 ktpa

1,117.5

£127

Carbon Capture Scotland, UK

2026-2032

Stenlille

4.65 ktpa

2,600

£297

These credits have been negotiated on the voluntary carbon market, and tentatively establish a low CDR value of £110. Ørsted, the Danish power company, are also contracted by Microsoft to capture 3.67 Mt of bio-CO2 over 10 years which will be exported to Northern Lights for a combined transport and storage cost of around €100 per tonne. The Ørsted credit value is unknown. However, given the much higher value of credits for geological storage in Iceland, we favour the high value of £297 as indicative of European CDR pricing in the near future.

Value proposition

Applying the high-cost prices for capture, transport, and storage, and assuming storage at Lybster, we can estimate a full chain cost. Low-cost bio-CO2 is sourced from the Inverness cluster. A combined capture and storage rate of 100 ktpa is assumed for a period of 10 years.

£60 per tonne for bio-CO2 from separation sources, primarily distilleries

£24 per tonne for transport for an average road distance of 188 km

£70 per tonne for storage from buffering tanks to decommissioning

  • Full chain CCS cost estimate: £154 per tonne
  • Voluntary market CDR credit revenue: £297 per tonne
  • Net return on investment over 10 years: £143 million

Conclusions

The following section poses six questions that draw out the major themes and outcomes of our research. The answers are intended to highlight actionable policy directions that may support the rapid development of domestic CCS on small but lucrative bio-CO2 sources.

Can Scotland develop inshore bio-CO2 storage by 2030?

The short answer is yes. The key metrics are 3.7 Mtpa of available bio-CO2, including 109 ktpa of the lowest cost sources, mainly distilleries, within 188 km of the inshore Lybster prospect. This is a good source-sink match for a site that has an expected 2.1 Mt capacity. First injection by 2030 will require a rapid formal appraisal and regulated consents to permit storage.

The remaining prospects identified in this study are much less mature and characterised by locations that require a substantial investment to appraise. A realistic timeline for these prospects is 2035-2040 with no clear indication at this stage that the prospects are suitable.

How can this be funded?

There are several ways to fund the appraisal of Lybster, which we estimate will cost about £3 million and take three years. Commercial interest may be sufficient to raise capital. This may be through a capture company that is seeking storage, or as a joint venture between the capture company, whisky distilleries and their parent companies. A successful appraisal will lead to construction and commissioning, including site works such as tank installation and well engineering, which we estimate to cost £3-5 million. An approximate budget of £10 million is needed.

We note the strong narrative structure of decarbonising international brands within a cultural tradition. This may attract global corporations who wish to associate themselves with carbon dioxide removals that have a story to tell. As a strategic project for Scotland, the appraisal costs may be partly underwritten by government funding.

On commissioning, verified carbon storage certificates can be issued on the voluntary market at an estimated price of £300 per tonne. On injection, assuming a sustained injection rate of 100 ktpa and a 20% mark-down of storage to removal, the site would generate an annual revenue of £24 million. No subsidy would be needed once storage has commenced. This would contribute to both Scotland’s economic growth and a just transition to net zero.

How quickly can this be done?

The fastest appraisal-to-permit timelines in Europe are about three years. These fast-track appraisals rely on an aggressive pursuit of a commercial opportunity and a background of available data and mature understanding of the technical risk. Lybster has both the interest and the technical maturity. The missing piece is the necessary legislation to support a legal consent for the appraisal license and storage permit if successful. The legal advice is that the necessary consents may only require a transfer of existing UK regulations to Scottish law.

How much bio-CO2 capture is available?

In total, we have identified 3.7 Mtpa of available bio-CO2. This is far in excess of the initial requirement for inshore storage, which we estimate at 0.1 Mtpa. The 3.6 Mt surplus and its geographic concentration in the central belt suggests that offtake to Acorn via the Feeder 10 pipeline ought to be considered as a parallel strategy to inshore storage, noting that this could be a considerable time in the future – Figures 13 and 14.

Combustion source capture is relatively high cost at around £120 per tonne. Separation is much more valuable at £60 per tonne. Distilleries and AD upgraders are common at the low end of the range, making up nearly half of the smallest 27 sites that average 5 ktpa, and one-third of 22 sites that average 10 ktpa. Significantly, there are 14 separation sources near Inverness that may support 21 modular capture units assuming 3-5 ktpa per unit, i.e. sufficient to batch load 16 trucks at 20 tonnes per day for a 100 ktpa supply to Lybster.

Figure 13. Central Belt sources: 2.3 Mt of combustion bio-CO2 is available, of which 0.3 Mt is from 28 small AD sites; another 190 ktpa of separation bio-CO2 from 6 distilleries and 2 AD biogas upgraders.

How much storage capacity is available?

Based on current data, our analysis found that only the Lybster prospect has potential commercially viable storage capacity – expected to be 2.1 Mt. This would be sufficient for 20 years of storage at an injection rate of 100 ktpa. This is not significant in terms of overall storage capacity in the North Sea or in terms of Scotland’s overall statutory climate targets but would provide an opportunity to showcase Scotland as a global frontrunner for CCUS technologies.

2.1 Mt of storage would generate £500 million in CDR revenue at 100 ktpa – an injection rate that is much lower than the technical limit for CO2 storage, which is generally thought to be around 700 ktpa. The low estimate is 0.35 Mt, which would result in only three to four years storage and a revenue of £72 million. The high estimate of 9.4 Mt would be more than sufficient to provide storage out to 2090 at a revenue in excess of £1.5 billion.

What policy actions need to be taken?

The legal opinion is that minor amendments to existing regulations are required to license storage appraisals and storage permits in the territorial waters of Scotland. To repeat the summary from Chapter 1: CO2 storage involves multiple activities under different licensing regimes. It may well be, however, that insofar as existing regulations could be relied upon, the process of modifying existing statutory instruments could be fast. This would really be a question for those with a better insight into the technical detail and political due process.

The government may also consider if it is helpful to fund the appraisal of Lybster partially or wholly, at an estimated cost of £3 million, which could commence immediately in anticipation of the required amendments being in place to sanction the outcomes and grant a storage permit. Assuming a construction and commissioning term of 1-2 years, the legislative changes would need to be in place by 2028 to support an on-injection outcome by 2030.

Figure 14. Storage prospects by maturity and available bio-CO2 from the 98 sources. The inner circle represents the available separation CO2; the lighter outer circle represents the combustion CO2. Note: the Clyde circles are not associated with a prospect but included for relevance to Feeder 10.

Vision

Storegga has proposed that Acorn will include a NET contribution (Storegga, 2022a). This was originally envisaged as a direct air capture project but timelines and capture costs for this technology suggest that bio-CO2 has a greater likelihood of supporting 2030 targets. We envision two bio-CO2 scenarios that potentially provide significant tax revenue to Scotland.

Scenario 1: Low-cost separation sources at £60 per tonne provide the highest profit and earliest opportunity for taxation. For Lybster, 100 ktpa is available from the Inverness cluster of distilleries. For Feeder 10 and Acorn, 200 ktpa is available from the central belt.

Scenario 2: More costly but larger combustion sources, primarily biomass and energy-from-waste plants at £120 per tonne provide 2 Mtpa of CO2 to Feeder 10. For Lybster, a large biomass plant, Morayhill, potentially doubles and then trebles the 100 ktpa injection rate if early well performance and capacity indications support expansion. This may include possible satellite prospects such as Knockinnon and Braemore.

Storage taxation: Assuming a 10% tax on storage only, this would harvest a nominal £7 per tonne on a storage cost of £70 per tonne – our estimate for Lybster; Storegga has published a transport and storage cost of £45 per tonne for Acorn (Storegga, 2022b). Taxing the full chain yields £15 on a CCS cost of £150. A tax on net profit would also yield £15 assuming a £300 credit.

Credit taxation: A yet more lucrative option would be to tax the CDR credit, yielding £30 on a nominal £300 per tonne – Figure 15. The supply-demand imbalance for permanent removals suggest high prices may be sustained for at least a decade as early storage capacity is primarily being booked to industrial clusters and fossil CO2, which is priced as a reduction on the ETS market.

Figure 15. Storage rate and potential tax revenue for two described Lybster and Feeder 10 scenarios.

Worth noting is that a successful demonstration of profitable storage and permanent removals at Lybster would potentially catalyse a race to capture separation bio-CO2 from AD sources. This would drive decentralised farm-scale emissions control, upgrading of biogas to biomethane and displacing fossil methane from local energy networks and the grid where a connection is available.

A boutique demonstration of storage at Lybster also has the advantage of being driven by commercial incentives and timelines, with the possibility of positively disrupting the cluster timelines and NET outcomes, especially for the second scenario.

References

Beiron, J et al (2022). Carbon capture from combined heat and power plants – Impact on the supply and cost of electricity and district heating in cities. International Journal of Greenhouse Gas Control, 129.

BEIS (2024). BEIS: Heat Networks Planning Database (January 2024). Available at: www.data.gov.uk/dataset/8a5139b3-e49b-47bd-abba-d0199b624d8a/beis-heat-networks-planning-database (Accessed May 2024)

Brownsort, P (2018). Negative Emission Technology in Scotland: CCS for Biogenic CO2. SCCS. Available at: www.sccs.org.uk//Negative_Emission_Technology_in_Scotland.pdf

(Accessed May 2024)

CCSL (2024). Carbon Capture Sites. Carbon Capture Scotland Ltd. Available at: www.carboncapture.scot/capture-sites (Accessed May 2024)

CDR.fyi (2024). Trending on Track? 2023 Year in Review – CDR market continues to see explosive growth. Available at: www.cdr.fyi/blog/2023-year-in-review (Accessed Feb 2022)

Dee, S et al (2005). Best practice in structural geology analysis. First Break, 23, 4.

DESNZ (2024). Energy Trends: UK renewables – Renewable electricity capacity and generation for 2023. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/statistics/energy-trends-section-6-renewables (Accessed May 2024)

DUKES (2022). Digest of UK Energy Statistics (DUKES): Renewable Sources of Energy, DUKES Chapter 6: Statistics on Energy from Renewable Sources. Department for Energy Security and Net Zero. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/statistics/renewable-sources-of-energy-chapter-6-digest-of-united-kingdom-energy-statistics-dukes (Accessed May 2024)

EC (2007). Sustainable power generation from fossil fuels: aiming for near-zero emissions from coal after 2020. European Commission Communication, January 2007. Available at: eur-lex.europa.eu/legal-content/EN/TXT/?uri=celex:52006DC0843 (Accessed May 2024)

Eke, P et al (2011). CO2 brine dissolution and injection for storage. SPE Project F&C, 41-53.

ENDS (2024). ENDS Waste & Bioenergy. Available at: www.endswasteandbioenergy.com (Accessed May 2024)

Energyst (2023). Iona Capital invests in biogenic CO2 pioneers Carbon Capture Scotland. Available at: theenergyst.com/iona-capital-invests-in-biogenic-co2-pioneers-carbon-capture-scotland (Accessed May 2023)

GCCSI (2021). Technology Readiness and Costs Of CCS. Report. Available at: www.globalccsinstitute.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/03/Technology-Readiness-and-Costs-for-CCS-2021-1.pdf (Accessed May 2024)

Gibbins, J et al (2024). Evidence Review of Emerging Techniques for Carbon Dioxide Capture using Amine-Based and Hot Potassium Carbonate Technologies under the IED for the UK.

HSE (2024). Agency agreements, memoranda of understanding and concordats, and working arrangements protocols. Health and Safety Executive. Available at: www.hse.gov.uk/agency-agreements-memoranda-of-understanding-concordats/index.htm#pageContainer (Accessed May 2024)

IEAGHG (2024). Techno-Economic Assessment of Small-Scale Carbon Capture for Industrial and Power Systems. Report. Available at: ieaghg.org/publications/techno-economic-assessment-of-small-scale-carbon-capture-for-industrial-and-power-systems/ (Accessed May 2024)

Keenan, H (2023). The Lybster Field: A prospect for CO2 storage in the Inner Moray Firth, Scotland. MSc Thesis, Supervisor Gilfillan, S. School of GeoSciences, University of Edinburgh.

Lehtveer, M & Emanuelsson, A (2021). BECCS and DACCS as Negative Emission Providers in an Intermittent Electricity System: Why Levelized Cost of Carbon May Be a Misleading Measure for Policy Decisions. Frontiers in Climate, 3.

Low, J (2024). Pathways to decarbonising heat and transport in Scotland using hydrogen. PhD thesis, University of Edinburgh.

Monaghan, A et al (2012). New insights from 3D models at analogue CO2 storage sites in Lincolnshire and eastern Scotland, UK. Proceedings of the Yorkshire Geological Society, 59.

MVV (2024). Range €80-€110/tCO2 provided by MVV Environmental for a 700 ktpa capacity EfW in Mannheim, Germany. MVV Environmental pers comm.

NNFCC (2023). The Official Information Portal on Anaerobic Digestion. Available at: www.biogas-info.co.uk/resources/biogas-map/ (Accessed May 2024)

Ofgem (2024a). Renewables Obligation (RO) Annual Report 2022-23 – (Scheme Year 21). Available at: www.ofgem.gov.uk/publications/renewables-obligation-ro-annual-report-2022-23-scheme-year-21 (Accessed May 2024)

Ofgem (2024b). Renewables and CHP Register (2024). Accredited Stations. Available at: renewablesandchp.ofgem.gov.uk/Public/ReportManager.aspx (Accessed May 2024)

Patterson, J & Paisley, R (2016). CO2 EOR policy and regulations in Scotland, SCCS Report.

REPD (2024). Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD): January 2024. DESNZ. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/publications/ (Accessed May 2024)

Ricardo (2023). Negative Emissions Technologies (NETS): Feasibility Study. Report. Available at: www.gov.scot/publications/negative-emissions-technologies-nets-feasibility-study/ (Accessed March 2024)

SEPA (2022). Scottish Pollutant Release Inventory 2022 Full data. Available at: www.sepa.org.uk/environment/environmental-data/spri/ (Accessed May 2024)

SG (2022). Securing a green recovery on a path to net zero: climate change plan 2018–2032 – update. Available at: www.gov.scot/publications/securing-green-recovery-path-net-zero-update-climate-change-plan-20182032/ (Accessed May 2024)

Smith, M et al (2011). CO2 aquifer storage site evaluation and monitoring. CASSEM Report.

Stolaroff et al (2021).

Statista (2024). Bioenergy. Available at: www.statista.com/outlook/io/energy/renewable-energy/bioenergy/worldwide (Accessed May 2024)

Storegga (2022a). Mitsui and Storegga Conclude Memorandum of Understanding on Commercialization of Direct Air Capture Technology. Press release, March 2022. Available at: storegga.earth/news/2022/press-releases/ (Accessed June 2024)

Storegga (2022b). Project Dreamcatcher – Low Carbon Direct Air Capture. Phase 1 Report. Available at: www.gov.uk/government/publications/direct-air-capture-and-other-greenhouse-gas-removal-technologies-competition (Accessed June 2024)

Su et al. (2023). Thermal integration of waste to energy plants with post-combustion CO2 capture. Available at: www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0016236122028289 (Accessed May 2024)

Tolvik (2024). UK Energy from Waste Statistics – 2022. Available at: www.tolvik.com/published-reports/ (Accessed 4 June 2024)

UK Environment Agency (2021). Post-combustion carbon dioxide capture: emerging techniques. Available at: www.gov.uk/guidance/post-combustion-carbon-dioxide-capture-best-available-techniques-bat. Published: 2 July 2021, Last updated: 27 March 2024 (Accessed May 2024)

WP (2024). The world’s largest carbon-capture plant just switched on. Washington Post, 9 May 2024. Available at: www.washingtonpost.com/climeworks-mammoth-carbon-capture/ (Accessed 17 June 2024)

Watt, I et al (in preparation). Lybster CCS Prospect. Powerpoint summary presentation for Carbon Capture Scotland Limited. Supervisor Gilfillan, S. School of GeoSciences, University of Edinburgh.

Whisky Invest Direct (2024). Malt whisky distilleries in Scotland. Available at: www.whiskyinvestdirect.com/about-whisky/malt-whisky-distilleries-in-scotland
(Accessed: May 2024)

Appendices

Appendix A Background on the CCS Directive

Pioneering work on CCS legislation in the EU was undertaken by the UK with the implementation of the UK Energy Act 2008. The Energy Act established a national regulatory framework for offshore CO2 storage with sufficient flexibility to transpose the anticipated CCS Directive. Directive 2009/31/EC on the geological storage of carbon dioxide was adopted by the EU Council of Ministers in 2009. The CCS Directive was transposed to UK law in 2012 and also incorporated into the Agreement on the European Economic Area. The EEA includes significant storage activity in Norway and Iceland. Despite recent changes in EU membership, the CCS Directive provides a common framework across Europe for offshore CO2 storage.

The CCS Directive applies to onshore and offshore geological storage of CO2 within a country, including exclusive economic zones and continental shelves. Member States that choose to permit storage must carry out an assessment of their regional potential storage capacity. Member States retain the right not to allow storage in their territories. Member States are required to report to the Commission on the implementation of the CCS Directive every four years. The Commission shares the progress with the Parliament and the Council. The 3rd report noted that the CCS Directive had been transposed into the national law of sixteen Member States by 2017. As of the 4th report, released in October 2023, only nine countries, Germany, Estonia, Ireland, Cyprus, Latvia, Lithuania, Austria, Finland, and Slovenia, prohibit the geological storage of carbon dioxide. Germany, 23% of EU fossil CO2 emissions, announced a carbon management strategy in 2024 to support CCS and currently plans to export CO2 for storage, primarily via the Rhine-Delta Corridor. The 4th report concluded that the CCS Directive had been correctly applied from 2019 to 2023 across the EU, acknowledging progress in Europe on the development and exploration of CO2 storage sites, and support for storage projects in most European countries.

DG CLIMA have commissioned DNV to revise the CCS Directive guidance documents to reflect the current understanding of CCS and remove ambiguities identified during the development of the first CCS projects in the EEA. Outcomes of the revision can be expected in 2024. The revised guidance documents aim to support operators and competent authorities in the practical implementation of permitting storage.

Appendix B Analysis of UK licensing

The Energy Act 2016 assigned the role of regulator to the Oil & Gas Authority (OGA) including related infrastructure such as CO2 pipelines. The OGA issued seven CO2 storage appraisal licences between 2012 and 2022. The North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) issued a further 21 appraisal licences in 2023.

The UK’s Oil & Gas Authority (OGA) has issued 28 storage appraisal licences since 2012[3], of which 27 are active, with most having been issued through the NSTA carbon storge licensing round in 2023. The OGA issued the first CO2 storage licence, CS001, in 2012[4]. The licence permitted BP to drill a single appraisal well in the Bunter aquifer, southern North Sea, to assess storage for White Rose, a post-combustion capture project on coal power at Drax. Prior to this, large CCS projects had been proposed for Scotland at Longannet (Scottish Power, coal, 2008) and Peterhead (BP, H2 and EOR, 2005). Neither progressed to a storage appraisal before funding support was withdrawn.

Licence CS002 was also issued in 2012, to Shell for the Goldeneye oil field and Peterhead project[5]. Both CS001 and CS002 progressed to FEED and were rumoured to be close to positive final investment decisions (FIDs) when funding was withdrawn with the cancellation of the £1bn CCS competition in 2015. These two licenses suggest an appraisal timeframe of around 4 years for these early projects. The publicly available CS001 and CS002 documents do not include a description of the technical requirements or staging of the appraisals.

The OGA extended CS001 in 2018 for the Endurance project and went on to issue CS003-CS007 by the end of 2021, prior to rebranding as the North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) in March 2022[6]. The new licenses enabled storage appraisals for the Track-1 and Track-2 clusters, namely Endurance (BP), Acorn (Storegga), Hamilton (Eni), and Viking (Harbour Energy), as well as two Bunter prospects (BP). The latter, CS006 and CS007, appear to be build-out capacity for the Track-1 East Coast Cluster. We note that the Track licenses balance appraisals of saline aquifers, Bunter and Acorn, with appraisals of depleted gas fields, Hamilton and Viking. The second tranche of licences document the staging of appraisals, and the additional requirements associated with specific licenses – see Section 3 and Fig 6.2.

Overlooking the years of appraisal for Acorn and Endurance prior to 2021, the four storage appraisals associated with the Track-1 and Track-2 are identical at 4 years. The licence holders must apply for a storage permit or relinquish the area at the end of the appraisal. The less mature Bunter prospects, CS006 and CS007, are licensed for 6 and 8 years respectively. Both include 3D seismic acquisition and appraisal well drilling as additional requirements.

The NSTA became the UK competent authority and storage regulator in 2023. This extended the role of the NSTA to mentoring aspirant storage operators and stewarding offshore storage from the start of appraisal to the end of operational liability with the transfer of the site ownership to the state on closure, subject to meeting the terms of licence.

The seven early licenses prepared the ground for the NSTA to issue 21 licenses in 2023, CS008-CS028. Nominations closed in May 2022. The NSTA launched the licensing round in June 2022. Applications closed September 2022 and licences were offered in May 2023.

The outliers are CS011 (Storegga, Acorn East, 2 years) and CS025 (BP, Bunter Closure 42, 8 years). 25 of the licences are in the North Sea: 18 in the southern North Sea, 3 in the central North Sea, and 4 in the northern North Sea. There are 2 licences in the East Irish Sea.

Appendix C Questions and Answers on Scots Law

C1. How was the UK North Sea divided at devolution for the purpose of renewables?

There are essentially two boundaries between Scotland and England in the North Sea. One determines which courts would be responsible in the event of criminal or civil matters arising out of offshore oil and gas operations – the Civil Jurisdiction (Offshore Activities) Order 1987 and the Criminal Jurisdiction (Offshore Activities) Order 1987.

The other is derived from the arrangements made at the time of devolution to delineate those parts of the territorial sea and the EEZ that would be treated as waters adjacent to Scotland and those which would not for purposes of environmental protection and the regulation of fisheries – namely the Scottish Adjacent Waters Boundaries Order 1999.

The area subject to Scottish jurisdiction is less in the case of the 1999 Order. It is important to note, however, that the 1987 Orders were made under the Oil and Gas (Enterprise) Act 1982 (as well as under the Continental Shelf Act 1964) and confer jurisdiction on the civil and criminal courts respectively in relation to “relevant acts”, which are defined (now by s11(2) of the Petroleum Act 1998) as “activities connected with the exploration of, or the exploitation of the natural resources of…the [sea]bed…or the subsoil beneath it”. Note that section 11(3) is so worded as to make it clear that it applies to installations involved in CCS.

By contrast, the equivalent Orders dealing with civil and criminal jurisdiction in relation to offshore renewable installations which were passed in 2009 utilise the same boundaries as the 1999 Order insofar as they seek to reflect the division of powers in relation to such installations as between Westminster and the Scottish Ministers (see the Civil Jurisdiction (Application to Offshore Renewable Energy Installations etc) Order 2009, and the Criminal Jurisdiction (Application to Offshore Renewable Energy Installations etc) Order 2009).

One could argue that this arrangement is not very tidy, but there does not appear to be any active dispute about it. Were there ever to be Scottish independence, however, and the matter of the location of what would now become the international maritime boundary required to be resolved, existing boundaries drawn for internal administrative and jurisdictional purposes would not be determinative and could, indeed, provide arguments respectively for those seeking more northerly or southerly solutions—albeit interestingly that those specifically relating to offshore oil and gas installations would appear to suggest a more southerly boundary. It would essentially be a matter to be agreed between Scotland and the rest of the UK as part of an overall settlement involving the division of assets and liabilities.

C2. Is CO2 storage in Scottish territorial waters already in the Scottish competence under the Energy Act 2008? Does Scotland require additional legislation for storage, such as transposing or adopting the CCS Directive to Scots law?

Scottish Ministers are clearly established as the licensing authority in relation to CO2 storage for the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland by s18 of the Energy Act 2008. The Storage of Carbon Dioxide (Licensing etc.) Regulations 2010, however, do not apply to this area, insofar as they define a “licence” as a licence granted by the authority (now NSTA/OGA) in relation to “a controlled place which is not in, under or over the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland” (Reg. 1(3)). Further legislation would therefore be required were Scottish Ministers minded to operate as the licensing authority for this area, albeit that there would be good reasons simply to mirror the existing regulations.

C3. What are the Scottish Ministers responsible for within the 12 nm limit? Sea surface to seabed? All fish, water, and benthic quality from land outfalls into sea?

Given the way in which powers have been allocated between UK and Scottish bodies, it is not possible to give a once and for all answer to this question. In terms of international law, the UK as the coastal state, enjoys sovereignty in the territorial sea which includes the seabed, the subsurface and the water column (subject only to, for example, rights of innocent passage). How the UK decides to exercise that sovereignty, however, is a matter for it and this becomes complex in the context of devolution. Thus, while Scottish Ministers undoubtedly have responsibility for, say, environmental issues in the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland, this needs to be read in conjunction with the environmental responsibilities in the hands of OPRED in the context of oil and gas operations in the same space.

C4. Who has responsibility and rights for the sub-seabed, mineral oil and gas rights?

Oil and gas under the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland as with all such resources wheresoever located in the UK, onshore or offshore, are vested in the Crown. Whereas Scottish Ministers did receive licensing powers for oil and gas in the post-referendum settlement in the context of the Scotland Act 2016, this was explicitly only in relation to the “onshore area”, defined as lying “within the baselines” of the territorial sea (s47). Thus, licensing in relation to all offshore oil and gas, within the territorial sea and under the continental shelf, is a matter for the NSTA/OGA.

C5. Does Scotland need its own regulator and competent authority? Or can those services be purchased from the UK government?

Purchasing the services of the NSTA/OGA would still require there to be appropriate regulations covering the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland and may raise political considerations. For example, if it is seen as expedient to make use of the UK regulator for this function, the question would arise as to where else such an approach might be appropriate – industry generally would like to deal with fewer regulators and to have to adapt to fewer jurisdictional variations. This could, of course, be countered by pointing to the very specific nature of the issue at hand where the long experience of the NSTA/OGA and its predecessors is an important consideration. Another way of looking at this, however, would be to consider whether an agreement could be reached between, say, Marine Scotland and the NSTA/OGA to deal with carbon licensing in territorial waters adjacent to Scotland (again on the basis that appropriate regulations are in place for the territorial sea adjacent to Scotland). There is a precedent for such an approach, effected by Memorandum of Understanding between the HSE and OPRED[7] to form the Offshore Safety Directive Regulator (now OMAR) when that directive required a competent authority to deal with health and safety, and environmental risks under one roof. That, of course, involved two regulators at UK level, but there should be no objection to a similar arrangement between a UK and a Scottish regulator given the commonality of purpose and the desirability of a seamless approach.

C6. Is the natural fill of residual oil and gas in depleted gas fields owned by Scottish Ministers or retained by the Crown Estate?

Residual oil and gas remain vested in the Crown.

C7. Who holds liability for oil and gas field operations, for decommissioning, and for permanent abandonment within the 12 nm limit?

First and foremost, in the context of operations, attention will be focused on the licensee. In most cases, however, liability will be joint and several with co-venturers under a joint operating agreement. In relation to decommissioning, it is a matter of anyone who holds a section 29 notice under the Petroleum Act 1998 – again usually co-venturers, but the list is lengthened to minimise the risk that the state is left to tidy up if duty holders become insolvent. Things get more complicated in relation to any infrastructure left in place under an agreed derogation. There is no specific legislation or regulation on this matter; rather it is dealt with in the context of guidance notes issued from time to time by OPRED. Originally, the wording was as follows: “The persons who own an installation or pipeline at the time of its decommissioning will remain the owner of any residues”. More recently, it has been adapted to: “The persons/parties who own an installation or pipeline, or are a section 29 [notice] holder, at the time of its decommissioning will remain the owners of any residues and remains after decommissioning.” This is problematical on a couple of levels. For a start, either someone is the owner, or they are not. If they are merely a section 29 notice holder, they cannot without further ado suddenly become the owner. More fundamentally, there is an argument that the use of Crown Leases in the EEZ in relation to renewables and CCS constitutes an exercise of property rights in the seabed which raises the question of whether any infrastructure left in place is actually a fixture (in both Scots and English law) which belongs to the owner of the land (or seabed) to which it is attached. This has never been tested but is certainly arguable. By contrast, this would appear to be a much easier proposition to establish within the territorial sea where the Crown Estate has habitually claimed property rights and the courts have readily confirmed them. Thus, whatever is stated in the guidance notes (and, of course, essentially accepted by duty holders in the context of a decommissioning programme), property law may say something different.

C8. Does Scotland own the pore space for the Lybster field and Forth Basin?

If I am right in understanding that the Lybster field lies wholly within the 12 nm limit, then whereas the hydrocarbons in that field are vested in the Crown and those rights are exercised by the NSTA, the pore space is the property of the Crown, which property rights would be exercisable by the CES. Insofar as the Forth Basin aquifer is similarly located within the 12 nm limit, the pore space there would also be owned by the Crown and the property rights would be exercisable by CES. Note that this property law analysis also implies that CO2 injected into depleted reservoirs beneath the territorial sea would be owned by the Crown on the basis of the principle of annexation. Roddy Paisley and John Paterson wrote a report on CO2 in the context of EOR years ago in which the property dimension was more fully explored.

C9. Is Lybster administered under onshore or offshore regulation? UK or Scots law?

Insofar as the exploration for and production of hydrocarbons is involved, then the petroleum licensing at the time would have been a matter for the Secretary of State. Even now, insofar as the reservoir lies beyond the baselines for the territorial sea and thus within the territorial sea, the licensing in relation to such a reservoir would be a matter for NSTA/OGA. The siting and operation of the drilling rig onshore would then and now be a matter for the local planning authority. Thus, both UK law and Scots law are engaged as appropriate.

C10. Now that the Beatrice field is no longer in production, does Scotland own the field, which is partly in territorial waters and partly beyond the 12 nm limit?

This is a most interesting problem. The residual hydrocarbons in the field remain vested in the Crown. The pore space within 12 nm is owned by the Crown. The ownership of pore space beyond 12 nm is not clear, but from a practical perspective only the Crown has sovereign rights to act in respect of that pore space. The licensing authority within 12 nm is Scottish Ministers and beyond the NSTA/OGA. Ways forward? Some form of arrangement modelled on those for hydrocarbon reservoirs that cross boundaries. This returns us to the answer above where an MoU between Marine Scotland and NSTA/OGA was suggested.

C11. Are consents expected to be closely similar, or identical, to permissions and standards already enacted for offshore oil and gas licensing, appraisal, development, and production? Lybster must have already passed regulatory agencies inspections for oil production, water cut disposal, and gas flaring – will CO2 injection for storage be different or require a new inspection?

Given that different activities under different licensing regimes are involved, new consents would be required. It may well be, however, that insofar as existing data could be relied upon, the process would be faster. This would really be a question for those with a better insight into the technical processes.

Appendix D Timeframe analysis of European CO2 storage

Analysis of CO2 storage projects across Europe at various stages of development indicates that both the European Union’s 2030 CO2 storage target (50 Mtpa) and United Kingdom’s 2030 target (20-30 Mtpa) may be achieved if storage development deadlines are met and expected storage rates are slightly exceeded. The addition of large storage projects in Norway and Iceland will very likely be necessary to meet EU demand and provide a contingency against capacity shortfalls. Planned storage capacities for Norway, Denmark, and Iceland vastly exceed domestic emissions, indicating an ambition to establish large CO2 import markets.

On average, megaton-scale European projects store 2-4 Mtpa. At the national level, results range from Bulgaria (P10 optimistic, 0.8 Mtpa) and Greece (P50 expected, 1 Mtpa), to Iceland (P10 optimistic, 2 Mtpa) and Norway (P50 expected, 15 Mtpa). The data indicates that the European Economic Area (EEA) and United Kingdom are on track to deliver regional storage rates of 18-106 Mtpa by 2030, with an expected P50 forecast of 58 Mtpa, i.e. slightly less than the 70-80 Mtpa aggregated net zero target for the EU and UK. Regionally significant storage in the North Sea remains a mainstay for the Netherlands (P50 4.5 Mtpa), the UK (P50 22.5 Mtpa), and Denmark (P50 12.2 Mtpa, of which 3 Mtpa is offshore). The emergence of onshore storage ambitions for Denmark (4-14 Mtpa) is an interesting development. It is notable that the UK, Norway, and Denmark contribute 44% of total storage. Only six EU27 countries are planning megatonne-scale projects. Portugal, Spain, Germany, and Poland, 45% of EU CO2 emissions, have no large projects planned – Table D.1.

Table D.1. Storage rates for the 32 projects on track to potentially deliver storage by 2030.

NORWAY, EEA

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Sleipner

1996

On Injection

0

0.8

1

Utsira Fmn

Equinor

SAQ

0

Snøhvit

2008

On Injection

0.2

0.5

0.8

Stø Fmn

Equinor

SAQ

0

Northern Lights

2025

FID, PCI, CEF

1.2

3.6

5

Johansen Fmn

Equinor

SAQ

5

Smeaheia

2028

EXP, EXL002

0

2.5

5

Sognefjord Fmn

Equinor

SAQ

20

Havstjerne

2029

EXP, EXL006

0

3

5

Sandnes, Bryne Fmns

Wintershall DEA

SAQ

10

Trudvang

2029

EXP, EXL007

0

0.8

1.5

Utsira Fmn

Sval Energi

SAQ

10

Barents Blue

2030

EXP, EXL003

0

1

2

Stø Fmn

PUN

SAQ

9

Luna

2030

EXP, EXL004

0

2.5

5

Johansen Fmn

Wintershall DEA

SAQ

5

Poseidon

2030

EXP, EXL005

0

0

2.5

Rødby Formation

Aker BP

SAQ

5

          

UNITED KINGDOM

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

NEP, Endurance

2027

FIP, Track 1

4

7

10

Bunter Fmn

BP

SAQ

23

HyNet

2027

FIP, Track 1

2

3

4

Hamilton Fields

Eni

DGF

10

Acorn

2027

FIP, Track 2

0.5

1

3

Captain, Wick Fmn

Shell

SAQ

10

Viking

2028

FIP, Track 2

3

5

8

Victor, Viking A Fields

Harbour Energy

DGF

15

BTNZ

2030

pre-FEED

0

2

4

Hewett Field

Eni

DGF

10

Morecambe

2030

pre-FEED

0

3

5

Morecambe Fields

Spirit Energy

DGF

20

Poseidon

2030

pre-FEED

0

1.5

3

Leman Field

Perenco

DGF

40

Orion

2031

pre-FEED

0

0

1

Amethyst, W Sole Fields

Perenco

DGF

6

          

DENMARK, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Greensand

2026

FIP

0.5

1.5

3

Nini Fields

INEOS Energy

DOF

8

CO2RYLUS

2026

FIP

0.1

0.2

0.5

Stenlille, Gassum Fmn

GSD

SAQ

0.5

Bifrost

2029

FEED, PCI

0

1.5

3

Harald Fields

TotalEnergies

DGF

10

Norne Fyrkat

2027

pre-FEED, PCI

2

4

6

Gassum, Gassum Fmn

Fidelis, ROSS

SAQ

10

Norne Trelleborg

2027

pre-FEED, PCI

2

4

6

Havnsø, Gassum Fmn

Fidelis, ROSS

SAQ

10

Ruby

2028

EXP

0

1

2

Rødby, Bunter Fmn

BlueNord

SAQ

10

          
          
          
          

NETHERLANDS, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Porthos

2026

FID, PCI, CEF

1

2

2.5

P18-2,4,6 Fields

TAQA

DGF

2.5

Aramis

2028

FEED, PCI, CEF

1

2.5

5

L10, L04-A, K14-FA

Neptune

DGF

22

          

ITALY, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Callisto, Ravenna

2027

FEED, PCI

0

2

4

Porto Corsini Field

Eni

DGF

16

          

ICELAND, EEA

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Coda Terminal

2026

FIP, IF

0.5

1

2

Kapelluhraun lava field

Carbfix

BAS

3

          

GREECE, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Prinos

2026

FEED, PCI, IF

0

1

2

Prinos, Epsilon Fields

Energean

DOF

3

          

CROATIA, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

GT CCS

2031

pre-FEED, PCI

0

0

0.3

Bockovac

Nexe

SAQ

0.7

Ivanić Grad

2026

Pre-FEED

0

0.1

0.2

Ivanić Grad Field

MOL Group

EOR

0

          

FRANCE, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

Pycasso

2030

Pre-FEED, PCI

0

0

1

Lacq Gas Field

Teréga

DGF

5

          

BULGARIA, EU

Start

SRMS, Mtpa:

P90

P50

P10

Storage

Operator

Type

2040s, Mtpa

ANRAV

2028

Pre-FEED, IF

0

0

0.8

Galata Field

Petroceltic

DGF

1.3

Appendix E UK Licensing timeframe

Table E.1. UK licence timing from CS001 to CS028 (2012-2023).

First proposed project

  

2002

2003

2004

2005

2006

DTI: Energy White Paper 2003

 

 

 

 

 

 

BP “Beyond Petroleum”

 

 

Peterhead gas, Miller EOR

 

 

UK Competitions

  

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

DECC: Energy Act 2008

 

CCS Directive 2009 transposed

 

BEIS: Clean Growth Strategy

 

 

 

 

OGA: Offshore Carbon Storage Licensing, Storage of Carbon Dioxide Licensing Regulations

£1bn Competition #1

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Longannet coal

£1bn Competition #2

 

 

 

 

[Drax, Statoil] BP, CS001

White Rose, Bunter 42/25 & 43/21

 

 

 

[SSE] Shell, CS002

Peterhead, Goldeneye: ERA – CH – AS

 

 

First six licences

  

2018

2019

2020

2021

2022

2023

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2029

2030

 

2050 Net Zero target 2019

 

DESNZ: Energy Act 2023, CCUS Market Creation 2023

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NSTA: Offshore Carbon Storage Regulator & Competent Authority

Cluster Sequencing Process

Track 1

 

Track 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CS001* NEP, Endurance: CH

Endurance (T1): ERA – CH – AS- PA

CX

ENDURANCE OPERATIONAL

CS003*

Acorn: CH

Acorn (T2) South: ERA – CH – AS – DF – PA

Central: CH – – PA

ACORN SOUTH OP

CENTRAL OP

 

Eni, CS004

HyNet NW: Hamilton (T1): ERA – – DF – PA

CX

HAMILTON OPERATIONAL

 

 

[BP] Harbour, CS005

Viking (T2): ERA – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

VICTOR OPERATIONAL

[TotalEnergies, Equinor] BP, CS006

Bunter Closures 39 & 40: ERA – Seismic AQ – Well – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

39 & 40 OP

[TotalEnergies, Equinor] BP, CS007

Bunter Closures 36 & 37: ERA – Well – Seismic AQ – Well – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

NSTA Carbon Storage Licensing Round #1

 

 

 

 

2023

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2029

2030

 

 

 

 

DESNZ: Energy Act 2023, CCUS Market Creation 2023 

 

 

 

 

NSTA: Offshore Carbon Storage Regulator & Competent Authority

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

Eni, CS008

BTNZ, Hewett: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Well – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

HEWETT OP

[Wintershall Dea, CCL] Perenco, CS009

Poseidon, Leman: ERA – Seismic RP – Injectivity – Wells VSP – – PA

CX

LEMAN OP

 

[Centrica] Spirit, CS010

Morecambe: ERA – Seismic AQ – – Injectivity – Firm TR & TS – – PA

CX

MOR’E OP

 

[Harbour, Shell] Storegga, CS011

Acorn East: ERA – – PA

CX

ACORN EAST OPERATIONAL

 

[Harbour, Shell] Storegga, CS012

East Mey Sub Areas 1 & 2: ERA – CH – AS – DF – Sub Area 1 PA

SA2 PA

CX

 

 

EnQuest, CS013

Magnus: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application

CX

MAGNUS OP

 

 

EnQuest, CS014

Thistle: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application

CX

THISTLE OP

 

 

EnQuest, CS015

Tern: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application

CX

TERN OP

 

 

EnQuest, CS016

Eider: ERA – CH – Assess – Define – Permit Application

CX

EIDER OP

 

[SEEL, CCL] Perenco, CS017

Orion, Amethyst East: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Firm TR & TS – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

 

[SEEL, CCL] Perenco, CS018

Orion, West Sole: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Firm TR & TS – Injectivity – CH – – PA

CX

 

 

[W’Dea] Synergia, CS019

Camelot, Bunter Closure 18: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ – Well – – PA

CX

CAMELOT OP

 

 

Neptune, CS020

Proteus, Bunter Closure 05: ERA – Seismic RP – Well – CH – PA

CX

PROTEUS OP

 

[Exxon] Neptune, CS021

Bunter Closure 13: ERA – Seismic AQ & RP – Well – Firm TR & TS – CH – – PA

CX

 

 

Neptune, CS022

Caister, Bunter Closure: ERA – Seismic AQ & RP – Well – Firm TR & TS – CH – – PA

CX

 

 

[BP] Harbour, CS023

Vulcan: ERA – Seismic RP – Firm Geomech & Fault & Core – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

 

 

[BP] Harbour, CS024

Audrey: ERA – Seismic RP – Firm Geomech & Fault & Core – CH – AS – DF – PA

CX

 

 

[Equinor] BP, CS025

Bunter Closure 42: ERA – Seismic RP & AQ -Well – Characterise – Assess – Define – Permit Application

 

 

[Exxon] Shell, CS026

Sean: ERA – Seismic RP – Well – Characterise – Assess – Define – PA

CX

 

 

[Exxon] Shell, CS027

Indefatigable: ERA – Seismic RP – Well – Characterise – Assess – Define – PA

CX

 

 

[Exxon] Shell, CS028

Bunter Area 3S & N:ERA – Seismic RP & AQ -Well S (N) – CH S (N) – AS – – PA

CX

Appendix F AOI inventory of 3D seismic and wells

AOI 1 – Lybster field area

Q11: 3D RE07112025 2007
(Proprietary, IGas PLC)

  • 11/25-2 1986 dry hole 3713 m
  • 11/25-1 1984 dry hole 3307 m
  • 11/24b-4 2019 dry hole 963 m
  • 11/24-3z,y,x,w,v, producing well
  • 11/24a-2z 2004 dry hole 2098 m
  • 11/24-1 1996 oil well 1884 m

AOI 1 – Beatrice area

Q11: 3D TB973D0001 1997

Q11: 3D BN803F0001 1985
(Proprietary, Repsol Sinopec)

  • 11/30a-B9Z 1984 oil well 2398 m
  • 11/30-7 1978 oil show 2192 m
  • 11/30a-10 1990 dry hole 3461 m
  • 11/30-5 1977 oil well 2372 m
  • 11/30a-A26Z 1988 producer 2083 m
  • 11/30-2 1976 oil well 2220 m
  • 11/30a-8 1982 oil well 2495 m
  • 11/30z-C2 1985 oil well 2266 m
  • 11/30-4 1981 dry hole 2391 m

AOI 1 – Jacky area

  • 12/21-5 1987 dry hole 2722 m
  • 12/21-2 1983 oil show 3459 m
  • 12/21c-6 2007 oil well 2233 m

AOI 1 – Wick area

Q12: 3D GE863F0001 1986

(Speculative, Schlumberger)

  • 12/16-1 1988 dry hole 3659 m
  • 12/16-2 1993 dry hole 1554 m

AOI 1, South of GE86

  • 12/21-3 1984 oil show 4174 m
  • 2D: 12-81-145 NW-SE
  • 2D: BN/12-81-126 SW-NE
  • 12/21-1 1969 dry hole 1590 m
  • 2D: 12-81-144 NW-SE
  • 2D: 12-86-10 SW-NE
  • 12/22-3 1986 dry hole 2190 m
  • 2D: A12-85-03 NWW-SEE
  • 2D: A12-85-10 NW-SE

AOI 1 S of Lybster, W of Beatrice

  • 11/29-1 2008 dry hole 2483 m
  • 2D: 302A NW-SE
  • 2D: 105A SW-NE

AOI 2 – Forth Basin area

Q25: 2D CN872D1010 1987

(Proprietary, ConocoPhillips)

  • 25/26-1 1990 dry hole 2040 m

AOI 3 – Fraserburgh area

Q18: 3D PGS18002MOF 2019, Release 2029

(Speculative, PGS Exploration Ltd)

  • 18/05a-1 1982 dry hole 1984
  • 2D: CNS-83-125 NW-SE
  • 2D: A18,19-82-25A W-E
  • 18/05-2 2007 dry hole 1763 m
  • 2D: A18,19-82-25 W-E
  • 2D: A18,19-82-20 N-S
  • Q19: 3D YC06A01902 2007
  • (Proprietary, CENTURY Exploration Ltd)
  • 19/01-1 1992 dry hole 3425 m
  • 2D: A18,19-82-31 E-W
  • 2D: A18,19-82-28A N-S

AOI 4 – Solway Firth area

Q112: 3D ES943F0001 1994

(Proprietary, ExxonMobil)

  • 112/15-1 1996 dry hole 2715 m
  • 2D WG932D0001 Line 151 NW-SE 1993
  • 2D WG932D0001 Line 149 SW-NE 1993
  • 111/15-1 1995 dry hole 1981 m
  • 2D: BG942-13 SW-NE
  • 2D: BG96-112-19 NW-SE

Appendix G Lybster Field

Lybster is Old Norse for “slope farmstead”. The field was named after the local village, an important herring port in the 19th Century. Premier Oil drilled the discovery well, 11/24-1, in 1996. This was one of a series of exploration successes in the 1980s and 1990s including the Fife and Angus fields, Central North Sea. The vertical discovery well tested up to 2,000 bopd of 36°API oil and was suspended. Premier was also party to the offshore extension of Wytch Farm in 1994. This made the Dorset oil field the largest onshore asset in Western Europe. The development required a five km extended reach well, the first of its kind in the UK.

Lybster was acquired by Caithness Petroleum in 2008 and, like Wytch Farm, developed from land with a 5 km extended reach well, 11/24-3z – Figure F.1. Lybster and Wytch Farm are the only onshore-offshore extended reach well developments in the UK. The Lybster structure is crossed by a northeast-southwest trending fault. The appraisal well and a short side-track tested the western half of the field which proved uncommercial. The well was re-entered in 2010 and side-tracked across the fault to twin the discovery well.

The assessment of oil fields, like storage prospects, require high quality subsurface data, with 3D seismic and well data being commonly cited as key datasets for the suitability and capacity assessment of a site. The Lybster field, in addition to its near-shore location, has both.

The well plan and production strategy for the oil field were based on a 3D reservoir model built from the RE07 seismic survey. Multiple interpretations are possible depending on the wells chosen for depth conversion of the seismic. For example, compare Figure F1 with Figure F2. While the models are similar, depths differ for the field area by as much as 60 metres.

Figure F.1. A ‘top surface’ model for the RE07 3D survey by an oil company (Corallian Resources, 2018).

In the model below, the inferred oil-water contact (white line, dashed) differs from the field outline (red line). This suggests the depth conversion of the Keenan model differs from the oil company interpretation. The Keenan depth conversion of seismic two-way-time is based on a single well log and challenging, as noted by Keenan (2023). The depth uncertainty was not estimated but is likely to be of the order of tens of meters which would impact on an accurate geometric assessment of capacity and precise location of the spill point to the north.

Figure F.2. A ‘top surface’ reservoir model for the RE07 3D seismic survey area by Keenan (2023).

Geological setting: The onshore Lybster area is unconformably overlain by Middle Devonian flagstones. These extremely hard, thinly interbedded siltstones and sandstones form a top to the more prospective and younger Jurassic formations below. The flagstones caused the 11/24-3 well drillers significant challenges in 2008, slowing the early hole progress, as documented in the well completion report.

The Devonian flagstones are underlain by Cretaceous carbonates and calcareous mudstones, organic rich Jurassic mudstones, coals and siltstones, Triassic sandstones and Permian sandstones, mudstones, and minor salts. Late Jurassic rifting in the North Sea resulted in large normal faults and relatively deep marine basins. At the time of this tectonic activity the Great Glen Fault and Helmsdale Fault were active as normal faults. The field is a four-way dip closed structural trap that formed at a flexure point in response to tectonic inversion of the Inner Moray Firth area. A fault separates the field into an unproductive western compartment and a proven oil-bearing eastern compartment.

The main reservoir, the Beatrice Formation, is 10-20 m thick and composed of a shallow marine sandstone sequence that lies between the Brora Coal Formation and the Heather Formation, which is of Middle Jurassic age. The upward-coarsening sandstones of the Beatrice Formation have been interpreted as marine barrier-bar and offshore-bar environments. The ‘B’ Sand is interpreted as distributary channel environment.

Well 11/24 stratigraphy, gamma rai and main lithology. Appendix H Production history

Lybster was in production from June 2012-December 2014, with a five month pause from July-November 2013. Production averaged 184 bopd for the first 13 months, and 64 bopd for the last 13 months. Oil was transported by road tanker to Immingham for sale. An average of 0.989 mmscfpd of associated gas was flared. The field was sold to IGas in 2013. A rapidly changing production profile in Q2 2013 saw the gas cut double and water cut increase more than ten-fold from an average daily 57 m3 to over 690 m3. This led to the July 2013 well intervention. Oil production resumed in December 2013 with a declining profile from 142 bopd in January to 25 bopd in September 2014. Associated gas dropped to an average of 0.883 mmscfpd. The daily water cut doubled, increasing to 1,244 m3 in May 2014.

Field: Lybster oil field

Operator: IGas, 2013 – present

Location: Inner Moray Firth, North Sea

Category: Small, 250k barrels OOIP

Discovery: 11/24-1

Water Depth: 39 m

Discovered: Premier Oil, Repsol

Discovery: 20 Sep – 22 Oct 1996

Reservoir: Beatrice formation

Trap 4-way dip closure, 1-2°

Res Lithology Sandstones, thin shales

Reservoir Top 1,433 m / 4,700 feet

OOIP GIIP 250 kbbl, 2000 mmscf

OWC, FWL 1493 m / 4,898 feet

Quadrant/ block: 11/24

Area: 6.11 km2

Discovery: 1 exploration well

Appraisal: 1 ERW + 2 side-track

First Production: 11/24-3z, Aug 2011

Liquids: oil + flare + water

Reservoir: Mesozoic sandstones

Primary: A and B Sands

Figure G.1. Discovery well 11/24-1 summary

Poro-Perm: 15%, 200 mD

Reserves: proven – probable – possible

Oil & Condensate: 147-62-48 kbbl

Sales Gas: 734-310-243 mmscf

Oil equivalent: 274-115-90 kboe

Produced volumes

Oil (sold): 97,992 bbl

Gas (flared): 108,582 boe

Water (treated): 79,940 bbl

CO2 storage

Seal, primary: Uppat Shale, 23 m thick

Seal complex: KCF Shale, 1065 m thick

Capacity (min) – produced volume: 95 kt

Capacity (low) – structural volume: 0.35 Mt

Capacity (mid) – structural volume: 2.1 Mt

Capacity (high) – structural volume: 9.4 M

Figure G.2. Well 11/24-1 log for reservoir section and overlying seal.

Appendix I Lybster CO2 Storage Assessment

A series of interpretation techniques have been applied to establish the storage capacity and storage suitability of Lybster. The North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) and British Geological Survey (BGS) are the primary sources for the seismic and well data that inform the analysis.

The study area is defined by the boundary of RE07112025, a 3D seismic survey acquired in 2007 across quadrant-blocks 11/24 and 11/25, encompassing an area of 306 km2 – Fig 4.1. 3D seismic is the most effective data for accurately characterising subsurface structures and reservoir connectivity (Dee, et al., 2005). The survey defines the Lybster study area as it represents the limit of the subsurface that can be geologically mapped with confidence. Site characterisation also relies on existing well data from the field and surrounding area. These provide depth-conversion calibration points for 3D models based on the seismic. Well data are provided by the North Sea Transition Authority (NSTA) and British Geological Survey (BGS) through their open access data resources.

Table I.1: Summary of wells in area and available data.
G, S, D stands for gamma, sonic, density; CS for check shot.

Well ID

Type

Depth, m

Bottom hole Fm

Composite

G, S, D

Core

CS

11/24-1

Vertical

1920

Lossiemouth Fm
(Top Triassic)

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

11/24a-2

Vertical

2111

Lossiemouth Fm
(Top Triassic)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

11/24a-2z

Deviated

2190

Lossiemouth Fm
(Top Triassic)

Yes

Yes

No

No

11/24b-4

Vertical

1000

Brora Coal
(Middle Jurassic)

Yes

Yes

No

No

11/25-1

Vertical

3347

Old Red Sstn (Devonian)

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

11/25-2

Vertical

3749

Old Red Sstn (Devonian)

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

11/29-1

Vertical

2626

Top Lady’s Walk Shale (L Jurassic)

Yes

Yes

No

N/A

11/30-7

Vertical

2250

Lossiemouth Fm

(Top Triassic)

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

12/16-2

Deviated

1583

Brora Coal
(Middle Jurassic)

Yes

Yes

No

N/A

12/21-3

Deviated

4236

Old Red Sstn (Devonian)

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

12/21-5

Deviated

2760

Stotfield Chert
(Top Triassic)

Yes

Yes

No

N/A

12/26-2

Deviated

1706

Base Kimmeridge Clay (U Jurassic)

Yes

Yes

Yes

N/A

12/26-3

Deviated

3156

Old Red Sstn (Devonian)

Yes

Yes

No

N/A

Five exploration wells are located within the study area, including the Lybster discovery well, 11/24-1. A further seven wells were selected from the surrounding region, based on location and data quality, to establish the stratigraphic and structural relationship between the field and its surrounding geology. Table I.1 documents the studied wells. Each of the wells penetrate beyond the mid Jurassic strata that contains the oil field reservoir. However, few wells extend beyond the Upper Triassic, setting the stratigraphic floor for the evaluation above the Permian basement.

Premier Oil drilled the ‘wildcat’ discovery well, 11/24-1, in 1996. Production tests flowed 415-1850 barrels of oil per day from the Jurassic Beatrice Sandstones. The field was further developed in 2008 when Caithness Petroleum drilled an extended reach well, L11/24-3 and side-track, L11/24-3Z from onshore.

Both the well and side-track showed minimal oil. Caithness Petroleum re-entered L11/24-3 and drilled a second side-track, L11/24-3y, to intersect 11/24-1, the discovery well – Fig 3.2. The new side-track successfully proved hydrocarbon reserves, and in 2011 Caithness Petroleum re-entered the well to start production in 2012. The field was purchased by IGas in 2013, followed by a 5-month workover period to improve the well. However, the workover failed to prevent an increasing gas-oil ratio, and increasing water cut. IGas suspended production from the well in 2014 during a period of low oil prices.

I1 Site characterisation | Attribute suitability

Injectivity: The production history suggests good injectivity – Figure 6. The field area is in hydraulic connection with the regional aquifer. The measured permeability, 200 mD (range 10-4,000 mD) reflects the observed reservoir lithologies which are predominantly darcy-permeability sandstones with minor interbedded siltstones. Reservoir thickness is adequate at 5-25 m and the reservoir units, the Beatrice A and B Sands, extend across the basin.

Seal: The history of oil and gas retention for many millions of years at Lybster and Beatrice is evidence for a highly suitable seal. The Uppat Shale is 23 m thick in well 11/24-1. The caprock was not sampled at Lybster but a 13 m core is available from Beatrice, well 11/30a-8. The shale was described as homogeneous but not tested for permeability – Appendix F.

Faults: The main fault that bisects the field is considered to be sealing as the western half of the field contains no hydrocarbons. A number of smaller associated faults lie within the field boundary. Two risks associated with faults, leakage and seismic reactivation, need to be de-risked at appraisal with a fault analysis study including a geomechanical assessment.

Wells: The discovery well, 11/24-1, was plugged with three cement isolation barriers, abandoned, and cleared to seabed in 1996. As such, it does not represent a leakage risk but cannot be repurposed for CO2 injection. The production well, 11/24-3y, is suspended with its surface infrastructure in place. A dedicated study on the suitability for repurpose as a CO2 injector needs to be to a condition of an appraisal licence.

CO2 density: The field depth, 1,430 m, is ideal for dense phase CO2 storage. The reservoir temperature and pressure, 47 °C and 15 MPa, mean that the reservoir CO2 density will be 725 kg/m3. This will make it highly miscible with the residual oil, 726 kg/m3. The CO2 will trap between the existing natural gas cap, 110 kg/m3, and porewater below, 1030 kgm3. This sandwich configuration is an ideal fluid trap for a depleted oil field. The oil-free area to the west of the fault will function as saline aquifer store with about 90% of the supercritical CO2 rising to trap beneath the caprock, and about 10% dissolving into the surrounding porewater.

Migration: The four-way dip trap geometry is ideal for preventing lateral migration. The structural spill point is to the northeast of the field at 1,500 m: a saddle to the up-dip Braemore prospect. The expected capacity, 2 Mt, assumes no fill beyond the oil-water contact at 1490 m. The appraisal licence will require a site boundary that is likely to be defined by the structural spill point and dynamic simulation of the expected plume extent.

Location: The near-shore location and proximity to sources of high-value bio-CO2, primarily from local distilleries, makes the location exceptional. Access by road places requirements and limits on annual injection rates relating to trucked loads and on-site temporary storage.

Monitoring: Not assessed. The monitoring location for the storage area is in shallow waters of around 40 m depth. This will require a suite of geophysical equipment suited to the local environment. The appraisal licence will require a plan for monitoring storage that focuses on the injection well and remote monitoring from the surface.

Intervention: Not assessed. The requirements and cost of intervening in the case of poor well performance or unexpected migration out of the storage complex has not been assessed.

I2 Site characterisation | Capacity estimate

Structural Volume

Storage area 3 km2 (Assumes only half the field area of 6 km2 is available)

Net thickness 15 m (Assumes an average value from the range: 5-25 m)

Porosity 15% (Assumes an average value from the range: 8-22%)

Net to Gross 68% (Estimated from the gamma ray log for 11/24-1)

CO2 density 725 kg/m3 (Dense phase at ambient reservoir conditions)

Saturation 62.5% (Assume an average value from the range: 50-75%)

High CO2 capacity, optimistic: 9.4 Mt = 6E06 x 21 x 0.19 x 0.76 x 740 x 0.70 kg

Mid CO2 capacity, expected: 2.1 Mt = 3E06 x 15 x 0.15 x 0.68 x 725 x 0.625 kg

Low CO2 capacity, pessimistic: 0.35 Mt = 1.5E06 x 9 x 0.11 x 0.6 x 710 x 0.55 kg

Produced Volume

Produced reservoir fluids 131,227 m3 (Oil: 14%, Gas: 76%, Water: 10%)

CO2 density, reservoir conditions 725 kg/m3 (Pressure: 15 MPa, Temp: °47 C)

Minimum and highly conservative: 95.1 kt = 131,227 m3 x 725 kg/m3

STRUCTURAL VOLUME: A structural volume estimate of storage capacity assumes the pore space is available for CO2. A mid-range value of 2.1 Mt indicates the potential for a reasonably sized CO2 storage project. The limitations and range assumptions for the pore volume estimate should be accounted for within the low estimate which assumes the smallest area and poorest reservoir quality, representing a minimum capacity of 350,000 tonnes of CO2.

PRODUCED VOLUME: The fluid replacement capacity for a produced field is often useful in establishing a reliable ‘proven’ storage capacity estimate, based on known volumes which have been produced from the reservoir. However, the Lybster field was in production for a surprisingly brief period, which means that a production volume estimate will be extremely low, and hardly representative of the available pore volume. A storage capacity of 95,100 tonnes is estimated from produced volumes of oil, gas, and water using this method.

I3 Site characterisation | Stratigraphic analysis

An assessment of the stratigraphy was completed using composite logs, geophysical logs, core photographs, and published studies (Thomson & Underhill, 1993; Richards, et al., 1993; Tamas, et al., 2022). Where data gaps existed within the study area, wells from the surrounding region with a similar stratigraphy were looked at as analogues for Lybster.

The Lybster site assessment uses standard criteria established in previous CO2 storage projects (Chadwick, et al., 2008; Alcade, et al., 2021; IEAGHG, 2022). Lybster attributes are assessed using a traffic light, where green indicates favourable properties, red indicates unfavourable properties, and orange indicates intermediate values. Table I2 documents the outcomes for storage criteria.

Table I.2: Traffic light assessment of reservoir and seal attributes for CO2 storage

Parameter

Value

Aspect of storage

Depth

1433 m

Storage capacity

Thickness (net)

15 m, 5 – 25 m

Storage capacity, injectivity

Porosity

15%, 8 – 22%

Storage capacity

Permeability

200 mD, 10 – 4000 mD

Injectivity

CO2 density

725 kg/m3, supercritical

Storage capacity

Rock type

Sandstone with siltstones

Storage efficiency

Seal lithology

Low permeability mudstone

Containment

Seal thickness

23 m in well 11/24-1

Containment




Secondary reservoir: The Brora Sandstone and Alness Spiculite members display good reservoir characteristics as indicated by their low-gamma ray values and lithologies, but poor permeability within the two formations suggests a reservoir quality unsuitable for CO2 storage.

Secondary seal: The Kimmeridge Clay Formation exists as a thick regional succession of fine siltstones and mudstones above the Uppat Mudstones. A stable gamma-ray curve in all well logs is indicative of a homogenous, low-porosity formation, suitable for a secondary seal.

I4 Site characterisation | Structural analysis

A four-way dip closure, or dome, associated with an anticlinal structural deformation traps buoyant CO2 and tightly constrains the migration of CO2 within the crest of the structure. The main fault which crosscuts the field area is identified as a potential leakage pathway and requires further investigation to de-risk the site, but its proven history of trapping hydrocarbons is a positive indicator.

The Lybster structure formed at a flexure point during tectonic inversion of the Inner Moray Firth area. A fault segments the field roughly in half: a western compartment with no oil as proven by wells 11/24-3 and 11/24-3z; and an eastern compartment where the Beatrice Sandstones are oil bearing.

The Uppat Mudstones are an effective top seal, preventing upward migration. The adjacent structural high at the Braemore prospect, and patterns identified across the in-line seismic profile, suggest a series of anticline-syncline pairs along strike, parallel to the coastline.

The continuation of the reservoir along strike presents the possibility of increased storage capacity. Injecting down-dip of the trap and into the water-leg of the reservoir on the migration path but outside the structural closure increases the storage capacity with a proven trap at the end of the migration path.

I5 Site characterisation | Production Data

Existing exploration and production well data from Lybster allows for a detailed analysis of the reservoir pressure conditions and residual fluids within the field, both of which are significant for CO2 storage capacity calculations. The Lybster field is hydrostatically pressured with open boundaries to a regional aquifer, the Beatrice Formation. This is as a positive indicator for CO2 storage as a reservoir with open boundaries allows for the displacement of pore fluids and the dispersion of injected-related pressure. This increases the storage capacity compared to a field with closed boundaries.

Production data suggests the field contains a column of residual natural gas. This is also favourable for CO2 storage as gas is more compressible than oil or water, increasing storage capacity. As CO2 is denser than natural gas at reservoir conditions, 724 kg/m3 vs 110 kg/m3, the CO2 will occupy the bottom of the reservoir when injection stops with the remaining natural gas at the top of the reservoir. This acts as a gas barrier which reduces the risk of CO2 leakage through the top seal.

Table I.3: Historic production data for Lybster oil field.

Year

Month

Oil, bbl

Reservoir, m^3

Gas, mscf

Gas, boe

Reservoir, m^3

Water, m^3

Water, bbl

Reservoir, m^3

Reservoir, m^3

2012

June

7,724

1,424

11,160

1,983

1,196

0

0

0

2,620

2012

July

6,762

1,247

20,235

3,596

2,945

37

233

37

6,849

2012

August

6,938

1,279

24,862

4,418

3,765

47

296

47

11,941

2012

September

8,064

1,487

37,505

6,665

5,937

17

107

17

19,381

2012

October

9,202

1,697

59,753

10,618

9,849

88

554

88

31,016

2012

November

4,491

828

27,969

4,970

4,590

41

258

41

36,476

2012

December

3,202

590

3,390

602

272

21

132

21

37,359

2013

January

1,717

317

10,065

1,789

1,641

157

988

158

39,474

2013

February

1,057

195

5,933

1,054

963

50

314

50

40,682

2013

March

3,038

560

12,713

2,259

1,980

302

1,900

303

43,525

2013

April

9,649

1,779

71,901

12,777

12,004

778

4,894

781

58,090

2013

May

7,491

1,382

74,974

13,323

12,792

798

5,019

802

73,066

2013

June

3,485

643

31,536

5,604

5,345

493

3,101

495

79,549

2013

Jul-Nov

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

79,549

2013

December

2,132

393

742

132

0

940

5,913

944

80,886

2014

January

4,403

812

22,919

4,073

3,684

838

5,271

842

86,224

2014

February

1,912

353

9,747

1,732

1,563

724

4,554

727

88,866

2014

March

3,837

708

37,752

6,708

6,434

1073

6,749

1078

97,086

2014

April

2,573

474

28,181

5,008

4,835

903

5,680

907

103,302

2014

May

3,403

628

28,605

5,083

4,822

1244

7,825

1250

110,001

2014

June

2,359

435

35,598

6,326

6,202

848

5,334

852

117,490

2014

July

1,812

334

25,709

4,569

4,468

1035

6,510

1040

123,332

2014

August

1,138

210

18,223

3,238

3,182

807

5,076

811

127,535

2014

September

742

137

8,052

1,431

1,381

759

4,774

762

129,815

2014

October

730

135

1,165

207

133

575

3,617

578

130,660

2014

November

132

24

2,331

414

408

80

503

80

131,173

2014

December

0

0

0

0

0

54

340

54

131,227

Appendix J Sources methodology

The database comprises a list of candidate bio-CO2 sources. The methodology calculates CO2 emissions for these sites based on publicly available data[8] (see below). Facilities include those that are already operational, under construction, or at FID and expected to come online before 2030. Facilities from across the various sources and source types are identified from a combination of the following publicly available sources:

 

• Renewable Energy Planning Database (REPD, 2024)

• BEIS Heat Networks Planning Database (BEIS, 2024)

• Ofgem Renewables Obligation Annual Report (Ofgem, 2024a)

• Ofgem Accredited Stations (Ofgem, 2024b)

• Whisky Invest Direct (WID, 2024)

• The Official Information Portal on Anaerobic Digestion (NNFCC, 2023)

• UK Energy from Waste Statistics 2022 (Tolvik, 2023)

• Scottish Environment Protection Agency SPRI (SEPA, 2022)

• ENDS Waste & Bioenergy (ENDS, 2024)

• Project and facility websites

• Local authority planning portals

 

Estimating the amount of bio-CO2

The threshold for inclusion is 3 ktpa of bio-CO2. This is based on consultation with current commercial bio-CO2 capture operations in Scotland (Carbon Capture Scotland Ltd, 2024). The methodology follows a top-down calculation similar to Brownsort (2018), using installed or generating capacity, and assumptions to estimate total CO2 emissions from biogenic sources. The following section outline the methodology and key assumptions for each source type.

 

Biomass combustion

Biomass combustion is determined from three sources and categorised into two groups: biomass combustion for heat and Combined Heat and Power (CHP). The REPD (2024) is updated quarterly and includes data on installed capacity for all UK renewable electricity and CHP projects. For heat provision, a capacity factor of 56.7% (Dukes, 2022) and a heat efficiency of 80% are used. For CHP, the same capacity factor of 56.7% and an electrical conversion efficiency of 35% are used. All biomass feedstock is assumed to be wood with a specific CO2 emission of 0.39kg/kW, despite chicken litter being the main feedstock for one site, Lochgelly.

Energy from Waste

EfW facilities are calculated based on plant waste processing capacity data collected from project or facility websites, ENDS Waste & Bioenergy (ENDS, 2024), and, where necessary, local authority planning portals. Emissions arising are modelled on a ratio of 0.944:1 tCO2 per tonne of waste processing capacity, i.e. 0.944 tCO2 produced for every tonne of waste. Plants are assumed to operate at 50% of plated capacity during the first year of operation and at 95% for the rest of their operational lifetime. It is assumed that 50% of emissions arising from EfW is biogenic in origin following the generally accepted UK industry baseline, although it is accepted that this figure could be conservative and is certainly subject to change.

Fermentation

Two factors are considered: firstly, the production of pure alcohol intended for use in beverages; and secondly, the ratio of CO2 to pure alcohol produced during fermentation.

 

Actual volumes of alcohol produced by specific breweries and distilleries are not publicly available. Hence, plant capacity data are used to estimate bio-CO2 emissions. Figures for the amount of pure alcohol produced at grain whisky distilleries in Scotland is derived from distillery capacity data and by applying a process capacity factor of 90%. Malt whisky production is similarly assessed, with the difference of applying a capacity factor of 75%, reflecting the smaller scale and less industrial nature of this production.

 

To estimate the ratio of CO2 to alcohol that is produced, the methodology assumes that fermentation of one molecule of glucose produces two molecules of ethanol and two molecules of CO2 in a 1:1 molar ratio. By adjusting this ratio for the molecular weights of ethanol (46g/mol) and CO2 (44g/mol), and for the density of ethanol (0.789kg/litre), it is determined that 0.755kg CO2 is produced per litre of pure ethanol.

Biogas and biomethane

Plant capacity data for AD biogas and biomethane upgrading are acquired from the NNFCC AD portal (NNFCC, 2023). This provides comprehensive information on the CHP generation capacity and biomethane injection capacity of AD biogas plants. Emissions are estimated assuming maximum capacity from generation capacity data, with a presumed capacity utilisation factor of 80% for AD plants – a high-capacity factor suggested by the NNFCC (2023).

For AD biogas combustion, emissions are calculated based on an assumed mid-range energy conversion efficiency of 37.5%. Efficiency is typically 35-40% for electricity and 40-45% for heat. A typical biogas composition with a CH4/CO2 ratio of 55:45 by volume is assumed. The methane energy content is presumed to be the higher heating value (HHV), 55.53 GJ/t, while gas densities were determined from values reported in the literature, 0.668 kg/m3.

Biomethane upgrading emissions are calculated using the same assumptions and sources as for biogas above but with a separate capacity factor of 47.7%. The calculations for biomethane upgrading provide two values: the first value is for the CO2 that is separated from the raw biogas, which would typically be discharged at the upgrading site. The second value is for the CO2 from the combustion of the upgraded biomethane, which would usually be released downstream where the biomethane is ultimately burnt. Only the CO2 discharged at the upgrading facility is within the scope of this study.

Landfill and sewage

CO2 emissions are calculated based on the installed capacity data for each plant over the period 2022-2023 (Ofgem, 2024a). Average Scottish capacity factors (DESNZ, 2024) are 33% for landfill gas and 53% for sewage gas. The same assumptions and methodology as outlined for biogas above are used for a landfill gas composition ratio of 50:50 of CH4/CO2 by volume.

Scotland’s bio-CO2 resource 2024-2035

The total amount of bio-CO2 in Scotland averages 3.7 Mtpa between 2027-2035 – Table J.1.These projections are based on facilities that are known to have reached at least the FID stage and they assume unchanged operational profiles based on the most recent publicly available data. Given Scotland and the UK’s ambitions for bioenergy, coupled with global forecasts for the sector (an annual growth rate of 3.56% is expected (CAGR 2024-2028) (Statista, 2024)), available volumes of bio-CO2 could increase.

Table J.1: Bio-CO2 forecast. The increase to 2027 is due to 6 new energy-from-waste plants coming online. The reduction post-2030 is due to Baldovie 1, an EfW plant, coming offline.

Year

2024

2025

2026

2027

2028

2029

2030

2031

2032

2033

2034

2035

Mtpa

3.15

3.38

3.64

3.72

3.72

3.72

3.72

3.68

3.68

3.68

3.68

3.68

Post-combustion adjustment factor

A minimum capture rate of 95% applies across all sources. This follows the UK Environment Agency Best Available Technique (BAT) (UK Environment Agency, 2021) guidance for post-combustion capture plants, although it should be noted that capture rates higher than 95% are achievable. High rates can be economically viable and are desirable from a climate mitigation perspective (Gibbins et al., 2024). For EfW, this can be as high as 99.72% with only a marginal cost penalty (Su et al., 2023). A 95% capture rate applies to biomethane upgrading facilities and distilleries. This is likely to be conservative for distillery capture, which achieves around 97% [9].

Appendix K North America

North America and the EU both enacted net zero by 2050 in 2021. Canada and the USA share similar 2030 ambitions to decarbonise by 40-to-50% from 2005 levels. This is much less ambitious than the EU (55%) and UK (68%) 2030 targets which are from 1990 levels. The USA and Canada saw peak annual emissions in the mid 2000s at 6 Gt and 0.8 Gt respectively, whereas the EU and UK emissions peaked at 5 Gt and 0.8 Gt in the early 1990s.

Carbon capture in North America is characterised by early regional movers but slow overall progress on storage. This has resulted in legislation to accelerate the deployment of CCS in response to the enacted net zero targets. The following section briefly reviews the region to highlight relevant projects and policy actions. As with Europe, the early regional projects have been vertically integrated and located in states and provinces strongly associated with fossil fuel extraction: Alberta, Saskatchewan, North Dakota, Louisiana, and Texas.

USA

In 2021, the Biden administration set a goal of 500 million tonnes of annual carbon abatement by 2050. The intermediate target is 85-170 million tonnes of annual carbon capture and storage by 2030. This new target is incentivised by the Infrastructure Investment and Jobs Act 2021 (IIJA) and Inflation Reduction Act 2022 (IRA). IIJA and IRA are intended to support investment decisions on 6 large commercial capture projects and 4 DAC hubs by 2030. The new incentives have created a rush for storage that has resulted in a bottleneck of Class VI permits applications for CO2 injection wells. As of April 2024, there are 128 applications under review, 56% of which were submitted in the previous 12 months. The EPA has issued 4 permits since 2010.

The IRA increases pre-existing credits under Section 45Q of the Internal Revenue Code from $50 to $85 per ton for CCS, and from $50 to $180 per ton for DAC with permanent storage. The 45Q tax credits expire after 12 years of operational capture and only apply to projects that begin construction before 2033. The credits are transferable between the capture entity and another entity, creating a carbon trading market.

In addition to 45Q, IIJA provides $12bn of funding for capture (30%), DAC hubs (30%), storage testing and validation (20%), transport infrastructure (17.5%), and 1% for storage permitting. The funds potentially reduce the CAPEX of large DAC and CCS projects by up to 75%.

In the USA, CO2 storage requires an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Class VI permit for an injection well under the federal Underground Injection Control (UIC) program[10]. States can apply for UIC primacy to expedite the licensing process. This may take years but transfers the primary enforcement authority from the EPA to the State. Only two States have been granted primacy. North Dakota applied for primacy in 2013 and was approved in 2018. Wyoming formally applied in 2019 and was approved in 2020, but that process was preceded by years of dialogue with EPA.

As of April 2024, the EPA have issued four Class VI permits, two of which are active, both at the Archer Daniels Midland ethanol plant, Illinois. For both, the time from application submission to issuance was three years, though the entire permitting process took around six years. There are currently 128 applications under review, 56% of which were submitted within the last 12 months.

Pursuant to the UIC program, EPA has promulgated regulations and established minimum federal requirements for six classes of injection wells (Class I to Class VI). Each well class is based on the type and depth of the injection activity and the potential for the injection activity to impact underground sources of drinking water.

In 2010, EPA established Class VI, the most recently created UIC well class, for wells used to inject CO2 into deep subsurface geologic formations for long-term underground storage—a process known as “geologic sequestration.” By comparison, Class II wells inject fluids associated with oil and natural gas production for enhanced oil recovery. Currently, there are approximately 180,000 active Class II wells but only two active Class VI wells in the United States as of 2022. 80% of Class II wells are used for enhanced oil recovery.

Thus, project proponents seeking to inject CO2 for permanent geologic sequestration must obtain a permit from EPA to drill and operate a Class VI well. A geologic sequestration project is defined by the extent of the area of review (AoR), which is the region surrounding the well where underground sources of drinking water may be impacted by the injection activity. A permit applicant must delineate the AoR to predict the movement of the injected CO2 and displaced fluids using a model that considers the geologic conditions and operations.

The permit application must present a detailed evaluation of site geology, the AoR, and how the modelling inputs reflect site-specific geologic and operational conditions, well construction design, plans to monitor the site, and other required activities. Permit applications are multifaceted and address all aspects of the geologic sequestration project to ensure that underground sources of drinking water are protected. They are comprehensive, and contain maps and cross sections, modelling results, water quality data, analyses of core samples and well logs, engineering schematics, and financial information.

All of the permit application information submitted and reviewed is interrelated, and the information collected to meet one requirement may inform or be informed by other submittals or analyses. Therefore, project proponents need to ensure that, collectively, all of the information submitted is consistent, supports a determination of site-suitability, and affords protection to underground sources of drinking water.

Appendix L Cost-revenue analysis

Cost of trucking

£20 per tonne estimate for 320 km round-trip from Carbon Capture Scotland Ltd.

A, annual 100,000 tonnes

P, payload 20 tonnes

L, distance 160 km

T, trip = 2L 320 km

N, trucks per day 16

D, drivers 16

F, fuel diesel 152 pence per litre

C, fuel consumption 33 litres per 100 km

B, fuel burn per km £0.50 per km

Cost per year of 16 trucks amortised over 10 years: £25,000 x 16 = £400,000

Cost of fuel at £0.50/km for one year: 100,000/20 x 320 x 0.5 = £800,000

Wages for 16 drivers over one year: 50,000 x 16 = £800,000

Total = £2,000,000

Cost per tonne for 100,000 tonne annual payload = £20

Cost of biomass capture

Based on the levelised cost analysis by Lehtveer & Emanuelsson (2021):

LCOC = ((CAPEX×CRF) / FLH​) + OPEXfix​ + OPEXvar​ + CFuel​ + CTransportation ​+ CStorage​ – CElectricity 

By neglecting the cost of electricity, and determining the transport and storage costs separately, the LCOC simplifies to the cost of capture: 

CCapture = (CAPEX×CRF)/FLH​ + OPEXfix​ + OPEXvar​ + CFuel 

 

  • CAPEX, capital expenditure €3.31 million per MW  
  • OPEXfix​, fixed operating expense €105,000 per MW per year  
  • OPEXvar, variable operating expense €2.1 per MWh  
  • CRF, Capital Recovery Factor CRF = (i*(1 + i)*n) / ((1 + i)*(n – 1)  
  • i, interest rate 5%
  • n, lifetime of the technology 40 years  
  • FLH, Full Load Hours 8000 hours per year 
  • CFuel,th , fuel cost for biomass €30 per MWhth   
  • Carbon intensity 0.4 tonne/MWhth   
  • η, plant efficiency 27% 

 

CRF = (0.05*(1+0.05)40) / ((1+0.05)40−1) = 0.0583   

 

CAPEX and OPEX

Annualized CAPEX: CAPEXannual = (CAPEX×CRF)​/FLH = 3.31×106 × 0.0583/8000 = 24.12 €/ MWh 

Fixed OPEX per MWh: OPEXfix = 105,000€/MW/FLH = 105,000/8000 = 13.125 €/MWh 

Total OPEX per MWh: OPEXtotal​ = OPEXfix​ + OPEXvar​ = 13.125+2.1 = 15.225 €/MWh 

 

Biomass energy needed to produce 1 MWh

Biomass input per MWh = 1 / η = 1/0.27 ≈ 3.7 MWhth / MWh electricity  

 

CO2 produced per MWh of electricity produced

CO2 per MWh = Biomass per MWh × carbon intensity = 3.7 × 0.4 = 1.48 tCO2 / MWh electricity  

 

Cost of fuel

CFuel = CFuel,th * Biomass per MWh = 30 *3.7 = 111 €/ MWh electricity 

 

Cost of capture for biomass combustion

CoCBECCS = CAPEXannual + OPEXtotal + CFuel = (24.12+15.225+111) = 150.345 €/MWh 

 

Cost of capture for biomass combustion

CCapture, Biomass = (CAPEXannual + OPEXtotal + CFuel) / CO2 per MWh = 150.345/1.48 = 101.58 €/ tCO2   

 

Total cost per tonne

  • /tCO2 = £86.50/tCO2 1 EUR = 0.851 GBP

Appendix M Sources inventory

Table M.1 Sources by sector; average bin size (ktpa), and potential number of capture units per site for all low-cost sites (NxU), assuming a unit is 3-5 ktpa.

8 x 1

N x U = Sites x Units, low-cost

(Nx U) = Sites x Units, high cost

 

 

 

ktpa

 

6

 

 

Biomass

7-360

 

– 6 –

 

  

 

 

 

 

6

 

 

 

 

Energy from Waste

38-158

 

6

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

– 6 –

7 x 2

 

 

 

AD Combustion

3-44

 

6

14

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

13

 

 

 

Distillery Wash

2-75

 

6

13

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

– 13 –

3 x 4

 

 

AD Upgrading

5-13

 

– 6 –

12

30

 

 

 

 

 

6

12

30

 

 

 

 

 

6

– 12 –

– 30 –

 

 

 

 

 

5

– 12 –

– 28 –

 

 

 

 

 

5

12

27

 

 

 

 

 

5

11

– 24 –

1 x 8

 

 

 

 

– 5 –

11

24

55

2 x 16

 

 

 

– 5 –

9

22

49

108

 

 

 

4

– 8 –

21

49

97

 

 

 

4

8

– 21 –

– 46 –

94

 

 

 

4

8

20

45

83

 

 

 

4

8

19

44

75

[6 x 32]

 

 

– 4 –

7

19

44

75

– 242 –

 

 

3

7

18

38

70

158

 

 

– 3 –

7

17

36

69

150

 

 

2

7

17

33

– 69 –

144

[2 x 64]

 

– 2 –

7

16

32

67

135

360

 

– 2 –

– 7 –

15

31

67

135

279

 

Ave: 5 ktpa

10 ktpa

20 ktpa

40 ktpa

80 ktpa

160 ktpa

320 ktpa

 

 

Table M.2: Sources by sector, location, road distance from nearest storage (km), process of capture, and annual potential capture rate (ktpa).

Biomass

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

F

1001

Markinch

KY7 5PZ

56.20017

-3.15669

10

Biomass

Combustion

360

S

1002

Croft

DG11 2SQ

55.15298

-3.38013

69

Biomass

Combustion

279

N

1003

Morayhill

IV2 7JQ

57.51775

-4.08378

151

Biomass

Combustion

242

G

1004

Cowie

FK7 7BQ

56.07768

-3.86212

74

Biomass

Combustion

150

C

1005

Caledonian

KA11 5AT

55.58462

-4.64174

112

Biomass

Combustion

144

C

1006

Liberty

ML1 1PU

55.78842

-3.98196

87

Biomass

Combustion

94

F

1007

Lochgelly

KY5 0HR

56.16862

-3.30545

18

Biomass

Combustion

69

N

1008

Speyside

AB38 9RX

57.49494

-3.20666

224

Biomass

Combustion

69

F

1009

Tarmac

EH42 1SL

55.98063

-2.47298

108

Biomass

Combustion

55

N

1010

Rothes

AB38 7BW

57.53307

-3.20761

225

Biomass

Combustion

46

F

1011

Guardbridge

KY16 0US

56.36482

-2.89013

38

Biomass

Combustion

36

H

1012

Acharn

FK21 8RA

56.44734

-4.34494

116

Biomass

Combustion

31

F

1013

Diageo

KY8 5RL

56.18953

-3.05583

9

Biomass

Combustion

30

C

1014

Egger

KA18 2LL

55.47011

-4.32728

98

Biomass

Combustion

30

N

1015

Balcas

IV18 0LT

57.70219

-4.15645

109

Biomass

Combustion

28

O

1016

Pulteney

KW1 5BA

58.43514

-3.08414

24

Biomass

Combustion

19

C

1017

Glennon

KA10 6DJ

55.54741

-4.68127

109

Biomass

Combustion

14

F

1018

Gleneagles

PH3 1NF

56.28626

-3.75079

64

Biomass

Combustion

7

EfW

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

C

1019

SCEC

G51 4SJ

55.86136

-4.35344

111

EfW Plant

Combustion

158

C

1020

Drumgray

ML6 7TD

55.90592

-3.94183

87

EfW Plant

Combustion

135

C

1021

Dunbar

EH42 1SW

55.97478

-2.46485

109

EfW Plant

Combustion

135

F

1022

Westfield

KY5 0HR

56.16993

-3.29276

21

EfW Plant

Combustion

108

G

1023

Earls Gate

FK3 8XG

56.01194

-3.73653

55

EfW Plant

Combustion

97

F

1024

Oldhall

KA11 5DG

55.59488

-4.64028

113

EfW Plant

Combustion

83

F

1025

Millerhill

EH22 1SX

55.92459

-3.08624

72

EfW Plant

Combustion

70

C

1026

GRREC

G42 0PJ

55.83439

-4.24446

101

EfW Plant

Combustion

67

E

1027

NESS

AB12 3BG

57.12652

-2.07786

73

EfW Plant

Combustion

67

F

1028

Baldovie 2

DD4 0NS

56.48495

-2.90174

53

EfW Plant

Combustion

49

G

1029

Levenseat

ML11 8TS

55.79743

-3.68852

73

EfW Plant

Combustion

45

F

1030

Baldovie 1

DD4 0NS

56.48495

-2.90174

53

EfW Plant

Combustion

44

C

1031

Binn

PH2 9PX

56.30246

-3.34516

33

EfW Plant

Combustion

38

Distillery

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

F

1032

Cameronbridge

KY8 5RL

56.18951

-3.0558

9

Distillery

Separation

75

A

1033

Girvan

KA26 9PT

55.25928

-4.83023

84

Distillery

Separation

75

F

1034

North British

EH11 2PX

55.93922

-3.23654

49

Distillery

Separation

49

C

1035

Strathclyde

G5 0QB

55.84846

-4.23995

102

Distillery

Separation

27

N

1036

Invergordon

IV18 0HP

57.69546

-4.16491

109

Distillery

Separation

24

G

1037

Starlaw

EH47 7BW

55.88934

-3.5785

59

Distillery

Separation

17

C

1038

Loch Lomond

G83 0TL

55.99241

-4.57636

126

Distillery

Separation

12

N

1039

Glenlivet

AB37 9DB

57.34351

-3.3376

231

Distillery

Separation

12

N

1040

Glenfiddich

AB55 4DH

57.45485

-3.12795

236

Distillery

Separation

12

          

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

N

1041

Macallan

AB38 9RX

57.48488

-3.20614

231

Distillery

Separation

8

A

1042

Ailsa Bay

KA26 9PF

55.26118

-4.83495

84

Distillery

Separation

7

N

1043

Glen Ord

IV6 7UJ

57.5223

-4.47397

139

Distillery

Separation

7

N

1044

Roseisle

IV30 5YP

57.66883

-3.47425

202

Distillery

Separation

6

N

1045

Dalmunach

AB38 7RE

57.45479

-3.30027

221

Distillery

Separation

6

N

1046

Teaninich

IV17 0XB

57.69154

-4.26051

114

Distillery

Separation

6

N

1047

Glenmorangie

IV19 1PZ

57.82658

-4.07743

88

Distillery

Separation

4

N

1048

Tomatin

IV13 7YT

57.34149

-4.01045

166

Distillery

Separation

3

N

1049

Speyburn

AB38 7AG

57.53646

-3.21595

225

Distillery

Separation

2

F

1050

Tullibardine

PH4 1QG

56.25815

-3.7851

123

Distillery

Separation

2

N

1051

Balmenach

PH26 3PF

57.32546

-3.53212

208

Distillery

Separation

2

Landfill

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

G

1052

Avondale

FK2 0YG

55.99067

-3.67843

51

Landfill

Combustion

32

C

1053

Greengairs

ML6 7TD

55.90502

-3.94501

87

Landfill

Combustion

20

F

1054

Dunbar

EH42 1SW

55.97169

-2.46156

109

Landfill

Combustion

19

C

1055

Greenoakhill

G71 7SQ

55.83865

-4.13733

94

Landfill

Combustion

15

E

1056

Stoneyhill

AB42 0PR

57.45897

-1.87237

36

Landfill

Combustion

12

C

1057

Cathkin

G73 3RE

55.78877

-4.1898

102

Landfill

Combustion

11

C

1058

Auchencarroch

G83 9EY

55.99891

-4.53778

127

Landfill

Combustion

11

C

1059

Garlaff

KA18 2RB

55.42964

-4.30544

93

Landfill

Combustion

8

C

1060

Oatslie

EH25 9QN

55.85126

-3.18402

64

Landfill

Combustion

7

F

1061

Kaimes

EH27 8EF

55.88372

-3.39556

52

Landfill

Combustion

7

F

1062

Binn

PH2 9PX

56.30514

-3.33799

34

Landfill

Combustion

6

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

F

1063

Lochhead

KY12 0RX

56.09775

-3.47311

29

Landfill

Combustion

6

C

1064

Auchinlea

ML1 5LR

55.80956

-3.90035

82

Landfill

Combustion

6

C

1065

Summerston

G23 5HD

55.9119

-4.27466

106

Landfill

Combustion

6

C

1066

Rigmuir

G75 0QZ

55.74302

-4.12468

105

Landfill

Combustion

6

C

1067

Shewalton

KA11 5DF

55.59493

-4.64203

113

Landfill

Combustion

5

F

1068

Cireco

KY15 7UL

56.2926

-3.13048

22

Landfill

Combustion

4

E

1069

Tramaud

AB23 8BQ

57.2111

-2.08733

62

Landfill

Combustion

4

Industrial

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

A

1070

Girvan

KA26 9PT

55.26386

-4.82595

85

Industrial

Combustion

44

F

1071

Cameronbridge

KY8 5RL

56.18953

-3.05583

9

Industrial

Combustion

33

N

1072

Portgordon

AB56 5BU

57.65558

-3.02453

231

Industrial

Combustion

30

N

1073

Glenfiddich

AB55 4DH

57.45601

-3.12411

236

Industrial

Combustion

21

E

1074

Brewdog

AB41 8BX

57.36964

-2.05049

43

Industrial

Combustion

21

B

1075

Charlesfield

TD6 0HH

55.56084

-2.65219

119

Industrial

Combustion

18

C

1076

GSK

KA11 5AP

55.59496

-4.62817

113

Industrial

Combustion

6

City Waste

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

C

1077

Polmadie

G42 0PJ

55.83434

-4.24477

101

City Waste

Combustion

24

C

1078

Energen

G67 3EN

55.92553

-4.05769

85

City Waste

Combustion

22

C

1079

Barkip

KA24 4JJ

55.71786

-4.65683

130

City Waste

Combustion

13

F

1080

Millerhill

EH21 8RZ

55.92612

-3.08608

71

City Waste

Combustion

9

F

1081

Lochhead AD

KY12 0RX

56.09775

-3.47311

29

City Waste

Combustion

7

C

1082

Deerdykes

G68 9NB

55.92671

-4.0568

85

City Waste

Combustion

6

          

Farming

         

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

F

1091

Inchdairnie

KY5 0UL

56.17697

-3.22284

14

Farming

Combustion

12

F

1092

Binn Farm

PH2 9PX

56.30482

-3.33923

34

Farming

Combustion

8

C

1093

Tambowie

G62 7HN

55.94956

-4.36302

114

Farming

Combustion

6

S

1094

West Roucan

DG1 3QG

55.09372

-3.5339

53

Farming

Combustion

6

N

1095

Wester Alves

IV30 8XD

57.64396

-3.45841

201

Farming

Combustion

5

S

1096

Crofthead

DG2 8QW

54.99901

-3.839

27

Farming

Combustion

3

Sewage

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

F

1097

Seafield

EH6 7RF

55.97112

-3.1444

53

Sewage

Combustion

16

E

1098

Nigg

AB12 3LT

57.13236

-2.06023

72

Sewage

Combustion

8

Upgrading

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

LOC

ID

Short name

Post code

Latitude

Longitude

km

Sector

Process

ktpa

A

1083

Girvan

KA26 9PT

55.26386

-4.82595

85

Upgrading

Separation

17

S

1084

Crofthead

DG2 8QW

54.99901

-3.839

27

Upgrading

Separation

13

N

1085

Glenfiddich

AB55 4DH

57.45601

-3.12411

236

Upgrading

Separation

13

N

1086

Portgordon

AB56 5BU

57.65558

-3.02453

231

Upgrading

Separation

5

F

1087

Bangley

EH41 3SN

55.96642

-2.82347

86

Upgrading

Separation

5

S

1088

Lockerbie

DG11 1LW

55.12065

-3.40844

64

Upgrading

Separation

5

F

1089

Keithick

PH13 9NF

56.5321

-3.29713

83

Upgrading

Separation

4

E

1090

Savock

AB41 6AL

57.31676

-2.04657

49

Upgrading

Separation

4

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024.


Prepared by SCCS on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions, or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.


  1. Note that this estimate does not include associated costs such as financing and contingency.



  2. Note that at the time of going to press the Stenlille storage permit has not been issued.



  3. All NSTA licenses continue to be issued by the OGA as a legal entity under the Energy Act 2008.



  4. Storage appraisals are regulated by the CCS Directive 2009, transposed to UK law in 2012.



  5. Licenses CS001 and CS002 were both issued by the OGA under the Energy Act 2008.





  6. The HSE-OPRED MoU is a relatively brief document, available at: www.hse.gov.uk/agency-agreements-memoranda-of-understanding-concordats/assets/docs/opred-hse.pdf



  7. Data for the Cowie and Morayhill biomass facilities came directly from the operator, West Fraser (formerly Norbord). Personal communication with Nick Fedo, General Manager (March 2023).



  8. 95-96% CO2 from biogas using membrane technology and sending the CO2 stream straight to CO2 recovery. The 4-5% loss occurs during the purification of CO2 in the recovery stage. Personal communication with Richard Nimmons, Carbon Capture Scotland (March 2023).



  9. www.mayerbrown.com: storage-class-vi-wells-and-us-state-primacy


Research completed: February 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4549

Executive summary

There is a need to decarbonise our heating sources to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. Switching from fossil fuel-based technology, such as gas and oil, to low-carbon electricity is a significant step in this process.

To achieve Scotland’s emissions reduction targets, the number of zero direct emissions heating systems (ZDEH) installed, such as heat pumps, needs to increase.

Social landlords have begun taking steps to improve the energy efficiency of the homes they rent out and to meet standards set by the Scottish Government, such as the second milestone of the Energy Efficiency Standard for Social Housing (EESSH2). In recent years, their work has included a rising number of ZDEH projects.

Aims

This research has developed a series of case studies to support social landlords in their delivery of future ZDEH projects. The learnings from this report and the associated case studies seek to encourage social landlords to deliver more decarbonisation projects, and support the delivery of Scottish Government’s net zero targets.

Findings

The findings may not be fully representative as they only relate to eight case studies.

The majority of the case studies installed air source heat pumps. Most social landlords were confident in writing funding applications.

  • Engaging with tenants throughout the project is important to delivery, and seeing the new heating system in person can increase tenant confidence.
  • Delivering at least one building as a pilot helps identify and address any challenges. This engagement needs to continue after the installation as new heating systems may not be intuitive to use and require behaviour change; supporting tenants with this is important in achieving tenant satisfaction.
  • Key considerations to project planning were overlooked by some landlords, resulting in challenges, delays and/or unforeseen costs. These included: unexpected costs in relation to gas meter removals, changes to the built environment required for planning permission and upgrades to the electricity grid required for solar panels.
  • All of the case studies aimed to increase affordability for residents. However, the energy crisis has made impact on affordability difficult to assess. Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) ratings improved across all projects, with the majority of properties achieving an EPC B or C rating post-installation[1]. Overall, there was limited data to quantify the impact of the new heating systems, but landlords reported that anecdotally tenants feel positive about their new heating system.

Lessons for future social housing heating projects

Some lessons for social landlords:

  • Tenant engagement: Consider a mixed-method approach to engage and support a range of residents, such as face-to-face events, ongoing support and opportunities to see and use the technology in-situ.
  • Impact evaluation: This should be planned from the outset of the project to truly understand the impact of the project on tenants, its success in achieving its aims and how it might be improved for next time. The methodology should provide a before and after picture, and include temperature and humidity assessments, energy consumption data and EPC data.
  • Multiple buildings: In projects involving large or multiple buildings, delivering at least one building as a pilot helps identify and address any challenges. Rolling the installations out in one building helps to reduce disruption and focus tenant support.
  • Project management and costs: If you plan to procure a project manager, involving them from the outset means that they can support with application writing. It should be noted that there may be a cost to this, which should be taken into account. Consider aspects such as planning permission requirements, meter changes and electricity grid upgrades at an early stage to avoid unexpected costs. 

Glossary / Abbreviations table

ABS

Area Based Schemes

EESSH

Energy Efficiency Standard for Social Housing. When the EESSH was introduced in March 2014 it set a first milestone for social landlords to meet for social rented homes by 31 December 2020. A second milestone (EESSH2) was confirmed in June 2019, for social rented houses to meet by December 2032.

EPC

Energy Performance Certificate

Housing Revenue Account

A ring-fenced account which is separate from the council’s General Fund. The account is for income and expenditure relating to the management and maintenance of the council’s housing stock

LCITP

Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme

SHNZHF

Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund

ZDEH

Zero Direct Emissions Heating

Introduction

Importance of decarbonisation

Greenhouse gas emissions from Scotland’s homes account for 13% of the total emissions in Scotland. The Heat in Buildings Strategy sets out the Scottish Government’s commitments both to decarbonise heating and to remove poor energy efficiency as a driver of fuel poverty.

In Scotland, 23% of domestic dwellings are social housing. The social housing sector has shown strong leadership on improving fabric energy efficiency, with the aim of supporting tenants to reduce their energy bills and contributing to carbon savings. However, to achieve net zero targets, the installation of zero direct emissions heating systems (ZDEH) such as heat pumps, is also needed.

Research aims

The research reviewed case studies to assist landlords in their planning for meeting the standard that will replace EESSH2.[2] The case studies show how various measures, including a change in the heating system, can improve the energy efficiency of their dwellings.

The learnings identified in this report and the associated case studies seek to:

  • Encourage social landlords across Scotland to deliver more decarbonisation projects in their housing stock;
  • Improve delivery of domestic decarbonisation projects, especially in the social housing sector, by building on existing learnings and solutions;
  • Support the delivery of the Scottish Government’s net zero targets.

Method overview

Local Authorities and Housing Associations were approached in equal measure to provide case studies. However, in the research time available, only one Local Authority was able to commit. Furthermore, while many council-led decarbonisation projects exist many of them were out of scope of this research, either due to their focus on new build homes or because the projects were not yet complete. Additionally, some councils no longer have social housing.

Therefore, the higher ratio of Housing Associations to Local Authorities in this report should not be taken as evidence of a greater or lesser willingness to participate in decarbonisation projects from parts of the sector. Lessons are relevant across all social landlords.

The methodology is summaries in figure 1.

Overview of case studies

Eight case studies were selected from a range of social housing projects across Scotland:

  • Angus Housing Association ‘Kirkbank Renewable Heat Project’ delivered 32 air source heat pumps in a mix of private and social rented housing to replace inefficient storage heaters. Solar photovoltaic (PV) panels and electricity storage batteries were also installed. The project took place between 2018 and 2022.
  • Grampian Housing Association ‘Mackenzie Gardens’ Zero Emission Heating Project’ installed three commercial air source heat pumps, creating a heat network servicing 17 flats and three terraced houses. The project took place between 2021 and 2023.
  • Hebridean Housing Partnership ‘Hebridean Heat Pumps Project’ installed air source heat pumps in a wide range of archetypes across 102 of their social rented properties. For three householders, this replaced solid fuel heat sources. The project took place between 2022 and 2023.
  • Maryhill Housing Association ‘North-west Glasgow Replacement Heating Project’ installed 266 air source heat pumps into 11 seven-storey housing blocks. Their aim was to contribute towards their net zero targets whilst offering tenants a more affordable alternative to the existing electric storage heaters. The project took place between 2018 and 2021.
  • North Lanarkshire Council ‘Lorne Gardens Air Source Heat Pumps Project’ installed air source heat pumps in 20 properties in a retirement housing complex. This also included cavity wall insulation for some of the properties. The project took place in 2021.
  • Osprey Housing ‘Moray and Aberdeenshire Heat Pumps 2021 Project’ installed air source heat pumps in 61 properties, accounting for 20% of their off-gas housing stock. This was to provide a cost-effective alternative to the electric storage heating that had been used in the properties previously. The project took place between 2020 and 2022.
  • Queens Cross Housing Association ‘Regeneration of Cedar Multistorey Flats in Woodside Project’ delivered a number of retrofit upgrades to a newly acquired tower block. This included an electric wet central heating system as their new form of zero direct emissions heating. Options appraisals began in 2012, with project delivery taking place between 2016 and 2023.
  • Rural Stirling Housing Association ‘Old Kirk Loan and Craigmore View Heat Replacement Programme’ replaced older storage heaters with air source heat pumps in 40 properties, alongside installing solar PV panels and electricity storage batteries. This was to ensure that the properties met the requirements of EESSH2. The project took place between 2021 and 2022.

About this report

This report provides an overview of the above case studies. It gives social landlords a summary of the key challenges and successes experienced and draws lessons for future projects. The report should not be viewed as a comprehensive piece of research into the experiences of social landlords in delivering zero direct emissions heating projects, as it does not include sufficient numbers of projects to draw any wider conclusions.

Context

Scottish decarbonisation targets and policies

Heat in Buildings Bill and Strategy

The Scottish Government is currently consulting on a Heat in Buildings Bill with proposals on legislation covering energy efficiency standards and heating system requirements. This bill follows on from the 2019 Heat in Buildings Strategy, which outlines how Scotland will reduce greenhouse gas emissions from buildings and remove poor energy performance as a driver of fuel poverty. Since homes and buildings account for a significant portion of Scotland’s greenhouse gas emissions, the Bill is important in achieving Scotland’s statutory emissions target of net zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2045. The Bill will provide a regulatory framework that will drive the development of heat networks, the adoption of zero emission heating systems, and improved standards of energy efficiency.

The Heat in Buildings Strategy sets out the changes required to ensure Scotland’s buildings no longer contribute to climate change. As part of the support package to deliver the strategy, the Scottish Government has committed to invest £1.8 billion in heat and energy efficiency over the lifetime of the parliament. This includes the £200 million allocated to projects through the Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund.

Energy efficiency standards for social housing

As part of the Heat in Buildings Strategy, the Scottish Government has established targets to improve the energy efficiency of social housing. The purpose of the standard is to encourage landlords to improve the energy efficiency of social housing in Scotland.

EESSH was originally introduced in 2014 and set an initial target for social landlords to meet by the end of 2020. This meant that no eligible social property in Scotland was to be lower than EPC band C or D by the end of 2020.

EESSH2 was established in 2019. It specified that all social housing must meet EPC band B, or be as energy efficient as practicably possible, by the end of December 2032. It also stated that no social housing below EPC band D should be re-let from December 2025, subject to temporary specified exemptions. At the time of writing, EESSH2 has been under review to realign the standard with net zero targets, and the 2032 milestone has been put on hold.

In November 2023, the Scottish Government launched a consultation on a new Social Housing Net Zero Standard, which will replace EESSH2. The proposed new standard includes a minimum fabric efficiency rating and would introduce a requirement to replace polluting heating systems with clean alternatives by 2045. Energy efficiency target ranges and interim target years have been proposed but are yet to be decided.

EPC reform

Improving energy efficiency is an important aspect of the Scottish Government’s decarbonisation and fuel poverty strategies, and EPCs are the most widely used tool for assessing the energy efficiency of properties. A number of issues with the current EPC methodology have been raised in recent years. These include that the current main metric is a cost efficiency rating which does not adequately incentivise the building and heating system improvements necessary to meet net zero targets.[3]

As set out in the Heat in Buildings Strategy, the Scottish Government is progressing work on the reform of EPCs.[4] A consultation on this topic closed in October 2023. The reform proposes to introduce new metrics that, among other things, separate out fabric efficiency and cost, and carbon emissions. The Government is also exploring options for the inclusion of energy use data to make EPCs more accurate and consistent (research by Changeworks, forthcoming). The reform will impact how buildings are assessed to ensure that they comply with Scottish regulations.

Retrofit programmes for social housing

This is a list of current and closed retrofit programmes for social housing and how the funds operate. Most of the case studies accessed one of these funding streams.

Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund

The Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund (SHNZHF) is an ongoing Scottish Government programme that supports the decarbonisation of social housing in Scotland. Funding is given to social landlords to install energy efficient zero emissions heating systems in their housing stock. The fund has £200 million available up to 2026.[5]

Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (Closed 2020)

The Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (LCITP) was a partnership between the Scottish Government and a range of other enterprise organisations and experts. The aim was to support Scotland’s transition to a low-carbon economy. This involved providing financial support to assist the development and delivery of low-carbon projects. The focus was to assist projects that would secure public and private finance to demonstrate innovative low carbon technology in Scotland. As part of this, financial support was made available to some social landlords delivering zero direct emissions heating projects.[6]

Area Based Schemes

The Area Based Schemes (ABS)[7] is a programme developed by the Scottish Government. It provides grant funding to local authorities to develop and deliver energy efficiency programmes, including measures such as insulation, solar PV and batteries, and air source heat pumps: “This funding is blended with owner’s contributions and funding from Registered Social Landlords who may choose to insulate their homes at the same time”.[8]

Scotland’s Heat Network Fund

Launched in 2022, Scotland’s Heat Network Fund makes £300 million available to applicants from the public and private sector to support the roll-out of large-scale heat networks in Scotland.[9] The Heat Network Support Unit (HNSU)[10] supports pre-capital stages of heat network development.

Other financing options/models

See section 11.2 for other previous funding that shaped the retrofit project landscape over the past 10 years.

Case study aims and motivations

Scotland’s buildings need to decarbonise. The case studies examined in this research demonstrate a range of approaches to how this can be achieved. They also display the many different motivations that underpin the choice to take action on specific buildings.

One of the key priorities present throughout all of the case studies was increasing affordability for residents. In six of the eight case studies, the previous heating system was electric storage heaters, which are known to be both expensive in their operation and can make it difficult to maintain a comfortable temperature. Complaints from residents about high energy costs motivated several of the social landlords to install new heating systems. Two of the landlords had carried out surveys which found that many tenants were unhappy with their existing heating systems.

One housing association noted that in moving from storage heaters, which are controlled room by room, to a central heating system would provide greater comfort for residents.

The decision to install air source heat pumps also related to regulatory requirements for housing associations. While both EESSH2 and EPCs are undergoing review and reform (see sections 4.1.2 and 4.1.3), many social landlords have begun the work needed to bring their housing stock to EPC band B.

For some, the presence of funding was a motivating factor which aligned with other priorities. As one social landlord expressed:

“We had access to funding, it was the right thing to do for the tenants and for the EESSH targets.”

Hebridean Housing Partnership, who have been installing heat pumps in their properties since 2011, described their main driver as “getting ahead of the curve” and making the most of the available funding to install as many heat pumps as possible.

Wider organisation-established goals related to net zero and decarbonisation also factored in, though generally not as highly as the other priorities. One Housing Association, whose project was the only case study that changed the heating systems from gas central heating, did so as part of their goal of being net zero, and they had a clear strategy:

“We wanted to get tenants on board with the idea of decarbonisation. We wanted it to be a positive experience that we could then sell to the rest of our tenants, because that’s the journey we’re on – [we have] committed to being net zero by 2035.”

Their priority was to demonstrate that switching to electric heating does not have to impact people financially, and thus set a positive example which would help deliver more projects in the future.

Overall, the social landlords expressed an awareness and concern for their tenants’ limited income, and some said that this is holding them back from switching on-gas properties to zero direct emissions heating systems.

Key findings: Project planning

Funding and project costs

Six of the eight social landlords we spoke to had received funding from the Social Housing Net Zero Heat Fund (SHNZHF) or the Low Carbon Infrastructure Transition Programme (LCITP). Two social landlords had not applied for Scottish Government funding. One of these was Queen’s Cross Housing Association, who had their project funded through a second stage stock transfer, and whose project began before Government funding became available in 2015. The other, North Lanarkshire Council, found there was no specific retrofit funding available for local authorities when they started the project in 2021, before the launch of the SHNZHF. Instead, their project was funded from their Housing Revenue Account.

Applications

Many found that the process of applying for funding was straightforward, and they were confident that they could do this themselves. Several social landlords found that a key to success was to demonstrate a robust tenant engagement strategy and to focus on the benefits for the householders. As one housing association representative said:

“I have found that Scottish Government are quite good at caring more about what the project is trying to achieve, than focusing too much on the language.”

To help develop their applications, one social landlord consulted with specialists to get figures for expected carbon savings. Another social landlord explained that they considered the application complex and found it useful to partner with a consultant. One social landlord, who used a consultant to write their proposal, has since found that some contractors are willing to include consultancy and application writing in the contract.

One social landlord found that the wait time to get funding confirmation was too long. Despite being ready to go ahead with installations in April, the funding was not confirmed until August of the same year. This caused delays in the timeline that had already been agreed with the contractor.

Internal staff costs

When speaking to the social landlords, we found that most did not consider internal staff costs as a part of the total project cost. When considering the full cost of retrofit, landlords may wish to consider the time and cost not directly related to installation of measures, such as applications, tenant engagement and support provided by their own staff. In the absence of this information, it makes it difficult to get a sense of the full cost of this work and how it varies across the projects.

Key findings

  • Most social landlords felt confident about writing the funding applications.
  • Some social landlords found it helpful to have a third party involved in writing the funding application or in calculating anticipated carbon savings.
  • Staff costs related to tenant engagement were typically considered outside of the project costs and therefore their relative contribution was difficult to quantify.

Heating system considerations


6


domestic air source heat pumps



1


commercial air source heat pump network



1


electric wet central heating system


Figure 2: Heating systems chosen

Several factors influenced which Zero Direct Emissions Heating (ZDEH) system was chosen for the projects. These factors included:

  • The type, condition, and location of the properties
  • The available funding
  • The priorities for the landlord

Air source heat pumps were the most common heating system choice across the case studies. In seven of the eight case studies, most properties had electric storage heating prior to the project installations.

Two projects included some properties using solid fuel, and one project switched the heating system away from gas central heating.

Comparing heat pumps and electric storage heaters

Both air source heat pumps and electric storage heaters fall under the category of Zero Direct Emissions Heating (ZDEH) systems since both run on electricity. Electricity is a less carbon intensive fuel type compared to other heating fuels (e.g. gas and oil). However, the efficiency of an air source heat pump is higher since it uses the latent heat energy in the air outside, resulting in more heat per unit of energy inputted.

Cost and affordability

Cost was a key factor across the case studies. Three of the social landlords considered ground source heat pumps, but the high cost of this solution led them to choose air source heat pumps instead. In one of these cases, there were also limitations related to the composition of the soil and the distance between the buildings, which made ground source heat pumps and district heating nonviable.

Air source heat pumps were preferred in most of the case studies as a more affordable and energy efficient heating solution. Though heat pumps are more expensive to install than electric storage heaters, they are cheaper to run for residents due to higher efficiency, resulting in higher EPC ratings (see Box 1). They are also an increasingly common and well-understood heating system and meet the SHNZHF criteria of having the potential to deliver a significant reduction in greenhouse gas emissions.

One project, delivered by Grampian Housing Association, installed three commercial air source heat pumps to supply 20 properties via a heat network. The key motivation was to increase efficiency and reduce heating costs for the residents. This was further achieved by also installing solar PV and battery storage.

One case study did not install a heat pump-based system. Air source heat pumps had been a desired option but there were not funds available for this after carrying out the prioritised fabric-first upgrades. Government funding was not available at the time to subsidise the measures, therefore electric wet central heating was chosen as a cheaper alternative.

Supply chain

Of the eight case studies, most of the social landlords did not highlight issues relating to the supply chain, however there were two exceptions to this. These landlords reported project delays due to material shortages and noted that many contractors at the time were struggling with supplies of heat pumps.

Maintenance and repairs

Two of the eight case studies referenced maintenance and repairs as a consideration in their choice of technology. They expressed concerns that eventual repairs of the air source heat pumps might be more expensive than the previous gas boilers and electric storage heaters. One social landlord explained that some of their concerns had been realised when some of their air source heat pumps began to develop faults. As a whole-house heating system, rather than a room heater as previously installed (with storage heaters), this was more expensive and challenging to deal with. In one case, a resident had to be relocated for three weeks while their heat pump was replaced.

The same landlord said that they also had worries regarding:

  • Availability of organisations offering maintenance services due to the rurality of their area.
  • Tenants’ understanding of air source heat pump controls, which it was felt could lead to a higher instance of faults and repairs required.

Planning permission

Two of the case studies experienced challenges that related to planning permissions. In the case of one project, some of the flats were required to have freestanding platforms built for the heat pumps in order to get planning permission. They felt that the platforms would negatively impact the aesthetics of the buildings, so these flats were removed from the project and other properties were included instead.

However, this was not possible for another social landlord for whom planning permission was a major obstacle to project delivery. Concerns had been raised over potential noise from the commercial air source heat pumps, which were close to other private properties. This delayed the project by a year and resulted in the housing association having to pay for sound consultants and the building of a sound box around the heat pump.

Key findings

  • Air source heat pumps are the most common ZDEH choice among the case studies.
  • High cost was the main reason why ground source heat pumps were not chosen for many of the projects.
  • Planning permission needs to be taken into consideration from the outset, as this can result in changes or delays to projects.

Building types

The eight case studies included a wide range of properties built between 1950 and 2008, with the majority from the 1960s, 1990s, and early 2000s. Building types included multi-storey blocks, cottage flats (or four-in-a-blocks), bungalows, and terraced houses. In many cases, the buildings had already received fabric improvements such as external wall insulation, cavity wall insulation, and loft insulation, reducing heat loss enough to make air source heat pumps a viable option. In some cases, fabric improvements took place as part of the projects alongside ZDEH installations.

Most of the case studies encompassed buildings of a similar type and age, which meant that challenges associated with particular building types did not arise. The exception to this was the Hebridean 100 project, which included a wide variety of building types and ages. Despite this, Hebridean Housing Partnership did not report any challenges associated with the installations.

Maryhill Housing Association was able to install individual air source heat pumps in their seven-storey blocks by utilising the drying areas inside the buildings. A similar solution is unlikely to be available in other multi-storey blocks, but other alternatives exist, such as a shared air source heat pump system.[11]

Pilot projects

Multiple social landlords spoke positively about testing the proposed measures on one pilot building before carrying out installations in the rest of the buildings.

In one of the projects, air source heat pumps had already been installed in one block of flats before the landlord applied for funding for the remaining blocks. Another landlord, who did not take this approach, expressed that, in hindsight, it would have been beneficial, even if it had resulted in increased project costs and timelines. In particular, for projects with several large buildings, it was felt that piloting the installations in one building could help make the process smoother and less disruptive for the tenants.

Key findings

  • ZDEH systems were installed across many different building types; none of the social landlords reported challenges associated with particular building archetypes.
  • In projects involving large buildings, social landlords indicated that it is helpful to deliver at least one building as a pilot building, to better understand what challenges arise.

Impact evaluation

The aim of impact evaluation in the context of a retrofit project is to establish to what extent the aims of the project have been achieved, i.e. to provide evidence of the changes that have taken place as a result of the measures installed. The case studies show a wide variety of approaches to evaluating the impact of the projects. Overall, very little data is currently available either because it has not been collected or because collection is still ongoing. As a result, limited conclusions can be drawn on the outcomes of the projects. Despite this, the different approaches provide insights into the challenges and considerations relating to evaluation work. This section outlines the data that was collected. For a discussion on the findings of the evaluation work see section 8.1.

Data collection

Different aims and motivations (see section 5) affected what evaluation data was collected. EPCs were the form of data most commonly collected across the case studies. For the case studies that emphasised the importance of regulatory compliance, EPCs were considered the main focus of the evaluation work. Improvement in EPC ratings may reflect changes beyond the heating system, including the installation of other energy efficiency measures.

Pre- and post-install surveys were carried out by some of the social landlords, but in most cases, the response rates were low. This limits the ability to carry out a full impact evaluation.

Three projects have been collecting temperature and humidity data via sensors. This data is being collected over a period of at least 12 months to cover weather changes throughout the year, and the collection is still ongoing for two of the projects.

None of the case studies had energy bills or meter reading data that could be included in this research. This data can only be provided by the tenants, which makes it difficult to collect consistently across multiple properties. One social landlord navigated this challenge by collecting data during the annual heat pump servicing. This comprised heat pump and electricity meter readings as well as a satisfaction survey.

Usefulness of data

The social landlords had different perspectives on the importance and usefulness of collecting impact evaluation data. One social landlord explained that data collection was not a high priority on their project since they were confident that heat pumps were a viable option, having collected more evaluation data on previous projects. They highlighted the obvious benefits of heat pumps compared to other forms of electric heating. This landlord noted that future projects where properties are changing from gas central heating to heat pumps will likely require more impact evaluation work to ensure the change does not impact the residents negatively.

Another social landlord explained that collecting impact evaluation data was not a high priority for their limited resources and viewed this type of data as more beneficial to the Scottish Government than to the housing association and their tenants. On smaller projects, some of the social landlords felt that they knew what they needed to know from verbal feedback from their tenants. A majority of the social landlords in the case studies shared positive but anecdotal feedback from their tenants and considered a lack of complaints as a positive indicator.

Different factors drive these perspectives. Planning and delivering robust impact evaluation requires staff time, skills, knowledge, equipment, and funding. It also requires the foresight to plan in advance of the project to gather the necessary pre-installation data. This is particularly challenging since resources are limited for many social landlords. With time restrictions on meeting energy efficiency targets, EPCs become a key focus for many social landlords since it is how their performance is measured.

Key findings

  • Social landlords prioritised impact evaluation to different degrees.
  • EPCs are the most consistently available source of data across the case studies.
  • Some social landlords carried out tenant satisfaction surveys, but overall response rates were low.
  • Three case studies collected comprehensive data including from sensors, but for two projects data collection is not yet complete.

Key findings: Project delivery

Tenant engagement

The social landlords displayed care and experience in engaging with their tenants before and during the installation works. There were several different strategies taken, including:

  • Carrying out pre-installation surveys
  • Employing tenant liaison officers
  • Demonstrating the heating system
  • Hosting tenant engagement sessions

Tenant project approval

Some of the projects started from the point of tenants being unhappy with their existing heating system. Two of the social landlords surveyed their tenants and found concerns about heating and affordability.

Another landlord hired a consultant to carry out a phone survey with tenants, which focused on attitudes towards decarbonisation and climate change. The results showed that tenants were concerned about climate change and, as a result, were on board with the decarbonisation plans but were mainly concerned about the disruption of the work. The consultant also provided a liaison officer responsible for dialogues with the tenants.

“We didn’t want to just spring [the project] on them. They felt like they were being taken on that [decarbonisation] journey and that they were being listened to.” Social landlord

A common strategy across the social landlords was to organise tenant engagement sessions, typically hosted in local community spaces. For most of the larger-scale projects, information was sent out in letters and on their websites, while smaller-scale projects were able to have one-to-one conversations with residents about the benefits and cost savings of the projects.

One of the larger projects involving several hundred properties found that they were unable to get in touch with some of the tenants, despite multiple attempts to make contact through letters and via housing officers. Conversely, another landlord found that since their tenants already knew they wanted a heat pump, few turned up to the consultation events.

Example flats

Several social landlords found that demonstrating the new heating system helped their tenants to feel more confident about the installation.

In one of the projects, the heat pump installer and manufacturer attended tenant engagement days, where they displayed the heat pumps and how they operated. The housing association found it helpful that information was provided by a third party, rather than from themselves as the landlord.

By chance, Grampian Housing Association had a void property that they decided to use as a space to demonstrate the installations that would be carried out. This helped tenants understand how the commercial air source heat pump network would work. Such heating system demonstrations were also helpful to residents who did not speak English as their first language.

Mixed tenure

The main focus of all eight case studies was on social housing tenants. Three of the projects also included buildings containing some privately owned properties. Of these, two included large building blocks.

In these case studies, private owners were hesitant to be involved due to the costs of installation. In one project, all five owner-occupiers declined to have air source heat pumps installed on the grounds of cost. In another project, external building works were completed for all properties, including the privately owned ones, but they declined any internal work, which would have been at their own expense.

Budget

Most of the case studies did not have a specific budget for tenant engagement, and the social landlords absorbed most of the tenant engagement costs as staff costs. As a result, the cost of tenant engagement was largely unknown in most instances.

There were two exceptions where external tenant liaison officers were used. Grampian Housing Association had this work carried out by an external consultant, and North Lanarkshire Council had a basic level of tenant engagement included it as part of the work carried out by the contractor who carried out the installations.

Key findings

  • The social landlords had many different and often creative ways of engaging with tenants.
  • Seeing the new heating system in person before installation can help residents feel more confident about the project.
  • Some social landlords found it beneficial to have a third-party organisation involved in the dialogues with tenants or in demonstrating the heating system.
  • Mixed-tenure projects remain a challenge. There were no examples of projects which resulted in the installation of ZDEH systems in privately owned properties.

Heating system installation

Location of heating system

The installation of air source heat pumps could present challenges related to the location of the heat pump and its pipework. Due to the layout of the properties, the multi-storey flats in Maryhill Housing Association ended up with significant pipework going across the walls of the properties, which some residents have been unhappy about. The social landlords felt that, on reflection, a better solution would have been to put the pipework under the floors, or at floor level so they are not in the line of sight.

There are also circumstances where the installer and the resident may have different opinions about the optimal location for the heating system. For example, the space selected by contractors might already be used by residents for storage or drying. Some social landlords navigated those situations by installing additional storage space or by paying the contractor the extra cost of placing the heating system elsewhere in the home.

In one of the projects, some of the new water tanks had to be put in a different location to the old ones due to size differences. In these cases, storage space was installed where the old water tank cupboard was located. Actions or adjustments such as these resulted in higher levels of satisfaction from the residents.

Redecoration

Three of the case studies mentioned the need for redecoration of the properties after the new heating system installations, and these cases provided some form of decoration allowance for tenants. These costs cannot be funded as part of grant schemes, and so would have been covered by the social landlords.

One of the social landlords reported that residents were unhappy with the impacts on the property after installation, such as lines where the carpet had been cut when new radiators had been fitted. The landlord gave an allowance for carpet replacements but not for other costs, under the reasoning that some things, such as wallpaper, had been installed at the tenant’s own risk.

Another of the social landlords who had provided a decoration allowance, said they would do this differently in future projects. They had found that the decoration allowance, which was given as cash, was sometimes spent on other things besides redecorating the property.

Unexpected costs

Several of the case studies experienced costs related to the project that they had not been able to plan for. These were different in each of the cases and are highlighted here to inform future projects.

Gas meter removal

Grampian Housing Association experienced a challenge around meters after installing commercial heat pumps. It turned out that the energy supplier charged a high cost for the removal of the gas meters. This was important because without the removal, standing charges were building up for the tenants. The housing association found that this cost could not be covered by the funding. Since removal is charged per meter, this led to a significant extra cost. Grampian Housing Association was the only case study that previously had gas heating and therefore was the only case to encounter this issue.

Grid infrastructure

In one rural property, the social landlord encountered a challenge around connecting the solar PV and battery storage to the electricity grid. The Distribution Network Operator sought a significant financial contribution to improve the infrastructure of the local electricity network to enable the connection. The issue of who will pay this cost has not yet been resolved.

Planning permission

Grampian Housing Association experienced a significant additional cost to install an acoustic enclosure around their commercial air source heat pumps to address the planners’ concerns about potential noise levels. Since they did not expect this cost at the start of the project, it was not covered by the grant funding. This issue also caused significant project delays.

Key findings

Examples of areas that may incur costs include:

  • Gas meter removal
  • Changes to the built environment required for planning permission
  • Improvements to the electricity grid when installing solar PV

Key findings: Post project

Tenant support

Metering

It is often necessary to change the meter when a new heating system has been installed, and this proved to be a challenge in several of the case studies. Many of the properties had had electric storage heating with a dual rate electricity meter, which has lower rates at night when the heater is charging but higher costs during the day. Changing to an air source heat pump required having a single rate meter installed, to avoid disproportionately high costs for heating the home during the day.

Since energy accounts are a matter between householder and supplier, residents have to contact the supplier individually to request a meter change. This can be a slow and difficult process[12].

After their tenants had experienced these challenges, one social landlord contacted the company that supplied the majority of the properties to facilitate quicker installation of smart meters. In a different project, the contractor supported tenants in-person to speak with their supplier and ensure they got the correct meter. This was beneficial for both the residents and the housing association.

Using the new heating system

A common challenge with air source heat pumps was enabling residents to use them correctly and efficiently. Heat pumps work best when they maintain a constant temperature. This is different from gas boilers. which are typically operated for a few hours at a time, giving a shorter burst of heat, or storage heaters which heat up overnight and gradually release this heat during the day. One social landlord felt that they needed to shift residents’ mindsets around how and when to heat their homes.

Some of the social landlords made different heating controls available to support tenants in controlling their heating. In one project, this took the form of an app. The landlord explained that the app makes it is easier to adjust the temperature than the heat pump controls. This enables householders to set the temperature to be slightly lower when they are not in the house, and warmer when they are at home. The downside is that some demographics, especially older residents, may be unable to use the app, due to lack of access to a smartphone or the internet, or challenges with IT literacy.

In two of the case studies, the social landlords did not have dedicated resources to support their tenants in how to use the heat pumps efficiently. In one of the cases, a third party had been contracted to carry out tenant support for both meter change and use of the system, but for unclear reasons it did not go ahead. As a result, the social landlord is in the process of carrying out engagement, which is ongoing.

Key findings

  • Meter changes can be more challenging and time consuming than expected, and difficult for some tenants to undertake without support.
  • For many households, a new heating system may not be intuitive and require getting used to a very different way of heating the home.
  • Ensuring ease of use of the new heating system for tenants is likely to result in higher levels of satisfaction.

Project results

As discussed in section 6.5, the available impact evaluation data is limited due to either not having been collected or collection not yet being complete. This section gives an overview of the high-level outcomes across the projects, where possible.

EPC ratings

All social landlords with data saw improvements in their properties’ EPC ratings as a result of the projects. Before the installations, all properties fell within band E, D, or C, with the majority in band D. After the measures had been installed, all properties achieved band C or B, with the exception of three solid wall houses whose EPC ratings decreased from band D to band E. It is unknown why this was the case and may have been the result of an assessment error.

The average improvement in SAP scores varied across projects depending on the building type, previous heating system, and whether other measures were installed. The most significant SAP score increase took place in Queens Cross Housing Association’s project. Before the project, a sample property[13] was in EPC band E, while all properties post-project achieved band C or B, depending on the number of exposed walls.

Affordability

All case studies faced the challenge that the heating system changes coincided with a period of significant energy price increases. As a result, many tenants have experienced higher energy costs despite their new heating system being cheaper to run per kWh. Since energy consumption data was not available for any of the projects, it is difficult to calculate the counterfactual (i.e. what would the energy costs have been if a new heating system had not been installed).

Tenant satisfaction

It has not been possible to draw definitive conclusions on the residents’ satisfaction with their new heating systems due to a lack of representative data. All social landlords reported that many of their tenants were happy with their new heating system. Most of the information was anecdotal, and several social landlords saw the lack of complaints as a success in itself.

“The thing with tenants is, if nothing’s going bad, you don’t hear from them.” – social landlord

Where tenant feedback was available, the negative comments primarily related to high energy costs or issues with understanding their heat pump and controlling the temperature. The positive comments related to feeling warmer and more comfortable, and finding the system easier to use. Some tenants felt positive about their new heating system despite high bills, as they took this to be a result of the wider energy price increases rather than a result of the new heating system.

Hebridean Housing Partnership was the only project where comprehensive tenant satisfaction data was available at the time of writing. Their survey, which was carried out as part of their annual heat pump service, reported a 95% satisfaction rate.

Key findings

  • EPC ratings improved across all projects.
  • The majority of properties achieved an EPC B or C rating after the installations.
  • It has been difficult to assess to what degree the affordability has changed due to increased energy costs.
  • Many social landlords anecdotally reported that their tenants feel positive about the heating system change, but there is limited data available to quantify this.

Conclusions

Social landlords in Scotland are in the process of improving their housing stock to meet future needs. Many are making use of Scottish Government funding, which has been made available for this purpose.

Most of the case studies included in this research have installed air source heat pumps. Compared to ground source heat pumps and heat networks, air source heat pumps have lower capital costs and require less involvement and responsibility from the housing provider, which makes them a more attractive choice for many social landlords. Some social landlords and tenants have experienced challenges around the operation of the air source heat pumps, including access to maintenance engineers.

The buildings in these case studies do not represent Scotland’s many older or ‘hard-to-treat’ buildings. Rather, many of the projects that have been completed so far involve buildings that were easier to upgrade, such as those that were ‘heat pump ready’ or only required cavity wall insulation.

The majority of the properties in this research switched from electric storage heating. The social landlords found that this necessitated a significant change in tenants’ heating patterns and behaviours, which was identified as a key challenge related to air source heat pumps. Doing this successfully requires a level of support for the tenants. The nature of heat pumps offers the benefit of more consistent temperatures. However, the constant use needed to efficiently achieve this, could be putting use of the heating system beyond the reach of those in fuel poverty. This is likely to prove more challenging when moving properties away from gas central heating.

Limited collection of impact evaluation data is a significant barrier to quantifying how the projects have impacted tenants. Without such data, the social landlords cannot determine whether the original aims of their project, such as increasing affordability and comfort, have been met. Some project data will become available in 2024. This research highlights that impact evaluation work is a long process, and the most useful data is collected consistently over a number of years.

Overall, the majority of the social landlords were satisfied with the outcomes of their projects and the installation process. Despite the lack of formal impact evaluation in some cases, many anecdotally described an encouraging response from their tenants and perceived the lack of complaints as a positive result. However, this absence of complaints does not necessarily guarantee satisfaction or that there would not be more to learn through seeking feedback directly.

Lessons for future social housing energy efficiency and heating projects

Lessons for social landlords:

  • Tenant engagement: Consider a mixed-method approach to engage and support a range of residents, such as face-to-face events, ongoing support and opportunities to see and use the technology in-situ.
  • Impact evaluation: This should be planned from the outset of the project to truly understand the impact of the project on tenants, its success in achieving its aims and how it might be improved for next time. The methodology should provide a before and after picture, and include temperature and humidity assessments, energy consumption data and EPC data.
  • Multiple buildings: In projects involving large or multiple buildings, delivering at least one building as a pilot helps identify and address any challenges. Rolling the installations out in one building helps to reduce disruption and focus tenant support.
  • Project management and costs: If you plan to procure a project manager, involving them from the outset means that they can support with application writing. It should be noted that there may be a cost to this, which should be taken into account. Consider aspects such as planning permission requirements, meter changes and electricity grid upgrades at an early stage to avoid unexpected costs.

Appendix / Appendices

Methodology

Case study selection criteria

The following lays out the criteria by which the case study selection was made.

Priority

Criteria

Reasoning

1

Evaluation Reports

Aimed to select case studies that had data available to provide information about the impact of the project.

2

ZDEH Solution

Providing case studies with a mix of ZDEH solutions will be useful for a wide range of social landlords.

3

Funding sources

We want to highlight that a range of funding sources are available but are aware that these can change, so focused on examples most relevant to social landlords.

4

Archetypes

It is key to have a range of housing types represented so that the case studies are relevant for social landlords with diverse properties.

5

Landlord type

A range of social landlords will help engage varied groups and increase the relatability and therefore impact of the case studies.

6

Other measures

Providing insights into other measures will help landlords to consider the energy efficiency of the whole property.

7

Delivery agents and installers

To ensure a non-biased view of delivery and the challenges associated.

8

Project costs

By prioritising criteria such as a range of housing type and solutions used, we will collate data on varied project costs.

9

Location

Aimed to include a diverse range of locations to represent the diverse urban and rural install experience, as this can impact the associated challenges. However, other aspects such as housing type will be prioritised, as we expect the range of case studies to be applicable to different locations in Scotland overall.

Overview case study selection process and limitations

A list of potential case studies was compiled based on an online search, which included publicly available funding reports. A call for case studies was shared by the Scottish Federation of Housing Associations on their social media and via their newsletter and an email to their decarbonisation group. Scottish Government also sent out emails to their distribution lists. This resulted in a list of 23 projects which met the research requirements. Eight projects were finally selected based on the selection criteria.

Finding projects with robust evaluation data was a high priority, and it proved to be a significant challenge. Detailed information about the projects’ approach to impact evaluation was not available before the interviews, and each interviewee had a different perspective on what robust evaluation data includes. Additionally, many of the projects have only recently been completed, and data collection is still ongoing in the projects with the most comprehensive evaluation approach.

The case studies cover a limited range of heating systems with an overweight of air source heat pumps. Many examples of other heating systems, such as district heating and ground source heat pumps, were primarily found in new build housing which was out of scope of the research.

Finding examples of projects that include mixed tenures was also challenging as there were few examples that met the research criteria. As a result, the conclusions drawn in this area are limited.

Several of the social landlords had changes to their staff since the project was completed. In some cases, this meant that interviewees were unfamiliar with certain aspects or stages of the project, limiting what information they could pass on.

Interview topic guide

Section 1: Background of the project

1. Can you start by giving me an overview of the project?

Prompts:

  • What measures were installed?
  • How many properties had measures installed?
  • What property archetypes were included? (detached, four-in-a-block, high rise)
  • Were all households tenants of the housing association, or were other tenure types included?

2. What motivated your organisation to develop the project?

  • Did you complete any (other) energy efficiency upgrades around the same time as this project?

3. How did you determine what measures you wanted to install?

  • In particular, why this ZDEH technology?
  • Did the archetype of the properties factor into the decision?
  • What heating type was in place before?
  • Had the properties had any other recent energy efficiency retrofit work done?

4. Can you give a rough timeline of the project?

  • I.e. start date, finish date, when did tenant engagement start, when were installs completed

5. What is the current status of the project?

Section 2: Project delivery and practicalities

6. Did you have any challenges associated with delivering the proposed number of installs?

  • Did you take any steps to mitigate these issues? If yes:
    • What did you do?
    • How effective was this?

7. How did you decide on an appropriate contractor for installing the measures?

  • Did you have contractors involved in other parts of the project, such as impact evaluation?

8. What approach did you take to engaging with the tenants?

  • Would you say it was successful?
  • What was the tenants experience of the project overall?
  • Can you give an approximate cost of these engagement activities?

Section 3: Financial considerations

9. Did you receive any funding to deliver the project?

  • How was the process to access that funding?
  • Do you have recommendations for other social landlords regarding funding and the application process?

10. What was the overall cost of the project?

Did you have other funding sources, or was the rest covered entirely by your organisation?

11. Do you know how much of that was associated with the cost of purchasing the equipment, and of installing the measures?

  • Did the equipment and installation costs vary based on property size or building archetype? If so, how?
  • If mixed-tenure present: Were there any cost variations as a result of the mixed-tenure nature of the scheme?

12. What other costs were there?

  • Was there a budget for:
    • Tenant engagement activities?
    • Monitoring and evaluation?

Section 4: Project impacts

13. Who carried out the evaluation work?

  • What was the cost of evaluation?
  • Was the cost of evaluation considered when deciding whether to evaluate the project or not?

14. What kind of impact evaluation data was collected as part of the project?

  • What was the sample size for each of these methods?
  • Was this collected both before and after?
  • Did the before and after periods include heating seasons?

15. How did the energy efficiency of the properties change as a result of the decarbonisation project?

  • What evidence do you have to support this?
  • What was the impact of the measures on the SAP score?

16. Do you know what the impact of the project has been on energy use?

  • Were you able to calculate an average change in kWh per property?
  • What was the impact of this on tenant fuel bills?

17. Do you have any figures on the carbon savings that resulted from the project?

  • If yes, how was this calculated?

18. Do you know what the impact of the measures were on temperature and humidity of the properties?

  • Were there any trends seen across the properties?
  • Did you calculate average temp and humidity changes that we report in the case study?

19. What was the householders’ experience pre and post installation?

Section 5: Recommendations for future projects and other social landlords

20. What challenges did you experience during the project?

  • Were these centered around any particular project stages?
  • Were there specific challenges associated with the archetype, tenure, or location of the buildings?
  • How did you overcome these challenges?

21. What were the most successful aspects of the project?

  • What factors were behind these successes?

22. Do you feel that the project has met its aims? Why/why not?

23. If you were to carry out a similar project in the future, is there anything you would do differently?

Historic funding schemes

UK Social Housing Decarbonisation Fund Demonstrator

Three Scottish projects included. The current fund is England-only.

Non-domestic Renewable Heat Incentive

Now closed. One project applied but did not get it due to mistake on application.

© Published by Changeworks, 2024 on behalf of ClimateXChange. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

  1. NB. As set out in the Heat in Buildings Strategy, the Scottish Government is progressing work on the reform of EPCs. A consultation on this topic closed in October 2023. The reform proposes to introduce new metrics that, among other things, separate out fabric efficiency and cost, and carbon emissions.


  2. Scottish Government (2023) Social housing net zero standard: consultation


  3. Climate Change Committee (2023) Letter: Reform of domestic EPC rating metrics to Patrick Harvie MSP


  4. Scottish Government (2023) Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) reform: consultation


  5. This research focuses on specific criteria therefore this case sample is not representative of the success and outcomes of the SHNZHF overall. The SHNZHF was originally part of the LCITP. The SHNZHF is an ongoing programme whereas the LCITP has closed.


  6. This research focuses on specific criteria therefore this case sample is not representative of the success and outcomes of the LCITP overall.


  7. Formerly ‘Energy Efficient Scotland: Area Based Schemes’ or EES:ABS


  8. Scottish Government (2023) Area-Based Schemes


  9. Scottish Government (2023) Scotland’s Heat Network Fund: application guidance


  10. Heat Support Network


  11. European Heat Pump Association (2023) Heat pumps and high rises: Case studies from across Europe


  12. Ofgem (2023) Ofgem review reveals that customer service standards of energy suppliers must improve


  13. Given the standard nature of the flats, only one pre-install EPC was provided by the social landlord for analysis.


Research completed in July 2024

DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/4431

Executive summary

Introduction

This study assesses the likely impact of an electricity pricing model known as locational marginal pricing (LMP), as well as its potential alternatives, in the context of the Scottish Government’s Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan ambitions. LMP is a component of the UK Government’s ongoing Review of Electricity Market Arrangements (REMA) and could significantly impact Scotland’s energy landscape.

The assessment is based on a literature review and engagement with an expert advisory panel, including members from across the energy industry. The study was conducted between September 2023 and January 2024 and the assessment is based on the literature available at the time.

Under LMP, the national wholesale electricity market would be split into several smaller areas. This creates the opportunity to provide different local price signals that incentivise the optimal siting of generation, demand, and flexibility across the areas. Such incentives can improve the utilisation of renewable energy, reduce the need for network build and reduce costs. Additionally, variations in price provide flexible assets with locationally specific dispatch signals. This encourages these assets to adjust their consumption or generation to match local grid requirements, further reducing system costs. However, LMP creates significant uncertainty for market participants and could discourage investment in some low-carbon technologies in different parts of GB.

Findings

Based on the Scottish Government’s energy transition ambitions, we have categorised the impacts of LMP into the following four categories:

  • The scale up of low-cost renewable energy

Without insulating mechanisms, LMP would heighten price risk (£/MWh sold) and volume risk (MWh sold) for Scottish renewable generators. Delays to transmission network build would exacerbate this. Elevated risk could increase the cost of capital for new developments, potentially negating the modelled system benefit of LMP. Renewables support mechanisms could help mitigate disruption to Scotland’s renewables pipeline, reducing UK decarbonisation risks. Wider benefits of the green economy in Scotland are closely tied to the continued buildout of renewables.

  • Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition.

Studies suggest that, due to the significant existing capacity of renewables, Scottish consumers could benefit from some of the lowest wholesale power prices in Europe under LMP. Conversely, as LMP creates regional differences in price, some GB regions would see increases in prices. The extent to which this materialises depends on policy design and the pace at which LMP is implemented. The impact of LMP is reduced the later it is implemented as the network is reinforced to 2035, reducing transmission constraints.

  • Support accelerated decarbonisation.

LMP is unlikely to accelerate the decarbonisation of the power sector. LMP could even slow decarbonisation down by causing a hiatus in investment if implemented without sufficient mitigations demonstrating that renewable support can be maintained. However, the potential to improve system efficiency could decrease the cost of the UK power system between £0.2bn-1.6bn annually (AFRY 2023, Aurora 2023). In Scotland, lower wholesale prices could reduce the cost of electrification of sectors such as transport, heat and industry, and could play a part in attracting new industries and green hydrogen production.

  • Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system.

LMP has the potential to encourage the efficient location and operation of assets that provide flexibility to the electricity system. Due to significant capacity of renewables in Scotland, LMP could attract further investment in flexible assets. This would help to reduce network congestion in Scotland, allowing for greater penetration of renewable generation. However, strategic planning is necessary to ensure that Scotland receives the network capacity required for further development of renewables.

Conclusions

The authors have critiqued quantitative and qualitative studies on the possible impact of LMP, assessing the strength of assumptions used in the studies. This overview of the conclusions is based on this literature review as well as evidence gained through the expert advisory panel.

  • Scotland must prioritise and coordinate a strategic plan for renewable generation and network reinforcement with the UK Government.

If LMP is to be introduced, mechanisms to support renewables need to be feasible. Long-term locational signals for strategically siting renewables are vital for achieving a low-cost net zero power system by 2035. Support mechanisms like a reformed Contracts for Difference scheme that protect against revenue and volume risk, are essential to maintaining investor confidence in Scottish renewables. Alternatively, reformed Transmission Network Use of System charges could offer locational investment signals in a national market, although they lack the same operational signals created by LMP.

  • LMP would provide the clearest dispatch signal for flexibility, delivering efficient investment and operation of flexibility.

Maximising the use of renewables can only be done with significant flexibility. LMP can provide effective investment signals for the development of flexibility in Scotland. Of the options evaluated, LMP can also provide the clearest operational dispatch signals to optimise the use of flexibility. Local constraint markets are a potential alternative to LMP, although they may introduce further market complexity and are unlikely to fully replicate the effects of LMP.

  • The potential benefits of LMP for consumers are greater the earlier it is introduced.

A quick implementation of LMP would create the most significant benefit for Scottish consumers. As the transmission network is upgraded to 2035, the benefits of LMP are reduced. However, LMP will likely take four to eight years to implement and must be done with care, providing support for existing and future renewable generation.

  • Careful implementation of LMP is required to address regional differences in price across GB.

LMP will create regional differences in price across GB that need to be carefully considered. Scottish consumers would likely be a key winner of LMP, benefiting from lower wholesale prices. However, support for renewables needs to be secured to ensure that investment stays in Scotland, jobs are realised, and the wider benefits of net zero can be delivered. Future renewables support needs to be designed and communicated ahead of a transition to LMP.

Abbreviations table

CfD

Contracts for Difference

BAU

Business-as-usual

BM

Balancing Mechanism

CCUS

Carbon capture, utilisation, and storage

EAP

Expert advisory panel

EV

Electric vehicle

FES

Future Energy Scenarios

FTR

Financial transmission right

H2

Hydrogen

HDV

Heavy duty vehicle

HND

Holistic Network Design

HP

Heat pump

LCM

Local constraint market

LCOH

Levelised cost of hydrogen

LMP

Locational marginal pricing

MO

Market operator

NGESO

National Grid Electricity System Operator

NOA

Network Options Assessment

PPA

Power purchase agreement

REMA

Review of Electricity Market Arrangements

SO

System operator

SWOT

Strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats

TCO

Total cost of ownership

TNUoS

Transmission Network Use of System

WACC

Weighted average cost of capital

VAT

Value Added Tax

Glossary

Assets

In the context of this report, assets include any source of power demand or generation on the electricity system. This includes generating assets, demand-side assets, energy storage, and interconnectors.

Balancing

The continuous adjustment of generation and consumption of electricity to maintain a stable grid. As generation and demand need to be matched in real-time, National Grid ESO performs balancing actions to do so. The primary mechanism for this is the Balancing Mechanism.

Capacity

Maximum amount of instantaneous power an asset can provide (usually measured in MW).

Capacity Market

A mechanism from the UK Government to ensure there is enough generating capacity to enable security of supply. The Capacity Market provides payments for the availability of reliable sources of power.

Congestion

When there is insufficient network capacity to transport electricity from generators to consumers.

Congestion rent

Additional revenue collected by the Market Operator under LMP markets when the network is congested. Areas with an oversupply will see generators receiving lower prices. Areas with an undersupply will see consumers paying higher prices. The difference between these is collected as congestion rent.

Contracts for Difference

The main mechanism through which renewable generation is supported in the UK. Enables stable revenues by auctioning “strike prices” for generators. When wholesale prices fall below the strike price, generators receive a top-up. When wholesale prices exceed the strike price, generators must pay back excess revenues.

Curtailment

The intentional reduction of electricity generation, primarily due to excess generation (e.g. during high wind periods), or grid constraints.

Demand-side response

Demand-side response is a form of flexibility by shifting electricity consumption according to grid requirements or market signals. This can achieve an equal but opposite effect of flexing generation.

Dispatch

The process of determining which generating units will supply electricity to meet demand at any given moment. In the UK generators “self-dispatch,” choosing when to provide electricity, while National Grid ESO can then proceed to redispatch electricity according to real-time balancing requirements.

Dispatchable generation

Generating assets that can be controlled and scheduled, such as gas power plants or hydro-electric plants.

Distribution network

The network that transports electricity from the transmission network to consumers. Some new intermittent renewable energy sources are also directly connected to the distribution network.

Electrolyser

A device that uses electricity to split water into its constituent parts: hydrogen and oxygen.

Embedded generation or storage

Any assets that can deliver power and are connected to the distribution, rather than transmission system. In the UK, most solar generation is connected to the distribution system.

Firm access rights

The guaranteed access to the network for certain types of assets. In the GB national wholesale market, this means generators can sell electricity without considering the impact on network constraints.

Flexibility

The ability to adjust the generation/consumption of electricity to meet grid requirements. This is essential to provide a reliable and stable grid in an electricity system with growing intermittent renewable generation. Includes dispatchable generation, energy storage, interconnectors, and demand-side response.

Flexibility market

Markets operated by NGESO or distribution network operators that procure flexibility to ensure the needs of the grid are met. Flexibility providers are typically paid on either an availability (£/MW/h) and/or utilisation (£/MWh) basis.

Interconnector

High-voltage power cables that connect the grid in GB with other countries e.g. France and the Netherlands, allowing for power trading across markets.

Liquidity / illiquidity

The degree to which electricity can be bought and sold easily, quickly, and with minimal impact on prices.

Locational element / signal

Incentives to invest and/or operate assets in ways that reflect local grid requirements i.e. generation, demand, network constraints.

Locational marginal pricing

A wholesale electricity market reform that divides a single national market into smaller markets.

Market Operator

In an LMP market, the Market Operator is responsible for the operation of the wholesale market and administering the pricing mechanism of the market. If introduced in the UK, this task would likely fall to National Grid ESO.

Network constraints

Physical bottlenecks on the electricity network that occur when the amount of electricity that needs to be transmitted from generating assets to demand exceeds the maximum possible flows of the network. In this study, network constraints generally refer to constraints on the transmission network.

Operational efficiency

In the context of wholesale markets, the ability for assets to appropriately schedule generation or consumption to best match grid requirements, enabling a cost-effective system.

Peaker plant

A type of generating plant that is designed to operate intermittently during periods of high electricity demand (peak demand).

Power purchase agreement

Bilateral agreements between generators and suppliers or consumers that allow generators to reduce wholesale market price risk by selling electricity at a pre-agreed price.

Redispatch

A change in the operating schedule of a generating asset to balance supply and demand or resolve network constraints. National Grid ESO may pay generators to redispatch.

Settlement period

Half-hourly period in which electricity is traded in UK markets.

Transmission losses

The electricity dissipated as heat when transmitted across the network.

Transmission network

High-voltage network that transports bulk electricity from large generating assets to distribution networks. Most large-scale generation is connected to the transmission network.

Variable renewable energy / generation

Renewable energy sources that generate intermittently based on variable resources like wind or solar, as opposed to dispatchable generation that can be actively adjusted.

Wholesale electricity market

The main market for electricity to be sold between generators and suppliers on day-ahead or intra-day time scales. Electricity not sold in bilateral trades will be sold in the wholesale market.

Introduction

In this section we will introduce the context of this literature review and the concept of locational marginal pricing (LMP). This is followed by a brief introduction on the ambitions of the Scottish Government regarding the climate transition, how this relates to electricity market reform, and what the key limitations of this review are.

Context

This study has been commissioned by ClimateXChange, acting on behalf of the Scottish Government, to explore the likely impact that LMP, as an approach to wholesale electricity market reform, could have in Scotland. LMP is currently being explored as part of the Review of Electricity Market Arrangements (REMA), the UK Government’s consultation on the reforms required to make electricity markets fit for a net zero energy system. REMA’s scope of potential reform is very wide, looking at almost all aspects of electricity markets. As LMP has the potential to significantly impact Scotland’s energy landscape, it is of particular interest.

This is an independent review of LMP and its alternatives and does not represent the view of the Scottish Government. The authors have critiqued quantitative and qualitative studies on the possible impact of LMP, assessing the strength of assumptions used in the studies. The study was conducted between September 2023 and January 2024 and the assessment is based on the literature available at the time. The conclusions are based on this evidence as well as evidence gained through an expert advisory panel (EAP). The EAP was invited to contribute and comment on the interim findings of the study. Members of this panel include various stakeholders across government, energy research centres, renewables developers, flexibility aggregators, industry, community, consumer and business representatives, energy suppliers, and large consumers of electricity in Scotland. This panel was invited to two 2-hour presentations and roundtable discussions. The panel’s views have been considered in our analysis, and certain commentary has been highlighted in this report. In addition, the study team responded to additional engagement requests for bilateral discussions with members of the panel representing industry and energy system representatives. One of these was followed by detailed letters setting out the members’ views on the interim findings.

The review has been structured into three sections. Firstly, a literature review of LMP and its alternatives, including an assessment of recently published cost-benefit assessments. Secondly, an analysis of how LMP may impact – positively and negatively – the Scottish Government’s key ambitions outlined in the Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan, amongst others. Thirdly, the study presents a set of conclusions and suggested next steps.

Locational marginal pricing

Electricity that is not traded under bilateral agreements between generators and suppliers/consumers is sold in the wholesale market. The current GB electricity wholesale market is a national market with marginal pricing[1]. This means that across the market, electricity can be bought or sold regardless of the location of the consumer or generator and the resulting grid conditions this creates. As the price is set by the cost of the marginal generator, the revenue or cost seen by all generators or consumers is the same price across GB for each settlement period. A settlement period is the 30-minute period in which volumes of electricity are traded.

Under LMP, the wholesale market would be split up into several zones (zonal pricing), or many (multiples of) nodes (nodal pricing), see Figure 1. With zonal pricing, the boundaries between zones reflect network constraints (bottlenecks) on the transmission network. These network constraints occur when power flow is limited by the capacity of the physical network. With nodal pricing, each location where demand or generation is connected to the transmission network is known as a node. For each settlement period, consumers and generators in different zones/nodes can experience different wholesale prices, depending on the local level of generation, demand, and network constraint.

LMP is being proposed in REMA as a potential mechanism to tackle the drawbacks of a national market in a net zero power system. A key drawback of a national wholesale market is that transmission losses and network constraints are not considered in the wholesale price of electricity. Therefore, national pricing does not incentivise efficient investment decisions for generation, demand and flexibility to locate where it is most helpful for the system. On a constrained network with a national market, generation often needs to be re-dispatched to resolve constraints, creating additional costs. The annual cost of this transmission constraints has been growing in recent years (£170m in 2010, £1.3bn in 2022), and will likely increase with a higher proportion of renewable generation outpacing transmission capacity (National Grid ESO, 2022a).

The main theoretical benefits of LMP are improved locational signals for investment, as well as improved operational efficiency. This improves whole system efficiency, thus reducing cost. Different prices across zones or nodes set by local generation, demand, and network constraint, create new investment incentives for assets and consumers to locate where it is most economical. In the long-term this should create a more efficient system, reducing the need for network reinforcement. Additionally, as locational pricing reflects the current level of demand and supply in the region, price signals incentivise optimal dispatch of generation, demand and flexibility, improving operational efficiency. However, operationally, there are also non-price factors which influence investment decisions – including Government policy, planning, natural resources, access to skills, supply chains and connectivity.

Objectives of the Scottish Government

The Scottish Government has outlined its ambitions relating to the energy transition in its Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan (ESJTP) (2023). The ambitions of the Scottish Government have been further detailed in the Heat in Buildings Strategy (2021), the Hydrogen Action Plan (2022), and the National Transport Strategy 2 (2020). This study aims to discuss how LMP will impact the Scottish Government in achieving these ambitions. The ambitions can be summarised into the following four broad categories:

  • Support ambitions to scale up low-cost renewable energy.
  • Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition.
  • Support accelerated decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry, including through CCUS and hydrogen.
  • Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system which is not dependent on fossil fuels.

In Section 4 of this report, we detail which ambitions are sensitive to the impact of LMP and summarise the key strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) of LMP relating to Scotland’s ambitions.

Key outcomes for wholesale market reform

Wholesale market reform will have widespread impacts on Scotland’s ESJTP, as well as wider economic implications. By reviewing Sottish Government strategy papers and assessing where wholesale market reform has significant impact, we have developed key outcomes that need to be prioritised for electricity market reform to align with Scotland’s ambitions:

  • Strategic coordination of renewable development and network investment is required to ensure that renewables continue to be deployed in Scotland and net zero is achieved.
  • UK decarbonisation relies on significant capacity of renewables being built in Scotland.
  • Strategic planning of renewable development is required to place generation where it is most suitable, whilst considering existing and future network capacity and the pace required for decarbonisation.
  • More efficient locational dispatch signals are necessary to encourage flexibility and enable greater renewable penetration.
  • Granular locational dispatch signals that provide the right signals for flexibility, in the right places, are essential for a power system with a high penetration of renewables and significant network constraints.
  • Mechanisms that allow demand, including industry, businesses, and domestic consumers to benefit from the lower cost of renewable generation are required.
  • GB already generates significant electricity from renewable sources, yet consumers still pay prices largely defined by national gas generation.
  • Benefits and costs of a green transition need to be shared fairly.
  • Changes in market arrangements need to consider the winners and losers of reform, as well as the status quo, to ensure that costs and benefits are distributed fairly.
  • Market arrangements need to ensure that investment is incentivised at pace yet is also cost efficient, minimising energy bills for consumers.
  • Wider economic benefits, skills, fair work, and quality jobs need to be maintained and created for local communities.

Key limitations in the quantitative modelling of LMP

This review is based on a qualitative assessment of existing published literature. As such, it does not include any further detailed modelling. The main limitation of the assessment of LMP in the Scottish and GB context is the uncertainty of quantitative outcomes published in reports by Aurora (2023), FTI (2023), and AFRY (2023). These constituted the main published economic cost-benefit analysis of LMP in GB at the time of writing, between October 2023 and February 2024.

It needs to be noted that significant assumptions are made within the existing modelling that can materially impact any outcomes. Firstly, the benefits of the studies are compared to a counterfactual of the existing national market arrangements. Regardless of whether LMP is implemented, the market will likely see significant reform. As alternative reform is not predictable, comparing LMP to the existing market arrangements provides a baseline to assess wider reforms and alternative measures against in future studies. We acknowledge the limitations with this approach; however, this reflects the nature of existing studies and literature. This will likely lead to an overestimation of the benefits of LMP compared to a future reformed national market. On the contrary, some negative impacts may be overstated due to the mitigations that wider reforms – particularly to investment policy – could deliver.

Indeed, additional reforms introduced alongside LMP are equally uncertain. The design of investment policy (e.g. the reform of Contracts for Difference, CfD) will have a significant impact on scale of the benefits of LMP. The modelled benefits of LMP are also significantly impacted by the level of transmission network buildout. National Grid ESO are proposing substantial levels of network build. Each study includes various scenarios which make assumptions about the level of network buildout expected over the modelled period. Finally, the timing of when LMP is introduced will have a significant impact on the potential scale of benefits. The benefits will likely reduce the later LMP is introduced, as network build progresses and alleviates constraints costs. However, the rate of required buildout is unprecedented[2] (National Grid, 2023) and may see delays.

Due to these limitations, the absolute values of the outcomes in these studies will have significant levels of uncertainty. Therefore, while we have used absolute values for subsequent analysis, in general, we have conveyed the general trends of the outcomes of the studies.

A literature review of the impacts of LMP and alternatives

This section comprises of a literature review of the impacts of LMP and its alternatives. We have included both quantitative and qualitative studies in the GB context, with some additional insight from international markets. This section has been split into the following themes to guide the review:

  • Consumers and end users
  • Investment and decarbonisation
  • Market arrangements

Furthermore, this section provides a critique of the modelling assumptions taken in the literature and a high-level review of the alternative reforms to LMP explored in the literature.

Consumers and end users

System cost/net economic benefit

The net economic benefit of introducing LMP, both zonal and nodal pricing, has been most extensively modelled by Aurora (2023), FTI Consulting (2023), and AFRY (2023) in recent studies. These assess the impact that LMP will have on the whole system cost of the power system. Whole system cost includes wholesale cost, balancing costs, CfD cost, and congestion rent. Overall, these cost benefit analyses suggest that, in the broad terms, LMP would improve market efficiency and reduce net costs to the consumer (Table 1), i.e. reduce whole system cost. However, the total reduction in whole system cost remains relatively small (% change in whole system cost, Table 1). The modelled periods in these studies are not all the same, making direct comparison of total net savings difficult.

Table 1: Modelled net economic benefit of LMP in GB. Whole system cost and net benefits for AFRY and Aurora are presented in 2021 base year. FTI values are converted from 2024 to 2021 using CPI inflation and 2.2% assumption for 2024[3].

 

AFRY (2023)

FTI (2023)

Aurora (2023)

Period

2028-2050

2025-2040

2025-2060

Scenario

Consumer Transformation

System Transformation – Leading the Way NOA7

Net zero 2035

Base case whole system cost

£466bn

N/A

£1310bn

Zonal

Net benefit

4.2bn

5.2 – 12.8bn

23bn

% change in whole system cost

-0.9%

N/A[4]

-1.8%

Nodal

Net benefit

4.5bn

11.0 – 20.5bn

35bn

% change in whole system cost

-1.0%

N/A

-2.7%

On an annual basis, the modelled benefit on the overall cost of the system varies greatly, ranging from £0.2bn to £1.3bn for a nodal arrangement (see Figure 2). These differences show the significant impact that different inputs and scenarios can have on the modelling outcome and indicate uncertainty in the modelling.

The components of where these benefits come from broadly align in the studies. In both Aurora and FTI modelling, average wholesale prices increase for consumers across GB, however this is balanced out by reduced balancing costs and congestion rent revenues. Modelled CfD costs are expected to increase. However, these will largely depend on the assumptions made as to how CfDs will be reformed alongside the wholesale market.

Congestion rent is a new source of income for the Market Operator (MO) that is created under LMP. The role of the MO is to optimise dispatch and calculate prices under LMP markets. The System Operator (National Grid ESO in the UK) could take this role. Congestion rent is the revenue gained by the MO by moving electricity between zones/nodes with different prices and is generally assumed to be passed to the consumer.

A concern highlighted by one member of the EAP is that without understanding the full package of market reform that will be undertaken, it is difficult to model the impact that LMP will have as a standalone change. Additionally, there has been concern that radical market reform would create increases in the cost of capital or an investment hiatus, which could reduce or eliminate any benefits seen. This will be discussed later.

Wholesale power prices

LMP would introduce regional wholesale electricity markets, leading to regional differences in prices. These differences are created when network constraints between two different zones or nodes limit the amount of power that can be transferred at a given moment. Across the UK, consumers in areas with an oversupply of renewable generation, such as Scotland, stand to benefit the most from reduced wholesale prices due to LMP. Areas such as the south of England, which have high demand, are expected to see wholesale prices increase when compared to a national wholesale market.

Across the three reviewed studies, the most detailed analysis on prices is in the FTI report. AFRY modelling is generally at the national level, while Aurora reporting focuses on whole system costs and spreads of capacity and generation.

In FTI’s modelling, price projections in oversupplied areas such as Scotland decrease more compared to the national wholesale price, than price increases in undersupplied areas (see Figure 3). The north of Scotland could even benefit from the lowest prices in all of GB.

The extent to which differences in wholesale prices between different regions are maintained will depend on the location and scale of future demand and generation, as well as network build. These differences will diminish over time as generation is built closer to demand, new demand re-sites to where prices are lowest (to an extent), and importantly new network build reduces constraint.

Electricity bills for residential consumers and shielding of demand

Currently, the average domestic electricity bill in Scotland is one of the highest in the UK (DESNZ, 2023c). A significant factor that causes regional differences in bills are unevenly distributed network charges, which make up approximately 23% of the average electricity bill (Ofgem, 2024). Network charges include distribution, transmission, and balancing components. The other main components of a domestic electricity bill in the UK are wholesale costs (29%), supplier operating costs (16%), environmental/social obligation costs (25%), and VAT (5%). In Scotland, transmission network charges are generally lower, as demand is located closer to generation. Distribution network charges make up the greatest difference between regions and are particularly high in Northern Scotland. Overall, this means that the average domestic direct debit bill in Scotland is £1,282, compared to £1,252 in England and Wales, and £1,152 in Northern Ireland, based on fixed consumption levels (DESNZ, 2023c). The introduction of LMP could reduce the wholesale cost contribution to Scottish electricity bills.

LMP would likely create different regional inequalities in the cost of electricity across GB. Particularly in a nodal arrangement, some regions could see significant changes due to significant oversupply or undersupply of generation in the area. This can be mitigated by shielding demand from wholesale market price exposure (see Table 2) and could be done to protect consumers at risk of fuel poverty. Shielding would reduce the benefit Scottish consumers would see from lower wholesale prices. The greater the extent that demand is shielded from differences in wholesale price, the less effective LMP would be in providing a locational signal to improve market efficiency on the demand side. FTI consulting has completed a demand shielding sensitivity, showing net economic benefits of LMP reduce (FTI Consulting, 2023). This reduces the net benefit from £13.1bn to £11.4bn (Nodal, System Transformation NOA7 Scenario). The reporting does not show the regional impact of demand shielding, however, does indicate that average wholesale prices for GB would be higher than without load shielding.

Table 2: Citizen’s Advice (2023) has summarised different options for shielding demand from price exposure under LMP.

Type

Description

Effect

Example

National average

Consumers pay a weighted average national price.

Eliminates all price differences and reduces price volatility.

Italy

Adjust for regional variations

Consumers pay national average wholesale price, but regions preserve different time of use profiles.

Socialises differences in average cost between regions, but still sends local dispatch signals.

None – hypothetical scenario

Zonal average

Consumers pay a regional (zonal) average price in a nodal market.

Reduces, but does not eliminate regional differences in price. Reduces price volatility.

California, New York

Minimal intervention

Up to suppliers to offer range of tariffs, with varying exposure, for consumers to choose from.

Variable. Will likely send strongest price signal through to consumers.

Denmark, New Zealand

Opt-in

Choice between exposure to locational price, or national/regional price.

Provides consumers the choice to be exposed to a potentially more volatile price.

Ontario, PJM (USA)

Shield by type of user

Expose some users (e.g. commercial and industrial) but shield other consumers (e.g. residential).

Considers the ability of different types of users to respond to locational prices. Still exposes large consumers to price signals.

Most jurisdictions (e.g. Ontario)

Phased exposure

Expose some types of large and flexible demand first, before expanding to other types.

Incentivise uptake of technologies to improve grid flexibility, before domestic consumers are exposed.

New York

Investment & decarbonisation

Changes in location of renewable development

One intended outcome of LMP is that locational wholesale prices provide incentives for generation and demand to be built where it is most efficient. In theory, where there is oversupply, prices fall and there is an incentive for demand to co-locate. High demand leads to higher prices, incentivising new generation capacity to co-locate. This should incentivise a more efficient system in which generation is located closer to demand, reducing the need for network build, as well as reduced re-dispatch.

The modelling of capacity siting decisions in Aurora and FTI Consulting generally allows new capacity to re-site within certain limitations. The limitations and assumptions made significantly affect the outcome, e.g. FTI assumes no new onshore wind in England, with offshore wind re-siting being limited by seabed leasing. Aurora assumes that most capacity in their net zero scenario requires some form of subsidy support, thus will have limited ability to respond to locational signals. AFRY suggests that the sharpness of the locational signal under LMP is stronger before 2030, but then becomes weaker than the national base case after 2035. As current locational network charges will be largely integrated into the wholesale market under LMP, once transmission constraint is relieved in the medium-term, after 2035, the overall locational investment signal will be reduced. This analysis is aligned with the trend of wholesale prices across GB converging over time under LMP and reflects a system with less constraint.

In Aurora and FTI modelling, the overall patterns seen for capacity siting in Scotland are a general increase in battery storage capacity[5], as well as a reduction in solar generation capacity[6], as compared to the national base case (see Table 3). Changes in wind capacity are contested. FTI assumes that offshore wind will generally re-site away from Scotland[7], Northwest England and Northern Wales to the Humber and East Anglia. Onshore wind is limited by not being able to re-site in England, showing increased capacity in the Northern Scotland[8]. FTI also assumes there is no change in locations of pumped hydro for any scenario. Aurora shows limited changes in wind capacity locations.

A significant limitation of the modelling is that it assumes capacity buildout will continue at the same rates, simply responding to locational signals. Several members of the EAP relay the concern that the impact of unmitigated LMP on general investment levels in renewable energy could be severe. As renewable energy is very capital intensive, changes in the risk profile, and thus the cost of capital can have significant negative consequences.

Table 3: Changes in generation and storage capacities under LMP, as compared to the national base case.

Area

Aurora Zonal

FTI Zonal

FTI Nodal

Northern Scotland (above B4 boundary[9])

  • Short-term[10] increase in fossil peaker capacity
  • Long-term[11] increase in hydrogen peaker capacity
  • Long-term decrease in solar capacity
  • Onshore and offshore wind capacity unchanged
  • Long-term increase in onshore wind and battery capacity
  • Long-term decrease in solar capacity
  • Long-term increase in onshore wind and battery capacity
  • Long-term decrease in offshore wind and solar capacity

Southern Scotland (between B4 and B6 boundary)

  • Short-term increase in fossil peaker capacity
  • Long-term increase in battery capacity and hydrogen peakers
  • Long-term increase in battery capacity
  • Long-term decrease in onshore wind, offshore wind, and solar
  • Long-term increase in battery and onshore wind capacity
  • Long-term decrease in offshore wind and solar

England & Wales

  • Short-term increase in peaker capacity across GB
  • Long-term decrease in overall battery buildout
  • Southern shift in capacity growth of solar
  • Widespread growth of hydrogen peaker capacity
  • Southern shift in capacity growth of solar
  • Long-term increase in offshore wind on the south English coast
  • Little change in fossil peaker capacity across all regions
  • Southern shift in capacity growth of solar
  • Long-term increase in offshore wind on the south English coast
  • Little change in fossil peaker capacity across all regions

The table above shows general trends in the re-siting of generation caused by LMP. These general trends are read from charts in the studies. Detailed data on exact capacity changes in specific regions is generally not reported. Large uncertainties in absolute modelling outputs mean general trends are more useful to assess.

Impact on renewable development

A significant change that would be introduced under LMP, particularly affecting generators, is the loss of firm access rights. Under a national market, generators have “firm access” to the grid. This means generators can sell electricity on the wholesale market without consideration of network constraints. Therefore, generation can act independently of network buildout, and future scenarios for generation inform network build out plans.

In an LMP market, generators lose firm access to the market outside of their respective zone. This means generators lose the right for compensation when the lack of network capacity means they cannot export onto the network, requiring a change to business models and investment approaches.

Scotland is currently in an oversupplied region behind an export constraint, meaning more electricity is generated than consumed locally (National Grid ESO, 2022b). The B6 boundary between Scotland and England limits the power that can be exported such that generators in Scotland are often curtailed off. There is currently significant network buildout planning to increase the capacity across the B6 boundary, which would reduce this risk for Scottish generators. However, excess flows across the B6 boundary are still maintained, even with these upgrades (National Grid ESO, 2023b). The loss of firm access under LMP is a significant new risk for generators in Scotland, as they will lose volume certainty when the network is constrained.

Existing generators could lose out on revenue from markets or CfD payments as they lose firm access rights to sell electricity to wholesale market. This would make many projects (especially in Scotland) unviable. Projects that are in development face similar risks. Should no new CfD scheme be implemented, new renewable development in areas behind constraints with high existing renewables (like Scotland), will have to compete for already very low wholesale prices during times of wind output, likely making projects unviable. For planned projects, lack of revenue certainty would either drive up the cost of capital (due to sizeable increase in risk) or lead to an investment exodus to markets in other parts of GB/Europe with more certain/lucrative revenue streams.

However, overall renewable curtailment across GB is projected to decrease under LMP, though this may not be the same in oversupplied Scotland. FTI’s modelling shows less renewable curtailment in both zonal (510-636 TWh between 2025-2040) and nodal markets (426-502 TWh), with the difference to the national base case (591-812 TWh) increasing to 2040 (National Grid, 2022b). This is due to improved dispatch, interconnector use, flexible demand, and the re-location of generation closer to demand. Aurora’s modelling suggests Scottish wind generation will face slightly higher curtailment in a zonal market, 3% more than in the national base case in 2035.

The risks to generators are further increased because under LMP, particularly in a nodal market, wholesale electricity markets are split into small areas. Aurora suggests that, particularly in smaller, more illiquid zones or in a nodal system, revenues can become less predictable for generators as price volatility increases. This is because local demand and supply become harder to predict. This could increase the cost of capital and reduce investment. FTI suggests that liquidity problems that may arise from smaller markets in a nodal system could be solved using trading hubs (as in USA), reducing liquidity problems.

Pace of power market decarbonisation

As electrification of transport, heat, and industry are key components of decarbonisation, a decarbonised power sector is a key step towards net zero. Under LMP, the modelled pace of GB power sector decarbonisation does not show a significant change. In a scenario where a net zero power sector is achieved by 2035, Aurora modelling shows emissions tracking the national base case closely. FTI modelling show an emissions reduction of 25-100MtCO2 between 2025-2040. This equates to 2-7 MtCO2 per year, or 2-7% of 2022 power sector emissions. This reduction is due to modelled improvements in dispatch, siting efficiency, and interconnector use, reducing the requirement for fossil fuel peakers. Overall, there is little difference in power sector decarbonisation as FTI and Aurora generally model continued buildout of generation at a similar pace.

A major limitation of LMP is the significant time it will take to implement. AFRY argue that the earliest implementation date would be 2028, meaning the window for investment decisions to impact emissions by 2035 (UK Government ambition for power sector decarbonisation) is limited. Additionally, the detrimental risk of causing an investment hiatus could threaten power sector decarbonisation in GB. This has not been properly captured in the modelling.

Scotland’s decarbonisation efforts will require an increased focus on flexibility alongside continued deployment of renewables. Scotland already has significant renewable generation, and thus a significantly decarbonised power sector. Under a constrained network with significant variable renewable generation, greater volatility in local wholesale prices can attract the deployment of flexibility (i.e. storage and demand side response), which enables a more efficient use of said generation.

Interconnector use

A significant potential benefit of LMP is the improved use of interconnectors. Interconnector flows are largely determined by price differentials between markets (Ofgem, 2014). This means that interconnectors can exacerbate network constraints under current market conditions.

The example in Figure 4 shows how a national market allows for import from Norway to Scotland and export from England to France, exacerbating the constraint between England and Scotland. This is a hypothetical example developed by National Grid ESO, as no interconnector between Norway and Scotland currently exists. When there is high wind in Scotland in an LMP market, Scottish prices would be lower than in the south, due to the oversupply of renewable generation. Interconnector flows would reflect price differentials between markets, allowing electricity generated in Scotland to be exported through the hypothetical GB interconnector to Norway, alleviating the constraint to England. Overall, this would enable greater export of Scottish renewable generation.

There has been overwhelming agreement of this benefit of LMP in the EAP sessions. Some members suggest that LMP is the best way to enable improved interconnector use, stating there has been a significant lack of alternative options tabled by industry that could solve this issue.

Energy storage and demand response

LMP markets would create locationally granular dispatch signals that enable the efficient use of flexibility. Price differentials in the wholesale market create an opportunity for assets that can be used flexibly to generate value, including BESS (battery energy storage system), pumped hydro, long duration energy storage, and demand response. Under a national market, wholesale price signals do not consider local constraints, so there is no incentive to place flexible assets in particular locations (National Grid ESO, 2022a). This means that flexible assets, placed in the wrong location, do not necessarily contribute to alleviating constraints.

In an LMP market, prices reflect local constraints on the network. As such, the dispatch signal created by the wholesale market will more accurately reflect the current needs of the network. For example, local oversupply is reflected in the wholesale market and incentivises charging of local storage assets, reducing export constraint. In a national market, the price signal will not only be weaker, but also not send specific signals to assets that are ideally located.

Increased price volatility increases revenues for battery and other energy storage projects, incentivising investment. Scottish price volatility is expected to be higher due to the significant capacity of variable renewable generation. Aurora and FTI modelling suggest Scotland will therefore likely see increased buildout of battery storage, making use of more volatile local nodal and zonal prices. Pumped hydro is likely to also benefit from this, however reporting on this technology is limited in the literature. According to Aurora modelling, overall GB market volatility is expected to decrease over time, but will persist in Scotland.

For this reason, improved locational dispatch signals provided by the wholesale market under LMP could help reduce congestion in Scotland and reduce curtailment by incentivising storage assets and demand response to respond in an efficient way.

Stakeholders in the Expert Advisory Panel agree that improved flexibility is a significant benefit of LMP for GB and Scotland. Improved flexibility allows for the more efficient use of renewable generation, and LMP provides the locationally granular price signal that otherwise needs to be created in separate flexibility markets.

Market arrangements

Additional market complexity under nodal arrangement

The introduction of LMP necessitates a decision between adopting a nodal or zonal market arrangement. FTI and Aurora modelling show that nodal markets can achieve greater power system cost benefit than zonal markets, however, increase complexity significantly.

Nodal markets would require radical change that increase the barriers to entry in the electricity market. International nodal markets have generally required central dispatch, forcing generators to participate in wholesale markets, and therefore require generators to develop new mechanisms to hedge against price risk. This is to enable the MO to run a clearing algorithm that allows for the most optimal cost-efficient dispatch at hundreds of nodes. Zonal markets exist with both centralised dispatch, and self-dispatch internationally.

For Scotland and GB, the benefits of an LMP market could be enabled in a zonal market, reducing the risk of increased complexity and radical reform required in a nodal market. With increased market complexity and associated uncertainty in a nodal market, there is heightened risk for investors.

Market arrangements to allow for bilateral trading

Generators in LMP markets can only directly access their specific nodal/zonal price. This increases risk as any local changes in network build, demand, and generation can have a significant impact on the price. To reduce such risk some international nodal markets have introduced Financial Transmission Rights (FTR) to allow for price risk hedging.

An FTR gives the holder the right to cash flows relative to the difference in price across nodes, thus allowing generators in oversupplied areas to potentially access higher prices (see Figure 5). They are funded by congestion rent, accrued by the MO. The MO may assign FTRs to electricity suppliers, with the intention that congestion rent is passed as a saving to consumers.

As all market actors need to participate in the wholesale market in a nodal system (as they are centrally dispatched), FTRs are also necessary to enable Power Purchase Agreements, (PPA). PPAs are a mechanism that allow generators to reduce price risk of the wholesale market by directly selling electricity to an electricity supplier or consumer at an agreed price. In a nodal market, the consumer and generator within a PPA still need to buy and sell electricity on the wholesale market. The prices bought and sold at will not necessarily be the same when they are not on the same node. An FTR between the nodes allows for some of the price difference to be compensated, though additional cashflow may be required if the value of the FTR is not equal to the agreed upon PPA price (Gill et. al, 2023).

As greater volumes of FTRs are created by the MO, the impact of nodal pricing on generators will be reduced, as fewer are exposed to local prices. It is therefore unlikely that enough FTRs are created that all generation can be hedged.

Implementation of a CfD scheme

Creating a CfD scheme under a locational market would be a novel development, with associated risks in implementation. Designing a CfD scheme under LMP faces significant new complexities, however, would be important to support the mass buildout of renewable generation in Scotland. Currently, CfDs provide generators top-up revenue calculated by the difference between their reference price (wholesale market price), and the auctioned strike price (price to which uplift is calculated, ensuring revenue certainty). When wholesale prices are higher than their strike price, generators also need to pay back excess revenues. A key decision for a CfD scheme under LMP is the extent to which generators will be shielded from local prices. A CfD scheme that completely protects generators from locational signals could be seen as counterproductive, as it would reduce the benefit of signalling where generation should be built.

Choosing a strike price, to which uplift is calculated, can be done either nationally or at the zone/node. Auctioning strike prices nationally, would provide similar support to all generators, and auctions would tend to minimise cost. Alternatively, a zonal/nodal strike price would support generators across regions differently, and the cost to the consumer would vary across regions. An auction that minimises CfD cost would minimise the average cost of uplift, rather than minimise the strike price, which is the current mechanism. Such an auction would require significant modelling to assess which generators will require the least uplift. In our view, regionally auctioned strike prices would favour generators located in areas with favourable conditions such as high-capacity factors and lower grid costs, yet still reduce the locational signal of the wholesale market.

The way the reference price is chosen in an LMP market impacts the strength of the locational signal and the cost of support (Figure 6). A zonal/nodal reference price completely shields the generator from the locational wholesale market. A national reference price provides equal uplift for all generators (given the strike price is the same). Generators in low price regions are still exposed to the lower wholesale price, so earn less revenues unless hedged. This allows for some exposure to locational wholesale prices.

Some members of the EAP see the continuation of a reformed CfD scheme under LMP as potentially difficult to implement. Many choices need to be made that will significantly affect the extent of the impact that LMP can have, whilst also introducing additional complexity in CfD administration, auctioning, and cost. Other EAP members have stated that to ensure continued investor confidence, existing CfD schemes will likely need to be grandfathered. This means existing CfD generator revenues are secured such that they remain unchanged, regardless of market reform.

Critique of LMP modelling assumptions

Introduction (description of modelling approaches)

The two key studies that have been used in this literature review to assess the economic and system benefit of LMP are Aurora (2023) and FTI Consulting (2023). To date, these are the only cost-benefit analyses that have published a significant level of detail, with AFRY (2023) only publishing overall results. The key modelling approaches can be seen in Table 4.

Table 4: Key configurations of Aurora and FTI Consulting’s modelling of LMP.

 

FTI Consulting

Aurora

Zones

7

7

Nodes

850

Not stated

Period

2025 – 2040

2025 – 2060

Scenarios

3 scenarios each with different network build assumptions, including Network Options Assessment 7 (NOA7) and Holistic Network Design (HND), as well as decarbonisation pathways Leading the Way (LtW) and System Transformation (ST).

2 scenarios of a net zero power system by 2035 and by 2050. HND is included in network build assumptions.

Sensitivities

Dispatch only, load shielding, increased cost of capital.

Increased cost of capital, delayed network build, dispatch only.

Impact of network build assumptions

Network buildout has a large effect on the impacts of LMP, and how they are distributed geographically. It is therefore a core assumption that determines the benefits of LMP. In an unconstrained network, LMP will have no benefit over a national wholesale market. If the modelling underestimates the level of network build, it will overestimate the impact of LMP.

NGESO identify which parts of the network require reinforcement and assess the cost-effectiveness over other possible measures. The Network Option Assessment 7 (NOA7) sets out the requirements for new infrastructure out to 2030. However, NOA7 has been supplemented by the new Holistic Network Design (HND), which accounts for additional upgrades required to support offshore wind (National Grid ESO, 2022b).

FTI Consulting only uses NOA7 as its central network buildout scenario, with a second scenario exploring HND. However, as HND has already been approved, only the HND scenario should be considered. This reduces the FTI net benefit of LMP by 40%. Aurora accounts for HND in its net zero scenario, then models further grid reinforcement after 2035 using their own network congestion/revenue algorithm. Sensitivities of delayed network build in Aurora modelling also show that this increases whole system cost in both national and LMP markets. LMP markets, however, can partially mitigate this impact.

Wholesale price projections

Wholesale price projections in the national base case will affect the absolute magnitude of the modelled net impact of LMP. Comparing to DESNZ national wholesale price projections (DESNZ, 2023a), Figure 7 illustrates that Aurora projects higher prices than DESNZ before 2030, then lower prices afterwards. FTI projects significantly lower prices than DESNZ in the short- and long-term. Therefore, the counterfactual national wholesale cost is not consistent between the two studies, leading to different net benefit calculations. When comparing equivalent scenarios, this could partially explain the greater benefits of the Aurora modelling (£1.40Bn/a) compared to FTI (£0.77Bn/a).

When assessing the modelled wholesale prices in Scotland under LMP, both Aurora and FTI prices are similar to (in fact slightly greater than) DESNZ projections for the levelised cost of energy (LCOE) of offshore wind (DESNZ, 2023b). This provides confidence that with LMP, the wholesale prices in Scotland will be closely tied to the levelised cost of wind. As a greater proportion of electricity is supplied by unsubsidised wind in Scotland, the levelised cost of wind will to a greater extent determine wholesale prices in Scotland. The higher projections reflect that additional dispatchable generation/storage is required during periods of low wind output.

Cost of capital for renewable generation

A transition to LMP could have a significant impact on the cost of capital of generation. There is a consensus amongst the literature, as well as from modelling from AFRY, Aurora and FTI Consulting, that even small changes in the cost of capital would eliminate the net benefits of LMP.

A transition to LMP would be a radical market reform, with reduced volume and price certainty and transition uncertainty leading to a potential increase in the cost of capital. A study assessing the impact on introducing a zonal market in Australia, showed the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) increased by 15-20%, which is equivalent to 1-2pp (Rai et al., 2021). Frontier Economics (2022) suggests that price volatility in the GB market under LMP would increase the WACC of wind farms by 1.8-4pp.

AFRY, Aurora, and FTI have modelled sensitivities to estimate the impact that increases of the cost of capital can have on the modelled net benefit of LMP.

  • Aurora models that a 3pp (percentage point) increase in the WACC would increase the cost to consumers by up to 5% compared to the national base case.
  • FTI models that an expected 0.5pp increase in the cost of capital of renewables would reduce the net economic benefit of the base case by £7.5bn across the modelled period. Further analysis shows a 1.3-3.4pp increase would be enough to eliminate any consumer benefit in their base case.
  • AFRY modelling suggests that a 0.56pp increase in the cost of capital would eliminate the net modelled benefit of LMP.

The wider literature suggests it is likely for there to be an increase in the cost of capital upon the implementation of LMP. Modelling of this scenario shows that even small increases could eliminate the net modelled benefit of LMP. The base cases presented by Aurora and FTI consulting therefore likely overestimate benefits as they do not consider this factor. The potential impact of an increased cost of capital on the level of investment, as well as the cost of electricity, is one of the major factors to consider when choosing to implement LMP.

Volatility

Average price volatility, which is a contributing factor to revenue risk and increasing the cost of capital, is unlikely to significantly increase in a locational market. Both FTI and Aurora argue there is not a significant increase in average wholesale price volatility in LMP markets over a national market. FTI does suggest that volatility will increase over time, likely due to increasing renewables, but this would also occur without LMP. However, it is worth noting that in specific nodes/zones where variable renewable generation is high, such as Scotland, volatility may significantly increase. While this provides opportunities for flexibility and energy storage, it could increase risk for generators participating directly in the wholesale market and would likely require continued/reformed CfD support to mitigate against it.

Re-siting of generation and demand

With lower wholesale prices under LMP, some re-siting of renewables away from Scotland should be expected. While Scotland has the highest load factors for both offshore and onshore wind in the UK (DESNZ, 2023d), the greater load factors may not be sufficient to offset lower wholesale prices. However, the extent to which new renewable generation will re-site away from Scotland is limited by several factors. This includes planning, sea-bed leasing, and network availability. Furthermore, short-term changes in the location of advanced development pipelines are unlikely, given the level of planning and permitting required. Development timelines for large generation projects are often very long and so the window for changes to 2035 is limited. At worst, existing pipelines could be cancelled due to lacking investor confidence, which could cause delays in overall GB investment levels as new areas need to be scoped. Consequently, a bigger impact might be expected in the siting of future generation, rather than that which is already planned.

The re-location of some renewable generation in the modelling by Aurora and FTI is a sensible assumption. However, this will be moderated by other non-price factors that could reduce the benefits modelled in the studies.

While significant existing demand is unlikely to re-site according to locational wholesale signals, new forms of demand could re-site within GB or enter the UK market to take advantage of the lower electricity prices in Scotland. Residential demand, constituting 35% of national demand (DESNZ, 2023e), is unlikely to significantly re-site, with most change in this sector likely to be seen in demand response to wholesale price profiles.

Early electrolysers are likely to be developed near centres of demand such as industrial clusters. This is the assumption in both Aurora and FTI studies. FTI allows hydrogen electrolysers to locate on any node with hydrogen gas turbines (as specified in NGESO’s Future Energy Scenarios 2021). Aurora’s main approach is to model new electrolyser locations based on existing pipelines. As electrolyser capacities increase, the siting of their new demand could be an additional benefit of LMP (McIver et al., 2023).

New sources of demand could also be an unmodelled benefit of LMP. Existing industry is less likely to shift locations in the short- and medium-term, however could benefit from lower wholesale costs to drive electrification. New sources of demand such as data centres and green steel could re-locate to Scotland to take advantage of lower electricity prices. Precedence for this is the choice of northern Sweden for the first commercial green steel plant (H2Green Steel, 2023).

Impact of timescales

The period when LMP is introduced has a significant impact on the modelled cost-benefit. The literature agrees that the earlier it is introduced, the more significant the benefits of LMP will be. The more constrained the network is, the greater the benefit that LMP can have on the system. Based on the NOA 2021/22 Refresh (National Grid ESO, 2022b), significant transmission build is planned to 2030. This will relieve the network constraints and reduce the potential benefit of implementing LMP. It will still take a significant amount of time between deciding to implement an LMP market and its delivery. REMA timelines do not allow the implementation of LMP to begin by 2025 (Ofgem, 2023), and National Grid assumes implementing a nodal market would take 4-8 years (National Grid ESO, 2022a). As such, the modelled benefit of LMP is likely overestimated by FTI and Aurora, both models start in 2025. The modelling by AFRY would still overestimate benefits, with a start year of 2028. As such, the realisation of wholesale cost benefits for Scotland are likely more limited than presented. However, any delays to grid build will improve the case for LMP, as seen in sensitivities completed by Aurora (2023). The volume of additional grid required is unprecedented and it could be likely that some is delayed.

Alternatives to LMP

There are alternative options to LMP to further locational signals in the electricity system. Some of the most prominent options, as agreed by the project steering group, will be discussed at a high level in this section.

Transmission Network Use of System reform

Locational signals already exist in the GB electricity system within Transmission Network Use of System (TNUoS) charges, which are paid by generators, embedded generators, suppliers, and directly connected transmission demand. TNUoS covers the cost of installing and maintaining the transmission network. This is passed down to consumer’s electricity bills. TNUoS reform could provide an alternative to LMP investment signals, creating an equivalent benefit to LMP by influencing investment siting. It will however be unlikely to enable benefits seen by improved dispatch under LMP. Currently, the method for calculating TNUoS limits its impact on investment decisions for generation/demand build. Energy UK (2023) have published reforms that would be required to make TNUoS reflective of a modern system to provide an alternative to LMP, summarised in Table 5.

Table 5: A summary of Energy UK (2023) requirements for TNUoS reform.

Reform

Current TNUoS

Reformed TNUoS

Transparency

Methodology for calculating TNUoS is not transparent on locational inputs.

Transparent methodology would help investors forecast TNUoS charges.

Modelling assumptions

Assumptions underpinning TNUoS are based on an outdated fossil-based power system.

Reformed TNUoS would reflect a decarbonised system with increasing generation and demand.

Predictability

TNUoS varies yearly, often with volatile price signals, increasing uncertainty for investors, hence the cost of new generation.

Long-term TNUoS charges (e.g. fixed for 10 years at point of connection) have been proposed to provide certainty to investors.

Locational charges

Currently, locational signals in TNUoS are small.

Signals would need to increase for both generation and demand to reproduce the effects of LMP.

Treatment of storage

Storage is currently treated as a “conventional carbon generator”, despite being both generation and demand.

Storage could be given specific treatment to encourage siting areas with net supply.

Aurora and Frontier Economics (2023) agree that a reformed TNUoS charge could create an equivalent benefit to LMP for the optimal siting of generation/demand. Aurora’s modelling shows that in some locations in Scotland, TNUoS reform would need to increase charges on some renewables to have the same impact as LMP, causing some renewables to re-site away from Scotland. However, their modelling assumes sufficient grid build to incentivise new offshore wind in northern Scotland. Across the whole of Scotland, Aurora model increasing incentives to build flexible generation and storage. As a whole, Frontier Economics argues TNUoS reform could improve investor confidence by providing long-term location signals to influence generation/demand siting. This would mean that the risk of increases in the cost of capital for renewable generation introduced by LMP could be avoided by TNUoS reform.

CfD reform

CfD reform could also provide locational signals in renewable investment. CfDs are the main mechanism through which renewable generation is supported in the UK. They enable stable revenues by auctioning “strike prices” for generators. When wholesale prices fall below the strike price, generators receive a top-up. When wholesale prices exceed the strike price, generators must pay back excess revenues.

This study has identified two main approaches to introducing a locational signal to CfDs, deemed generation (discussed by AFRY, 2023) or non-price factors (discussed by Regen, 2023a).

Table 6: Description of reformed CfD mechanisms.

Mechanism

Actual generation CfD

Deemed generation CfD

CfD – non-price factors

Source

Current mechanism

AFRY

Regen

Description

Revenue top-up based on generation (MWh) based on a fixed £/MWh strike price.

Revenue top-up based on capacity at a fixed £/kW/yr. Contracts awarded by the lowest deemed £/MWh, rather than the actual MWh produced.

Introduce non-price factors into the auction that reflect various additional considerations of CfD, including locational and other whole systems benefits.

Benefits

Ensures best value (£/MWh generated) projects win contracts, reducing wholesale prices in national market.

Contracts awarded based on forecasts of MWh delivered, accounting for locational factors (e.g. expected load factor and hours constrained). Guarantees revenue at point of contract award.

Non-price factors reflect various additional considerations of CfD, e.g. location & other whole systems benefits. Recognises projects that provide wider socio-economic benefits.

Limitations

Generators still topped-up if constrained, so no consideration of network constraints. Generators do not receive revenue during periods of national curtailment.

Does not necessarily provide best £/MWh generated for consumers.

Requires CfD awarder to produce generation and constraint forecasts, increasing mechanism complexity.

Does not necessarily provide best £/MWh generated for consumers.

Increase complexity of mechanism for CfD awarder and developers to introduce/quantify additional benefits.

Balancing Mechanism reform

The Balancing Mechanism is the main energy balancing market NGESO uses to ensure that demand and supply are matched, as well as to solve constraints on the network. A reformed BM could both influence investment siting decisions, as well as improve dispatch signals, though it is unlikely to fully replicate the benefits of LMP. Note that under a national market with a reformed BM, dispatch is still done through the wholesale market, meaning BM reform would only aim to reduce the cost of redispatch.

Investment siting decisions could be improved under a reformed BM, influenced by the potential revenue offered by the BM. However, currently this is difficult to forecast. Improvements to forecasting could include increasing the transparency of BM dispatch. Reform could go further by introducing/increasing long-term contractual agreements between NGESO and flexibility operators.

Reducing the cost of redispatch could be achieved by BM Wider Access, which will enable participation from aggregation of demand side assets and embedded generation storage. This would increase the number of assets in the BM and increase competition. Increasing the visibility and dispatch of storage assets could increase participation. National Grid is currently working to improve battery storage participation with the Open Balancing Platform, allowing bulk dispatch of batteries. Another potential reform in the BM to increase operational efficiency of the market is to enable interconnectors to participate. This could allow for the redispatch of significant interconnector capacity to resolve constraints on the network.

Local constraint markets

Local constraint markets (LCM) are newly developing flexibility markets that aim to enable wider access of assets to solve constraints on the network. These could go some way to improving locational dispatch and investment signals in a national market.

GB’s first local constraint market (LCM) came into operation in Scotland in 2023, seeking to manage the constraint between England and Scotland. Participants above the B6 export constraint in Scotland turn up demand during periods of high renewable generation. The aim is to provide a service that can solve the constraint at lower cost than the Balancing Mechanism, and simultaneously increase the number and types of assets that can participate in electricity markets by allowing households to participate.

Regen’s Insight Paper (2023b) suggests NGESO should procure flexibility in LCMs over a variety of timescales (intraday, day-ahead, and long-term) to help the optimal locational dispatch of demand in a national price market. If LCMs are guaranteed in certain locations in the long-term, Regen also comment that they could provide investment signals in areas of constraint for the development of flexibility. It is important that such markets provide constraint management at a lower cost than currently through the BM, otherwise they will increase the system cost of resolving constraints.

While LCMs are unlikely able to replicate the granular benefits of LMP, they are a useful addition to national pricing to add a locational signal, and, if the trial in Scotland is successful, could be rolled out in the intermediary period ahead of market reform. A possible downside, also raised in the EAP, is that many separate markets will need to be developed, possibly leading to increased complexity.

Assessment of the opportunities, threats, costs and benefits to the Scottish Government’s objectives

In this section we assess the impact that LMP and its alternatives could have on the objectives of the Scottish government, as outlined in the Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan amongst other strategy papers. The assessment is split into four main categories:

  • The scale up of low-cost renewable energy.
  • The fair and just transition.
  • The decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry.
  • Enabling a secure and flexible net zero energy system.

We have proceeded to summarise the main findings in a SWOT diagram (Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats).

Scale up of low-cost renewable energy

The development of renewable energy will be significantly affected by any wholesale market reform. This section outlines how Scottish renewables ambitions could be affected by LMP.

Description of Scottish ambitions

Scotland has strong ambitions for the scale up of renewable energy, largely focusing on the scale up of onshore and offshore wind, but also on increasing contributions from solar, hydro, and marine energy. The Scottish Government also has an ambition for an installed capacity of 5GW of renewable and low-carbon hydrogen production by 2030, and 25GW by 2045.

Scotland’s wind capacity ambitions largely align with UK goals and NGESO Future Energy Scenarios (FES) 2023 modelling. The UK Government goal of 50GW offshore wind by 2030 is supported by significant ambitions for 20GW of offshore wind development in Scotland. To reach net zero by 2050, FES 2023 also forecasts 45% of offshore wind to be located in Scotland. In addition to offshore wind, Scotland’s ambition for onshore wind is to develop 8-11GW by 2030.

Scotland’s current wind pipeline is extensive, with 12.7GW of onshore wind projects under construction, awaiting construction, or in planning (Scot Gov, 2023a). 8.3GW of projects stand to deliver the bulk of the offshore wind ambition in Scotland. Additionally, the ScotWind and Innovation and Targeted Oil & Gas (INTOG) leasing rounds reflect very significant market ambitions for offshore wind in Scottish waters. For Scotland, and wider UK decarbonisation, it is key that these projects are not risked by market reform. Renewables development is a significant pillar in the energy strategy of Scotland and underpins other socio-economic and decarbonisation ambitions.

Impact of continued constraint and network delays on Scottish generators

A significant challenge in the development of renewables in Scotland from a power system perspective is the export constraint to England. In FY22/23, export constraints in Scotland resulted in 4.4TWh of balancing actions at a cost of £908 million to the consumer (National Grid ESO, 2023e). To address this, National Grid has proposed transmission build between Scotland and England to allow for flows of 20GW by 2030, and 30GW by 2035 (NOA 2021/22 Refresh). Even with this additional transmission build, the boundary will still likely see excess flows resulting in constraints (National Grid ESO, 2023b). Any delays in this network build would further exacerbate the constraint.

Under LMP, Scottish generators would lose firm access rights to the wholesale market. This means they would be acutely impacted by export constraints and delays to network build, which would limit the market they could sell to, generating a significant volume risk for investors. Excess renewable generation and export constraints in Scotland would drive down wholesale prices, and while this benefits consumers, it would generate further risk for renewable investors’ revenue opportunities. Continued low wholesale prices for consumers in Scotland would still rely on further development of renewables. This risk could be partially mitigated by new opportunities for renewable generators to sell electricity to new sources of demand in Scotland or to Europe, via interconnectors, taking advantage of the lower wholesale prices in Scotland. However, this would unlikely fully outweigh the current opportunity to sell to England under a national market.

Some members of the EAP highlighted that Scotland still is the best location for renewable generation in the UK with the load factors and existing pipelines and supply chains, despite the inability of some of the generation to reach demand. However, another member of the EAP suggested that planning to build more generation in Scotland, when there is not the physical grid to support it is unsustainable. Especially when accounting for a history of slow network build, with required transmission build exceeding current rates significantly. These views set out by EAP members must be assessed on the basis that decarbonisation at the lowest cost to the consumer should be prioritised, however within the timeframe to achieve a net zero power system by 2035.

Market arrangements for mass renewables in Scotland

A long-term strategic plan for renewable generation and network upgrades could be implemented in a future market design to achieve a decarbonised power system at the lowest cost to the consumer, within the timeframe set by the UK Government’s decarbonisation targets. Such a plan would need to coordinate the location of generation and network upgrades (and flexibility) to send a clear signal to investors about where generation is required to de-risk investment and ensure confidence in mass renewable buildout. The establishment of the Strategic Spatial Energy Plan (SSEP) by 2025 could provide the framework to achieve this. This will be a UK Government led strategy that outlines where, when, and what energy infrastructure needs to be built to enable a net zero system.

Under LMP, it is most efficient and profitable to place generating capacity near demand, reducing the cost of transmission. This is a short-term market signal that does not consider the future location of new generation and network build. It places all the risk on investors to forecast how local grid conditions will evolve when developing their business case. The necessity of the Scottish pipeline for broader GB decarbonisation efforts should be considered before implementing reform that could risk development, considering the limited time for action. Market arrangements are needed that ensure the development of renewables in strategic locations but protect generators.

Support mechanisms such as CfDs would provide revenue certainty whether LMP is introduced or not. However, under the current CfD mechanism, the awarding of CfD does not consider locational factors (past planning and renewable resource) and places all volume risk on consumers (there is no top-up payment if the reference price falls below £0/MWh for recent CfDs). CfD reform could encompass locational considerations when awarding contracts. Such considerations should locate low-cost renewable generation where it minimises cost for consumers, considering the constraints on the network, planned upgrades, and centres of demand. Furthermore, under LMP, CfD reform would need to consider how it could protect renewables from volume risk to improve investor confidence in renewable development in the UK. We discuss this in more detail in section 5.2. Regardless of LMP, CfD reform should consider the increasing periods of national curtailment of renewables as capacity increases and the additional volume risk for investors this will bring.

An alternative method to LMP and reformed CfDs to provide long-term investment signals for the location of renewables is a reform to TNUoS charges. Depending on the timeframe of the investment signal, TNUoS charges could be used to both incentivise or disincentivise the development of renewables in Scotland. The potential benefit of TNUoS reform is that radical market reform is not required. TNUoS reform could be rapidly adopted under a national price market, with fewer of the associated transition risks. However, TNUoS charges would be unlikely to provide regular and accurate locational dispatch signals and so would have to be combined with additional reforms to replicate the full potential benefits of LMP.

Cost of capital

A significant risk that is presented throughout the literature, as well as the modelling, is the impact of an increase in the cost of capital. As renewables development is very capital intensive, changes in the cost of capital will have significant effects on the levels of investment and the final cost of electricity. A small increase in the cost of capital can significantly affect the total cost of a project, impacting its financial viability.

The cost-benefit modelling sensitivities simulated by Aurora, FTI, and AFRY, show that small increases in the cost of capital can easily wipe out the net modelled benefits of implementing LMP. Therefore, well-planned implementation of LMP is essential to limit the increases in the cost of capital for renewables. Furthermore, supporting policies such as CfDs, could work to derisk renewable development, if reformed for a LMP market, reducing the impact of market reform on the cost of capital of renewables.

Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats

Table 7: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats of LMP regarding renewables development in Scotland.

Strengths

Opportunities

  • High load factors in Scotland enable renewables development at lower cost to the consumer, if benefit is passed on to the consumer and not retained by developers.
  • Scotland’s targets for renewables capacities align with UK government targets, as well as NGESO forecasts for net zero.
  • There is an existing strong pipeline of renewable projects in Scotland.
  • Lower wholesale prices provide an opportunity for renewables generators to sell more electricity to new demand and Europe via interconnectors.

Weaknesses

Threats

  • Existing and continued constraints on the network, in combination with the loss of firm access rights, means generators would have increased revenue risk in Scotland.
  • Implementation uncertainty and potential increases in the cost of capital.
  • Without government support, the development of renewables in Scotland is at risk, due to increased costs and risks.
  • This risks the UK’s and Scotland’s decarbonisation efforts.
  • The conditions for continued low wholesale prices are at risk, given reduced development of renewables.

Fair and just transition

This section outlines how LMP may affect Scotland’s ambitions to achieve a fair and just transition, as outlined in the draft ESJTP (Scottish Government, 2023c). This is of particular significance, as LMP will create regional differences across GB.

Description of Scottish ambitions

A fair and just transition is the cornerstone of Scotland’s energy strategy and aims to ensure that benefits and risks of the energy transition are distributed fairly. This means delivering affordable energy to Scottish consumers which is not subject to global fossil fuel price volatility. It also includes the wider economic developments of the energy transition. Scotland aims to maintain or increase employment in the energy production sector, amongst the backdrop of a historically strong oil and gas sector. Further growth in the energy sector should also come alongside boosting the skills base and local supply chains, ensuring technology, manufacturing, and know-how remain in Scotland. The benefits of market reform need to be spread out across all regions of Scotland, and not leave anyone behind. This is of particular concern for those at risk of fuel poverty. Additionally, Scotland aims to grow the community energy sector to 2GW by 2030.

Lower wholesale prices for consumers

LMP could see Scotland’s consumers benefitting from the lowest wholesale prices in GB, and possibly Europe (FTI Consulting, 2023). This is due to the significant capacity of renewable generation that is behind an export constraint, so prices will largely be set by wind generation. Compared to southern England, prices will converge in the long-term, as network build reduces constraint and generation is built closer to demand. However, Scotland is expected to maintain the cheapest prices in GB. It should be noted that there is limited reporting on the finer regional differences on price in the modelling.

As LMP creates regional differences in wholesale prices across GB, some areas will see electricity prices increase. It should be noted that the increase in electricity prices in some areas will not be equal, but less than the decrease in prices in Scotland. Because the current market arrangements are a national marginal price, every consumer in GB pays the price of the most expensive generator across the country. Under LMP, the marginal price of generation may increase in some locations (e.g. due to generation scarcity within the zone/node). However, on average this will only be a small increase on the national marginal price compared to the decrease in locations such as Scotland. In 2025, FTI project average wholesale prices in the most expensive zone and node to increase by 9% and 12% respectively compared to national pricing. This reduces to -4%[12] and 11% in 2040 respectively (FTI, LtW (HND) Scenario). It should be noted that zonal prices can help mitigate some of the most extreme regional inequalities that nodal LMP could create.

Despite this, it is possible given examples of LMP in other markets (see section 3.1) that, at least initially, domestic consumers could be shielded from some wholesale price signals under LMP, to reduce the negative impact on consumer bills where prices go up and protect consumers at risk of fuel poverty. In the reverse this would reduce the benefits on Scottish domestic electricity bills. A concern raised in the EAP is that it may be politically difficult or unpalatable for the UK Government to implement a new policy that disadvantages domestic consumers in specific areas.

Electricity suppliers may also decide not to pass on the whole benefit of reduced wholesale prices in Scotland to Scottish consumers. Increased costs in other areas mean suppliers may decide to effectively average out wholesale cost across their customer base. Additionally, ERM analysis projects that wholesale costs will make up 44% of domestic consumer bills in 2025. Any reduction in wholesale cost will thus be buffered by other components of the electricity bill including distribution network charges, green levies, and supplier costs. This would lead to a 21% reduction in Scottish electricity bills under LMP in 2025, based on a 35% reduction in wholesale cost (FTI Consulting, 2023). This would still be a significant reduction for Scottish consumers, which could result in a wide range of benefits and further a fair and just transition.

Employment, skills, and economic opportunities

A key ambition for a fair and just transition is to encourage economic growth and employment opportunities. The growth of the renewables sector poses a significant opportunity for this. New job opportunities will be needed to offset the decline of the oil and gas industry in Scotland. In 2021, there were around 82,400 direct and indirect jobs in the oil and gas sector (OEUK, 2022). Employment growth in the renewables and green energy sector could be used to offset this. The Fraser of Allander Institute (FAI) study shows that the renewable energy sector supported more than 42,000 jobs across the Scottish economy and generated over £10.1 billion of output in 2021 (FAI, 2023). With Scottish Government ambitions for increased generation capacity across a range of technologies by 2030, the wider employment benefits of renewables development are large. As discussed in section 4.1, LMP without mitigation could see future investment in renewables leave Scotland. This would risk the wider economic and employment benefits associated with renewables development.

However, if implemented successfully, lower wholesale prices could incentivise new industries such as electrolysers and data centres as well as other decarbonised industry with high electricity demand to locate in Scotland. This is a significant opportunity that could bring economic growth and employment to Scotland. An important factor is that the continued development of renewables in Scotland is necessary to provide sustained low electricity prices to attract new demand, as well as provide the actual power required for demand growth. Several members of the EAP supported this view, noting that reductions in electricity bills could be a key driver for new industry to locate in Scotland, especially if paired with additional Scottish Government backed incentives for industrial growth. However, others have stated that lower wholesale prices alone may not be sufficient to encourage new demand in certain industries.

Community energy

Without further support, community owned energy renewable generation is likely to become less attractive under LMP in Scotland. Renewables support mechanisms are likely to target larger scale projects, potentially leaving smaller community projects behind. Without support, lower wholesale prices are expected to make renewable energy projects less profitable in Scotland, reducing incentives for investment. Demand-side community energy projects will not be directly affected by wholesale market reform, other than the effect of lower and more volatile prices in Scotland. Members of the EAP noted that community energy projects are already lacking access to finance. Additional market reforms would be required to ensure the growth of community energy and enable easier routes to market, which is needed for a net zero system. Overall, there is not much literature on the impact of LMP on community energy, both regarding generation and demand-side projects.

Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats

Table 8: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats regarding a fair and just transition under LMP in Scotland.

Strengths

Opportunities

  • High existing penetration of renewables provides Scottish consumers with lower wholesale prices.
  • For greater periods the price of Scottish electricity will be defined by low-cost renewables.
  • Lower wholesale prices for consumers in Scotland, and overall reduced system cost should reduce average bills across GB.
  • Lower wholesale costs could incentivise new demand industries like data centres, green-steel, hydrogen, etc., providing economic growth and employment.

Weaknesses

Threats

  • Uneven geographic distribution of wholesale prices means some consumers (mostly in England) could face higher costs.
  • Potential shielding of demand from locational wholesale prices would diminish benefits for Scottish consumers.
  • Possible re-siting of renewable development away from Scotland.
  • Without support, re-siting of renewables away from Scotland would risk renewables industry jobs.
  • Lack of renewables development reduces conditions for continued low wholesale prices and opportunities in new demand sectors.
  • Fuel poverty for vulnerable consumers where prices increase could be exacerbated without shielding.

Decarbonisation of heat, transport, & industry

Wider decarbonisation efforts are often closely linked to electrification. In this section we will outline how regional changes in electricity prices that LMP creates could affect heat, transport, and industrial decarbonisation in Scotland.

Description of Scottish ambitions

Scotland’s ambitions for decarbonisation extend beyond the power sector to include heat, transport, and industry. Scotland aims to decarbonise heat and transport using renewable electricity or hydrogen. This includes the delivery of 6TWh of heat through heat networks (13% of 2021 heat demand). Electrolysis to produce green hydrogen is a significant opportunity, as Scotland already has a significant capacity of renewable generation, with ambitions for significant growth. This would not only use excess generation, store energy, and decarbonise industrial processes domestically, but also enable export of hydrogen to other countries. As such, Scotland aims to develop 5GW of renewable and low carbon hydrogen generation capacity by 2030 and 25GW by 2045. To further enable industrial decarbonisation, Scotland aims to accelerate the development of carbon capture utilisation and storage (CCUS).

Transport decarbonisation

Increasingly the decarbonisation of road transport looks to be dominated by electrification (Element Energy, an ERM Company, 2021). A reduction in electricity prices in Scotland under LMP could result in a decrease in the costs of electric vehicle (EV) charging. Despite this, the implementation of LMP is unlikely to significantly accelerate the uptake of EVs.

An Element Energy (an ERM Company) study in 2022 shows that electricity costs only make up around 9% of the total cost of ownership (TCO) of an EV car for a first owner (typically 1-4 years). Therefore, a 21% reduction in electricity cost for the consumer under LMP (see section 4.2) would only reduce the total cost of ownership by 2%. This highlights that the key cost consideration for an EV is the upfront purchase cost (and the associated depreciation for a first owner). Note that the potential savings attributed to electricity cost increases as a proportion of the TCO for second and third owners as the upfront purchase cost decreases. However, as with new EVs, operational costs are not a barrier to the uptake of second hand EVs. Additional considerations for EV ownership include access to public EV infrastructure and EV performance. So, while LMP could provide valuable benefits for consumers with EVs by reducing running costs, it is unlikely to significantly accelerate EV car adoption.

The impact is similar for other forms of road transport, such as vans and heavy-duty vehicles (HDVs). While fuel/energy cost can be a greater proportion of the TCO for high mileage vans and HDVs, capital expenditure is still the key consideration for electrification (ICCT, 2023). Access to public EV infrastructure is also essential for the uptake of electric vans and HDVs. Nevertheless, reduced wholesale electricity costs would lead to more favourable TCOs for these EVs, leading to earlier price parity with diesel equivalents and a more rapid uptake.

Heat decarbonisation

As with EVs, electrification will play a key role in the decarbonisation of heat in Scotland. The electrification of heat will focus on heat pumps (HP) and heat networks, with some role for other electric heating technologies including storage heaters and direct electric heating. For the average consumer, electric heating (with a HP) is more energy intensive than an EV, with annual consumptions of 3,000kWh and 1,800kWh respectively (ERM analysis). Therefore, lower electricity prices would have a greater impact on the running costs of a HP than an EV, so could incentivise uptake to a greater extent.

For the same reduction in prices detailed in section 4.2, ERM analysis on the TCO of a domestic HP shows a 10% reduction. For other forms of electrified heat (e.g. storage heaters and direct electric), LMP could similarly reduce running costs in Scotland. However, in the case of HPs, upfront costs can currently be prohibitive for many households. Continuation of Government support schemes to reduce upfront costs will be crucial to drive uptake, even with electricity market reform, particularly amongst lower income households. An example of this is the Home Energy Scotland Scheme, which offers homeowners grants of £7,500 to install a HP, and up to £9,000 in rural areas. A stakeholder in the EAP suggested that the introduction of lower prices in Scotland through electricity market reform could come at a critical moment as the uptake of HPs and EVs accelerates among the majority of consumers.

Hydrogen

A significant opportunity for Scotland under LMP is the development of hydrogen electrolysis capacity for the production of green hydrogen. Electricity cost is the largest contributor to the levelised cost of hydrogen (LCOH) via electrolysis, making it an important factor that contributes to the location of electrolysers (BEIS, 2021). Under LMP, Scotland could benefit from some of the lowest wholesale prices in Europe (FTI Consulting, 2023) which would attract electrolyser growth. This would enable a hydrogen export industry, but also contribute to the decarbonisation of industry by enabling some industries to decarbonise where it is more cost effective to use hydrogen. It can also help to enable a high renewables power system by absorbing excess variable generation. The wider economic benefits of employment and industry are also an opportunity for Scotland. An EAP member stated that the levels of electrolyser capacity in Scotland required for a net zero energy system are already very ambitious in FES 2023. Without market reform it will be very difficult to deliver this.

The main risk is that LMP leads to reduced development of renewables in Scotland, which is required for the significant demand that electrolysers, as well as wider electrification, will create. This could mean that supply may not grow in-line with growing demand, reducing the ability to provide electricity at low cost. Mechanisms to retain renewable development in Scotland are therefore essential for a thriving green hydrogen industry in Scotland.

Carbon capture, utilisation, and storage

Carbon capture can be used to reduce emissions of difficult to decarbonise industrial processes. Carbon capture generally involves three processes: carbon capture, conditioning and compression, and transport and storage. The main drivers for successful carbon capture are the need to mitigate large industrial emissions of CO2, as well as good transport and storage options. The main energy requirement for carbon capture is heat, not electricity, which is usually procured using natural gas. Some electricity is required for processes such as compression. As such, lower wholesale electricity prices would only minimally benefit the cost of carbon capture in Scotland.

Other types of carbon capture, including Direct Air Capture, also predominantly require heat. The solid sorbent DAC process requires lower thermal energy (80-100C), which can be delivered using waste industrial heat or industrial heat pumps. The liquid solvent process requires temperatures of 900C, which are usually delivered using natural gas (McQueen et al., 2021). Thus, DAC could benefit from lower wholesale electricity prices when using lower-temperature processes coupled with heat-pumps, maximising the use of electricity as the main energy requirement.

Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats

Table 9: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities & Threats regarding the decarbonisation of heat, transport, and industry, including CCUS and hydrogen.

Strengths

Opportunities

  • High load factors and existing penetration of renewables.
  • Renewable electricity generation exceeds demand.
  • Ambitious hydrogen capacity goals that align with NGESO forecasts for a net zero system.
  • Lower wholesale prices and excess renewable electricity allow for cheaper electrification of heat, transport, and industry.
  • Electric heating and new demand, like electrolysis, are most likely going to benefit from lower wholesale prices.

Weaknesses

Threats

  • Some re-siting of renewable generation away from Scotland.
  • Wholesale benefits in Scotland may not be passed entirely to consumers.
  • EV uptake not significantly influenced by electricity prices.
  • Implementation of carbon capture unlikely to be significantly impacted by LMP.
  • Reduced renewable development means supply may not grow in-line with electrification of demand.
  • Less renewable build reduces ability to decarbonise demand and develop hydrogen electrolysis at reduced cost.
  • Electrification of demand not significantly accelerated by LMP.

Enabling a secure and flexible net zero energy system

A future electricity system must be resilient to the fluctuations in variable renewable generation and demand. Flexibility is a significant aspect of enabling a secure electricity system. In this section we outline how LMP could affect Scotland’s ambitions to achieve this.

Description of Scottish ambitions

The Scottish Government aims to enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system which is not dependent on fossil fuels. As Scotland continues to expand its growing renewable energy capacity, increasing its role as a net exporter of electricity to the rest of the UK, the need to maximise the penetration of renewables will become increasingly important. There are several key factors that can contribute to this. Firstly, the development of energy storage and flexibility. This will enable the efficient use of variable renewable generation. Secondly, investment in grid infrastructure is essential, so that generators are not curtailed to mitigate constraints and electricity can flow where it is needed. Finally, dispatchable low carbon generation, such as hydrogen generation or gas with carbon capture, will be an important component of a secure decarbonised power system during periods of low renewable output. LMP provides a significant opportunity in Scotland for locational price signals to incentivise flexibility, as well as to incentivise efficient dispatch profiles to reduce constraints.

Energy storage and flexibility

The introduction of LMP would incentivise energy storage and flexibility to locate in Scotland due to volatile electricity prices, driven by generation from the high variable renewable capacity in Scotland that at times exceeds demand. Storage and flexibility benefit most when there is greater variation in electricity prices. Under LMP, this will occur in zones where intermittent renewable capacity or peak demand is greatest. Given that Scotland has significant wind capacity, prices will be more volatile than in other regions of GB. FTI find that the standard deviation in electricity prices in N. Scotland in 2025 under LMP would be similar to 2023 national prices, despite average prices being 71% lower. This is greater than in other areas in the country, even those with high demand (e.g. SE England). Such volatility would provide the best environment in the UK for wholesale arbitrage, likely attracting the relocation of battery investment to Scotland. Whilst this opportunity would decrease in magnitude as the transmission network is upgraded between England and Scotland, FTI notes that Scotland would still be among the most attractive locations to locate energy storage within the modelling timeframe to 2040. It should be noted that the implementation of LMP will likely take 4-8 years (National Grid ESO, 2022a), so the opportunity is overestimated when including years that LMP can not actually be realised. Overall, increasing flexibility in Scotland will not only reduce the need for expensive network build, but also improve security of supply.

This view was largely confirmed by the EAP. However, it was raised that the strongest signal to provide certainty for the investment in flexibility in Scotland would be a long-term contract, similar to the Capacity Market. Despite this, the clear signal sent by LMP would be stark in comparison to the weak signals from current locational mechanisms such as TNUoS charges and the Balancing Mechanism.

Furthermore, LMP would introduce locational dispatch signals improving the operational dispatch of flexibility to respond to generation and grid conditions at the node/zone that the flexibility is located. This would improve the efficiency of energy storage and flexibility (including interconnectors). The result of this would be to reduce the flexible capacity requirement and hence the cost of developing a secure and flexible net zero system.

Alignment of investment signals with network upgrades, at correct timescales

LMP provides short-term price signals that identify where the grid is constrained the most, given that it is designed around network bottlenecks. As such, it can be used to identify which zone/node boundaries require network reinforcement. Incentives for generation and demand to relocate should also reduce the need for network reinforcement itself.

However, to build an optimal net zero power system by 2035, rapid transmission build needs to be strategic, and in-line with plans for generation capacity build. This means that network build-out will not always be optimal, but the goal of strategic planning is to deliver electricity to consumers at the lowest cost achievable within the timescale for decarbonisation. This means co-optimising the development of generation, flexibility, and transmission network within these constraints. Such an approach has begun with NGESO proposing the HND, planned around offshore wind seabed leasing, providing more capacity to transport electricity out of Scotland.

Market reforms need to ensure that strategic planning of investment is prioritised. LMP can only send short-term price signals that dictate where network reinforcement is required for the current power system, it does not take into account future developments. Under LMP, this could be achieved through investment mechanisms (e.g. reformed CfDs and the Capacity Market) to ensure generation is developed in locations with a long-term system benefit.

Dispatchable low-carbon generation

Firm dispatchable low-carbon generation is a requirement for a future energy system that relies on variable renewable generation, to ensure security of supply. Dispatchable low-carbon generation is required for longer periods of limited renewable generation, when battery storage is not able to provide power over extended periods of time. This includes gas generation with carbon capture, hydrogen generation, or biomass generation (with carbon capture).

Such generation will be dispatched based on periods of high electricity prices, balancing actions, and Capacity Market instructions. LMP would improve locational signals for this generation, improving the efficiency of dispatch. Therefore, under LMP, dispatchable generation would be incentivised to locate in locations with high renewable generation or where peak demand is greatest. As with flexibility, such conditions would make Scotland an attractive location for dispatchable generation under LMP.

As with renewables, LMP creates additional risks for the investment in low carbon dispatchable generation. In an optimal market, LMP should incentivise investment in low carbon dispatchable generation where it is most required (locations with the highest prices). However, LMP introduces new risks for investors over the certainty of revenue as this will be significantly impacted by when and where network is upgraded. Mechanisms could be implemented alongside LMP to incentivise investment where it is most required while reducing risk for investors e.g. adding a locational element to the Capacity Market. This could be implemented without LMP, but with reduced dispatch efficiency.

Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, Threats

Table 10: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and Threats for a secure and flexible net zero energy system.

Strengths

Opportunities

  • More efficient dispatch signals from the wholesale market under LMP.
  • High renewable capacity and existing constraints would lead to favourable conditions for flexibility in Scotland under LMP.
  • Large wind capacity and pipeline in Scotland has led to HND to upgrade network in Scotland.
  • Under LMP, Scotland would be among the most attractive locations for flexibility in GB.
  • Encouraging investment in flexibility would enable increased renewable penetration and improve security of supply.
  • LMP could provide efficient price signals highlighting locations which require network reinforcement.

Weaknesses

Threats

  • Loss of firm access rights makes areas behind a constraint (such as Scotland) less attractive for future investment for renewable generation.
  • In addition to renewable generators, this could provide a level of uncertainty for dispatchable generation.
  • Lack of a strategic plan for renewable generation and network build-out could weaken revenue certainty for dispatchable generation in Scotland.

Conclusions

Summary of findings

In this study we have reviewed the literature to understand the potential impacts of electricity market reform in Scotland. Based on the ambitions of the Scottish Government in their Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan, we have applied these impacts to explore how market reform and LMP could help further or risk these ambitions. The key conclusions of this assessment are summarised in Table 11.

Table 11: Key conclusions on the extent that LMP in electricity market reform could aid the Scottish Government’s ambitions in their Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan.

Ambition

Conclusions

Support the scale up of low-cost renewable energy

On its own, LMP would create new risks for renewable generators and increase the cost of capital of new developments.

  • Existing and continued constraints in Scotland mean that under LMP, greater price and volume risk would be placed on generators, as they lose their firm access rights. This would be exacerbated by any delays to network buildout.
  • Without support, the renewables pipeline in Scotland could be disrupted, impacting UK power system decarbonisation goals.

Adhere to the principles of a fair and just transition

LMP could provide Scottish consumers with some of the lowest wholesale prices in Europe.

  • Scottish consumers could benefit from the existing high renewable generation in Scotland, significantly reducing electricity bills.
  • However, the benefits would not be distributed evenly across the UK, with some customers (mostly in the south of England) seeing their bills slightly increase, unless some form of demand shielding occurs.
  • The relative benefit in wholesale prices compared to the rest of GB will decline to 2040. The largest benefit occurs when networks are most constrained. Considering the time it will take to implement LMP (4-8 years), modelled benefits may be overestimated.
  • To ensure the wider economic benefits of the energy transition are felt in Scotland, the continued buildout of renewables must be ensured.

Support accelerated decarbonisation

LMP could reduce the cost of electrification and incentivise power intensive industry and H2 production to locate in Scotland.

  • It is unlikely that LMP would significantly increase the pace of power sector decarbonisation (and could slow it down if implementation leads to an investment hiatus).
  • The potential benefit of LMP would be to reduce the cost associated with decarbonisation.
  • Lower wholesale prices would reduce the cost of electrifying demand and attracting new industry and green hydrogen production to Scotland.
  • Other non-price factors still act as blockers to wider decarbonisation such as government policy, planning, access to skills etc.
  • While lower wholesale prices would benefit the electrification of heat and transport, these sectors still face the barriers of high upfront costs for consumers. Support in these areas would also be needed.

Enable a secure and flexible net zero energy system

LMP is the most effective reform to provide locational signals for flexibility.

  • LMP could encourage the efficient location and operation of energy storage and dispatchable generation to help reduce investment for security of supply.
  • However, strategic oversight to reinforce the network is essential to ensure that Scotland receives the network capacity it needs to maintain a thriving renewables industry.

Overall LMP provides theoretical benefits to consumers of electricity and flexibility in Scotland, reducing wholesale prices and improving dispatch signals. If executed optimally, LMP could reduce the whole system cost associated with decarbonisation. However, LMP only provides short-term market signals and removes firm access rights for generators. Therefore, LMP would be ineffective at providing the long-term investment signals for renewables, which could create risks for the industry in Scotland, nullifying the potential benefits. Nevertheless, if additional market reform, alongside LMP, could protect renewable investment in Scotland, the potential benefits for Scottish consumers of electricity are sufficient to explore such a set of reforms.

Future market arrangements

In this section, we will explore the arrangement in which LMP could be successfully implemented and two counterfactuals, business-as-usual (BAU) with incremental reform, and LMP without further support. This will illustrate how reform could deliver benefits for consumers while protecting renewable generators.

These have been created based on what we believe possible market arrangements could be. First, business-as-usual arrangement identifies the flaws of continuing as usual. We identify the key reforms that would be required if national pricing is maintained to create a market with more effective locational signals. Second, LMP without supporting measures is described to identify the risk to Scottish renewables this arrangement could have. Finally, we explore LMP with mitigating measures as a final arrangement that we believe has the most potential to be successful.

Arrangement 1: Business-as-usual with incremental reform

Firm access to the entire GB electricity market will see renewable generators continue to locate in Scotland. Revenues would be secured by CfDs (regardless of exacerbated constraints, but not national curtailment). Without additional reform, TNUoS charges would be the only locational price driver for investment in renewables and flexibility. Although, non-price factors such as planning and renewable resource would also influence the location of renewables. As such, flexibility would not have a significant incentive to locate near renewables or behind import constraints in centres of demand. Local constraint markets could go some way to provide such signals, however, not without risks of its own (complicated market arrangements and perverse interactions of constraint and wholesale markets). Therefore, without reform, a BAU electricity market will not be optimal to encourage efficient investment in generation, flexibility, or networks for power system decarbonisation.

For consumers, the entire country would pay the marginal price of electricity regardless of the local generation mix. Therefore, wholesale prices will remain uniform across GB and would not provide a signal for demand to relocate to take advantage of areas with surplus renewable generation. As such, Scottish demand sectors would not be able to benefit from the renewable resources present in the country.

As indicated by the current REMA consultation, existing BAU electricity market arrangements are not fit for net zero. Regardless of the introduction of LMP, the electricity market will require reforms to enable a decarbonised energy system. Any reforms will create uncertainty so maintaining confidence for investors and consumers will be essential in any next steps. A combination of alternative reforms could achieve some the LMP’s potential benefits. These could include reforms to TNUoS, CfDs, the Balancing Mechanism, as well as developing local constraint markets. These alternatives could see less disruption, as they would be evolutions of existing arrangements. However, they would be unlikely to fully replicate the benefits of a successfully implemented LMP market.

Arrangement 2: LMP without further renewables support

Under LMP, the loss of firm access rights to markets outside of immediate zones/nodes would greatly increase revenue risk to generators located behind export constraints (such as in Scotland). With the additional prospect of low wholesale prices, due to a surplus in renewable generation in Scotland, LMP would create a significant investment risk in Scotland. This could lead to some renewable generation re-locating to other parts of the UK, or investment leaving for other markets entirely. This would pose further risks to whole system decarbonisation, potentially leading to delays in renewable roll-out in the UK as supply chains move from Scotland to other areas. Likely increases in the cost of capital due to elevated risks for generators would also lead to reduced investment in renewables. This alone could wipe out the power system cost-benefit of introducing LMP.

Flexibility would be incentivised to relocate to Scotland under LMP, where volatile locational prices would provide operational profiles that could see flexibility generate the highest revenue across the UK. Furthermore, consumers would be set to benefit in Scotland. Given Scotland is already a net exporter of electricity, LMP would see a reduction in wholesale prices and hence a reduction in retail prices if passed through to consumers. Note that some consumer groups could be shielded from locational variations in wholesale prices.

Nevertheless, despite the potential benefits for consumers, the risk to the renewables industry in Scotland and the wider economic benefits that it brings means that LMP alone will be unable to deliver on the ambitions of the Scottish Government. Further reform would be needed to insulate renewable generators from the adverse effects of LMP on their investment case.

Arrangement 3: LMP with reformed support mechanisms to insulate renewables

LMP can provide strong incentives for the optimal location and dispatch of flexibility and demand as well as offering Scottish consumers the lowest wholesale prices in the UK. The extent to which Scottish demand could benefit from lower wholesale prices will depend on several factors, including potential shielding of demand and long-term effects on the cost of electricity if cost of capital increases materialise. However, in Scotland it leaves an oversupplied generation market with limited case for further investment until the transmission network is reinforced. A thriving Scottish renewables sector is required to meet the UK Government’s target of a net zero power system by 2035. Therefore, it is vital that renewables continue to be developed in Scotland ahead of planned network capacity upgrades that enable generation to be transmitted to centres of demand across the UK. Should a support mechanism for investment in renewables be implemented on this basis alongside LMP then such electricity market reforms could deliver for all players in the power system: generators, flexibility, and consumers.

While it is out of the scope of this study to fully consider the design of such a support mechanism, it would likely take the form of a reformed CfD. Already, the current CfD mechanism completely insulates renewable generation from market price to de-risk investment. Under LMP, the further reform that would be required to de-risk renewables would be to insulate renewables from market volume. Essentially, this would protect renewables from the loss of firm access rights under LMP. An example of this reform could be moving to a deemed CfD, however other options should be considered.

The argument for such a reform is that renewable generation is inflexible, with no control over when and how much it generates. Given that vast additional renewable capacity is required to reach net zero, renewable energy should not be penalised based on these limitations. The result of this would put additional onus on the UK Government to consider the long-term system benefits when awarding CfDs based on current and future constraint forecasts and network upgrades. It would also likely increase the cost of CfDs for the UK Government. However, given the rapid pace of decarbonisation required to reach net zero, it could be argued that such additional risk and cost should sit with the UK Government rather than investors. This is because, overall, the mechanism should still provide whole system investment and operational savings, which will be passed down to consumers via electricity bills.

Conclusions

The authors conclusions are based on the work presented in this report. They form an assessment of the opportunities and threats that LMP and wider electricity market reform poses to the Scottish Government’s ambitions as per their Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan. Based on the findings of this study, the Scottish Government should consider supporting the implementation of LMP alongside a GB-wide strategic plan for renewable and network investment through further electricity market reform. The following conclusions are in order of importance and are sequential:

  • Scotland must prioritise and coordinate a strategic plan for renewable generation and network reinforcement with the UK Government.
  • Alone, LMP poses a significant risk for renewable development in Scotland, threatening the green economy in Scotland, the wider economic benefits it may bring, and a net zero power system by 2035.
  • Long-term locational signals to strategically locate investment of renewables are essential to achieve a cost-efficient net zero power system by 2035.
  • Due to its existing renewable pipeline, renewable resources, and existing industry, Scotland should be prioritised as a location for renewable investment and network reinforcement.
  • Introducing support mechanisms, such as a reformed CfD, which protects against revenue and volume risk in the wholesale market, is essential to the successful implementation of LMP to maintain investor confidence in Scottish renewables.
  • Alternatively, improved TNUoS charges, with long-term locational signals, could provide similar locational investment signals in a national market, however without creating the efficient dispatch signals LMP could.
  • The Scottish Government has the opportunity to work with the UK Government to implement reform, as the responsibility for these mechanisms lie with the UK Government.
  • LMP would provide the clearest dispatch signal for flexibility, delivering efficient investment and operation of flexibility.
  • To maximise renewable penetration, net zero will require clear dispatch signals for flexibility to improve siting and operation. These signals under LMP would incentivise the relocation of flexibility to Scotland.
  • If implemented effectively, these features of LMP should reduce the whole system investment and operational cost associated with decarbonisation, benefiting consumers.
  • Should consumers be exposed to locational prices, Scottish consumers would benefit directly from reduced wholesale prices because of existing renewable generation in Scotland. This would send a clear signal to site new demand in Scotland.
  • A zonal market would enable most of the system benefits of LMP, without the complexity and disruption of implementing a nodal market.
  • However, should LMP be deemed too disruptive, local constraint markets could serve as an alternative dispatch signal for flexibility. However, this is unlikely to be able to replicate the granular benefits of LMP and could result in complex market arrangements with consequences that should be explored in detail before it is recommended as a complete solution to locational dispatch signals.
  • The Scottish Government should account for the potential benefits of LMP for consumers being greater the earlier it is introduced.
  • Scottish consumers stand to benefit more from LMP the earlier it is introduced ahead of planned network reinforcement by 2035 and onwards.
  • While the priority must be to have a clear and well communicated plan for the implementation of market reform, the earlier LMP could be implemented, the greater the benefits to Scottish consumers.
  • The first step would need to be the development of reformed support mechanisms and the grandfathering of existing support mechanisms which protect both existing and developing renewable generation.
  • If alternative market reforms are pursued, a similar approach to prioritising confidence in renewables should be adopted.
  • Locational market reform would need to be carefully implemented as it would inevitably create winners and losers.
  • While Scottish consumers could be a key winner of LMP, the Scottish Government would have to consider how the rest of GB may be impacted.
  • Support to protect the future Scottish renewables industry is essential to deliver net zero, while ensuring that the industry remains in Scotland and jobs are realised.
  • Future renewables support, also including the grandfathering of current arrangements, should be designed, communicated and implemented ahead of a transition to LMP.
  • Zonal pricing could help to remove the most extreme regional inequalities from LMP under a nodal market, reducing the risk of LMP to a just transition.

Next steps

Based on our conclusions, we suggest the Scottish Government takes the following next steps to fully explore whether LMP could be implemented with the appropriate support mechanisms to provide benefits to generation and demand across the whole system:

  • Work with the UK Government to develop a long-term strategic plan, such as the SSEP, to achieve a decarbonised power system by 2035 and net zero by 2050. This includes the planning of a cost-effective level of network infrastructure investment, renewables development, and short- and long-duration storage. This would improve the penetration of renewables, reduce constraints, and lead to whole system savings.
  • Fully explore the risks and opportunities of reforming CfDs to insulate renewables against price risk and volume risk, and the suitability of implementing such a support mechanism alongside LMP.
  • Develop wider support mechanisms to support the benefits of LMP in Scotland, such as new demand sectors, to ensure that Scotland can take full advantage of electricity market reform.
  • LMP will take 4-8 years to implement if selected, Scotland should support alternative reforms in the interim to encourage the early development of locational benefits ahead of LMP (e.g. extending the NGESO Local Constraint Market in Scotland).

Scotland has a significant opportunity to benefit from a decarbonised power system by taking advantage of its renewable resources and distributing those benefits to consumers in a decarbonised economy. Proposed changes to wholesale electricity markets could improve system-wide efficiency and offer cheaper electricity in Scotland. However, it could increase risk associated with investment in Scottish renewables, increasing costs. The Scottish Government needs to engage carefully with the electricity market reform process to ensure that prospective benefits are realised, and that potential disbenefits are avoided or mitigated.

References

AFRY (2023) Review of electricity market design in Great Britain. Available at: https://afry.com/sites/default/files/2023-12/gb_electricitymarketdesign_phase2_publicsummaryreport_v500.pdf

Aurora (2023) Locational marginal pricing in Great Britain. Available at: https://auroraer.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Locational-Marginal-Pricing-GB-Aurora-Public-Report.pdf

Baringa (2023) Net Zero Market Reform – Phase 4. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/276841/download

Carbon Tracker (2023) Gone with the Wind? Grid congestion and wind integration in GB. Available at: https://carbontracker.org/reports/gone-with-the-wind/

Citizens Advice (2023) It’s all about location: Will changing the way we price electricity deliver for consumers?. Available at: https://assets.ctfassets.net/mfz4nbgura3g/2esOmp5ZjvBnxChIV7sjd4/8d1a042a8c1e406b189a2491144b9e01/For_20publication_20-_20It_s_20all_20about_20location.pdf

ClimateXChange (2022) Expanding Scottish energy data – heat. Available at: https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/media/5157/cxc-expanding-scottish-energy-data-heat-february-22.pdf

Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy (2021) Hydrogen Production Costs 2021. Available at: https://assets.publishing.service.gov.uk/media/611b710e8fa8f53dc994e59d/Hydrogen_Production_Costs_2021.pdf

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023a) Energy and emissions projections: 2022 to 2040. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/energy-and-emissions-projections-2022-to-2040

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023b) Electricity generation costs 2023. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/electricity-generation-costs-2023

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023c) Average annual domestic electricity bills by countries in the United Kingdom. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistical-data-sets/annual-domestic-energy-price-statistics

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023d) Regional Statistics 2009-2022: Standard Load Factors. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/regional-renewable-statistics

Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (2023e) ECUK 2023: Primary energy consumption data tables. Available at: https://www.gov.uk/government/statistics/energy-consumption-in-the-uk-2023

Element Energy (an ERM Company) (2021) Decarbonising the Scottish Transport Sector. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/media/50354/decarbonising-the-scottish-transport-sector-summary-report-september-2021.pdf

Element Energy (an ERM Company) (2022) TCO and tax scenarios for passenger cars in the UK.

Energy UK (2023) Energy UK high-level views on Locational Marginal Pricing. Available at: https://www.energy-uk.org.uk/publications/energy-uk-high-level-views-on-locational-marginal-pricing/

ES Catapult (2021) Introducing nodal pricing to the GB power market to drive innovation for consumers’ benefit: Why now and how? Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/locational-energy-pricing-in-the-gb-power-market/

ES Catapult (2021) Locational Energy Pricing in the GB Power Market. Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/locational-energy-pricing-in-the-gb-power-market/

ES Catapult (2022) Informing the REMA debate. International Learnings on Investment Support for Clean Electricity. Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/rema-international-learnings-on-investment-support-for-clean-electricity/

ES Catapult (2022) Location, Location, Location. Reforming wholesale electricity markets to meet Net-Zero. Available at: https://es.catapult.org.uk/report/location-location-location-reforming-wholesale-electricity-markets-to-meet-net-zero/

Fraser of Allander Institute (2023) The Economic Impact of Scotland’s Renewable Energy Sector – 2023 Update. Available at: https://fraserofallander.org/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/FINAL-The-Economic-Impact-of-Scotlands-Renewable-Energy-Sector-1.pdf

Frontier Economics (2022) Locational marginal pricing – Implications for cost of capital. Available at: https://www.frontier-economics.com/uk/en/news-and-insights/news/news-article-i20310-locational-marginal-pricing-implications-for-the-cost-of-capital/#

Frontier Economics (2023) The benefits of locational marginal pricing in the GB electricity system – A review of FTI’s assessment of the benefits. Available at: https://www.frontier-economics.com/uk/en/news-and-insights/news/news-article-i20234-locational-marginal-pricing-assessing-the-benefits/

FTI Consulting (2023) Locational pricing assessment in GB: Final modelling results. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/2023-10/Key%20findings%20from%20FTI%20Consulting%20presentation%20June%202023%20.pdf

FTI Consulting (2022) Net Zero Market Reform: Phase 3. Assessment of market design options. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/258876/download

Gill et al. (2023) Exploring market change in the GB electricity system: the potential impact of Locational Marginal Pricing. Available at: https://pureportal.strath.ac.uk/en/publications/exploring-market-change-in-the-gb-electricity-system-the-potentia-2

Gill, S. (2023) Review of Electricity Market Arrangements: A Vision for Scotland. Available at: https://www.scottishfuturestrust.org.uk/publications/documents/sft-rema-report-a-vision-for-scotland-november-2023

H2Green Steel (2023) Questions and answers about our establishment in Boden. Available at: https://www.h2greensteel.com/questions-and-answers-about-our-establishment-in-boden#:~:text=We%20chose%20to%20locate%20our,the%20region%20%E2%80%93%20an%20ideal%20environment

ICCT (2023) A total cost of ownership comparison of truck decarbonisation pathways in Europe. Available at: https://theicct.org/publication/total-cost-ownership-trucks-europe-nov23/

MacIver et al. (2023) Exploring market change in the GB electricity system: the potential impact of Locational Marginal Pricing – stakeholder insight report. Available at: https://pureportal.strath.ac.uk/en/publications/exploring-market-change-in-the-gb-electricity-system-the-potentia

McQueen et al. (2021) A review of direct air capture (DAC): scaling up commercial technologies and innovating for the future. Available at: https://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/2516-1083/abf1ce/pdf

National Grid (2023) We’re engaging on our early pans to transform our network for net zero. Available at: https://www.nationalgrid.com/electricity-transmission/were-engaging-our-early-plans-transform-our-network-net-zero

National Grid ESO (2022a) Net Zero Market Reform: Phase 3 Assessment and Conclusions. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/258871/download

National Grid ESO (2022b) Network Options Assessment 2021/22 Refresh. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/262981/download

National Grid ESO (2023a) Monthly Balancing Services Summary. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/data-portal/mbss

National Grid ESO (2023b) Markets Roadmap. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/278306/download

National Grid ESO (2023c) Future Energy Scenarios 2023 Data Workbook. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/future-energy/future-energy-scenarios-fes

National Grid ESO (2023d) NZMR Phase 4 Webinar Q&A. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/document/283516/download

National Grid ESO (2023e) Monthly Balancing Services Summary (MBSS) Mar-2023. Available at: https://www.nationalgrideso.com/data-portal/mbss

OEUK (2022) Workforce Insight 2022+. Available at: https://oeuk.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/OEUK-Workforce-Insight-2022.pdf

Office for Budget Responsibility (2024) Economic and fiscal outlook – March 2024. Available at: https://obr.uk/efo/economic-and-fiscal-outlook-march-2024/

Office for National Statistics (2024) Consumer price inflation time series (MM23). Available at: https://www.ons.gov.uk/economy/inflationandpriceindices/timeseries/d7bt/mm23

Offshore Wind Scotland (2023) Offshore Wind Market in Scotland. Available at: https://www.offshorewindscotland.org.uk/the-offshore-wind-market-in-scotland/

Ofgem (2014) Electricity Interconnectors factsheet. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/docs/2014/05/electricity_interconnectors_factsheet.pdf

Ofgem (2023) Assessment of Locational Wholesale Pricing for GB. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/2023-10/Ofgem%20Report%20-%20Assessment%20of%20Locational%20Pricing%20in%20GB%20%28final%29.pdf

Ofgem (2024) Breakdown of an electricity bill. Available at: https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/energy-data-and-research/data-portal/all-available-charts?keyword=bills&fuel_type=1606&sort=relevance

Pollitt, M. (2023) Locational Marginal Prices (LMPs) for Electricity in Europe? The Untold Story. Available at: https://www.eprg.group.cam.ac.uk/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/text-2318-revised-180723.pdf

Rai et al. (2021) Financing costs and barriers to entry in Australia’s electricity market. Available at: https://www.researchgate.net/publication/350358213_Financing_costs_and_barriers_to_entry_in_Australia’s_electricity_market

Regen (2023a) Call for evidence on introducing non-price factors into the Contracts for Difference scheme. Available at: https://www.regen.co.uk/wp-content/uploads/CfE-non-price-factors-CfD-Regen-response.pdf

Regen (2023b) Improving locational signals in the GB electricity markets. Available at: https://www.regen.co.uk/insight-paper-improving-locational-signals-in-the-gb-electricity-market/

Scottish Government (2021) Heat in Buildings Strategy. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/heat-buildings-strategy-achieving-net-zero-emissions-scotlands-buildings/documents/

Scottish Government (2022) Hydrogen Action Plan. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/hydrogen-action-plan/

Scottish Government (2023a) Scottish Energy Statistics HubEnergy Statistics for Scotland – Q2 2023. Available at: https://scotland.shinyapps.io/sg-scottish-energy-statistics/?Section=RenLowCarbon&Subsection=RenElec&Chart=RenElecPipeline https://www.gov.scot/publications/energy-statistics-for-scotland-q2-2023/pages/renewable-electricity-capacity/

Scottish Government (2023b) Just Transition: Grangemouth. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/binaries/content/documents/govscot/publications/strategy-plan/2023/09/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster/documents/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster/govscot%3Adocument/discussion-paper-transition-grangemouth-industrial-cluster.pdf

Scottish Government (2023c) Draft Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan. Available at: https://www.gov.scot/publications/draft-energy-strategy-transition-plan/documents/

The Crown Estate (2023) The Crown Estate Offshore Wind Leasing Round 4 Selected Projects. Available at: https://www.thecrownestate.co.uk/media/3721/the-crown-estate-offshore-wind-leasing-round-4-selected-projects.pdf

Transport Scotland (2020) National Transport Strategy 2. Available at: https://www.transport.gov.scot/publication/national-transport-strategy-2/

© The University of Edinburgh, 2024
Prepared by Environmental Resources Management Ltd.on behalf of ClimateXChange, The University of Edinburgh. All rights reserved.

While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.

  1. Marginal pricing means that one price, the price set by the most expensive selected electricity generation offer to meet demand is received by every successful participant in the electricity generation auction.


  2. National Grid suggest that to meet the Government’s target of 50GW of offshore wind by 2030, more than five times the amount of transmission infrastructure must be delivered in the next seven years, than has been built in the past 30 years.


  3. Historical CPI inflation data from ONS (2024), and 2024 forecast from OBR (2024).


  4. No whole system cost estimate provided, only relative changes.


  5. 6.8GW and 3.7GW increase in battery capacity by 2035 in N and S Scotland respectively, compared to 13GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts.


  6. -1.2GW and -1.4GW reduction of solar capacity by 2035 in N and S Scotland respectively, compared to 58GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts.


  7. -1.5GW and -4.3GW reduction in offshore wind capacity by 2035 in N and S Scotland respectively, compared to 76GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts.


  8. 6.5GW increase in onshore wind capacity by 2035 in N Scotland, compared to 31GW total GB capacity. FTI Consulting (2023) LtW NOA7 Scenario. Values estimated from report charts.


  9. The boundaries for Scotland and Southern Scotland in the models are generally defined by the B4 and B6 transmission constraints. The B4 constraint separates the transmission network between the SP Transmission and SSEN Transmission interface, from the Firth of Tay in the east to the north of the Isle of Arran in the West. The B6 boundary runs roughly along the border between Scotland and England, on the SP Transmission and NG Electricity Transmission interface.


  10. Up to 2035.


  11. Beyond 2035.


  12. A decrease in the average wholesale price in the most expensive zone by 2040 due to system savings under LMP.